Skip to main content

Full text of "An account of the natives of the Tonga Islands in the South Pacific Ocean : with an original grammar and vocabulary of their language"

See other formats 


Google 


This  is  a  digital  copy  of  a  book  lhal  w;ls  preserved  for  general  ions  on  library  shelves  before  il  was  carefully  scanned  by  Google  as  pari  of  a  project 

to  make  the  world's  books  discoverable  online. 

Il  has  survived  long  enough  for  the  copyright  to  expire  and  the  book  to  enter  the  public  domain.  A  public  domain  book  is  one  thai  was  never  subject 

to  copy  right  or  whose  legal  copyright  term  has  expired.  Whether  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  may  vary  country  to  country.  Public  domain  books 

are  our  gateways  to  the  past,  representing  a  wealth  of  history,  culture  and  knowledge  that's  often  dillicull  lo  discover. 

Marks,  notations  and  other  marginalia  present  in  the  original  volume  will  appear  in  this  file  -  a  reminder  of  this  book's  long  journey  from  the 

publisher  lo  a  library  and  linally  lo  you. 

Usage  guidelines 

Google  is  proud  lo  partner  with  libraries  lo  digili/e  public  domain  materials  and  make  them  widely  accessible.  Public  domain  books  belong  to  the 
public  and  we  are  merely  their  custodians.  Nevertheless,  this  work  is  expensive,  so  in  order  lo  keep  providing  this  resource,  we  have  taken  steps  to 
prevent  abuse  by  commercial  panics,  including  placing  Icchnical  restrictions  on  automated  querying. 
We  also  ask  that  you: 

+  Make  n  on -commercial  use  of  the  files  We  designed  Google  Book  Search  for  use  by  individuals,  and  we  request  thai  you  use  these  files  for 
personal,  non -commercial  purposes. 

+  Refrain  from  automated  querying  Do  not  send  automated  queries  of  any  sort  lo  Google's  system:  If  you  are  conducting  research  on  machine 
translation,  optical  character  recognition  or  other  areas  where  access  to  a  large  amount  of  text  is  helpful,  please  contact  us.  We  encourage  the 
use  of  public  domain  materials  for  these  purposes  and  may  be  able  to  help. 

+  Maintain  attribution  The  Google  "watermark"  you  see  on  each  lile  is  essential  for  informing  people  about  this  project  and  helping  them  find 
additional  materials  through  Google  Book  Search.  Please  do  not  remove  it. 

+  Keep  it  legal  Whatever  your  use.  remember  that  you  are  responsible  for  ensuring  that  what  you  are  doing  is  legal.  Do  not  assume  that  just 
because  we  believe  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  the  United  States,  that  the  work  is  also  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  other 

countries.  Whether  a  book  is  slill  in  copyright  varies  from  country  lo  country,  and  we  can'l  offer  guidance  on  whether  any  specific  use  of 
any  specific  book  is  allowed.  Please  do  not  assume  that  a  book's  appearance  in  Google  Book  Search  means  it  can  be  used  in  any  manner 
anywhere  in  the  world.  Copyright  infringement  liability  can  be  quite  severe. 

About  Google  Book  Search 

Google's  mission  is  to  organize  the  world's  information  and  to  make  it  universally  accessible  and  useful.  Google  Book  Search  helps  readers 
discover  the  world's  books  while  helping  authors  and  publishers  reach  new  audiences.  You  can  search  through  I  lie  lull  lexl  of  1 1  us  book  on  I  lie  web 
al|_-.:. :.-.-::  /  /  books  .  qooqle  .  com/| 


\  . 


■ 


AN  ACCOUNT 

OF 

THE   NATIVES 

or  THE 

TONGA    ISLANDS, 

IN  THE  SOUTH  PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

*ITH 

AN  ORIGINAL  GRAMMAR  AND  VOCABULARY 

or 

THEIR  LANGUAGE. 

COMPILE*  AMD  ABBAVGKD  WHOM  THE  EXTENSIVE  COMMUNICATIONS  OP 

MR.    WILLIAM    MARINER, 

SEVERAL  YEARS  RESIDENT  IN  THOSE  ISLANDS. 


s 


BY  JOHN  MARTIN,  M.  D. 


••  Hm  savage*  of  America  inspire  less  interest  ....  since  celebrated  navigators  hare 

-  BiaeV  known  to  as  the  inhabitants  of  the  islands  of  tlie  South  Sea  ....  The  state  of 
••  half-civilisation  in  which  those  islanders  are  found  gives  a  peculiar  charm  to  the 

-  eWscription  of  their  manners ....  Such  pictures,  no  doubt,  have  more  attraction  than 
which  poartray  the  solemn  gravity  of  the  inhabitant  of  the  banks  of  tl.e 

or  the  Mar  anon."  Rrtfact  to  HumMdtU  Ptrtmat  Narrastv*. 


IK  TWO  VOLUMES. 

VOL.  II. 


v 


y  LONDON: 

PRINTED  FOR  THE  AUTHOR, 
AMD  SOLD  BY  JOHN  MURRAY,  ALBEMARLE- STREET, 


1817. 


T.  DatiMB,  Lombard-rtrect, 
Whitefiriars,  London. 


CHAP.  XV. 

Thaking  annihilates  the  divine  chiefdom  of  Tooi tonga,  and 
the  ceremony  of  inacki— Mr.  Mariner's  adopted  mother' 
depart!  for  Hapai— The  stratagem  used  to  prevent  her 
female  attendants  from  accompanying  her — Spirited 
apeech  of  T61o  on  this  occasion — All  communication 
with  the  Hapai  islands  shut  up— The  king's  extraor- 
dinary attention  to  the  cultivation  and  defence  of  the 
country — Interesting  anecdote  respecting  two  chieft, 
Hila  A' pi  A 'pi  and  T6I0— Attempt  from  the  people  rf 
Hapai— Mr.  Mariner  discovers  an  European  vessel  whilst 
on  a  fishing  excursion :  his  men  refusing  to  take  him  on 
board,  he  wounds  one  mortally,  and  threatens  the  others, 
upon  which  they  paddle  towards  the  ship— Anecdote  of 
the  wounded  man — Mr.  Mariner's  arrival  on  board,  and 
reception  from  the  captain— The  king  visits  him  in  the 
atrip:  his  behaviour  on  board :  his  earnest  wish  to  go  to 
England— Mr.  Mariner  sends  on  shore  for  the  journal  of 
the  Port  au  Prince,  and  procures  the  escape  of  two  of 
Us  countrymen— Further  transactions  on  board-— He 
a  final  leave  of  the  king— The  ship  sails  for  the 


IIT  consequence  of  Tooitonga's  deatl*, 
gnat  obtfacle  to  shotting  up  the  commun 
1km  Witfe*  Hspai  was,  for  a  time  at  least, 

▼OI»  II.  B 


-•/■*. 


2  NEW    REGULATIONS, 

moved;  but  that  it  might  be  so  more  com- 
pletely, the  king  came  to  a  determination  of 
having  no  more  Tooitongas,  and  thus  to  put 
a  stop  for  ever  to  the  ceremony  of  inachi ;  for 
he  conceived  that  there  was  very  little  public 
utility  in  what  was  supposed  to  be  the  divine 
authority  of  Tooi tonga';  but  that  it  was,  on  the 
contrary,  a  great  and  useless  expense  to  the 
people.  This  measure,  as  may  be  imagined, 
4id  not  prove  very  objectionable  to  the  wishes 
of  the  multitude,  as  it  relieved  them  from  the 
inachi,  a  very  heavy  tax ;  and,  in  times  of 
scarcity,  of  course  extremely  oppressive.  In 
regard  to  the  religions  objections  which  one 
might  suppose  would  be  started  against  the  en- 
deavour to  set  aside  an  institution  so  ancient, 
so  venerable,  and  so  sacred,  as  that  of  Tooi- 
tonga's  divine  authority,— it  must  be  noticed 
that  the  island  of  Tonga  had,  for  many  years, 
been  deprived  of  the  power,  presence,  and  in- 
fluence of  Tooitonga,  owing  to  its  political  si- 
tuation ;  and,  notwithstanding,  appeared  in 
the  eyes  of  Finow,  and  of  all  his  chiefs,  war- 
riors, and  subjects,  to  be  not  less  favoured 
with  the  bounties  of  heaven  and  of  nature 
than  the  other  island*,  excepting  the  mischief 
and  detraction  which  arpaa  fipu  human  pas- 
«ion  fuu|  disUtfkaac4#:  .aj»d  tf  Tfliif*  could 


NEW  REGULATIONS.  3 

exist  without  this  divine  chief,  why  not  Va- 
vaoo, or  any  other  island  ?  ITiis  strong  argu- 
ment growing  still  stronger,  upon  a  little  re- 
flection, brought  the  chiefs,  matabooles, '  &nd 
older  members  of  society,  to  the  resolution, 
that  Tooitonga  was  of  no  use  at  all ;  and  the 
people  themselves,  ever  willing  to  fall  into 
measures  that  greatly  promote  their  interest, 
notwithstanding  a  few  religious  scruples,  very 
soon  came  to  be  of  the  same  opinion  too. 

As  soon  as  Finow  had  come  to  this  deter- 
mination, and  to  that  of  shutting  up  all  com- 
munication nith  the  Hapai  people,  it  became 
necessary  to  acquaint  Tongamana,  at  his  next 
arrival,  with  this  new  regulation,  and  to  forbid 
him  ever  to  return  to  Vavaoo  again.  In  the 
mean  time,  however,  as  Finow  had  promised 
Tooi  Bolotoo  that  his  daughter  (Mr.  Mari- 
ner's adopted  mother)  should  be  allowed  to 
proceed  to  him  at  the  Hapais,  she  was  ordered 
to  get  herself  and  attendants  ready  to  accom- 
pany Tongamana  on  his  way  back.  Now  it 
happened  this  person  had  a  great  number  of 
fanale  attendants,  many  of  whom  were  some  of 
die  handsomest  women  at  Vavaoo ;  and,  as  the 
ktfe  granted  to  her  to  depart  was  equally  a 
licence  for  the  departure  of  her  attendants,  Fi- 

m  I 

liecaltie  apprehensive  that  the  alienation  of 

b2 


4        MA'FI    HA'AJB   ANfe    HBR   ATTENDANTS. 

so  many  fine  women  from  the  country  would 
occasion  considerable  discontent  among  bis 
young  men,  and  would  perhaps  tempt  some  of 
them  to  take  the  same  step.  He  sent,  how* 
ever,  for  Mafi  Habe,  and  told  her*  that,  with, 
her  leave,  he  would  contrive  some  means  to 
keep  back  her  women,  whose  departure  might 
occasion  so  much  disturbance:  in  this  inten- 
tion she  perfectly  coincided,  as  she  should 
have  little  use  for  them  hereafter,  in  the  re- 

• 

tired  life  she  meant  to  lead  with  her  father, — 
two  favourite  attendants,  however,  excepted, 
whom  she  begged  to  take  with  her.  Matters 
being  so  far  agreed  on,  Finow,  to  avoid  the 
appearance  of  injustice  on  his  part,  gave  Mr. 
Mariner  instructions  how  to  act,  with  a  view 
to  bring  about  his  object,  as  if  it  were  a 
thought  and  impulse  of  his  own.  Accord- 
ingly, when  Tonga-m  ana's  canoe  was  ready 
to  depart,  and  every  one  in  it,  save  Mafi  H&be 
and  her  attendants,  she  was  rarried  on  board, 
and  her  two  favourite  attendants  immediately 
followed :  at  this  moment,  when  the  rest  of 
the  women  were  about  to  proceed  into  the 
canoe,  Mr.  Mariner,  who  had  purposely  sta- 
tioned himself  close  at  hand  with  his  musket, 
seized  hold  of  the  foremost,  and  threw  her  into 
the  water,  .and  forbad  the  rest  to  follow,  at  the 


SPIRITED  SPEECH   OF  TALO.  & 

peril  of  being  shot.  He  then  called  out  to  ft- 
now's  attendants,  who  were  purposely  seated 
on  the  beach,  to  come  to  his  assistance,  pre- 
tending to  express  his  wonder  at  their  folly,  in 
permitting  those  women  to  leave  (hem,  for 
whose  protection  they  had  often  hazarded  their 
lives  in  battle:  upon  this  (as  had  been  pre- 
viously concerted)  they  ran  forward,  and  effec- 
tually prevented  any  of  them  from  departing. 
At  this  moment,  while  their  lamentations  rent 
the  air,  Finow  came  down  to  the  beach ;  and 
enquiring  the  cause  of  this-  disturbance,  they 
told  him  that  Togi  (Mr.  Mariner)  had  used 
violent  measures  to  prevent  their  accompany- 
ing their  beloved  mistress,  and  that  the  young 
chiefs  had  cruelly  assisted  him.  One  of  these 
chieft  (Talo)  then  addressed  Finow : — "  We 
"  have  all  agreed  to  lose  our  lives  rather  than 
"  suffer  these  women,  for  whom  we  have  so 
"  often  fought,  to  take  leave  of  us  for  ever. 
"  There  is  good  reason  to  suppose  that  we 
"  shall  soon  be  invaded  by  the  people  of  Ha- 
u  pai :  and  are  we  to  suffer  some  of  the  finest  of 
"  oar  women  to  go  over  to  the  men  who  will 
"  tfcbrtly  become  our  enemies  >  Those  wo- 
44  men,  the  sight  and  recollection  of  whom 
u  have  so  often  cheered  our  hearts. in  the  time 
"of  dinger,  and  enabled  us  to  meet  the 


u 

4C 


Q-  DEPARTURE   O?   MfLflfK  ^1'fiE. 

"  tpravest  and  fiercest  enemies,  and  to  put  them 
4f  to  the  rout  ?  If  our  women  are  to  be  sent 
"  away,  in  the  name  of  the  gods,  send  away 
"  also  the  guns,  the  powder,  and  all  our  spears, 
c^  pur  clubs,  our  bows  and  arrows,  apd  every 
"  -weapon  of  defence :  with  the  departure  of  the 

women  our  wish  to  live  departs  also,   for 

then  we  shall  have  nothing  left  worth  pro* 
"  tecting,  and,  having  no  motive  to  defend  our- 
'/  selves,  it  matters  little  how  we  die." 

Finow  upon  this  was  obliged  to  explain  to 
Tongamana  the  necessity  of  yielding  to  the 
sentiments  of  these  young  chiefs,  to  prevent 
the  discontent  and  disturbance  which  might 
otherwise  take  place.  The  canoe  was  now  or* 
dered  to  leave  Vavaoo  for  the  last  time,  and 
never  more  to  return,  for  if  she  or  any  other 
panoe  should  again  make  her  appearance  from 
JJapai,  her  approach  would  be  considered  hos- 
tile, and  proper  measures  would  accordingly 
\&  adopted.  At  this  moment,  the  women  on 
th«  beach  earnestly  petitioned  Finow  to  be 
allowed  to  take  a  last  farewell  of  their  dear  and 
gloved  mistress,  which  on  being  agreed  to, 
nearly  two  hours  were  taken  up  in  this  affecting 
**nj&* 

JFrom  this  time  Finow,  devoted  his  attention 
U*,thQ  cultivation  of  tb$  i£la*d;  fund  the  e$er- 


AHEC00ZB  OF  BJtLA   AfPI  A'M.  7 

tions  of  this  truly  patriotic  chief  were  00  fer 
successful  that  the  country  soon  began  to  pro* 
raise  the  appearance  of  a  far  more  beautiful 
and  cultivated  state  than  ever :  nor  did  he  i* 
the  mean  time  neglect  those  things  which  wett 
necessary  for  the  better  defence  of  the  place, 
and  accordingly  the  fortress- underwent  fire* 
qoent  examination  and  improvements. 

In  the  midst  of  these  occupations,  however,  a 
circumstance  happened  which  might  have  been 
the  cause  of  much  civil  disturbance.  It  is  well 
worth  relating,  as  it  affords  an  admirable  cha* 
meter  of  one  of  the  personages  concerned,  and 
shews  a  principle  of  honour  and  generosity  of 
mind,  which  must  afford  the  highest  pleasure 
to  thooc  who  love  to  hear  of  acts  worthy  the 
character  of  human  nature.  On  one  of  the 
days  of  the  ceremony  known  by  the  name  of 
Mr  Am*,  which  is  celebrated  on  the  marly, 
with  wrestling,  boxing,  &c,  a  young  chief,  of 
name  of  Talo,  entered  into  a  wrestling- 
with  Hala  Api  Api  (the  young  chief  who, 

may  be  recollected,  was  mentioned  on  the 
of  Toobo  Neuha's  assassination).    It 
siMdd  •  however  be  noticed,  that  a  few  days 


•  An  offering  to  the  god  of  weather,  beginning  at  the 
w&nf  thi  jams  are  ftill  grown,  and  b  performed  every 
dsy  mt  eighty  days*    ... 


9  ANECDOTE  OF   BAttiA   a'«   A>I. 

before,  these  two  had  held  a  debate  upon  tome 
subject  or  another,  in  which  neither  could  con- 
vince the  other.  It  is  usual  on  such  an  occasion, 
to  prevent  all  future  fruitless  argument  upon 
*he  subject,  to  settle  the  affair  by  wrestling : 
not  that  this  mode  is  considered  in  the  light  of 
a  knock-down  argument, .  perfectly  Convincing 
in  its  nature,  but  it  is  the  custom  for  those 
who  hold  a'firuitless  contention  in  argument,  to 
end  the  affair  the  next  opportunity,  by  a  con- 
tention in  physical  strength,  after  which  the 
one  who  is  beaten  seldom  presumes  to  intrude 
his  opinion  again  on  the  other,  at  least  not 
upon  the  same  subject.  .  Hal  a  Api  A  pi  there- 
fore challenged  Talo  on  the  spot.  For  a  long 
time  the  contest  was  doubtful ;  both  well  made, 
both  men  of  great  strength  :  at  length,  how- 
ever, it  was  the  fate  of  Talo  to  fall,  and  thus 
die  contest  ended.  The  fallen  chief,  chagrined 
it  this  event,  could  not  allow,  in  his  own  mind, 
that  his  antagonist  had  overcome  him  by  su- 
perior strength,  but  rather  owing  to  an  acci- 
dental slip  of  his  own  foot;  and  consequently 
resolved  to  enter  the  lists  with  him  again  at 
some  future  and  favourable  opportunity.  This 
occasion  of  the  ceremony  of  tow  tow  presenting 
itself,  Talo  left  his  companions  and  seated 
himself  immediately  opposite  Hala  Api  Api ; 


ANBCDOTB   OF   HA  LA    A'PI   API.  9 

a  conduct  which  plainly  indicated  his  wish  that 
the  latter  in  particular  should  engage  with 
him :  a  conduct,  too,  which,  though  sometimes 
adopted,  is  generally  considered  indicative  of  a 
quarrelsome  disposition,  because  the  challenge 
ought  not  to  be  made  to  one  in  particular,  but  to 
any  individual  among  those  of  a  different  place 
or  party  who  chooses  to  accept  it.  As  soon  as 
Hala  Api  Api  and  his  friends  perceived  this, 
it  was  agreed  among  them  that  he  alone  should 
oppose  him.  In  a  short  time  Talo  arose  and 
advanced;  Hala  Api  Api  immediately  closed 
with  him  and  threw  him,  with  a  severe  fall. 
At  this  moment  the  shouts  of  the  people  so  ex- 
asperated  Talo,  (for  he  had  made  sure  in  his 
own  mind  of  gaining  a  victory)  that,  on  the 
impulse  of  passion,  he  struck  his  antagonist, 
whilst  rising  off  him,  a  violent  blow  in  the 
tee ;  .on  which  Hala  Api  Api  threw  himself  in 
a  posture  of  defence,  and  demanded  if  he  wished 
to  box  with  him :  Talo,  without  returning  art 
answer,  snatched  a  tocco  tocco*,  and  would 
evidently  have  run  him  through  the  body  if  he 
had  not  been  withheld.  Hala  Api  Api,  with 
a  aobleness  of  spirit  worthy  of  admiratidn, 
to  take ,  no  notice  of  this,  but  smiling 


>*  A  ^psr  ibont  fire  ftet  lrag,  uted  by  ttansta  wsBisg 
*kk,b»t  MMota  cmpfojtd  in  btttle. 


10  AJICCDOTE  OV    HA 'LA    AHPI   API. 

returned  to  his  seat  amid  the  acclamations  of 
the  whole  assembly.  All  applauded  his  great* 
nes*  of  soul,  as  conspicuous  now  as  on  other 
occasions  ;4  Finow  in  particular  shewed  signs  of 
much  satisfaction,  and  in  the'  evening,  when  he 
ww  drinking  cava  with  the  matabooles*  whilst 
this  noble  chief  had  the  honour  to  wait  on  them, 
the  king  addressed  himself  to  him,  returning 
thanks  for  the  presence  of  mind  which  he  had 
proved,  and  his  coolness  of  temper;  which 
conduct  had  placed  hi*  superiority  and  bravery 
in  a  far  more  splendid  light  than  if  he  had 
given  way  to  resentment:  and  as  to.  his  retiring, 
without  seeking  farther  to  prolong  the  quarrel, 
he  was  convinced  (he  said)  that  he  had  in  view 
nothing  but  the  peace  and  happiness  of  the 
people,  which  would  undoubtedly  have  been 
disturbed  by  an  open  rupture  with  a  man  who 
was-  at  the  head  of  so  powerful  a  party.  To 
this  the  young  chief  made  only  this  reply: 
"Co  ko  wlidni ;"  *  and  appeared  overcome  by 
*  noble  modesty,  at  being  so  much  praised 
(contrary  to  custom)  before  so  large  an  as- 
sembly. 

lb  the  mean  while,  Talo,  conscious  of  his 
tnror,  and  ashamed  to  appear  in  pubUc,  retired 

*  Musing  Uieiattr,  a  it  if  join  truth ;"— ibst »,  whit  you 
•aj  it  true. 


9 .  / 


ANECDOTE   OP   HA  LA    API    API.  11 

to  one  of  hie  plantations  called  Mote;  whilst 
Hala  Api  Api,  imagining  what  must  be  the 
distress  of  his  feelings,  resolved  upon  a  recon* 
ciliation,  and  having  intimated  this  to  his  men, 
he  desired  them  to  go  armed,  in  case  any  mis-, 
understanding  should  accidentally  arise.  Ac*» 
cordingly,  one  morning  he  and  his  men  left  the 
nooa,  after  having  given  out  that  he  was  going" 
up  the  country  to  kill  some  hogs  of  his  that 
were  running  wild :  this  he  did  lest|  the  ciiw 
cumatence  of  his  men  being  armed  should  give 
rise  to  false  and  dangerous  suspicions  respect-, 
ing  his  intention ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  he 
invited  several  of  Finow's  men  to  come  and 
partake  of  the  feast.  As  soon  as  they  had  left 
the  fortress,  he  imparted  to  them  all  his  real 
intention  to  offer  Talo  his  former  friendship* 
and  to  assure  him  that  he  had  forgotten  the 
late  afiair.  When  they  arrived  near  the  plant* 
atkm,  Hala  Api  Api  went  on  a  short  distance 
before,  and  on  entering  the  house  found  Talo 
feat  asleep,  attended  only  by  his  wife  and  one 
of  bm  servants :  they  were  both  employed  im 
tanning  him.  He  left  his  spear  on  the  outside 
q€  tfat  house*  and  carried  his  elub  in  with  him. 
Tbm  jMise  he  made  on  entering  awoke  Talo ; 
v4^>  inMWO^g  that  the  other  had  come  to 

him,  started  up*  seizing  his  el#b, 


12  AHECDOTE   OF   HA  LA   A'PI   A*t. 

rushed  out  of  the  house,  and  fled :  Hala  Api 
Api  pursued  him,  taking  with  him  his  spear : 
hia  feelings  now  being  greatly  hurt  to  see  otfe 
fly  him  so  cowardly,  who  of  late  had  matched 
himself  as  his  equal,  he  at  length  became  so 
exasperated  that  be  threw  his  spear  at  him ; 
which,  however,  fortunately  got  entangled  in 
some  bushes.  At  this  moment  Talo  was  con* 
siderably  in  advance,  in  consequence  of  the 
time  which  it  took  the  other  to  go  back  to  the 
door  for  his  spear :  he  was  noted,  however,  for 
bis  swiftness,  and  conscious  that  he  should 
overtake  him,  be  continued  the  pursuit.  Be- 
fore Talo  had  crossed  the  field  of  high  grass 
adjoining  his  house,  he  was  under  the  necessity 
of  throwing  off  his  gnatoo,  and  very  shortly 
after  he  threw  away  his  club  too.  Hala  Api 
Api  stopped*  to  pick  it  up,  and  thus  loaded 
with  two  clubs  he  bounded  after  him  with  such 
extraordinary  fleetness,  that  before  they  had 
half  crossed  the  next  field  he  overtook  him, 
and  catching  hold  of  him  by  a  wreath  of  flowers 
that  bung  round  his  neck,  exclaimed  with  ge- 
nerous indignation,  "  Where  did  you  expert  to 
"  escape  to  ?  Are  you  a  bird  that  you  can  fly  to 
"  the  skies ;  or  a  spirit  that  you  can  vanish  to 
"  Bolotoo  ? — Here  is  your  club,  which  you  so 
"  cowardly  threw  away ;  take  it,  -and  learn  that 


ANBCDOTS  OF   Ha'lA   A'PI  A'PI.  IS 

"  I  come  not  to  deprive  you  of  life,  but  to  prof* 
<(  fer  you  again  my  friendship,  which  you  once 
"  prized  so  highly :"  with  that  he  embraced 
himr  and  tearing  his  own  gnatoo,  gave  him  half 
to  wear.  By  this  time  Hala  Api  Api's  men 
coming  up,  he  dispatched  them  immediately 
to  the  garrison,  to  prevent  any  disturbances 
which  might  arise  from  a  false  report  of  this 
adventure :  for  a  few  of  Talo's  men  being  near 
the  house,  and  mistaking  Hala  Api  Api's  in- 
tention, imagined  the  fate  of  their  chief  inevita- 
ble, and  had  betaken  themselves  immediately 
to  the  garrison,  with  a  view  to  excite  the  ad- 
herents of  Talo  to  revenge  his  death ;  for  he 
was  a  powerful  chief,  had  belonged  to  the  for- 
mer, garrison,  and  would  undoubtedly  have  had 
moat  of  the  chiefs  of  Vavaoo  for  the  avengers 
of  his  cause.  The  two  chiefs  returned  as  soon 
as  possible  to  Felletoa,  to  shew  the  people  that 
tbey  had  entered  again  into  a  friendly  alliance. 
When,  they  arrived  they  found  the  whole  place 
in  such  a  state  of  disturbance,  all  being  up  in 
arms,  party  against  party,  that  in  all  probability 
if  they  had  arrived  a  little  later,  war  would  al- 
have  broken  out.  At  the  sight  of  them, 
were  soon  adjusted ;  and  their  mutual 
-became  stronger  than  ever. 
JL  abort  time  after  this,  the  people  of  Hapai 


14  ATTACK   FROBk   Aft   EKfiMT. 

dearly  shewed  their  intention  of  commencing* 
hostilities  •  but  were  defeated  in  the  very  act 
fcy  the  vigilance  and  bravery  of  some  of  Finow's 
young  wafriors,  among  whom  Mr.  Mariner 
had*  the  honour  to  take  an  active  part.  One 
day  most  of  the  large  sailing  canoes  were 
launched,  for  the  double  purpose  of  procuring 
from  some  of  the  outer  islands  a  quantity  of 
coarse  sand,  and  to  convey  those  whose  busi- 
ness it  was  to  cut  flag-stones  for  the  grave  of 
Tooitonga,  to  different  places  for  that  end. 
Owing,  however,  to  contrary  winds,  they  were 
not  able  to  make  the  shores  of  Vavaoo  that 
evening;  and,  in  consequence,  Finow,  who 
was  with  them,  proposed  to  remain  at  the 
island  of  Toonga  during  the  night.  A  short 
time  after,  they  received  intelligence  from  a 
fisherman  that  a  canoe,  apparently  from  Ha- 
pai,  was  approaching,  and,  as  was  supposed, 
with  an  hostile  intent,  as  she  had  a  quantity  of 
arms  on  board,  and  many  men.  In  conse- 
quence of  this,  the  young  warriors  requested 
of  Finow  leave  to  proceed  in  a  number  of  small 
canoes  (as  the  wind  was  unfavourable  for  large 
ones),  and  endeavour  to  cut  them  off.  After  a 
due  consultation  this  was  grafted ;  and  eleven 
canoes,  manned  with  the  choicest  warriors, 
paddled  towards  the  island  of  Toonga.    As 


ATTACK  FROM   AW  BNEMY,  IS 

it  was  a  moonlight  night,  the  enemy  saw  the*, 
and  prepared  to  receive  them,  concealing  them- 
selves  behind  certain  bushes  at  a  small  distance 
from  the  beach,  where  they  supposed  Finow's 
men  would  land :  they  were  right  in  their  con- 
jecture, and,  as  soon  as  Finow's  warriors  were 
landed,  the  enemy  rushed  upon  them  with  their 
usual  yell,  and  occasioned  much  disorder  and 
alarm,  but  soon  rallying,  they  pressed  on  them 
in  return  so  closely  and  bravely,  that  they  were' 
obliged  to  retreat  towards  the  place  where  their 
canoe  lay ;  and  here  a  most  severe  conflict  en- 
sued.     Unfortunately,  in  hurrying  on  shore 
from  the  canoes,  Mr.  Mariner's  ammunition 
got  wet,  which  rendered  his  musket  of  little 
use,  hence  he  was  obliged  to  employ  only  a 
bow  and  arrows.    The  enemy,  finding  them** 
selves  so  well  matched,   and  thinking  they 
might  soon  ■  be  attacked  by  forces  from  the 
main  land  (Vavaoo),  they  embarked  as  speedily 
d*  they  could ;  but,  in  doing  which,  they  lost 
Sen  dr  twelve  meq.    Mr.  Mariner  again  tried 
In  nae  his  musket,  and,  after  repeated  trials, 
succeeded  in  shooting  die  two  men  that  steered 
(k  being  a  double  canoe),  after  which  he  re- 
with  his  own  party  to  their  canoes^ 
.  nineteen  of  the  enemy  dead  on  the 
fifldt  besides  the  two  killed  in  the  cauoe :  their 


16  INTENTIONS  OF  THE  Bit  EM  V. 

own  loss  were  four,  killed  on  the  spot,  and 
three  others,  who  died  afterwards  of  their 
wounds.  The  enemy  were  about  sixty  in 
number ;  themselves  about  fifty.  In  tbi*  affair 
Mr.  Mariner  unfortunately  received  a  violent 
blow  on  the  knee  by  a  stone  from  a  sling, 
which  lamed  him  for  a  considerable  length  of 
time.  It  appeared  from  the  account  of  a  boy, 
who  was  wounded  and  taken  prisoner,  that  the 
enemy  intended  to  proceed  as  secretly  as  pos- 
sible, to  the  westward  of  Vavaoo,  and,  under 
cover  of  the  night,  to  make  incursions  on  shore, 
and  do  all  the  mischief  in  their  power. 

For  the  space  of  about  two  months  after  this 
affair,  no  circumstance  worthy  of  note  took 
place :  no  other  attack  from  the  people  of  Ha- 
pai  was  attempted,  and  all  seemed  peaceable 
and  quiet.  At  the  end  of  this  period,  however* 
there  happened  a  circumstance,  the  most  for- 
tunate of  all  to  Mr.  Mariner,  viz.  that  of  hi* 
escape.  In  this  time  of  peace,  when  he  had 
nothing  in  which  to .  employ  himself,  but  ob- 
jects of  recreation  and  amusement,  sometimes 
with  Finow,  or  other  chiefs,  and  sometimes  by 
himself,  among  several  amusements,  he  would 
frequently  go  out  for  two  or  three  days  to- 
gether, among  the  neighbouring  small  islands, 
on  a  fishing  excursion :  as  he  was  one  evening 


MR.   MARINBB'S   BSCAPB.  If 

returning1  homeward  in  his  canoe,  after  haying 
been  out  three  days,  he  espied  a  sail  in  the 
westward  horizon,  just  as  the  sun  had  descend- 
ed below  it;  this  heart-cheering  sight  no 
sooner  caught  his  attention  than  he  pointed  it 
out  to  the  three  men  in  the  canoe  with  him 
(his  servants  that  worked  on  his  plantation), 
and  desired  them  to  paddle  him  on  board, 
holding  out  to  diem  what  an  advantageous 
opportunity  now  offered  itself  to  enrich  them- 
selves with  beads,  axes,  looking-glasses,  &c. ; 
an  opportunity  which  they  might  never  again 
meet  with :  to  this  they  replied,  that  they  had 
seen  her  before,  but  that  their  feat*  of  his  wish- 
ing to  go  on  board  prevented  them  from  point- 
ing her  out  to  him,  for  they  had  often  heard 
their  chiefs  say,  that  they  never  meant  to  let 
bin  go  if  they  could  help  it ;  and  hence  they 
were  apprehensive  that  their  brains  would  be 
knocked  out,  if  they  suffered  him  to  escape. 
Mr.  Mariner  then  condescended  to  entreat 
them  to  pull  towards  the  vessel,  promising 
then  very  rich  rewards.  After  conversing 
and  muttering  something  between 
they  told  Mr.  Mariner,  that,  not- 
wil&itatading  the  esteem  and  respect  they  had 
for  Unit  titty  owed  it  as  a  duty  to  their  chiefs 
to  ntoe  hit  request;  and,  upon  this,  they 

VOL.  II.  C 


18  If E.    MA&IftBR  V  BSCAPB. 

began  to  paddle  towards  the  nearest  shore. 
Mr.  Mariner  instantly  demanded,  in  an  ele- 
vated tone  of  voice,  why  they  talked  about  the 
fear  of  chiefs ;  were  they  not  his  servants,  and 
had  he  not  a  right  to  act  with  them  as  he 
pleased  ?  He  then  took  in  his  hand  his  musket 
from  behind  him,  when  the  man  who  sat  next 
immediately  declared,  that,  if  he  made  any  re- 
sistance, he  would  die  in  opposing  him,  rather 
than  allow  him  to  escape :  upon  this,  Mr.  Ma- 
riner summoned  up  all  his  strength,  and  struck 
him  a  most  violent  blow,  or  rather  stab,  near 
the  loins,  with  the  muzzle  of  the  piece,  ex- 
claiming at  the  same  time,  "  Ta  gi  ho  Hotooa, 
"  co  ho  mate  <?  V  This  lunge  produced  a  dan* 
gerous  wound, ,  for  the  musket,  being  a  very 
old  one,  had  grown  quite  sharp  at  the  muzzle, 
and  was,  besides,  impelled  by  the  uncommon 
force  with  which,  inspired  by  the  prospect  of 
escape,  he  felt  himself  animated :  the  man  im- 
mediately fell  flat  in  the  bottom  of  the  canoe, 
penseless,  and  scarcely  with  a  groan  f.     Mr. 

.  *  Meaning,  literaDy,  "  Strike  your  Hotooa,  there's  your 
"  death!'*  which  are  forms  of  energetic  expressions,  used 
like  oaths,  on  extraordinary  occasions,  calculated  to  express 
vengeance. 

f  This  man,  whose  name  was  Teoo  Fononga,  well  de- 
served ihe  fate  lie  met  with:  he  used  to  beat  his  wife  mnmer- 


MR.  marihbr's  escape.  19 

Mariner  instantly  pulled  his  legs  out  straight: 
he  then  presented  his  musket  to  die  other  two, 
who  appeared  somewhat  panic-struck,  and 
threatened  to  blow  out  their  brains  if  they 
did  not  instantly  obey  his  orders,  and  pull 
towards  the  vessel .  They  accordingly  put  about, 
and  made  towards  her.  The  one  that  Mr. 
Mariner  wounded  was  a  piece  of  a  warrior,  but 
the  other  two  had  never  been  in  battle,  and, 
as  he  supposes,  did  not  know  but  what  he  could 
fire  off  his  musket  as  often  as  he  pleased  with- 
out loading  it :  be  this  as  it  may,  they  were 
now  perfectly  obedient,  and  he  encouraged 
them  farther,  by  reminding  them  that  they 
had  a  good  excuse  to  make  to  their  chiefr, 
since  it  was  by  compulsion,  and  not  by  will, 
that  they  acted.  In  the  mean  time,  he  kept 
a  strict  eye  both  upon  them  and  the  man  in 
the  bottom  of  the  canoe;  upon  those,  lest 
they  should  take  an  opportunity  to  upset  the 
canoe,  and  swim  to  the  shore,  with  which  they 
were  well  acquainted,  and  upon  this,  lest  he 

•  * 

CsfbDy,  lor  which  Mr.  Mariner  had  frequently  knocked  him 
with  s  dob:  he  formerly  had  a  wife  who,  in  lime  of 
r,  he  killed  and  ate:  since  that  time  having  several 
than  he  wished,  he  killed  a  couple  of  them 
out  of  the  way.    His  best  quality  was  being  aa 
tsberman,  and  a  very  hard-working  fellow. 

o2 


90  MA.    JSAAIHBft's   BSCAPJB. 

should  recover  and  attempt  the  same  thing,  or 
else  make  an  unexpected  attack:  fortunately 
be  did  not  stir  the  whole  night*.  They  did 
not  come  up  with  the  vessel  till  about  daylight 
next  morning,  owing  to  the  distance  they  had 
.  to  go,  for  they  were  about  four  miles  off  the 
north-west  part  of  Vavaoo,  and  the  ship  bore 
wtst-soath-west,  about  five  miles  distant,  steer- 
ing under  easy  sail,  to  the  south  end  of  that 
island:  besides  which,  they  were  much  fa- 
tigued with  having  pulled  about  the  whole 
day  against  a  heavy  sea,  and  were  short  of  any 
provisions,  except  raw  fish.  During  the  whole 
night,  the  man  in  the  bottom  of  the  canoe  lay 
perfectly  still,  and  shewed  no  signs  of  life,  ex- 
cept a  slight  gurgling  noise  in  his  throat, 
which  was  beard  now  and  then.  As  soon  as 
the  canoe  pulled  op  along  side  the  brig,  Mr. 
•Mariner,  without  stopping  to  hail,  on  the  im- 
pulse of  the  moment,  jumped  up  into  the  main 
chains,  and  had  liked  to  have  been  knocked 
overboard  by  the  centinel,  who  took  him  for 
a  native,  for  his  skin  was  grown  very  brown, 

* 

*  It  nay  be  remarked,  alio,  that  this  waa  the  season  for 
sharks,  and  their  consciences,  probably,  were  not  quite  < 
srosn  having  infringed  some  prohibition  or  another,  in  ( 
sequence  of  which,  according  to  their  notions,  they  i 
liable  to  be  devoured  by  sharks. 


BMU   M  ARINER's   ESCAPE.  21 


bis  hair  very  long,  and  tied  up  in  a  knot, 
a  turban  round  the  head,  and  an  apron  of  the 
leaves  of  the  chi  tree  round  his  waist:  this 
disguise  would  have  warranted  the  conduct 
of  the  centinel,  but,  as  soon  as  Mr.  Mariner 
spoke  English,  and  told  him  he  was  an  En- 
glishman, he  allowed  him  to  come  on  deck, 
where  he  addressed  the  captain,  who  cordially 
shook  bands  with  him.  The  latter  had  heard 
from  the  captain  of  a  schooner  the  whole  un- 
fortunate affair  of  the  Port  au  Prince ;  for  die 
schooner  brought  away  two  men  from  one  of 
these  islands  during  the  time  that  Mr.  Mariner 
was  in  another  quarter,  upon  some  business 
forFinow. 

The  captain  presented  him  with  a  pair  of 
browsers  and  a  shirt;  the  latter,  it  must  be  said, 
neither  very  new  nor  very  clean ;  in  con- 
he  took  the  pains  to  wash  it,  and 
hang  it  up  in  the  rigging  to  dry :  in  the  morn- 
ing, however,  it  had  disappeared,  at  the  ho- 
aett  instigation  of  somebody ;  hence,  his  whole 
stock  of  apparel  consisted  of  the  said  pair  of 
trowsers;  nor  did  he  get  better  provided  till 
he  arrived  in  China,  about  seven  weeks  after- 
But  to  return  to  the  subject :  the  brig 
to  be  the  Favourite,  Captain  Fisk,  from 
i,  about  180  tons  burthen ;  had  on 


TRANSACTIONS   ON   BOARD   THE   BRIO. 

board  about  ninety  tons  of  mother  of  peart 
shells,  procured  from  the  Society  Islands:  she 
intended  to  make  up  her  voyage  with  sandal 
wood  from  the  Fiji  islands,  and  thence  to  pro- 
deed  to  China. 

Mr.  Mariner  requested  the  captain  to  give 
the  teen  in  the  canoe,  which  brought  him, 
some  beads,  as  a  reward  for  their  trouble,  &c, 
and  also  an  axe  as  a  present  for  Finow.  The 
captain  liberally  complied  ;  and  the  canoe  left 
the  8 hip,  with  a  message  from  Mr.  Mariner  to 
the  king,  requesting  him  to  come  on  board. 
As  to  the  wounded  man,  he  was,  in  all  proba- 
bility, dead  ;  at  least  the  other  two  seemed  to 
think  so  by  his  not  stirring,  and  so  took  no 
trouble  about  him.  By  this  time  there  were 
about  two  hundred  small  canoes  near  the  ves- 
sel, and  several  large  ones,  so  that  the  whole 
people  of  Vavaoo  seemed  to  be  assembled  to 
view  the  brig,  for  the  whole  beach  was  also 
crowded.  As  the  vessel  was  very  short  of  pro- 
visions, a  very  brisk  traffic  was  carried  on  with 
the  natives  by  the  captain  and  mate,  for  yams, 
hogs,  &c. :  hence  orders  were  given  to  the 
crew  not  to  purchase  any  trinkets,  &c,  tilt 
they  had  procured  plenty  of  provisions.  About 
the  middle  of  the  day  Finow  came  along  side 
-with  iiis  sister,  and  several  of  her  female  at* 


TA4N8AOTIOKS   ON   BOARD   THB   BRIO.      SS 

tendants,  bringing  off,  as  a  present  for  Mr. 
Mariner,  five  large  hogs,  and  forty  large  yams, 
each  weighing  not  less  than  thirty  pounds,  and 
some  of  the  largest  sixty  or  seventy  pounds  r 
these  things  Mr.  Mariner  begged  leave  to 
transfer*  to  the  captain,  and  presented  them 
accordingly.  Notwithstanding  repeated  mes- 
sages from  the  chiefs  on  shore  to  Finow,  re- 
questing  him  to  return,  he  resolved  to  sleep  on 
board  that  night,  if  the  captain  would  allow 
him,  which  he  readily  did.  The  women,  how- 
ever, intimated  tbeir  wish  to  return,  not  liking 
the  thought  of  trusting  their  persons  among  a 
number  of  strange  men.  Mr.  Mariner  found 
it  very  difficult  to  remove  their  scruples,  by 
assuring  them  that  they  should  not  be  mo- 
lested. At  length,  however,  they  consented  to 
retain,  on  his  promise  to  take  care  of  them, 
and  to  roll  them  all  up  in  a  sail,  in  which  state 
they  laid  the  whole  night  in  the  steerage ;  and,, 
as  tbcy  said,  slept  comfortably.  As  to  Finow, 
he  was  very  well  contented  with  sleeping  on  a 
nil  ob  the  cabin  deck.  As  the  weather  was 
;ably  fine,  the  brig  did  not  come  to  an 
%  but  stood  off  and  on  during  the  whole 
rf  tfcr  night     At  day-light  canoes  came  along 

/*  tt  fa  a  very  common  thing  among  the  natiret  to  tram- 


f£    TfMMP4OTl6#*  ON  34>A*p  TUB  9B4«r 


i  ii|  great  numbers ;  but  from  prudent  mo- 
tives, dictated  by  former  disasters,  no  more 
than  three  of  the  natives  were  allowed  to  come 
on  board  at  a  time,  six  centinels  being  kept 
constantly  on  deck  for  that  purpose.  .  In  the 
^anoes  were  several  chiefs,  who  came  to  re- 
quest Finow  to  return  on  shore,  as  the  people 
were  greatly  alarmed  lest  he  should  form  a 
determination  of  going  to  Papalangi  (land  of 
white  people).  They  brought  off  some  cava 
for  him,  but  which  he  declined  drinking,  say- 
ing that  he  had  tasted  some  on  board  (wine) 
which  was  far  preferable:  indeed,  he  consi- 
dered it  so  much  superior,  that  the  thoughts 
of  cava  quite  disgusted  him.  He  made  a 
hearty  dinner  at  the  captain's  table — ate 
plenty  of  roast  pork,  with  which  be  admired 
very  much  the  flavour  of  the  sage  and  onions : 
the  fowls  he  cared  very  little  about,  but  par-! 
took  of  some  made  dishes.  The  ladies  also 
ate  very  heartily ;  but  Finow  handled  a  knife 
and  fork,  though  for  the  first  time  in  his  life, 
with  very  great  dexterity ;  sometimes,  indeed, 
his  majesty  forgot  himself  a  little,  and  laid 
told  of  the  meat  with  his  fingers;  but,  in- 
stantly recollecting  that  he  was  doing  wrong, 
he  would  put  it  down  again,  exclaiming, 
&6e!  gooa  te  gnalo/    Eh!  I    forget    myself! 


T*A*8A0TI01fS   ON  &OAED  THE  BRIG.     25 

The  natural  politeness  which  he  evinced  on 
ewety  occasion  charmed  the  captain  and  the 
officers  so  much,  that  they  could  not  help  ao 
knowledging  that  it  far  surpassed  any  other 
instance  of  good  manners  they  had  witnessed 
among  the  inhabitants  of  the  South  Sea 
islands;  and  not  only  in  behaviour,  but  in 
intelligence,  he  seemed  to  excel :  his  inquiries 
about  the  use  and  application  of  what  he  saw 
were  frequent,  and  indeed  troublesome;  but 
then  his  deportment  was  so  affable,  and  his 
manner  so  truly  polite,  that  nobody  could  be 
offended  with  him.  He  requested  permission 
to  lie  down  in  the  captain's  bed,  that  he  might 
be  able  to  say  what  none  of  the  people  of  Va- 
vaoo  could  boast  of,  that  he  had  been  in  a  Pa* 
palangi  bed.  Permission  being  readily  granted, 
he  lay  down,  and  was  delighted  with  his  situa- 
tion ;  and  said,  that  being  now  in  an  English  , 
bed,  lie  could  fancy  himself  in  England.  Some 
tnae  after,  being  left  in  the  cabin  by  himself, 
though  watched  unknown  to  him,  he  did  not 
to  take,  or  even  touch,  a  single  bead,  or 
thing  else,  excepting  the  captain's  hiat; 
tat  which,  not  choosing  to  put  on  without 
leave,  he  went  on  deck  on  purpose  to 
Mr,  Mariner  to  obtain  permission  of 


26      TRANSACTIONS   OK   BOARD  THE   BRIO. 

the  captain  for  so  great  a  liberty.  So  different 
was  he  from  the  generality  of  these  islanders^ 
who,  stimulated  by  curiosity, .  if  not  by  a  less 
honest  motive,  would  not  scruple  to  take  a 
man's  hat  off  his  head,  unbidden,  twirl  it  about, 
and  be  very  careless  about  returning  it,  if  not 
reminded  by  the  owner.  i 

About  the  middle  of  the  day  Finow  went  on 
shore  to  quiet  the  people,  who  were  become 
very  clamorous  on  account  of  his  long  stay  r 
but  soon  after  he  returned  on  board,  bringing 
with  him  a  quantity  of  cooked  victuals,  ripe 
bananas,  &c.  for  the  crew ;  and  also  a  present 
for  the  captain,  consisting  of  a  valuable  spear 
and  club,  a  large  bale  of  gnatoo,  a  large  hog, 
a  hundred  small  yams,  and  two  canoes'  load 
of  cocoa-nuts. 

So  delighted  was  Finow  with  every  thing  he 
saw  on  board,  so  high  an  opinion  had  he  of 
the  character  of  the  Papalangis,  and  so  de- 
sirous was  he  of  arriving  at  those  accomplish-, 
ments  which  raised  them  so  high  above  the 
character  of  the  Tonga  people,  that  he  could 
not  help  several  times  expressing  his  wish  to 
accompany  Mr.  Mariner  to  England.  On  the 
third  day,  which  was  the  day  of  the  brig's  de- 
parture, his  importunities  on  the  subject  be- 


TRANSACTIONS   ON    BOAHD   THE   BRtG.      27 

came  extremely  urgent,  so  much  so,  that  Mr. 
Mariner  could  not  refrain  expressing  them  to 
the  captain ;  but  who  refused  (as  might  be  ex- 
pected) to  accede  to  a  wish  which  seemed  to 
promise  no  future  good  to  an  individual  in 
Finow*s  circumstances,  arriving,  in  a  strange 
country,  without  protection,  and  without  pa- 
tronage.    This  was  a  sore  disappointment  to 
him,  as  it  must  have  been  to  one  who  was 
willing  to  make  such  large  sacrifices  to  the 
accomplishment  of  his  hopes; — to  one  who 
would  have  resigned  a  princely  state  and  dig- 
nity, and  all  the  respect  paid  by  obedient  sub- 
jects to  an  arbitrary  monarch,  for  the  sake  of 
visiting  a  country,  where,  as  Mr.  Mariner  ex- 
plained to  him,  he  could  expect  at  best  but  a 
very  inferior  mode  of  life,  comparing  it  with 
what  he  had  been  accustomed  to.    But  the 
arguments  this  gentleman  used  were  all  in 
▼am;  Finow  would   not, — could  not  be  di- 
vested of  his  wishes :  he  thought  if  he  could 
bat  learn  to  read  and  write,  and  think  like  a 
Pspalangi,  that  a  state  of  poverty,  with  such 
Ugh  accomplishments,  was  for  superior  to  re- 
gd  authority  in  a  state  of  ignorance. 

faring,  however,  that  his  wish  was  this  time 
ttlefcst destined  to  be  thwarted,  he  made  his 
friend  solemnly  promise,— »and  before  their  final 


28    TRANSACTION*  ON    BOARD   THE  BRI6. 

separation,  made  him  again  repeat  that  pro* 
mise,  and  swear  to  the  fulfilment  of  it  by  his 
father,  and  by  the  god  who  governed  him,  that 
he  would  some  time  or  another  return,  or  en- 
deavour to  return  in  a  large  canoe,  (a  ship,)  and 
take  htm  away  whh  hhn  to  England ;  and  in 
case  his  subjects  should  stand  averse  to  such  a 
measure,  that  he  would  complete  his  project 
by  force  of  arms.  Mr.  Mariner  acceded  to 
this  promise ;  and  Finow  embraced  him,  and 
shed  tears* 

It  would  be  very  interesting  to  know  what 
would  be  the  result  of  removing  an  individual, 
of  Finow's  disposition  and  intellectual  powers, 
from  the  state  of  society  in  which  he  had  been 
brought  up,  into  a  civilized  country;  into  a 
scene  so  widely  different  from  every  thing  he 
had  been  accustomed  to,  where  every  circum- 
stance would  be  new,  and  every  object  calcu- 
lated to  draw  forth  the  powers  of  his  natural 
understanding,  to  judge  of  their  propriety,  ab- 
surdity, or  excellence.  Finow's  intellect,  as 
we  shall  by  and  by  more  clearly  see,  when  we 
take  a  survey  of  hia  character,  was  far,  very  far 
above  the  common :  there  was  interwoven  in 
the  very  texture  of  his  mind  a  spirit  of  philo- 
sophical inquiry,  directed  by  the  beat  of  all 
uotiveflr-^the  desire  of  human  improvement;— 


TBANSACTIOVS  OK  BOARD  THE  BRIO.     SO 

aot  the  offspring  of  common  curiosity,  but 
that  noble  impulse,  which  goads  the  mind  on 
in  the  pursuit  of  knowledge,  at  whatever  ride, 
and  with  whatsoever  suffering.  But  we  must 
leave  thm  subject  for  the  present,  to  take  a  far- 
ther view  of  the  transactions  on  board. 

The  captain  had  a  quantity  of  pearl  oyster- 
shells,  which  are  considered  by  the  natives  a 
very  beautiful  ornament,  and  very  scarce  among 
them,  as  those  which  they  have  are  not  capable 
of  being  so  finely  polished :  these  attracted  Fi-% 
how's  fancy,  winch  the  captain  observing! 
made  him  a  present  of  several ;  but,  however, 
he  did  not  direct  his  attention  to  mere  matters 
of  ornament :  he  reflected  that  he  had  very  few 
gun-flints  on  shore ;  and  he  ventured,  in  a  very 
modest  manner,  to  ask  the  captain  for  a  supply 
of  an  article  that  would  be  so  useful  to  him* 
in  defending  his  newly  established  kingdom  of 
Vavaoo  against  the  encroachments  of  the  Ha- 
pai  people ;  and  the  captain  liberally  complied 
with  his  request. 

,  Afar.  Mariner  bad  on  shore,  in  a  concealed 
phee^  the  journal  of  the  Port  au  Prince,  which 
ha  was  now  desirous  of  securing*  The  reader 
■ay  here  be  reminded,  that  in  the  early  part 

*  'Kssw  knew  the  ate  of  a  musket  exceedingly  well,  audi 
•St  ■  feiy  good  toot* 


80   .  TRANSACTIONS   ON  BOARD  TUB  BRIG. 


of  Mr.  Mariner's  residence  at  these 
the  late  king  ordered  him  to  give  up  his  books 
and  papers,  which  were  afterwards  burnt,  a* 
instruments  of  witchcraft ;  it  happened,  how- 
ever, fortunately,  that  he  had  concealed  this 
journal. beneath  the  matting  of  the  house,  and 
thus  it  escaped  the  flames.  After  that 'period, 
reflecting  what  a  risk  there  was  of  its  beiikg 
discovered,  whether  he  left  it  there,  or  carried 
it  about  with  him,  particularly  as  the  times 
phrere  so  unsettled,  he  confided  it  to  the  carie  of 
his  adopted  mother,  M&fe  H£be,  who  faithfully 
.kept  it  in  her  possession,  concealed  in  the  mid- 
dle of  a  bale  of  gnatoo;  which,  along  with 
others,  was  always  conveyed  to  whatever  island 
or  distant  place  she  went  to  reside  at:  and 
when  she  left  Vavaoo  to  go  and  live  with  her 
father  at  the  Hapai  islands,  j|he  gave  it  up  to 
'  Mr.  Mariner,  who  concealed  it  in  the  middle 
of  a  barrel  of  gunpowder,  without  the  know- 
ledge of  any  one  else ;  for  although  be  had  at 
that  time  considerable  power  and  influence, 
and  a  sufficient  number  of  confidential  friends, 
he  thought  it  best  to  conceal  it  in  a  safe  place, 
where  no  native  was  likely  to  find  it,  and  con- 
sequently no  ridiculous  prejudice  likely  to  de- 
prive him  of  it.  To  get  it  again  into  his  pos- 
session, he  obtained  the  captain's  consent  to 


TRANSACTIONS   ON   BOARD   THB  BRIG.      SI 

detain  Finow  Fiji  (the  king's  uncle)  on  board 
till  the  journal  was  brought  to  him ;  and  ac- 
cordingly two  natives  were  dispatched,  with 
directions  where  to  find  it :  they  had  orders,  at 
the  same  time,  to  bring  back  with  them  three 
Englishmen  that  were  on  shore,  viz.  James 
Waters,  Thomas  Brown,  and  Thomas  Daw- 
son.    In  the  mean  while  Finow  Fiji,  on  un- 
derstanding that  he  was  detained  a  prisoner, 
turned  very  pale,   and  was  evidently  greatly 
alarmed:    and  even  when   Mr.  Mariner  ex* 
plained  to  him  the  cause,  he  seemed  still  to 
think  every  thing  was  not  right ;  and  expressed 
his  apprehension  that  they  were  going  to  take 
him  to  England  to  answer  for  the  crime  of  the 
Hapai  people,  in  taking  the  Port  au  Prince, 
and  murdering  the  crew :  the  other  assured  him 
that  his  fears  were  groundless ;  for,  as  he  was 
not  a  party  concerned  in  that  sad  affair,  the 
English  people  would  never  think  of  punishing 
the  innocent  for  the  guilty :  "  True !"  he  replied, 
and  you  know  that  I  have  always  befriended 
you,  and  that  1  am  not  a  treacherous  charac- 
a  ter ;  and  that  rather  than  assist  in  taking  a 
"  Papalangi  ship,  I  would  do  all  that  lay  in 
•"  my  power  to  prevent  such  an  outrage/1    To 
fltia  Mr.  Mariner  cordially  gave  his  assent,  and 
Jthe  chief  seemed  quite  satisfied :  his  people  in  the 


44 


tt     TRANSACTIONS  ON  BOARD   TftE   BRIG. 


canoes  were,  however,  far  from  being  so,—* 
they  raised  great  clamours,  and  loudly  de- 
manded his  liberation ;  and  even  his  own  as-* 
surances  could  scarcely  remove  their  appre- 
hensions. Finow  Fiji  told  Mr.  Mariner  that 
he  should  have  been  particularly  sorry  to  have 
been  taken  away,  when  his  nephew  was  just  in 
the  infancy  of  his  reign,  and  might  want  his 
counsel  and  advice,  and  thus  be  deprived  of 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  him  govern  prosperous* 
]y,  and  making  his  people  happy ,  which,  from 
his  ability  and  excellent  disposition,  he  had  no 
doubt  would  be  the  case.  At  length  the  canoe 
returned  with  the  journal  and  the  English* 
men.  Thomas  Waters  was  not  disposed,  how* 
ever,  to  return  to  England:  he  was  an  old 
man,  and  had  become  infirm,  and  he  reflected 
that  it  would  be  a  difficult  matter  for  him  to 
get  his  bread  at  home ;  and  as  he  enjoyed  at 
Vavaoo  every  convenience  that  he  could  desire, 
he  chose  to  end  his  days  there. 

Finow's  sister,  a  girl  of  about  fifteen  yeart 
of  age,  went  on  shore,  and  brought  on  board 
several  other  women  of  rank,  who  were  all 
greatly  pleased  that  they  were  allowed  to  come 
into  the  ship  and  satisfy  their  curiosity.  Fi- 
now's sister,  who  was  a  very  beautiful,  lively 
girl,  proposed,  in  joke,  to  go  to  England,  and 


Tft*X**CT10SS  OH  BOAJM>.  33* 

Me  the  white  women :  she  asked  if  they  wouid; 
allow  her  to  wear  the  Tonga  dress,  "  thought 
perhaps,0  she  said,  "  that  would  not  do  in  such. 
Mr  eoid  country  in  the  winter  season.    I  don't 
know  what  I  should  do  at  that  time.:  -but  Togir 
telb  me  that  you  have  hot-houses  tot  plant* 
from  warm  climates,  so  I  should  like  to  live  all 
winter  in  a  hot-house.  Could  I  bathe  there  twa 
#r  three  times  a  day  without  being  seen  ?  I 
wonder  whether  1  should  stand  a  chance  of  get* 
ting  a  husband ;  but  my  skin  is  so  brown,  I 
suppose  none  of  the  young  papalangi  men  would 
have  me ;  and  it  would  be  a  great  pity  to  leavto 
so  many  handsome  young  chiefs  at  Vavaoo,  and 
go  to  England  to  live  a  single  life. — If  I  were 
to  go  to  England  I  would  amass  a  great  quan- 
tity of  beads,  and  then  I  should  like  to  return 
to  Tonga,  because  in  England  beads  are  so  com- 
mon that  nobody  would  admire  me  for  wear- 
ing them,  and  I  should  not  have  the  pleasure 
of  being  envied." — She  said,  laughing,  that 
txtber  the  white  men  must  make  very  kind 
tad  good  tempered  husbands,  or  else  the  white 
wsoen  must  have  very  little  spirit,  for  them 
Is  its  so  long  together  without  parting.     She 
thfltgkt  the  custom  of  havii^g  only  one  wife  a 
twjfvod  oae,  provided  the  husband  Wved  h*t ; 
tfiat,  it  was  a  very  bad  one,  because  he  went! 

▼su  II.  i> 


34  TRANSACTIONS  OS   BOAHD. 

tyrannize  over  ber  the  more,  whereas  if  hi*  ap 
tention  was  divided  between  five  or  six,  and  he 
did  not  behave  kindly  towards  them,  it  would, 
be  very  easy  to  deceive  him.— These  observa- 
tions, of  which  Mr.  Mariner  was  interpreter, 
afforded  very  great  amusement.  Finow,  the 
late  Tooitonga's  son  (about  12  years  of  age,) 
and  the  females,  now  commenced  dancing  and 
singing,  at  the  request  -of  the  captain,  aiwl» 
which  gave  the  ship's  company  much  entertain- 
ment. 

Before  the  ship's  departure,  Mr.  Mariner  wa» 
charged  with  several1  messages  from  the  <»  hie  fit 
6f  Vavaoo  to  those  of  Hapai.     Among  otheife, 
Finow  sent    his  strong  recommendations  *p 
Toobo  Toa  to  be  contented  with  the  Hapai 
islands;  and  not  to  think  of  invading  VavaoO ; 
to  stay  and  look  to  the  prosperity  of  his  own  do- 
minions, for  that  was  the  way  to  preserve  peart 
and   happiness:   "Tell  him  again,"  said  he 
••*  that  the  best  way  to  make  a  country  powerfrr 
and  strong  against  all  enemies  is  to  cultivaf 
it'  well,  for  then  the  people  have  somethii 
4iorth  fighting  for,  and  will  defend  it  with  i 
vincible  bravery ;  I  have  adopted  this  plan,  a 
4* h* attempts  upon  Vavaoo  will  fce  in  vain!' 
Several  warriors  sent  insulting  messages  to 
•Hapai  people,  saying  ••  W  c  shall  be  very  Y 


TKAN0ACtlO*S  o*  ielRV,  SI 

1*  see  them  at  Vavaoo,  and  ttill  take  care  to 
entertain  them  well,  and  give  them  plenty  of 
bearded  spears  to  eat,  and  besides,  \?e  have  g6t 
some  excellent  Toa  wood  (dubs)  of  which!  we 
iball  be  glad  to  give  them  an  additional  treat !  fee 
hope  they  will  come  and  see  us  before  they  shall 
hare  worn  out  the  fine  Vavaoo  gnatoo  of  which 
they  took  away  so  much  when  they  visited  us 
last ;"  (alluding  to  their  late  unsuccessful  Expe- 
dition.)— Hala  Api  Api  had  considerable  pro- 
perty  at  the  island  of  Foa,  and  he  sent  a  mes- 
sage to  an  old  mataboole  residing  there,  (who 
had  been  a  faithful  servant  of  his  father,) '  to 
gather  all  his  moveable  property,  consisting  of 
some  whale's  teeth  and  a  considerable  quantity 
of  Hamoa  mats,  and  deposit  it  in  a  hotise  of 
*his  upon  the  beach,  that  he  might  come  som* 
time  under  cover  of  the  night,  and  secure  it. 

Some  of  the  Vavaoo  warriors  proposed  a  plan, 
if  the  captain  would  lend  them  the  use  of  the  ship, 
to  kill  Toobo  Toa  and  his  greatest  fighting  men, 
inievenge  for  his  murder  of  their  lamented  chief, 
to' brave  Toobo  Neuha.  The  plan  was  for 
shoot  two  hundred  of  the  choicest  Vavaoo  war* 
tins  to  conceal  themselves  below  on  board  the 
favorite,  and  when  she  arrived  at  the  Hapai 
fahtals,  Toobo  Toa  and  many  other  consider- 

<Mf  ehiefli  and  warriors  were  to  be  invited  on 

»2 


9$  *taARffU&£   fKOM   VAVAOO 


board,  and  'tftg*  the  boarding  settings  beiqr'' 
hauled  up  that  none  might  escape,  at  a  signal 
l+b*  given  the  Vav**o  people  were  to  rush  00 
4eck  and  dispatch  them  all  with  their  club*, 
To  this,  of  course,  the  captain  did  not  consent 

Finow  consigned  to  Mr.  Mariner's  earc  a  pre- 
sent for  Mafi  Habe,  consisting  of  a  bale  of  fine 
Vataoo  gnatoo  and  five  or  six  strings  of  hand* 
soma  beads,  and  also  his  ofa  tai-toogo  ("loye 
unceasing.")  His  wife  also  sent  her  a  present 
of  three  Valuable  Ilamoa  mats,  with  her  ofa  tai~ 
toogo. 

The  ship  now  prepared  to  take  her  departure 
from  Vavaoo,  and  Mr.  Mariner  to  take  leave  of 
his  Vavaoo  friends,  probably  forever :  the  king 
again  embraced  him  in  the  most  affectionate 
manner,  made  him  repeat  his  promises  to  return, 
if  possible,  to  Tonga,  and  take  him  back  to  Eng- 
land, that  hemight  learn  to  read  books  of  history, 
study  Astronomy,  and  thus  acquire  a  papalangi 
mind.  As  to  the  government  of  Vavaoo,  he  said 
that  might  be  consigned  to  the  care  of  his  uncle, 
who  would  make  a  good  king,  for  be  was  a 
brave  man,  a  wise  man,  and  withal  a  lover  of 
peace.  At  this  parting,  abundance  of  tears  were 
shed  on  both  sides,  Finow  returned  to  his  canoe 
with  a  heavy  heart,  and  Mr.  Mariner  felt  *lt 
the  sweet  bitterness,  of  parting  from  much 


DEPARTURE  PROM  VAVAOO. 


37 


friends  to  visit  one's  native  country :  he  bade  a 
long  adieu  to  the  brave  and  wise  Finow  Fiji, — 
to  the  spirited  and  heroic  Hala  Api  Api,— na- 
tural characters  which  want  of  opportunity  ren- 
der scarce,  or  which  are  not  observable  amid 
the  bustle  and  business  of  rivil&ed  life.  The 
canoe  returned  to  the  beach,-"~the  ship  got 
under  way,  and  steered  her  course  to  the  Hapai 
islands,  leaving  Vavaoo  and  all  her  flourishing 
plantations  lessening  in  the  distance. 


<- 


#  • » 


3S 


r 


• 
i 


CHAP.  XVI. 

Fr«tifDinary  jemarjis-*- Anecdote  of  the  late  king— Cberac* 
tor  of,  the  present  king— Parallel  between  him  and  bit 
ftther— His  humanity — Hi*  understanding— Anecdote 
•f  him  reapecting  a  gun-lock— Respecting  the  poise— 
•Hit  lore  of  astronomical  knowledge—His  observations 
upon  European  acquirements— Pis  remarks  concerning, 
the  antipodes — Anecdote  of  him  respecting  the  mariner's 
compass— His  attention  to  the  arts. — Cursory  view  of  the 
character  of  Finow  Fiji— His  early  warlike  propensities— 
His  peaceable  disposition  and  wisdom-— Cursory  character 
jof  Hala  A  pi  A  pi— His  mischievous  disposition— rHis  gene- 
rosity, wisdom,  heroic  bravery,  and  occasional  moderation 
— His  swiftness  of  foot— Arrival  of  the  Favourite  at  the 
Hapai  islands— Generosity  of  Robert  Brown — Anec- 
dote of  the  gunner  of  the  Port  au  Prince — Three  men  of 
the  Port  au  Prince  received  on  board — Anecdote  of  an 
Hapai  warrior — JBxcuses  and  apologies  of  the  Hapai  peer 
pie  in  regard  to  the  capture  of  ts^  Port  au  Prince — The 
Favourite  departs  for  the  Fiji  islands— Remarks  on  the  con- 
duct of  one  of  the  Englishmen  left  behind*— An  account 
ff  the  intentions  of  the,  Hapai  people  towards  Captain 
Cook— Anecdote  respecting  the  death  pf  this  great  man— f 
Arrival  of  the  Favourite  at  .the  island  pf  Pau— Some  ac- 
count of  the  natives,  and  of  jtsyg  white  people  there — De- 
parture  of  the  ship  from  the  Fiji  Islands,  and  her  arrival 
in  Macao  roads— Mr.  Mariner's  reception  by  Captain 
Ross  and  by  Captain  Welbank— His  arrival  in  England 
— Concluding  *bstrf  aliona. 


REFLECTIONS.  9ft 

I>T  taking  leave  of  those  with  whom  we  have' 

long  resided,  and  whose  ways  and  habits  we 
have  got  accustomed  to,  whose  virtues  have 
gairied  our  esteem,  and  whose  kindnesses  have 
won  our  affections ;— in  leaving  them  and  the 
scenes  that  surround  them,  never  to  return,  the 
Human  heart  feels  a  sad  void,  which  no  lapse 
of  rime,  no  occupations,  no  new  friendships  seem 
likely  ever  to  fill  up:  all  their  good  qualities 
rush  Upon  the  mind  in  new  and  lively  colours, 
all  their  faults  appear  amiable  weaknesses  es- 
sential to  their  character.  When  we  lose  a 
friend  by  death,  we  compare  it,  by  way  of 
consolation,  to  a  long  absence  at  a  long  dis- 
tance ;  but  it  is  equally  just  to  reverse  the  com-'* 
parison,  and  to  say  of  a  separation  like  this  that 

• 

it  is  as  death,  which  at  one  cruel  stroke  deprives 
us  of  many  friends !  ' 

~  Mr.  Mariner,  as  he  looked  towards  Vavaoo, 
now  fifet  declining  in  the  horizon,  experienced' 
sentiments  which  he  never  before  had  felt  to 
such  a  degree :  his  faithful  memory  presented 
a  tbowand  little  incidents  in  rapid  succession,' 
which  he  wondered  he  had  never  before  suffi- 
ciently noticed :  the  late  king,  though  lying  iii! 
tht  fytoca  of  his  ancestors,  was  how  its  muchr 
alive  to  him  as  his  son,  or  Finow  Fij  i,  or  Hala  Api 
Api,  or  any  other  friend  that  he  had  jart  part-* 


40      CHARACTER    OF   THE    PUESBNT    KING* 

#d  with.  He  recollected  how  often,  at  his  re- 
quest, he  had  laid  down  upon  the  same  mat  with 
him,  in  the  evening,  to  talk  about  the  king  of 
England,  and  after  a  long  conversation,  when 
Finow  supposed  him  to  be  asleep,  he  would  lay 
his  hand  gently  upon  his  forehead  and  say, 
44  Poor  papalangi !  what  a  distance  his  country 
"  is  off !  Very  likely  his  father  and  mother  are 
"  now  talking  about  him,  and  comforting  them- 
"  selves  by  saying  '  perhaps  to-morrow  a  ship 
f4  will  arrive  and  bring  our  son  back  to  us/  * 
The  next  moment  all  the  amiable  qualifications 
•f  the  present  king  presented  themselves  to  his 
view,  and  as  we  have  not  yet  drawn  a  character 
so  well  worthy  to  be  noticed,  we  shall  now  at- 
tempt to  display  it  in  its  true  and  native  colours, 
trusting  that  it  will  afford  a  considerable  share 
of  pleasure  to  the  generality  of  readers.       , 

Finow,  the  present  king  of  Vavaoo,  about 
twenty-five  years  of  age,  was  in  stature  5  feet 
10  inches;  well  proportioned,  athletic,  and 
graceful ;  his  countenance  displayed  a  beauti- 
ful expression  of  openness  and  sincerity  ;  bis 
features,  taking  them  altogether,  were  not  quite 
qostroqgly  marked,  nor  was  his  forehead  quite 
ao  high  as  those  of  his  father,  nevertheless  they 
expressed  mi  ample  store  of  intellect.  Notwith  - 
folding  the  be»*vale*i  mHdne»  and  play  of 


CBAHACTER   OF   THE    PRESENT    KIlfG.      41 

good  humour  in  his  countenance,  his  eye  shot 
forth  a  penetrating  look  of  enquiry  from  be- 
neath a  prominent  brow  that  seemed  to  be  the 
seat  of  intelligence :  the  lower  part  of  his  face 
was  well  made ;  his  teeth  were  very  white,  his 
lips  seemed  ever  ready  to  express  something 
good  humoured  or  witty.  His  whole  physiog- 
nomy,  compared  with  that  of  his  late  father*  pos- 
sessed less  dignity,  but  more  benevolence  ;•  less 
Chief-like  superiority,  but  more  intellect:  his 
whole  exterior  was  calculated  to  win  the  esteem 
of  the  wise  and  good,  while  that  of  his  father 
waa  well  adapted  to  command  the  admiration 
of  the  multitude.  The  character  of  the  father 
was  associated  with  the  sublime  and  powerful  t 
that  of  the  son  with  the  beautiful  and  engaging. 
His  language  was  strong,  concise,  and  express 
sire,  with  a  voice  powerful,  deep,  and  melo* 
dious.  His  eloquence  fell  short  of  effect  com- 
pared with  that  of  his  .father,  but  he  did  not 
possess  the  art  of  dissimulation.  The  speech 
which  lie  made  on  coming  into  power  struck 
ill  the  matabooles  with  astonishment;  they 
to  hear  so  much  eloquence  tempered 
wisdom,  so  much  modesty  combined  with 
»,'  proceed  from  the  lips  of  so  young  a 
and  they  prophesied  well  of  him, — that 
he  worfd  reign  in  the  affections  of  his  people, 


42     CHAKA<,Ti:R  O*   ?*f^   tfftESHi^Y   **&•* 

and  have  no  conspiracies  or  civil  disturbance  $ 
to  fear.  His  general  deportment  was  engsgipg  j 
his  step  firm,  manly  and  graceful : .  he  ex- 
celled in  all  athletic  sports,  racing,  wrestlings 
boxing,  and  club-fighting :  he  was  cool,  and 
courageous,  but  a  lover  of  peace.  He  was  fond 
of  mirth  and  good  Rumour:  he  was  a  most 
graceful  dancer :  he  was  passionately  delighted 
with  romantic  scenery,  poetry,  and  vocal  con-* 
f&rts :  these  last  had  beep  set  aside,  in  a  great 
pleasure,  during  his  father's  warlike  reign ;  buf 
v  hen  the  son  came  into  ppwer,  he  revived  diem** 
and  had  bands  of  professed  singers  at  bib  bouse 
almost  every  night  He  used  to  say  that  the  song  *> 
amused  men's  minds,  and  made  them  aceordwith 
each  other, — caused  them  to  love  their  country ; 
and  to  hate  conspiracies.  He  was  of  a  most 
hpmane  and  benevolent  disposition,  but  far* 
very  far  from  being  weak  in  this  respect,  for  ho 
WU3  a  Jover  of  justice;  the  people  readily  m^ 
/erred  to  him  fpr  a  decision  of  their  private  quar- 
rels, on  which  occasions  he  was  never  thought  to 
Itave  judged  rashly ;  if  he  could  not  immediately 
decide,  he  adjourned  the  cause  till  the  next  day, 
land  in  the  mean  time  took  the  trouble  to  enquire 
further  particulars  of  those  who  knew  more  sf 

#  Their  songs  arc  mostly  descriptive  or  sceuery. 


CHARACTER    OF   THB    PRESENT   KING.     43 

ttoe  matter.  If  he  was  severe  nvith  any  "body,* 
it  mas  with  his  own  servants,  for  he  used  to  say1 
that  his  father  was  too  partial  to  them,  by  which 
means  they  had  become  assuming,  taking  upon' 
themselves  the  character  of  chiefs,  and  oppress-' 
mg  others  of  the  lower  orders,  but  now  he 
woald  make  them  know  their  proper  places.; 
If  they  did  any  thing  wrong,  they  trembled  in 
his  presence.  Nevertheless,  the  benevolence 
of  his  heart  was  wonderfully  expressed  in  his* 
manners :  while  he  was  yet  on  board  the  ship, 
Captain  Fisk  desired  Mr.  Mariner  to  tell  him  that 
it  would  be  bad  policy  for  him  ever  to  attempt 
taking  a  ship,  as  it  would  prevent  other  ship* 
coming  to  trade  with  them,  or,  if  they  came 
at  all,  it  might  be  to  punish  him  and  his  people 
for  their  treachery :  as  soon  as  Finowunderstoocb 
what  the  captain  said,  he  made  a  step  forward 
to  Mr.  Mariner,  and  taking  his  hand,  pressed  it 
cordially  between  his  *,  saying  with  tears  in 
his  eyes,  and  a  most  benevolent  and  grateful  ex- 
pranon  of  feature,  "  Tell  the  chief  that  1  shall 
44  always  consider  the  Papalangies  as  my  tfc- 

M lotions j— as  my  dearest  brothers;  and  rathfer 

■  *  • 

.  *3Ie  badjearot  the  action  of  taking  the  band  from  ibe 

■.    «■     «  « 

KaglBihiaen  there,  and  used  to  tay  it  was  the  most  friendly 
and  moat  expressive  way  of  denoting  one's  feeKng  of 

•  ■      "  ■•      ••««  « 

Cfttlyfi         ' 


44      CBARAeTER    OF   THE    PRESENT    KISQ.% 

".  would  1  lose  my  life  than  take  any  thing  front 
*  them  by  force  or  treachery."  He  had  scarcely 
finished  speaking  when  the  captain  exclaimed, 
€t  I  see,  I  see  what  he  means, — you  need  not 
'*  translate  me  that ! 

:  Ftuow's  intellect  was  also  very  extraordinary, 
that  is  to  say,  it  was  naturally  Very  strong,  and 
was  very  little  obscured  by  prejudices :  we 
have  seen  several  instances  of  the  wisdom  of  hie 
conduct;  and  a  few  anecdotes  will  serve  to  shew 
that  bis  specific  reasoning  faculty  was  very  far 
above  the  dommon.  He  had  learnt  the  mecha- 
nism of  a  gun-lock  by  his  own  pure  investiga- 
tion :  one  day,  on  taking  off  the  lock  of  a  pistol 
to  clean  it,  be  was  astonished  to  find  it  some- 
wfcat  differently  contrived,  and  a  little  more 
<1mqHm*triim*1to  which  he  bad 

bought  so  clever  wmA  jferifcet  tat  be  could  not 
eoseeve  nty  4Mng  better :  <m  seeing  thte,  how- 
ever, be  wttaomewtot  ponied,  at  first  with  ths 
meebsfetem,  tad  afterwards  with  its  superiority 
to  the  common  lock,  but  be  would  not  bave  it 
explained  to  him  {  it  was  an  interesting  puzzle, 
vbich  he  wished  to  have  the  pleasure  of  solving 
himself:  at  length  he  succeeded,  and  was  as 
pleased  as  if  he  bad  found  a  treasure ;  and  in  the 
«f^ernoon  at  cava,  he  was  not  contented  till  he 
had  made  all  his  chiefs  and  mataboolw  undw- 


CHARACTER    OP    THE    PRESENT    KING.      45 

stand  it  also.  He  did  not  know  the  existence  of 
the  pulse  till  Mr.  Mariner  informed  him  of  it,  and 
fnade  him  feel  his  own,  at  which  he  was  great* 
ly  surprised,  and  wanted  to  know  how  the  Pa* 
palangies  first  found  it  out :  he  was  informed 
at  the  same  time,  that  the  pulse  was  influenced 
by  various  diseases  and  passions  of  the  mind ; 
arid  that  in  most  parts  of  the  world,  those  wbo&r 
profession  it  was  to  cure  diseases  often  judged 
of  the  state  of  the  complaint  by  the  pulse: 
uppn  which  he  went  about  to  two  or  three  that 
were  ill  to  feel  their  pulses,  and  was  much  de- 
lighted with  the  new  discovery.  A  few  days 
afterwards  one  of  his  servants  very  much  offend- 
ed him  by  some  unwarrantable  act,  upon  which 
he  became  violently  angry,  but  on  a  sudden 
the  thought  .struck  him  of  the  association  be- 
tween the  passions  and  the  pulse,  and  imme- 
diately applying  his  hand  to  his  wrist,  he  found 
it  beating  violently,  upon  which,  turning  to  Mr* 
Mariner,  be  said,  you  are  quite  right ;  and  it 
put  him  in  such  good  humour  that  the  servant 
got  off  with  a  mild  remonstrance,  which  asto- 
uhed  the  fellow  very  much,  as  he  did  not 
wdervtand  the  cause,  and  was  sitting  treui* 
UftAg  from  head  to  foot,  in  full  expectation  of  a 

kealing- 
•Mr.  Mariner  explained  to  him  the  form  an4 


46     CHARACTER    OF   THE   MlE&gNT   KIN*' 

general  laws  of  the  solar  system ;  the  magnify 
cent  idea  of  the  revolutions  of  the  planets*  tha 
diurnal  revolution  of  the  earth,  its  rotundity,  th& 
doctrine  of  gravity,  the  antipodes,  fhe  cattse  6f 
the  changes  of  the  seasons,  the  borrowed  light 
of  the  moon,  the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  fid*s,  fee.—1 
These  wefe  his  frequent  themes  of  discourse,  and 
objects  of  his  fine  understanding ; — they  pleased 
him,  astonished  Mm,  and  filled  him  with  in- 
tense desire  to  know  more  than  Mr.  Mariner 
was  able  to  communicate.  He  lamented  thtf 
ignorance  of  the  Tonga  people ;  he  waft  amazfed 
at  the  wisdom  of  the  Papalangies,  and  he  wish' 
ed  to  vhiit  them,  that  he  might  acquire  a  mind 
like  theirs.  The  doctrine  of  the  sun's  centrat 
situation  and  the  consequent  revolution  of  the 
planets  he  thought  so  sublime,  and  so  like  what 
he  supposed  might  be  the  ideas  and  invention* 
of  a  God,  that  he  could  not  help  believing  it? 
although  it  Mas  not  quite  clear  to  his  undei*-> 
standing-.  W  hat  he  seemed  least  to  compre- 
hend was  how  it  happened  that  the  antipodes 
did  not  fall  into  the  sky  below  (as  he  expressed! 
it),  for  he  could  not  free  his  mind  from  th6 
notion  of  absolute  up  and  down  .-  but  he  said 
he  had  no  doubt,  if  he  could  learn  to  read  and 
write,  and  think  like  a  Papalangi,  that  he  should 
bfcable  to  comprehend  itas  easily  as  a  Papatan^i* 


CHARACTER    OF   THR   PRESENT   KINO.     47 


for,  he  added,  the  minds  of  the  Papalangie* 
ft  re  as  superior  to  the  minds  of  the  Tonga  peo- 
ple as  iron  axes  are  superior  to  stone  axes ! — H* 
Qid  not,  however,  suppose  that  the  minds  of 
white  people  were  essentially  superior  to  ttifc 
minds  of  others  ;  but  that  they  were  mora 
clear  in  consequence  of  habitual  reflection 
and  study,  and  the  use  of  writing,  by  which 
a  man  could  leave  behind  him  all  that  he  had 
learnt  in  his  life-time. 

One  day  as  Mr.  Mariner  was  sharpening  an 
axe,  and  Finow  was  turning  the  grind-stone, 
the  latter  observed  that  the  top  of  the  stone  was 
not  only  always  wet,  but  so  replete  with  water 
that  it  was  constantly  fl)  iug  off  in  abundance 
on  the  application  of  the  axe ;  this  on  a  sudden 
thought  puzzled  him  ;  it  seemed  to  him  strange 
that  the  superabundance  of  water  should  not 
ran  off  before  it  got  to  the  top :  Mr.  Mariner 
began  his  explanation,  thus,  "  In  consequence 
of  the  quick  successive  revolutions  of  the  stone" 
-—when  on  a  sudden  Finow  eagerly  exclaimed 
(art  if  a  new  light  had  shot  across  his  mmd) 
*t  Now  I  understand  why  the  antipodes  do  not 
**  tall  off  the  earth,-*-it  is  in  consequence  of  the 
**.  earth's  quick  revolution  !" — This  was  a  falsa 
explanation,  and  he  himself  soon  saw  that  it 
"was,  much  to  his  disappointment ;  but  it  shews 


48     CHARACTER   OF   THE   PttEgEUT    KIM** 

the  activity  of  his  mind,  and  how  eager  it  was 
to  seize  every  idea  with  avidity  that  seemed  to 
cast  a  radiance  upon  the  object  of  his  research. 
On  another  occasion  they  were  returning  ta 
Vavaoo  from  the  Hapai  islands,  where  the  king 
had  been  to  fetch  some  of  his  property,  con- 
sisting chiefly  of  things  which  originally  be- 
longed to  the  officers  of  the  Port  au  Prince : 
among  others  there  was  a  box  containing  sun- 
dry small  articles  and  a  pocket  compass ;  the 
latter  he  did  not  know  the  use  of,  and  had  scarce- 
ly yet  examined.     During  the  whole  day  it  wa» 

9 

nearly  calm,  and  the  paddles  were  for  the  most 
part  used :  a  breeze,  however,  sprang  np  after 
dark,  accompanied  with  a  thick  mist :  taking 
it  for  granted  that  the  wind  was  in  its  usual  dir 
recti  on,  they  steered  the  canoe  accordingly,  and 
sailed  for  about  two  hours  at  the  rate  of  seve$ 
knots  an  hour.  As  they  did  not  reach  the 
shores  of  Vavaoo,  the  thought  now  occurred  ty 
Mr.  Mariner  that  the  wind  might  possibly 
have  changed,  and  in  that  case,  having  no  star 
for  a  guide,  a  continuance  of  their  course  would 
be  exceedingly  perilous ;  he  therefore  searched 
for  the  compass  to  judge  of  (heir  direction,  when 
he  was  much  alarmed  to  find  that  the  wind  had 
chopped  round  nearly  one  quarter  of  the  com- 
pass.   He  mj^tioned  this   to  the  king,  bit 


CHARACTER   OF   THE    PRESENT    KING.      49 

he  would  not  believe  that  such  a  trifling 
instrument  could  tell,  which  way  the  wind  was ; 
and  neither  he,  nor  any  other  chief  on  board, 
was  willing  to  trust  their  lives  to  it :  if  what 
the  compass  said  was  true,  they  must  indeed  be 
running  out  to  sea  to  an  alarming  distance ;  and 
as  night  was  already  set  in,  and  the  gale  strong, 
their  situation  was  perilous.  Most  on  board, 
however,  thought  that  this  was  a  trick  of  Mr. 
Mariner  to  get  them  out  to  some  distant  land, 
that  he  might  afterwards  escape  to  Papalangi ; 
and  even  Finow  began  to  doubt  his  sincerity. 
Thus  he  was  in  an  awkward  predicament: 
he  was  certain  they  were  going  wrong,  but  the 
difficulty  was  how  to  convince  them  of  what 
was  now,  in  all  probability,  essential  to  their 
existence,  for  the  weather  threatened  to  be  bad, 
and  it  seemed  likely  that  the  night  would  conti- 
nue very  dark.  At  length,  he  pledged  his  exist- 
ence for  their  safety,  if  they  would  but  follow 
his  advice,  and  suffer  him  to  direct  their  course ; 
and  that  they  should  kill  him  if  they  did  not 
discover  Vavaoo,  or  some  of  the  other  islands, 

• 

by  son-rise.  This  pledge  was  rather  hazardous 
to  him,  but  it  would  have  been  still  more  so, 
for  them  all,  to  have  continued  the  course  they 
were  then  in.  They  at  length  consented  ;  the 
was  immediately  close  hauled,  and  Mr. 

VOL.  II.  E 


60     CHARACTER    OF   THE    PRESENT    KING. 

Mariner  directed  their  steering ;  the  gale  luckily 
remained  nearly  steady  during  the  night;  all 
on  board  were  in  great  anxiety  during  the 
whole  time,  and  Mr.  Mariner  not  the?  least  bo 
among  them.  In  the  morning,  as  soon  as  the 
light  was  sufficiently  strong,  a  man,  who  was 
sent  up  to  the  mast-head,  discovered  land,  to 
the  great  relief  of  their  anxiety  ;  and  the  rising 
sun  soon  enabled  them  to  recognize  the  shores 
of  Vavaoo,  to  their  unspeakable  joy,  and,  in 
particular,  to  the  wonder  and  amazement  of 
Finow,  who  did  not  know  how  to  express  his 
astonishment  sufficiently  at  the  extraordinary 
properties  of  the  compass.  How  such  a  little 
instrument  could  give  information  of  such  vast 
importance,  produced  in  him  a  sorf  of  respect- 
ful veneration,  that  amounted  to  what  was  little 
short  of  idolatry ;  for  finding  that  Mr.  Mariner 
could  not  explain  why  it  always  pointed  more 
or  less  to  the  north,  he  could  hardly  be  per- 
suaded but  what  it  was  inspired  by  a  hotaoa. 
He  was  so  pleased  with  this  property  of  the 
compass,  that  he  almost  always  carried  it  about 
him  afterwards :  using  it  much  oftener  than  was 
necessary,  both  at  sea  and  on  shore,  for  it  al- 
ways seemed  a  new  thing  to  him. 

It  may  easily  be  supposed,  that  Finow,  with 
raclt  an  enquiring  mind  as  he  possessed,  took 


CHARACTER    6F    FlNO'w    FIJI.  51 

delight  in  every  thing  that  afforded  him  instruc- 
tion, or  satisfiedjus  curiosity  ;  not  only  in  re- 
gard tq  things  that  were  very  extraordinary, 
but  those  also  that  were  moderately  common 
and  useful.  He  was  accustomed,  therefore,  to 
visit  the  houses  of  canoe-builders  and  carpen- 
ters, that  he  might  learn  their  respective  arts, 
and  he  often  made  very  judicious  observations. 
He  very  frequently  went  into  the  country  to  in- 
spect the  plantations,  and  became  a  very  good 
agriculturist,  setting  an  example  to  all  the 
young  chiefs,  that  they  might  learn  what  was 
useful,  and  employ  their  time  profitably.  He 
used  to  say,  that  the  best  way  to  enjoy  one's 
food  was  to  make  oneself  hungry  by  attending 
to  the  cultivation  of  it. 

There  were  many  individuals  at  the  Tonga 
islands  besides  Finow>  that  possessed  uncom- 
mon intellect,  as  well  as  good  disposition  of 
heart,  but  none  of  them  seemed  endowed  with 
that  extraordinary  desire  of  investigation  which 
to  strongly  characterised  the  king.  Among  the 
most  remarkable  of  these  was  his  uncle,  Finow 
Fiji,  and  his  friend,  Hala  A 'pi  A'pi.  The  first 
of  these  was  venerated  for  his  wisdom ;  a  qua- 
lity which  he  derived  rather  from  his  great  expe- 
rience, steady  ttftnper  of  mind,  and  natural  solid 
judgment,  than  from  the  light  of  extraordinary 

e2 


52  CHARACTER    OF    FINO'W    FIJI. 

• 

intellectual  research.  Nevertheless,  this  divine 
quality  was  marked  in  his  ^mntenance ;  there 
was  something  graceful  and  venerable  about 
his  forehead  and  brow  that  commanded  respect 
and  confidence.  ,  He  had  no  quick  sparkling 
look  of  ardour,  nor  fire  of  impetuosity,  but 
his  deep-seated  eye  seemed  to  speculate  deli- 
berately upon  objects  of  importance  and  utility. 
His  whole  physiognomy  was  overshadowed  by  a 
cast  of  sublime  melancholy,  but  hejhad  been  one 
of  the  greatest  warriors  that  Tonga  ever  pro- 
duced. The  islands  of  Fiji,  (whence  he  derived 
his  name),  had  been  the  scenes  of  his  achieve- 
ments, and  the  stories  recorded  of  him  equalled 
those  of  romance ;  his  arm  had  dispensed  death 
to  many  a  Fiji  warrior,  whose  surviving  friends 
still  recollect  the  terror  of  his  name  ;  but  all  the 
warlike  propensities  of  this  mighty  chieftain 
seemed  now  absorbed  in  a  conviction  of  the 
vanity  and  absurdity  of  useless  bloodshed ;  and 
nothing  seemed  now  to  afford  him  a  greater 
pleasure,  (next  to  giving  counsel  to  those  who 
asked  it),  than  to  play  with  little  children,  and 
to  mingle  with  unwonted  cheerfulness  in  their 
amusements.  Finow  Fiji  was  perhaps  about 
fifty  years  of  age,#  and  was  become  rather  cor- 

•  No  native  of  Tonga  knows  hit  age,  for  no  account  of  tht 
revolution  ef  yean  k  kept. 


CHARACTER    OF   HALA   A'PI   A'PI.  S3 

pulent :  his  whole  demeanour  was  not  erect, 
powerful,  and  commanding,  like  that  of  his 
brother,  the  late  .king,  but  his  slow  step  and 
steady  action  shewed  something  of  solid  worth 
in  his  character,  that  wrought  respect  in  the 
beholder  without  any  mixture  of  fear. — It  has- 
just  been  said,  that  Finow  Fiji  performed  most 
of  his  warlike  feats  at  the  Fiji  islands  :  the 
greater  part  of  the  time  that  he  was  there, 
Hala  Api  Api,*  though  a  much  younger  man, 
(about  thirty,)  was  his  constant  friend  and  com- 
panion ;  they  always  fought  near  together,  and 
were  said  to  have  owed  their  lives  to  each 
other  thirty  or  forty  times  over.  The  mutual 
friendship  of  these  two  was  very  great,  although 
their  characters  were  widely  different  in  many 


To  form  a  tolerable  idea  of  Hala  Api  Api, 
we  must  conceive  to  ourselves  a  slim  yet  athle- 
tic and  active  figure,  of  a  middling  stature,  full 
of  fire  and  impetuosity ;  endowed  with  a  mind 
replete  with  the  most  romantic  notions  of  heroic 
bravery :  fall  of  mischief  (without  malignity), 
wrought  up  with  the  most  exuberant  genero- 
mtj :  the  heat  and  inconstancy  of  youth  was  in 
him  ftrangely  mixed  with  the  steadiness  and 
of  age :  no  man  performed  more  mis- 
chief whose  conduct  towards  Talo  has  beei* 


64  t'UAKAClXU    or    IIALA    A'A»I    a'pI. 

chievous  tricks  than  be,  at  the  expense  of  tiie 
lower  orders,  and  yet  they  all  liked  him  :  if  any 
other  chief  oppressed  them,  they  flew  to  Hala 
Api  A  pi  for  redress,  and  he  always  defended 
their  cause  as  if  it  was  his  own,  often  at  the 
risk  of  his  life  ;  and  this  he  did  seemingly  from 
pure  motives  of  pity.  He  would  weep  at  the 
distress  of  which  they  complained,  and  the  next 
moment  his  eyes  would  flash  with  indignation, 
at  the  injustice  of  the  oppressor,  and  seizing  his 
club,  he  would  sally  forth  to  redress  their  wrongs. 
If  he  committed  any  depredations  himself,  he 
would  sometimes  be  equally  sorry,  and  make 
ample  reparation.  On  other  occasions,  how- 
ever, his  mind  would  remain  for  a  considerable 
length  of  time  in  the  same  wild  and  ungoverna- 
ble disposition  ;  and  the  report  of  his  depreda- 
tions would  reach  the  king's  ears  (the  late  king), 
'  who  would  say, "  what  shall  I  do  with  this  Hala 
"  Api  Api  ?  I  believe  I  must  kill  him."  But  Hala 
Api  Api  neither  feared  death  nor  the  king,  nor 
any  other  power.  There  was  nobody  but  what 
liked  him,  and  yet  every  body  feared  him.  His 
mind  was  like  a  powerful  flame,  constantly  in 
action,  and  constantly  feeding  upon  every  thing 
that  could  be  made  food  of.  Talk  to  him  about 
battles,  and  he  looked  as  if  he  were  inspired. 
Tell  him  a  pathetic  story,  and  the  tears  would 
run  down  his  cheeks  faster  than  you  could 


CHARACTER   OF    HALA    A' PI    A'PI.  55 

count  them.  Tell  him  a  good  joke,  and  there 
was  nobody  would  laugh  more  heartily  than  he. 
The  late  king  used  to  say,  that  Hala  Api  Api 
would  prefer  two  days  hard  fighting  without 
food  more  readily  than  the  most  peaceable 
man  would  two  days  food  without  fighting.  No 
sooner  did  the  younger  Finow  come  to  be  king, 
than  his  friend,  Hala  Api  Api,  (to  the  astonish- 
ment of  every  bod}),  left  off  his  mischievous 
tricks,  and  ceased  to  commit  any  acts  of  depre- 
dation. On  being  asked,  by  Mr.  Mariner, 
his  reason  for  this,  he  replied  : — "  The  present 
king  is  a  young  man,  without  much  experience, 
and  I  think  I  ought  not  to  throw  obstacles  in  the 
way  of  his  peaceable  government,  by  making  him 
uneasy,  or  creating  disturbances.  The  old  king 
had  great  experience,  and  knew  how  to  quell 
disturbances :  besides,  he  was  fond  of  fighting, 
and  so  I  gratified  my  humour,  without  caring 
about  the  consequences ;  but  such  conduct  now 
might  be  very  bad  for  the  country."  Hala  Api 
Api's  countenance,  and  his  whole  figure,  very 
well  pourtrayed  his  character :  his  small  quick 
eft  gave  an  idea  of  wonderful  activity ;  and, 
though  he  looked  as  if  he  were  a  mischievous 
fellow,  yet  his  general  physiognomy  expressed 
much  generosity,  good  senfte,  and  understand* 
ing :  his  whole  body  was  exceedingly  well  pro- 
portioned, and  he  was  considered  one  of  the 


t 

M  ARRIVAL   AT    LEFOo'GA.  , 

best  made  men  at  Vavaoo.  He  was  beyond 
conception  swift  of  foot ;  to  see  him  run,  you 
would  think  he  outstripped  the  wind  ;  the  grass 
seemed  not  to  bend  beneath  his  feet,  and  on  the 
beach  you  would  scarcely  expect  to  find  the 
traces  of  his  footstep. 

Such  is  a  general  sketch  of  some  of  the 
principal  men  of  Vavaoo,  who  had  always  be- 
haved in  a  most  friendly  way  to  Mr.  Mari- 
ner, and  who  it)  of  course  he  could  not  help 
feeling  very  great  regret  at  parting  with.  His 
attention  was  soon  occupied,  however,  by  the 
arrival  of  -the  ship  at  the  Hapai  islands,  where 
she  stood  off  and  on  during  the  time  she  re- 
mained (two  days)  between  the  islands  of 
Haano  and  Lefooga. 

A  vast  number  of  canoes  came  alongside 
f)rom  the  neighbouring  islands,  and  several  of 
the  chiefs  were  allowed  to  come  on  board.  Mr.- 
Mariner  now  took  the  earliest  opportunity,  in 
the  first  place,  to  procure  the  escape  of  any 
Englishmen  who  might  be  there ;  and, secondly, 
to  fulfil  the  sundry  commissions  he  had  received 
from  his  Vavaoo  friends.  The  cooper  of  the 
Port  au  Prince,  who,  it  will  be  recollected,  was 
the  last  man  that  remained  on  board  with  him, 
was  now  under  the  protection  and  in  the  service 
of  Voona,  who,  with  Tpobo  Toa,  came  on  board 
the  Favourite.  He,  therefore,  immediately  took 


TRANSACTIONS    AT    LEFOo'gA.  57 

proper  means  to  get  the  cooper  (Robert  Brown) 
on  board,  and  had  the  pleasure  of  succeeding. 
Other  Englishmen  were  at  the  more  distant 
islands,  and  Robert  Brown  most  generously  un- 
dertook to  go  for  them,  at  the  risk  of  being  de- 
tained, or  of  the  ship's  departure  without  him. 
The  captain  advised  him  not  to  go,  if  he  valued 
his  own  liberty ;  but  he  replied,  "  it  would  be 
very  hard  indeed  if  one  Englishman  could  not 
assist  another,  although  it  was  at  his  own  risk/' 
He  was  particularly  interested  in  the  fate  of 
Samuel  Carlton,  the  boatswain  of  the  Port 
au  Prince,  who  had  always  been  his  intimate 
friend.  This  man's  case  was  rather  hard  :  when 
he  was  in  England,  he  was  about  to  be  married 
to  a  young  woman  to  whom  he  had  been  long 
attached ;  but  thinking  he  had  not  yet  sufficient 
to  begin  the  world  with,  in  some  business  on 
shore,  he  thought  it  would  be  more  prudent  to 
go  first  another  voyage  and  increase  his  means, 
and  accordingly  he  entered  on  board  the  Port 
au  Prince.  During  his  residence  at  the  I lapai 
islands  he  was  always  in  a  low  and  almost  de- 
sponding state  of  mind,  and  his  friend  Robert 
Brown  most  cordially  participated  in  his  dis- 
tras.  At  the  moment  we  are  speaking  of,  the 
latter  conjectured  that  he  was  at  Namooca,  and 
resolved  to  run  the  greatest  risks  to  effect 


58  TKAXSACTIONS   AT    LEFOOGA. 

his  escape,  as  well  as  that  of  others  whom  he 
supposed  to  be  with  him,  particularly  George 
Wood,  the  carpenter's  mate.  He  accordingly, 
after  much  trouble,  and  offer  of  considerable  re- 
wards,  persuaded  four  of  the  natives  to  accom- 
pany him  to  Namooca,  a  distance  of  fifty  miles, 
in  a  single  sailing  canoe,  where,  when  he  ar- 
rived, to  his  great  mortification,  he  found  that 
the  object  of  his  search,  as  well  as  two  or  three 
other  Englishmen,  were  gone  to  the  island  of 
Tonga,  to  assist  the  friends  of  Toobo  Toa,  in 
the  garrison  of  Hihifo.  He  then  deliberated, 
whether  he  should  push  on  to  Tonga,  a  distance 
of  sixty  miles  farther ;  but  the  men  refused  to 
take  him,  and  he  was  obliged  to  return,  bring- 
ing with  him  Emanuel  Perez,  a  Spaniard,  and 
Josef,  a  black,  who  both  belonged  to  the  Port 
au  Prince.  In  the  mean  time,  three  more  En- 
glishmen arrived  on  board,  viz.  Nicholas  Blake 
(seaman),  and  Thomas  Eversfield  and  Wil- 
Miam  Brown,  (lads  of  17  years  of  age),  who 
afterwards  returned  on  shore,  refusing  to  go 
away*. 

•  It  must  be  mentioned,  that  two  or  three  men  belong- 
ing to  the  Port  au  Prince  got  away  about  eighteen  montht 
before,  in  a  schooner  which  happened  to  touch  at  Vavaoo. 
Among  these  was  William  Towel,  who  now  resides  in 
Cross-street,  Westmorland-place,  City-road,  and  follows  the 


TRANSACTIONS    AT    LEFOO'GA.  59 

Mr.  Mariner  was  much  disappointed  on  find- 
ing that  bis  adopted  mother,  Mafi  Ha  be,  was 
gone  to  a  distant  island  to  see  some  friend  ;  the 
presents  that  he  brought  for  her  from  the  king 
and  queen  he  left,  therefore,  with  one  of  her  re- 
lations, to  be  given  to  her  as  soon  as  she  return- 
ed, with  some  presents  from  himself,  to  keep  in 
remembrance  of  him.     He  sent  on  shore,  to 
the  island  of  Foa,  for  the  old  mataboole,  the 
confident  of  Hala  Api  A  pi,  and  communicated 
to  him  the  message  from  that  chief.    He  also 
communicated  to  Toobo  Toa  the  king's  advice 
to  him,  viz.  never  to  attempt  the  invasion  of  Va- 
vaoo,  but  to  confine  himself  to  the  cultivation 
and  prosperity  of  his  own  islands :   to  which 
he  replied,  that  war  was  necessary  to  keep  the 
minds  of  his  chiefs  employed,  that  they  might 
not  meditate  conspiracies ;  and  that  he  should, 
therefore,  direct  his  arms  against  some  of  the 
garrisons  at  the  island  of  Tonga.     He  had  the 
greatest  respect,  he  said,  for  Finow's family;  but 
hecooldnothelpit  if  some  of  his  chiefs  (as  on  the 
late  occasion),  made  attacks  upon  Vavaoo,  for 
want  of  other  employment.  One  of  the  warriors 
wfcowasengaged  in  that  unsuccessful  expedition 
now  ofl  board :  he  was  wounded  on  that 


of  a  hairdresser.  Mr.  Mariner  was  at  that  period  at 
tbfd  MaDds,and  knew  nothing  of  the  schooner't  arrival. 


CO  TRANSACTIONS    AT    LEFOOGA. 

occasion  in  the  arm  by  a  ball  from  Mr.  Mariner's 
musket.  About  a  twelvemonth  before,  he  laid 
a  wager  with  Mr.  Mariner  that  he  could  not  hit 
a  mark  which  he  put  on  a  cocoa-nut  tree  at  a 
certain  distance  with  his  musket :  the  bet  was 
a  pig.  Mr.  Mariner  accepted  the  wager,  and 
the  king  promised  to  pay  the  pig  if  he  lost :  it 
happened,  however,  that  he  missed,  and  the 
king  lost  his  pig.  The  warrior,  as  soon  as  he 
saw  Mr.  Mariner  on  board,  cameup  to  him,  and 
said,  smiling,  "  I  find  you  can  shoot  better  than 
you  did  at  the  cocoa-nut  tree."  Mr.  Mariner 
eaquired  after  his  wound,  and  was  happy  to 
find  that  it  had  got  nearly  well.  The  ball  had 
passed  through  the  fleshy  part  of  the  arm  ;  his 
Hapai  surgeon,  however,  had  laid  the  wound 
considerably  open,  and  managed  it  very  well. 

It  was  very  ludicrous  to  hear  the  different 
strange  excuses  and  apologies  made  by  the  na- 
tives, in  regard  to  the  affair  of  the  Port  au 
Prince,  with  a  view  to  persuade  the  captain 
that  they  had  nothing  to  do  with  it.  Many 
said  that  they  were  not  on  board ;  and  knew  no- 
thing about  it  till  it  was  all  over,  and  then  they 
were  very  sorry  indeed  to  hear  of  it,  and  thought 
it  a  very  bad  thing :  ene  man  acknowledged 
that  he  was  on  board,  being  there  out  of  curi- 
osity, but  that  he  knew  nothing  beforehand  of 


TRANSACTIONS    AT    LI^OO'GA.  61 

the  conspiracy,  and  took  no  part  in  it :  another 
acknowledged  that  he  was  on  board  under  like 
circumstances,  and  he  was  quite  astonished 
when  they  began  to  kill  the  white  men ;  he 
declared,  that  he  saved  one  white  man's  life, 
but  while  he  was  turning  round  to  save  an- 
other's, the  man  whose  life  he  had  just  saved 
got  killed  on  the  spot.  Several  regretted  they 
were  not  at  Lefooga  at  the  time,  as  they  were 
sure  they  could  have  saved  several  of  the  Papa- 
langies :  they  all  affirmed  that  they  were  very 
fond  of  the  Papalangies ! ! 

Toobo  Toa,  and  Voona,  both  askedJMr.  Ma- 
riner why  he  had  chosen  to  remain  at  Vavaoq, 
and  if  they  had  not  behaved  equally  kind  to 
him  as  the  king,  or  any  of  the  Vavaoo  chiefs. 
To  this  he  replied,  that  he  preferred  Vavaoo  to 
the  Hapai  islands,  as  the  latter  place  brought 
to  hit  mind  many  disagreeable  remembrances : 
it  was  where  his  ship  had  been  destroyed,  and 
where  he  had  met  with  many  insults  from  the 
lower  orders  on  his  first  arrival ;  besides,  he  ac- 
knowledged that  he  preferred  the  disposition 
of  the  Vavaoo  people  generally,  and  that  he 
thought  it  would  be  highly  ungrateful  in  him 
to  leave  the  protection  of  a  family  that  had  be- 
friended him  all  along. 

After  two  days  stay  at  the  Hapai  islands, 


<S2  TRANSACTIONS    AT    LEFOO'tiA. 

Captain  Fisk  ordered  the  natives  out  of  the 
vessel,  and  directed  his  course  to  the  Fiji  islands, 
to  lay  in  a  stock  of  sandal  wood  for  th* 
China  market.  It  may  be  proper  here  to  men- 
tion, that  the  conduct  of  one  of  those  (who 
chose  to  remain  behind)  was  very  suspicious. 
He  did  not  originally  belong  to  the  Port  au 
Prince,  but  was  taken  by  her -in  one  of  her 
prizes  (a  Spanish  vessel),  when  he  gave  him- 
self out  to  be  an  American,  though  it  appeared 
afterwards  that  he  was  a  native  of  Cornwall. 
He  resided  at  llapai,  with  a  chief  named 
Lioofau,  who  was  known  to  be  a  cunning, 
treacherous  character,  and,  according  to  the 
accounts  of  many  natives,  this  man  was  as  bad. 
Thus  much,  however,  is  certain,  that  when  Mr. 
Mariner  took  leave  of  the  king,  the  latter  taking 
him  on  one  side,  whispered  to  him  to  have  a 
watchful  eye  upon  Lioofau,  and  the  Papalangi, 
mentioning  his  name,  for  that  they  certainly 
meant  to  take  a  vessel  the  first  favourable  op- 
portunity. When  the  ship  arrived  at  the  Hapai 
islands,  this  man  came  on  board,  expressing 
his  wish  to  return  to  Europe,  and,  as  he  was 
not  to  be  judged  upon  mere  hearsay  evidence, 
the  captain  gave  him  a  pair  of  trowsers  and 
shirt,  and  he  fulfilled  his  duty  with  the  rest  of 
the  sailors  :  though  there  was,  as  Mr.  Mariner 


TRANSACTIONS   AT    LEFOO'GA.  63 

conceived,  a  great  deal  in  his  manner  and 
watchful  eye  that  looked  badly.  Just  upon  the 
ship's  departure,  however,  he  got  into  a  canoe, 
and  told  the  captain  that  he  had  changed  his 
mind  and  would  remain  where  he  was,  and 
went  on  shore  without  returning  the  trowsers 
and  shirt.     Mr.  Mariner  afterwards  heard,  in 
China,  that  he  had  served  the  captain  of  the 
schooner  before  mentioned  exactly  in  the  same 
way.   The  gentleman  from  whom  he  had  this 
information  in  China  received  it  from  the  cap- 
tain himself,  who,  at  the  same  time,  expressed 
his  firm  opinion,  that  this  man  meant  to  take 
an  European  ship  the  first  opportunity,  or  at 
leapt to  be  instrumental  in  doing  it,  by  giving  the 
natives  instructions  how  it  was  best  to  be  done. 
We  forbear  repeating  the  name  of  this  indivi- 
dual, lest  the  reports  of  him  should  have  been 
greatly  exaggerated ;  there  is  too  much  reason 
to  fear,  however,  that  his  designs  were  bad,  and 
this  notice  may  serve  as  a  hint  to  ships  who 
may  hereafter  touch  there.     The  character  of 
the  Hapai  people  is  not  naturally  more  trea- 
cherous than  that  of  ttte  people  of  Vavaoo ;  but 
as- they  have  more  petty  chiefs  whose  interest 
they  have  to  consult,  the  opportunity  for  trea- 
chery is  perhaps  more  frequent:  and  if  our  great 
circumnavigator,  whose  death  the  world  has  so 


t 


64      ANECDOTE  OF  CAPTAIN  COOK. 

much  reason  to  deplore,  had  known  them  in 
this  respect,  he  would  not  have  misnamed  them 
friendly;  for,  in  feet,  they  had  deliberately 
planned  a  conspiracy  against  him,  and  which 
would  infallibly  have  been  pnt  in  execution, 
if  the  chiefs  who  planned  it  had  not  disputed 
about  the  exact  mode  and  time  of  making  the 
assault.  Finow  (at  that  time  tributary  chief  of 
the  Hapai  islands,  Toogoo  Ahoo  being  king), 
was  not  the  designer  of  this  conspiracy,  but  he 
gave  counsel  and  advice  respecting  it.  The 
other  chiefs  proposed  to  invite  the  captain  and 
his  officers  to  a  grand  bo-m£e  (a  night  dance 
by  torch-light),  and  at  a  signal  to  massacre 
him,  his  officers,  and  all  the  marines  ;  but  Fi- 
now (the  late  king's  father),  objected  to  this, 
as  the  darkness  of  the  night  would  be  unfavour- 
able to  their  operations  in  taking  the  two  ves- 
sels, and  proposed  rather  that  it  should  be 
done  by  day,  and  that  they  should  seize  the  op- 
portunity of  making  the  attack  on  the  occasion 
of  a  grand  entertainment  which  was  shortly  to 
be  given  to  him  in  honour  of  his  arrival,  and 
after  they  were  all  destroyed,  the  men,  who 
would  naturally  come  in  search  of  him,  were 
to  be  conducted  to  the  further  part  of  the  island 
under  pretence  that  he  was  there,  and  tliey  were 
then  to  be  destroyed  in  like  manner :  and  thus 


ANECDOTE  OF  CAPTAIN  COOK.      89 

the  two  ships,  their  crews  being  so  weakened, 
might  be  taken  (as  they  supposed),  with  ease* 
The  entertainment  was  prepared,  and  Captain 
Cook  and  several  officers  being  invited  were 
present ;  it  happened,  however,  a  little  before 
the  appointed  time  when  the  signal  was  to  be 
given,  that  most  of  the  chiefs  still  expressed  their 
opinion  that  the  night-time  would  have  been 
better  than  the  day,  and  Finow*  finding  that  the 
majority  were  of  this  opinion*  was  much  vexed, 
and  immediately  forbad  it  to  be  done  at  all . 
Thus,  no  signal. being  given,  the  amusements 
went  on  without  interruption,  and  Captain  Cook 
and  his  officers  were  much  pleased  with  their 
entertainment,  acknowledging  it  to  be  far  better 
than  anv  other  that  thev  had  received  at  the 
Friendly  islands.  (See  his  third  voyage.)  Mr. 
Mariner  had  this  information  at  different  times 
from  several  chiefs  who  were  present,  and  in 
particular  from  Finow  himself,  (the  father  of 
the  present  king,  and  son  of  the  chief  who  was 
at  the  head  of  the  conspiracy.) 

As  every  information  must  be  interesting 
which  regards  the  history  or  fate  of  this  great 
and  good  man,  to  whom  society  owes  so  much, 
we  cannot  omit  mentioning  some  circum- 
stances, subsequent  to  his  death,  upon  which 
the  above  anecdote  so  naturally  leads  the  mind 

VOL.  II.  F 


9$  CAPTAIN   COOK'S   DEATH. 

to  reflect.  The  people  of  the  Tonga  island^ 
behaved  toward*  Cook  with  every  external 
demonstration  of  friendship,  whilst  they  ae- 
oratty  meant  to  kill  him ;  and  the  people  of  the 
Sandwich  islands,  although  they  actually  did 
kill  him,  have  paid,  and  still  continue  to  par 
him,  higher  honours  than  any  other  nation  of 
the  earth ;  they  esteem  him  aft  having  befcn  sent 
by  the  gods  to  civilize  them,  and  one  to  whom 
they  owe  the  greatest  blessings  they  enjoy. 
His  bonea  (the  greater  part  of  which  they  have 
still  in  their  possession!)  they' devoutly  hold 
afcered ;  they  are  deposited  in  a  house  conbe* 
orated  to  a  god,  and  ate  annually  carried  in 
procession  to  many  other  consecrated  houses, 
before  each  of  which  they  are  laid  on  the 
ground,  and  the  priest  returns  thanks  to  the 
gods  for  having  sent  them  so  great  a  man. 
When  the  Port  au  Prince  was  at  Woahoo  (one 
of  the  Sandwich  islands),  Mr.  Mariner  was 
informed  of  the  above  circumstances  by  an 
Englishman  (or  perhaps  an  American),  who 
was  a  resident  there :  his  name  was  — — — 
Harebottle ;  he  seemed  a  man  of  some  informa- 
tion and  respectability,  and  was  formerly  the 
mate  of  an  American  vessel  that  touched  there, 
but,  in  consequence  of  some  disagreement  with 
tb«  captain,  he  chose  to  remain  at  those  islands/ 


CAPTAIN    COOK'S    I)EATIK  67 

and  acted  id  the  capacity  of  harbour-master  to 
the  king,  and  pilot  to  all  ships  that  arrived, 
from  each  of  which  he  demanded  five  or  *i* 
dollars  for  his  services.  This  person  informed 
Mr.  Mariner  that  the  natives  of  Owkybee  re- 
turned very  few  of  the  bones  of  Captain  Cook* 
but  chiefly  substituted  the  bones  of  some  otitar 
Englishman  that  was  killed  on  that  melanr 
tholy  occasion ;  and  that  those  of  Cook  went 
carried  annually  in  procession  as  above  related. 
When  Mr.  Mariner  afterwards  understood  the 
Tonga  language,  he  conversed  upon  the  sub- 
ject with  the  natives  of  Owhyhee,  who  were  with 
him  at  Vavaoo ;  they  corroborated  every  thing 
that  Harebottle  had  said,  and  stated,  more* 
over,  that  the  natives  had  no  idea  that  Cook 
could  possibly  be  killed,  as  they  considered 
him  a  supernatural  being,  and  were  atfonishad 
when  they  saw  him  fall.  The  man  who  killed 
him  was  a  carpenter,  and  his  immediate  motive 
was,  either  the  apprehension  that  Captain 
Cook  was,  at  that  moment,  ordering  his  ne» 
to  increase  their  fire,  or,  that  he  struck  him, 
sot  knowing  him  to  be  the  extraordinary  telBf 
of  whom  he  had  heard  so  much,  for  he  lived  P 
rsnsMsraMe  distance  up  the  country,  and  *W 
not  personalty  acquainted  with  hint.  Ttafi&fc 

r2 


6$  4APTA1N   COPE'S    DEATBf. 

of  their  illustrious  victim  was  shared  out  f* 
different  gods,  and  afterwards  burnt ;  #lrilst 
the  bones  were  disposed  of  as  before  related. 
Among  the  natives  of  Owhyhee,  from  whom 
Mr.  Mariner  heard  this,  one  was  a  chief  of  a 
middling  rank,  the  rest  werfe  of  the  lower  order; 
but  they  all  agreed  in  the  same  statement ;  they 
bad  not'  been  eye-witnesses,  howeter,  of  that 
taiel&richoly  transaction  (for  they  were  alt  young 
men),  but  they  spoke  of  these  things  as  being 
universally  known  at  the  Sandwich  isdaiicfa, 
and  beyond  »H  doubt.  They  stated,  nioreovet, 
that  the  king  and  principal  chiefs  Mere  ex- 
ceedingly sorry  for  the  death  of  their  extraor- 
dinary benefactor,  and  would  have  made  any 
sacrifices  in  their  power  rather  than  so  tnelan- 
choly  an  accident  should  have  occurred.  It  is 
related  in  Cook's  Voyages,  that,  as  soon  as  he 
received  his  wound,  the  natives  were  seen  to 
•snatch  the  dagger  (by  which  his  death  was 
effected),  from  each  other's  hands',  displaying 
a  savage  eagerness  to  join  in  his  destruction. 
In  all  probability,  however,  this  eagerness  to 
seize  the  dagger  was  prompted  in  each  by  the 
wi0h  to  be  possessed  of  an  instrument  which 
had 'become  consecrated,  as  it  weir,  by  the 
death  of  so  great  a  man ;  at.  least,,  this  is  pee- 


ARRIVAL   AT   TKB   FIJI   ISLANDS.  09 

■ 

turned,  from  what  would. have  been  the  senti- 
meat,  had  the  accident  happened  at  the  Tonga 

imIab^a 

At  length  the  Favourite  arrived  at  the  inland 
of  Pau  ^one  of  the  Fyi  islands),  and ,  anchored, 
off  a. place  called  Vooiha,  famous  for  .sandal-. 
wood*,  for  which  the.,  captain  soon  began  to 
treat  with  the  natives,  and,  before  the  ship's 
departure,  laid  in  several  tons.    In  the  mean 
time,  Mr.  .Mariner  went  several    times  on, 
shore,  and  had  opportunities  of  receiving  con-, 
Qnaatiow  of  what  he  had  heard  from  Caw; 
Mooaia  (see  Chap.  X.)..  The  natives  appeared, 
tg  be  a  race  considerably  inferior  to  the  Tonga, 
people, .  partaking  rather  of  the  negro  cast  of 
countenance  and  form,   at  least  in  a.  small, 
degree.     As  far  as  Mr.  Mariner  had  oppor- 
tunities of  observing,  their  domestic  comforts 
appeared  much  inferior  to  those  of  the  people 
he  had  just  left.    They  do  not  oil  themselves,. 
and  to  this  he  attributes  the  coarseness  and 
hanthnes*  of  skin,  which  is  so  different  from . 
that  of  the  Tonga  people.    Their  hair  was 
somewhat  more  curly,  and  rather  disposed  to 

•  ■  •  # 

be  woolly.    Their  whole  external  character, 
taking  it  generally,  seemed  fierce  and  warlike, . 
rather  thap  brave  and  noble.  ,  Their  only  dress 
v£*  the  *oAi  (see  Vol.  I.  p.  340),  and  tbif  naked- » 


fb  tUt  1SLAMM. 

new  ot^ttjpearanee  serves  at  once  to  sink  ttom 
tfa  *  degree  of  civilutatiod  below  the  natives  of 
Tonga,  and  the  Society  islands.     It  is  to  fee 
lamented  that  Mr.  Mariner  toad  not  oppor- 
tunities of  seeing  more  of  the  natives  of  theee 
islands  than  be  did,  with  a  view  of  drawing,  m 
jnfeter  comparison  between  them  and  the  pee* 
pie  whose  manners  be  was  so  well  acquaints*! 
with;  but  the  apprehension  thai  some  nasi* 
debt  might  again  detain  him  just  ontheooe 
of  his  return  to  civillted  society,  pteventtt 
film  from  going  bn  shore  so  often,  or  so  #«v 
as  he  otherwise  might  have  done.    He  wo* 
cUrrou*  to  dfseover  what  opinion  they  had  of 
die  Natives  of  Tonga,  and  found,  umfbraalyv 
that  they  confafdered  the  latter  to  be  a 
treatthfcrotts  race;  whilst  these,  asalreail, 
lated,  acotise  Hie  Fiji  people  of  poaseesmg  Mfe 
game  bad  character;  but,  «  all  ptobabilffcjt, 
iter*  h  not  mtich  difference  between  tbeti  in 
thifc  inspect.    From  all  that  he  has  seen,  ant 
all  that  he  has  heard,  however,  he  is  tlteposetl 
to  belteve  that  the  Fiji  people  light  with  more 
ftffy  ami  animosity  than  the  Tonga  people, 
but  that  the  latter,  where  they  have  beten  se* 
riettsly  injured,  harbour  eenthnents  of  revtfttge 
ft*  %  longer  time.    Mr.  Mariner  witnessed  no 
iinMnMt  of  tawnioalfem  awsn*  them,  bat  tow 


WUi    ISLANUS.  71 

made  no  scruple  to  acknowledge  that  such 
instances  were  very  frequent,  and  Cow  Moo* 
*farfs  account  of  the  feast  of  Chichia,  where  two 
lumdred  human  bodies  were  served  up,  was 
continued  by  the  report  of  several  of  the  na- 
tives of  Pau,  who  were  net,  indeed,  present, 
but  who  spoke  of  it  with  much  indifference, 
ns  having  heard  it  often  from  those  who  were 
present,  and  «s  being  a  tiling  so  likely,  that 
Jhessmss  np  reason  to  doubt  it.  He  haji  k 
also  confirmed  by  a  native  of  Tonga,  resident 
At  Am,  who  acted  as  his  interpreter,  and  who 
was  foment  at  this  horrible  feast.  The  lan- 
guage mi  these  people  is  very  different  in  sound 
ibe  Tonga  language,  and  is  much  more 
to  pronounce;  it  is  replete  with  very 
percussions  of  the  tongue,  and  with  a 
rattling  of  the  letter  r.  It  is  rather  a 
fret,  if  true,  and  it  appears  to  be  so 
ail  that  we  can  learn,  that  the  language 
»f  the  Sandwich  islanders  is  more  similar  to 
JfceHouga  language  than  that  of  the  Fiji 

though  the  latter  people  are  not 
than  about  one  ninth  part  of  the  distance 
of  th^ Sandwich  islands  from  Tonga. 

Tlpere  were  several  Englishmen  (or  Aipe- 
rirNH)  J*  the  island  of  Pau,  byt  pone  tf  then* 
wjsfcsd  IftOgac  awqr  w  the  Favourite,  juospt 


ft  Fill    ISLANDS. 


one;  but  as  Captain  Fisk  had  already  more 
hands  on  board  than  he  wanted,  and  aa  this 
man  was  not  thrown  accidentally  (by  atrip- 
wrei  k  or  otherwise),  among  these  people*  but 
had  left  his  ship  voluntarily,  the  captain  did 
not  choose  to  take  him.  It  is  much  to  be 
regretted  that  most  of  these  men  were,  from 
all  report,  but  indifferent  characters,  and  had 
left  their  respective  ships  from  no  good  motive: 
they  bad  frequent  quarrels  among  themselves, 
in  which  two  or  three  had  got  murdered.  Mh\ 
Mariner's  information  upon  this  point  is  from 
Fiji  natives  who  visited  Tonga,  and  also,  about 
four  months  ago,  from  an  Englishman  *  who 
had  lived  some  two  or  three  years  at  Pan,  and 
whom  he  accidentally  met  near  London,  and 
who  declared  that  he  was  heartily  glad  .to 
come  away,  because  he  was  afraid  to  live  on 
the  same  island  with  his  companions,  lest  he 
should  be  killed  in  some  quarrel;  and,  if  his 
report  is  to  be  credited,  bis  companions  were  a 
very  bad  set,  likely  to  do  a  great  deal  of  mis* 
chief,  not  only  to  the  natives  by  giving  them 

*  This  rami's  name  if  Thomas  Lee ;  he  lived  at  that  tint 
at  Hendon,  and  was  frequently  employed  in  bringing  hay  tw 
London.  He  has  since  left  that  pjaee,  and  is  somewhere  ia 
town,  bat  we  have  not  been  able  to  find  him.  He  was  very 
wjsH  *xa|usintod  with  Cow  Mooala,  the  Tonga  mataboofe. 


ARRIVAL   AT    MACAO.  73 

but  a  mean  and  unjust  opinion  of  civilized  na- 
tions, but  also  to  ships  touching1  there,  who 
might  not  be  sufficiently  on  their  guard. 

The  Favourite,  having  laid  in  her  store  of 
sandalwood,  after  five  or  six  days  stay  at  Pau, 
weighed  anchor  and  resumed  her  voyage,  and, 
in  about  five  weeks,  arrived  at  Macao.  At  art 
early  opportunity  Mr.  Mariner  procured  the 
following  certificate  from  Captain  Fisk,  think-. 
ing  it  might  be  of  service  to  him,  as  he  wa&v 
totally  unknown  to  every  body. 

*'  This  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer,  William 
44  Mariner,  belonged  to  the  unfortunate  ship 
"  the  Port  an  Prince,  that  was  cut  off  at  the 
44  Hapai  islands,  and  that  he  was  taken  from 
**  thence  by  the  brig  Favourite/' 

(Signed)  A.  Fisk. 

Roads,  Dec.  28, 1810. 


As  he  had  but  little  money  in  his  possession0, 
he  resolved,  the  first  opportunity,  to  enter  on 
boud  one  of  the  company's  ships  bound  to 

*  He  had  about  fifty  or  sixty  dollars  in  his  possession, 
pvt  of  which  had  been  given  to  him  by  his  adopted  mother, 
l|sl  Habe;  the  remainder  he  procured  from  a  female  native 
«f  Lefitoga,  by  giving  her  a  consideration  for  them  in  beads, 
*c«  dieaa  dollars  belonged  originally  to  the  Port  au  Prince, 


74      MR.  MARINER'S  ARRIVAL  IN  LONDON. 

.England,  and  work  his  passage  home.  it  hap* 
pened,  however,  luckily,  that  he  fell  in  with 
the  officers  of  the  Company's  cruiser,  the  Aw- 
**lope,  who,,  taking  an  interest  in  his  story, 
corroborated  by  the  account  of  Captain  Fiak, 
invited  him  on  board  the  Antelope,  where, 
with  the  permission  of  Captain  Roes,  he  re- 
mained for  a  couple  of  months,  till  an  oppor- 
tunity offered  of  going  to  England.  He  is 
.happy  to  acknowledge,  through  this  medium, 
his  deepest  senjse  of  obligation  to  tbia  gentle* 
man  in  particular,  and  the  officers  in  general 
of  the  Antelope,  for  their  extraordinary  civility 
and  kindness  to  him  whilst  he  remained  on 
board ;  and  not  less  to  Captain  Robert  Wei* 
bank,  of  the  Honourable  East  India  Company's 
ship,  the  Cufihells,  who  received  him  on  board 
\\i\h  a  letter  of  recommendation  from  Captain 
Ross,  and  gave  him  his  passage  to  England. 

The  Cufihells  arrived  at  Gravesend  in  June 
1911,  tehen  Mr.  Mariner  went  on  shore,  and  im- 
mediately came  up  to  town ;  but,  whilst  look- 
ing outtfbr  his  father's  boose,  who  in  the  mean 
while  had  changed  his  residence,  he  was  im- 
pressed and  sent  on  board  the  tender:  he 
immediately  wrote  to  a  friend,  to  acquaint  his 
father  with  his  arrival  and  his  situation.  His 
jEathcr,  not  Jeas  overjoyed' Jthaii  surprised  at  tbis 


CONCLUDING    STATEMENT.  74 

i 

unexpected  information,  repaired  on  board  to 
yisit  his  son,  whom,  an  hour  before,  he  had 
imagined  (if  he  was  even  alive),  to  be  resident 
among  a  savage  people  on  the  other  side  of 
the  globe,  with  little  or  no  view  of  making  his 
escape*.  After  seven  years  long,  hopeless  ab- 
sence, the  hour  of  meeting  arrived;  the  cir- 
cumstances and  sentiments  of  which  we  leave 
to  the  imagination*  Mr.  Mariner  found  his 
father  in  mourning  for  his  mother :  each  had 
much  to  relate  to  the  other :  but  this  was  not 
the  time  for  free  and  unreserved  communica- 
tion: whilst  the  son  was  a  prisoner,  the  father 
had  to  exert  himself  to  procure  his  liberation, 
and  in  which  lie  at  length  succeeded,  Wfter  a 
week's  detention. 

As  it  may  be  considered  interesting  to  know 
the  fete  of  all  the  ship's  company  of  the  Port 
au  Prince,  we  shall  conclude  this  chapter  with 
*  list  of  those  who,  along  with  Mr.  Mariner, 
survived  her  capture.  Besides  the  eight  natives 
of  the  Sandwich  islands*  there  ware  belonging 
to  the  ship  fifty-two  persons:  twenty-six  (in- 

•  Mr.  Mariner's  father  haft  heard  from  WBHam  Towel, 
ped  ibortt  eighteen  months  before  him,  that 
tiring,  and  9t01  at  Vavaoo ;  but  <he  had  repre- 
kb  sJUsttioD  as  rather  haaardous  and  fcofctm.    <9te 

). 


76  COXCLVDIXG   STATEMENT. 


eludings  Mr.  M.)v  were  on  board  a*  the,  time 
the*  ship « was  taken,  and,  of  these  twenty-six; 
there  *  ere  twenty-two  massacred  on  the  spot: 
of  those  uho  were  on  shore;  three,  besides  Mr. 
Brown,  the  whaling-master,  were  also  mur- 
dered, making*  in  all,,  twenty-six,  who  loft 
their  I  ires  on  that  disastrous  occasion.  The 
remaining  twenty-six  .are  correctly  accounted 
for  in  the  following  list.  The  eight  natires  ef 
the  Sandwich  islands,  probably,  had  a  hint 
from  their  countryman,  Tooi-Tooi,  to  keep' 
themselves  out  of  harm's  way,  which  they 
effectually  did.  The  ensuing  statement  it 
drawn  up  in  the  order  in  which  the  different 
events  happened. 

t 

John  Scotland,  Gunner;  Jacob  Myebs,  Seaman;  Wix*. 

li am  Foiid,  Seaman. — Left  Namooca  in  a  small  paddling 

.  canoe,  and  were  never  afterwards  heard  of:  supposed  to 

Lave  been  lost,  as  a  paddle  belonging  to  that  canoe  was 

found  shortly  afterwards,  washed  on  shore  at  Namooca' 

4&bm  Hzarsey,  Sail-waker. — Left  the -island  of  Tonga  lh- 
aa  American  vessel ;  but  was  accidentally  drowned  at  the 
Fiji  islands,  as  reported  by  some  Englishmen  at  Fiji. 

Hugh  Williams,  Seaman;  John  Parish,  and  Jeremiah 
Higgins,  Landsmen*— Escaped  from  Vavaoo  in  an  A  mo-, 
rican  vessel,  nearly  two  years  before  Mr.  Mariner  left. 
The  captain  of  this  vessel,  whose  name  is  not  recollected, 
refused  to  take  Mr.  Mariner  on  board,  stating  that  be 
had  hands  enough. 


CONCLUDING   STATEMENT.  77 

"William  Towel,  Captain's  steward;  Robert  Fitzgerald, 
a  boy .-j— Left  Vavaoo  in  a  Botany  Bay  vessel,  at  a  time 
when  Mr.  Mariner  was  at  the  Hapai  islands.  William 
Towel  is  now  residing  in  Cross-street,  Westmorland-place, 

-   City-road. 

Jonx  Watson,  Seaman* — Had  gone  to  the  Fiji  islands  with 
a  Tonga  chief,  but  Mr.  Mariner  did  not  hear  any  thing 
of  him  there. 

Samuel  Carlton,  Boatswain;  George  Wood,  Carpen- 
ter's mate;  William  Singleton,  Landsman;  Alex- 
ander Mac  ay,  a  boy. — Were  at  the  island  of  Tonga 

'  at  the  time  the  Favourite  arrived  at  the  Hapai  islands, 
and  lost  that  opportunity  of  escape.  Mr.  Mariner  has 
since  heard  that  Samuel  Carlton  came  away  afterwards 
in  another  vessel. 

James  Waters,  Ordinary  seaman. — Refused  to  leave  Va- 
vaoo on  account  of  age  and  infirmities. 

Nicholas  Blake,  Seaman;  Willi  am  Brown,  and  Thomas 
Everrfisld,  boys;  John  Roberts,  a  black  native  of  the 
island  of  Tortola,  a  boy. — Refused  to  leave  the  Hapai 
islands  under  various  pretences. 

William  Stevenson,  a  child  of  two  years  of  age,  native  of 
the  Sandwich  islands,  the  son  of  a  Botany  Bay  convict, 
at  Woahoo,  whence  the  sail-maker  had  taken 
the  Port  au  Prince,  at  the  request  of  his  father, 
that  ha  might  be  brought  to  his  relations  in  Scotland  to 
bt  educated.    This  child  was  adopted  by  the  daughter  of 

the  lafte  king,  (the  widow  of  the  late  Tooitonga,)  and 

•   •        ••  ^ 

was  much  noticed :  he  probably  still  remains  at  Vavaoo, 
''-tad  m**t  now  be  about  twelve  years  old,  being  two  when 

teltJkhh&tifer. 
JtauT- Bvdwxy  Cooper ;   Thomas  Dawson,  Seaman; 

Tmouam  Brown,  Landsman;  Manuel  Peeez,  Seaman; 


78  CONCLTJDIKG    STATEMENT. 

Jossr,  ft  Madu— These  came  away  with  Mr.  Mariner  in 
the  Fvrourito ;  all  but  Thomas  Brown  were  under  the  ne- 
cessity of  remaining  in  the  East  Indies*  Thomas  Brown 
got  employment  on  board  one  of  the  homeward-bound 
vessels  from  China,  and  came  to  England  in  the  same 
feet  with  Mr.  Mariner.  Thomas  Dawson  has  since  boos 
in  London. 

• 

Mr.  Mariner  regrets  very  much  not  being; 
able  to  furnish  dates;  his  only  method  of 
keeping  time  was  by  cutting  certain  notcke* 
on  certain  trees  (unknown  to  any  one,)  but 
even  with  such  rude  memoranda,  he  was  only 
out  in.  his  calculation  one  day  at  the  tima  Qf 
the  Favourite's  arrival. 

In  the  ensuing  pages,  we  shall  endeavour  to 
furnish  a  correct  view  of  all  the  manners,  cus- 
toms, and  sentiments  of  the  Tonga  people, 
that  have  not  been  mentioned,  or  sufficiently 
dwelt  upon  in  the  foregoing  part  of  the  work, 
and  which,  it  is  hoped  will  be  found  exceed- 
ingly interesting,  as  offering  a  striking  con- 
trast to  the  manners,  customs,  and  sentiments 
of  civilized  nations ;  and  upon  these  subjects 
we  shall  speak  in  the  following  order:  via. 
Rank  in  society,  religious,  civil  and  pfpfct- 
sional;  religion;  religious  ceremonies;  know- 
ledge ;  dress ;  domestic  habits ;  pastimes ;  m»» 
sio  and  poetry ;  and  lastly,  language. 


PRELIMINARY   OBSERVATION'S;'  W 


CHAP.    XVII. 


rYelmiiaary  observations— -Rank  in  society— Tooitonga— 
Yeachi — Inspired  priests — The  king— Nobles— Order  of 
succession  to  rank — Matabooles — Mooas— Tooas — Pro- 
fessional classes  of  society,  hereditary  and  otherwise— 
fiMe  of  the  order  of  professions — Succession  to  pro- 
party— Old  age— FamaW  sex— >Wi*es  of  chiefs— Adopt- 
ed mthers— *Concabi&es  of  chiefs— Arts  practised  by 
women  ■  'Children, 


x  nude  or  estimation  in  which  individual* 
held  in  society  at  the  Tonga  islands  may 
be  moat  conveniently  treated  of,  first,  under 
different  points  of  view,  viz.  religious, 
tod  professional,  with  reference  to  their 
,  political  subordination,  and  their 
and  manufactures  ;  and  secondly,  with  re- 
to  old  age,  female  sex,  and  infancy. 
m  chapter,  we  propose  to  speak  merely  of 
in  society,  and  the  degree  of  respect  due 
e  man  to  another ;  all  which  is  deter- 
regard  to  every  individual,  by  one  or 
jmk  of  the  foregoing  circumstance*, 


80  PRELIMINARY    OtfSfcRf  ATIOtt*. 

mythology,  politics,  arts,  age,  sex,  and  child- 
hood. 

To  divide  society  into  distinct  classes,  and 
to  discourse  of  the  degree  of  rank  or  respect 
accruing  to  individuals,  accordingly  as  they 
may  belong  to  one  or  other  of  these  classes, 
would  be  a  task  very  difficult  to  execute,  and 
perhaps  impossible  in  respect  to  the  people  of 
these  islands;  at  least,  not  without  making 
numerous  exceptions  and  explanations,  which 
would  only  be  the  means  of  rendering,  the  de- 
scription both  tedious  and  complicate.     For 
one  and  the  same  individual,  (a  priest,)  who  to* 
day  is  held  in  scarcely  any  estimation,  may 
to-morrow,  (under  the  influence  of  the  inspfra» 
tion  of  some  god,)  take  place  of  every  body 
present,  seat  himself  at  the  head  of  the  cava 
ring,  be  respected  as  the  god   himself,  andi 
his  discourse  attentively  listened  to  as  oractthrtU 
Again, — the  king  himself,  whom  one  might* 
suppose  to  be  the  greatest  person  in  the  cona** 
try,  (aud  in  fact  be  has  the  greatest  power,)  i» 
by  no  means  the  highest  noble,  but  must  yifeU* 
in  point  of  rank  to  many  others.     In  this  order 
of  things,  therefore,  we  shall  first  speak  of  those, 
persons  to  whom  rank  and  respect  is  yielded? 
on  the  score  of  religious  circumstances;   au4. 
these  are  Too i tonga,  Veachi,  and  the  priests.  >- 


too'ito'nga.  81 

■ 

We  here  speak  of  Tooitonga  as  if  actually 
existing  in  his  full  rank,  with  all  the  public 
honours  of  religious  estimation ;  but  it  will  be 
recollected,  that  before  Mr.  Mariner's  departure 
from  Vavaoo-  the  king  had  done  away  entirely 
with  all  the  ceremonies  formerly  considered 
due  to  the  divine  character  of  this  chief; 
and  as  this  was  done  immediately  after  Tooi- 
tonga's  death,  his  son  did  not  succeed  to  this 
high  title;  so  that  if  affairs  still  remain  in  the 
same  state  at  Vavaoo,  there  is  at  present  no 
Tooitonga,  and  probably  never  again  will  be  ; 
but  if  there  should  happen  some  violent  poli- 
tical ehange,  it  is  possible  the  son  of  the  late 
divine  chief  may  be  raised  to  that  honour :  we 
therefore  speak  of  Tooitonga  as  if  actually  ex- 
isting. The  family  name  of  Tooitonga  is  Fa- 
tafehi,  and  the  present  head  of  the  family,  the 
only  son  (of  legitimate  rank,)  is  now  a  youth 
of  stent  sixteen  or  seventeen  years  of  age ;  his 
Fatafehi  Low  fili  Tonga :  he  is  still 
a  chief  of  high  rank,  and  has  re- 
speetpaid  to  hhn  accordingly. 

Tooitonga  and  Veachi  are  both  acknow- 
Mfe*4  descendants  of  chief  gods  who  formerly 
rtftrfthe  islands  of  Tonga,  but  whether  their 
original  mothers  were  goddesses  or  merely  na- 
tives of  Tonga,  is  a  question  which  they  do  not 

vou  II.  o 


82  TOO'lTOfrGAr. 

pretend  to  decide.  Of  these  tiro  personage 
Tooitonga,  as  may  be  guessed  from  his  title,* 
i*  far  higher  in  rank ; — the  word  imports  chief 
of  Tonga,  which  island  has  always  been  con- 
sidered the  most  noble  of  all  the  Friendly 
islands,  and  from  time  immemorial  the  great- 
est chiefs  have  been  accustomed  to  make  it 
their  principal  place  of  residence,  and  after 
their  decease  to  be  buried  there  in  the  tombs 
of  their  ancestors.  This  island,  moreover,  give* 
name,  by  way  of  pre-eminence,  to  all  the 
islaiids  taken  collectively,  as  a  capital  town 
sometimes  gives  name  to  a  country ;  and  withal 
it  has  acquired  the  epithet  of  sacred,  taboo,  and 
is  thus  sometimes  called  Tonga  taboo,  denoting 
its  excellence;  from  this  circumstance  it  is 
erroneously  noted  down  in  our  charts  Tonga- 
taboo  ;  but  taboo  is  only  an  epithet  occasion- 
ally used.  The  respect  which  is  shewn  to 
Tooitotiga,  and  the  high  rank  which  he  hokfr 
in  society,  is  wholly  of  a  religious  nature,  and. 
is  far  superior,  when  occasion  demands  it,  to 
that  which  is  shewn  even  to  the  king  himself; 
for  this  latter,  as  will  by  and  by  be  seen,  is  by 
no  means  of  the  most  noble  descent,  but  yield* 
in  this  respect  to  Tooit6nga,  Veachi,  and  sen 
yeral  families  related  to  them ;  and  if  the  king 
were  accidentally  to  meet  any  chief  of  noblen 


TOOUTOfXGA.  83 

descent  than  himself,  he  would  have  to  sit 
down  on  the  ground  till  the  other  had  passed 
him,  which  is  a  mark  of  respect  that  a  common 
peasant  would  be  obliged  to  shew  to  any  chief 
or  egi  whatsoever;   and  for  this  reason  the 
king  never  associates  with  any  chief  superior 
to  himself,   and  always  endeavours  to  avoid 
meeting  them,  and  they  in  like  manner  endea- 
vour to  avoid  him,  that  he  might  not  be  put 
to   the  trouble  of  sitting  down  while   they 
passed :  for  if  any  one  were  to  forego  this  ce- 
remony in  presence  of  a  superior  egi,  some 
calamity  from  the  gods  would  be  expected  as 
a  punishment  for  the  omission.     Sitting  down 
is  with  them  a  mark  of  respect,  as  standing  up 
is  with  us,  before  a  superior ;  upon  the  princi- 
ple perhaps,  that  in  this  posture  a  man  cannot 
so  readily  attack  or  assassinate  the  person  in 
^hose  presence  he  is ;  or  it  may  be  that  in  this 
posture  lowering  his  height  is  significant  of 
his  rank  or  merit  being  humbled  in  presence 
of  the  other. 

-  There  are  many  ceremonies  which  charac- 
terise die  high  respect  and  veneration  shewn 
to  Tooitonga ;  but  as  in  this  place  we  are  dis- 
coursing of  rank,  not  of  ceremonies,  the  full 
description  of  the  latter  must  be  deferred  till 
we  come  to  speak  of  religious  rites.    Here  we 

o  2 


84  too'itq'nga. 

shall  only  mention,  in  a  general  way,  in  what 
these  ceremonies  chiefly  consist. 

1.  .The  grand  ceremony  of  inachi,  which  is 
performed  once  a  year,  (about  the  month  of 
October,)  and  consists  in  offering  the  first  fruits 
•f  the  year  to  Tooi tonga.  It  was  supposed 
that  if  tljis  ceremony  were  neglected,  the  ven- 
geance of  the  gods  would  fall  in  a  signal  man- 
ner upon  the  people. 

2.  Peculiarity  of  his  marriage  ceremony. 

3.  Peculiarity  of  his  burial  ceremony. 

4.  Peculiarity  of  the  mourning  for  his  de- 
cease^ 

5.  Tooitonga  is  not  circumcised,  as  all  the 
other  men  are,  unless  he  goes  to  foreign 
islands  to  undergo  this  ceremony ;'  nor  is .  he 
tattowed. 

6.  Peculiarities  of  speech,  used  in  regard 
to  Tooitonga  ;  for  instance,  if  the  king  or  any 
chief  but  Tooitonga  be  sick,  they  say  he  is  tbiga 
tdngiy  but  Tooitonga  being  sick,  he  is  said  to 
be  booloohi :  so  with  many  other  words  that 
are  used  exclusively  for  him,  and  which  will  be 
noticed  hereafter. 

These  things  are  mentioned  in  this  place, 
merely  to  afford  an  idea  of  the  high  venera- 
tion in  which  Tooitonga  is  held ;  for  to  whom 
but  the  greatest  personage  can  such  peculiari- 


te'achj'.  85 

ties  belong  ?  Notwithstanding  his  high  rant, 
however,  he  has  comparatively  but  very  little 
absolute  power,  which  extends  in  a  direct  and 
positive  manner  only  to  his  own  family  and 
attendants:  as  to  his  property,  he  has  sorfie- 
what  more  than  the  generality  of  the  nobles,  but 
much  less  than  the  king,  who  by  his  arbitrary 
sovereignty  can  lay  claim  to  almost  any  thing. 

Thus  all  that  can  be  said  in  this  place  of 
Tooitonga  is,  that  he  is  by  far  the  greatest 
egi,  having  the  credit  of  a  high  divine  original, 
and  that  all  respect  and  veneration  is  therefore 
due  to  him. 

Veachi',  as  mentioned  before;  is  another 
egi  of  divine  original,  biit  far  from  being 
equal  to  Tooitonga.  The  king,  indeed,  avoids 
hit  presence,  the  same  as  he  would  that  of 

a  * 

Tooitonga,  and  always  pays  him  the  usual 
obeisance  when  he  happens  to  meet  him: 
but  he  has  no  peculiar  marks  of  high  respect 
shewn  to  him,  as  are  shewn  to  Tooitonga ;  that 
is  to  say,  no  ceremonies  that  are,  in  them- 
selves, peculiar  and  different  from  what  are 
•hewn  to  other  chiefs  by  their  inferiors.  There 
is  this  one  universal  acknowledgment,  how- 
ever, vis.  that  he  is  a  great  chief  descended 
fan  a  god,  that  he  is  next  in  rank  to  Tooi- 
tonga, and  superior  to  every  other  chief.    His 


86  PRIEST*. 

■■  •  • 

name  has  no  known  literal  meaning  that  Mr. 
Mariner  can  discover. 

Priests  or  Fahe-gehe.  The  term fahe^geJie 
means  split  off,  separate,  or  distinct  from,  and 
is  applied  to  signify  a  priest,  or  man,  who  has 
a  peculiar  or  distinct  sort  of  mind  or  soul,  dif- 
fering from  that  of  the  generality  qf  mankind, 
whiclj  disposes  some  god  occasionally  to  in- 
spire him.  These  inspirations,  of  which  an 
account  has  been  given  vol.  i.  p.  105,  frequently 
happen,  and  on  such  occasions  the  priest  has 
the  same  deference  and  respect  shewn  to  him 
as  if  he  were  the  god  himself;  if  the  king  bap- 
pen  to  be  presenf,  he  retires  to  a  respects 
ful  distance,  and  sits  down  among  the  body 
of  the  spectators,  so  would  Veachi',  and  so 
would  even  the  high  divine  chief  Tooitonga, 
because  a  god  is  believed  to  exist  at  that 
moment  in  the  priest,  and  to  speak  from  his 
mouth:  but  at  other  times  a  priest  has  no 
other  respect  paid  to  him  than  what  his  own 
proper  family  rank  may  require.  They  ge- 
nerally belong  to  the  lower  order  of  chiefs,  or 
to  the  matabooles,  though  sometimes  great 
chief*  are  thus  visited  by  the  gods,  and  the 
king  himself  has  been  inspired  by  Tali-y-toobo, 
the  chief  of  the  gods.  During  the  time  a  priest 
ip  ipspired  he  is  looked  on  with  more  or  less 


THE  KINO.  *87 

feneration,  according  to  the  rarik  of  the  god 
-that  inspires  him.  But  more  upon  this 'sub- 
ject under  the  head  of  religion. 

The  civil  ranks  of  society  may  be  thus 
-divided;  How,  or  King;  Egi,  or  Nobles; 
Matabooles;  Moo  as,  and  T004S. 

The  How,  or  King,  is  an  arbitrary  monarch, 
deriving  his  right  to  the  throne  partly  from 
hereditary  succession,  and  partly  from  military 
power,  which  latter  he  is  occasionally  obliged 
to  exert  to  secure  himself  in  the  former.  His 
power  and  influence  over  the  minds  of  the 
people  is  derived  from  the  following  circum- 
stances; viz.,  hereditary  right ;  supposed  pro- 
tection of  the  gods,  if  he  is  the  lawful  heir; 
his  reputation  as  a  warrior;  the  nobility  of 
his  descent;  and  lastly,  but  not  leastly,  the 
strength  and  number  of  his  fighting  men. 
He,  of  course,  possesses  the  greatest  power  of 
any  individual  but,  in  respect  to  rank,  as  be- 
fore observed,  he  is  differently  circumstanced. 
In  this  last  particular,  not  only  Tooitonga, 
Veachi,  and  priests  actually  inspired,  are  su- 
perior' to  him,  but  even  several  other  nobles 
are  higher  in  rank,  not  as  to  office  or  power, 
but  as  to  blood,  or  descent,  for  nobility  consists 
io  being  related  either  to  Tooitonga,  Veachi, 
or  the  How,  and  the  nearer  any  family  is  re- 
lated to  them,  the  nobler  it  is ;  those  related 


88  EGI. 

to  Tooitonga  being  nobler  than  tho6e  equally 
related  to  Veachi,  and  those  related  to  this  latter 
being  more  noble  than  those  equally  related  to 
the  How.  Hence  it  appears  that  there  must 
be  many  egies  more  noble  even  than  the  king 
himself,  aud  to  such  the  king,  meeting  them, 
must  shew  the  same  marks  of  respect  as  are 
usual  from  an  inferior  to  a  superior :  and  if  he 
were  to  touch*  any  thing  personally  belonging 
to  the  superior  chief,  as  himself,  or  his  gar- 
ments, or  the  mat  on  which  he  sleeps,  be 
becomes  tabooed^  as  it  is  termed,  or  under  tbe 
prohibition  to  feed  himself  with  his  own  bands; 
or,  if  he  does,  it  is  at  the  risk  of  becoming  dis- 
eased, or  suffering  some  other  calamity  from 
the  gods  as  a  punishment :  but  from  this  taboo 
he  can  readily  free  himself,  by  performing  the 
ceremony  of  m6e~-m6e\  which  consists  in  touch- 
ing, with  both  hands,  the  feet  of  the  superior 
chief,  or  of  one  equal  to  him :  but  more  *f 
these  ceremonies  in  their  proper  place. 

Egi,  or  Nobles,  All  those  persons  are 
rgi,  or  nobles,  or  chiefs  (for  we  have  used  these 
terras  synonymously),  wYio  are  any  way  related 
cither  to  the  family  of  Tooitonga,  or  Veachi,  or 
the  How;  and  all,  and  nobody  else  but  chiefs, 
have  the  privilege  of  freeing  people  from  the 
taboo,  under  circumstances,  and  in  the  manner 
related  in  the  pbove  paragraph.    Topi  tonga 


£GI.  89 

ami  Veachi  may  easily  be  conceived  sources  of 
nobility,  on  account  of  their  supposed  divine 
original,  and  the  How  because  he  holds  the 
reins   of  government,   and   is    invested  with 
power.      The   family  of  Finow,   who   is   the 
present  How,  say,  that  they  descended  neither 
from  Tooitongu  nor  Veachi,  but  aik  altogether 
a  distinct  race:   the  fact,  probably,  is,   that 
Finow's  family  is  a  distant  branch  of  one  of 
the  others ;  but  having  at  length  ascended  the 
throne,  it  drew  its  rank  and  consequence  more 
from  this  circumstance  than  from  such  dis- 
tant relationship.     The  present  Finow's  father 
was  the  first  of  his  family  that  came  to  the 
throue,  which  he  did  by  usurpation  and  ex- 
pulsion of  the  then   reigniug  family.     (Vide 
vol.  i.  p.  77).     The  Hows  before  that  time,  as 
far  back  as  they  have  credible  records,  which 
is  not  more  than  about  four,  or,  at  most,  five 
generations,  were  all  relations  of  Tooitouga. 
At  all  events,  this  is  certain,  that  the  present 
acknowledged  fountains  of  nobility  are  Tooi- 
tonga,  Veachi,  and  the  king,  in  the  order  in 
which  they  here  stand.     In  every  family  nobi- 
lity descends  by  the  female  line;   for  where 
the  mother  is  not  a  noble,  the  children  are  not 
nobles;  but  supposing  the  father  and  mother 
to  be  nearly  equal  by  birth,  the  following  is  the 
order  in  which  the  individuals  of  the  family  are 


90  MATABOOLES. 

to  be  ranked,  viz.  the  father,  the  mother,  the 
eldest  son,  the  eldest  daughter,  the  second  son, 
the  second  daughter,  &c.,  or,  if  there  be  no 
children,  the  next  brother  to  the  man,  then  the 
sister,  the  second  brother,  the  second  sister,  &c. 
But  if  the  woman  is  more  noble  than  the 
man,  then %er  relations,  in  like  order,  take 
precedence  in  rank,  but  they  do  not  inherit  his 
property,  as  will  be  seen  in  another  place.  All 
the  children  of  a  female  noble  are,  without  ex- 
ception, nobles. 

The  Matabooles  rank  next  to  the  chiefs; 
they  are  a  sort  of  honourable  attendants  upon 
chiefs,  are  their  companions,  counsellors,  and' 
advisers  ;  they  see  that  the  orders  and  wishes 
of  their  chiefs  are  duly  executed,  and  may  not 
improperly  be  called  their  ministers,  and  are 
more  or  less  regarded  according  to  the  rank  of 
the  chief  to  whom  they  are  attached.  They 
have  the  management  of  all  ceremonies.  Their 
rank  is  from  inheritance ;  and  they  are  sup- 
posed to  have  been,  originally,  distant  rela- 
tions of  the  nobles,  or  to  have  descended  from 
persons  eminent  for  experience  and  wisdom, 
and  whose  acquaintance  and  friendship  on  that 
account  became  valuable  to  the  king,  and  other 
great  chiefs.  As  no  man  can  assume  the  rank 
and  title  of  mataboole  till  his  father  be  dead, 
the  greater  part  of  them  are  beyond  the  middle 


MOOAS.  ttl 

age  of  life,  and,  as  it  is  their  busiuess  to  make 
themselves  acquainted  with  all  rites  and  cere- 
monies, and  with  the  manners,  customs,  and 
affairs  of  Tonga,*  they  are  always  looked  up  to 
as  men  of  experience  and  superior  information. 
Some  of  the  matabooles  are  adepts  also  at  some 
art  or  profession,  such  as  canoe-frailding,  or 
superintending  funeral  rites :  this  last,  though 
a  ceremony,  the  generality  of  matabooles  do 
not  attend,  as  it  is  also  a  distinct  profession. 
Those  few  that  are  canoe- builders  are  very 
perfect  in  their  art,  and  only  make  canoes  for 
the  king,  or  other  great  chiefs.  The  mata- 
booles also  make  themselves  acquainted  with 
traditionary  records,  and  hand  them  down  to 
their  sons.  When  a  mataboole  dies,  his  eldest 
son,  or,  if  he  have  no  son,  his  next  brother, 
becomes  a  mataboole.  All  the  sons  and  bro- 
thers of  matabooles  are  mooas. 

Moo  as  are  the  next  class  of  people  below 
the  matabooles;  they  are  either  the  sons  or 
brothers  of  matabooles,  or  descendants  of  the 
latter.  As  the  sons  and  brothers  of  mata- 
booles are  mooas,  and  as  no  mooa  can  become 
a  mataboole  till  his  father  or  brother  whom  be 
is  to  succeed  is  dead,  so,  in  like  manner,  the 
sons  and  brothers  of  mooas  are  only  tooas,  and 
no  tooa  can  become  a  mooa  till  bis  father  or 
brother  whom  he  is  to  succeed  is  dead.     The 


92  TOO  AM. 

.mooas  have  much  to  do  in  assisting,  at  public 
ceremonies,  such,  as  sharing  out  food  and  cava 
under  the  direction  of  the  matabooles :  they 
sometimes  arrange  and  direct  instead  of  the 
matabooles,  unless  on  very  grand  occasions. 
Like  the  matabooles,  they  form  part  of  die  re- 
tinue of  chfeft,  and  are  more  or  less  respected 
according  to  the  rank  of  their  chiefs.  Most  of 
the  mooas  are  professors  of  some  art. 

Both  matabooles  and  mooas  have  the  busi- 
ness of  attending  to  the  good  order  of  society, 
to  look  to.  the  morals  of  the  younger  chiefs, 
who  are  apt  to  run  into  excesses,  and  oppress 
the  lover  orders  (the  tooas),  in  which  case  they 
admonish  them,  and  if  they  pay  no  attention, 
they  report  them  to  the  older  chiefs,  and  advise 
that  something  should  be  done  to  remedy  such 
evils.  They  are  very  much  respected  by  all 
classes.  Tooas  are  the  lowest  order  of  all,  or 
the  .bulk  of  the  people.  They  are  all,  by  birth, 
kyfrnnooa,  or  peasants ;  but  some  of  them  art 
employed  occasionally  in  the  various  occupa- 
tions of  performing  the  tattow,  cooking,  dub* 
earring,  and  shaving,  according  to  their  abi* 
litietf  in  these  respective  arts,  and  meet  with 
encouragement  by  presents.  Those  tooas  that 
ore  evidently  related  to  mooas,  and  consequently 
have  a  chance  of  becoming  mooas,  are  respected 
by  those  who  can  trace  no  such  relationship* 


PROFESSION*.  ,  08 

Professional  Class  op  Society.— We 
now  come  to  speak  of  those  who  draw  respect 
rather  than  rank  according  to  their  usefulness 
in  different  arts  and  manufactures,  more  or  less 
regarded.  Some  of  these,  as  we  have  before 
seen,  are  matabooles,  and  rank  accordingly, 
the  greater  part  of  them  are  mooas,  and  the  re- 
mainder of  course  tooas. 

Among  those  that  practise  the  arts  there 
are  many  that  do  it  because  their  fathers  did 
the  same  before  them,  and  consequently  have 
brought  them  up  to  it,  and  these  are  for  the  most 
part  such  as  practise  arts  that  are  considered 
ingeni6us,  and  therefore  respectable ;  and  hence 
they  hare  no  motive  sufficiently  strong  (unless  it 
be  sometimes  laziness),  to  engage  them  to  relin- 
quish it,  particularly  as  they  obtain  presents  from 
their  chiefs  for  their  ingenuity.  There  is  no  posi- 
tive law  to  oblige  them  to  follow  the  business  of 
their  fathers,  nor  any  motive  but  the  honour- 
able estimation  in  which  their  arts  are  held,  or 
their  oftrn  interest,  or  the  common  custom. 

None  of  them  are  matabooles  but  a  few  of 
the  canoe  builders  and  the  superintendants  of 
faaeral  rites;  perhaps  about  a  fifth  or  a  sixth  part 
of  them,  and  some  of  these  are  very  expert  in 
ratting  ornaments  out  of  whales  teeth  for  neck- 
ltces,  or  for  tallying  clubs,  likewise  in  mfcking 
dUhl  a&d*pefert,  and  other  warlike  instruments, 


04  PROFESSIONS. 

which  are  not  separate  professions,  but  arte 
practised  by  the  canoe  builders  as  being  ex* 
pert  in  the  use  of  the  togi  or  axe ;  at  least  there 
are  no  toqfoonga  fono  le  (inlayers  of  ivory),  n6r 
toqfbonga  gnahi  mea  tow  (makers  of  warlike  in- 
struments), but  who  are  also  canoe  builders. 
N  All  the  ttoqfoongafa  vaca  (canoe  builders),  and 
toqfoonga  taboo  (intendants  of  funeral  rites); 
that  are  not  matabooles  are  mooas,  for  no  per- 
son of  so  low  a  rank  as  a  tooa  can  practise  such 

m 

respectable  arts. 

The  remaining  professions  are  followed  both 
by  mooas  and  tobas,  with  the  exception  of  the 
three  following,  viz.  tcofovngdfy  cava  (barbers 
or  sharers  with  shells),  tangatafe  oornoo  (cooks)  y 
and  kyfonnooa  (peasants),  all  of  whom  are  tooas, 

Of  the  different  professions,  some  are  heredi- 
tary in  the  way  before  mentioned,  and  some  are 
not ;  the  latter  consist  of  toofbonga  ta  tat  tow  (those 
who  perform  the  tattow),  toqfoonga  tongi  acow 
(club  carvers,  or  engravers  of  the  handle,  ndt 
inlayers);  and  toqfoonga  fy  cava  (barbers.)  The 
arts  followed  by  these  are  not  hereditary,  be- 
cause they  are  not  of  that  respectability  to  en- 
gage &  m&n  to  follow  any  of  them  because  his 
father  did  the  same  ;  they  are  practised  by  any 
one  who  has  a  natural  turn  that  way. 

But  the  two  lowest  of  all,  viz.  the  cooks  and 
peasants,  are  such  by  inheritance,  for  the  chiefs 


PROFESSIONS.  96 

id  whose  service  they  may  be  necessarily  require 
their  services,  and  their  children  naturally 
succeed  them,  for  neither  of  these  arts  require 
any  great  talent  to  learn :  every  body  knows 
how  to  cook  and  till  the  ground  in  a  tolerable 
degree ;  but  those  who  are  born  to  no  better  fate 
have  no  alternative  left  them,  they  must  follow 
these  necessary  employments  as  the  business  of 
their  life,  if  their  chiefs  command  them ;  and  to 
such  alone  the  terms  cook  and  peasants  are  here 
applied.  The  cook  is  somewhat  the  superior ;  he 
sees  to  the  supplying  of  provisions,  takes  care 
of  the  store-house,  looks  to  the  thatching  and 
fences  of  the  dwelling-house,  occasionally  gives 
an  eye  to  the  plantation,  and  sometimes  works 
upon  it  himself.  The  head  cook  is  generally 
not  a  little  proud  of  himself,  and  is  looked  on 
with  some  respect  by  the  cooks  below  him  and 
the  common  peasants. 

The  term  cook  is  frequently  applied  to  a  man 
though  he  be  not  a  cook,  to  signify  that  he  is 
of  very  low  rank  :  for  although  a  cook  belong- 
ing to  a  chief  may  give  himself  many  airs,  and 
he  thought  something  of  by  the  common  tooas 
about  him ;  yet  if  there  be  a  company  of  pea- 
sants together,  he  that  has  the  least  to  boast  of 
in  respect  of  family  connexions  is  sure  to  be  made 
the  cook,  and  as  it  were  servant  to  the  rest. 

The  following  then  will  be  the  ordes  in  which 


96 


PROFESSIONS. 


the  different  professions  will  stand  as  to  the  re- 
spect they  may  command  in  society: — all  in- 
dividuals are  not,  however,  esteemed  according 
to  their  profession,  but  according  to  their  abili- 
ties in  it ;  for  a  clever  man  in  one  art  will  be 
sometimes  more  esteemed  than  a  man  of  mo- 
derate abilities  iu  a  higher.  In  this  arrange- 
ment the  cooks  are  placed  before  the  peasants, 
because  the  cooks  of  chiefs  generally  have  to 
overlook,  them.        • 


Hereditary./ 


Hereditary 
or  uot. 


^Tocfo6nga  fo  v&ca  ;  canoe 
builders. 
Toofoonga  fonole;  cutters 
of    whale-teeth   orna- 
ments. 
Toofoonga  taboo;  superin- 
tendants  of  funeral  rites.  J 

Toofoonga  ta  mica ;  stone-^ 
\  masons,  or  makers  of 

|  stone  coffins. 

Toofoonga  jiacob6nga;  net 
makers. 

Toofoonga  toty'  lea  ;  fisher- 
men. 

Toofoonga  langafulle;  large 

\^       house-builder*. 

^Toofoonga  tatatto'w;  those 
who  perform  the  tattow. 
Toofoonga  tongi  ac6w ;  club- 
carrers.  *  J 


Followedboth  by 
matabooles 
and  moots* 


Followed  both 
V    by  moas  and 

r»    "  te\r\a< 


tooas. 


/ 


[  Toofoonga  fy  cava ;  barbers  I 

\^        or  shavers  with  shells,    f    Followed  only 

tt  -  r^       I  Tangata  fe  oo'inoo;  cooks,  f      by  tooaa. 
Hereditary .  j  Ky  ^^  .  ^^       ^        J 

Property  in  .these  islands,  as  may  easily  be 
conjectured,  constats  principally  in  plantations, 


RESPECT  TO   AGE   AND   SEX.  07 

hornet,  and  canoes,  and  the  right  of  succession 
to  it  is  regulated  by  the  order  of  relationship,  as 
given  under  the  head  of  Nobles,,  p.  89,  so  in  like 
manner  is  the  right  of  succession  to  the  throne- 
Having  now  given  a  view  of  the  rank  of  indi- 
viduals in  society,  with  reference  to  religion* 
civil  government,  and  professional  occupations ; 
we  have  now  to  consider  it  in  respect  to  old  age, 
sex,  and  childhood. 

Old  persons  of  both  sexes  are  highly  reve* 
renced  on  account  df  their  age  and  experience, 
in  so  much  that  it  constitutes  a  branch  of  their 
first  moral  and  religious  duty,  vis.  to  reverence 
the  gods,  the  chiefs,  and  aged  persohs ;  and 
consequently  there  is  hardly  any  instance  in 
these  islands  of  old  age  being  wantonly  insulted* 
Women  have  considerable  respect  shewn  to 
them  on  account  of  their  sex,  independent  of 
the  rank  they  might  otherwise  hold  as  nobles. 
They  are  considered  to  contribute  much  to  the 
comforts  and  domestic  happiness  of  the  other 
sex,  and  as  they  are  the  weaker  of  the  two,  it  is 
thought  unmanly  not  to  shew  them  attention 
andkind  regard';  they  are  therefore  not  subjected 
to  hard  labour  or  any  very  menial  work.  Those 
that  we  nobles  xank  like  the  men  according  to 
the  superiority  of  their  relationship*  If  a  wo- 
man art  a  noble  is  the  wife  or  daughter  of  a 
mataboole,  she  ranks  as  a  mataboole ;  if  she  be 

VOL.  If.  h 


08  RESPECT   TO.  AGE   AND   SEX. 

a  noble,  she  is  superior  in  rank  to  him,  and 
are  the  children  male  and  female ;  but  in  do* 
mestic  matters  she  submits  entirely  to  his  ar- 
rangements ;  notwithstanding  this,  however,  she 
never  loses  the  respect  from  her  husband  due 
to  her  rank,  that  is  to  say,  he  is  obliged  to  per- 
form the  ceremony  of  jno'i-widi  before  he  can 
feed  himself.  If  the  husband  and  wife  are  both 
nobles  of  equal  rank,  the  ceremony  of  mo't- 
md'e  is  dispensed  with ;  but  where  there  is  any 
difference  the  inferior  must  perform  this  cere- 
mony to  be  freed  from  the  taboo.  If  a  woman 
marries  a  man  higher  in  rank  than  herself,  die 
always  derives  additional  respect  on  that  ac- 
count ;  but  a  man  having  a  wife  who  is  a  greater 
noble  than  himself  acquires  no  additional  re- 
spect from  this  source,  but  he  has  the  advantage 
of  her  larger  property. 

It  is  a  custom  in  the  Tonga  islands  for  wo- 
men to  be  what  they  call  mothers  to  chiWWn  or 
grown  up  young  persons  who  are  not  their  own, 
for  the  purpose  of  providing  them  or  seeing 
that  they  are  provided  with  all  the  conveni- 
ences of  life ;  and  this  is  often  done,  although 
their  own  natural  mothers  be  living,  and  re- 
siding near  the  spot, — no  doubt  for  the  sake  of 
greater  care  and  attention,  or  to  be  afterwards 
a  substitute  for  the  true  parent,  in  the  event  of 
her  premature  death ;  but  the  original  inten- 


RESPECT    TO    AGE   AND   SEX.  99 

tion  seems  not  now  understood,  for  it  happens 
sometimes,  that  a  young1  man  having  both 
his  natural  mother  and  a  wife  Hying,  will  take 
it  in  his  head  to  have  an  adopted  mother/ 
whom  he  regards  the  same  as  his  natural  pa- 
rent. If  a  woman  is  the  foster  mother  to  a 
person  superior  to  herself,  which  is  mostly  the 
case,  she  acquires  no  additional  respect  from 
this  source  in  society,  though  the  adopted  per- 
son be  ever  so  great  a  noble  ;  but  if  a  womanr 
is  an  attendant  to  a  person  of  consequence,- 
sonde  respect  always  accrues  to  her  on  that  ac- 
count, because  it  is  a  thing  publicly  known! 
•be  forming  a  part  of  the  retinue  of  the  chief, 
and  accompanying  him  every  where ;  whereat* 
the  relation  in  which  a  woman  stands  to  he* 
adopted  son  or  daughter  is  more  a  matter  of 
private  agreement  and  mutual  understanding. 
Thus,  Mafi  Habe,  one  of  the  wives  of  Finow 
the  first,  the  father  of  the  present  king,  was 
Mr.  Mariner's  foster  mother,  appointed  by  the 
king  her  husband.  To  this  person  Mr.  Ma- 
rawr  feels  himself  greatly  indebted  for  a  con* 
stferabte  portion  of  his  intimate  knowledge  of 
the  language  and  true  customs  of  Tonga,  in 
contradistinction  to  words  and  customs  intro- 
daeed  from  other  islands.  She  would  fre- 
quently take  the  greatest  pains  in  teaching 

h2 


100  RESPECT    TO   AGE   AND  SEX, 

him.  the  correct  Tonga  pronunciation,  and 
would  laugh  him  out  of  all  little  habits  and 
customs,  in  dress,  manners,  and  conversation, 
that  were  not  strictly  according  to  the  Tonga 
fashion,  or  not  considered  sufficiently  polished 
and  becoming  an  egi  (noble,)  In  all  respects, 
and  on  every  occasion,  she  conducted  herself 
towards  him  with  the  greatest  maternal  affec- 
tion, modesty,  and  propriety :  she  was  a  woman 
of  great  understanding,  personal  beauty,  and 
amiable  manners. 

If  a  young  girl  is  betrothed,  or  set  apart  to 
be  the  wife  or  concubine  of  a  noble  higher  in 
rank  than  herself,  she  derives  more  respect  on 
that  account,  independent  of  what  is  due  to 
her  own  proper  rank  • 

The  women  employ  themselves  (particularly 
nobles,)*  in  making  a  variety  of  articles,  chiefly 
ornamental ;  these  employments,  however,  art 
considered  accomplishments,  not  professions: 
some  of  the  higher  class  of  women  hot  only 
make  these  employments  an  amusement,  but 
actually  nfake  a  sort  of  trade  of  it,  without 
prejudice  to  their  rank ;  which  is  what  the 
lower  class  of  women  could  not  do,  because 
what  they  make  is  not  their  own  property,  but 
is  done  by  the  order  of  their  superiors ;  the 
highest  accomplishments  cannot  add  to  a  wo* 


RSBPRCT    TO    AGE    AND    8RX.  191 

man's  rank,  though  it  does  somewhat  to  the 
estimation  in  which  she  may  be  held,  for  such 
things,  when  well  done,  are  honourable  in  a 
woman  of  rank.  These  things  will  be  farther 
spoken  of  hereafter. 

Children  acquire  their  rank  by  inheritance, 
as  before  observed,  from  the  mother's  side :  if 
she  be  not  a  noble  they  are  not,  and  vice  versa. 
If  a  man,  however  high  his  rank,  have  a  child 
by  a  woman  who  is  only  a  tooa,  no  matter 
whether  they  are  married  or  not,  (but  indeed 
there  is  no  instance  of  a  noble  marrying  a 
tooa,)  that  child  would  not  be  a  noble,  though 
it  were  known  that  the  father  was  a  noble; 
the  child  might  rank*  as  a  mooa,  but  not 
higher :  on  the  contrary,  if  a  woman  who  is  a 
noble  were  to  have  a  child  by  a  tooa,  the 
child  would  be  a  noble ;  but  this  perhaps  sel- 
dom happens,  for  4he  pride  of  the  females 
would  not  allow  of  such  a  low  intrigue ;  or  if 
sqch  a  circumstance  were  to  take  place,  the 
greatest  care  would  be  used  that  it  should  not , 
be  known.  Children  that  are  nobles  are 
somewhat  less  respected,  as  may  be  supposed, 
on  account  of  their  childhood ;  but  then  any 
familiarity  or  slight  disrespect  that  might  be 
shewn  them  would  only  be  by  nobles  nearly 
equal  or  superior  to  them.    If  Finow  were  tp 


108 


PXSFBCT    TO    AGE    AND   6 EX. 


see  £  child  of  superior  rank  approach  or,  be 
brought  near  him,  he  perhaps  would  say,  (and 
frequently  does  on  such  occasions,) ,  take  that 
$hikl  away!  why  do  you  bring  him  here, 
troubling  me  with  the  taboo  ?  or  some  such 
abrupt  expression  :m  such  language,  however, 
would  not  be  decorous  from  an  inferior,  unless 
}ie  be  of  nearly  equal  rank,  and  then  only  by 
Authority  of  his  superior  age. 


POINTS  QW  &B1.I6IOVS  BShlMK-         10ft 


CHAP.  XVIII. 


Enumeration  of  the  principal  notions  on  which  the  religion 

i 

of  Tonga  is  founded — Traditionary  account  of  the  bland 
of  Bolotoo — Division  of  the  gods  into  six  classes — 
Names  and  attributes  of  the  principal  original  gods- 
Souls  of  Chiefs— Souls  of  Matabooles— Other  Hotooas 
or  inhabitants  of  Bolotoo— Hotooa  Pow,  or  mischiev- 
ous gods — The  god  that  supports  the  earth — Observa- 
tions upon  death— Origin  of  the  habitable  earth,  or  ra- 
ther of  the  islands  of  Tonga — Popular  tradition  respect- 
ing the  original  inhabitants  of  Tonga— Remarks— An- 
other tradition  respecting  the  same  subject— Fiji  story 
respecting  an  island  of  immortal  women — Popular  ac- 
count of  .the  origin  of  turtles — General  notion  of  the 
earth,  sky,  and  heavenly  bodies — Notions  respecting  the 
human  soul  and  animal  life — Ideas  concerning  the  liver 
—The  soul's  immortality — Notions  of  the  Fiji  people 
in  regard  to  the  soul. 

iju  Religion  of  the  Tonga  islands  rests 
chiefly  upon  a  belief  of  the  following  notions. 

1.  That  there  are  Hotooas,  gods,  or  superior 
beings,  who  have  the  power  of  dispensing 
good  and  evil  to  mankind,  according,  to 


104   .       POINTS   OF   RSLIGIOt'S   BELIEF. 

their  merit,  but  of  whose  origin  they  form 
no  idea,  rather  supposing  them  to  be  eter- 
nal. 

2.  That  there  are  other  Hotooas  Or  gods,  viz. 
the  souls  of  all  deceased  nobles  and  mata- 
frpoles,  who  have  a  like  power  of  dispensing 
good  and  evil,  but  in  an  inferior  degree. 

3.  That  there  are  besides  several  Hotooa  Ppw, 
or  mischievous  gods,  whose  attribute  is  never 
to  dispense  good,  bu£  petty  evils  and  troubles, 
not  as  a  punishment,  but  indiscriminately 
to  whomsoever  it  may  be,  from  a  pure  mis- 
chievous disposition. 

4.  That  all  these  superior  beings,  although 
they  may  perhaps  have  had  a  beginning, 
will  have  no  end. 

5.  That  the  world  also  is  of  doubtful  origin, 
and  co-existent  with  the  gods  ;  the  *o/f<f  sky, 
the  heavenly  bodies,  and  the  ocean,  being 
pre-existent  to  the  habitable  earjtb,  which 
was  afterwards  drawn  out  of  the  water  by 
the  god  Tangaloa,  whilst  fishing  with  a  line 
^nd  hook. 

6.  That  mankind,  according  to  a  partial  tradj7 
tion,  first  came  from  Bolotoo,  the  residence 
of  the  gods,  an  island  to  the  north-westward, 

.  and  resided  at  the  Tonga  glands,  by  com- 
mand of  Tangaloa:  they  copsjpted  of  two 


POINTS    OF    RELIGIOUS    BELIEF.      ,    105 

brothers,  with  their  wives  and  attendants, 
whose  original  they  pretend  to  know  nothing 
about. 

7.  That  all  human  evil  is  inflicted  by  the  gods 
upon  mankind,  on  account  of  some  neglect 
of  religious  duty,  eifher  in  the  person  .or 
persons  who  suffer  the  inflictions,  or  in  the 
egi  or  chief  whom  they  serve  ;  and  the  con- 
trary of  good. 

8.  That  all  egi  or  nobles  have  souls,  which 
exist  hereafter  in  Bolotoo,  not  according  to 
their  moral  merit,  but  their  rank  in  this 
world,  and  then  they  have  power  similar 
to  the  original  gods,  but  less. .  The  mata- 
booles  also  go  to  Bolotoo  after  death,  where 
they  exist  as  matabooles  or  ministers  to  the 
gods,  but  they  have  not  the  power  of  inspir- 
ing priests :  the  mooas,  according  to'  the 
belief  of  some,  also  go  to  Bolotoo,  but  this 
is  a  matter  of  great  doubt.  But  the  tooas, 
or  lower  class  of  people,  have  no  souls,  or 
ftach  only  as  dissolve  with  the  body  after 
death,  which  consequently  ends  their  sen- 
tient existence. 

•.  That  the  human  soul  during  life  is  not  a 

•  :  Atinct  essence  from  the  body,  but  only  the 

move  etherial  part  of  it,  and  which  exists  in 


100  POINTS    OF   1LEMOIOU6    BELIEF. 

Bolotoo,  in  the  form  and  likeness  of  the 
4x>dy,  the  moment  after  death. 

10.  That  the  primitive  gods  and  deceased  no- 
bles sometimes  appear  (visibly)  to  mankind, 
to  warn  or  to  afford  comfort  and  advice : 
that  the  primitive  gods  also  sometimes  come 
into  the  living  bodies  of  lizards,  porpoises, 
and  a  species  of  water  snake,  hence  these 
animals  are  much  respected  ;  their  coming 
into  porpoises  is  supposed  to  be  for  the  pur- 
pose of  taking  care  of  vessels,  &c. 

Jl>  That  the  two  personages  at  the  Tonga 
islands  known  by  the  name  of  Tooitonga 
and  Veachi  are  descendants  in  a  right  line 
from  two  chief  gods,  and  that  all  respect 
and  veneration  is  therefore  due  to  them, 

12.  That  some  persons  are  favoured  with  the 
inspiration  of  the  gods,  by  an  actual  exist- 
ence of  the  god  for  the  time  being,  in  the 
person  (the  priest)  so  inspired,  who  is  tljen 
capable  of  prophesying. 

13.  That  human  merit  or  virtue  consists 
chiefly  in  paying  respect  to  the  gods,  nobles, 
and  aged  persons ;  in  defending  one's  here- 
ditary rights;  honour,  justice,  patriotism, 
friendship,  meekness,  modesty,  fidelity  of 
married  women,  parental   fend  filial   love, 


POINT9    OF   RELIGIOUS   BELIEF.         107 

observance  of  all  religious  ceremonies,  pa- 
tience in  suffering,  forbearance  of  tem- 
per, &c. 

14.  That  all  rewards  for  virtue  or  punish- 
ments for  vice  happen  to  men  in  this  world 
only,  and  come  immediately  from  the  gods. 

15.  That  several  acts  acknowledged  by  all  ci- 
vilized nations  as  crimes,  are  under  many 
circumstances  considered  by  them  as  mat- 
ten  of  indifference,  such  as  revenge,  killing 
a  servant  who  has  given  provocation,  or  any 
body  else,  provided  it  be  not  a  very  superior 
chief  or  noble;  rape,  provided  it  be  not 
upon  a  married  woman,  or  one  to  whom 
respect  is  due,  on  the  score  of  superior  rank, 
from  the  perpetrator;  theft,  except  it  be 
consecrated  property. 

16;  Omens  are  considered  direct  indications 
of  the  gods  to  mankind:  charms  or  super- 
stitious ceremonies  to  bring  evil  upon  any 
one  are  considered  for  the  most  part  infel- 
Jible,  as  being  generally  effective  means  to 
dispone  the  gods  to  accord  with  the  curse  or 
ttil  wish  of  the  malevolent  invoker ;  to  per- 
form these  charms  is  considered  cowardly  and 
iwmanly,  but  does  not  constitute  a  crime. 

TIiq  Tonga  people  universally  and  positively 


106  BOLO'TOO. 

believe  in  the  existence  of  a  large  island, 
lying  at  a  considerable  distance  to  the  north- 
westward of  their  own  islands,  which  they 
consider  to  be  the  place  of  residence  of  their 
gods,  and  of  the  souls  of  their  nobles  and  ma- 
tabooles.  This  island  is  supposed  to  be  much 
larger  than  all  their  own  islands  put  together, 
to  be  well  stocked  with  all  kinds  of  useful  and 
ornamental  plants,  always  in  a  state  of  high ' 
perfection,  and  always  bearing  the  richest 
fruits  and  the  most  beautiful  flowers  accord- 
ing  to  their  respective  natures;  that  wfeen 
these  fruits  or  flowers  are  plucked,  others  im- 
mediately occupy  their  place,  and  that,  the 
whole  atmosphere  is  filled  with  the  moat  de- 
lightful fragrance  that  the  imagination  can 
conceive,  proceeding  from  these  immortal 
plants;  the  island  is  also  well  stocked  with 
the  most  beautiful  birds  of  all  imaginable 
kinds;  as  well  as  with  abundance  of  hogs,  all 
of  which  are  immortal,  unless  they  are  killed 
to  provide  food  for  the  hotooas  or  gods ;  but 
the  moment  a  hog  or  bird  is  killed,  another 
living  hog  or  bird  immediately  comes  into  ex- 
istence to  supply  its  place,  the  same  as  with 
the  fruits  and  flowers ;  and  this,  as  far  as  they 
know  or  suppose,  is  the  only  mode  of  propa- 
gation of  plants  and  animals.    The  island  of 


BOLO'TOO.  109 

Bolotoo  is  supposed  to  be  so  far  off  as  to  ren- 
der it  dangerous  for  thetf  canoes  to  attempt 
going  there,  and  it  is  supposed  moreover,  that 
even  if  they  were  to  succeed  in  reaching  so 
far,  unless  it  happened  to  be  the  particular 
will  of  the  gods,  they  would  be  sure  to  miss  it. 
They  give,  however,  an  account  of  a  Tonga 
cailoe,  which,  on  her  return  from  the  Fiji 
islands  a  long  time  ago,  was  driven  by  stress 
of  weather  to  Bolotoo  ;  ignorant  of  the  place 
where  they  were,  and  being  much  in  want  of 
provisions, — seeing  the  country  abound  in  all 
sorts  of  fruit,  the  crew  landed,  and  proceeded 
to  pluck  some  bread  fruit,  but  to  their  un- 
speakable astonishment,  they  could  no  more  lay 
hold  of  it  than  if  it  were  a  shadow ;  they  walked 
through  the  trunks  of  the  trees,  and  passed 
through  the  substance  of  the  houses,  (which 
were  bnilt  like  those  of  Tonga,)  without  feel- 
ing any  resistance.  They  at  length  saw  some  of 
the  hotooas,  who  passed  through  the  substance 
of  their  bodies  as  if  there  was  nothing  there :  the 
hotooas  recommended  them  to  go  away  imme- 
diately, as  they  had  no  proper  food  for  them, 
and  promised  them  a  fair  wind  and  a  speedy 
They  accordingly  put  directly  to  sea, 
in  two  days,  sailing  with  the  utmost  velo- 


110  CLASSIFICATION    Of   THE    GODS, 

city,  they  arrived  at  Hamoa,  (the  Navigator'* 
islands,)  at  which  place  they  wanted  to  touch 
before  they  went  to  Tonga.  Having  remained 
at  Hamoa  two  or  three  days,  they  sailed  for 
Tonga,  w  here  they  arrived  with  great  speed, 
but  in  the  course  of  a  few  days  they  all  died, 
not  as  a  punishment  for  having  been  at  Bolo- 
too,  but  as  a  natural  consequence  ;  the  air  of 
Bolotoo,  as  it  were,  infecting  mortal  bodies 
with  speedy  death.  The  hotooas  are  supposed 
to  have  no  canoes,  not  requiring  them ;  lor  if 
they  wish  to  be  any  where,  there  they  are  the 
moment  the  wish  is  felt. 

The  Hotooas,  or  supernatural  intelligent 
beings,  may  be  divided  into  classes. 

1.  The  original  gods. 

2.  The  souls  of  nobles,  that  have  all  attributes 
in  common  with  the  first,  but  inferior  in 
degree. 

3.  The  souls  of  matabooles,  that  are  still  infe- 
rior,  and  have  not  the  power,  as  the  two  first 
have,  of  coming  back  to  Tonga  to  inspire  the 
priests,  though  they  are  supposed  to  have  the 
power  of  appearing  to  their  relatives. 

4.  The  original  attendants,  or  servants,  as  it 
were,  of  the  gods,  who,  although  they  had 


CLASSIFICATION    OF   THE    GODS.  Ill 

their  origin*  and  have  ever  since  existed  in 
Bolotoo,  are. still  inferior  to  the  third  class. 

5.  The  Hotooa  Pow,  or  mischievous  gods. 

6.  Moooi,  or  the  god  that  supports  the  earth, 
and  does  not  belong  to  Bolotoo. 

The  first  class,  or  original  botooas,  are  sup- 
posed to  be  rather  numerous,  perhaps  about 
three  hundred  ;  but  the  names  of  very  few  are 
known,  and  those  onlv  to  some  of  the  chiefs 
and  matabooles ;  for  it  may  easily  be  sup- 
posed that,  where  no  written  records  are  kept* 
only  those  whose  attributes  particularly  con- 
cern the  affairs  of  this  world  should  be  much 
talked  of ;  as  to  the  rest,  they  are,  for  the  most 
part,  merely  tutelar  gods  to  particular  private 
families,  and  having  nothing  in  their  history 
at  all .  interesting,  are  scarcely  known  to  any 
body  else- 
Several  of  these  primitive  hotooas  i.ave 
booses  dedicated  ^to  them ;  the  houses  are 
built  in  the  usual  style,  but,  generally,  some- 
what more  care  is  taken,  both  in  building 
than,  and  keeping  them  in  good  order,  de- 
corating their  inclosures  with  flowers,  &c.,  but 
which  will  be  fully  described  in.  the  proper 
plflce*    About  twenty  of  the  gods  have  houses 


112  ATTRIBUTES    OP    THE    GODS. 

thus  consecrated  to  them,  some  having  fiVe  or 
six,  others  one  or  two.  The  following  are  the 
names  and  attributes  of  the  principal  gods. 

Ta'li-y-Toobo'  ;  (the  literal  meaning  of  this 
name,  from  which  nothing  can  be  deduced,  in 
Wait  there i  Toobo!)  He  is  the  patron  of  the 
How  and  his  family,  not  of  Finow  in  parti- 
cular, who  is  the  present  king,  but  of  any  one 
who  may  be  king.  He  is  also  god  of  war,  and 
is  consequently  always  invoked  in  time  of  war 
by  the  How's  party :  in  time  of  peace  he  is  aba 
occasionally  invoked  for  the  general  good  of 
the  nation,  as  well  as  for  the  particular  in-* 
terest  and  welfare  of  the  How's  family.  He 
has  four  houses  dedicated  to  him  in  the  island 
of  Vavaoo ;  two  at  the  small  island  of  Lefooga* 
one  at  Haano,  one  at  Wiha,  and  two  or  three 
others  of  smaller  importance  elsewhere.  He 
has  no  priest,  unless  it  be  the  How  himself* 
whom  he  sometimes  inspires :  but  it  has  hap* 
pened  that  a  How,  during  tyis  whole  reign,  hat 
not  been  inspired. 

Too7!  fooa  Bolotoo;  the  literal  meaning 

of  this  is,  "  Chief  of  all  Bolotoo:"  from  thi» 

• 

name  one  would  suppose  him  to  be  the  greatest 
god  in  Bolotoo,  but  he  is  inferior  to  the  one 
before  mentioned ;  how  he  came  by  this  name 


ATTRIBUTES   OF   THE   GODS.         *     113 

the  natives  themselves  can  give  no  account; 

the  only  answer  they  make  is,  that  such  is  his 

proper  name.    Although  he  is  the  god  of  Bo- 

lotoo,  he  is  inferior  to  Tali  y  Toobo,  insomuch 

that  they  scarcely  make  a  comparison  between 

them ;  if  you  ask  them  whether  Tooi  fooa  Bo- 

lotoo  is  a  great  god,  they  will  answer,  tfr  Yes, 

"  he  is  a  very  great  god."    "  Is  Tali  y  Todbo 

u  a  greater  god  ?"      "  Yes,  much  greater." 

"  How  great,  then,  is  Tali  y  Toobo  >"    "  He 

11  is  a  great  chief,  from  the  top  of  the  sky  down 

"  to  the  bottom  of  the  earth  l"     He  is  also  the 

god  of  rank  in  society,  and  in  this  quality  he  is 

often  invoked  by  the  heads  of  great  families, 

as  the  king,  and  other  great  nobles,  on  occasion 

of  sickness,  or  other  family  troubles.    He  has 

several  houses  dedicated  to  him  ;  three  or  four 

at  Vavaoo,  one  at  Lefooga,  and  a  few  at  other 

islands.    He  has  three  or  four  priests,  whom 

he  occasionally  inspires  ;  at  least  Mr.  Mariner 

is  acquainted  with  three  or  four,  but  perhaps 

there  are  others. 

RieooLEo,  (meaning  Unknown) ;  a  very 
high  god,  regarded  principally  by  Toohonga's 
&mOy.  Hejhas  no  priest,  nor  any  house,  and  is 
supposed  never  to  come  to  Tonga.  The  natives 
we  uncertain  about  his  attributes. 
Tooso.'  Tot a/i, literally, Toobo  the  mariner: 
voi,.  II.  I 


114  ATTRIBUTES    OF    THE   GODS* 

lie  is  the  patron  of  Finow's  family/  alto  th* 
god  of  voyages  :  in  tbe  first  quality  be  is  often 
invoked  by  Finow ;  in  the  second  quality  be  i* 
often  invoked  by  chiefs,  going  upon  any  ma- 
ritime expedition ;  also  by  any  body  in  a  canoe 
during  a  voyage.  He  is  not  the  god  of  wind* 
but  is  supposed  to  have  great  influence  with 
that  god ;  his  chief  power  is  extended  to  the 
preservation  of  canoes  from  accidents:  this 
god  has  several  houses  dedicated  to  him,  chiefly 
at  Vavaoo  and  the  contiguous  isles.  Mr- 
Mariner  only  knew  one  priest  belonging  to 
him,  but  he,  perhaps,  has  several.  It  will  be 
recollected,  in  the  former  part  of  the  history, 
at  the  time  when  Finow's  daughter  was  so  illf 
that  this  priest,  when  inspired,  foretold  that 
either  Finow  or  his  daughter  must  die,  as 
decreed  in  Bolotoo ;  in  consequence,  Finow, 
after  his  daughter's  death,  was  so  exasperated 
with  his  god,  Toobo  Totai,  for  not  making 
arrangements  among  the  gods  more  favourable 
to  him,  that  he  vowed  to  kill  his  priest :  this 
sacrilegious  intentid  was,  however,  prevented 
by  his  own  death,  which  happened  as  a  judg- 
ment on  him,  according  to  the  people's  no- 
tions.    Vide  vol.  i.  p.  378  and  389. 

Ala  i  Va'loo  ;  (the  meaning  of  this  name 
unknown ;  Valooy  the  number  tight) ;  a  god 


ATTRIBUTES   OP   THE   GODS.  115 

that  patronizes  the  How's  family,  but  is  par- 
ticularly the  patron  god  of  T66  Oomoo,  the 
late  king's  athft.  This  god  is  now  and  then 
invoked  by  the  king's  family,  but  very  fre- 
quently by  Toe  Oomoo.  He  has  a  large  con- 
secrated fencing  at  Ofoo,  one  of  the  islands  in 
the  vicinity  of  Vavaoo :  he  has,  at  least,  one 
priest,  and  is  very  frequently  consulted  in  be- 
half of  sick  persons. 

A'lo  A'lo  ;  literally,  to  fan.     Cod  of  wind 
altd  weather,  rain,  harvest,  and  vegetation  in 
general.     This  god  is  generally  invoked  about 
obce  a  month,  if  the  weather  is  seasonable,  that 
it  may  remain  so :  if  the  weather  is  unseason- 
able, or  destructive  on  shore  by  excessive  wind 
or  rain,  he  is  invoked  every  day.     A'lo  A'lo  is 
not  the  god  of  thunder  and  lightning,  of  which, 
indeed,  there  is  no  god  acknowledged  among 
them,  as  this  phenomenon  is  never  recollected 
to  have  done  any  mischief  of  consequence.    In 
boistertms  weather  at  sea,  the   superior  god 
Toob6  Totai,  the  protector  of  canoes,   andf 
other  sea  gods,  are  always  invoked  in  place  of 
Alo  A'lo.     About  the  time  when  the  yams  are 
fall  grortrn  (near  the  latter  end  of  December), 
the  ceremony  of  tow  tow  begins,  consisting 
in  an  offering  of  yams,  and  other  provisions,  to 
tfce  god  Alo  A'lo.     This  ceremony  is  repeatecf 

e*ery  ten  days,  for  eight  times  successively,  as ' 

i  2 


116  ATTRIBUTES   OP   TUB    GODS. 

will  be  described  under  the  bead  of  religious 
ceremonies.  This  god  has  only  two  house* 
dedicated  to  him,  one  at  Vavaoo,  and  the  other 
at  Lefooga:  he  has  also  two  priests,  one  at 
each  place. 

Too'i  Bolo'too  ;  literally,  chief  of  Bolo- 
too.  This  and  the  three  following  gods  are 
all  minor  gods  of  the  sea  and  of  voyages,  and 
protectors  of  Finow's  family.  Notwithstand- 
ing his  name,  he  is  inferior  to  all  the  gods 
mentioned  before  him ;  but  much  upon  an 
equality  with  the  three  following.  He  has 
two  houses  dedicated  to  him  at  Vavaoo,  and 
one  at  Lefooga;  none  elsewhere  that  Mr. 
Mariner  knew  of:  he  has,  perhaps,  two  er 
three  priests. 

Ha/la  A'pi  A'pi  ;  literally,  a  road  crowded. 
He  has  the  same  attributes  as  Tooi  Bolotoo. 
Mr.  Mariner  knows  of  no  house  dedicated  to 
him.     He  has  one  priest. 

To'gi  Oocumme'a  ;  literally,  an  iron  axe. 
The  same  attributes  as  the  above. 

Tooso'  Boo'goo;  literally,  Toobo  the 
Short.    The  same  attributes  as  the  above. 

Xangalo'a  ;  god  of  artificers  and  the  arts: 
doubtful  if  he  has  any  house  dedicated  to  him: 
has  several  priests,  who  are  all  carpenters.  It 
was  this  god  that  brought  the  Tonga  island* 
from  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  whilst  fishing. 


ATTRIBUTES   OF   THE   GOD*.  117 

Such  are  the  names  and  attributes  of  the 
chief  primitive  gods ;  next  to  those  in  rank  and 
power  come  the  souls  of  nobles. 

Souls  of  Egies,  or  Nobles:  of  these  there 
must  be  a  vast  number.  Their  attributes  are 
similar  to  those  of  the  primitive  chief  gods : 
they  have  the  power  of  inspiring  priests,  and  of 
appearing  in  dreams  and  visions  to  their  re- 
latives and  others.  They  have  no  houses  de- 
dicated to  them,  but  the  proper  places  to  invoke 
them  are  their  graves,  which  are  considered 
sacred,  and  are  therefore  as  much  respected 
as  consecrated  houses.  Their  names  are  the 
same  as  they  had  whilst  living,  and  they  hold 
the  same  rank  mutually  among  themselves  as 
they  held  during  their  mortal  existence ;  and 
whether  their  deeds  were  good  or  evil  during 
their  life,  is  a  circumstance  that  does  not  at  all 
affect  their  state  in  Bolotoo,  all  punishments 
for  crimes  being  supposed  to  be  inflicted  by 
the  primitive  gods  upon  men  during  their  life- 
time ;  in  which  inflictions  the  second  class  of 
gods  have  a  proportional  power  with  the  first. 
At  many  of  these  souls  of  nobles  have  had 
strong  warlike  dispositions  in  this  world,  it 
■right  be  supposed  that  they  waged  war  against 
another  in  Bolotoo ;  but  this  is  not  the 
for,  in  that  state  of  existence,  their  un- 


190         vmnsuTEi  or  tup  ©1>P*. 

4erst*nding  is  much  were  ctear  tb&n  in  this 
'world,  enabling  them  to  discern  what  if  right* 
and  disposing  them  to  choope  it  in. preference 
t,o  what  is  wrong:  not  but  what  they,  and  even 
the  primitive  gods,  have  verbal  disputes,  but 
which*  from  the  clefu-pesp  of  their  intellect,  and 
the  justice  of  their  views,  are  supposed  to  bt 
managed  with  divine  temperance ;  but  as  tim 
temperate  discussion  of  gods  may  appear  awful 
violence  to  weak-minded  man,  so  it  is  not  to 
be  wondered  that  such  dispute*  at  Boloto* 
should  produce  thunder  and  lightning  at 
Tonga ;  as  happened  in  the  discussion  among 
the  gods  respecting  the  fate  of  finow  and  his 
daughter.     (Vide  vol.  i.  p.  860). 

The  Souls  of  M  atabooi^bb  come  next:  of 
these  little  need  be  said ;  they  hold  the  same 
name  and  rank  as  during  their  life.  They 
have  not  the  power  of  inspiring  priests ;  they 
cannot  punish  nor  reward  mankind,  at  least 
by  any  direct  influence ;  though  their  friends 
.  and  relatives  sometimes  beg  their  intercession 
with  the  higher  gods,  in  behalf  of  their  healtfe, 
or  prosperity,  &c.  They  have  no  houses  dedi- 
cated to  them ;  they  sometimes  appear  to  their 
friends.  Some  of  them  are  tutelar  gods,  and 
-protectors  of  the  tooas,  or  lower  orders,  which 
they  are,  as  it  were,  by  permission. 


ATTRIBUTES    OF   THE    GODS.  119 

■ 

The  primitive  attendants,  or  servants  of  the 
gods.  These,  like  the  gods  to  whom  they  be- 
long-, are  original  inhabitants  of  Bolotoo.  They 
are  considered  of  less  quality  than  the  sbuls  of 
matabooles.  They  have  no  power  in  Tonga, 
and  if  they  go  there  they  cannot  manifest  them- 
selves. Their  number  is  supposed  to  be  im- 
mense. 

The  Hotooa  Pow,  or  mischievous  Gods.— 
Of  these  there  are  perhaps  several  in  number,  but 
only  five  or  six  are  supposed  to  be  particularly 
active;  and  from  their  disposition  to  plague 
mankind,  they  reside  more  frequently  at  Tonga 
than  at  Bolotoo.  They  are  accused  of  being  the 
cause  of  all  the  petty  inconveniences  and  trou- 
bles of  life:  and  at  Ham6a  (or  the  Navigator *s 
Blands),  they  have  an  idea  which  is  very  con- 
venient to  the  reputation  of  the  females,  that 
some  of  these  hotooa  pow  molest  them  in  their 
sleep,  in  consequence  of  which  there  are  many 
supernatural  conceptions :  at  Tonga,  however, 
the  matter  is  never  carried  to  that  extent.  These 
hotooa  jpotr  have  no  priests,  have  no  houses  de- 
dicated to  them,  nor  are  they  ever  invoked.  All 
the  great  misfortunes  of  life,  as  has  been  before 
noticed,  are  special  inflictions  from  the  gods  for 
the  crimes  of  men :  whereas  the  mischievous, 
tricks  played  by  the  hotooa  pow  are  for  their  own 


120  ATTRIBUTES   OF    TUB   GODS. 

whim  and  delight ;  they  lead  travellers  astray, 
trip  them  up,  pinch  them  Jump  upon  their  backs 
in  the  dark,  cause  the  nightmare  and  frightful 
dreams,.    They  are  never  seen. 

Moo oii — A  god  that  supports  the  earth,  the 
earth  lying  on  him,  he  being  prostrate.  This, 
as  may  be  supposed,  is  a  very  gigantic  being, 
greater  in  personal  bulk  than  any  of  the  others. 
He  never  inspires  any  body,  nor  ever  leaves 
his  situation.  He  has  no  house  dedicated  to 
him.  When  an  earthquake  happens,  it  is  sup- 
posed that  this  god,  feeling  himself  in  anun* 
easy  posture,  is  endeavouring  to  turn  himself 
about ;  and,  on  such  occasions,  the  people  give 
loud  shouts  and  beat  the  ground  with  sticks, 
av Inch  is  supposed  to  have  the  effect  of  making 
him  lie  still.  They  have  no  idea  .of  what  he 
lies  on,  nor  ever  make  any  enquiries  about  it ; 
and  say  it  would  be  folly  to  do  so,  for  who  caij 
go  there  and  see  ? 

Such  is  the  account  they  give  of  their  gods, 
and  the  respect  which  they  pay  to  these  imagi- 
nary beings  is  so  great  and  so  universal,  that 
scarcely  any  instance  is  know n  of  downright 
impiety ;  and  indeed  they  have  very  strong  mo? 
lives  to  keep  them  in  proper  order  in  this  respect, 
founded  in  their  firm  and  fixed  belief,  that  al| 
jtmman  miseries  are  the  consequent  pupishmenf 


ORIGIN    OP  -TQE   TONGA    ISLANDS.      ,421 

of  crimes,  and  that  acts  of  atrocity  are  most 
frequently  punished  by  disease  and  death ;  and 
this  risk  of  premature  death  among  the  tooas  in 
particular  must  have  a  frightful  aspect,  as  they 
consider  the  termination  of  life  as  the  termina- 
tion of  their  existence  altogether.  With  re- 
spect to  the  chiefs  indeed,  to  whom  death  is  only 
a  change  to  a  better  life,  this  apprehension  may ' 
not  take  quite  so  strong  a  hold  ;  nevertheless, 
life  is  always  sweet,  there  are  always  some  pur- 
poses of  ambition  or  enjoyment  yet  to  be  satis- 
fied ;  and  when  death  does  come,  it  is  rather  to 
be  wished  for  in  the  field  of  battle  than  pro- 
strate on  a  mat,  overcome  with  pain  and  disease, 
in  the  midst  of  one's  friends  and  relatives  weep* 
ing  aiid  lamenting. 

The  next  subject  in  order  to  speak  of,  is 
the  origin  of  the  habitable  earth,  which,  ac- 
cording to  their  notions,  vague  as  they  are,  is 
as  follows  : — It  is  believed  that  originally  there 
was  no  land  above  the  water  but  the  island  of. 
Boloteo,  which,  like  the  gods,  the  heavenly 
bodies,  and  the  ocean,  has  probably  always 
been.  One  day  Tangaloa,  the  god  of  arts  and 
inventions,  went  forth  to  fish  in  the  great  ocean, 
and  bating  from  the  sky  let  down  his  hook  and 
line  into  the  sea,  on  a  sudden  he  felt  a  great 
:  believing  that  he  had  caught  an  im- 


122        ORIGIN    OF   THE    TONGA    PEOPLE. 

mense  fish,  lie  exerted  hit  strength,  and  presently 
there  appeared  above  the  surface  several  points 
of  rocks,  which  increased  in  number  and  extent 
the  more  he  drew  in  his  line :  the  rocky  bot* 
torn  of  the  ocean,  in  which  it  was  now  evident  his 
hook  had  caught,  was  thus  fast  advancing  to  the 
surface,  so  as  to  have  made  one  vast  continent ; 
when  unfortunately  the  line  broke,  and  the 
inlands  of  Tonga  remain  to  shew  the  imper- 
fection of  Tangaloa's  attempt.  The  rook  in 
which  the  hook  was  fixed  was  already  above 
the  surface,  and  is  to  be  seen  to  this  day  in  the 
island  of  Hoonga,  where  they  shew  the  very 
hole  where  it  caught.  The  hook  was  in  the 
possession  of  the  Tooitonga  family  till  about 
thirty  years  ago,  when  it  was  accidentally  burnt 
along  with  the  house  in  which  it  was  kept. 

Tangaloa  having  thus  discovered  land,  by 
the  divine  influence  of  himself  and  other  gods 
it  was  soon  replete  with  all  kinds  of  trees, 
herbs,  and  animals,  such  as  were  in  Bolotoo,  bat 
of  an  inferior  quality,  and  subject  to  decay  and 
death.  Being  now  willing  that  Tonga  should 
also  be  inhabited  by  intelligent  beings,  he  com- 
manded his  two  sons  thus:*  "  Go,  and  take  with 
44  you  your  wives,  and  dwell  in  the  world  at 

*  The  following  story  is  as  nearly  as  possible  a  literal 
translation  of  the  language  in  which  they  tell  it. 


64 
64 


0R1GIBT   OF    THE    TONGA    PEOPLE.        133 

44  Tonga :  divide  the  land  into  two  portions, 

44  and  dwell  separate! y  from  each  other.    They 

44  departed   accordingly.     The  name  of  the 

"  eldest  was  Toob&,   and  the   name  of  the 

44  youngest  was  V&ca-aco'w-ooli,  who  was  an 

44  exceeding  wise  young  man  ;  for  it  was  he 

44  that  first  formed  axes,  and  invented  beads, 

and  cloth,  and  looking-glasses.    The  young 

man  called  Toob6   acted  very  differently, 

44  being  very  indolent,  sauntering  about  and 

44  aleeping,  and  envying  very  much  the  works 

44  of  hit  brother.  Tired  at  length  with  begging 

44  his  goods,  he  bethought  himself  to  kiirhim, 

44  but  concealed  his  wicked  intention  ;  he  ac- 

44  eordingly  met  his  brother  walking,  and  struck 

44  him  till  he  was  dead.     At  that  time  their 

*'  father  came  from  Bolotoo  with  exceeding 

•4  great  anger,  and  asked  him,  Why  have  you 

44  killed  your  brother  ?     Cauld  not  you  work 

44  like  him  ?     Oh  thou  wicked  one  !  begone  ! 

44  go  with  my  commands  to  the  family  of  Vaca- 

44  acow-ooii  tell ;  them  to  come  hither.     Being 

*  accordingly  come,  Tangaloa  straightway  or- 
44  dered  them  thus :  Put  your  canoes  to  sea; 
44  and  tail  to  the  east,  to  the  great  land  which 
44  it  there,  and  take  up  your  abode  there.  Be 
u  your  skins  white  like  your  minds,  for  your 

*  mind*  are  pure;  you  shall  be  wise,  making 


u 

41 
U 
<C 
46 


124       ORIGIN    OF   THE   TONGA    PEOPLE. 

"  axes,  and  all  riches  whatsoever,  and  shall 
"  have  large  canoes.  I  will  go  myself  and 
"  command  the  wind  to  blow  from  your  land  to 
"  Tonga ;  but  they  (the  Tonga  people),  shall 
"  not  be  able  to  go  to  you  with  their  bad 
"  canoes. 

"  Tangaloa  then  spoke  thus  to  the  others  :— 
You  shall  be  black,  because  your  minds  are 
bad,  and  shall  be  destitute  ;  you  shall  not  be 
wise  in  useful  things,  neither  shall  you  go  to 
the  great  land  of  your  brothers;  how  can 
you  go  with  your  bad  canoes  ?  But  your 
"  brothers  shall  come  to  Tonga,  and  trade 
"  with  you  as  they  please/' 

Mr.  Mariner  took  particular  pains  to  make 
enquiries  respecting  the  above  extraordinary 
story,  with  a  view  to  discover  whether  it  was 
ogly  a  corrupted  relation  of  the  Mosaic  ac- 
count;  and  he  found  that  it  was  not  universally 
known  to  the  Tonga  people.  Most  of  the  chiefs 
and  matabooles  were  acquainted  with  it,  but 
the  bulk  of  the  people  seemed  totally  ignorant 
of  it.  This  led  him  at  first  to  suspect  that  the 
chiefs  had  obtained  the  leading  facts  from  some 
of  our  modern  missionaries,  and  had  inter* 
woven  it  with  their  own  notions ;  but  the  oldest 
men  affirmed  their  positive  belief  that  it  was 
an  ancient  traditionary  record,  and  that  it  was 


ORIGIN   OF   THE   TONGA   PEOPLE.       128? 

founded  in  truth.  It  seems  strange  that  they 
should  believe  an  account  which  serves  so  much 
to  degrade  them,  and  makes  even  their  very* 
chiefs  to  be  descendants  of  bad  men,  cursed  by 
their  father  with  the  evils  of  poverty  and  igno- 
rance. Nevertheless,  they  readily  own  the  su- 
periority of  the  Papalangies,  not  only  in  know- 
ledge, but  disposition  to  do  good ;  but,  on  the 
other  hand,  they  do  not  as  readily  confess  them- 
selves to  lie  under  a  malediction  :  on  the  con- 
trary,  they  maintain  that  they  are  far  superior 
to  us  in  personal  beauty,  and  though  we  have 
more  instruments  and  riches,  they  think  that 
they  could  make  a  better  use  of  them  if  they 
only  had  them  in  their  possession.  Of  the  chiefs 
and  matabooles  who  related  the  foregoing  ac- 
count, some  believed  it  firmly,  others  left  it 
as  they  found  it,  nope  positively  disbelieved  it. 
Mr.  Mariner  related  to  them  our  scriptural  and 
traditionary  account  of  Cain  and  Abel,  and 
expremed  his  opinion,  that  they  must  have  re- 
ceived their  information  either  from  the  mis- 
sionaries, or  from  some  Papalangi  at  an  early 
period,  whom  accident  had  thrown  among 
than ;  but  some  still  persisted  that  it  was  an 
flgigiMl  tradition  of  their  own,  whilst  other* 
snmed  there  was  so  great  a  similarity  between 
the  two  accounts,  that  they  were  disposed  to 


126        ORIGIN   O*   THE    TONGA    PMPtt. 

believe  they  had  received  theirtl'  from  its,  per- 
haps two  or  three  or  four  generations  back. 
But  such  things  do  riot  very  often  form  a  sub- 
ject of  conversation  among  theto ;  consequently 
their  knowledge  and  belief  of  these  matters  (a* 
they  have  no  writings)  become  very  vague, 
incongruous,  and  uncertain. 

They  have  several  other  accounts  of  the  ori- 
gin of  mankind,  or  rather  of  tire  first  inhabit- 
ants of  Tonga ;  but  most  of  them  are  not  only 
ridiculous  but  very  confused  and  indeterminate, 
and,  as  Mr.  Mariner  believes,  many  are  of  no 
greater  antiquity  than  the  present  generation, 
and  invented  perhaps  for  the  purpose  of  pass- 
ing away  time  for  lack  df  better  conversation, 
most  of  the  natives  being  very  fond  of  inventing* 
tales  for  amusement,  like  the  continental  na* 
tions  west  of  them,  but  vety  vbid  of  the  poetic 
elegance  of  those  nations.  The  account  that 
is  more  universally  known  and  believed,  Wliteh 
is  the  least  inconsistent  with  their  general  no- 
tions, and  probably  the  most  ancient,  is  the 
following : — 

44  At  a  time  when  the  islands  of  Tonga  were 
already  existing,  but  not  yet  peopled  tfith  intel- 
ligent beings,  some  of  the  minor  gods  of  Bo- 
lotoo  being  desirous  to  see  the  new  World 
(which  Tangaloa  had  fished  up),  put  to  sea. 


ORIGIN    OS?   THE   TONGA    PEOPLE.        127 

about  two  hundred  in  number,  male  and  fe- 
male, in  a  large  canoe,  and  arrived  at  the  island 
of  Tonga.  They  were  so  well  pleased  with 
the  novelty  of  the  place  that  they  determined 
to  remain  there,  and  accordingly  broke  up 
their  canoe  to  make  small  ones  of  it ;  but  in  a 
few  days  two  or  three  of  them  died,— this  phe- 
nomenon alarmed  all  the  rest,  for  decay  and 
death  was  what  their  notion  of  their  own  im- 
mortality did  not  lead  them  to  expect.  About 
this  time  one  of  them  felt  himself  strangely  af- 
fected, and  by  this  he  knew  that  one  of  the  supe- 
rior gods  was  coming  from  Bolotoo  to  inspire 
him;  in  a  little  time  he  was  actually  inspired, 
and  was  told  that  the  chief  gods  had  decreed,  that 
as  thoy  had  come  to  Tonga,  and  had  breathed 
the  air  of  the  place,  and  had  fed  upon  the  pro- 
duce of  the  place,  they  should  become  mortal, 
and  people  the  world  with  mortal  beings,  and 
all  about  them  should  be  mea  miima.*  Upon 
this  they  were  all  exceedingly  grieved,  and  were 
sorry  they  had  broken  up  their  canoe,  but  they 
made  another,  and  some  of  them  put  to  sea  with 
the  hope  of  regaining  the  island  of  Bolotoo;  in 
which  endeavour,  if  they  succeeded,  they  were 

•iNagsef  this  world,  mortal,  subject  to  decay  and  dealt, 
iae^aatajdietmetioci  to  mta  kotoia,  things  of  the  other  world 
(Bq)b|so)»  at  land  of  hviotas,  immortal,  and  always  flou- 
riakisf. 


108      AN   ISLAND   OP   IMMORTAL   WOMEN, 

to  come  back  and  fetch  their  companions;  but 
they  looked  in  vain  for  the  land  of  the  gods,  and 
werfe  obliged  to  return  sorely  afflicted  to  Tonga/* 

In  the  above  story  there  is  a  little  inconsist- 
ency in  respect  to  the  gods  coming  from  Bo* 
krtoo  in  a  canoe ;  for  the  gods  are  generally 
understood  to  have  ho  canoes,  not  requiring 
them, — for  the  moment  they  wish  to  be  any 
where,  their  wish  is, accomplished  without  any 
further  trouble,  which  is  a  mode  of  conveyance 
far  superior  to  any  of  our  inventions,  either 
ancient  or  modern. 

The  Tonga  people  have  also  a  story  among 
them  respecting  an  island  of  immortal  women 
existing  somewhere  to  the  north-west  of  Fiji ; 
but  this  is  suspected  to  be  rather  a  Fiji  tale  than 
a  tradition  of  their  own,  and  consequently  is 
not  much  believed  among  them.  These  im- 
mortal women  are  considered  to  be  hotooas ; 
but  they  are  thought  to  have  all  the  passions 
and  propensities  properly  belonging  to  women 
of  this  world,  in  so  much  that  it  is  dangerous 
for  canoes  to  put  in  there ;  not  that  the  crew 
would  be  positively  ill-treated  by  these  fair 
goddesses,  but  too  much  kindness  sometimes 
destroys  as  effectually,  though  perhaps  not  so 
quickly,  as  too  much  severity.  It  is  reported 
that  a  Fiji  canoe  was  once  driven  there  by  a 


ORIGIN    OF   TURTLES.  120 

gale  of  wind :  the  men  landed,  and  were  charmed 
with  the  truly  kind  reception  they  met  with ; 
but  in  a  day  or  two,  finding  the  climate  much 
too  warm  for  their  constitution,  they  wisely  be* 
took  themselves  again  to  their  canoe,  and  with 
some  difficulty  reached  the  Fiji  islands,  bringing 
sundry  marvellous  accounts  of  the  nature  of  the 
country,  and  the  reception  they  met  with.  This 
story  is  prevalent,  not  only  at  Tonga  and  Fiji, 
but  also  at  Hamoa  (the  Navigator's  island.) 
Some  of  the  Fiji  people  believe  it :  the  Hamoa 
people  doubt  it  very  much;  and  the  Tonga 
people  deny  it  altogether. 

The  natives  of  the  Tonga  islands  have  a  tra- 
ditionary story  respecting  the  origin  of  turtles ; 
and  as  we  are  here  discoursing  about  their 
notions  of  the  world,  which  in  some  measure 
involves  their  knowledge  of  natural  history,  it 
ought  properly  to  be  told  in  this  place. 

A  considerable  time  after  the  existence  of 
maplfiyl  at  Tonga,  a  certain  god,  who  lived  in 
the  sky,  and  whose  name  was  Langi,  received 
a  command  from  the  superior  gods  of  Bolotoo 
to  attend  a  grand  conference,  shortly  to  be  held 
at  the  latter  place,  on  some  point  of  universal 
uoportaace.  Now  it  happened  that  the  god 
Langi  had  several  children ;  among  others,  two 
daughters,  beautiful  young  goddesses,  who 

VOL.  11.  R 


180  ORIGIN    OP   TURTLES. 

were  of  an  age  in  which  vanity  and  the  desire  to 
be  admired  was  beginning  to  be  a  very  strong 
passion,  and  consequently  they  had  often  ex- 
pressed their  wish  to  see  the  islands  of  Tonga, 
and  to  visit  the  people  that  dwelt  there  ;  but 
their  father  was  too  wise  readily  to  give  his  con- 
sent. Business  of  importance,  however,  now 
demanded  his  absence  from  the  sky ;  bat 
being  fearftil  that  his  unexperienced  daughters 
might  in  the  mean  time  descend  to  Tonga,  he 
gave  them  the  strictest  commands  not  to  leave 
their  celestial  residence  till  his  return  ;  and  asm 
motive  for  their  obedience,  he  promised  to  con-? 
duct  them,  when  he  came  back,  to  Tonga,  ajid 
gratify  their  wish  with  safety  to  themselves. 
With  a  view  to  strengthen  his  injunctions,  and 
better  to  ensure  their  compliance,  he  represented 
in  lively  colours  the  many  dangers  they  would 
subject  themselves  to,  by  infringing  upon  his 
commands :  in  the  first  place,  he  told  them 
that  the  Hotooa  Pow  (mischievous  gods),  who 
resided  at  Tonga,  would  take  every  opportunity 
to  molest  them,  and  to  throw  difficulties  and 
dangers  in  their  way.  Besides  which,  there 
were  other  evils  of  greater  consequence  to  fear; 
for  they  were  so  beautiful  (he  told  them),  that 
the  men  of  Tonga  would  furiously  fight  among 
themselves  to  obtain  them  for  their  wives,  and 


ORIGIN   OP   TURTLES.  131 


that  these  quarrels  occasioned  by  them  would, 
no  doubt,  offend  the  superior  gods  of  Bolotoo, 
and  he  (Langi)  should  thereby  get  into  dis- 
grace.    The  two  goddesses  having  promised 
obedience  to  their  father's  orders,  he  descended 
with  speed  to  Bolotoo.  He  had  scarcely  left  the 
iky,  when  they  began  to  reason  together  on 
what  be  had  told  them  :  one  said  to  the  other, 
our  father  has  only  promised  to  take  us  to  Tonga 
to  keep  us  here  till  he  comes  back  ;  for  has  he 
not  often  promised  us  the  same  thing  and  never 
fulfilled  his  word  ?    True  1  said  the  other,  let 
as  go  to  Tonga  by  ourselves  for  a  little  time, 
just  to  look  at  the  m&ma  people,  and  we  will  re- 
turn before  he  shall  know  any  thing  of  it ;  be- 
sides, (said  both  of  them  together)  has  he  not 
told  QS  that  we  are  more  beautiful  than  the 
women  of  Tonga  ?    Yes !   let  us  go  imme- 
diately to  Tonga  and  be  admired,  for  in  the  sky 
these  are  many  other  goddesses  nearly  as  beau- 
tiful as  ourselves,  and  we  are  scarcely  noticed. 
Upon  this  they  descended  together  to  the  island 
of  Tonga,  and,  having  alighted  in  a  lonely 
place,  they  walked  towards  the  mooa,  dis- 
totming  as  they  went  on  the  homage  that  was 
atari  to  be  paid  to  their  charms.  When  they  ar- 
riffeff  at  the  mooa,  they  found  the  king  and  all 
lis  chiefr  and  principal  people  engaged  in  some 

k2 


132  ORIGIN   OP  TCfttI.Bg. 

grand  ceremony  of  rejoicing,  and  were  then 
drinking  their  cara.  The  moment  they  armed 
all  eyes  were  turned  upon  them,  and  all  heaife, 
except  those  that  envied,  were  filled  with  ad- 
miration and  love.  The  young  chiefs  Tied  with 
each  other  in  shewing  them  the  most  signal 
attentions* ;  thev  already  began  to  be  jealottf 
of  each  other ;  they  left  off  drinking  cara,  arid 
the  whole  assembly  was  put  in  confusion.  *  At 
length  the  young  men  began  to  quarrel  amotafc 
themselves,  but  the  king,  to  settle  all  dispute*, 
by  virtue  of  his  superior  power  took  them  hotne 
to  his  own  residence :  the  sun  had  scarcely  stft, 
however,  before  certain  chiefs,  with  a  strong 
armed  force,  rescued  them  from  the  king's 
house :  the  whole  island  was  soon  in  a  state  of 
confusion  and  alarm,  and  early  the  following 
morning  a  bloody  wa  was  commenced.  In 
the  mean  time  the  gods  of  Bolotoo  heard  what 
was  going  forward  at  Tonga,  and  they  imitie- 

*  It  is  not  the  least  remarkable  trait  in  the  character  of  the 
Tonga  people,  that  on  almost  all  occasions  they  shew  very 
niarked  attention  to  females ;  and  we  believe  that  among  all 
the  different  clusters  of  islands  in  the  South  Seas,  the  natrve 
of  these  are  singular  in  this  respect*  The  women  of  Tonga 
are  not  obliged  to  labour  to  procure  the  necessaries  of  life 
for  their  idle  husbands :  the  men  work ;  the  women  do  chiefly 
those  offices  that  are  requisite  for  domestic  comfort,  and  for 
she  promotion  of  health  and  deteinest. 


ORIGIN    OF   TURTLES.  133 

dnfttly  with  great  indignation  charged  poor 
LiBgi  with  being  the  cause  of  these  disturb- 
ances :  this  god  said  in  his  defence,  that  he  had 
ordered  his  daughters  to  remain  at  home,  but 
unfortunately  they  were  disobedient  children. 
He  immediately  left  the  synod  of  gods,  and 
flew  with  all  speed  to  Tonga,  where  he  found 
thai  one  of  his  daughters,  by  having  eaten  of 
the  productions  of  the  place,  had  deprived  her- 
self  .of  immortality,   and   was  already  dead. 
The  lots  of  his  daughter  enraged  him  to  the 
extreme ;  he  sought  for  the  other,  and, 
her  by  the  hair,  he  severed  her  head 
her  body:  the  head  he  threw  into  the 
and  flew,  with  rage  and  disappointment, 
back  to  the  «ky.    The  head  in  a  short  time 
turned  into  a  turtle,  and  was  the  origin  and 
MUtte  of  all  the  turtle  now  found  in  the  world. 
This  story  obtains  almost  universal  credit  at 
the  Tonga  islands ;  in  consequence,  turtles  are 

as  almost  a  prohibited  food,  at  least 

will  venture  to  eat  them  without  first 

a  portion  to  some  god,  or  sending  some 

ty  chief  that  may  be  at  hand :  and  there 

many  that  will  not  eat  turtle  on  any  ae~ 

m 

fearful  of  its  producing  enlarged 
or  tome  such  visceral  complaint.    It  is 


134  NOTIONS   OF  THE   UNIVBHSB. 

not  supposed,  however,  to  be  so  likely  to  tare 
a  bad  effect  upon  great  chiefs,  ate  they  approach 
so  near  in  rank  and  character  to  the  gods 
themselves. 

Such  are  their  principal  notions  respecting 
the  origin  of  things.  As  to  the  first  fbrmatidft 
of  the  solid  sky  (as  they  deem  it),  or  the  islaaS 
of  Bolotoo,  or  the  gods  themselves,  they  pM** 
tend  to  form  no  idea,  and  never  think  of  agi- 
tating  the  question,  whether  they  are  eternUj 
er  whether  they  had  a  beginning, 
all  such  speculations  as  vain  and  fruitless ; 
who,  say  they,  can  remember,  or  who  has 
there  to  see  ?  They  have  no  legends  or  trial 
that  seem  to  resemble  those  of  the  Society 
iol&nds,  as  related  by  Captain  Cook. 

Respecting  the  earth,  their  notion  is,  that  it 
has  a  flat  surface,  ending  abruptly,  which  the 
sky  overarches.  If  you  ask  them  why  the  *et 
does  not  run  over,  the  answer  will  be,  "  Ho* 
"  can  I  tell  ?  I  have  never  been  there  to  wtt\ 

there  are  rocks,  or  something  to  border  It; 

probably/'  With  regard  to  the  sun  wM 
moon,  they  pass  through  the  sky,  and  cook 
back  some  way,  they  know  not  how.  As  to 
tiie  spots  in  the  moon,  they  are  compared  to 
the  figure  of  a  woman  sitting  down  and  beatmg 


OF   THE  SOUL.  185 

gnatoo:  when  the  moon  is  eclipsed,  they  at- 
tribute, the  phenomenon  to  a  thick  cloud  pass- 
ing oyer  it:  the  same  with  the  sun. 

Respecting  the  human  soul,  in  particular, 
they  imagine  it  to  be  the  finer  or  more  aeri- 
form part  of  the  body,  and  which  leaves  it  sud- 
denly at  the  moment  of  death ;  and  it  may  be 
conceived  to  stand  much  in  the  same  relation 
to  the  body  as  the  perfume  and  more  essential 
qualities  of  a  flower  do  to  the  more  solid  sub- 
stance which  constitutes  the  vegetable  fibre. 
They  have  no  proper  word  to  express  this  fine 
etherial  part  of  man :  as  to  the  word  loto9 
though  it  may  be  sometimes  used  for  this  pur- 
pose, yet  it  rather  means  a  man's  disposition, 
inclination,  passion,  or  sentiment  The  soul 
is  rather  supposed  to  exist  throughout  the 
whole  extension  of  the  body,  but  particularly 
in  the  heart,  the  pulsation  of  which  is  the 
strength  and  power  of  the  soul  or  mind.  They 
have.no  clear  distinction  between  the  life  and 
the  tool,  but  they  will  tell  you  that  the  foto- 
fwumfr  (the  right  auricle  of  the  heart)  is  the 
UjlsA  life.  They  form  no  idea  respecting  the 
of.  the  brain,  unless  it  be,  perhaps,  the 
of  memory ;  (they  have  a  distinct  word  for 
,  manatoo) :  they  derive  this  notion  from 
the  natural,  action  of  putting  the  hand  to  the 


136  OP  THE  SOUL. 

forehead,  or  striking  the  head  gently  whan 
trying  to  remember  any  thing.  The  liver  they 
consider  to  be  the  seat  of  courage,  and  th£$ 
pretend  to  have  remarked  (on  opening  de^d 
bodies),  that  the  largest  livers  (not  diseased), 
belong  to  the  bravest  men.  They  also  say  they 
have  made  another  observation  respecting  tt* 
viscus,  viz.  that,  in  left-handed  people,  it  ft 
situated  more  on  the  left  than  on  the  right 
side ;  and,  in  persons  that  are  ambi-dexter,  il 
is  placed  as  much  on  one  side  as  on  the  otbrtr 
They  are  very  Veil  acquainted  with  the  sitamtitoi 
of  all  the  principal  viscera.  " 

They  acknowledge  that  the  tooas,  or  ldWek 
order  of  people,  have  minds  or  souls ;  but  they 
firmly  believe  that  their  souls  die  with  theft 
bodies,  and,  consequently,  have  no  future  ex- 
istence. The  generality  of  the  tooas,  them- 
selves, are  of  this  opinion,  but  there  are  Itoltfc 
that  have  the  vanity  to  think  they  have  imnk*- 
tal  souls  as  well  as  matabooles  and  chiefs,  ttftd 
which  will  live  hereafter  in  Bolotoo.  Tbtn 
seems  to  be  a  wide  difference  between  the  opi- 
nions of  the  natives  in  the  different  clusters  Of 
the  South  Sea  islands  respecting  the  future 
existence  of  die  soul.  Whilst  the  Tonga  date- 
trine  limits  jmmortality  to  chiefs,  matatboofes, 
and,  at  most,  to  mooais,  the  Fiji  doctrine,  with 


OP   TIIE   SOUL.  137 

abundant  liberality,  extends  it  to  all  mankind, 
to  all  brute  animals,  to  all  vegetables,  and  even 
to  stones  and  mineral  substances.     If  an  ani- 
mal or  a  plant  die,  its  soul  immediately  goes 
to  Bolotoo ;  if  a  stone  or  any  other  substance 
is  broken,  immortality  is  equally  its  reward ; 
nay,  artificial  bodies  have  equal  good  luck 
with  men,  and  hogs,  and  yams.    If  an  axe  or 
a  chisel  is  worn  out  or  broken  up,  away  flies 
its  tool  for  the  service  of  the  gods.    If  a  house 
is  tricen  down,  or  any  way  destroyed,  its  im« 
aortal  part  will  find  a  situation  on  the  plains 
of  Bolotoo:  and,  to  confirm  this  doctrine,  the 
Fiji  people  can  shew  you  a  sort  of  natural  well, 
or 'deep  hole  in  the  ground,  at  one  of  their 
jtfffids,  across  the  bottom  of  which  runs  a 
stream  of  water,   in  which  you  may  clearty 
perceive  the  souls  of  men  and  women,  beasts 
a*d  plants,  of  stocks  and  stones,  canoes  and 
fcflMca,  and  of  all  the  broken  utensils  of  this 
ftafl  world,   swimming,  or  rather  tumbling 
iloHfl  one  over  the  other  pell-mell  into  the 
mgium  bf  immortality.    Such  is  the  Fiji  philo- 
ta0hy,  but  the  Tonga  people  deny  it,  unwilling 
totktnk  that  the  residence  of  the  gods  should 
he'efccombered  with  so  much  useless  rubbish. 
Vhs  natives  of  Otaheite  entertain  similar  no- 
Hawmpeeting  these  things,  viz.  that  brutes, 


138 %  OF   THE  SOUL. 

plants,  and  stones,  exist  hereafter  (see  Captain 
Cook's  Voyage),  but  it  is  not  mentioned  that 
they  extend  the  idea  to  objects  of  human  in^ 
vention.  Mr.  Mariner  is  not  acquainted  with 
the  notions  of  the  Sandwich  islanders  upon 
these  subjects :  what  we  have  related  respect- 
ing those  of  the  Fiji  people  he  obtained  from 
Fiji  natives  resident  at  Vavaoo,  from  Tonga 
people  who  had  visited  the  Fiji  islands,  and 
from  {he  natives  of  Pau,  when  he  was  there. 

The  human  soul,  after  its  separation  from 
the  body,  is  termed  a  hotooa  (a  god  or  spirit), 
and  is  believed  to  exist  in  the  shape  of  the 
body ;  to  have  the  same  propensities  as  during 
life,  but  to  be  corrected  by  a  more  enlightened 
understanding,  by  which  it  readily  distin- 
guishes good  from  evil,  truth  from  falsehood, 
right  from  wrong ;  having  the  same  attributes 
as  the  original  gods,  but  in  a  minor  degree, 
and  having  its  dwelling  for  ever  in  the  happy 
regions  of  Bolotoo,  holding  the  same  rank  in 
regard  to  other  souls  as  during  this  life:  it 
has,  however,  the  power  of  returning  to  Tonga 
to  inspire  priests,  relations,  or  others,  or  to 
appear  in  dreams  to  those  it  wishes  to  ad- 
monish ;  and  sometimes  to  the  external  eye  in 
the  form  of  a  ghost  or  apparition :  but  this 
power  of  re-appearance  at  Tonga  only  belongs 


OP   THS   SOUL.  <139 

to  the  souls  of  chiefs,  not  of  matabooles.  It 
has  already  been  stated,  that  the  gods  are  be- 
lieved sometimes  to  enter  into  the  bodies  of 
lizards,  porpoises  and  water  snakes ;  but  this 
power  belongs  only  to  the  original  gods,  not 
to  the  souls  of  chiefs. 

There  is  no  future  place  of  (existence  for  the 
KHils  of  men  but  Bolotoo,  and,  consequently, 
no  state  of  future  punishment ;  all  rewards  for 
virtue,  and  punishments  for  vice,  being  -in- 
flicted on  mankind  in  this  world,  as  before 
noticed. 


i 
i 
i  § 


•  * 


140  TOOITO'NGA    AND   VEACHl'. 


CHAP.  XIX. 

Farther  particulars  respecting  the  divine  chiefs  Tooitaogi 
and  Veachi :  respecting  the  priests — General  remarks  on 
the  moral  notions  and  habits  of  the  people — The  first 
principles  which  in  them  constitute  the  foundation  of 
virtue— References  to  Toobo  Neuha,  Hala  A'pi  A'pi,  ant* 
others— Farther  habits  of  practical  liberality — The  prin- 
ciple of  respect  and  veneration  to  the  gods,  chiefs, 
parents,  and  aged  persons — Defence  of  hereditary  rights, 
and  love  of  country — Instances  of  the  principle  of  ho- 
nour: instances  of  the  contrary:  remarks:  conclusions 
—Their  liberal  opinions  of  one  another,  and  of  Euro* 
pean  nations,  with  references — Humanity — General  ob- 
servations on  the  virtue  of  chastity — Investigation  of  the 
proportion  of  married  women — Conduct  of  the  married 
women — Conduct  of  the  unmarried  women :  of  the  mar. 
ried  men :  of  the  unmarried  men — General  view  of  so- 
ciety, as  far  as  their  notions  respecting  chastity  are  con- 
cerned— Conclusions  upon  this  subject — Remarks. 

luE  two  divine  personages,  viz.  Tooi tonga 
and  Veachi,  or  those  who  are  supposed  to  be 
peculiarly  of  high  divine  origin,  have  already 
been  spoken  of  as  far  as  their  rank  is  con- 
cerned. In  respect  to  their  habits,  we  might 
very  naturally  imagine  that,  in  consequence 


tooito'nga  and  vbachi'.  141 

of  their  high  rank  as  divine  chiefs,  they  would 
rery  frequently  be  inspired  by  the  gods,  and 
become  the  oracles  of  the  divine  will ;  but  this, 
as  far  as  Mr.  Mariner  has  seen  and  heard,  has 
never  been  the  case;  and  it  seems  strange 
that  the  favour  of  divine  inspiration  should  be 
particularly  bestowed  upon  men  seldom  higher 
in  rank  than  matabooles:  such,  however,  is 
the  case,  and,  to  reconcile  it  with  propriety, 
we  may  suppose  that  Tooi  tonga  and  Veachi 
are  supposed  to  be  of  too  high  a  rank  to  be  the 
mere  servants  of  the  gods,  and  mere  instru- 
ments of  communication  between  them  and 
mankind,  but  rather  as  the  highest  and  most 
worthy  of  mankind,  and  next  to  the  gods  in 
rank  and  dignity.  These  two  persons,  how- 
ever high  in  rank,  have  very  little  comparative 
power,  though  it  is  suspected  that,  formerly, 
when  the  Tonga  people  were  a  peaceable 
nation,  and  more  attention  was  paid  io-  re* 
ligious  rites  and  institutions,  that  they  had 
a  vast  deal  more  influence  than  they  have  had 
of  late  years.  They  now  very  seldom  meddle 
with  political  matters,  though  Mr.  Mariner 
once  witnessed  an  instance  where  Tooitonga 
ventured  to  advise  Finow  (the  late  king),  re- 
jecting his  warlike  proceedings  against  Va- 
Vaoo,  at  the  time  when  his  aunt,  Toe  Oomoo, 


142  TOOITCLVGA    AND    VBACHIf. 

revolted:  for  this  purpose  he  went  into  the 
house  on  a  marly',  and  sent  a  messenger  to 
the  king  to  say  that  he  was  there ;  which  is  a 
polite  mode  of  telling  a  person  you  want  him 
to  come,  that  you  may  speak  to  him.  He  did 
not  go  to  the  king's  house  in  person  to  com* 
municate  what  he  had  to  say,  because,  being 
the  superior  chief,  every  thing  would  have 
been  tabooed  that  he  happened  to  touch. 
When  the  king  arrived,  Tooitonga  mildly  ad* 
dressed  him  on  the  subject  of  his  aunt's  re* 
volt,  and  advised  that  he  should  endeavour 
to  accommodate  matters  rather  than  involve 
the  country  in  war :  to  which  the  king  shortly 
replied,  "  My  lord  Tooitonga*  may  return  to 
"  his  own  part  of  the  island,  and  content  him- 
"  self  in  peace  and  security;  matters  of  war 
"  are  my  concern,  and  in  which  he  has  no 
"  right  to  interfere/'  He  then  left  him. ,  Thus, 
in  all  respects,  we  are  to  regard  Tooitonga  as 

*  Ho  Egi  Tooitonga  means,  literally,  "  thy  lord  Tool* 
tonga,"  in  which  the  possessive  pronoun  My,  or  your,  it  uaed 
instead  of  my :  or,  if  the  word  egi  be  translated  lordship,  *r 
chiefship,  the  term  of  address  will  be  more  consistent  sad 
similar  to  ours,  your  lordikip,  your  grace,  your  majttty.  The 
title,  ho  egi,  is  never  used  but  in  addressing  a  superior  chief, 
or  speaking  of  a  god;  or  in  a  public  speech.  Ho  Egi  I 
alio  means  chiefs,  as  in  the  commencement  of  FmowH 
spqech.    VoLI.  p.  4n. 


TOOITO'NGA   AND   VEACHI'.  143 

a  divine  chief  of  the  highest  rank,  but  having 
no  power  or  authority  in  affairs  belonging  to 
the  king.     It  is  presumed,-  however,  that  when 
the  Tonga  islands  were  in  a  state  of  peace, 
that  is,  before  the  people  had  acquired  their 
warlike   habits,  that   Tooitonga,   as  well  as 
Veachi,  had  some  influence  even  in  matters  of 
civil  government,  that  their  advice  was  often 
asked,  and   sometimes  taken.      Veachi   used 
often  to  lament  to  Mr.  Mariner,  that  those 
happy  days  were  passed  away  when  they  used 
to  live  in  peace  and  happiness  at  the  island  of 
Tonga,  when  every  body  paid  the  highest  re- 
spect to  the  divine  chiefs,  and  there  were  no 
disturbances  to  fear,  the  land  was  well  culti- 
vated, and  frequent  rich  presents  were  made 
to  them:  others  made  the  same  complaint. 
Id  short,  it  Mould  appear  that  the  very  an- 
cient complaint,  tanpora  mutantur,  the  almost 
nonrenal  cry  of  dissatisfaction,  is  heard  at  the 
Tonga  islands  as  well  as  elsewhere ;  but  the 
•distant  prospect  generally  appeai-s  more  beau- 
tiful than  the  place  whereon  we  stand :  though, 
m  all  probability,  Tooitonga  and  Veachi  had 
gmkt  reason  to  complain,  particularly  Tooi- 
tdriga,  respect  towards  whom  was  evidently 
Idling  off  even  in  Mr.  Mariner's  time;  for, 
ftpneriy,  it  was  thought  necessary,  when  Toot- 


144  TOOITONGA   AND    VfeACUl'. 

tonga  died,  that  his  chief  wife  should  be 
strangled  and  buried  with  him,  but,  in  respect 
to  the  two  last  Tooitongas,  this  was  not  pep- 
formed.  Again,  the  late  king  would  not 
allow  Tooitonga  to  give  him  any  advice  in 
matters  of  war,  but  insisted  that  he  should 
remain  in  peace  and  quietness  at  his  own  side 
of  the  island :  and  lastly,  the  present  king, 
when  the  late  Tooitonga  died,  would  not  allow 
his  son  to  succeed  to  that  high,  title,  but,  at 
one  bold  stroke,  freed  the  people  from  a  vast 
burden  of  taxes,  by  annulling  the  title  of  Tooi- 
tonga, and  the  expensive  ceremony  of  Inackif 
with  a  view,  also,  (as  the  reader  will  recollect) 
to  do  away  with  the  necessity  of  any  communi- 
cation with  the  Hapai  people.  Veachi,  being 
a  sensible,  good,  quiet  sort  of  man,  who  in- 
terfered in  no  public  matters,  and  who  had 
nothing  to  do  with  the  people  of  other  islands 
but  his  own,  (Toongooa,)  was  still  suffered  to 
retain  his  dignity,  and  probably  does  to  this 
day;  and,  in  that  case,  is  the  greatest  chief  St 
the  Tonga  islands,  for  the  late  Tooitonga'* 
son,  if  he  has  not  been  since  made  a  Tooi- 
tonga, is  below  Veachi  in  rank.  Thus  it  ap- 
pears that  the  Tonga  islands  are  undergoing 
a  considerable  change,  both  in  respect  to  re- 
ligion and  politics;  and  if  the  communka- 


THE    PRIESTS.  14ft 

tion  between  Vavaoo  ami  the  Ilapai  islands,  and 
between  both  places  and  Tonga,  shall  remain 
closed  for  a  number  of  years,  it  will  be  a  curi-» 
ous  enquiry,  to  investigate  what  changes  the  lan- 
guage will  undergo  in  those  respective  places. 
In  regard  to  the  priests,  their  habits  are  pre- 
cisely the  same  as  other  persons  of  the  same 
rank;  and,  when  they  are  not  inspired,  all  the 
respect  that  is  paid  to  them  is  that  only  which 
is  due  to  their  private  rank.     Mr.  Mariner 
recollects  no  chief  that  was  a  priest :  he  has, 
indeed,  seen   the  king  inspired  by  Taly-y- 
Toobo  (who  never  inspires  any  body  but  the 
king),  but  he  is  not  strictly  considered  a  priest 
on  tljis  account ;  those  only,  in  general,  being 
considered  priests  who  are  in  the  frequent 
habit  of  being   inspired  by  some  particular 
god*      It  most  frequently  happens  that  the 
eldest  son  of  a  priest,  after  his  father's  death, 
becomes  a  priest  of  the  same  god  who  inspired 
his  father.     The  general  circumstances  of  fits 
of  inspiration  have  been  already  noticed  (vol, 
i.  p.  106).     When  a  priest  is  inspired,  he  is 
thought  capable  of  prophesying,  or,  rather,  the 
gofl  within  him  is  said  sometimes  to  prophesy ; 
thss%  prophecies  generally  come  true,  for  they 
in,  PQStly  made  on  the  probable  side  of  a 
<l«e|tion*  and  when  they  do  not  come  to  pass 

TOU  If.  L 


M6  THE   PRIESTS. 

ag  expected,  the  priest  is  not  blamed,  but  it  i» 
supposed  tbe  gods  for  some  wise  purpose  have 
deceived  them ;  or  that  the  gods,  for  ought  they 
know,  hare  since  changed  their  mind,  and  or- 
dered matters  otherwise ;  or  that  the  god  who 
inspired  the  priests  spoke  prematurely,  without 
consulting  the  other  gods. 

At  the  Sandwich  islands  the  priests  appear  to 
be  a  distinct  order  or  body  of  men,  living  for 
the  most  part  together,  holding  occasional  con- 
ferences, and  at  all  times  respected  by  the  body 
of  the  people ;  whereas,  at  the  Tonga  islands 
the  priests  live  indiscriminately  with  the  rest  of 
the  natives,  are  not  respected  on  the  score  of 
their  being  priests,  unless  when  actually  in- 
spired, and  hold  no  known  conferences  together, 
as  an  allied  body.  Mr.  Mariner  frequently 
associated  with  them,  watched  their  general 
conduct,  and  enquired  the  opinion  of  all  classes 
of  the  natives  respecting  them ;  and,  after  all, 
has  no  reason  to  think  that  they  combine  toge- 
ther for  the  purpose  of  deceiving  the  people. 
He  found  nothing  that  he  conceived  very  re- 
markable in  their  general  character:  if  there 
was  any  difference  between  them  and  the  rest 
of  the  natives,  it  was  that  they  were  rather  more 
given  to  reflection,  and  somewhat  more  taciturn, 
and  probably  greater  jobservers  of  what  was 


STATE   OF    MORALS*  147 

going  forward.  They  have  no  peculiarity  of 
dress  to  distinguish  them.  The  most  remarka- 
ble of  their  prophecies,  if  they  deserve  that 
name,  are  those  mentioned  vol.  i.  p.  110  and 
369.  The  priests  associate  with  the  chiefs  as 
much  as  other  matabooles  and  mooas;  and, 
although  Tooitonga  and  Veachi  are  consider- 
ed divine  chiefs,  still  they  have  no  more  to  do 
with  the  priests,  nor  are  they  any  otherwise 
connected  with  them,  nor  related  to  them,  than 
are  other  chiefs. 

Having  thus  far  given  a  general  view  of  the 
religious  opinions  of  the  Tonga  people,  and  an 
account  of  the  habits  of  their  divine  chiefs  and 
priests,  we  shall  proceed  to  unfold,  with  as  much 
accuracy  and  impartiality  as  possible,  their  no- 
tions and  habits  of  morality ;  and  in  another 
chapter  conclude  the  subjects  connected  with 
religion,  by  a  detail  of  their  religious  cere- 
monies. 

Moral  virtue  will  appear  to  have  a  very  slen- 
der foundation  in  these  islands,  when  we  con- 
sider that  the  natives  believe  in  no  future  place 
of  reward,  but  what  a  man  will  equally  possess, 
whether,  he  lives  virtuously  or  not,  and  that  they 
have  no  idea  of  a  future  state  of  punishment 
of  any  kind  or  degree  whatsoever ;  and  our  opi- 
nion of  their  notions  of  moral  virtue  will  not 
be  much  exalted,  when,  on  a  strict  examination 

lS 


148  9TATE   OF    MORALS. 

of  their  language,  we  discover  no  words  essen- 
tially expressive  of  some  of  the  higher  qualities 
of  human  merit :  as  virtue,  justice,  humanity  ; 
nor  of  the  contrary,  as  vice,  injustice,  cruelty, 
&c.    They  have  indeed  expressions  for  these 
ideas,  but  they  are  equally  applicable  to  other 
things.  To  express  a  virtuous  or  good  man,  they 
would  say,  tangata  Hlli,  a  good  man,  or  tangafo 
hto  IMS,  a  man  with   a  good  mind ;  but  the 
word  UU6,  good  (unlike  our  word  virtuous),  is 
equally  applicable  to  an  axe,  canoe,  or  anything 
else :  again,  they  have  no  word  to  express  hu- 
manity, mercy,  &c.  but  of  a,  which  rather  means 
friendship,  and  is  a  word  of  cordial  salutation : 
neither  have  they  any  word  expressive  of  chafe- 
tity,  except  nofo  mow,  remaining  fixed  or  faith- 
ful, and  which  in  this  sense  is  only  applied  to  a 
married  woman,  to  signify  her  fidelity  to  her 
husband ;  but  in  another  sense  it  is  applicable  to 
a  warrior,  to  signify  his  loyalty  and  attachment  to 
his  chief.  Farthermore,  when  we  learn  that  theft, 
revenge,  rape,  and  murder,  under  many  circum- 
stances, are  not  held  to  be  crimes,  we  shall  be 
tempted  to  exclaim,  How  miserable  are  these 
wretched  people!   the  virtues  have  left  their 
abode,  and  they  are  given  up  a  prey  to  ererf 
evil  passion !    The  picture  is  indeed  dark,  hot 
we  must  throw  a  little  more  light  upon  it,  and 
fcpproach  to  take  a  nearer  view. 


STATE    OF    MORALS.  149 

The  Tonga  people  do  not  indeed  believe  in 
any  future  state  of  rewards  and  punishment,  but 
they  believe  in  that  first  of  all  religious  tenets 
that  there  is  a  power  and  intelligence  superior 
to  all  that  is  human,  which  is  able  to  control 
their  actions,  and  which  discovers  all  their  most 
secret  thoughts  ;  and  though  they  consider  this 
power  and  intelligence  to  be  inherent  in  a  num- 
ber of  individual  beings,  the  principle  of  belief 
is  precisely  the  same;  it  is  perhaps  equally 
strong,  and  as  practically  useful  as  if  they  con- 
sidered it  all  concentrated  in  their  chief  god. 
They  firmly  believe  that  the  gods  approve  of  vir- 
tue, and  are  displeased  with  vice ;  that  every  man 
has  his  tutelar  deity,  who  will  protect  him  as 
long  as  he  conducts  himself  as  he  ought  to  do ; 
but,  if  he  docs  not,  will  leave  him  to  the  ap- 
proaches of  misfortune,  disease,  and  death.  And 
here  we  find  some  ground  on  which  to  establish 
a  virtuous  line  of  conduct:  but  this  is  not  suf- 
ficient :  there  is  implanted  in  the  human  breast, 
a  knowledge  or  sentiment  which  enables  us 
sometimes,  if  not  always,  to  distinguish  between 
ti£  beauty  of  disinterestedness  and  the  foul  ugli- 
feiBtff  what  is  low,  sordid,  and  selfish  ;  and  the 
tftctf  of  this  sentiment  is  one  of  the  strongest 
tttaifctt  bf  character  in   the  natives  of  these 
Uaads.    Many  of  the  chiefs,  on  being  asked  by 
Mr.  Mariner  what  motives  they  had  for  con- 


160  STATE    OF    MORALS. 

ducting  themselves  with  propriety,  besides  the 
fear  of  misfortunes  in  this  life,  replied,  the  agree- 
able and  happy  feeling  which  a  man  experiences 
within  himself  when  lie  does  any  good  action,  or 
conducts  himself  nobh  and  generously,  as  a 
man  ought  to  do :  ami  this  question  they  an- 
swered  as  if  they  woudered  such  a  question 
should  be  asked.  After  this,  we  cannot  but  sup- 
pose (unless  we  are  led  by  prejudice),  that  the 
seeds  of  very  great  virtues  are  implanted  in  their 
breasts;  and  it  would  be  very  unreasonable  to 
imagine  that  there  are  not  many  of  the  natives 
in  whom  these  seeds  germinate,  grow  up,  and 
flourish  to  a  very  great  extent ;  and  if  so,  they 
cannot  but  be  universally  approved  of  and 
admired.  If  we  wish  for  an  example  of  these 
sentiments,  we  have  one  in  the  character  of 
the  noble  Toobo  iNeuha,  who  lived  as  a  great 
chief  ought  to  do,  and  died  like  a  good  man. 
It  is  true  he  killed  Toogoo  Ahoo;  but  a  native 
would  observe,  that  in  doing  it  he  freed  Tonga 
from  the  dominion  of  an  oppressive  and  cruel 
tyrant.  After  that  period  he  remained  a  faithful 
tributary  chief  to  his  brother  the  king ;  and 
when  he  was  told  that  his  brother  was  con- 
cerned in  plotting  his  assassination,  and  that  it 
would  be  better  for  him  always  to  go  armed,  his 
disinterested  reply  was,  that  if  his  life  was  of  no 
use  to  the  king  he  was  ready  to  die,  and  that  he 


STATE   OF    MORALS.  .    151 

would  not  arm  himself  against  him  as  long  as  the 
country  was  well  governed ! — He  afterwards  as- 
sociated with  his  secret  enemies  without  arms, 
and  when  the  first  unkind  blow  was  given,  his 
only  exclamation  was  addressed  pathetically  to 
bis  brother,  thus,  "  Oh,  Finow,  am  I  to  be  kill- 
ed ?"  He  said  no  more,  but  instinctively  parry- 
ing off  the  blows  with  his  arms  till  they  were  both 
broken,  he  received  them  ou  his  head,  and  fell  a 
prostrate  victim  to  the  malice  of  his  enemies. 
We  have  another  noble  instance  of  disinterested- 
ness and  generosity  in  the  person  of  Hal  a  A'pi 
A'pi,  in  his  liberal  conduct  towards  his  friend 
Talo  (see  vol .  ii .  p.  7) .  He  said  afterwards  that  he 
knew  very  well  that  Talo  was  no  coward,  but  that 
a  little  petulance  or  disappointed  vanity  had  oc- 
casioned him  to  make  the  first  false  step,  of 
which  he  was  afterwards  so  ashamed,  and  was  so 
confused  that  he  had  not  the  proper  use  of  his 
judgment;  and  that  he  (Hala  A'pi  A'pi),  know- 
ing what  must  be  the  wounded  state  of  his  feel- 
inga,  *  pitied  his  situation,  and  immediately 
sought  a  reconciliation.  Hala  A'pi  A'pi  indeed, 
na  the  fiery  wildness  of  his  disposition,  often 
committed  excesses;  but  his  general  character 
rendered  him  universally  beloved.  He  was  ge- 
nerous perhaps  in  the  extreme ;  he  was  endowed 
with  a  certain  share  of  wisdom :  he  knew  well 


152    „  STATS   OF    MORALS. 

what  was  right,  and,  what  is  still  better,  he  prae* 
tised  it.  (See  his  character,  vol.  ii.  p.  53.)  We 
have  given  here  but  two  glowing  instances  of  li* 
beral  sentiment ;  but  we  must  reflect  that  they 
were  universally  admired  :  accordingly,  the 
principle  on  which  they  were  admired  must  of 
course  be  universally  felt;  and  it  would'  be 
strange  indeed,  if  the  fruits  of  such  sentiments 
were  shewn  only  in  a  few  solitary  instances.  The 
attentive  reader  Mill  have  discovered  others; 
but  if  it  be  necessary  to  give  another,  we  beg  to 
cite  one  of  a  nature  different  from  either  of  the 
above.  The  instance  alluded  to  (vol.  i.  p.  114.) 
is  where  Mr.  Mariner,  with  four  Indian  war* 
riors,  was  flying  from  a  large  party  of  the  enemy, 
when  on  a  sudden  he  fell  into  a  deep  hole :  his 
fate  now  seemed  certain,  the  enemy  would  have 
gloried  in  killing  him,  for  they  had  not  forgotten 
the  guns ;  but  his  four  faithful  companions  ex- 
claimed, "  Let  us  stop  for  the  Fapalangit" 
Three  defended  the  ground  with  their  clubs, 
while  one  helped  him  out,  and  one  of  the  three 
was  killed  in  that  act  of  defence.  These  four 
men  might  have  run  off  without  risking  their 
lives,  but  they  were  possessed  of  better  senti* 
ments  : — "  Let  us  stop  for  the  Papalangi  !"— 
they  did  stop,  and  they  saved  him. 
Their  high  admiration  of  what  is  generous 


STATE   OF    MORALS.  153 

and  liberal  in  sentiment  and  conduct,  is  very 
well  borne  out  by  many  of  their  most  establish- 
ed customs  and  practices.  The  general  con- 
duct of  chiefs  and  others  towards  one  another 
seems  to  turn  upon  this  principle  of  liberality. 
If  one  chief  sees  something  in  the  possession  of 
another  which  he  has  a  strong  desire  to  have, 
he  has  only  to  ask  him  for  it,  and  in  all  proba- 
bility it  is  readily  and  liberally  given.  The  very 
tributes  which  the  chiefs  receive  from  inferiors 
come  as  much  as  possible  in  the  form  of  pre- 
sents #.  Foreigners  are  exempted  from  all  tri- 
butes, except  those  that  are  for  the  purpose  of 
religions  ceremonies,  even  though  they  occupy 
considerable  plantations  at  Tonga :  they  also 
readily  excuse  foreigners  for  not  according  with 
their  customs,  or  not  paying  respect  to  their 
gods;  because,  say  they,  they  have  gods  of  their 
own,  and  are  not  governed  by  our  divinities. 
When  any  one  is  about  to  eat,  he  always  shares 
out  what  he  has  to  those  about  him,  without  any 
hesitation,  and  a  contrary  conduct  would  be  con- 

•  We  mutt  not  deny  but  what  these  presents  are  frequently 
by  fear,  as  may  be  discovered  by  several  instances 
in  the  first  volume;  but  still  they  are  not  demand- 
a£;  shay  love  to  consider  them  as  presents,  and  this  sufiU 
daatly  demonstrates  the  universal  admiration  of  the  senti- 
ment of  liberality.  There  are  no  officers  appointed  to  see  that 
the  people  pay  their  dot  quantity. 


154  STATJB   OF   MORALS. 

sidered  exceedingly  vile  and  selfish.  At  meals 
strangers  or  foreigners  are  always  shewn  a 
preference,  and  females  are  helped  before  men 
of  the  same  rank;  because  they  are  the  weaker 
sex  and  require  attention.  A  number  of  such* 
instances  might  be  given  if  necessary,  but  these, 
it  is  presumed,  are  sufficient  to  demonstrate 
that  the  people  of  the  Tonga  islands  are  not 
only  not  selfish,  but  admire  liberality,  and  are 
practically  liberal. 

In  such  a  kind  of  mind  as  we  have  been 
describing,  we  may  readily  suppose  that  the* 
sentiments  of  veneration  and  respect  are  felt 
to  a  considerable  degree;  and,  accordingly, 
every  mark  of  such  sentiments  is  shewn  to  the 
gods,  to  chiefs,  and  aged  persons.     Actual  im»- 
piety  is  little  known  among  them  :  Finow  (the' 
late  king),  was,  indeed,  an  impious  character' 
in  many  respects,  but  we  have  already  seen 
how  much  the  people  wondered  at  his  su<v 
cess.     The  same  king  was  one  day  prevented* 
from  going  out  upon  an  expedition  against  the 
enemy,   by  one  of  his  chiefs  happening- to 
sneeze,  which  is  considered  a  bad  omen.     Fi-1 
now,  on  a  sudden,  greatly  exasperated,  with 
raised  arms  and  clenched  fists,  exclaimed,  in  a 
loud  voice, "  Crowd,  all  ye  gods,  to  the  protec- 
"  tion  of  these  people,  nevertheless  I  will  wreak 


STATE   OF   MORAL*.  166 

"  my  vengeance  on  them  tenfold !"  But  this 
impious  exclamation  was  heard  with  horror  by 
every  body.  There  is  no  necessity  to  dwell 
upon  the  respect  that  is  universally  paid  to 
chiefs,  for  it  forms  the  stable  basis  of  their  go- 
vernment; and,  of  course,  cannot  be  allowed  to 
be  infringed  upon :  it  is,  in  short,  a  superior 
sacred  duty,  the  non-fulfilment  of  which  it  is 
supposed  the  gods  would  punish  almost  as 
severely  as  disrespect  to  themselves.  The 
great  veneration  which  they  pay  to  aged  per- 
sons  is  a  very  amiable  trait  in  their  character  ; 
and,  though  it  is  now  kept  up  by  old  habit  and 
custom,  it  must,  no  doubt,  have  arisen  in  the 
beginning  from  notions  which  would  do  ho- 
nour to  the  most  civilized  people ;  for  it  is  not 
only  to  those  who  are  old,  both  in  years  and 
wisdom,  that  such  respect  is  paid,  but  every 
aged  man  and  aged  woman  enjoys  the  atten- 
tions and  services  of  the  younger  branches  of 
society,  Great  love  and  respect  for  parents  is 
another  prominent  mark  of  their  character; 
and,  indeed,  it  must  be  so,  as  it  arises  out  of  a 
two-fold  motive:  i.  e.  they  pay  respect  on  the 
store  of  parentage,  and  on  that  of  superior 
rjriflfthip  or  rank.  Every  chief  also  pays  the 
greatest  respect  towards  his  eldest  sister,  whiclj 
fpiyfft  be  shews  in  an  odd  way,  but  it  is  ac- 


S4B  AT  ATE   OF    MORALS. 

cbrding  to  custom,  viz.  by  never  entering  int6 
the  house  where  she  resides ;  but  upon  what 
exact  principle,  except  custom,  Mr.  Mariner 
has  not  satisfactorily  learned. 

The  same  principle  of  love  and  respect  for 
parents  and  superiors  engages  every  man  to 
secure  and  defend  his  hereditary  rights  a* 
another  point  of  religious  duty,  &nd  in  honottf 
to  the  memory  of  his  ancestors,  from  whom  ht 
received  them.  By  a  farther  extension  of  the 
same  sentiment,  he  loves  the  island  on  whifck 
he  was  born,  in  particular,  and  all  the  Tottg* 
islands  generally,  as  being  one  country,  Wad 
Speaking  one  language.  But  the  amor  patrim, 
in  the  more  extended  sense,  cannot  be  sup- 
posed to  prevail  in  a  very  high  degree,  for, 
having  no  wars  with  foreigners,  the  opportu- 
nities for  the  excitement  and  growth  of  this 
passion  are  not  very  frequent ;  nevertheless,  i A 
the  history  of  the  war  at  Vavaoo,  we  shall  dis- 
cover proofs  of  the  existence  of  this  noble  sen- 
timent, as  well  as  in  the  life  of  Toobo  NeilM, 
and  in  the  death  of  the  late  king,  who  l&taented 
that  he  left  the  country  in  a  critical  sita'&tiotal 
The  present  king,  and  his  uncle  Finow  Fiji, 
were,  no  doubt,  patriots  in  the  best  sense  of 
the  word. 

Honour  is  another  principle  upon  which  we 


STATE   OF    MORALS.  157 

must  speak ;  hut,  in  regard  to  which,  it  is  dif- 
ficult to  give  the  just  character  of  the  Tonga 
people.  That  they  are  honourable,  in  many 
respects,  there  can  be  no  doubt;  and  that,  in 

> 

other  respects,  they  do  things  which  are, 
seemingly,  at  least,  very  dishonourable,  there 
can  be  as  little  question.  It  was  agreeable  to 
every  generous  and  honourable  sentiment  in 
Teoo  Cava's  men  (vol.  i.  p.  351),  to  help  him 
out  of  the  ditch  at  the  peril  of  their  own  lives ; 
or  in  Mr.  Mariner's  four  companions,  to  save 
him  at  the  same  risk.  It  was  honourable  in 
the  late  king,  who  was  a  very  passionate  man, 
and  expected  to  be  obeyed,  to  receive  in  good 
part,  and  readily  to  excuse,  Mr.  Mariner's  re- 
fusal, on  many  occasions,  to  conform  to  orders 
that  were  not  consistent  with  his  principles. 
It  was  honourable  in  the  Vavaoo  people  to 
have  M  much  respect  for  the  memory  of  their 
late  chief,  Toobo  Neuha,  as  to  resent  his 
wrongs  by  their  steady  and  determined  conduct 
in  regard  to  his  murderers :  and  thfe  behaviour 
of  Toe  Oomoo  and  her  sister  on  this  occasion 
ia  not  unworthy  of  admiration.  Finow  Fiji, 
tbe  death  of  his  brother,  might  easily  have 
himself  king,  for  his  party  was  exceed- 
ingly powerful,  and  heartily  wished  him  to 
lake  the  supreme  command,  but  he  was  a  man 


16* 


STATB   OF    MORALS. 


of  too  much  honour  to  rob  his  nephew  of  hw 
right.  If  a  man  goes  to  another  island,  the 
chief  of  which,  during  his  visit,  makes  war 
with  all  the  island  from  which  he  comes,  he  is 
bound  in  honour  to  side  with  the  chief  on 
whose  island  he  is ;  and  this  point  of  honour, 
except  on  extraordinary  occasions,  is  faith- 
fully kept:  thus  Finow  Fiji  was  at  Vavaoo 
when  his  brother,  the  king,  waged  war  with 
that  island,  and,  honour  binding  him,  he  re- 
mained in  the  service  of  Toe  Oomoo,  directing 
his  hostilities  chiefly  against  Toobo  Toa,  and 
those  men  who  were  the  actual  assassinators 
of  Toobo  Neuha.  These  different  instances 
(and  many  others  might  be  mentioned),  ere 
not  only,  to  a  certain  degree,  honourable  in 
themselves,  but  are  universally  considered  sb 
by  the  natives:  thus  we  must  not  deny  that 
they  feel  the  principle  of  honour,  and  practise 
it  to  a  certain  extent :  but  then  what  shall  we 
say  on  the  other  side  of  the  question  ?  How  can 
we  excuse  4he  capture  of  the  Port  au  Prince, 
and  the  atrocious  circumstances  attending  it: 
the  assassination  of  Toob6  Neuha;  the  trea* 
chery  of  'larky*,  chief  of  the  garrison  of  Bet 
(vol.  i.  p.  121)  ?  But  what  stands  forward  both 
prominent  and  glaring,  and  the  truth  of  which 
their  own  confession  establishes,  is,  the  serious 


STATE   OF    MORALS.  169  ' 

design  they  entertained  of  assassinating  Cap- 
tain Cook  and  his  officers  at  Lefooga,  the  18th 
of  May  1777,  and  putting  to  death  their  ac- 
knowledged great  and  good  benefactor !  (See 
vol.  ii.  p.  64.) 

If  we  were  to  measure  their  conduct  by  the 
notions  of  virtue,  honour,  and  humanity  re- 
ceived among  enlightened  nations,  we  should 
do  them  great  wrong,  and  forfeit  our  own  titles 
to  the  epithet  of  just  and  honourable :  we  shall 
therefore  endeavour  to  ascertain  in  what  their 
notions  of  honour  consist,  and  judge  them  upon 
their  own  principles.  Their  ideas  of  honour 
and  justice  do  not  very  much  differ  from  ours 
except  in  degree,  they  considering  some  things 
more  honourable  than  we  should,  and  others 
much  less  so:  but  they  have  one  principle 
which  to  a  greater  or  less  extent  is  universally 
held  among  them,  which  is,  that  it  is  every 
man's  duty  to  obey  the  orders  of  his  superior 
chief  in  all  instances,  good  or  bad,  unless  it  be 
to.  fight  against  a  chief  still  superior ;  and  even 
in  this  case  it  would  not  be  actually  dishonour- 
able* If  a  chief,  therefore,  designs  to  assas- 
another,  it  is  the  duty  of  his  men  to 
him  to  the  utmost  of  their  power,  whether 
they  think  it  right  or  not.  If  two  or  three  confr- 
Wne  together  to  take  a  ship,  they  may  depend 


v   160  STATE   OF   MORALS, 

upon  their  men's  readiness,  as  a  point  of  duty, 
to  execute  their  intentions ;  and  if  they  are  or- 
dered to  kill  every  man  on  board,  .they  will 
most  assuredly  do  it  if  they  possibly  can :  if  they 
are  desired  to  save  every  man's  life,  they  will 
equally  obey  the  order,  by  merely  endeavouring 
to  secure  them,  though  perhaps  at  the  risk  of 
their  own  lives.  Thus  the  crime  of  one  man 
will  appear  to  us  Europeans  to  be  extended  to 
two  or  three  hundred,  although  these  perhapi 
may  be  only  the  unwilling  instruments,  obe* 
dient  because  it  is  their  duty  to  be  so :  but  let 
the  matter  rest  here  for  a  moment,  whilst  we 
endeavour  to  examine  the  degree  of  crime  of 
which  the  chief  is  guilty,  who  is  at  the  head  of 
the  conspiracy.  In  the  first  place,  his  own 
opinion,  and  that  of  his  countrymen  is,  that  it 
is  no  crime  at  all,  that  is  to  say,  it  is  not  what 
the  gods  will  punish  him  for :  he  will  however 
candidly  acknowledge  it  to  be  wrong;  he  will 
say,  he  took  the  ship  because  Tonga,  being 
a  poor  country,  was  in  want  of  many  useful 
things,  which  he  supposed  were  in  great  plenty 
on  board,  and  that  he  killed  the  crew  that  ha 
might  better  effect  his  object :  taking  the  shy 
he  will  call  an  act  of  ungenerous  oppression': 
killing  the  men  an  act  of  harshness,  bat  hi 
will  add,  how  could  it  be  helped?  we  would 


STAT*   OF   MORALS,  161 

have  saved  the  men  if  we  could,  but  we  did 
not  dare  to  do  it,  for  our  own  safety :  but  (sup- 
posing  the  chief  addressing  himself  to  Mr. 
Mariner  in  reference  to  the  Port  au  Prince), 
"  we  might  also  have  killed  you  and  your  sur- 
viving companions,  as  we  were  advised,  lest 
the  next  ship  hearing  from  you  what  had  been 
done,  might  take  revenge ;  but  we  have  so  good 
an  opinion  of  the  clemency  and  humanity  (qfa) 
of  the  Papalangies,  that  we  trust  they  will  not 
take  revenge :  we  will  therefore  treat  you  well 
and  abide  by  the  result."  Such  are  their  no- 
tions of  the  crime  (or  fault,)  as  it  regards  the 
chief;  and  we  think  it  but  fair  and  liberal  to 
judge  of  a  man's  conduct  according  to  his  own 
notions  of  right  and  wrong,  taking  into  account 
his  opportunities  of  knowing  better,  and  in 
this  point  of  view,  the  natives  of  these  islands 
are  but  mere  infants  in  civilization  and  mora- 
lity, (not  from  want  of  power,  but  opportunity 
of  growth ;)  our  sentiments  towards  these  peo- 
ple, therefore,  should  be  mild  and  liberal ;  our 
conduct  generous  and  careful,  or  severe  and  ri- 
gorous, according  to  circumstances ;  whilst  our 
better  notions  of  morality  will  teach  us  not  to 
be  revengeful.  In  the  mean  while,  we  do  not 
exculpate  from  all  fault  the  men  who  obeyed 
their  <jhief  on  the  above  occasion :  they  were 

VOL.  II.  H 


19S  STATE  OF    MORALS. 

guilty  not  because  they  obeyed,  but  became 
they  obeyed  with  willingness,  in  hope  of  ob- 
taining what  to  them  were  riches.  In  respect 
to  the  intended  assassination  of  Captain  Cook, 
every  native  of  Tonga  would  have  considered 
it,  if  it  had  taken  place,  a  very  base  act,  for 
which  probably  the  gods  would  have  punished 
them.  Toobo  Neuha's  assassination  of  Too- 
goo  Ahdo  was  esteemed  rather  a  virtue  than 
it '  crime ;  but  Toob6  Toa's  assassination  of 
Toobo  Neuha  was  held  a  very  atrocious  act, 
offensive  to  the  gods.  An  old  Mataboole  used 
to  say,  that  useless  and  unprovoked  murder 
was  highly  offensive  to  the  gods ;  and  that  he 
never  remembered  a  man  guilty  of  it  but  who 
either  lived  unhappy,  or  came  to  an  untimely 
end. 

Theft  is  considered  by  them  an  act  of  mean* 
ness  rather  than  a  crime ;  and  although  some 
of  the  chiefs  themselves  have  been  known  to 
be  guilty  of  it  on  board  ships,  it  is  never- 
theless not  approved  of.  Their  excuse  is  the 
strength  of  the  temptation :  the  chieft  that 
would  do  it  are,  however,  few. 

From  the  above  consideration*,  we  are  dis- 
posed to  say,  that  the  notions  of  the  Tonga 
people,  in  respect  to  honour  and.  justice,  as  we 
have  above  viewed  them,  are  tolerably  well  de- 


STATE   OF    MORAU.  109 

ioed,  steady  and  universal ;  biit  that,  in  point 
of  practice,  both  the  chiefs  and'  the  people, 
taking  them  generally,  are  irregular  and  fickle ; 
being  in  some  respects  exceedingly  honoura- 
ble and  just,  and  in  others  the  contrary,  as  a 
wiety  of  causes  may  operate.  In  regard  to 
these  virtues,  therefore,  (in  the  sense  in  which 
wg  have  here  taken  them,)  they  may  be  consi- 
dered very  faulty ;  though  there  are  several  ad- 
mirable exceptions,  whose  characters  become 
more  splendid  and  meritorious  by  the  contrasts 
Ab  being  closely  allied  with  principles  of 
honour  and  justice,  we  shall  now  examine  the 
character  of  these  people,  as  it  regards  their 
optaion  of  one  another;  and  here  we  shall  find 
if  rthmg  greatly  to  admire,  and  much  to  be  ap- 
proved of.  While  we  accuse  them  of  treachery 
and  cruelty,  they  w  loudly  cry  out  that  we  are 
Ctlmmintors  and  detractors.:  for  no  bad  moral 
h»Mii appears  to  a  native  of  Tonga  more  ridi- 
rafamt,  depraved,  and  unjust,  than  publishing 
tfcf  fcirits  of  one's  acquaintances  and  friends ; 
ftfy  wfcile  it  answers  no  profitable  purpose,  it 
•  great  deal  of  mischief  to  the  party  who 
;  and  as  to  downright  calumny  or  false 
it  appears  .to  them  more  horrible 
deliberate  murder  does  to  us :   for  it  is 

m  2 


1M  STATE   OP   MORALS. 

better,  they  think,  to  assassinate  a  man's  penmff 
than  to  attack  his  reputation.    In  the  first  case, 
you  only  cause  his  death,  which  must  bap- 
pen  to  him  some  time  or  another,  whether  you 
will  or  not;  but  in  the  latter  case  you  take1 
from  him  what  otherwise  he  might,  strictly" 
speaking,  never  hare  lost,  which  he  might  haw 
carried  with  him  faultless  to  the  grave,  and 
which  afterwards  might  have  remained  at£ 
tached  to  his  memory  as  long  as  the  memory 
of  him  existed.    And  they  not  only  hold  thitf 
as  a  just  and  honourable  principle,  but  thdy 
likewise  put  it  in  practice ;  so  that  instances  of 
calumny  and  defamation  are  very  rare.    Oft 
the  other  hand,  they  equally  avoid  the  base- 
ness of  flattery,  and  even  where  a  mtfn  has  pt*> 
formed  some  achievement  that  is  really  praise- 
worthy, they  seldom  commend  him  in  his  pur- 
sence,  lest  it  should  make  him  vain  and  prMd 
of  himself :'  and  that  they  are  very  well  able  ts 
discriminate  true  bravery  from  false  we  hafts 
already  stated  and  instanced  in  the  former  vo- 
lume. (See  p.  240  and  241,)  where  it  to  also 
remarked,  that  a  modest  opinion  of  oneself  h 
esteemed  a  great  virtue,  and  is  also  put  ib 
practice :  for  a  farther  instance  of  this,  the 
conduct  of  the  present  king  may  be  noticed, 


•TATE  OF   MORALS.  166 

when  be  first  came  into  power,  and  his  ad- 
mirable speech  may  also  be  referred  to.  (Vol.  I. 
p.  410.) 

In  regard  to  humanity,  or  a  fellow-feeling 
for  one  another,  much  is  to  be  said  on  both 
sides  of  the  question.  The  sentiment  itself  is 
universally  approved  of,  and  they  speak  highly 
of  Europeans  for  their  mild  and  humane  con- 
duct :  it  must  be  confessed,  however,  that  they 
do  not  so  extensively  practise  it,  at  least  ac- 
cording to  our  notions  of  it,  nor  even,  we  may 
add,  according  to  their  own;  which  must  be 
attributed  in  some  to  a  want  of  thought,  and 
want  of  feeling,  particularly  in  boys  and  young 
lads ;  and  in  the  older  branches  of  society  to 
motives  of  revenge,  which,  if  it  be  for  some 
serious  injury,  is  deemed  almost  a  virtue.  We 
are  here  speaking  of  the  men;  as  to  the 
they  are  universally  humane:  a  few, 
of  the  principal  wives  of  chiefs  are 
and  haughty,  and  consequently  tyran- 
;  but,  considering  the  women  generally, 
thty  we  exceedingly  humane  and  considerate; 
though  in  their  talkativeness,  as  in  other 
of  the  world,  they  naturally  speak  of  one 
's  faults,  it  is  usually  of  such  as  are  of  a 
trifing  nature,  and  without  any  malice,  being 
mostly  in  the  way  of  humour  or  joke :  as  to 


100  state,  of  m  oh  a  in- 

considerable faults,  such  as  a  woman's  infidelity 
to  tier  husband,  it  would  remain  as  much  a 
secret  with  any  of  her  own  sex,  (if  they  accident* 
ally  knew  it,)  as  it  possibly  could  with  her- 
self !  Quarrels  among  the  women  are  very  ran* 
There  is  a  lesser  species  of  humanity,  known 
commonly  by  the  term  good-nature,  which: is 
universally  prevalent  among  the  men  as  well 
as  the  women,  and  which  is  plainly  depicted 
in  the  countenances  of  most  of  them.  Taking 
all  things  into  consideration,  we  must  not  f«h 
ture  to  call  them  a  humane  people;  but, on  the 
contrary,  to  say  they  were  cruel  would  cer* 

tainly  be  making  use  of  too  harsh  a  term. 

The  next  subject  we  shall  consider  ischatti* 
ty.  In  respect  to  this,  their  notions  are  widely 
different  from  those  of  most  European  natiow 
we  must,  therefore,  first  examine  what  are  their 
own  ideas  respecting  this  matter,  and  if  they  ate 
such  as  are  consistent  with  public  decoruHn  4ad 
due  order  and  regularity  in  the  social  state,  with* 
out  tending  to  enervate  the  mind  or  debaste  (he 
character  of  man,  we  shall  take  those  ideas  if 
the  standard  by  which  to  judge  them,  and  as 
far  as  they  act  consistently  thereto  we  flhlH 
call  them  chaste,  and  as  far  as  they  infringe 
upon  it  we  shall  deem  them  offenders.  Bat 
here  it  may  be  asked  bow  are  we  to  judge 


STATE   OF   MORALS.  167 

«. 

whether  their  own  notions  upon  this  subject 
sue  consistent  with  the  good  order  of  society, 
&c.  To  this  we  can  make  no  other  answer 
than  by  referring  to  the  actual  state  of  society 
there,  and  pointing  out  those  evils  which  may 
be  supposed  to  arise  from  their  wrong  notions 
upon  this  subject. 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  universally  considered 
a  positive  duty  in  every  married  woman  to  re- 
main true  to  her  husband.  VV  hat  we  mean  by 
a  married  woman  is,  one  who  cohabits  with  a 
man,  and  lives  under  his  roof  and  protection, 
holding  an  establishment  of  him.  A  woman's 
marriage  is  frequently  independent  of  her  con- 
sent, she  having  been  betrothed  by  her  parents, 
at  an  early  age,  to  some  chief,  mataboole  or 
mooa:  perhaps  about  one  third  of  tlte  married 
women  have  been  thus  betrothed;  the  remaining 
two  thirds  have  married  with  their  free  consent. 
Every  married  woman  must  remain  with  her 
husband  whether  she  choose  it  or  not,  until 
he  please  to  divorce  her.  Mr.  Mariner  thinks 
that  about  two  thirds  of  the  uomen  .are  mar- 
ried, and  of  this  number  lull  half  leinain  with 
their  husbands  till  death  separates  them;  that 
is  to  .say,  full  one  third  of  the  female  popula- 
tion remain  married  till  either  themselves  or 
their  husbands  die :  the  remaining  two  thirds 


166  STATE  OP  MORALS. 

are  married  and  are  soon  divorced,  and  are 
married  again  perhaps  three,  four,  or  five  times 
in  their  lives,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  who, 
from  whim  or  some  accidental  cause,  are  never 
married  ;  so  that  about  one  third  of  the  whole 
female  population,  as  before  stated,  are  at  any 
given  point  of  time  unmarried.  This  calcula- 
tion is  made  with  due  reference  to  the  women 
living  on  the  plantations,  who  are  almost  all 
married  to  the  tooas  who  till  the  ground,  and 
remain  constantly  so ;  the  unmarried  women, 
therefore,  live  principally  at  the  mooa,  or  place 
where  the  chieft,  matabooles,  &c.  dwell,  and 
are  attendants  upon  them  or  their  wive*. 
Girls  that  are  too  young  to  be  marriageable 
are  not  taken  into  account  Having  thus  as* 
certained,  as  nearly  as  possible,  the  proportion 
of  married  Xvomen,  we  shall  make  an  enquiry 
how  far  it  may  reasonably  be  supposed  they 
are  entitled  to  the  reputation  of  fidelity.  •  Dor* 
ing  the  whole  of  Mr.  Mariner's  four  years  re* 
sidence  at  one  or  other  of  thfese  islands,  he  had 
frequent  opportunities  of  intimacy  with  the 
wives  of  chieft;  for  being  a  foreigner,  and  a 
white  man,  he  was  free  from  a  great  many  re- 
strictions to  which  the  natives  are  subject :  for 
instance,  whenever  he  pleased  he  could  go 
IP  the  bouses  of  Finow's  wives,  or  of  the  wives 


STATS   OF   MOfeALS.  109 

of  othef  chiefs,  and  converse  freely  with  them 
as  long  as  he  chose,  which  m  as  a  liberty  that 
no  male  native  could  take  beside  the  husband, 
relations,  or  the  cooks  that  carried  in  the  vic- 
tuals ;  and  from  habit  they  became  so  much  ac- 
customed to  his  company  and  conversation  as 
to  think  very  little  more  of  his  presence  than  of 
one  of  their  own  sex,  and  consequently  he  had 
every  favourable  opportunity  of  becoming  ac- 
quainted with  their  habits  and  sentiments,  par- 
ticularly as  one  of  the  old  king's  wives,  his 
adopted  mother,  was  a  woman  of  very  good 
tense  and  unaffected  manners,  and  freely  an- 
swered him  upon  all  points  that  related  to  her 
happiness,  to  that  of  her  female  acquaintance, 
or  to  the  condition  of  the  women  in  general ; 
besides  which,  it  must  be  recollected,  that  Mr. 
Mariner,  being  upon  the  greatest  intimacy  with 
the  principal  chiefs,  was  acquainted  with  most 
of  their  intrigues,  which  they  did  not  scruple 
to  relate  to  him,  both  on  account  of  the  con- 
fidence they  had  in  him,  and  his  being  a  fb- 
feigner   • 

*  This  seems  an  odd  reason  for  placing  confidence  in  such 
flatters;  but  it  arises  from  this  circumstance,  that,  being  a 
fas^aar,  he  was  not  supposed  to  take  that  interest  in  their 
wfcich  might  lead  a  natire  to  thwart  any  toiiduct 
he  did  not  happen  to  appro? e  at. 


190  STATE   OF   JIO&ALS. 

JfV  ith  such  opportunities  of  knowing  the  ha- 
bits of  the  natives,  relative  to  the  subject  in 
question,  Mr.  Mariner  is  decidedly  of  opinion 
that  infidelity  among  the  married  women  is 
comparatively  very  rare.  He  only  recollects 
three  successful  instances  of  planned  intrigue 
during  tbe  t*  bole  of  his  time ;  one  at  the  liapai 
islands,  on  tbe  part  of  Voogi, .  (tbe  young  chief 
mentioned  on  the  occasion  of  the  old  king's 
death,)  who  was  considered  the  handspmeit 
man  at  the  Tonga  islands ;  and  two  on  the 
part  of  tbe  present  king,  whose  high  rank  and 
authority  must  on  the  one  hand  render  his  at- 
tentions flattering  to  the  women,  whilst  on  the 
other  it  may  be  supposed  to  excite  a  little,  ap- 
prehension of  the  consequences  of  a  refusal. 
A  fourth  instance  may  perhaps  be  added,  on 
the  part  of  the  late  king,  in  respect  to  Foonagi, 
(see  Vol.  L  p.  437.)  but  this  is  only  upon  sus- 
picion. Several  other  instances  no  doubt  there 
were,  at  different  islands ;  but  as  so  few  were 
known  to  him,  who  had  better  opportunities  of 
information  than  any  native,  we  may  presume 
that  infidelity  on  the  part  of  the  women  is  a 
very  unfrequent  occurrence ;  and  where  it  does 
happen,  it  must  be  with  the  connivance  of 
their  female  attendants  and  servants,  who  are 
always  with  thorn,  and  attend  them  abroad,  not 


STATE    OF    MORALS.  171 

as  spies  over  their  conduct,  but  as  companions, 
it  not  being  thought  decorous,  particularly  for 
the  wife  of  a  chief,  to  walk  out  by  herself:  the 
wives  of  matabooles  and  mooas  may  walk  out 
in  the  neighbourhood  without  attendants,  but 
never  to  any  distance.  These  are,  therefore, 
great  restrictions  upon  the  conduct  of  married 
women ;  but  there  is  one  still  greater,  viz.  the 
fear  of  discovery,  which  must  operate  very 
strongly  on  the  part  of  the  wives  of  great  chiefs, 
in  whom  an  act  of  infidelity  might  occasion 
her  husband  to  prevent  a  repetition  by  killing 
her:  and  as  to  the  wives  of  persons  of  lesser 
rank,  they  might  at  least  expect  a  severe  beating, 
and  the  offender  himself  come  off  as  badly,  if 
not  worse :  but,  independent'  of  these  restric- 
tions* &c.  Mr.  Mariner  is  of  opinion  that  the 
women  are  disposed  to  be  faithful  to  their  hus- 
bands, as  being  in  their  own  acknowledge 
their  superiors,  guardians,  and  pro- 
;  and  most  of  them,  he  firmly  believes, 
ttttch  attached  to  them,  as  he  judges  from 
their  conduct  when  they  become  widows :  wit* 
nev  the  behaviour  of  Toobo  iNeuha's  widows, 
(Vol.  i.  p.  151.)  and  those  of  the  late  king,  (p< 
IM.)  Mafi  Habe,  Mr.  Mariner's  adopted  mo* 
titer,  did  not,  after  the  king  died,  marry  an* 
ether,  or  admit  a  lover ;  although  Voogi,  who 


172  8TATB   OF   MORALS. 

was  considered  the  handsomest,  and  one  of  the 
most  agreeable  men  in  all  the  Tonga  islands, 
became  passionately  in  love  with  her,  and 
would  have  paid  his  addresses  with  the  greatest 
fervour  and  perseverance,  if  she  had  allowed 
him  opportunities :  at  this  time  she  was  at  the 
Hapai  islands,  residing  with  her  father,  under 
whose  protection  she  remained  at  the  time  Mr. 
Mariner  left  the  islands,  which  was  about  six 
months  after  her  husband's  death ;  though  she 
might  have  married  again,  without  any  impro^ 
priety,  two  months  afterwards,  or  allowed  *f 
an  amour  without  any  reproach.  In  respect 
to  the  wives  of  the  lower  ranks  in  society;  (hey 
are  oftener  to  be  met  with  alone,  and  on  such 
occasions  sometimes  consent  to  the  solicita- 
tions of  chiefs  whom  they  may  happen  to  meet, 
not,  as  Mr.  Mariner  thinks,  from  an  abandoned 
principle,  or  want  of  affection  to  their  hus- 
bands, but  from  a  fear  of  incurring  the  resent* 
ment  of  their  superiors :  the  wives  even  of  the 
lowest  orders,  he  thinks,  are  very  faithfully  at- 
tached to  their  husbands. 

From  the  above  investigation,  we  think  it 
would  be  but  giving  a  fair  opinion  of  the  re- 
putation of  the  married  women  to  say,  that 
they  are  not  only  circumspect  in  conduct,  but 
chaste  in  principle;  and  when  we  consider 


STATE   OF   MORALS.  173 

that  the  married  women  form  about  two  thirds 
of  the  female  population,  (that  are  marriagea- 
ble,) it  will  give  us  no  mean  opinion  of  their 
moral  reputation. 

If  a  man  divorces  his  wife,  which  is  attended 
with  no  other  ceremony  than  just  telling  her  that 
she  may  go,  she  becomes  perfect  mistress  of  her 
own  conduct,  and  may  marry  again,  which  is 
often  done  a  few  days  afterwards,  without  the 
least  disparagement  to  her  character :  or  if  she 
chooses  she  may  remain  single  and  admit  a  lover 
occasionally,  or  may  cohabit  with  her  lover  for  a 
time,  and  remain  at  his  house  without  being 
considered  his  wife,  having  no  particular  charge 
of  his  domestic  concerns,  and  may  leave  him 
when  she  pleases,  and  this  she  may  also  do 
without  the  least  reproach  or  the  least  secrecy. 
From  this  circumstance  we  may  draw  an  argu- 
ment in  favour  of  the  chastity  of  the  women 
generally,  for  if  they  were  of  a  different  charac- 
ter it  is  natural  to  suppose  that  very  few  would 
many,  except  those  who,  when  very  young, 
were  bethrothed  to  chiefs,  and  consequently 
married  independently  of  their  consent :  but  we 
find  that  three  times  that  number  are  actually 
manned :  and  as  many  are  married  three,  four, 
or  five  times,  it  cannot  be  from  an  unchaste, 
libertine,  or  wandering  disposition  on  the  part 


174  STATE   OF    MORALS. 

t 

of  the  women,  seeing  that  when  once  divorced* 
they,  may  remain  single  if  they  please,  and  en" 
joy  all  the  liberty  that  the  most  libertine  heart 
can  desire.  If  now  it  be  asked,  "  Why  then  do 
they  marry  ?"  The  answer  is,  for  love  of  one 
object,  with  the  idea  that  the  object  of  their 
affections  will  always  make  them  happy ;  and 
if  they  are  disappointed  in  one  instance  they 
are  willing  to  try  it  in  a  second,  a  third,  &c. :  in 
short,  it  would  appear  that  the  force  of  sen- 
timental affection  blinds  them  to  the  proba- 
bility of  a  disappointment,  and  they  willingly 
make  a  generous  sacrifice  of  their  liberty  to 
prove  the  strength  of  their  attachment  *•  ■  ' 
As  to  those  women  who  are  not  actually  mar- 
ried, they  may  bestow  their  favours  upon  whom* 
soever  they  please,  without  any  opprobrium : 
it  must  not,  however,  be  supposed,  that  these 
women  are  always  easily  won;  the  greatest  at* 
tentions  and  most  fervent  solicitations  are  some- 
times  requisite,  even  though  there  be  no  other 
lover  in  the  way.  This  happens  sometimes  from 
a  spirit  of  coquetry,  at  other  times  from  a  dis- 
like to  the  party,  &c.  It  is  thought  shameful 
for  a  woman  frequently  to  change  her  lover. 

♦  The  proposition,  or  rather  position,  that  every  woman  it 
at  heart  a  rake,  will  certainly  not  hold  true  in  the  long* 
iriandf. 


STATE    OF    MORALS.  175 

Great  presents  are  by  no  means  certain  methods 
of  gaining  her  favours,  and  consequently  they 
are  more  frequently  made  afterwards  than  be- 
fore. Gross  prostitution  is  not  known  among 
them. 

In  regard  to  the  habits  of  the  men  in  this  re- 
spect, it  must  in  the  first  place  be  observed, 
that  no  man  is  understood  to  be  bound  to  con- 
jugal fidelity :  it  is  no  reproach  to  him  to  in- 
termix his  amours,  though  if  a  married  man 
does  this  to  excess  it  is  thought  inconsistent : 
notwithstanding  this  liberty  of  conduct,  how- 
ever, most  of  the  married  men  are  tolerably  true 
to  their  wives ;  and  where  they  have  any  other 
amonr  it  is  kept  a  secret  from  the  wife,  not  out 
of  any  fear  or  apprehension,  but  because  it  is 
unnecessary  to  excite  her  jealousy,  and  make 
her  perhaps  unhappy :  for  it  must  be  said,  to  the 
honour  of  the  men,  that  they  consult  in  no  small 
degree,  and  in  no  few  respects,  the  happiness  and 
comfort  of  their  wives.  In  such  a  case  of  amour, 
the  Female  he  is  attached  to  never  offers  to  as- 
sociate with  the  wife  during  the  time  she  co- 
habits with  the  husband ;  for  this  would  be 
ftotfght  a  great  insult,  though  afterwards  she 
may,  as  freely  as  if  nothing  had  happened,  even 
though  the  wife  might  have  known  of  the  trans- 
action.   The  women  of  course  feel  occasion- 


176  STATE   OF   MORALS. 

ally  much  jealousy,  but  it  is  seldom  strongly 
expressed,  and  very  rarely  produces  any  fatal 
consequences :  pride  generally  causes  them  to 
conceal  this  passion. 

With  respect  to  the  unmarried  men,  their  con- 
duct is  of  course  free,  but  they  seldom  make  any 
deliberate  attempts  upon  the  chastity  of  other 
men's  wives.  Rape,  however,  sometimes  hap- 
pens, and  young  chiefs  are  the  perpetrators : 
but  if  a  woman  is  known  to  be  married,  even 
though  her  husband  be  only  a  tooa,  it  would  moat 
likely  save  her  from  this  outrage ;  and  if  she 
did  not  choose  to  give  her  consent,  she  might 
go  free  without  farther  molestation.  When  a 
woman  is  taken  prisoper  (in  war),  die  generally 
has  to  submit ;  but  this  is  a  thing  of  course, 
and  considered  neither  an  outrage  nor  a  dis- 
honour :  the  only  dishonour  being  to  be  a  pri- 
soner, and  consequently  a  sort  of  servant  to  the 
conqueror.  (See  vol.  I.  p.  225).  Rape,  though 
always  considered  an  outrage,  is  not  looked 
upon  as  a  crime,  unless  the  woman  be  of  such 
a  rank  as  to  claim  respect  from  the  perpetrator. 

When  all  things  are  taken  into  consideration  x 
regarding  the  connubial  system  of  these  people, 
their  notions  of  chastity,  and  their  habits  in  re* 
spect  to  it,  we  shall  have  no  reason  to  sagr 
but  what  they  keep  tolerably  well  within  those 


STATE    OF    MORALS.  17? 

bounds  which  honour  and  decency  dictate*; 
and  if  it  be  asked  what  effect  this  system  has 

*  It  may  be  objected  that  such  habits- as  we  have  been  de- 
scribing, must  often  lead  to  a  disregard  of  public  decency, 
and  which  therefore  must  be  very  bad  for  the  morals  of  the 
younger  branches  of  society  of  both  sexes,  by  making  them 
aconainted  with  what  they  ought  not  to  have  any  idea  of,  be* 
fore  the  voice  of  nature  whispered  the  important  secret.  In 
reply  to  this,  we  must  observe,  that  no  nation  can  well  pay 
greater  attention  to  public  decency  than  the  Tonga  people : 
bat  at  the  tame  time  we  acknowledge,  that  conversation  is 
oftn  intermingled  with  allusions,  even  when  women  are  pre* 
sent,  which  could  not  be  allowed  in  any  decent  society  in 
England  :  this,  however,  is  never  done  if  married  women,  or 
chiefs  superior  to  the  speaker,  are  near ;  because  it  would  be 
disrespectful :  but  such  subjects  are  not  the  result  of  deprav- 
ed notions,  they  are  rather  the  offspring  of  the  imagination, 
and  occasionally  hazarded  as  vehicles  of  joke  and  humour. 
Notwithstanding  this,  the  blush  of  female  modesty  suffuses 
the  cheek  in  these  islands  as  well  as  elsewhere,  although  the 
of  it  is  not  so  much  considered  an  offence :  though 
are  very  deficient  in  artificial  modesty,  they  am- 
ply nsnha  up  for  it  by  the  more  genuine  feeling  of  natural 

Those  among  us  whose  morality  is  almost  skin 
who  make  a  vast  account  of  outside  appearances, 
condemn  them  for  this. 
•  In  respect  to  children  of  both  sexes,  it  must  be  acknow- 
ledge* Ant  they  become  acquainted  with  such  subjects  at  a 
vaty^nriy  age*    Nevertheless,  a  young  female,  (suppose  8, 
lb  trio.jnnra  old),  conducts  herself  with  becoming  modesty, 
jndrr^nt  allusion  would  put  her  to  the  blush.  She 
a  kind  of  modest  pride,  which  she  probably  copies 

VOL.  II.  •  N 


178  STATB    OF    MORALS. 

upon  the  welfare  and  happiness  of  society,  it 
may  be  safely  answered,  that  there  is  not  the 

from  the  example  of  her  mother,  or  else  it  is  her  niton) 
bashfulness,  or  perhaps  both,  which  generally  constitutes 
the  safeguard  of  her  chastity,  till  the  affections  of  the  heart 
growing  ripe  with  riper  years,  she  at  length  listens  to  the  ■*> 
licitations  of  her  lover.  In  regard  to  the  boys,  Mr.  Marine* 
never  observed  nor  heard  of  any  pernicious  effect  in  their 
conduct,  resulting  from  too  early  an  acquaintance  with 
things.  When  no  secret  is  made,  what  is  there  to 
any  farther  enquiry }  But  if  the  subject  be  involved  in 
tery,  it  seises  strong  hold  of  the  mind ;  it  becomes  a  fraqnanf 
topic  of  discourse ;  and,  what  is  worse,  the  curious  enquirer  is 
not  contented  with  partial  hearsay  evidence,  he  has  recourse 
to  experience ;  for  as  long  asjany  thing  is  concealed  from  him* 
he  is  restless  and  dissatisfied ;  and  when  he  knows  all  that 
he  can  know,  it  will  be,  probably,  at  a  period  much  more 
early  than  is  proper :  but  in  what  other  way  can  we  account 
for  the  facts  ?  Mr.  Mariner  saw  no  men  at  Tonga,  nor  did  he 
hear  of  any,  who  made  debauchery  the  business  of  their  lives; 
on  the  contrary,they  were  wrestlers,  racers,  boxers*  and  cluh- 
fighters,  strong,  well  made  men,  with  fine  swelling  muscles, 
Another  circumstance  must  be  noticed,  as  connected  with 
morality,  and  that  is,  personal  cleanliness,  in  which  no  natja* 
can  excel  (without  ridiculous  refinement),  the  people  ef  these 
islands ;  and  it  is  not  unworthy  of  observation,  that  petsonsl 
cleanliness  often  argues  cleanliness  of  mind  and  idea.  AS  ss9 
certain  preposterous  habits,  which  so  disgrace  the  moral 
racter  of  nations  west  of  them,  and  which  have  been 
infect  the  natives  of  some  of  the  South  Sea  islands,  we  eaust 
do  the  Tonga  people  the  justice  to  say,  that  they  have  not 
.  the  most  remote  idea  of  any  thing  of  the  kind. 


STATE    OF    MORALS.  179 

least  appearance  of  any  bad  effect.     The  women 
are  very  tender,  kind  mothers,  and  the  children 
are  taken  exceeding  good  care  of:   for  even  in 
case  of  a  divorce,  the  children  of  any  age,  (re- 
quiring parental  care),  go  with  the  mother,  it 
being  considered  her  province  to  superintend 
their  welfare  till  they  grow  up ;   and  there  is 
never  any  dispute  upon  this  subject.  Both  sexes 
appear  contented  and  happy  in  their  relations 
to  etch  other.     As  to  domestic  quarrels,  they 
are  seldom  known;  but  this  must  be  said  to 
happen  rather  from  the  absolute  power  which 
every  man  holds  in  his  own  family :  for  even  if 
his  wife  be  of  superior  rank,  he  is  nevertheless 
of  the  highest  authority  in  all  domestic  matters, 
and  no  woman  entertains  the  least  idea  of  re* 
belKng  against  that  authority ;  and  if  she  should, 
even  her  own  relations  would  not  take  her  part, 
unlets  the  conduct  of  her  husband  were  un- 
doubtedly cruel.    That  the  men  are  also  capa- 
ble of  much  paternal  affection,  Mr.  Mariner  has 
witnessed  many  proofs,  some  of  which  have  been 
fdftted ;  and  we  have  already  mentioned  that 
filial  piety  is  a  most  important  duty,  and  ap. 
pens  to  be  universally  felt. 

Upon  these  grounds  we  would  venture  to  say, 
that  the  natives  of  these  islands  are  rather  to 
be  consideMd  a  chaste  than  a  libertine  people  ' 

n2 


180  STATE    OP    MORALS. 

and  that,  even  compared  with  the  most  civilized 
nations,  their  character  in  this  respect  is  to  be 
rated  at  no  mean  height ;  and  if  a  free  inter- 
course could  exist  with  European  society,  it  is 
a  matter  of  great  doubt  (whatever  might  be  the 
change  in  their  sentiments),  if  their  habits  or  disr 
positions  in  this  respect  would  be  much  improv- 
ed by  copying  the  examples  of  their  instructors. 
If,  on  the  other  hand,  we  compare  them  to  the 
natives  of  the  Society  islands,  and  the  Sand- 
wich islands,  we  should  add  insult  to  injustice. 
We  have  thus  endeavoured  to  give  a  just  and 
impartial  view  of  these  people,  as  far  as  regards 
their  notions  and  practices  of  the  most  import- 
ant points  of  morality,  trusting  that  the  ac? 
count  will  be  found  useful  and  interesting.  A 
great  deal  more  might,  no  doubt,  have  been 
said;  but  the  farther  we  enter  into  minutiae 
upon  such  a  subject,  the  more  we  are  likely 
to  form  an  erroneous  opinion  ;  whilst  the  gene- 
ral outlines  may  be  given  without  so  much 
danger  of  being  deceived ;  and  what  may  be 
thought  imperfect  in  this  sketch,  the  intelligent 
reader  will  be  able  to  supply  according  to  his 
own  judgment,  by  his  attentive  perusal  of  other 
parts  of  the  work.  If,  for  instance,  it  be  ob- 
jected that  we  have  not  taken  into  considera- 

i 

lion  the  question  of  their  being  anthropophagi, 


STATE    O*    MORALS.  181 

we  reply,  that  all  the  instances  that  can  any 
way  go  to  substantiate  their  character  in  this 
respect,  and  which  happened  during  Mr.  Ma- 
riner's stay  there,  have  been  faithfully  men- 
tioned, with  the  motives  and  occasions  of  them : 
from  which,  we  think  it  is  easy  to  draw  the  con- 
clusion, that  they  by  no  means  deserve  this  op- 
probrious name  :  for,  although  a  few  young  fe- 
rocious warriors  chose  to  imitate  what  they  con- 
sidered a  mark  of  courageous  fierceness  in  a 
neighbouring  nation,  it  was  held  in  disgust  by 
every  body  else. 


182  PRELIMINARY    OBSERVATIONS. 


CHAP.  XX. 

Preliminary  observations — Cava  root :  ceremony  of  prepar- 
ing the  infusion,  and  order  of  serving  it  out,  either  at  a 
chief,  a  priest,  or  a  god  may  preside — The  ceremony  of 
Ina'chi;  of  Fuccalahi;  of  Cava  fucca  Cgi;  of  Top-tap; 
of  Natcgia;  of  Tootoomma;  of  Bow  too  and  its  minor 
ceremonies,  viz.  Fctla%  Too' too,  Laffa,  Too'gi,  Fo'a  Oo'loo ; 
with  a  quotation  from  Leviticus ;  of  Langi,  and  the  very 
singular  mode  of  shewing  respect  to  the  remains  of  Tooi- 
tonga  ;— of  Tttboo  and  the  ceremonies  of  mo'cm-mo'e  and 
fo'ta ;  of  Too'goo  cava ;  of  Lo'too — Omens— Charms. 

As  attention  to  religious  ceremonies  forms  an 
important  feature  in  the  character  of  the  Ton- 
ga people,  and  as  they  consider  any  neglect  in 
this  respect  would  amount  to  a  crime,  that  the 
gods  would  punish  with  the  most  severe  tem- 
poral inflictions,  it  becomes  necessary  to  give 
a  particular  account  of  them.  The  punish- 
ments which  they  consider  themselves  liable  to 
for  disrespect  to  the  gods  and  neglect  of  reli- 
gious rites,  are  chiefly  conspiracies,  wars,  fit- 
mine,  and  epidemic  diseases,  as  public  cala- 


CEREMONY   OF   DRINKING  Cl/VA.         188 

taities;  and  sickness  and  premature  .death,  as 
punishments  for  the  offences  of  individuals: 
and  these  evils,  whenever  they  happen,  are  sup* 
posed  to  proceed  immediately  from  the  gods, 
as  visitations  for  their  crimes. 
-  There  is  no  public  religious  rite  whatsoever, 
and  scarcely  any  in  private,  but  of  which  the 
ceremony  of  drinking  cava  forms  an  important, 
or  at  least  a  usual  part ;  for  which  reason,  al- 
though cava  is  taken  on  other  occasions  several 
times  daily,  we  shall  endeavour  to  give  a  full 
description  of  its  preparation  and  form  of  tak- 
ing, before  we  proceed  to  those  ceremonies 
which  are  more  strictly  religious. 

The  root  which  they  term  cava,  and  by 
which  name  the  plant  producing  it  is  also 
called,  belongs  to  a  species  of  the  pepper 
plant :  it  is  known  by  the  same  name  at  the 
Fiji  islands;  but  at  the  Navigator's  islands, 
(which  the  Tonga  people  also  visit),  at  the 
Society  islands,  and  the  Sandwich  islands,  it  is 
universally  called  ova.  At  all  these  places  it 
is  used  for  the  same  or  similar  purposes. 

The  state  in  which  it  is  taken  is  that  of  in- 
fimo* :  it  is  drunk  every  day  by  chiefs,  mata* 
booles,  and  others,  as  a  luxury :  the  form  of 
preparing  and  serving  it  out  is  the  same,  whe- 
ther at  a  large  party  or  a  small  one :  the  great* 


184         CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING  CA'VA. 

est  order  is  observed  during  the  whole  time, 
and  the  rank  of  persons  is  particularly  attended 
to.  The  following  description  we  shall  sup- 
pose to  be  of  some  grand  occasion,  either  reli- 
gious or  political.  At  all  cava  parties,  provi- 
sions are  also  shared  out;  but  the  habitual 
cava  drinkers  seldom  eat  more  than  a  mouth- 
ful, and  this  they  do  to  prevent  the  infusion, 
when  drunk  in  large  quantities,  from  affecting 
the  stomach  with  nausea  ;  but  there  are  a  few 
who  will  not  even  use  this  precaution.  When 
the  party  is  very  large,  it  is  held  on  a  markf; 
for  the  sake  of  room ;  the  chief  who  preside* 
sitting  within  the  eaves  of  the  house.  The 
time  of  the  day  is  indifferent:  small  cava  par- 
ties arc  frequently  held  by  torch  light ;  but  for 
religious  ceremonies,  whether  of  large  or  small 
parties,  mostly  in  the  morning.  Women  of 
rank  never  attend  large  public  cava  parties. 

In  the  first  place,  we  shall  endeavour  to  de- 
scribe the  form  and  order  in  which  the  com- 
pany and  attendants  sit.  The  chief  who  pre- 
sides, and  who  is  always  the  greatest  chief  ' 
present,  sits  about  two  feet,  or  perhaps  three, 
within  the  eaves  of  the  house, #  on  the  matting 

*  It  must  be  recollected,  their  houses  are  rather  of  an 
oval  form,  closed  at  the  two  ends  and  open  in  the  front  and, 
back,  the  eaves  coining  within  about  four  feet  of  the  ground 


CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING   C\'VA.         185 

which  constitutes  the  flooring,  with  his  face 
towards  the  open  marly',  into  which  the  circle 
on  either  side  extends.  On  his  right  and  left 
hand  sits  a  mataboole :  both  these  order  and 
arrange  the  ceremonies  in  the  manner  directly 
to  be  shewn,  and  whom,  for  the  sake  of  distinc- 
tion, we  shall  call  presiding  matabooles.  On 
the  lower  hand  of  either  of  them  sits  the  next 
greatest  chief  present,  and  another,  who  may 
be  his  equal  or  a  little  inferior  to  him,  on  the 
opposite  side,  near  the  other  mataboole :  after 
these,  come  other  chiefs,  matabooles,  and 
mooaa,  sitting  more  or  less  according  to  their 
rank ;  for  as  it  frequently  happens  that  the 
higher  chief*  are  not  the  first  that  come,  the 
places  due  to  their  rank  are  found  occupied 
by  persons  inferior  to  them,  and  rather  than 
disturb  the  company,  they  take  their  seats  a 
little  out  of  the  proper  order ;  but  for  a  general 
rule,  the  higher  chiefs  sit  towards  the  top ;  for 
it  ia  not  so  much  in  the  order  of  sitting  that 
their  rank  is  paid  respect  to,  as  in  the  order  of 
their  being  served,  which  is  done  with  the 
moat  scrupulous  exactness.  It  is  the  charac- 
teristic of  a  mataboole,  to  know  how  to  serve 
out  cava  and  provisions  according  to  the  rank 
of  individuals,  so  as  not  to  give  offence.  Thus, 
the  ring  extends  itself  on  either  hand  of  the 


186         CEREMONY  OF   DRINKING  CA'VA. 

presiding  chief,  but  it  is  in  general  not  $m 
exact  circle,  the  greatest  diameter  dividing  the 
top  from  the  bottom,  which  last  is  rather  leas 
curved  than  the  top.  About  one  third  of  the 
ring  which  constitutes  the  bottom,  is  generally 
occupied  by  the  young  chiefs  and  sons  of  ma* 
tabooles  belonging  to  the  chief  who  preside*  i 
and  in  the  middle  of  these,  exactly  opposite 
the  chief,  sits  the  man  who  is  to  mix  and  pre- 
pare the  cava  after  it  is  chewed :  he  is  generally 
a  mooa,  tooa,  or  cook,  though  sometimes  % 
chief;  at  any  rate,  he  must  be  able  to  perfoni 
his  task,  which  is  not  an  easy  one  at  large  par* 
ties,  with  strength,  dexterity,  and  grace.  ^*• 
hind  those  at  the  bottom  of  the  ring,  site  the 
body  of  the  people,  which,  on  extraordinary  oCr 
casions,  may  consist  of  three  or  four  thousand 
individuals,  chiefly  men ;  the  number  of  wo-* 
men  being  comparatively  small.  If  either  ef 
the  presiding  matabooles  now  discovers  any 
person  of  rank  sitting  much  below  the  place 
he  ought  to  occupy,  he  desires  the  individual 
who  sits  in  that  place  to  change  situation* 
with  him ;  or  if  he  sees  a  chief  coming  after 
the  ring  is  formed,  he  orders  one  of  those  who 
is  seated,  to  get  up  and  retire,  and  he  calls  out 
to  the  chief  by  his'  name,  saying,  "  here  is  a 
place  for  you." 


CEREMONY  OF    DRINKING  CA'VA.  187 

Before  we  go  further,  we  must  make  an  im- 
portant distinction  between  what  we  have  here 
called  the  bottom  and  the  rest  of  the  ring :  the 
latter,  beginning  with  the  chief,  and  advancing 
onwards  on  either  side,  constituting  about  two 
thirds  of  the  whole  ring,  consists  of  but  a  single 
row  of  individuals,  and  this,  for  the  sake  of  dis- 
tinction, we  shall  denominate  the  superior  cir- 
cle ;  the  bottom,  which  may  be  considered  only 
the  front  of  the  body  of  the  people,  we  shall 
name  the  inferior  circle,  and  the  body  of  the 
people,  who  are  closely  seated  together  indis* 
chminately, #  we  shall  call  the  exterior  circle. 
No^person,  though  he  be  a  chief  of  high  rank, 
can  ait  in  the  superior  circle  at  the  same 
time  that  his  father  is  there,  (or  any  superior 
relation),  even  though  he  be  at  a  considerable 
distance;  and  if  he  be  already  seated  there, 
and  his  father  comes,  he  must  necessarily  re- 
tire to  the  inferior  or  exterior  circle,  no  matter 
which,  ont  of  respect  to  his  superior  relation : 
in  either  of  the  other  circles,  however,  father 
and  aon  may  sit  iicr  to  each  other  if  they 
please ;  on  this  account,  the  superior  circle  is 
akme  considered  the  true  cava  party  ;  all  the 

rat,  both  inferior  and  exterior,  being  rather  to 

•  • 

*  t\r.  One  row  behind  another,  with  their  faces  towards 


188         CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING  CA'vA. 

be  considered  attendants,  and  persons  looking 
on,  although  several  of  them  frequently  obtain 
their  share  of  provisions  and  cava,  according 
to  the  quantity  that  there  may  be.  From  this 
circumstance,  it  happens,  that  the  inferior  ring 
is  generally  composed  of  the  sons  of  chiefs  and 
matabooles,  who  belong  to  the  presiding  chief, ' 
(forming  his  cow  nofo),  and  who  are  perhaps 
situated  in  the  superior  or  true  ring :  from  this 
cause  it  also  often  happens,  that  very  great 
chiefs  are  seated  in  the  exterior  circle;  it  being 
thought  no  particular  advantage  to  be  in  the 
inferior,  unless  for  those  who  wish  to  be  assi- 
duous in  serving  out  the  cava,  which  is  ambo- 
nourable  office.  During  the  late  king's  Kfe, 
his  son,  the  present  king,  usually  sat  in  the  in- 
ferior or  exterior  circle,  and  assisted  in  chew- 
ing the  root  and  serving  it  out. 

The  company  being  thus  all  arranged,  the 
provisions,  if  they  have  not  been  already 
brought,  are  now  fetched  by  the  cooks  belong- 
ing to  the  chief  at  the  head  of  the  company, 
and  who  do  this  without  receiving  any  orders. 
If  the  cava  is  not  already  brought,  one  of  the 
presiding  matabooles  perhaps  calls  out  to  on* 
of  the  cooks  in  the  exterior  ring,  who  imme- 
diately rises  and  advances  through  the  inferior 
ring  towards  the  mataboole,  and,  sitting  down 


CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING   CA'VA.         189 

before  him,  receives  orders  to  go  to  the  chiefs 
home,  and  fetch  such  a  root  or  such  a  quantity 
of  cava :  when  he  returns  he  enters  the  ring  as 
before,  through  the  inferior  circle,  bearing  the 
cava  root  in  his  arms :  if  the  provisions  are 
coming  in  at  the  same  time,  the  man  with  the 
cava  advances  at  the  head,  amidst  the  thanks 
of  the  company,  and  proceeds  close  up  to  the 
chief  and  sits  down,  laying  the  cava  root  before 
him :  the  provisions  being  placed  about  eight 
or  ten  paces  off,  on  the  ground,  when  the 
cooks  who  brought  them  immediately  retire 
to^freir  places  in  the  exterior  circle.  In  the 
mean  while,  the  man  who  has  brought  the 
cava  remains  seated  before  the  chief  till  he 
receives  orders  from  the  same  presiding  mata- 
boole,  to  take  the  cava  root  to  be  broken  up  and 
chewed:  he  accordingly  rises  and  carries  the 
root  to  the  man  opposite  the  chief,  who  sits  in 
the  middle  of  the  inferior  circle  :  he  places  the 
root  immediately  before  him,  and  retires  to  his 
•eat.  The  root  is  now  split  up  with  an  axe, 
or  any  such  instrument,  into  small  pieces,  by 
the  man  who  is  to  mix  the  cava,  and  those 
about  him  ;  and  being  thus  sufficiently  divided 
and  scraped  clean  with  muscle  shells,  &c.,  it 
is  handed  out  to  those  sitting  in  the  inferior 
and  exterior  circle,  to  be  chewed.    There  is 


190         CEREMONY  OF   DRINKING  CAVA. 

now  heard  a  universal  buz  throughout  this 
part  of  the  company,  which  forms  a  curiobt 
contrast  to  the  silence  that  reigned  before; 
several  crying  out  frtan  all  quarters,  my  ma 
cava;  my,  my  ma  cava;  my  he  cava;  give  me 
some  cava ;  give  me  cava ;  some  cava :  each  of 
those  who  intend  to  chew  it,  crying  out  for 
some  to  be  handed  to  them.  No  one  offers 
to  chew  the  cava  but  young  persons  who  have 
good  teeth,  clean  mouths,  and  have  no  colds: 
women  frequently  assist.  It  is  astonishing 
how  remarkably  dry  they  preserve  the  nMtt, 
while  it  is  undergoing  this  process  of  masfea- 
tion.  In  about  two  minutes,  each  person  htfV- 
insr  chewed  his  quantity,  takes  it  out  of  his 
mouth  with  his  hand,  and  puts  it  on  a  piece  of 
plantain  or  banana  leaf,  or  sometimes  he  raise! 
the  leaf  to  his  mouth,  and  puts  it  off  his  tongue 
in  the  form  of  a  ball,  of  tolerable  consistence, 
(particularly  if  it  is  dry  cava  root).  The  dif- 
ferent portions  of  cava  being  now  all  chewed, 
which  is  known  by  the  silence  that  ensues, 
nobody  calling  for  any,  some  one  takes  the 
wooden  bowl  *  from  the  exterior  circle,  and 
places  it  on  the  ground  before  the  man  who  is 
to  make  the  infusion.     In  the  mean  while,  each 

*  The  bowl  used  at  a  large  party  is  about  three  feet  in 
diameter,  and  about  one  foot  in  depth  in  the  centre. 


CEREMONY    OF  DRlNKlJitt  Ca'vA.         191 

person  who  sits  at  any  distance  from  the  in- 
ferior circle,  passes  on  his  portion  of  chewed 
mot,  so  that  it  is  conveyed  from  one  to  another 
till  it  is  received  by  three  or  four  persons,  who 
are  actively  engaged  in  the  front  of  the  inferior 
circle,  going  from  one  side  to  the  other  col- 
lecting it,  and  depositing  it  in  the  wooden 
bowl :  it  is  not,  however,  thrown  in  promis- 
cuously, but  in  such  a  way,  that  each  portion 
is  distinct  and  separate  from  the  rest,  till  at 
length,  the  whole  inside  of  the  vessel  becomes 
thickly  studded,  beginning  at  the  bottom  and 
gqjpg  up  on  every  side  towards  the  edges :  this 
m  done  that  a  judgment  may  afterwards  be 
formed  of  the  quantity  of  beverage  that  it  will 
make :  as  each  portion  is  disengaged  from  its 
leaf,  the  leaf  is  thrown  any  where  on  the 
ground. 

The  cava  being  thus  deposited  in  the  bowl, 
those  persons  who  had  been  busy  collecting  it, 
retire  to  their  places  and  sit  down  :  the  man  be* 
fore  whom  the  bowl  is  placed,  now  tilts  it  up  a 
little  towards  the  chief  that  he  may  see  the  quan- 
tity of  its  contents,  saying,  coe  cava  heni  gooa 
*0»  this  is  the  cava  chewed :  if  the  chief  (having 
consulted  the  mataboole),  thinks  there  is  not 
enough,  he  says,  oq/i-oo/i,  bea  how  he  tangSta, 
cover  it  over,  and  let  there  come  a  man  here ; 


182         CEREMONY  OF  DUINKING   CA'VA. 

the  bowl  is  then  covered  over  with  a  plantain 
or  banana  leaf,  and  a  man  goes  to  the '  same 
presiding  mataboole  to  receive  more  cava  root, 
to  be  chewed  as  before ;  but  if  it  is  thought 
there  is  a  sufficiency,  he  says,  paloo,  mix.  The 
two  men,  who  sit  one  on  each  side  of  him  who 
is  to  prepare  the  cava,  now  come  forward  a 
little,  and  making  a  half  turn,  sit  opposite  to 
each  other,  the  bowl  being  between  them :  one 
of  these  fans  off  the  flies  with  a  large  leaf, 
while  the  other  sits  ready  to  pour  in  the  water 
from  cocoa  nut  shells,  *  one  at  a  time.  Before 
this  is  done,  however,  the  man  who  is  abouJUo 
mix,  having  first  rinced  his  hands  with  a  little 
of  the  water,  kneads  together  (the  mataboole 
having  said  paloo),  the  chewed  root,  gathering 
it  up  from  all  sides  of  the  bowl  and  compress* 
ing  it  together ;  upon  this,  the  mataboole  says, 
Ungi  he  vy,  pour  in  the  water,  and  the  man  on 
one  side  of  the  bowl  continues  pouring,  fresh 
shells  being  handed  to  him,  until  the  mata- 
boole thinks  there  is  sufficient,  which  he  an- 

*  These  shells  are  whole,  having  merely  two  small  holes 
at  the  top :  the  large  ones  are  always  chosen  for  this  pur- 
pose :  the  nuts  destined  for  this  use  are  filled  with  sa  It 
water,  and  buried  in  the  sand  until  the  inside  becomes  de- 
cayed or  rather  deliquescent,  when  it  is  poured  out,  and  the 
inside  well  washed. 


CEHExMONV  of  drinking  ca'va.        193 

bounces  by  saying,  mow  he  vy,  stop  the  w  ater ; 
be  now  discontinues  pouring,  and  takes  up  a 
leaf  to  assist  the  other  in  fanning.  The  mata- 
boole  now  says,  paloo  ger  tattow,  beafucca  mow, 
mix  it  every  where  equally,  and  make  it  firm, 
i.  e.  bring  the  dregs  together  in  a  body. 

Things  being  thus  far  prepared,  the  mata- 
boole  says,  y  lieJoWj  put  in  the  fow*  :  a  large 
quantity  of  this  fibrous  substance,  sufficient  to 
cover  the  whole  surface  of  the  infusion,  is 
now  put  in  by  one  of  those  who  sit  by  the  side 
of  the. bowl,  and  it  floats  upon  the  surface. 
The  man  who  manages  the  bowl  now  begins 
his  difficult  operation.  In  the  first  place,  he 
extends  his  left  hand  to  the  farther  side  of  the 
bowl,  with  the  fingers  pointing  downwards,  and 
the  palm  towards  himself;  he  sinks  that  hand 
carefully  down  the  side  of  the  bowl,  carrying 
with  it  the  edge  of  the  Jow;  at  the  same  time 
his  right  hand  is  performing  a  similar  operation 
at  the  side  next  to  him,  the  fingers  pointing 
downwards,  and  the  palm  presenting  outwards. 
lie  does  this  slowly,  from  side  to  side,  gradually 
tocending  deeper  and  deeper,  till  his  fingers 
meet  each  other  at  the  bottom,  so  that  nearly 

*TheJbu>  is  the  bark  of  a  tree  stripped  into  small  fibres, 
tod  hat  rery  much  the  appearance  of  the  willow  shavings  that 
«t  and  la  England  to  decorate  fireplaces  in  summer  time. 

VOL.  II.  O 


194         CEREMONY  OP   DRINKING  CA'VA. 

the  whole  of  the  fibres  of  the  root  are  by  these 
means  enclosed  in  thejbw,  forming  as  it  were 
a  roll  of  above  two  feet  in  length,  lying  along 
the  bottom  from  side  to  side,  the  edges  of  the 
fow  meeting  each  other  underneath.  He  now 
carefully  rolls  it  over,  so  that  the  edges  over- 
lapping each  other,  or  rather  intermingling, 
come  uppermost.  He  next  doubles  in  the  two 
ends,  and  rolls  it  carefully  over  again,  endea- 
vouring to  reduce  it  to  a  narrower  and  firmer 
compass.  He  now  brings  it  cautiously  out  of  the 
fluid,  taking  firm  hold  of  it  by  the  two  ends* 
one  in  each  hand  (the  back  of  the  hands  being 
upwards),  and  raising  it  breast  high,  with  hit 
arms  considerably  extended,  he  brings  his  right 
hand  towards  his  breast,  moving  it  gradually 
onwards,  and  whilst  his  left  hand  is  coming 
round  towards  his  right  shoulder,  his  right  hand 
partially  twisting  the  /ott>,  lays  the  end  which 
it  holds  upon  the  left  elbow,  so  that  the  Jim 
lies  thus  extended  upon  that  arm,  one  end  be* 
ing  still  grasped  by  the  left  hand.  The  right 
hand  being  now  at  liberty,  is  brought  under 
the  left  fore  arm  (which  still  remains  in  the 
same  situation),  and  carried  outwardly  towaidl 
the  left  elbow,  that  it  may  again  seize  in  that 
situation  the  end  of  thtjbw.  The  right  hand 
then  describes  a  bold  curve  outwardly  from  the 


CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING   cVVA.         195 

chest,  whilst  the  left  comes  across  the  chest,  de- 
scribing a  curve  nearer  to  him,  and  in  the  op* 
potite  direction,  till  at  length  the  left  hand  is 
extended  from  him,  and  the  right  approaches  to 
the  left  shoulder,  gradually  twisting  the  fow  by 
the  tarn  and  flexures  principally  of  that  wrist : 
this  double  motion  is  then  retraced,  but  in  such 
a  way  (the  left  wrist  now  principally  acting) ,  that 
thejvwy  instead  of  being  untwisted,  is  still  more 
twisted,  and  is  at  length  again  placed  upon  the 
left  arm,  while  he  takes  a  new  and  less  constrain- 
ed hold.  Thus  the  hands  and  arms  perform  a 
Tariety  of  curves  of  the  most  graceful  descrip- 
tion :  the  muscles  both  of  the  arms  and  chest 
ire  seen  rising  as  they  are  called  into  action, 
displaying  what  would  be  a  fine  and  uncommon 
subject  of  study  for  the  painter,  for  no  combina- 
tions of  animal  action  can  develope  the  swell 
and  ptay  of  the  muscles  with  more  grace  or  with 
better  efiect.  The  degree  of  strength  which  he 
exerts  when  there  is  a  large  quantity  is  very 
great,  and  the  dexterity  with  which  he  accom- 
ptishes  the  whole  never  fails  to  excite  the  atten- 
tat andadmirat  ion  of  all  present :  every  tongue 
is  Wrte,  and  every  eye  is  upon  him,  watching 
each  notion  of  his  arms,  as  they  describe  the 
various  curvilinear  turns  essential  to  the  success 
of  the  operation.    Sometimes  the  fibres  of  the 

o2 


196         CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING   CA'VA. 

Jbw  are  heard  to?  crack  with  *  the  increasing 
tension,  yet  the  mass  is  seen  whole  and  entire, 
becoming  more  thin  as  it  becomes  more  twist- 
ed, while  the  infusion  drains  from  it  in  a  rego* 
larly  decreasing  quantity,  till  at  length  it  denies 
a  single  drop.  He  now  gives  it  to  a  person  on 
his  left  side,  and  receives  fresh  Jbw  from  an- 
other in  attendance  on  his  right,  and  begins  the 
operation  anew,  with  a  view  to  collect  what 
before  might  have  escaped  him ;  and  so  on, 
even  a  third  time,  till  no  dregs  are  left,  save 
what  are  so  fine  and  so  equally  diffused  through 
the  whole  liquid  as  not  to  be  thus  separated*. 

*  No  man  undertakes  to  perform  this  operation  at  a  large 
party  but  who  has  been  well  practised  on  smaller  6ccasion8 : 
for  it  is  considered  a  great  accomplishment,  even  worthy  of  a 
chief;  but  a  failure  on  such  an  occasion  would  look  very  bad : 
Mr.  Mariner,  however,  never  witnessed  one.  The  cava  dregs 
which  have  been  thus  put  aside  are  afterwards  taken  away 
by  the  cooks,  and  chewed  over  again  to  make  fresh  infusion 
for  themselves.  The  disgusted  reader  will  here  perhaps  call 
to  mind  the  assertion  we  have  formerly  made,  that  no  nation 
can  excel  the  Tonga  people  in  personal  cleanliness,  and  will 
regret  that  they  are  not  equally  clean  in  their  food.  If  this 
objection  were  made  to  a  native,  he  would  say, "  it  is  not  in- 
deed very  cleanly,  for  we  would  not  eat  a  piece  of  yam  which 
another  had  bitten ;  but  chewing  the  cava  is  an  ancient  prac- 
tice, and  we  think  nothing  of  it :  but  what,"  he  will  perhaps 
add,  "  can  be  more  filthy  and  disgusting  than  the  Papalangi 
practice  of  drinking  the  milk  of  a  beast,  and  giving  it  to  your 
children  for  food  ?"— Every  country  has  its  customs. 


CEREMONY   OF    DRINKING  CA'VA.  107 

During  the  above  operation,  various  people 
in  the  exterior  circle  are  employed  making  cava 
cup*  of  the  unexpanded  leaf  of  the  banana  tree, 
which  is  cut  into  lengths  of  about  nine  inches; 
each  piece  being  then  unfolded  is  nearly  square ; 
the  two  ends  are  next  plaited  up  in  a  particular 
manner,  and  tied  with  a  fibre  of  the  stem  of  the 
leaf,  forming  a  very  elegant  cup,  not  unworthy 
of  imitation .  These  leaves  are  provided  before- 
hand, as  well  as  the  water,  the  bowl,  Sec.  by 
the  cooks.  Sometimes  it  happens  that  there  is 
not  water  enough,  in  which  case  off  starts  some 
one  from  the  exterior  circle  to  fetch  more,  run- 
ning as  if  it  were  for  his  life,  and  twenty  more 
after  him,  each  anxious  to  shew  his  readiness 
in  arriving  first  with  the  water :  in  a  short  time, 
if  they  are  not  returned,  twenty  or  thirty  more 
will  rash  off  with  equal  swiftness :  presently 
after  they  are  seen  coming  back,  forty  or  fifty 
in  number,  at  full  speed,  with  three  or  four 
cocoa  nutshells  of  water ;  or  if  any  thing  else 
k  wanted,  it  is  fetched  in  the  same  prompt  way. 

lathe  meanwhile,  also,  the/ono,  or  provisions 
to  be  4aten  with  the  cava,  is  shared  out.  This 
generally  consists  of  yams,  ripe  bananas,  or  plan- 
in  sufficient  quantity  that  each  in  the  su- 
circle  may  have  a  small  portion  to  eat 
*fter  hib  dish  of  cava.    The  m&taboole  calls 


108         CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING  CAVA. 

out  for  somebody  to  come  and  divide  ihefono  ; 
a  couple  generally  advance  forward  and  pro- 
ceed to  make  the  division.  A  large  portion  U 
first  separated,  and  presented  to  the  presiding 
chief,  by  laying  it  before  him :  this  being  done, 
the  mataboole .  orders  the  remainder  to  be  di- 
vided equally  between  the  two  sides,  left  and 
right,  of  the  superior  circle;  each  person  has 
consequently  a  portion  presented  to  him  in  the 
order  in  which  he  sits.  This  operation  takes  op 
about  three  or  four  minutes,  and  is  performed 
quietly,  when  the  man  at  the  bowl  begins  to 
Fring  out  the  cava: 

The  infusion  of  cava  being  now  strained,  die 
performance  of  which  generally  occupies  about 
a  quarter  of  an  hour  or  twenty  minutes,  the 
man  at  the  bowl  calls  out  gooa  ma  he  caodrie,  the 
cava  is  clear :  the  mataboole  replies,  Jucca  taw} 
squeeze  out,  alluding  to  the  peculiar  operation 
of  filling  the  cups.  Two  or  three  from  the  in? 
ferior  or  exterior  circle  now  come  forward  and 
sit  down  near  the  bowl,  bringing  with  them  and 
placing  on  the  ground  several  of  the  cups: 
one  then  rises  and  holds  with  both  hands  a  cop 
to  be  filled,  standing  a  little  on  one  side,  and 
holding  the  cup  over  the  middle  of  the  bowl, 
so  that  his  body  does  not  obstruct  the  view  of 
those  at  the  top  of  the  superior  circle.     The 


CBREMONY  OF  DRINKING  CA'VA.         199 

man  who  manages  the  bowl  fills  the  cup  by 
dipping  in  a  portion  ofjbw  rolled  together,  and 
which,  when  replete  with  the  liquid,  he  holds 
over  the  cup,  compressing  it  so  that  the  infusion 
falls  into  it,  to  the  quantity  of  about  the  third 
of  a  pint.  ,  The  one  who  has  the  cup  now  turns 
and  stands  a  little  on  one  side,  with  his  face 
towards  the  chief:  at  the  same  time  one  of 
those  who  have  been  described,  sitting  by  the 
side  of  the  bowl  and  employed  fanning  it,  cries 
out  with  a  loud  voice,  cava  gooa  heca,  the  cava 
is  deposited  (i.e.  in  the  cup) :  the  mataboole  re- 
plies, angi  ma give  it  to ,  naming 

the  party  who  is  to  have  it,  who,  hearing  his 
name  announced,  claps  the  hollow  part  of  his 
kinds  together  twice  (unless  it  be  the  presiding 
chief),  to  signify  where  about  he  is  seated :  the 
coprbearer  then  advances  and  presents  it  stand- 
ing, unless  it  be  to  a  great  chief  at  Tooitonga's 
cava  party,  when  he  presents  it  sitting. 

We  must  now  describe  the  order  in  which 
the  different  individuals  in  the  company  are 
served,  which  is  a  most  important  part  of  the 
ceremony,  and  requires  all  the  attention  of  the 
presiding  mataboole.  It  must  be  noticed  as  a 
general  rule,  that  the  chief  at  the  head  of  the 
tilde  receives  either  the  first  or  third  cup ;  the 
third  cup,  however,  is  properly  his  due :  the  first, 


000         CEREMONY  OP   DRINKING   GAT  A. 

according  to  old  established  custom,  the  mata- 
boole orders  to  be  given  to  his  fellow  mataboole 
on  the  other  side  of  the  chief,  unless  there  be  a 
chief  or  mataboole  from  another  island  in  com- 
pany ;  it  is  then  given  to  him,  as  being  a  visitor. 
If  there  be  a  person  in  the  circle  who  has  made 
present  of  the  cava,  the  first  cup  is  given  in 
compliment  to  him.  But  supposing  that  the  cava 
was  not  a  present,  and  there  are  two  or  more 
visitors  in  company  of  about  equal  rank,  and 
the  mataboole  is  in  doubt  which  of  them  ought 
to  have  it,  to  avoid  giving  offence  he  orders 
it  to  be  given  to  the  presiding  chief;  and  this 
is  the  only  case  in  which  the  chief  at  the  hefcd 
of  the  company  gets  the  first  cup ;  the  other  ma- 
taboole then  receives  the  second,  the  third  falls 
to  the  lot  of  the  chief  next  in  rank  to  the  presi- 
dent, and  so  on,  without  farther  hesitation,  to 
every  one  according  to  his  rank.  So  that  the 
president  either  has  the  first  or  third  cup,  and 
the  mataboole  who  is  not  giving  directions 
either  has  the  first  or  second  cup :  but  to  ren- 
der this  important  piece  of  Tonga  ceremony 
more  clear,  we  shall  suppose  the  several  possi- 
ble instances,  and  state  the  order  of  the  service 
in  each.  The  person  whom  we  here  call  the 
mataboole  is  one  of  those  two  sitting  by  the 
side  of  the  president,  and  who  is  not  actually 


CBREMONY  OF  DRINKING   CA'VA.         901 

giving  directions ;  for  one  mataboole  only  regu- 
lates the  serving  out  of  each  bowl ;  and  if  the 
bowl  is  filled  a  second  time,  the  other  mataboole 
directs  the  ceremonies,  and  so  on  alternately 

1st.  Where  the  cava  is  a  present,  and  the  giver 
is  in  company,  the  order  is  thus :  the  giver ; 

*  the  mataboole ;  the  president. 

2d.  The  cava  not  being  a  present,  or  the  giver 
not  in  company,  but  there  being  a  visitor, 
thus :  the  visitor ;  the  mataboole  ;  the  presi- 
dent. 

3d.  There  being  two  or  more  visitors  of  nearly 
equal  rank,  and  the  master  of  the  ceremonies 
not  knowing  how  to  choose  without  giving 

t  offence,  thus :  the  president ;  the  mataboole ; 
the  chief  next  below  the  president  in  rank. 

4th.  There  being  no  visitor  present,  thus  :  the 
mataboole ;  the  chief  next  in  rank  to  the 
president ;  the  president. 

Hence  it  will  appear  that  the  giver  of  the 
cavm,  in  those  instances  where  it  is  a  present, 
Us  the  first  cup,  in  preference  to  any  body  else ; 
at  least  this  is  generally  the  case,  unless  there 
be  a  visitor  present,  who  is  evidently  superior 
in  rank,  to  him :  on  such  an  occasion  the  vi- 
sitor would  be  preferred  to  the  giver,  and  the 


202         OEREMONY    OF   DRINKING  CA'VA. 

mataboole  would  have  the  second,  the  presi- 
dent the  third,  and  the  giver  would  not  obtain 
any  till  it  came  in  the  usual  way  to  his  turn 
according  to  his  rank.  If  it  be  doubtful  whe- 
ther the  giver  or  the  visitor  ought  to  have  the 
preference,  then,  to  avoid  giving  offence,  the 
president  gets  it.  So  that  in  all  cases  the  prin- 
cipal difficulty  is  in  the  disposal  of  the  first  three 
cups ;  all  the  remainder  being  served  out  ac- 
cording to  rank.  If  in  the  course  of  serving  it 
out  there  be  two  persons  of  equal  rank,  the 
one  sitting  nearest  the  chief  will  be  supplied 
first. 

At  large  cava  parties  very  few,  in  proportion 
to  the  immense  multitude  present,  get  served 
with  this*  infusion  ;  but  there  must  always  be 
enough  for  the  superior  circle,  and  for  their  re- 
lations, who  may  be  either  in  the  inferior  -or 
exterior  :  which  latter,  who,  for  reasons  before 
given,  do  not  sit  in  the  upper  circle,  are  served 
nevertheless  in  the  order  of  their  rank,  or 
nearly  so.  One  thing  more  is  to  be  observed; 
viz.  when  a  cup  of  cava  is  announced  to  be 
given  to  a  person  whose  superior  relation  is 
present,  that  superior  relation  has  a  right  to 
counter-order  it,  which  he  does  by  calling  out, 

"  give  it  to ,"  mentioning  the  name  of 

some  individual  whom  he  chooses  should  have 


CEREMONY    OF  DRINKING  CA'VA.  203 

it  in  preference  to  his  inferior  relation ;   and 
this  18  often  done. 

When  the  bowl  is  emptied,  if  the  chief  thinks 
proper,  he  orders  another  to  be  got  ready ;  or 
if  any  person  in  company  sends  away  for  some 
cava  root,  to  make  a  present  of  it  to  the  chief, 
a  fresh  quantity  must  be  prepared;  but  the 
president  himself  often  sends  away  for  a  second, 
a  third,  and  even  a  fourth  supply  of  cava  root. 
Each  bowl  must  be  served  round  as  long  as  it 
will  last :  when  the  individuals  of  the  supe- 
rior circle,  and  the  persons  related  to  them,  are 
served,  if  any  remains,  it  is  given  out  to  others 
m  the  inferior  and  exterior  circles ;  no  person 
receiving  two  cups  out  of  the  same  bowl. 
When  a  second  bowl  is  filled,  it  is  served  out 
the  same  as  the  first,  i.  e.  not  beginning  where 
the  first  left  off,  but  commencing  and  going  on 
with  the  same  individuals  as  if  it  were  the  first 
bowl ;  the  third  in  the  like  manner,  &c.  Every 
bowl  is  provided  with  a  fresh  quantity  of/bwo, 
er.  victuals  to  be  eaten  with  the  cava,  and 
which  are  shared  out  in  the  same  way  as  be* 
fare :  these  generally  consist  of  yams,  bananas, 
er  plantains,  but  sometimes  a  baked  pig  it 
fcranght,  in  which  case  the  liver  and  a  yam  is 
the  portion  presented  to  the  chief;  if  fowls  ai^ 
brought,  the  skin  of  the  throat,  and  the  rump, 


CKKEMONY  OF   DRIMKfNA  CAVA. 

are  the  president's  share.  If,  before  the  con- 
clusion, any  one  in  the  superior  circle  wishes 
to  leave,  he  says  to  the  chief,  Iky  teoo  mow 
cava,  I  cannot  provide  cava;  and,  with  this 
apology,  he  leaves :  or,  if  he  has  actually  pro- 
•  vided  cava,  he  has  only  to  state  some  reason 
for  his  leaving  the  company,  such  as  going  to 
another  island,  or  to  superintend  some  work. 

.  It  has  been  noticed,  that  there  are  two  ma- 
tabooles,  one  on  each  side  of  the  president, 
who  direct  the  ceremonies ;  but  it  must  be 
mentioned,  that  only  one  of  them  regulates 
the  preparation  and  sharing  out  of  each  bowl ; 
i.  e.  one  regulates  the  first  bowl,  and  the  other 
the  second,  and  so  on  alternately.  They  ge- 
nerally sit  close  to  the  chief,  except  when 
Tooitonga  presides,  and  t^ien  there  is  an  in- 
tervening space,  between  him  and  them,  of 
about  six  feet,  or  rather  more.  No  chief 
comes  to  an  inferior  chief's  cava  party,  or,  if 
any  extraordinary  circumstance  was  to  make 
this  necessary,  the  inferior  would  be  obliged 
to  retire  to  his  own  exterior  circle,  and  the 
superior  visitor  would  preside :  for  the  greatest 
chief  present  must  always  preside,  unless  there 
be  an  inspired  priest,  then  he  sits  at  the  head 
of  the  circle,  and  the  greatest  chief  in  com- 
pany, who  would  otherwise  have  that  honour- 


CEREMONY  OF  DRINKING  CA'VA.         205 

able  situation,  now  retires,  with  other  chiefs, 
to  the  exterior  circle,  not  out  of  respect  to  the 
priest,  who  may  be  only  a  mooa,  but  out  of 
veneration  to  the  god  supposed  to  exist  within 
him  ;  so  that  the  superior  circle,  in  such  a  case, 
consists  principally  of  matabooles  and  mooas ; 
for  chiefs  may  be  looked  upon  as  distant  re- 
lations to  the  gods,  and  no  person  may  sit  in 
the  upper  circle  along  with  his  superior  rela- 
tion ;  besides  it  is  an  act  of  humility  demon- 
•trating  great  respect.  When  a  priest  presides, 
which  is  the  case  at  all  religious  ceremonies, 
except  where  they  are  consulting  a  god  who 
has  no  priest*,  the  latter  always  has  the  first 
cup;  the  presiding  mataboole,  not  actually 
officiating,  has  the  second ;  the  third,  fourth, 
fifth,  and  perhaps  sixth  cups,  are  given  to  the 

*  When  a  god  has  no  priest,  as  Tali-y-Toobo',  for  in* 
no  person  actually  presides  at  the  head  of  his  cava 
the  place  being  led  apparently  vacant,  but  which, 
it  if  supposed,  the  god  invisibly  occupies.  On  such  occa- 
the  cava  party  is  always  held  before  the  house  conse- 
to  the  god.  (See  Vol.  I.  p.  365.)  And  they  go 
through  the  usual  form  of  words,  as  if  the  first  cup  was 
filled  and  presented  to  the  god :  thus,  before  any 
k  filled,  the  man  by  the  side  of  the  bowl  says,  Cose 
400*  Uca9  The  cava  is  in  the  cup :  the  mataboole  answers, 
Angi  ma  ho  <g»,  Give  it  to  our  god ;  but  this  is  mere  form, 
for  there  is  no  cup  filled  for  the  god. 


206  KELIGIOIS    CEREMONIES, 

next  highest  persons  in  the  superior  circle ;  and 
then  the  chiefs  who  have  retired  to  the  exterior 
circle  are,  out  of  respect,  helped ;  but  this 
rests  at  the  option  of  the  officiating  mataboole ; 
afterwards  the  remainder  of  the  superior  circle 
are  served. 

At  smaller  cava  parties,  the  forms  and  word* 
of  ceremony  are  precisely  the  same ;  but  when 
a  priest  does  not  preside,  familiar  conversa- 
tion, and  even  joke  and  merriment,  are  in* 
dulged  in.  On  all  occasions  every  individual 
pays  the  greatest  attention  to  his  dress,  that  it 
be  decorous  and  well  tied  on,  that  is,  with 
neatness. 

We  have  been  particular  in  the  description 
of  the  ceremony  of  preparing  and  drinkjpg 
this  infusion,  because  it  sets  in  so  strong  a 
light  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  people, 
and  because  it  so  frequently  accompanies  al- 
most every  kind  of  religious  ceremony.  It  is 
not  pretended,  however,  that  drinking  cava  is 
essential  to  every  religious  ceremony,  or  to 
most  of  them,  but  that  it  is  the  custom  to  take 
it  generally  on  such  occasions.  These  religious 
ceremonies  we  shall  now  describe,  and  shall 
take  them  nearly  in  the  order  in  which,  by  the 
natives,  they  are  considered  of  most  importance, 
or  most  sacred:  viz.  Irutchi\  Fufccatthi;  cava 


INACHI.  207 

fitcca  e'gi;  Tow-tow ;  Naxt/gUa;  Too*tooni'ma; 
Boo9 too;  Langi;  Ta'boo;  Fo'ta;  Mo'c-mo'c; 
too9 goo  ca'va. 

Although  the  ceremony  of  indchi  was  en- 
tirely abrogated  by  Finow  just  before  Mr.  Ma- 
riner left  Vavaoo,  we  place  it  first  in  rank, 
because  it  always  used  to  be  considered  of  the 
utmost  importance  before  it  was  done  away 
with ;  besides  which,  it  was  a  ceremony  which 
affected  the  property  of  every  individual  in  Va- 
vaoo, and  all  the  Hapai  islands,  and  formerly 

in  the  island  of  Tonga  also. 
In achi.    This  word  means,  literally,  a  share 

or  portion  of  any  thing  that  is  to  be  or  has 
been  distributed  out:  but  in  the  sense  here 
mentioned  it  means  that  portion  of  the  fruits 
of  the  earth,  and  other  eatables,  which  is  offered 
to  the  gods  in  the  person  of  the  divine  chief 
Tooitonga,  which  allotment  is  made  once  a 
year,  just  before  the  yams  in  general  are  ar- 
rived at  a  state  of  maturity  ;  those  which  are 
used  in  this  ceremony  being  of  a  kind  which 
admit  of  being  planted  sooner  than  others, 
aftd,  consequently,  they  are  the  first  fruits  of 
the  yam  season.  The  object  of  this  offering  is 
to  insure  the  protection  of  the  gods,  that  their 
favour  may  be  extended  to  the  welfare  of  the 
nation  generally,  and  in  particular  to  the  pro- 


208  in  Veil  i. 

ductions  of  the  earth,  of  which  yams  are  the 
most  important. 

The  time  for  planting  most  kinds  of  yams  is 
about  the  latter  end  of  July,  but  the  species 
called  ca'ho-ca'ho,  which  is  always  used  in  this 
ceremony,  is  put  in  the  ground  about  a  month 
before,  when,  on  each  plantation,  there  is  a 
small  piece  of  land  chosen  and  fenced  in,  for 
the  purpose  of  growing  a  couple  of  yams  of  the 
above  description.  As  soon  as  they  have  ar- 
rived at  a  state  of  maturity,  the  How  sends  a 
messenger  to  To di tonga,  stating  that  the  yams 
for  the  inachi  are  fit  to  be  taken  up,  and  re- 
questing that  he  would  appoint  a  day  for  the 
ceremony  :  he  generally  fixes  on  the  tenth  day 
afterwards,  reckoning  the  following  day  for 
the  first.  There  are  no  particular  prepara- 
tions made  till  the  day  before  the  ceremony : 
at  night,  however,  the  sound  of  the  conch  is 
heard  occasionally  in  different  parts  of  the 
islands,  and  as  the  day  of  the  ceremony  ap- 
proaches it  becomes  more  frequent,  so  that 
the  people  of  almost  every  plantation  sound 
the  conch  three  or  four  times,  which,  break- 
ing in  upon  the  silence  of  the  night,  has  a 
pleasing  effect,  particularly  at  Vavaoo,  where 
the  number  of  woods  and  hills  send  back  re- 
peated echoes,  adding  greatly  to  the  effect 


INA'CHI.  209 

The  day  before  the  ceremony  the  yams  are 
dug  up,  and  ornamented  with  a  kind  of  ribbons 
prepared  from  the  inner  membrane  of  the  leaf  - 
of  a  species  of  paadanus,  and  died  red  * ;  when 
thus  prepared,  it  is  called  mellecoolu,  and  is 
wrapped  round  the  yam,  beginning  at  one  end, 
and  running  round  spirally  to  the  other,  when 
it  is  brought  back  in  the  opposite  direction, 
the  turns  crossing  each  other  in  a  very  neat 
manner.  As  the  ceremony  is  always  per- 
formed at  the  island  where  Tooitonga  chooses 
to  reside,  the  distant  islands  must  make  these 
preparations  two  or  three  days  beforehand,  that 
the  yams,  &c.  may  be  sent  in  time  to  Vavaoo, 
where  we  will  suppose  the  affair  is  to  take 
place*  The  ninth  day  then  is  employed  in 
preparing  and  collecting  the  yams  and  other 
provisions,  such  as  fish,  cava  root,  and  ma  ho  a, 
and  getting  ready  mats,  gnatoo,  and  bundles 
of  meBccoola:  but  the  yams  only  are  to  be 
carried  in  the  procession  about  to  be  described. 
The  sun  has  scarcely  set  when  the  sound  of 

•  ft  is  first  soaked  for  six  or  eight  hours  in  lime  water, 
•ad  afterwards  in  an  infusion  of  the  root  of  the  nono,  where 
it  rr  Mains  for  about  a  week ;  it  is  afterwards  exposed  to  the 
sua,  and  becomes  of  a  bright  red :.  the  root  of  the  ao/iu  is  of 
a  dark  bright  yellow,  which,  upon  the  action  of  lime  water, 
red. 
VOL.  II.  p 


210  in  a  cm, 

the  conch  begins  again  to  echo  through  the 
island,  increasing  as  the  night  advances.  At 
the  Mooa,  and  all  the  plantations,  the  voice* 
of  men  and  women  are  heard  singing  Ndfo 
o'ooa  tegger  gnaoo'e,  o'ooa  gnaode.  Rest  thou, 
doing  no  work  ;  thou  shalt  not  work.  This 
increases  till  midnight,  men  generally  singing 
the  first  part  of  the  sentence,  and  the  women 
the  last,  to  produce  a  more  pleasing  effect: 
it  then  subsides  for  three  or  four  hours,  and 
again  increases  as  the  sun  rises.  Nobody, 
however,  is  seen  stirring  out  in  the  public 
roads  till  about  eight  o'clock,  when  the  people 
from  all  quarters  of  the  island  are  seen  ad* 
vancing  towards  the  Mooa,  and  canoes  from 
all  the  other  islands  are  landing  their  men.;  so 
that  all  the  inhabitants  of  Tonga  seem  ap- 
proaching by  sea  and  land,  singing  and  sound* 
ing  the  conch.  At  the  Mooa  itself  the  uni- 
versal bustle  of  preparation  is  seen  and  heard ; 
and  the  different  processions  entering  from 
various  quarters,  of  men  and  women,  all 
dressed  up  in  new  gnatoos,  ornamented  with 
red  ribbons  and  wreaths  of  flowers,  and  the 
men  armed  with  spears  and  clubs,  betoken  the 
importance  of  the  ceremony  about  to  be  per- 
formed. Each  part}*  brings  in  its  yams  in  a 
basket,  which  is  carried  in  the  arms  with  great 


1NAC1II.  211 

care,  by  the  principal  vassal  of  the  chief  to 
whom  the  plantation  may  belong.  The  bas- 
kets are  deposited  on  the  marly  (in  the  MooaJ, 
and  some  of  the  men  begin  to  employ  them- 
selves in  slinging  the  yams,  each  upon  the 
centre  of  a  pole  about  eight  or  nine  feet  long, 
and  four  inches  diameter.  The  proceedings 
are  regulated  by  attending  matabooles.  The 
yams  being  all  slung,  each  pole  is  carried  by 
two  men  upon  their  shoulders,  one  walking 
before  the  other,  and  the  yam  hanging  be- 
tween them,  ornamented  with  red  ribbons; 
The  procession  begins  to  imKe  towards  the 
grave  of  the  last  Tooitongk  (which  is  generally 
in  the  neighbourhood,  or  the  grave  of  one  of 
his  family  will  do),  the  men  advancing  in  a 
single  line,  every  two  bearing  a  yam,  with  a 
slow  and  measured  pace,  sinking  at  every  step, 
as  if  their  burden  was  of  immense  weight #. 
In  the  mean  time  the  chiefs  and  matabooles 
are  seated  in  a  semicircle  before  the  grave, 
with  their  heads  bowed  down,  and  their  hands 
clasped  before  them.  The  procession  qow 
approaches:  two  boys,  walking  abreast  of 
each  other,   precede    it  at  a  little  distance, 

•  And  as  if  meaning  to  express,  "  How  bountiful  are 
"  the  gads,  to  give  us  so  good  a  harvest,  and  provide  us 
"  iritli  yam?  *o  largo  and  heavy !'' 


212  IN  AC  HI. 

blowing  conch? ;  then  come  the  men,  bearing 
the  yams,  about  seventy  or  eighty  in  number, 
i.  e.  about  a  hundred  and  sixty  men  in  a  single 
line,  as  close  to  each  other  as  the  length  of  the 
pole  will  allow ;  after  them  come  a  single  line 
of  men,  about  forty  in  number,  singing  aloud, 
as  before  stated,  nqfo  o'ooa*,  &c. ;  these  are 
followed  up  by  two  other  boys  blowing  conchs : 
they  proceed  between  the  grave  and  the  chief*, 
describing  there  a  large  circle  two  or  three 
times,  the  conchs  blowing  and  the  men  sing- 
ing :  the  yams  are  then  deposited,  one  after 
the  other  (still  6n  the  poles),  before  the  grave, 
and  the  men  sit  down  by  the  side  of  them,  so 
that  the  chiefs  and  matabooles  are  in  the  rear: 
one  of  the  matabooles  of  Tooitonga  now  rises, 
advances,  and  again  seats  himself  before  the 
grave,  a  little  in  advance  of  the  men.  Here 
he  addresses  the  gods  generally,  and  afterwards 
particularly,  mentioning  the  late  Tooitonga, 
and  the  names  of  several  others.  He  returns 
thanks  for  their  divine  bounty  in  favouring  the 
land  with  the  prospect  of  so  good  a  harvest, 
and  prays  that  their  beneficence  may  be  con- 
tinued in  future :  this  prayer  he  makes  in  the 

*  Not  only  no  work  may  be  done  at  the  time  of  the 
indchi,  but  nobody  may  appear  abroad,  unless  for  the  par* 
poses  of  the  ceremony. 


1NACHI.  213 

names  of  several  chiefs  present,  whom  he  an- 
nounces aloud.  This  being  done,  he  arises  and 
retires  to  his  former  place :  the  men  now  also  rise 
and  resume  their  loads  in  the  same  order,  and, 
after  having  paraded  round  two  or  three  times 
before  the  grave,  return  back  to  the  marly'  the 
same  way  they  came,  singing  and  blowing  the 
conchs  as  before.  The  chiefs  and  matabooles, 
a  short  time  afterwards,  rise  and  follow  them 
to  the  same  place,  where  the  yams  are  now 
again  deposited,  and  loosened  from  the  poles, 
still,  however,  retaining  their  ornaments.  The 
company  seat  themselves  in  a  large  circle,  at 
which  Tooitonga  presides ;  the  king,  and  other 
great  chiefs,  retiring  behind  among  the  mass 
of  the  people.  The  other  articles  that  form 
part  of  the  indchi  are  next  brought  forward ; 
these  are  dried  fish,  mahoa',  mats,  gna'too,  and 
bundles  of  melleco61a,  which,  together  with 
the  yams  (although  not  cooked),  are  shared 
out  fcy  one  of  the  matabooles  of  Tooitonga. 
Firat,  there  is  a  considerable  share  (about  one 
fourth)*  allotted  to  the  gods,  which  the  priests 
appropriate,  and  their  servants  immediately 
take  away:  about  one  half  is  allotted  to  the 
king,  which  his  servants,  without  farther  orders, 
take  away  to  his  house,  and  the  remainder  is 
taken  away  by  Tooitonga's  servants.    It  may 


214  INA'CHI. 

seem  strange  that  the  latter  has  a  smaller 
share  than  the  king,  but  then  he  has  not  « 
quarter  the  number  of  dependants  to  divide 
it  among. 

The  materials  of  the  Inachi  being  removed, 
the  company  form  a  regular  cava  party :  some 
cava  root  is  brought  and  prepared,  and  a  large 
quantity  of  dressed  victuals,  perhaps  a  hun- 
dred and  fifty  baskets-full ;  a  small  portion  of 
which  is  shared  out  to  be  eaten  with  the  cava. 
While  the  infusion  is  preparing,  a  mataboole 
makes  a  speech  to  the  people,  stating,  that  as 
they  havje  performed  this  important  ceremony, 
the  gods  will  protect  them,  and  grant  them 
long  lives,  provided  they  continue  to  pay  due 
attention  to  religious  ceremonies,  and  to  pay 
respect  to  the  chiefs.  When  the  cava  is  finished, 
the  circle  separates,  and  the  provisions  are 
shared  out  to  each  chief  according  to  his  rank. 
The  day  concludes  with  wrestling,  boxing,  &c. 
after  which  night  dances  commence.  \fMHten 
these  are  ended,  the  people  retire  home,  |ie*- 
fectly  assured  of  the  protection  of  the  gods. 

At  this  ceremony,  the  quantity  of  provisions 
shared  out  is  incredible  ;  the  people,  therefor^ 
look  upon  it  as  a  very  heavy  tribute,  though 
in  fact  the  owners  of  the  plantations  (chiefs, 
matabooles,  &c.)  are  at  the  expense  of  it ;  yet 


CA'VA   FUCCA    EGI.  216 

as  there  is  much  more  provided  than  what  is 
/eaten,  it  helps  to  increase  the  scarcity  if  the 
season  should  not  be  abundant :  but  it  is  so 
much  the  custom  at  Tonga  to  make  liberal 
and  profuse  presents,  that  the  people  generally 
either  feast  or  starve.  Sometimes  it  happens 
that  several  great  feasts  are  given  nearly  about 
the  same  time;  as  for  instance,  the  occasion 
of  the  Inachi ;  the  arrival  of  some  chief  from  a 
distant  island,  after  a  long  absence  ;  the  mar- 
riage or  death  of  some  great  chief,  as  of  Tooi- 
tonga  himself,  &c.  These  feasts  threaten  a 
scarcity ;  to  prevent  which,  a  tafboo  or  prohibi- 
tion is  put  upon  several  kinds  of  food,  that  they 
may  not  be  eaten  for  a  certain  length  of  time, 
at  the  termination  of  which  they  perform  the 
following  ceremony,  which  takes  off  the  taboo: 
a  famine  or  war  may  also  occasion  a  necessity 
for  this  taboo  to  be  imposed. 

Fugcalahi,  i.  e.  to  make  all  at  large  or  free 
again;  or  to  take  off  a  restriction.  As  the  mode 
of  performing  this  ceremony  has  already  been 
described,  (see  Vol.  I.  p.  128.)  and  the  parti- 
cular objects  of  it  mentioned,  (p.  110,  same 
vol.)  nothing  farther  need  now  be  said  upon 
the  subject,  except  that  it  is  generally  con- 
cluded with  a  cava  party. 

Cava  fucca  egi  :   this  consists  in  a  cava 


216  TO'W-TG/W. 

party,  where  an  inspired  priest  siM  at  the  head? 
the  circumstances  of  inspiration  we  have  al- 
ready related,  (Vol.  I.  p.  106.)  and  the  form 
of  serving  out  the  cava  when  a  priest  presides, 
(Vol.  II.  p.  206.),  The  phrase  cava  fucca  egi 
means  literally,  a  god-like  cava.  Laying  a 
small  piece  of  cava  root  before  the  grave  of  a 
chief  or  consecrated  house,  out  of  respect  to  a 
god,  or  to  a  deceased  relation,  is  called  toogoo 

cava,  and  will   be  mentioned  in   its  proper 

» 

order. 

* 

Tow-tow  is  an  offering  of  yams,  coco*» 
nuts,  and  other  vegetable  productions  to  A1o 
A'lo  (the  god  of  weather)  in  particular,  and  to 
all  the  gods  in  general,  for  the  purpose  of  en- 
suring a  continuation  of  favourable  weather, 
and  consequent  fertility.  This  ceremony  is 
first  performed  at  the  time  when  the  yams  are 
approaching  maturity,  in  the  early  part  of  No- 
vember, and  is  repeated  every  ten  days  for 
seven  or  eight  times.  On  the  day  appointed 
by  the  priest  of  A'lo  A'lo,  every  plantation  on 
the  three  pails  of  the  island,  viz.  the  kahagi9 
mooa,  and  hihifo*  divisions,  provide  a  certain 
tfiiantity  of  yams,  cocoa-nuts,  sugar-canes,  ba- 
nanas, plantains,  &c. ;  all  which  are  brought 

*  liokagi  is  the  north  end  of  any  island ;  hihtfo  the  south 
end  :  the  mooa  part  of  the  island  being  the  centre. 


ToSr-ToV.  217 

to  the  marly',  tied  upon  sticks,  so  that  each 
Mick,  when  held  horizontally,  has  abont  eight 
small  yams  hanging  from  it  at  equal  distances; 
or  a  couple  of  bunches  of  plantains  or  bana- 
nas, &c. :  the  sugar-canes  are  tied  in  bundles, 
three  or  four  in  each.  These  things  being 
brought  are  disposed  in  three  piles,  one  erected 
by  the  people  of  liabagi,  with  their  offer- 
ings, another  by  the  people  of  Hihifo  with 
theirs,  and  the  third  by  those  of  the  Moo*a. 
The  piles  are  placed  on  one  side  of  the  marly' 
upright,  the  ends  of  the  sticks  next  the  ground, 
diverging  from  each  other,  and  the  upper  ends 
meeting  together ;  whilst  others  are  placed 
across  them  on  the  top.  Wrestling  and  box- 
ing matches  now  commence,  which  generally 
last  about  three  hours,  and  being  ended,  a  de- 
potation  of  nine  or  ten  men  from  the  priest 
of  A'lo  A'lo,  all  dressed  in  mats,  with  green 
leaves  round  their  necks,  arrive  with  a  female 
child,  to  represent  the  wife  of  A'lo  A'lo,  and 
•eat  themselves  before  the  three  piles,  forming 
a  single  line,  with  a  large  drum  (kept  there 
lor  die  purpose)  immediately  in  front  of  them. 
The  deputation  now  offer  up  a  prayer  to  A'lo 
A'lo  and  the  other  gods,  petitioning  them  to 
continue  their  bounty,  and  make  the  land  fruit- 
ful, &c. :  this  being  done,  they  give  orders 


218  to'w-to'w. 

in  regard  to  sharing  out  the  provisions ;  one 
pile  being  appropriated  to  A'lo  A'lo  and  the 
other  gods,  the  other  two  being  shared  out  to 
different  principal  chiefs,  and  sent  home  to 
their  houses,  the  pile  for  the  gods  remaining 
still  in  its  place.     They  then  begin  another 
short  prayer  to  the  same  purpose,  at  the  close 
of  which  they  make  a  signal  by  beating  upon 
the  drum,  when  all  that  choose  make  a  sud? 
den  dash  at  the  pile  appropriated  to  the  gods* 
and  each  man  secures  as  much  as  he  can,  to 
the   great  amusement  of  all   the  Spectators* 
though  many  of  the  scramblers  come  off  with 
wounded  heads,  and  sometimes  with'  fractured 
limbs,  the  broken  sticks  being  thrown  about 
in  every  direction.     All  the  women  now  get 
out  of  the  way,  while  the  men  stand  up  and 
commence  a  general   pugilistic  contest,  on* 
half  of  the  island  against  the  other  half:  this 
combat  is  termed  tde  tacfav,  and  forms  an  essen* 
tial  part  of  this  ceremony,  but  it  is  now  and  then 
practised  at  other  ceremonies.     At  these  ge- 
neral battles,  the  highest  chiefs  engage  as  well 
as  the  lowest  tooas,  and  any  one  of  the  latter 
may,  if  he  pleases,  attack  the  king,  and  knock 
him  down  if  he  can,  or  even  Tooitonga,  without 
any  reserve,  and  maul  him  unmercifully,  with* 
out  the  least  danger  of  giving  offence.     These 


to'w-to'w.  219 

combats  are  sometimes  very  obstinately  kept 
np,  and  when  neither  party  seems  likely  to 
yield  the  ground,  after  two  or  three  hours  dis- 
pute, the  king  orders  them  to  desist.  The 
most  perfect  good  humour  constantly  prevails 
or  these  occasions :  if  a  man  is  knocked  dawn, 
he  rises  with  a  smile ;  if  his  arm  is  broken,  he 
retires  to  get  it  set,  without  seeming  to  think 
any  thing  of  it :  on  the  contrary,  to  be  angry, 
or  to  fight  with  the  least  animosity,  would  be 
considered  the  mark  of  a  very  weak  mind. 
After  the  battle,  those  who  have  contended  with 
superior  chiefs,  or  think  they  may  have  touched 
superior  chiefs,  perform  the  ceremony  of  m6e- 
m6e,  to  a  chief  at  least  as  high  in  rank  as  any 
they  may  have  come  in  contact  with. 

m 

Every  tenth  day,  as  before  stated,  these  cere- 
monies are  repeated  for  seven  or  eight  successive 
times.  The  child  that  has  been  mentioned  as 
representing  the  wife  of  Alo  A'io  is  generally 
chosen  from  among  the  female  chiefs  of  the 
higher  ranks,  and  is  about  eight  or  ten  years 
old :  daring  the  eighty  days  of  this  ceremony, 
she  resides  at  the  consecrated  house  of  Alo 
A4o,  where,  the  day  before  the  first  ceremony, 
a  caVa  party  is  held,  at  which  she  presides,  as 
well  as:  at  a  feast  which  follows.  She  has  no- 
thing to  do  on  the  actual  dqys  of  the  cere- 


220  xawgi'a. 

mony,  except  to  come  with  the  deputation  and 
sit  down  with  them. 

Nawgia  ;  or  the  ceremony  of  strangling 
children,  as  sacrifices  to  the  gods,  for  the  re- 
covery of  a  sick  relation.  The  blackest  cloud 
that  obscures  the  understanding  of  the  Tonga 
people  is  surely  that  which  prevents  them  see* 
ing  the  unnatural  cruelty  and  absurdity  of  this 
practice :  we  have,  however,  the  most  sanguine 
hopes  that  "  Moloch — horrid  king,"  will  not 
much  longer  hold  his  reign  in  these  islands. 
It  is  not,  we  verily  believe,  from  a  want  of  na- 
tural feeling,  but  from  an  excessive  veneration 
and  fear  fit  the  gods,  created  in  an  sera  of 
great  superstition,  and  now  upheld  by  old 
practice,  that  the  natives  perform  these  horri- 
ble rites.  All  the  by-standers  behold  the  in- 
nocent  victim  w  ith  feelings  of  the  greatest  pity ; 
but  it  is  proper,  they  think,  to  sacrifice  a  child 
m  bo  is  at  present  of  no  use  to  society,  and  per- 
haps may  not  otherwise  live  to  be,  with  the 
hope  of  recovering  a  sick  chief,  whom  all  es- 
teem, and  whom  all  think  it  a  most  important 
duty  to  respect,  defend,  and  preserve,  that  his 
life  may  be  of  advantage  to  the  country.  The 
form  of  this  ceremony  is  related  (Vol.  I.  p. 
228.) :  other  instances  (p.  379,  and  454.) 

The  ceremony  of  Nawgia,  (or  strangling), 


nawgi'a.  221 

Used  to  be  performed  upon  the  chief  widow  of 
Tooitonga,  on  the  day  of  her  husband's  burial, 
that  she  might  be  interred  with  him.  Two 
Tooitongas  vtere  buried  during  Mr.  Mariner's 
time ;  one  on  his  first  arrival,  and  the  other, 
(i.  e.  the  last),  a  few  months  before  he  came 
away.  The  first  of  these  two,  however,  had  no 
chief  wife,  i.  e.  he  had  no  wife  at  all,  or  else 
none  that  was  of  so  high  a  rank  as  to  take  the 
charge  of  his  household,  and  be  the  mistress 
over  the  others ;  consequently  at  his  death  no 
such  ceremony  was  performed.  The  last  Tooi- 
tonga's  wife  (the  daughter  of  the  late  king,  and 
sister  of  the  present)  was  not  subjected  to  this 
inhuman  rite — thanks  to  the  good  sense  of  the 
late  and  present  king.  When  old  Finow  watf 
living,  he  used  to  say,  that  if  Tooitonga  died 
before  his  wife,  she  should  hot  be  strangled : 
44  What,"  said  he,  "  is  the  use  of  destroying  a 
44  young  and  beautiful  woman  ?  Who  is  there 
44  dares  say  that  the  gods  are  merciless  and 
44  cruel  ?  My  daughter  shall  not  be  strangled !" 
Tooitonga  did  not  die  till  the  present  king  came 
into  power,  and  we  have  already  seen  that  he 
not  only  did  not  allow  his  sister  to  be  strangled, 
bat  lie  also  did  not  permit  another  Tooitonga 
to  succeed.  In  consequence,  it  was  whispered 
about,  that  some  great  misfortune  would  hap- 


222  TOO'TOO-Nl'MA. 

r 

•  

pen  to  the  country.     At  the  Fiji  islands,  the 

principal  wife  of  every  chief,  or  at  least  of 

every  considerable  chief,  undergoes  this  cere* 

mony  on  the  death  of  her  husband.   (See  Vol.  I. 

p.  341.) 

Tootoo-nima,  or  cutting  offa  portion  of  the 

little  finger,  as  a  sacrifice  to  the  gods,  for  the  re- 
covery of  a  superior  sick  relation.  This  is  very 
commonly  done  ;  so  that  there  is  scarcely  a  per- 
son living  at  the  Tonga  islands  but  who  has  lost 
one  or  both,  or  a  considerable  portion  of  both 
little  fingers.  Those  who  can  have  but  few 
superior  relations,  such  as  those  near  akin  to 
To oi tonga,  or  the  king,  or  Veachi,  have  some 
chance  of  escaping,  if  their  relations  are  to* 
Yerably  healthy.  It 'does  not  appear  that  the 
operation  is  painful.  Mr.  Mariner  has  wit* 
nessed  more  than  once  little  children  quar- 
relling for  the  honour  (or  rather  out  of  bra- 
vado), of  having  it  done.  The  finger  is  laid 
fiat  upon  a  block  of  wood :  a  knife,  axe,  or 
sharp  stone  is  placed  with  the  edge  upon  the 
line  of  proposed  separation ;  and  a  powerful 
blow  being  given  with  a  mallet  or  large  stone, 
the  operation  is  finished.  From  the  nature 
and  violence  of  the  action,  the  wound  sel- 
dom bleeds  much :  the  stump  is  then  held  in 
the  smoke  and  steam  arising  from  the  combus- 


boo'too. 


tion  of  fresh  plucked  grass:  this  stops  any 
flow  of  blood.  The  wound  is  not  washed  for 
two  days;  afterwards  it  is  kept  clean,  and 
heals  in  about  two  or  three  weeks,  without 
any  application  whatever.  One  joint  is  ge- 
nerally taken  off,  but  some  will  have  a  smaller 
portion,  to  admit  of  the  operation  being  per- 
formed several  times  on  the  same  finger,  in 
case  a  man  has  many  superior  relations. 

Bootoo,  or  funeral  ceremonies.  For  a  par- 
tial description  of  these,  reference  may  be  made 
to  the  burial  of  Toob6  Neuha ;  (Vol.  I.  p.  150.) 
for  a  particular  one,  as  it  regards  the  burial  of 
a  king,  to  that  of  Finow,  (p.  303.)  What  re- 
mains, therefore,  principally  to  be  described, 
are  the  peculiarities  attending  the  burial  of 
Tooitonga:  in  the  first  place,  however,  we 
shall  give  the  names  of  the  different  parts  of 
the  ceremony  of  burials  in  general ;  the  modes 
of  all  which  have  been  already  related  in  the 
instance  last  referred  to :  the  names  are  these* 

JFaxa,  or  procuring  small  stones,  (white  and 
Uack)9  and  sand,  to  cover  the  grave. 

Too'too,  or  burning  the  body  in  spots,  with 
lighted  rolls  of  tdpa. 

* 

La'fa  :  burning  the  arm  in  about  six  places, 
each  in  forpi  of  five  or  six  concentric  circles. 
Toooi :  beating  the  cheeks,  and  rubbing  off 


224  boo' loo, 

die  cuticle,  with  cocoa-nut  husk,  or  some  sort 
of  plait,  wound  round  the  hand. 

Foa  Ooloo  :  wounding  ihe  head,  and  cut-* 
ting  the  flesh  in  various  parts,  with  knives, 
shells,  clubs,  spears,  &c.  in  honour  of  the  de- 
ceased, and  as  a  testimony  of  respect  for  hit 
memory  and  fidelity  to  his  family. 

All  these  have  been  accurately  described  in 
the  ceremony  of  burying  the  late  king.  There 
is  one  remark,  nevertheless,  to  be  made  in  re- 
spect to  the  four  last,  particularly  Foa  Ooloo; 
which  appears,  however  inhuman,  to  be  a 
very  ancient  and  long  established  custom  in  the 
history  of  mankind.  On  turning  to  Leviticus, 
Chap.  xx.  verse  28,  we  find  this  command, 
"  Ye  shall  not  make  any  cuttings  in  your  flesh 
for  the  dead,  nor  print  any  marks  upon  you." 

The  above-mentioned  five  ceremonies  are 
common  at  all  burials,  and  are  conducted  with 
more  or  less  pomp,  according  to  tbe  rank  of 
the  individual  deceased  :  in  saying  all  burials* 
however,  we  must  make  one  exception,  viz. 
that  of  Tooi tonga,  on  which  occasion  the  ce- 
remony of  Foa  Ooloo  is  never  performed ;  but 
the  reason  of  this  Mr.  Mariner  was  never  able 
to  learn.  At  the  funeral  of  the  greatest  chiefs, 
in  general,  this  outrage  is  usually  exercised 
with  the  utmost    readiness  and  enthusiasm; 


langi.  225 

but  at  that  of  Tooi tonga,  who  is  far  higher 
than  any  other,  it  is  altogether  omitted :  the 
natives  have  no  law  for  this,  but  custom. 

Langi,  or  the  ceremony  of  burying  Tooi- 
tonga  :  this  word  is  also  applied  to  signify  the 
grave  of  this  chief  during  the'  whole  of  the 
funeral  ceremonies  :  it  literally  means  the  sky  ; 
but  there  appeal's  no  connection  between  these 
different  meanings.    When  Tooitonga  is  ill,  the 
intercessions  with  the  gods  for  his  recovery  are 
the  same,  though  perhaps  in  a  greater  degree, 
as  are  made  on  the  illness  of  other  high  chiefs': 
prayers  are  offered  up ;  priests  are  inspired ; 
tome  children  have  their  little  fingers  sacri- 
ficed ;  others  are  strangled,  &c.     When  he  is 
dead,  his  body  is  washed  with  oil  and  water, 
as  usual ;  his  widows  come  to  mourn  over  him, 
&c. ;'  and,  according  to  the  former  custom,  his 
chief  widow  should  be  strangled,  but  whether 
on  the  day  of  his  death  or  of  his  burial  Mr. 
Mariner  does  not  know.  His  fytoca,  or  burial- 
place,  is  of  the  same  form  as  that  of  other 
chiefs.     The  day  after  his  death,  (which  is  the 
day  of  his  burial)  every  individual  at  every 
island,  man,'  woman,  and  child,  has  his  head 
closely  shaved :  this  is  a  peculiarity,  and  so 
is  the  custom  of  depositing  some  of  his  most 
▼tfotble  property  along  with  the  body  in  the 
grave,  such  as  beads,  whales9  teeth,  fine  Ha- 

VOL.  II.  Q 


226  LANGI. 

moa  mats,  &c. ;  so  that  his  family  burying- 
place,  at  the  island  of  Tonga,  where  all  his 
ancestors  have  been  buried,  must  have  become 
very  rich ;  for  no  native  would  dare  to  commit 
the  sacrilege  of  theft.  The  ceremony  of  inter- 
ment is  exactly  the  same  as  that  of  the  king. 
The  mourning  is  also  the  same,  vis.  old  ragged 
mats,  with  leaves  of  the  ifi  tree  round  the 
neck  :  but  for  Tooitonga  the  time  of  mount- 
ing is  extended  to  four  mouths ;  the  mats  being 
generally  left  off  at  the  end  of  nearly  three, 
whilst  the  leaves  are  still  retained  for  another 
month.  The  Taboo,  for  touching  his  body, 
or  any  thing  that  he  had  on  when  he  died, 
extends  to  at  least  ten  months,  and  for  his 
nearest  relations  fifteen  months.  (See  Vol.  I. 
p.  150.)  Every  man  neglects  to  shave  his  beard 
for  at  least  one  month ;  and  during  that  time 
merely  oils  his  body  at  night,  but  not  his 
head.  The  female  mourners  remain  within 
the  fytoca  about  two  months,  night  and  day, 
only  retiring  occasionally  to  the  neighbour- 
ing temporary  houses,  to  eat,  &c.  It  wift  be 
seen,  that  what  we  have  already  related  of 
these  ceremonies  differ  in  many  respects,  some 
in  kind,  and  all  in  degree,  from  those  attend- 
ing the  burial  of  the  king :  but  those  we  are 
about  to  describe  are  altogether  peculiar  t* 
Tooitaoga's  funeral. 


LANGI.  227 

In  the  afternoon  of  the  day  of  burial,  the 
body  being  already  in  the  Jytoca>  almost  every 
man,  woman,  and  child,  provided  with  a  tome  #, 
and  a   piece  of  bola'ta-\,  sit  down  at  about 
eight  yards    from   the  grave:    in  the  course 
of  an  hour  the  multitude  collects,  probably  to 
above  three  thousand,  all  clothed  in  old  mats, 
&c.  and  seated  as  just  stated.     One  of  the 
female  mourners  now  comes  out  of  the  fytoca, 
and  advances  in   front,  where  she  calls  out 
to  the  -people,  saying,  mo  loo  bea  qfi  my^  Arise 
ye,  and  approach  ;  whereupon  the  people  get 
up,  and  advancing  about  forty  yards,  again 
sit  down :  two  men  behind  the  grave  rifcw  be- 
gin to  blow  conch  shells,  and  six  others,  with 
tage  lighted  torches,  about  six  feet  high,  and 
six  inches  thick,  (made  of  bundles  of  to'mi$\ 
next  advance  forward  from  behind  the  Jytoca, 
descend  the  mount,  and  walk  round  one  after 
another  several  times,  between  the  Jytoca  and 
the  people,  waving  their  flaming  torches  in  the 
air ;  they  then  begin  to  ascend  the  mount,  at 
which  moment  all  the  people  rise  up  together, 
and  auddenly  snap  their  bold  t as ,  nearly  at  the 

*  A  certain  part  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree,  of  which  torches  are 


t  Aft!  4f  the  stem  of  the  banana  or  plantain  tree,  used  to 
the  ashes  falling  from  lighted  torches. 

«2 


228  LANGI. 

same  time,  producing  a  considerable  crash: 
they  then  follow  the  men  with  the  torches,  in  a 
single  line,  ascending  the  mount,  and  walking 
round  thefytoca,  as  they  pass  the  back  of  which 
the  first  six  men  deposit  on  the  ground  their 
extinguished  torches,  and  the  rest  their  tomes 
and  boldtas,  the  mourners  within  thanking  them 
for  providing  these  things  :  thus  they  proceed 
round,  atad  return  to  their  places  and  sit  down. 
The  mataboole,  who  has  the  direction  of  the 
ceremonies,  now,  advances  in  front  of  the  peo- 
ple, and  orders  them  to  divide  themselves  in 
parties,  according  to  their  districts ;  which  being 
done,  he  gives  to  one  party  the  business  of 
clearing  away  the  bushes,  grass,  &c.  from  one 
aide  of  the  grave,  and  to  another  to  do  the 
same  in  regard  to  another  part,  a  third  to  re- 
move such  and  such  rubbish,  &c.  so  that  the 
whole  neighbourhood  of  the fytoca  becomes  per- 
fectly clear :  this  being  done,  all  the  people 
return  to  their  respective  temporary  houses. 
.    Soon  after  dark,  certain  persons  stationed  at 
the  grave  begin  again  to  sound  the  concha,  while 
others  chaunt  partly  in  an  unknown  language  #, 

*  The  natives  can  give  no  account  of  what  this  language  h9 
nor  how  they  originally  came  to  learn  the  words.  It  has 
been  handed  dowu  from  father  to  the  son,  among  that 
class  of  people  whose  business  it  is  to  direct  burial  cere- 


LANGT.  229 

and  partly  in  Ham6a,  a  sort  of  song,  or  rather 
a  piece  of  recitative.  While  this  is  going  on,  a 
number  of  men  in  the  neighbourhood  get  ready 
to  come  to  the  grave,  to  perform  a  part  of  the 
ceremony  which  the  reader  will  not  think  alto- 
gether consonant  with  the  high  character  for. 
cleanliness  which  we  have  given :  it  mjist  be 
considered,  however,  a  religious  rite,  standing 
upon  the  foundation  of  very  ancient  custom. 
These  men,  about  sixty  in  number,  assemble 
before  the  grave,  and  wait  farther  orders.  The 
chaunting  being  finished,  and  the  conchs  having 
ceased  to  blow,  one  of  the  mourners  comes 
forward,  seats  herself  outside  the  fytoca,  and 
addresses  the  people  thus :  "  Men  !  ye  are  ga- 
thered here  to  perform  the  duty  imposed  on 
you ;  bear  up,  and  let  not  your  exertions  be 
wanting  to  accomplish  the  work : "  having  said 
this,  she  retires  into  Xhtjytoca.  The  men  now 
approach  the  mount  (it  being  dark),  and  (if 
the  phrase  is  allowable)  perform  their  devo- 
tions to  Cloacina,  after  which  they  retire.  .  As 
soon  as  it  is  day-light,  the  following  morning, 


None  of  them  understand  the  words.  It  begins 
:  too  Jul  o  chi  tdccalow  do  chi  toccalow  ca  mejqfdngo  do 
tdwto,  Ifc.  There  are  several  Tonga  words  among  it, 
in  all  probability  it  is  old  or  corrupted  Tonga,  though  no 
can  now  be  made  of  it. 


290  LANG1. 

the  women  of  the  first  rank  (wives  and  da«gi*- 
tersof  the  greatest  chiefs),  assemble  with  their 
female  attendants,  bringing  baskets,  one  hold- 
ing one  side,  and  one  the  other,  advancing  two 
and  two,  with  large  shells  to  clear  up  the  depo- 
sitions of  the  over  night ;  and  in  this  ceremo- 
nious act  of  humility  there  is  no  female  of  the 
highest  consequence  refuses  to  take  her  part : 
some  of  the  mourners  in  the  Jytoca  generally 
come  out  to  assist,  so  that  in  a  very  little  while 
the  place  is  made  perfectly  clean :  this  is  re- 
peated the  fourteen  following  nights,  and  as 
punctually  cleared  away  by  sun -rise  every  morn- 
ing. No  persons  but  the  agents  are  allowed  to 
be  witnesses  of  these  extraordinary  ceremonies, 
at  least  it  would  be  considered  highly  indeco- 
rous and  irreligious  to  be  so.  On  the  sixteenth 
day,  early  in  the  morning,  the  same  females 
again  assemble ;  but  now  they  are  dressed  up 
in  the  finest  gnatoo,  and  most  beautiful  Hamoa 
mats,  decorated  with  ribbons  and  with  wreaths 
of  flowers  round  their  necks :  they  also  bring 
new  baskets,  ornamented  with  flowers,  and  lit- 
tle brooms  very  tastefully  made  :  thus  equip- 
ped, they  approach,  and  act  as  if  they  had  the 
9auie  (ask  to  do  as  before,  pretending  to  clear 
away  the  dirt,  though  no  dirt  is  now  there,  and' 
take  it  away  in  their  baskets.     They  then  re- 


TABOO.  231 

turn  to  the  ?nooa,  and  resume  their  mourning 
mat?  and  leaves  of  the  ifi  tree.  Such  are  the 
transactions  of  the  fifteen  days ;  every  day  the 
ceremony  of  the  burning  torches  being,  also 
repeated.  The  natives  themselves  used  to  ex- 
press their  regret  that  the  filthy  part  of  these 
ceremonies  was  necessary  to  be  performed,  to 
demonstrate  their  great  veneration  for  the  high 
character  of  Tooitonga,  and  that  it  was  the  duty 
of  the  most  exalted  nobles,  even  of  the  most 
delicate  females  of  rank,  to  perform  the  meanest 
and  most  disgusting  offices,  rather  than  the 
sacred  ground  in  which  he  was  buried  should 
remain  polluted. 

For  one  month,  from  the  day  of  burial,  greater 
or  less  quantities  of  provisions  are  brought 
every  day,  and  shared  out  to  the  people.  On  the 
first  day  a  prodigious  quantity  is  supplied  ;  but 
on.  every  succeeding  day  a  less  quantity,  gra- 
dually decreasing  till  the  last,  when,  compara- 
tively, a  very  small  portion  is  brought.  The 
expenditure,  and  we  may  say  waste  of  provi- 
sions, is,  however,  so  great,  as  to  require  a  taboo 
to  be  laid  on  certain  kinds  of  provisions,  (see 
Vol.  !•  p.  119),  which  lasts  about  eight  or  ten 
ffOtttba ;  and  at  the  end  of  that  time  the  ce- 
rmony  offuccalahi  is  performed,  to  remove  it. 

Taboo.— This  word  has  various  shades  pf 


232  TABOO. 

signification :  it  means  sacred  or  consecrated 
to  a  god,  having  the  same  signification  mjiieca 
igi:  it  means  prohibited  or  forbidden,  and  is 
applied  not  only  to  the  thing  prohibited,  but  to 
the  prohibition  itself,  and  frequently  (when  it 
is  in  sacred  matters),  to  the  person  who  breaks 
the  prohibition,  Thus  if  a  piece  of  ground  or 
a  house  be  consecrated  to  a  god,  by  express  de- 
claration, or  the .  burial  of  a  great  chief,  it  is 
said  to  be  taboo ;  the  like  if  a  canoe  be  conse- 
crated, which  is  frequently  done,  that  it  may 
be  more  safe  in  long  voyages,  &c.  As  it  is  for- 
bidden to  quarrel  or  fight  upon  consecrated 
ground,  so  fighting  in  such  a  place  would  be 
said  to  be  taboo,  and  those  that  fought  would 
be  said  also  to  be  t&boo ;  and  a  man  who  is 
thus  taboo  would  have  to  make  some  sacrifice 
to  the  gods  as  an  atonement  for  the  sacrilege, 
as  instanced  in  Palayali's  case.  (Se$  Vol.  I. 
p.  227.)  If  any  one  touches  a  superior  chief, 
or  superior  relation,  or  any  thing  immediately 
belonging  to  him,  he  taboos  himself ;  bnt  this  is 
not  supposed  to  produce  any  bad  consequence, 
unless  he  feeds  himself  with  his  own  hands, 
without  first  removing  this  taboo,  which  is  to  be 
done  by  performing  the  ceremony  oimati-moV, 
directly  to  be  explained.  If  a  person  touches 
the  body  of  a  dead  chief,  or  any  thing  personally 


taboo.  233 

belonging  to  him,  he  becomes  taboo,  and  time 
alone  can  relieve  him.  (See  note,  Vol.  I.  p.  150.) 
Certain  kinds  of  food,  as  turtle,  and  a  certain 
apeciesof  fish,  from  something  in  their  nature, 
are  said  to  be  taboo,  and  must  not  be  eaten 
until  a  small  portion  be  first  given  to  the  gods. 
Aqy  other  kind  of  food  may  be  rendered  ta'boo 
by  a  prohibition  being  laid  on  it.     Fruits  and 
flowers  when  tabooed  are  generally  marked  to 
be  n,  by  pieces  of  white  tapa,  or  a  piece  of  plait, 
in  the  shape  of  a  lizard  or  shark.    To  prevent 
certain  kinds  of  food  from  growing  scarce,  a 
prohibition  or  taboo  is  set  on  them  for  a  time 
as  after  the  ina'chi,  or  other  great  and  repeated 
ceremonies ;  and  which  ta'boo  to  afterwards  re- 
moved by  the  ceremony  called  fucealdhi ;  but 
this  latter  term  is  not  only  applied  to  the  cere- 
mony which  removes  the  prohibition,  but  is 
equally  used  to  express  the  duration  of  the  taboo 
itself  and  which  therefore  is  often  called  the 
time  of  foe  fucealdhi.    During  certain  ceremo- 
nies,' as  that  of  the  indchi  and  thefaJa  (see  Vol.  I. 
p.  404),  nobody  may  appear  abroad,  or  at  least 
in  flight,  it  being  tabooed  to  do  so. 

Any  thing  that  is  not  tabooed  is  said  to  be 
gmsfoo'a  (i.  e.  easy,  or  at  liberty),  and  is  a  term 
nrifed  in  contradistinction  to  tafkoo. 

When  a  person  is  tabooed,  by  touching  a 


234  TA'BOO. 

superior  chief  or  relation,  or  any  thing  person- 
ally belonging  to  him,  he  will  perform  the  cere* 
mony  of  mo'c-md'e,  before  he  will  dare  feed  him* 
self  with  his  own  hands.  This  ceremony  consists 
in  touching  the  soles  of  any  superior  chiefs  feet 
with  the  hands,  first  applying  the  palm,  then  the 
back  of  each  hand ;  after  which  the  hands 
must  be  rinsed  in  a  little  water,  or,  if  there  is 
no  water  near,  they  may  be  rubbed  with  any 
part  of  the  stem  of  the  plantain  or  banana  tree, 
the  moisture  of  which  will  do  instead  of  wasbr 
ing.  He  may  then  feed  himself  without  dan* 
ger  of  auy  disease,  which  would  otherwise  hap- 
pen, as  they  think,  from  eating  with  tabooed 
hands  :  but  if  any  one  think  he  may  have  al* 
ready'(unknowingly)  eaten  with  tabooed  handt, 
he  then  sits  down  before  a  chief,  and  taking 
the  foot  of  the  latter,  presses  the  sole  of  it  against 
his  own  abdomen,  that  the  food  which  is  within 
him  may  do  him  no  injury,  and  that  consequently 
he.  may  not  swell  up  'and  die :  this  operation  is 
called  jfota,  (i.  e.  to  press.)  It  is  tabooed  also  to 
eat  when  a  superior  relation  is  present,  unless 
the  back  is  turned  towards  him  :  for  when  a 
person's  back  is  turned  towards  another,  that 
other  may  be  said,  in  one  sense,  not  to  be  in 
his  presence :  also  to  eat  food  which  a  superior 
relation  or  chief  has  touched ;  and  if  either  of 


TOOGOO  CAVA  :  LOT00.       335 

these  taboos  is  accidentally  infringed  upon,  the 
ceremony  oifota  must  be  performed.  If  any  one 
is  tabooed  by  touching  the  person  or  garments 
of  Tooitonga,  there  is  no  other  chief  can  re- 
lieve him  from  his  taboo,  because  no  chief  is 
equal  to  him  in  rant ;  and,  to  avoid  the  incon- 
venience arising  from  his  absence,  a  consecrat- 
ed bowl  (or  some  such  thing),  belonging  to 
Tooitonga,  is  applied  to  and  touched,  instead  of 
his  feet.  In  Mr.  Mariner's  time,  Tooitonga 
always  left  a  pewter  dish  for  this  purpose,  which 
dish  was  given  to  his  father  by  Captain  Cook. 
Vlachi  usually  adopted  a  similar  plan.  Cava, 
either  the  root  or  the  infusion,  cannot  be  tabooed 
by  the  touch  of  any  chief  of  what  rank  soever  ; 
so  that  a  common  tooa  may  chew  cava  which 
even  Tooi tonga  has  touched . 

Tooaoo  Ca'va.  This  ceremony  consists  in 
merely  leaving  a  small  piece  of  cava  root  be- 
fore a  consecrated  house  or  grave,  out  of  respect 
to  a  god,  or  to  the  departed  spirit  of  a  chief  or 
relation,  at  the  same  time  the  ceremony  of 
toogi  or  beating  the  cheeks  is  performed,  as 
related  (Vol.  I.  p.  96.)  The  toogi,  which  is 
performed  at  burials,  is  of  a  more  serious 
nature. 

Lotoo  is  the  term  used  for  praying ;  but  it 
«  more  commonly  applied  to  prayers  offered  up 
in  the  fields  to  all  the  gods,  but  particularly  to 


230  OMENS   AND   CHARMS. 

Alo  Alo,  petitioning  for  a  good  harvest.  It  will 
be  also  recollected,  that  prayers  are  offered  up 
before  consecrated  houses  and  graves. 

As  omens,  to  which  they  give  a  considerable 
degree  of  credit,  and  charms,  which  they  some- 
times practise,  are  more  or  less  connected  with 
their  religion,  we  shall  say  something  of  them, 
before  concluding  the.  present  subject.  Most 
of  their  omens  we  have  already  had  occasion  to 
mention,  and  have  given  instances  of  in  the 
course  of  the  narrative.  As  to  dreams,  (see 
Vol.  I.  p.  111.  453.)  Thunder  and  lightning 
(same  vol.  p.  360.  452.)  Sneezing  (same  vol. 
p.  455.)  These  omens  obtain  almost  universal 
credit ;  and  they  are  thought  to  be  direct  indica- 
tions from  the  gods  of  some  event  that  is  about 
to  happen.  There  is  a  certain  species  of  bird 
which  they  call  chicotd,  which  is  very  apt  to 
make  a  sudden  descent,  and  dart  close  by  one, 
making  a  shrieking  noise :  this  bird  they  sup* 
pose  to  be  endowed  with  a  knowledge  of  fatu- 
ity, and  they  consider  this  action  to  be  a  warn- 
ing of  some  evil  that  is  about  to  happen. 

As  Mr.  Mariner  was  once  going  out  with  the 
present  king,  and  a  party  of  men,  upon  some  ex- 
cursion against  the  enemy,  one  of  these  birds 
made  a  sudden  descent,  passed  over  their  heads, 
settled  on  a  tree,  passed  over  their  heads  agaiu, 
and  again  fettled ;  upon  which  the  majority,  not 


OMENS    AND    CHARMS.  237 

excepting  the  king,  were  for  returning  imme- 
diately ;  but  Mr.  Mariner  laughed  at  their  su- 
perstition, and,  to  prove  that  the  bird  had  no 
great  insight  into  matters  of  futurity,  he  shot 
it  with  his  musket :  but,  however,  this  did  not 
prevent  them  from  going  back  to  their  gar- 
rison ;  and  several  had  a  full  conviction  that 
Mr.  Mariner  would  soon  be  killed  for  this 
sacrilege. 

In  respect  to  the  charms  practised  among 
them,  we  have  also  a  few  words  to  say.     The 
principal  is  that  called  tatdo,  which  has  already 
been  described,  Vol.  I.  p.  439.     There  are 
only  two  other  practices  which  can  well  come 
under  this  head,   viz.  cafbe,  or  rather  vangi, 
which  means  a  curse,  or  a  malevolent  order  or 
command ;  and  ta  nioo,  a  charm  to  discover 
whether  a  sick  person  will  live  or  die.     Of  the 
former,  viz.  cube,   we   have  given   instances 
(Vol.  I.  p.  297),  from  which  it  will  appear  that 
they  are  chiefly  malevolent  wishes,  or  com- 
mands, that  the  object  may  eat,  or  otherwise 
maltreat  his  relations  or  gods ;  and  when  we 
to  reflect  that  thev  believe  in  no  future 
of  punishment,  but  that  all  human  evils 
are  the  consequences  of  crimes,  and  that  dis- 
respect to  one's  superior  relations  is  little  short 
of  sacrilege  to  the  gods,  these  malevolent  com- 


238  TUE    CHARM    OF    Va'nGI. 

mands,'  however  ridiculous  some  of  them  may 
appear  to  us,  amount  to  the  most  horrible 
curses ;  for  if  such  commands  were  fulfilled, 
nothing  less  than  the  most  dreadful  of  human 
miseries  would  be  expected  to  fall  on  the  head 
of  the  sacrilegious  perpetrator.  But  it  is  only 
when  a  number  of  curses  are  repeated  in  • 
string,  as  it  were,  and  pronounced  firmly,  and 
with  real  malevolence,  that  they  are  supposed 
to  have  any  effect ;  but  not  even  then,  if  the 
party  who  curses  is  considerably  lower  in  rank 
than  the  party  cursed.  When  a  whole  string 
is  thus  uttered,  it  is  properly  called  va'ngi,  mod 
is  often  to  the  amount  of  thirty  or  forty  in 
number.  Mr.  Mariner  has  heard  one  con- 
sisting  of  eighty  maledictions,  all  disposed  in 
rhyme;  the  rhyme,  however,  is  not  necessary: 
for  a  tolerable  fair  sample  of  this  wonderful 
charm,  the  following  may  be  taken :  "  Dig  up 
"  your  father  by  moonlight,  and  make  soup 
"  of  his  bones ;  bake  his  skin  to  cracknel ; 
"gnaw  his  skull;  devour  your  mother;  dig 
"  up  your  aunt,  and  cut  her  to  pieces ;  feed 
"  upon  the  earth  of  your  grave ;  chew  the  heart 
44  of  your  grandfather ;  swallow  the  eyes  of 
"  your  uncle ;  strike  your  god  ;  eat  the  gristly 
"  bones  of  your  children ;  suck  out  the  brains 
"  of  your  grandmother ;  dress  yourself  up  in 


THE   CHARM    OP   TA    Nl'oO.   '  239 

"  the  skin  of  your  father,  and  tie  it  on  with  the 
44  entrails  of  your  mother/'  &c.  &c.  &c. 

As  to  the  charm  of  ta  nioo,  it  consists  in 
spinning  a  cocoa-nut  with  the  husk  on,  and 
judging  by  the  direction  of  the  upper  part, 
when  again  at  rest,  of  the  object  of  enquiry, 
which  is*  chiefly,  whether  a  sick  person  will 
recover :  for  this  purpose,  the  nut  being  placed 
on  the  ground,  a  relation  of  the  sick  person 
determines  that,  if  the  nut,  when  again  at  rest, 
points  to  such  a  quarter,  the  east  for  example, 
thai  the  sick  man  will  recover :  he  then  prays 
aloud  to  the  patron  god  of  the  family,  that  he 
will  be  pleased  to  direct  the  nut,  so  that  it  may 
indicate  the  truth :  the  nut  being  next  spun, 
the  result  is  attended  to  with  confidence,  at 
Wast  with  a  full  conviction  that  it  will  truly 
declare  the  intentions  of  the  gods  at  the  time. 
The  other  occasions  in  which  the  spinning  of 
a  cocoa-nut  is  used,  is  chiefly  for  amusement, 
and  then  no  prayer  is  made,  and  no  degree  of 
credit  is  attached  to  the  result. 


240  INTRODUCTORY    OBSEKTATIOXS. 


CHAP.  XXI. 

Introductory  observations  on  the  state  of  the  healing  art  iit 
theae  islands— Their  surgical  knowledge  borrowed  from 
the  Fiji  islands — Medical  skill  of  a  Sandwich  islander 
— The  operation  of  cawso,  with  a  case  described;  regi- 
men ;  precautions  against  tetanus — Two  cases  of  tetanus 
cured  by  the  operation  of  tocolasi — Operation  of  bocm,  or 
castration :  a  man  castrates  himself— Fractures  and  luxa- 
tions— Topical  bloodletting — Opening  abscessea— - Burn- 
ing and  blistering — Friction— Scarification  of  the  tunica 
adnata — Gun-shot  wounds — Amputation — Circumcirioa 
—7a  tatto'w  at  the  Tonga  islands ;  at  the  Fiji  islands— 
The  diseases  called  cahi  and  palla — Gonorrhoea — Ob* 
serrations  respecting  the  existence  of  syphilis  at  these 
islands — Gonorrhoea  cured  by  fright  in  three  individuals 
— Tana,  a  disease  similar  to  the  yaws — An  eruption  on 
the  feet  called  gnowooa — Fooa,  or  elephantiasis — Momoco, 
or  general  wasting  of  the  flesh — Fckc-fcke,  a  species  of 
irregular  intermittent. 

Having,  in  the  three  preceding  chapters, 
given  an  account  of  the  state  of  religion  and 
morals  in  these  islands,  we  shall  now  proceed 
to  develope  the  next  most  important  feature  in 
the  description  of  human  habits,  and  shall 
therefore  endeavour  to  set  forth  the  state  of 


iNTRobuCTORY  OBSERVATIONS.  ^41 

Useful  knowledge  to  which  they  have  arrived. 
In  the  first  place,  we  shall  treat  of  the  healing 
art;  not  only  because  it  stands  prominent  in 
the  general  history  of  human  science,  but  be- 
cause, in  all  early  stages  of  society,  it  appear^ 
to  have  a  particular  connection  with,  and  often 
U>  depend  entirely  upon,  certain  religious  ce- 
remonies ;  nor  is  this  to  be  wondered  at,  for, 
seeing'  that  the  operations  of  the  animal  (eco- 
nomy are  so  far  involved  in  mystery,  as  fre- 
quently to  escape  the  scrutinizing  search  of  the 
most  cultivated  mind,  how  can  it  be  otherwise 
bat  that  a  people,  among  whom  the  sources  of 
knowledge  are  scanty,  and  the  opportunities  of 
experiment  on  the  animal  oeconomy  both  rare 
and  hazardous,  should  look  to  the  gods  for 
relief  from  those  miseries  ^  hich  evidently  pro- 
ceed  from  an   unseen  hand  :    a  considerable 
portion  of  the  curative  means  of  these  people 
are,  therefore,  very  naturally,  invocation  and 
sacrifice.      Nevertheless,  as  the  animal  oeco- 
nomy is  subject  to  a  variety  of  accidents,  the 
causes  and  operations  of  which  take  place,  and 
pursue  their  progress,  more  or  less,  under  the 
evidence  of  the  external  senses,   appropriate 
means  of  cure  are  frequently  had  recourse  to, 
and  operative  surgery  is  therefore  not  in  a  con- 
temptible state  of  cultivation. 


242         INTRODUCTORY    OBSERVATIONS. 


All  the  remedies  practised  among  them  may 
very  safely  be  ranked  under  these  three  heads*, 
viz.  invocation,  sacrifice,  and  external  opera- 
tions :  as  to  internal  remedies,  they  sometimes, 
but  very  seldom,  use  infusions  of  a  few  plants, 
which  produce,  however,  no  sensible  effect, 
either  upon  the  system  or  upon  the  disease, 
and  we  may  readily  conceive  in  how  little 
esteem  such  remedies  are  held  when  the  king's 
daughter,  whose  life  so  great  pains  were  taken 
to  preserve,  took  none  of  them,  nor  did  any 
one  think  of  proposing  them.  The  idea  of 
giving  these  infusions  was  first  taken  from  the 
natives  of  the  Fiji  islands,  who  have  the  repute 
of  being  skilful  in  the  management  of  internal 
remedies :  and  though  almost  all  the  surgical 
operations  known  and  practised  at  the  Tonga 
islands  have  avowedly  been  borrowed  from 
the  same  source,  and  followed  up  with  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  skill  and  success,  yet  the 
Tonga  people  have  generally  failed  in  the 
former,  and  for  the  cure  of  constitutional 
ailments,  depend  upon  the  mercy  of  the  gotte. 
without  any  interference  on  their  own  parts, 
except  in  the  way  of  invocation  and  sacrifice. 
In  such  a  state  of  things,  it  would  be  natural 
to  suppose  that  they  frequently  make  use  of 
charms,  amulets,  &c.  to  assist  in  the  cure:  but 


SKILL    OF    A    SANDWICH    ISLANDER.      243 

this,  however,  is  never  done,  for  they  have  not 
the  most  distant  idea  of  this  sort  of  supersti- 
tion, which  prevails  so  much  over  almost  all 
the  world,  even  in  the  most  civilized  countries. 
The  natives  of  the  Sandwich  islands,  however, 
appear  to  have  some  knowledge  of  medicine, 
bat  whether  from  original  discoveries  of  their 
own,  or  from  the  information  of  Europeans, 
Mr.  Mariner  could  not  obtain  any  informa- 
tion from  those  natives  who  were  with  him  at 
Vavaoo.     One  of  these  Sandwich  islanders  (a 
petty  chief),  professed  some  knowledge  of  the 
healing  art,  and  it  so  happened  that  Mr.  Ma- 
riner was  once  the  subject  of  his  skill.    Feel- 
ing himself  much  indisposed  by  a  disordered 
state  of  the   stomach  and  bowels,  attended 
with  head-ach  and  drowsiness,  this  Sandwich 
islander  proposed  to  give  him  some  internal 
remedies,   whilst  a  native  of  Tonga,  on  the 
other  hand,  very  much  wanted  him  to  lose 
some  blood  (by  scarification  with  shells  ob  the 
arms,  legs),  &c.   The  remedies  proposed  by  the 
former  were  an  emetic  and  a  cathartic :  the 
cathartic  consisted  chiefly  of  the  sweet  potatoe 
grated,  and  the  juice  of  the  sugar-cane ;  to 
this,  however,  was  added  the  juice  of  some 
other  vegetable  substance,   with  which  Mr. 
wa**  not    acquainted.      The  emetic 

r2 


244     SKILL    OF   A   SANDWICH  .ISLANDER.. 

consisted    of   two    infusions, .  one  -  of  certain 

«  ■ 

leaves,  and  the  other  of  a  particular  root,, both 
unknown  to  him :  the  Sandwich  blander  in- 
formed him  that  the  .root  was  necessary, to 
counteract  the  effect  of  the  leaves,  which  ^u 
very,  powerful,  and  might,  in  a  large  dose,  and. 
without  such  addition,  kill  him.  Upon  thi* 
discouraging  information,  the  native  of  Tonga, 
with,  his  scarifying  shells,  redoubled  his  per* 
suasions,  ridiculed  the  remedies  of  the  other, 
and,  on  understanding  what  effect  they  would* 
have,  laughed  most  heartily  at  the  idea  of 
curing  a  sick  man  by  means  which  would 
make  a  healthy  man  sick.  The  remedies  of 
the  surgeon,  however,  were  not  more  agreeable 
than  those  of  the  physician,  and  the  patient 
was  at  a  loss  to  know  to  whose  care  he  should 
entrust  his  health ;  when  the  latter  signified 
his  intention  of  taking  some  of  his  own  physic, 
which  was  the  best  proof  he  could  possibly 
give .  of  his  confidence  in  it :  two  equal  doses 
were  accordingly  prepared;  the  patient  took 
one,  and  the  doctor  the  other.  The  cathartic 
was  first  given,  and  the  emetic  about  an  hour 
afterwards:  the  latter  operated  in  about  an- 
other hour,  and  the  former,  in  conjunction 
with  it,  in  about  two  hours  and  a  half.  They 
both  evinced  abundant  evidence  of  their- 


SKILL    OP    A    SANDWICH    ISLANDER.     245 

spective  properties,  and  the  following  morn- 
ing Mr.  Mariner  found  himself  perfectly  well  : 
which  happy  result  the  man  who  wanted  to 
bleed  him  could  by  no  means  attribute  to 
the  remedies  he  had  taken  !  The  Sandwich 
islander,  notwithstanding  he  was  much  laughed 
at,  particularly  about  his  cathartics,  obtained 
at  length  a  considerable  share  of  credit  for  his 
skill.  Finow  took  his  remedies  twice  with 
very  good  effect,  which  encouraged  some 
othefto  to  trv ;  but  as  these  circumstances  took 

W 

place  only  a  short  time  before  Mir.  Mariner 
left,  and  consequently  only  a  few  trials  had 
been  made,  we  ought  not  to  speak  of  them 
as  constituting  the  medical  knowledge  of  ttie 
Tonga  people  ;  but  as  this  Sandwich  island 
chief  was  a  man  of  considerable  judgment ] 
and,  as  Mr.  Mariner  has  every  reason  to  think, 
a  good  observer,  we  indulge  the  hope  that  no 
ill  success,  at  an  early  period,  has  destroyed 
confidence  in  the  -adoption  of  two  such  useful 
remedies. 

The  ceremonies  of  invocation  in  behalf  of 
side  people  have  already  been  described  in  the 
account  of  the  sickness  of  the  late  king's  daugh- 
ter^ the  sacrifices  adopted  on  similar  occasions 
are  tootoomima  and  nawgia ;  cutting  off  fingers 
and  strangling  children :  these  also  have  both 


OPERATION    OA    CAWbO. 

been  described;  the  latter  is  only  done  tor 
very  great  chiefs.  We  shall  now  proceed  to 
speak  of  their  operative  surgery,  and  consti- 
tutional diseases,  as  far  as  Mr.  Mariner's  ob- 
servation can  lead  him  to  speak  with  accuracy. 

No  native  of  Tonga  undertakes  to  practise 
surgery,  unless  he  has  been  at  the  Fiji  islands, 
where  constant  wars  afford  great  opportuni- 
ties of  becoming  skilful ;  and  no  native  of 
Tonga  would  employ  a  surgeon  who  had  not 
been  thus  schooled :  nor  would  any  one,  as  Mr. 
Mariner  believes,  undertake  an  important  sur- 
gical operation,  unless  he  feels  himself  confi- 
dent in  what  he  is  about  to  perform;  and  it 
must  be  said  of  them,  that  they  are  not  rash  in 
their  opinions.  When  a  surgeon  performs  an 
operation,  he  never  fails  to  obtain  a  present 
from  the  patient  or  his  friends. 

The  three  most  important  operations  are 
amsOt  or  paracentesis  thoracis ;  tocolou*  or  an 
operation  for  the  cure  of  tetanus,  which  con- 
sists in  making  a  seton  in  the  urethra;  and 
boca*  or  castration. 

Cccvdso  is  an  operation  which  is  performed 
to*  allow  of  the  escape  of  extravasated  blood, 
which  hfcs  lodged  in  the  cavity  of  the  thorax, 
in  consequence  of  wounds,  or  for  the  extrac- 
tion of  a  broken  arrow.    There  are  no  other 


OPERATION    OF    CAWSO.  247 

instances  where  they  think  of  performing  it. 
The  instruments  they  use  are  a  piece  of  bam- 
boo and  a  splinter  of  shell ;  sometimes  a  probe 
made  of  the  stem  of  the  cocoa-nut  leaf.  Mr. 
Mariner  has  seen  a  number  of  persons  oh 
whom  the  operation  had  been  performed,  and 
who  were  in  perfect  health  ;  and  two  instance* 
of  the  fact  itself  he  was  an  eyewitness  to. 
The  one  we  are  about  to  describe  was  per- 
formed upon  a  Fiji  islander,  who  had  received 
a  barbed  arrow  in  the  right  side,  between  the 
fifth  and  sixth  ribs ;  not  in  a  line  directly  below 

■ 

the  nipple,  but  about  an  inch  backwards.  The 
arrow  had  broken  off  about  three  inches  from 
the  point *,  under  the  third  row  of  barbs,  and 
from  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  thorax  in  the  act  of 
respiration :  the  whole  piece  was  perfectly  con- 
cealed from  any  external  view :  the  barbs  and 
the  print  were  of  the  same  piece  with  the  arrow. 
A  countryman  of  the  wounded  man  wished 
to  jneribito  the  operation,  but  the  patient  de- 
fined that  a  friend  of  his,  a  native  of  Vavaoo, 
should  manage  it :  this  proved  that  he  placed 
at  least  equal  confidence  in  his*  skill  as  in  that 

*  They  are  made  thin  under  each  barb,  on  purpose  that 
they  may  break.  The  barbs  of  this  arrow  were  about  a  quar- 
ter of  an  inch  transverse  diameter,  and  the  stem  of  the  ar- 
row under  each  row  of  barbs  about  the  eighth  of  an  iuch. 


£48  OPERATION    OF    CAWSO. 

of  his  countryman ;  for  he  had  seen  lain  per* 
form  the  operation  several  times  before,  at  the 
Fiji  islands. 

The  patient  was  now  lying  on  his  back,  but 
a  little  inclined  to  his  left  side ;  and  this  was 
considered  a  favourable  posture  for  the  opera* 
tion.  It  was  a  fine  clear  day,  and  the  weather 
warm :  had  it  been  rainy  or  cloudy,  or  had  the 
patient  felt  himself  cold,  tires  would  have  been 
lighted  in  the  house,  and  a  burning  torch  held 
to  bis  side,  to  relax  the  integuments,  and  to 
render  by  such  means  the  wound  more  fa- 
vourable. The  wound  had  been  received  the 
day  before ;  and  on  pressing  the  finger  vpto 
its  orifice  the  broken  end  of  the  arrow  could 
not  now  be  felt,  except  by  the  pain  which 
such  pressure  gave  the  patient.  In  the  first 
place,  the  operator  marked  with  a  piece  of 
charcoal  the  situation  and  length  of  the  in- 
tended incision,  which  was  about  two  inches ; 
the  small  wound  made  by  the  arrow  being  in 
the  centre  of  it.  The  integuments  were  now 
drawn  upwards,  so  that  the  black  line  lay  upon 
and  parallel  with  the  superior  rib ;  an  assistant 
pressing  his  hand  above,  and  another  below  the 
situation  of  the  intended  incision,  with  a  view 
to  keep  the  integuments  firm  and  steady.  The 
operator  having  now  chosen  a  fit  piece  of  bam<> 


OPERATION    OF    CAWSO.  24i> 

boo,  began  his  incision,  and  carried  it  down 
to  the  bone,  the  whole  length  of  the  mark, 
which  was  done  with  five  or  six  motions  of 
the  hand,  aided  by  considerable  pressure :  in 
this  part  of  the  operation  a  shell  could  not  be 
used,  on  account  of  its  liability  to  break.    The 
integuments  being  now  allowed  to  return  to 
their  natural  situation,  the  incision  was  cau- 
tiously continued  with  a  splinter  of  shell,  mid- 
way between  the  two  ribs,  dividing  the  inter- 
costal muscles  to  nearly  the  same  extent  as  the 
external  wound,  to  allow  of  the  introduction 
of  a  finger  and  thumb  to  lay  hold  of  the  arrow : 
daring  this  part  of  the  operation,  however,  the 
ead  of  the  arrow  became  perceptible,  protrud- 
ing between  the  costte  at  every  inspiration  : 
die  operator,  as  soon  as  possible,  secured  it 
with  the  finger  and  thumb  of  his  left  hafcd ; 
whilst  with  his  right  he  proceeded  to  widen 
the.  incision  on  either  side,  that  he  might  take 
a  deeper  and  firmer  hold,  and  secure,  if  possi- 
ble, the  second  row  of  barbs :  to  facilitate  the 
operation,  he  now  slipt  the  noose  of  a  string 
over  the  barbs  he  held  between  his  finger  an4 
tbamb,  and  having  secured  which,  his  left 
hand  was  no  longer  in  the  way  of  his  right ; 
for  fay  drawing  the  string  as  far  as  prudence 
Foald  allow,  he  kept  it  prest  upon  the  supe- 


250  OPERATION    OF    CAWSO. 

rior  rib,  and  thereby  preserved  the  arrow  from 
receding  at  every  expiration.     The   incision 
was  now  carried  through  the  intercostal  mus- 
cles  and   the  pleura,  sufficiently  to  allow  of 
the  introduction  of  the  finger  and  thumb  of 
the  right  hand,  with  which  he  endeavoured 
to  disengage  as  much  as  possible  what  might 
obstruct  the  barbs ;  whilst  with  his  left  fingtef 
and  thumb  he  laid  hold  of  the  end  of  the  ar- 
row, and  kept  gently  twisting  it,  always  one  Way, 
so  as  to  break  down  those  obstruction*  whkA 
could  not  be  removed  with  thfe  other  hand; 
taking  care,  however,  not  to  use  so  much  force 
as  might  be  supposed  liable  to  break  the  barbs ; 
and  in  thii  way,  in  the'  course  of  two  or  three 
minutes,  he  withdrew  the  arrow,  bringing  with 
it  a  small  portion  of  "the  substance  of  the  lungs-, 
which  could  not  be  disengaged.     During  this 
port  of  the  operation  the  patient  was  almost  in- 
sensible ;  he  was  held  by  those  about  him,  to 
prevent  any  mischief  arising  from  his  strag- 
gles, which  at  times  were  violent.    The  opera- 
tor now  carefully  examined  the  arrow,  and  be- 
ing satisfied  that  every  barb  (of  which  there 
were  three  rows)  was  entire,  he  ordered  him 
to  be  gently  turned  on  the  right  side,  so  that  the 
woOnd  whs  depending,  and  to  make  it  more 
completely  so,  a  quantity  of  gnatoo  was  placed 


OPERATION    OF    (AAV 80.  251 

nailer  him  in  two  situations,  viz.  under  the 
ehoulder,  and  under  the  pelvis,  in  such  a  way 
that  the  orifice  of  the  wound  was  evidently  the 
most  depending  portion  of  the  thorax^  The 
patient  being  now  perfectly  sensible,  the  ope- 
rator desired  him  to  make  a  full  inspiration,  en- 
quiring whether  it  gave  him  much  pain  ;  and 
being  answered  that  he  could  bear  it  tolerably 
well,  he  desired  him  to  make  several  full  inspira- 
tions from  time  to  time,  but  not  so  as  to  fatigue 
himself,  and  occasionally  to  move  his  body  gen- 
tly :  by  these  means  a  considerable  quantity  of 
blood  was  discharged  •  A  few  hours  afterwards 
the  operator  introduced  between  the  ribs  a  por- 
tion of  banana  leaf,  smoothly  folded  several 
tunc**  and  anointed  with  cocoa-nut  oil,  as  a 
plodgpt  fndceep  open  the  wound.  He  ordered  his 
patient  to  be  kept  perfectly  quiet,  not  to  be 
yoljqptOjno  noise  to  be  made,  nor  bis  attention 
to  b*  attracted  in  any  way :  to  live  chiefly  upon 
vegetable  diet*  or  if  he  had  any  kind  of  meat, 
fotfi  in  preference  to  pork,  or  if  poi  k,  it  was  to 
be  very  small  in  quantity,  and  without  the  least 
&t»  vithcocoa»nut  milk  for  drink,  in  any  quan- 
tity, that  he  felt,  disposed'  to  take:  The  fitat 
night  he  had  a  great  deal  of  pain,  much  thirst, 
and  little  sleep;  the  folio  wing  day  he  was  much 
',  a 'great  deal  of  blood  was  found  to  hare 


232  OPERATION    OP   CAWSO. 

been  discharged,  and  a  fresh  pledget  was  in- 
troduced, which  was  renewed  every  morning 
as  long  as  any  discharge  was  apparent.  When 
the  discharge  of  sanguineous  fluid  ceased,  which 
was  in  about  nine  or  ten  days,  the  operator  in- 
troduced his  probe,  to  be  sure  that  the  cessation 
of  the  discharge  was  not  occasioned  by  any  ob- 
struction :  he  then  contented  himself  with  a 
more  superficial  pledget,  that  the  external  orifice 
might  not  heal  too  soon ;  and  the  patient  was 
allowed  to  change  his  posture  occasionally,  but 
not  for  a  long  time  together.  As  he  grew 
better  a  little  more  meat  was  allowed  him: 
but  the  use  of  cava  was  interdicted  until  he  got 
tolerably  well.  The  wound  healed  in  about 
six  weeks,  without  any  sort  of  dressing  or  wash- 
ing ;  the  patient  was  confined  to  his  house 
about  two  months,  and  was  not  perfectly  reco- 
vered till  near  a  twelvemonth,  when  he  seemed 
as  healthy  and  as  strong  as  ever,  with  scarcely 
411  v  Cough  having  supervened  in  the  mean- 
while. This  was  considered  a  very  dangerous 
wound,  and  a  very  well  conducted  cure.  Mr. 
Mariner  does  not  know  that  they  are  acquainted 
either  with  the  exact  situation  or  existence  of 
the  intercostal  arteries. 

It  often  happens  that  the  arrow,  not  being  a 
barbed  one,  is  withdrawn  without  any  difficulty; 


OPERATION    OF    CAWSO.  253 

but  still  the  surgeon  thinks  proper  to  perform 
the  operation  of  cawso,  not  by  enlarging  the 
wound  made  by  the  .arrow,  but  by  making  an- 
other at  some  little  distance  from  it,  in  a  part 
which,  either  from  judgment  or  education,  he 
deems  more  safe  and  proper.  In  all  those  per- 
sons whom  Mr.  Mariner  knew  to  have  under- 
gone  the  cawso  it  had  been  performed  in  nearly 
the  same  situation  as  the  one  above  stated. 

We  have  observed  in  the  before-mentioned 
case  that  the  wound  was  not  washed,  and  it 
may  here  be  noticed,  that  in  all  cases*  of  consi- 
derable wounds  produced  by  pointed  instru- 
ments the  patient  is  not  allowed  to  wash  him- 
self till  he  is  tolerably  well  recovered,  nor  to 

r 

shave,  cut  his  hair,  nor  his  nails :  for  all  these' 

things  they  say  are  liable  to  produce  gita  [it- 

tanus),  unless  the  wound  be  of  such  a  nature, 

and  in  such  a  situation,  that  it  may  with  safety 

be  first  laid  completely  open,  then  there  is  no 

danger.  Mr.  Mariner  never  witnessed  a  case  of 

tetanus  produced  by  these  means  ;  but  he  met 

with  many  who  said  they  had  seen  it  in  persons 

who  had  got  nearly  well  of  their  wounds :  but 

happening  to  wash  themselves  too  soon,  spasm 

supervened,  and  death  was  the  consequence.' 

Thty  notice  that  wounds  in  the  extremities, 

particularly  in  the  feet  and  hands,  are  liable 


OPERATION    OF    CAVVSO. 

to  produce  tetanus:  also,  in  persons  alread} 
wounded,  sudden  alarms,  or  even  any  whideu 
noise  that  calls  the  attention  abruptly,  is  HaMe 
to  produce  this  complaint.  They  never  allow 
females  to  be  near  men  thus  wounded,  lest  tfcfe 
mere  stimulus  of  venereal  desire  should  induce 
this  dangerous  complaint.  As  to  cutting' lite 
hair. and  nails,  they  positively  assert  that  ihe 
mere  sensation  of  these  simple  and  common 
operations  has  not  tmfrequently  been  produc- 
tive of  these  dreadful  consequences.  The  mwi 
whose  case  we  have  just  mentioned  was  eight 
months  without  being  washed,  shaved,  or  hav- 
ing had  his  hair  or  nails  cut.  "* 
Gita  is  a  disease  very  common  among*  die 
Tonga  people ;  but  still  more  common  among 
the  natives  of  the  Fiji  islands,  who,  from  thair 
warlike  habits,  are  more  frequently  in  the  way 
of  it :  they  adopt,  however,  a  remedy  which  the 
Tonga  people  have  borrowed  of  them,  and  con- 
sists in  the  operation  of  toe  old  si,  or  passing  a 
reed  first  wetted  with  saliva  into  the  urethra, 
so  as  to  occasion  a  considerable  irritation,  and 
discharge  of  blood ;  and  if  the  general  spasm  ii 
very  violent,  they  make  a  seton  of  this  passage, 
by  passing  down  a  double  thread,  looped  over 
the  end  of  the  reed,  and  when  it  is  felt  in  the 
perinceum  they  cut  down  upon  it,  seize  hold  o\ 


OPERATION    OF   TO'cObo'si. 

the  thread,  ftud  withdraw  the  reed,  so  that  the 
two  ends  of  the  thread  hang  from  the  orifice  of 
the  urethra,  and  the  doubled  part  from  the  arti- 
ficial opening  in  the  perinoeum ;  the  thread  is 
occasionally  drawn  backwards  and  forwards, 
which  excites  very  great  pain,  .and  abundant 
discharge  of  blood.  The  latter  operation  Mr. 
Mariner  has  seen  performed  several  times  ;  but 
only  twice  for  tetanus,  arising  in  both  instance* 
from  wounds  in  the  foot :  in  these  cases  the 
ipairaw,  but  particularly  the  convulsive  pa* 
raxypmtft,  were  exceedingly  violent,  extending 
to  the  whple  body,  neck,  face,  trunk,  and  ex- 
totalities:  but  in  neither  case  was  the  jaw  per- 
manently locked,  though  on  every  accession  it 
was  violently  closed  for  a  few  seconds.  A  na- 
tive of  the  Fiji  islands  performed  one  operation, 
and  Hala  A'pi  A'pi  the  other :  they  both  hap- 
pened at  Vavaoo,  at  different  times.  In  either 
case  the  disease  came  on  suddenly,  three  or 
four  days  after  the  wound  was  received,  which 
was  from  an  arrow  not  barbed.  The  mo- 
ment the  symptoms  became  evident  tocolosi 
was  performed.  In  the  short  space  of  two 
hours  one  of  them  was  greatly  relieved,  and  the 
other  in  about  six  or  eight  hours.  The  follow- 
ing day  the  one  on  whom  Hala  A'pi  A'pi  ope- 


1 


256  OPERATION    OF    TOCO  LOS  f. 

rated  was  quite  well,  and  afterwards  had  no 
other  attack ;  consequently  the  thread  was  with- 
drawn :  but  the  other  on  the  second  day  was 
not  quite  free  from  spasmodic  symptoms,  and  a 
paroxysm  coming  on,  the  seton  was  moved  fre* 
quently,  which  in  two  or  three  hours  gave  him 
great  relief,  and  he  afterwards  had  no  other  at- 
tack :  it  was  thought  prudent,  however,  to  keep 
in  the  seton  till  the  fourth  or  fifth  day,  when  it 
was  withdrawn.  The  effect  of  this  operation  was 
a  considerable  pain  and  tumefaction  of  the  penis, 
but  which  gradually  subsided  (in  about  five  or 
six  days) :  the  artificial  openings  in  both  cases 
healed  spontaneously,  without  any  difficulty.  • 
These  are  the  only  two  cases  of  tetanus  in 
which  this  operation  was  performed  that  Mr. 
Mariner  can  speak  of  with  certainty,  having 
beeh  an  eyewitness  of  them.  He  heard  of 
several  others  at  the  Hapai  islands,  at  the 
island'  of  Tonga,  &c.  some  of  which  were 
equally  fortunate.  From  what  he  has  heard 
and  seen  of  the  success  of  this  operation  at  the 
Tonga  islands,  he  is  disposed  to  believe  that 
about  three  or  four  in  ten  recover  by  the  aid 
of  it.  The  Fiji  islanders,  however,  speak  of 
the  happy  effects  of  this  singular  mode  of  cure 
^ith  much  more  confidence  than  the  native* 


OPERATION    OF   BOCA*  257 

of  Tonga;  but  as  they  claim  the  merit  of  the 
discovery,  they  are  probably  rather  too  profuse 
in  praise  of  it. 

Tetanus  is  not  the  only  disease  for  the  cure 
of  which  the  operation  of  tocoldsi  is  performed : 
it  is  adopted  also  in  cases  of  wounds  in  the 
abdomen,  upon  the  mistaken  notion  that  any 
extravasated  blood  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdo- 
men is  capable  of  passing  off  by  the  discharge 
from  the  urethra.  Mr.  Mariner  saw  the  opera- 
tion performed  once  in  this  case,  and,  as  the 
man  was  considered  in  a  very  bad  state,  and 
notwithstanding  got  well,  the  cure  was  attri- 
buted to  this  remedy.  It  is  also  performed 
for  relief  in  cases  of  general  languor  and  in- 
activity of  the  system  ;  but,  in  such  instances, 
they  only  endeavour  to  produce  irritation  by 
passing  the  reed  without  any  thread  or  arti- 
ficial opening:  the  present  king  had  it  thus 
performed  on  him  for  this  purpose ;  and  two 
days  afterwards  he  said  he  felt  himself  quite 
light,  and  full  of  spirits. 

The  natives  of  these  islands  are  very  sub" 
ject  to  enlarged  testicles,  and  for  this  they 
sometimes  perform  the  operation  of  boca  (cas- 
tration). Mr.  Mariner's  limited  observation 
<*  tins  subject  does  not  authorize  him  to  speak 
^ilh  any  degree  of  certainty  in  regard  to  the 

▼OL.  II.  * 


258  OPERATION    OP   BOCA. 

precise  nature  of  these  tumefactions.  Their 
mode  of  performing  this  operation  is  summary 
enough  :  a  bandage  being  tied  with  some  de- 
gree of  firmness  round  the  upper  part  of  the 
scrotum,  so  as  to  steady  the  diseased  mass,  at 
the  same  time  that  the  scrotum  is  closely  ex- 
panded over  it,  an  incision  is  made  with  bam- 
boo, just  large  enough  to  allow  the  testicle  to 
pass,  which  being  separated  from  its  cellular 
connections,  the  cord  is  divided,  and  thus  ends 
the  operation :  they  neither  tie  the  cord,  nor 
take  any  pains  to  slop  the  bleeding;  but,  if 
the  testicle  be  not  very  large,  and  the  epidy- 
dimis  not  apparently  diseased,  they  perform 
the  operation  by  dissecting  it  from  that  body 
with  the  same  instrument.  The  external 
wound  is  kept  from  closing  by  a  pledget  of 
the  bana'na  leaf,  which  is  renewed  every  day 
till  the  discharge  has  ceased,  and  the  scrotum 
is  supported  by  a  bandage.  A  profuse  hae- 
morrhage is  mostly  the  consequence  of  this 
operation :  it  was  performed  seven  times  within 
the  sphere  of  Mr.  Mariner's  knowledge,  during 
his  stay  ;  to  three  of  which  he  was  a  witness: 
not  one  of  the  seven  died.  One  of  these  cases 
was  that  of  a  man  who  performed  the  opera- 
tion on  himself:  his  left  testicle  was  greatly 
enlarged,  being  about  five  or  six  inches  in  dia- 


Operation  of  boca.  259 

Meter,  and  gave  him,  at  times,  severe  lanci- 
nating pains :  two  or  three  times  he  was  about 
to  have  the  operation  performed  by  a  native  of 
Fiji,  but  his  courage  failed  him  when  he  came 
to  the  trial.  One  day,  when  Mr.  Mariner  was 
with  him,  he  suddenly  determined  to  perform 
the  operation  on  himself;  and  it  was  not  much 
sooner  said  than  done :  he  tied  on  the  bandage,' 
opened  the  scrotum  with  a  very  steady  hand, 
in  a  fit  of  desperation  divided  the  cord  and 
cellular  substance  together,  and  fell  senseless 
on  the  ground :  the  haemorrhage  was  very  pro- 
fuse. Mr.  Mariner  called  in  some  persons  to 
his  assistance,  and  he  was  carried  into  a  house* 
but  did  not  become  sensible  for  nearly  an  hour, 
and  was  in  a  very  weak  state  from  loss  of  blood  : 
this  affair  confined  him  to  the  house  for  two  or 
three  months.  There  was  one  rare  instance  of 
a  man,  both  of  whose  testes  were  affected  with 
some  species  of  sarcoma,  to  a  degree  almost 
beyond  credit :  when  he  stood  up,  hi9  feet  were 
necessarily  separated  to  the  distance  of  three 
quarters  of  a  yard,  and  the  loaded  scrotum,  or 
rather  the  morbid  mass,  reached  to  within  six 
inches  of  the  ground :  there  was  no  appearance 
of  a  penis,  the  urine  being  discharged  from  u 
smalf;  orifice  about  the  middle  of  the  tumor, 
that  is  to  say,  about  a  foot  and  a  half  below 

92 


260        FRACTURES    AMD    DISLOCATIONS. 

the  os  pubis.  The  roan's  general  health  was 
not  bad ;  and  he  could  even  walk  by  the  help 
of  a  stick,  without  having  any  sling  or  support 
for  his  burthen :  it  was  specifically  lighter  than 
fresh  water,  and  considerably  lighter  than  salt 
water,  so  as  to  produce  much  inconvenience 
to'  him  when  he  bathed.  He  died  at  the  island 
of  Foa,  about  two  or  three  months  before  Mr. 
Mariner  left  Vavaoo. 

As  to  fractures,  and  dislocations  of  the  ex- 
tremities, it  may  be  said  that  there  is  scarcely 
any  native  but  what  understands  how  to  ma* 
nage  at  least  these  that  are  most  likely  to  bap- 
pen  ;  for  they  are  very  well  acquainted  with  the 
general  forms  of  the  bones,  and  articulations 
of  the  extremities.  They  use  splints  made  of  a 
certain  part  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree :  for  broken 
arms  they  use  slings  of  gnatoo.  In  fractures 
of  the  cranium  they  allow  nature  to  take  her 
course  without  interfering,  and  it  is  truly  asto- 
nishing what  injuries  of  this  kind  they  will 
bear  without  fatal  consequences:  there  was 
one  man  whose  skull  had  been  so  beaten  in, 
in  two  or  three  places,  by  the  blows  of  a  club, 
that  his  head  had  an  odd  mis-shapen  appear- 
ance, and  yet  this  man  had  very  good  health, 
except  when  he  happened  to  take  cava,  which 
produced  a  temporary  insanity.     Fractures  of 


blood-letting:  friction,  &c.      261 

the  clavicle  and  ribs  Mr.  Mariner  never  saw 
there. 

The  most  common  surgical  operation  among 
them  is  what  they  call  tafa,  which  is  topical 
blood-letting,  and  is  performed  by  making, 
with  a  shell,  incisions  in  the  skin  to  the  extent 
of  about  half  an  inch  in  various  parts  of  the 
body,  particularly  in  the  lumbar  region  and 
extremities,  for  the  relief  of  pains,  lassitude, 
&c ;  also  for  inflamed  tumours  they  never  fail 
to  promote  a  flow  of  blood  from  the  part ;  by 
the  same  means  they  open  abscesses,  and  press 
out  die  purulent  matter :  in  cases  of  hard  indo- 
lent tumours,  they  either  apply  ignited  tapa, 
or  hot  bread-fruit  repeatedly,  so  as  to  blister 
the  part,  and  ultimately  to  produce  a  purulent 
surface.  Ill-conditioned  ulcers,  particularly  in 
those  persons  whose  constitution  disposes  to 
such  things,  are  scarified  by  shells ;  those  that 
seem  disposed  to  heal  are  allowed  to  take  their 
counje  without  any  application. 

Id  cases  of  sprains,  the  affected  part  is  rubbed 
with  a  mixture  of  oil  and  water,  the  friction 
being  always  continued  in  one  direction,  that 
is  to  say,  from  the  smaller  towards  the  larger 
branches  of  the  vessels.  Friction,  with  the  dry 
hand,  is  also  often  used  in  similar  and  other 
for  the  purpose  of  relieving  pain. 


202  OPHTHALMIA. 

In  respect  to  inflammations  of  the  eyes,  which 
'  sometimes  rise  to  a  very  great  height,  attended 
frequently  with  a  considerable  purulent  dis- 
charge; they  frequently  have  recourse  to  sca- 
rification by  the  application  of  a  particular 
kind  of  grass,  the  minute  spicula  with  which 
it  is  replete  dividing  the  inflamed  vessels  as  it 
is  moved  upon  the  tunica  adnata.    To  assi&t  in 
reducing  ophthalmic  inflammations,  they  also 
drop  into  the  eye  an  acid  vegetable  juice,  and 
sometimes  another  of  a  bitter  quality ;  the  first 
is  called  vi,  the  latter  bawlo.     The  species  of 
ophthalmia  to  which  they  are  subject,  though 
sometimes  lingering,  is  stated  scarcely  ever  to 
have  produced  serious  consequences,  and  is 
not  considered  contagious.     Mr.  Mariner  nei- 
ther saw  nor  heard  but  of  one  man  who  had 
lost  his  sight  by  disease. 

In  cases  of  gunshot  wounds,  their  main  ob- 
ject is  to  lay  the  wound  open,  if  it  can  be  done 
with  safety  in  respect  to  the  larger  blood-ves- 
sels and  tendons,  not  only  for  the  extraction 
of  the  ball,  if  it  should  still  remain,  but  for  the 
purpose  of  converting  a  fistulous  into  an  open 
wound,  that  it  may  thereby  heal  sooner  and 
better :  if  they  have  to  cut  down  near  larger 
vessels,  they  use  bamboo  in  preference  to  the 
r*hell ;  the  same  near  tendons,  that  there  may 


AMPUTATION.  ^863 

be  less  chance  of  injuring  them.  They  always 
make  incisions  nearly  in  the  course  of  the 
muscles,  or,  at  least,  parallel  with  the  limb. 

The  amputation  of  a  limb  is  an  operation 
very  seldom  performed;  nevertheless  it  has 
T>een  done  in  at  least  twelve  individuals.  Mr. 
Mariner  seeing  one  day  a  man  without  an  arm, 
curiosity  led  him  to  enquire  how  it  happened, 
and  found  that  he  had  been  one  of  the  twelve 
principal  cooks  of  Toogoo  Ahoo,  the  tyrant  of 
Tonga,  and  had  submitted  to  the  amputation 
of  hit  left  arm,  under  the  circumstances  related 
Vol.  I.  p.  76.  The  mode  in  whieh  this  opera- 
tion was  performed  was  similar  to  that  of  too- 
toonimay  described  Vol.  II.  p.  222,  only  that  a 
large  heavy  axe  was  used  for  the  purpose. 
The  bleeding  was  not  so  profuse  as  might  be 
imagined,  owing,  no  doubt,  to  the  bluntness  of 
the  instrument  and  violence  of  the  blow.  This 
stump  appeared  to  Mr.  Mariner  to  be  a  very 
good  one ;  the  arm  was  taken  off  about  two 
inches  above  the  elbow.  Ten  were  stated  to 
have  done  very  well ;  of  the  remaining  two, 
one  died  of  excessive  haemorrhage,  and  the 
other  of  mortification.  There  was  also  a  man 
living  at  the  island  of  Vavaoo  who  had  lost  a 
leg  in  consequence  of  the  bite  of  a  shark,  which 
is  not  a  very  uncommon  accident ;  but  there 


264  CIRCUMCISION. 

was  something  unusual  in  this  man's  particular 
case :  his  leg  was  not  bitten  off,  but  the  flesh 
was  almost  completely  torn  away  from  about 
five  inches  below  the  knee  down  to  the  foot, 
leaving  the  tibia  and  fibula  greatly  exposed, 
and  the  foot  much  mangled :  he  was  one  of 
those  who  chose  to  perform  his  own  opera* 
tions ;  with  persevering  industry,  therefore,  he 
sawed  nearly  through  the  two  bones  with  a 
shell,  renewing  his  tedious  and  painful  task 
every  day  till  he  had  nearly  accomplished  it, 
and  then  completed  the  separation  by  a  sudden 
blow  with  a  stone  !     The  stump  never  healed. 
Mr.  Mariner  had  this  account  from  the  npn 
himself  and  many  others. 

Tefey  or  the  operation  of  circumcision,  is 
thus  performed :  a  narrow  slip  of  wood,  of  a 
convenient  size,  being  wrapped  round  with 
gnatoo,  is  introduced  under  the  preputium, 
along  the  back  of  which  a  longitudinal  inci- 
sion is  then  made  to  the  extent  of  about  half 
an  inch,  either  with  bamboo  or  shell  (the  latter 
is  preferred) ;  this  incision  is  carried  through 
the  outer  fold,  and  the  beginning  of  the  inner 
fold,  the  remainder  of  the  latter  being  after* 
wards  torn  open  with  the  fingers :  the  end  of 
the  penis  is  then  wrapped  up  in  the  leaf  of  a 
tree  called  gnatdi,  and  is  secured  with  a  band* 


TA    TATTO'W.  285 

age :  the  boy  is  not  allowed  to  bathe  for  three 
days :  the  leaf  is  renewed  once  or  twice  a  day. 
At  the  Fiji  islands  this  operation  is  performed 
by  amputating  a  portion  of  the  pneputium, 
according  to  the  Jewish  rite. 

The  operation  of  the  ta  tattow^  or  puncturing 
the  skin,  and  marking  it  with  certain  confi- 
gurations, though  it  is  not  properly  surgical,  yet 
we  mention  it  here,  as  it  is  very  apt  to  produce 
enlargements  of  the  inguinal  and  axillary 
glands.  The  instrument  used  for  the  purpose 
of  this  operation  somewhat  resembles  a  small 
tooth  comb :  they  have  several  kinds,  of  dif- 
ferent degrees  of  breadth,  from  six  up  to  fifty 
or  sixty  teeth :  they  are  made  of  the  bone  of 
the  wing  of  the  wild  duck.  Being  dipped  in 
a  mixture  of  soot  and  water,  the  outline  of  the 
tattofw  i*  first  marked  off  before  the  operator 
begins  to  puncture,  which  he  afterwards  does 
by  striking  in  the  points  of  the  instrument  with 
a  snail  stick  made  of  a  green  branch  of  the 
cocoa-nut  tree :  when  the  skin  begins  to  bleed, 
which  it  quickly  does,  the  operator  occasionally 
washes  off  the  blood  with  cold  water,  and  re* 
peatedly  goes  over  the  same  places :  as  this  is 
a  very  painful  process,  but  a  small  portion  of  it 
is  done  at  once,  giving  the  patient  (who  may 
justly  be  so  called)  intervals  of  three  or  four 


266  TA    TATTO'W. 

i 

days  rest,  so  that  it  is  frequently  two  months 
before  it  is  completely  finished.  The  parts 
tattowed  are  from  within  two  inches  of  the 
knees  up  to  about  three  inches  above  the  um- 
bilicus :  there  are  certain  patterns  or  forms  of 
the  tattow,  known  by  distinct  names,  and  the 
individual  may  choose  which  he  likes.  Ob 
their  brown  skins  the  tattow  has  a  black  ap- 
pearance, on  the  skin  of  an  European  a  fine 
blue  appearance.  This  operation  causes  that 
portion  of  the  skin  on  which  it  is  performed  to 
remain  permanently  thicker.  During  the  time 
that  it  is  performed,  but  sometimes  not  for  two 
or  three  months  afterwards,  swellings  of  the 
inguinal  glands  take  place,  and  which  almost 
always  suppurate  :  sometimes  they  are  opened 
with  a  shell  before  they  point,  which  is  consi- 
dered the  best  treatment ;  at  other  times  they 
are  allowed  to  take  their  course.  We  need  not 
wonder  at  the  absorbents  becoming  so  much 
affected  when  we  consider  the  extent  of  surface 
which  is  subjected  to  this  painful  operation; 
even  the  glans  penis  and  the  verge  of  the  anus 
do  not  escape.  It  is  considered  very  unmanly 
not  to  be  tattowed,  so  that  there  is  nobody  but 
what  submits  to  it  as  soon  as  he  is  grown  up. 
The  women  are  not  subjected  to  it,  though  a 
lew  of  them  choose  to  have  some  marks  of  it 


TA    TATTO'W.  267 

m  the  inside  of  their  fingers.  The  then  would 
hink  it  very  indecent  not  to  be  tattowed,  be- 
cause though  in  battle  they  wear  nothing  but 
he  ma  hi,  they  appear  by  this  means  to  be 
tressed,  without  having  the  incumbrance  of 
Nothing.  It  is  a  curious  circumstance,  that 
it  the  Fiji  islands,  the  men,  on  the  contrary, 
ire  not  tattowed,  but  the  women  are.  The 
operation  is  managed  by  their  own  sex,  though 
by  no  means  to  that  extent  to  which  it  is  per- 
formed on  the  Tonga  men,  contenting  them- 
selves chiefly  with  having  it  done  on  the  nates 
in  form  of  a  large  circular  patch,  though  some- 
times in  that  of  a  crescent ;  and  most  of  them 
have  it  also  done  on  the  labia  pudendi,  consist- 
ing of  one  line  of  dots  on  each  side,  just  within 
the  verge  of  the  external  labia. 

We  cannot  with  certainty  say  that  the  glan- 
dular ulcerations  above  alluded  to  are  always 
produced  by  the  tatt6w,  though  in  all  likeli- 
hood, when  it  has  recently  been  performed,  it 
is  the  exciting  cause ;  but  the  people  are  very 
subject  to  scrofulous  indurations,  glandular  en- 
largements, and  ulcers :  they  call  the  disease 
cahi ;  the  parts  affected  are  the  groins,  axillae, 
and  Heck ;  though  many  other  parts  of  the 
body  are  also  liable  to  ulcers,  which  they  call 
pdlki.  These  diseases  sometimes  run  on  to  such 


268  SYPHILIS. 

an  extent,  and  assume  such  appearaqces,  that 
we  believe  some  travellers  have  mistaken  them 
for  lues  venerea.  It  is  certain  that  some  indi- 
viduals affected  with  pa'lla  have  been  obliged 
to  submit  to  the  loss  of  a  nose,  the  cartilagi- 
nous and  softer  parts  of  that  organ  becoming 
completely  destroyed :  it  must  be  also  men- 
tioned at  the  same  time,  that  the  natives  are  sub- 
ject  to  gonorrheal  discharges,  attended  with 
ardor  urinre.  All  these  circumstances  appear 
very  equivocal :  but  Mr.  Mariner  has  every 
reason  to  believe  that  the  venereal  disease  did 
not  exist  under  any  form,  either  at  the  Hapai 
islands  or  Vavaoo,  during  the  time  that  he  was 
there ;  although,  to  his  certain  knowledge,  three 
of  the  survivors  of  the  Port  au  Prince's  crew 
had  gonorrhoeas  at  the  time  the  ship  was  taken, 
one  of  whom  had  brought  it  from  England,  and 
the  other  two  had  contracted  it  at  the  Sandwich 
islands.  Several  others  of  the  ship's  company 
had  also  venereal  affections :  but  they  fell  in  the 
genera]  massacre  on  board.  In  the  first  place  we 
must  observe,  in  respect  to  those  labouring*an- 
<der  the  diseases  called  cahi  and  palla,  that  the 
complaints  are  either  not  venereal,  or  that  the 
venereal  disease  subsides  in  them,  and  the  con- 
stitution qures  itself  spontaneously.  2dly,  That 
the  organs  of  generation  are  never  affected  pre- 


*ypiii  lis.  309 

viously  to  the  more  general  disease  coining  on. 
3dly,  That  these  diseases  are  not  known  to  be, 
or  believed  to  be  contracted  by  sexual  inter- 
course. 4thly,  That  though  these  diseases  in 
some  constitutions  produce  fatal  consequences, 
yet  very  frequently  the  appetite  and  strength, 
and  fulness  of  flesh,  remain  much  the  same 
as  if  no  disease  existed,  though  this  happens  in 
pdUa  more  than  in  cahi.  In  respect  to  the  go* 
norrhceas  to  which  they  are  subject,  they  are  for 
the  most  part  very  mild  in  their  symptoms,  and 
get  well  in  a  few  days ;  besides  which,  they  are 
not  capable  of  being  communicated  between 
the  sexes,  or  at  least  this  is  not  known  or  be- 
lieved to  be  the  case.  In  regard  to  the  three 
men  of  the  Port  au  Prince's  crew,  they  got  well 
without  exactly  knowing  when  or  how :  for  the 
consternation  occasioned  by  the  capture  of  the 
ship  and  the  destruction  of  their  countrymen, 
and  the  alarm  and  state  of  anxiety  in  which  they 
were  for  at  least  two  or  three  days,  had  produced 
such  a  change  in  the  constitution,  or  at  least  in 
the  disease,  that  it  had  actually  got  well  before 
they  were  aware  of  it.  Mr.  Mariner  enquired 
among  some  of  the  oldest  men  if  they  had  ever 
teen  or  heard  of  such  a  disease  as  syphilis  or  ve- 
nereal gonorrhoea  (describing  the  general  cha- 
racter of  it,  and  how  it  was  communicated),  and 


270  TO'fcA* 

learnt  that  a  woman,  a  native  of  one  of  the  Haf>al 
islands,  having  had  connexion  with  one  of  the 
men  belonging  to  a  French  ship,  became  on  fire, 
(as  they  expressed  it),  and  died  afterwards  in  ft 
very  bad  state :  and  this  was  all  that  he  learned 
respecting  what  might  reasonably  be  supposed 
to  be  true  syphilis.  Pdlla  frequently  gets  weft 
spontaneously:  but  the  remedies  commonly 
used  are  scarification  of  the  ulcered  surface, 
powder  of  turmeric  sprinkled  over  it,  and  some- 
times a  bitter  vegetable  juice  dropped  on  it 

They  have  among  them  another  kind  of  u!-> 
cerous  disease,  which  they  call  tona,  very  di- 
stinct from  the  two  last  described,  children 
being  for  the  most  part  subject  to  it ;  and  it  is 
one  of  those  diseases  which  only  occur  once 
during  a  person's  life.  The  patient  is  first  seized 
with  general  languor  and  debility,  attended 
with  loss  of  appetite :  in  a  few  days  an  eruption 
appears  in  different  parts  of  the  body,  but  par- 
ticularly in  the  corners  of  the  mouth,  axillae, 
groins,  parts  of  generation,  and  anus;  the  pus- 
tules at  first  are  exceedingly  small,  but  at  length 
increase  to  about  half  an  inch  in  diameter; 
fungous  excrescences  grow  out  of  them,  exhi- 
biting a  granulated  surface,  and  discharging  a 
viscous  fluid,  which  concretes  round  the  edges. 
These  pustules  come  ajso  upon  the  soles  of  the 


GNO'WOOA.  271 

feet,  and  increase  to  a  considerable  size,  giving 
very  great  pain  :  Mr.  Mariner  is  not  acquainted 
with  the  state  of  the  pulse,  &c.  The  disease  ge- 
nerally lasts  several  months,  and  sometimes  a 
couple  of  years.  From  the  symptoms  thus  far 
described,  there  is  not  much  doubt  about  its  re- 
semblance to  what  is  called  the  yaxvs .-  the  re- 
medies they  use  for  it  are  a  certain  bitter  juice 
dropped  into  the  ulcers,  and  rubbing  off  the  fun- 
gous excrescences  with  cocoa-nut  husk  dipped 
in  sea-water.  They  are  subject  also  to  a  pus- 
tulous eruption,  chiefly  confined  to  the  feet,  but 
which  sometimes  affects  the  hands :  it  usually 
appears  between  the  toes,  and  has  in  its  exter- 
nal character  a  strong  resemblance  to  psora, 
and  itches  very  much :  it  appears  in  the  form 
of  small  pustules  with  whitish  heads,  which, 
when  rubbed  off,  generally  discharge  a  watery 
fluid :  it  is  supposed  to  arise  from  walking  in 
clayey  places  without  the  opportunity  of  wash- 
ing the  feet  afterwards  :  it  is  not  thought  to  be 
contagious :  it  usually  lasts  about  four  or  five 
days.  The  name  they  give  it  is  gno'weoa.  They 
use  no  remedy. 

They  are  also  subject  to  a  disease  calledyboa  ; 
but  if  we  describe  the  symptoms  of  elephantia- 
sis, we  shall  have  related  with  tolerable  accuracy 
the  history  of  this  disorder.    Labillardiere  no- 


272  MOMo'cO.       SE'KE-FE'KE. 

tices  the  disease,  and  calls  it  elephantiasis. 
They  use  no  remedy  for  it. 

The  disease  called  momdco  usually  lasts  from 
four  to  seven  months :  in  the  latter  stages  it 
somewhat  resembles  phthisis.  It  comes  on 
with  occasional  chilliness,  loss  of  appetite,  low* 
ness  of  spirits,  wasting  of  the  flesh :  shortly  suc- 
ceed swellings  in  the  groin  and  axillce ;  general 
debility,  paleness  of  die  lips.  As  the  disease 
advances  the  patient  stoops  very  much  ;  expe- 
riences pains  in  the  chest,  and  across  the  shoul- 
ders :  sometimes,  but  not  often,  a  cough,  and 
expectoration  now  supervene,  the  debility  and 
emaciation  become  extreme,  and  death  relieves 
the  patient  from  his  sufferings :  these  are  all 
the  symptoms  which  Mr.  Mariner  can  speak  of 
with  certainty.  They  use  no  physical  remedies. 

Feke-jeke  appears  to  be  a  sort  of  mild  irre- 
gular intermittent :  the  paroxysm  usually  lasts 
from  two  to  eight  hours,  and  consists  of  a  cold 
and  a  hot  stage:  but  is  seldom  succeeded  by 
perspiration.  The  returns  of  the  paroxysm  are 
very  uncertain ;  sometimes  two,  at  other  times 
three,  four,  five  or  more  days  intervene.  The 
patient  is  sometimes  perfectly  well  for  a  month, 
and  then  his  disorder  returns. 

In  regard  to  diseases  properly  belonging  to 
females,  Mr.  Mariner  has  very  little  to  coramu- 


Anointing  with  turmeric  and  oil.  273 

hicate.  The  women  are  in  general  tolerably 
healthy  :  during  the  catamenia,  they  anoint 
themselves  all  over  with  a  mixture  of  oil  and 
turmeric,  to  avoid  catching  cold  ;  and  they  do 
the  same  after  lying  in,  on  which  occasions 
women  always  assist,  to  the  perfect  exclusion 
of  the  other  ctex  :  respecting  the  circumstances 
of  parturition,  and  the  separation  of  the  child, 
these  things  are  kept  a  profound  secret  from  the 
mfen.  The  men  also  occasionally  use  this  mix- 
ture of  turmeric  and  oil  in  time  of  war,  when 
the  weather  is  wet,  to  prevent  them  from  feeling 
chilly,  for  at  that  time  they  have  scarcely  any 
dress:  Mr.  Mariner  on  similar  occasions  has 
anointed  himself  all  over  with  it,  and  found  it  to 
have  the  desired  effect. 


fOL.  II. 


274  ARTS   A-VD    MANUrACTtfRES. 


GHAP.  XXII. 


General  observations  on  the  principal  arts  and  manufactures 
— Canoe-building — Inlaying  with  ivory — Preparing  graves 
—Constructing  stone  vaults — Net-making — -Fishing-— , 
House-building— -Striking  the  tattow — Carving  the 
handles  of  dubs — Shaving  with  shells — Cooking  food— 
— Enumeration  of  the  principal  made  dishes— Making 
ropes;  bows  and  arrows;  clubs  and  spears— Mannfac-* 
ture  of  gnatoo,  and  mode  of  printing  it — Making  mots, 
baskets,  combs,  thread,  &c. 

I  he  next  subject  in  order  is  the  state  of 
the  arts  and  manufactures.  We  have  already 
spoken,  as  far  as  respectability  is  concerned, 
of  those  which  constitute  distinct  professions, 
being  for  the  most  part  hereditary  *,  and  are 
all  exercised  by  men :  there  are  several  other 
arts,  however,  some  of  which  are  practised 
by  men,  others  by  women,  but  which  are 
not  considered  professional,  as  they  do  not 
constitute  the  business  of  a  person's  life  ;  and 

*  See  p.  93  and  96  of  this  volume. 


ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES.  275 

the  term  toqfoonga,  (artizan),  is  consequently 
not  applied  to  those  who  perform  them :  among 
these  are  principally  the  art  of  performing  sur- 
gical operations ;  erecting  fortifications  ;  mak- 
ing ropes,  bows  and  arrows,  clubs  and  spears, 
which  are  practised  by  men,  whilst  the  manu- 
facture of  gnatoo,  mats,  baskets,  thread,  combs, 
Sec.,  constitute  the  occasional  employment  of 
the  women,  even  of  those  of  rank.  We  shall 
five  an  account  of  each  of  the  principal  arts, 
beginning  with  those  that  are  strictly  profes- 
sional. 

Fo  vaca,  canoe-building.  As  it  would  be 
impossible  to  give  an  intelligible  and  accurate 
description  of  this  ingenious  and  useful  art, 
without  referring  to  well-executed  plates,  and 
as  this  has  been  already  so  ably  done  in 
Cook's  and  d'Entrecasteaux's  voyages,  we  pre- 
sume it  would  be  but  an  unnecessary  intrusion 
upon  the  attention  of  the  reader  to  attempt 
entering  into  such  a  description.  It  may  here 
be  noticed,  however,  that  the  Tonga  people 
have  obtained  a  considerable  share  of  informa- 
tion in  the  art  of  building  and  rigging  canoes, 
from  the  natives  of  the  Fiji  islands.  It  has 
already  been  observed,  that,  in  all  probability, 
the  communication  between  these  two  nations, 
at  the  distance  of  one  hundred  and  twenty 

t  2 


276  ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES. 

leagues,  began  on  the  part  of  the  Tonga  peo- 
ple, who  being  situated  to  windward,  it  is  very 
likely  that  one  or  more  of  their  canoes  were 
formerly  drifted  to  the  Fiji  islands  by  stress  of 
weather;  and  although  they  have  no  traditiou 
of  such  a  circumstance,  yet  this  one  considera- 
tion tends  strongly  to  corroborate  the  idea.  It 
is  highly  probable  that  neither  of  them  went 
out  on  a  voyage  of  discovery,  or  if  such  an 
opinion  be  admitted,  there  is  little  doubt  but 
that  the  people  of  Tonga  first  made  the  at- 
tempt, although  the  construction  and  rigging 
of  their  canoes  were  at  that  time  far  inferior. 
The  grounds  for  this  opinion  are,  first,  their 
situation  to  windward,  and  secondly,  their  su- 
perior enterprising  spirit,  in  affairs  of  naviga- 
tion, which  may  be  said  to  constitute  a  feature 
of  their  national  character.  Their  superiority 
in  this  respect  is  so  great,  that  no  native  of 
Fiji,  as  far  as  is  known,  ever  ventured  to  Tonga 
but  in  a  canoe  manned  with  Tonga  people,  nor 
ever  ventured  back  to  his  own  islands,  but  un- 
der the  same  guidance  and  protection.  If  we 
look  to  the  voyage  of  Cow  Mooala,  related  in 
Chap.  10,  we  cannot  but  entertain  a  very  fa- 
vourable idea  of  his  maritime  skill.  He  sailed 
from  the  Fiji  islands  for  those  of  Tonga>  but 
the  state  of  the  weather  prevented  him  making 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES.  277 

them ;  then  he  steered  for  the  Navigator's  is- 
lands ;  and  the  weather  being  still  unfavoura- 
ble, he  was  drifted  to  Fotoona,  where  his  ca- 
noe was  destroyed,  and  his  cargo  of  sandal 
wood  taken  from  him.  Notwithstanding  these 
misfortunes,  as  soon  as  another  large  canoe 
was  built,  he  again  ventured  to  sea,  and  re- 
turned to  the  Fiji  islands  to  lay  in  a  second 

cargo. 

The  Fiji  islanders  make  their  canoes  princi- 
pally of  a  hard  firm  wood,  called  fehi,  which 
is  not  liable  to  become  worm-eaten ;  and  as 
the  Tonga  islands  do  not  produce  this  wood, 
the  natives  are  not  able  to  build  canoes  so 
large  or  so  strong  as  those  of  their  instructors: 
all  their  large  canoes,  therefore,  are  either  pur- 
chased or  taken  by  force  from  the  natives  of 
Fiji.  The  natives  of  Tonga  take  the  greatest 
pains  with  their  canoes,  polishing  them  with 
pumice-stone,  and  paying  every  attention  that 
they  are  not  more  exposed  to  the  weather 
than  is  absolutely  necessary.  The  canoes  of 
the  Navigator's  islands  are  similar  to  those 
which  were  formerly  in  use  at  Tonga,  but  the 
natives  of  those  islands  never  venture  to  the 
latter  place  but  in  canoes  manned  with  Tonga 
people. 

Fono  lb,  carving  ornaments  out  of  whales 


278  ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES. 

teeth,  for  the  neck,  and  inlaying  clubs,  &c, 
with  the  same  material.  This  art,  as  far  as 
it  regards  ornaments  for  the  neck,  is  of  Fiji 
origin ;  but  inlaying  clubs,  wooden  pillows, 
&c.,  is  their  own  invention.  An  account  of 
the  ornaments  for  the  neck  has  already  been 
given,  (Vol.  I.  p.  311.)  They  inlay  their  clubs 
with  extraordinary  neatness,  considering  the 
rude  tool  they  employ,  which  is  generally  a 
togi  (or  small  adze),  made  out  of  an  European 
chisel,  a  piece  of  an  old  saw,  or  even  a  flat- 
tened nail,  to  which  a  handle  is  affixed.  They 
only  ornament  those  clubs  m  hich  are  consi- 
dered good  on  account  of  their  form,  or  the  qua- 
lity of  the  wood,  or  those  which  have  done 
much  execution  :  to  the  latter  it  used  to  be 
the  custom  to  give  a  proper  name.  Those 
that  make  these  ornaments  are  chiefly  canoe- 
builders. 

Toofoonga  taboo,  superintendants  of  fu- 
neral rites:  these,  as  the  name  indicates,  have 
the  regulation  of  every  thing  regarding  burials 
of  principal  chiefs :  they  are  generally  mata- 
booles,  and  are  always  consulted  respecting 
the  preparations  and  forms  of  ceremony  neces- 
sary on  such  occasions,  and  which  are  handed 
down  by  them  from  father  to  son. 

Toofoonga  ta  ma'cca,  or  makers  of  stone 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES.  279 

• 

vaults  for  the  burial  of  chiefs.  The  general 
form  of  these  vaults  has  been  already  de- 
scribed, (Vol.  I.  p.  153.)  The  stones  used  for 
this  purpose  pre  about  a  foot  in  thickness,  and 
are  cut  of  the  requisite  dimensions,  out  of  the 
stratum  found  on  the  beaches  of  some  of  the 
islands. 

Jia  cobe'nga,  net-making.  This  art  is  per- 
formed exactly  in  the  same  way  as  with  us :  the 
thread  is  made  of  the  inner  bark  of  a  tree, 
which  they  call  olongd :  large  nets,  however, 
are  made  of  plait,  formed  from  the  husk  of  the 
cocoa-nut. 

Toopoonoa  toty'ica,  fishermen.  All 
those  who  follow  this  profession  are  sailors: 
their  mode  of  catching  fish  is  chiefly  with  the 
net,  though  they  sometimes  make  use  of  the 
line  and  hook. 

Lamoa  falls,  house-building.  Every  man 
knows  how  to  build  a  house,  but  those  whose 
business  it  is  have  chiefly  to  erect  large  houses 
on  narly's,  consecrated  houses,  and  dwellings 
for  chiefs.  The  general  form  of  their  houses 
is  oblong,  rather  approaching  to  an  oval,  the 
two  ends  being  closed,  and  the  front  and  back 
open ;  the  sloping  thatched  roof  descending 
to  within  about  four  feet  of  the  ground,  which 
is  generally  supported  by  four  posts ;  the  larger 


2S0  ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES. 

houses  by  six,  or  sometimes  more.  The  chief 
art  in  building  a  house  consists  in  fastening 
the  beams,  &c.  strongly,  with  plait  of  different 
colours,  made  of  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut,  in 
such  a  way  as  to  look  very  ornamental ;  the  co- 
lours, which  are  black,  red,  and  yellow,  being 
tastefully  disposed.  The  thatch  of  the  superior 
houses  is  made  of  the  dried  leaves  of  the  sugar- 
cane, and  which  will  last  seven  or  ejght  years 
without  requiring  repair.  The  thatch  of  the 
common  houses  is  made  of  matting  formed  of 
the  leaves  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree,  and  which 
lasts  about  two  or  three  years ;  but  being  much 
easier  to  make  than  the  other,  it  is  more  fre- 
quently used.  The  flooring  is  thus  made :  the 
ground,  being  raised  about  a  foot,  is  beaten 
down  hard,  and  covered  with  leaves  of  the 
cocoa-nut  tree,  dried  grass,  or  leaves  of  the 
ifi  tree :  over  this  is  laid  a  bleached  matting, 
made  of  the  young  leaves  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree. 
The  house  consists,  as  it  were,  but  of  one 
apartment,  but  which  is  subdivided  occasion- 
ally by  screens  about  six  or  eight  feet  high. 
In  case  of  rain,  or  at  night,  if  the  weather  is 
cool,  they  let  down  a  sort  of  blind,  which  is 
attached  to  the  eaves  of  the  open  sides  of  the 
house :  these  blinds  are  made  of  long  mats, 
about  six  inches  in  width,  one  above  another, 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES.  281 

and  rather  overlapping,  and  are  so  contrived  as 
to  draw  up  by  means  of  strings,  like  our  Vene- 
tian blinds,  and  are  then  concealed  just  within 
the  eaves.  The  common  houses  have  not  these 
blinds,  but,  in  place  of  them,  a  few  mats  hung 
up  as  occasion  may  require. 

Ta  tattow,  striking  the  tattow.  This  opera- 
tion has  already  been  described  in  the  last 
chapter,  and  nothing  farther  is  here  to  be  said, 
except  that  Tooitonga  is  never  tattowed  at  the 
Tonga  islands  ;  for  it  is  not  considered  re- 
spectful to  put  so  high  a  chief  to  so  much  pain, 
and  if,  therefore,  he  wishes  to  undergo  this 
operation,  he  must  visit  Hamoa,  (the  Naviga- 
tor's islands),  for  that  purpose. 

Tokoi  aco'w,  club  carving  or  engraving. 
Formerly  the  whole  of  the  clubs  used  to  be  en- 
graved, but  now  this  ornamental  work  is  con- 
fined to  the  handle :  it  is  executed  with  a  great 
deal  of  neatness.  A  shark's  tooth  used  to  be 
the  instrument,  but  now  they  make  a  sort  of 
graver  out  of  a  nail  flattened,  sharpened,  and 
fixed  in  a  handle.  Instances  of  their  neatness 
in  this  sort  of  workmanship  may  be  seen  in 
our  museums,  and  in  the  engraved  representa- 
tions of  other  works. 

Fr  cava,  shaving  the  beard.  They  have  two 
{nodes  of  performing  this  operation,  viz.  with 


289  ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES. 

the  two  valves  of  a  certain  kind  of  shell,  which 
they  call  b?bi,  and  with  pumice-stone :  the  lafc* 
ter  is  used  by  the  party  himself  who  requires 
the  operation  ;  the  former  by  those  whose  pro- 
fession it  is  to  shave  others.  The  edge  of  one 
valve  being  pressed  horizontally  against  the 
chin  or  lip  by  the  left  hand,  that  portion  of  the 
beard  which  appears  upon  it  is  rubbed  or  filed 
off  by  the  rough  back  of  the  other  valve.  This 
operation  is  generally  performed  once  in  about 
eight  or  ten  days.  The  heads  of  infants  ait 
always  kept  closely  shaved ;  but  this  is  done 
with  a  shark's  tooth  by  the  mother. 

Fe  oomoo,  the  art  of  cooking.  If  refine- 
ment in  cookery  is  one  proof  of  the  civilization 
of  a  people,  the  natives  of  the  South  Seas  have 
something  to  boast  of  in  this  respect ;  at  least 
the  people  of  the  Touga  islands  can  invite  you 
to  partake  of  at  least  thirty  or  forty  different 
kinds  of  dishes,  consisting  in  or  prepared  from 
one  or  more  of  the  following  articles,  viz. 
pork,  turtle,  fowls  of  different  kinds,  fish, 
yams,  bread-fruit,  plantains,  bananas,  cocoa* 
nuts,  talo,  and  cabe,  (esculent  roots),  and  ma* 
hoa,  a  preparation  from  a  root  of  the  same 
name.  We  shall  give  a  short  account  of  the 
principal  preparations  of  food. 

Baked  pork.    The  animal  is  first  stunned  by 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES.  283 

i  blow  with  a  stick,  and  then  killed  by  repeated 
blows  on  both  sides  of  the  neck.  It  is  then 
rubbed  over  with  the  juicy  substance  of  the 
banana  tree,  thrown  for  a  few  minutes  on  the 
fire,  and,  when  warm,  scraped  with  muscle 
shells  or  knives,  and  then  washed.  It  is  next 
laid  on  its  back,  when  the  cook  cuts  open  the 
throat,  and  drawing  forth  the  wind-pipe  and 
gullet,  passes  a  skewer  behind  them,  and  ties 
a  string  tight  round  the  latter,  afterwards  to 
be  divided :  he  then  cuts  a  circular  piece  from 
the  belly,  from  four  to  six  inches  diameter,  and 
draws  forth  the  entrails #,  separating  the  at* 
tachments  either  by  force  or  by  the  use  of 
bamboo :  the  diaphragm  is  then  divided,  and 
the  gullet,  wind -pipe,  contents  of  the  chest, 
stomach  and  liver,  are  all  drawn  away  together 
along  with  the  bowels :  from  these  the  liver  is  se- 
parated to  be  baked  with  the  hog ;  the  remainder 
is  washed  and  cooked  over  hot  embers,  to  be 
shared  out  and  eaten  in  the  mean  while.  The 
whole  inside  of  the  hog  is  now  filled  up  with 
hot  stones,  each  wrapped  up  in  bread-fruit 

*  He  has  already  made  a  circular  incision  round  the  anus, 
and  tied  the  rectum  to  secure  the  contents,  lest  the  interior 
of  die  abdomen  should  get  dirty,  which  they  are  very  care- 
fid  to  avoid,  as  they  do  not  otherwise  wash  the  inside,  which 
they  say  would  spoil  it. 


284  ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES. 

leaves,  and  all  the  apertures  of  the  body  are 
closed  up  quickly,  also  with  leaves :  it  is  then 
laid  with  the  belly  downwards,  in  a  hole  in  the 
ground,  lined  with  hot  stones,  a  fire  having  been 
previously  made  there  for  that  purpose,  but  pre- 
vented, however,  from  touching  them,  by  small 
branches  of  the  bread-fruit  tree :  a  few  other 
branches  are  now  laid  across  the  back  of  the  pig, 
and  plenty  of  banana  leaves  strewed  or  rather 
heaped  over  the  whole,  upon  which,  again,  a 
mound  of  earth  is  raised,  so  that  no  steam  ap- 
parently escapes.  The  liver  is  put  by  the  side 
of  the  pig,  and  sometimes  yams.  By  these 
means,  a  good  sized  pig  may  be  very  well 
cooked  in  half  an  hour  :  a  large  hog  is  gene- 
rally about  half  done  in  this  way,  then  taken 
up,  cut  to  pieces,  and  each  piece  being  wrapped 
up  separately  in  leaves,  is  cooked  again  in  like 
manner.  Yams,  fowls,  bread-fruit,  and  every 
thing  that  is  baked,  is  dressed  after  this  man- 
ner ;  the  larger  yams  being  cut  into  smaller 
pieces.  They  perform  the  process  of  boiling 
in  earthen  pots,  of  the  manufacture  of  the 
Fiji  islands,  or  in  iron  vessels  procured  from 
ships,  or  in  banana  leaves  :  they  also  occasion- 
ally roast  food  upon  hot  embers.  As  to  their 
made  dishes,  the  following  is  a  list  of  the  prin* 
cipal. 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURES.  28$ 

Vy-hoo ;  fish  soup,  made  with  a  liquid  pre- 
paration of  cocoa-nut  and  water. 

Vy-oofi ;  boiled  yams  mashed  up  with  cocoa- 
nut  and  water. 

Vy-hopa;  ripe  bananas  cut  in  slices,  and 
boiled  with  cocoa-nut  and  water. 

Vy-chi ;  a  sort  of  jelly  made  of  rna,  and  the 
juice  of  the  chi  root. 

Vy-vi ;  a  sort  of  apple  grated,  mixed  with 
water  and  strained. 

Boboi ;  a  preparation  of  ma  and  chi\  form- 
ing a  stronger  jelly,  but  similar  to  rychi. 

Boi;  similar  to  the  above,  but  not  jellied. 

Fy'caky'  lolo  tootoo;  bread-fruit  beaten  up 
and  cut  into  small  pieces  :  it  is  eaten  with  a 
preparation  of  cocoa-nut,  and  the  juice  either 
of  the  chi  or  sugar-cane  :  it  very  much  resem- 
bles, in  appearance  and  taste,  batter  pudding, 
with  melted  butter  and  sugar. 

Fy'caky'  lo'lo  ma/tta ;  same  as  the  above, 
eaten  with  the  expressed  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

Loo-lolo'i  ;  talo  leaves  heated  or  stewed  with 
the  expressed  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

Loo-effenioo  ;  talo  leaves  heated  with  grated 
cocoa-nut  fermented. 

Loo  alo  he  booaca ;  talo  leaves  heated  with 
a  fat  piece  of  pork,  kept  till  it  is  high. 


286  ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES. 

Loo  tahi ;  talo  leaves  heated  with  a  small 
quantity  of  sea  water. 

Ma  me  ;  fermented  bread-fruit. 

Ma  hopa  ;  fermented  bananas. 

Ma  natoo  ;  fermented  bananas  well  kneaded 
and  baked. 

Ma  loloi ;  fermented  bananas  stewed  with 
expressed  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

Loloi  fekke ;  dried  cat-fish,  stewed  with  the 
expressed  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

Loloi ;  a  baked  pudding  made  of  mahoa 
root  and  the  expressed  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

Tawgootoo ;  a  baked  cake  made  of  mahoa 
root,  small  pieces  of  cocoa-nut,  and  the  ex- 
pressed juice  of  the  nut. 

Fucca  lili ;  the  powder  of  mahod  root 
sprinkled  into  boiling  water  till  the  whole  be- 
comes a  semi-jellied  mass. 

Ve  halo ;  a  preparation  of  the  substance  of 
young  cocoa-nuts,  with  their  milk  stewed  toge- 
ther. 

Awty' ;  the  inside  of  young  cocoa-nuts  agd 
the  juice  of  the  chi  root  mixed  with  the  milk. 

Thus  far  with  those  arts  that  are  strictly 
professional,  and  are  practised  by  men  ;  there 
are  some  others  not  professional,  which  are 
al*o  exercised  by  men,  viz.  surgical  operations, 


ARTS    AND    MANUFACTURE!.  287 

erecting  fortifications,  rope-making,  and  mak- 
ing bows  and  arrows,  clubs  and  spears :  the  first 
has  been  treated  of  in  Chap.  21,  and  for  the  se- 
cond, see  Vol.  I.  p.  97. 

Rope-making.  There  are  two  kinds  of  rope, 
one  made  of  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut,  which 
is  the  superior  sort,  and  the  other  of  the  inner 
bark  of  the  fow.  Although  these  ropes  are 
made  entirely  by  hand,  yet  even  those  of  con- 
siderable circumference  are  laid  with  the  great- 
est regularity :  they  are  very  elastic,  and  the 
strength  of  them  is  universally  known.  The 
husk  of  the  cocoa-nut  is  first  made  into  plait, 
which  is  then  twisted  into  strands,  and  of  these 
the  rope  is  made.  The  bark  of  thejow  is  not 
first  made  into  plait,  but  at  once  into  strands. 

Bows  and  arrows.  The  bows  are  gene- 
rally made  of  the  wood  of  the  mangrove,  though 
some  few  of  the  casuarina  wood  :  the  string  is 
made  of  the  inner  bark  of  a  tree  they  call 
gJonga\  and  is  exceedingly  strong.  The  ar- 
rows are  made  of  reed,  headed  with  casuarina 
wood  :  some  of  these  heads  have  three  or  four 
rows  of  barbs,  and,  to  make  them  more  formida- 
ble, are  tipped  with  the  bone  of  the  sting  ray. 
(See  Vol.  I.  p.  283.) 

Clubs  ahd  spears.  Though  the  making  of 
these  is  not  a  distinct  profession,  yet  tlipy  are 


288  ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES. 

most  commonly  made  by  the  toqfoongafo  vacaf 
as  being  expert  in  the  use  of  the  togi.  Their 
clubs  are  of  various  shapes ;  but  specimens  of 
them,  as  well  as  of  their  spears,  may  be  seen  in 
our  museums. 

The  next  arts  to  be  spoken  of  are .  those 
practised  by  females,  not  so  much  as  a  task  or 
labour,  for  women  of  rank  often  employ  them- 
selves this  way,  but  as  being  their  proper  oc- 
cupation.    The  most  important  of  these  is  the 

Fabrication  of  gnatoo.  This  substance 
is  somewhat  similar  to  cotton,  but  not  woven, 
being  rather  of  the  texture  of  paper:  it  is  pre-* 
pared  from  the  inner  bark  of  the  Chinese  paper 
mulberry  tree,  and  is  used  for  dress  and  other 
purposes. 

A  circular  incision  being  made  round  the  tree 
near  the  root,  with  a  shell  deep  enough  to  pene- 
trate the  bark,  the  tree  is  broken  off  at  that  part, 
which  its  slenderness  readily  admits  of:  when 
a  number  of  them  are  thus  laid  on  the  ground, 
they  are  left  in  the  sun  a  couple  of  days  to  be- 
come partially  dry,  so  that  the  inner  and  outer 
bark  may  be  stripped  off  together,  without  dan- 
ger of  leaving  any  of  the  fibres  behind.  The  bark 
is  then  soaked  in  water  for  a  day  and  night,  and 
scraped  carefully  with  shells  for  the  purpose  of 
removing  the  outer  bark,  or  epidermis,  which 


ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES.  28!) 

is  thrown  away.  The  inner  bark  is  then  rolled 
up  lengthwise,  and  soaked  in  water  for  another 
day ;  it  now  swells,  becomes  tougher,  and  more 
capable  of  being  beaten  out  into  a  firm  tex- 
ture: being  thus  far  prepared,  the  operation 
of  tootoo,  or  beating,  commences.  This  part 
of  the  work  is  performed  by  means  of  a  mallet 
a  foot  long,  and  two  inches  thick,  in  the  form 
of  a  parallelopipedon,  two  opposite  sides  being 
grooved  longitudinally  to  the  depth  and  breadth 
of  about  a  line,  with  intervals  of  a  quarter  of 
an  inch*  The  bark,  which  is  from  two  to  five 
feet  long,  and  one  to  three  inches  broad,  is 
then  laid  upon  a  beam  of  wood  about  six  feet 
long,  and  nine  inches  in  breadth  and  thickness, 
which  is  supported  about  an  inch  from  the 
ground  by  pieces  of  wood  at  each  end,  so  as  to 
allow  of  a  certain  degree  of  vibration.  Two 
or  three  women  generally  sit  at  the  same  beam ; 
each  places  her  bark  transversely  upon  the 
beam  immediately  before  her,  and  while  she 
beats  with  her  right  hand,  with  her  left  she 
moves  it  slowly  to  and  fro,  so  that  every  part 
becomes  beaten  alike ;  the  grooved  side  of  the 
maUet  is  chiefly  used  first,  and  the  smooth  side 
afterwards.  They  generally  beat  alternately : 
early  in  the  morning,  when  the  air  is  calm  and 
jtill,  the  beating  of  gnatoo  at  all  the  planta- 

TOL.  II.  v 


290  ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES. 

tions  about  bas  a  very  pleasing  effect;,  some 
sounds  being  near  at  hand,  and  others  almost 
lost  by  the  distance,  some  a  little  more  acute, 
others  more  grave,  and  all  with  remarkable 
regularity,  produce  a  musical  variety  that  it 
very  agreeable,  and  not  a  little  heightened  by 
the  singing  of  the  birds,  and  the  cheerful  in- 
fluence of  the  scene.  When  one  hand  is  fk- 
tigued,  the  mallet  is  dextrously  transferred  to 
the  other,  without  occasioning  the  smallest 
sensible  delay.  In  the  course  of  about  half  an 
hour  it  is  brought  to  a  sufficient  degree  of 
thinness,  being  so  much  spread  laterally  as  to 
be  now  nearly  square  when  unfolded ;  for  it 
must  be  observed,  that  they  double  it  several 
times  during  the  process,  by  which  means  it 
spreads  more  equally,  and  is  prevented  from 
breaking.  The  bark  thus  far  prepared  is  called 
jetagi)  and  is  mostly  put  aside  till  they  have  a 
sufficient  quantity  to  go  on  at  a  future  time 
with  the  second  part  of  the  operation,  which  is 
called  cocanga,  or  printing  with  coca.  When 
this  is  to  be  done,  a  number  employ  themselves 
in  gathering  the  berries  of  the  toe,  the  pulp  of 
which  serves  for  paste ;  but  the  mucilaginous 
substance  of  the  mahocf  root  is  sometimes  sub- 
stituted  for  it:  at  the  same  time  others  afe 
busy  scraping  off  the  soft  bark  of  (he  coca* 


ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES.  291 

tree  and  the  tooi-tooi  tree,  either  of  which  when 
wrung  out,  without  water,  yields  a  reddish 
brown  jnice,  to  be  used  as  a  die.  The  cobe'chi, 
or  stamp,  is  formed  of  the  dried  leaves  of  the 
pioongo  sewed  together  so  as  to  be  of  a  suf- 
ficient size,  and  afterwards  embroidered,  ac- 
cording to  various  devices,  with  the  wiry  fibre 
of  the  cocoa-nut  husk#;  they  are  generally 
abont  two  feet  long,  and  a  foot  and  a  half 
broad :  they  are  tied  on  to  the  convex  side  of 
half  cylinders  of  wood,  usually  about  six  or 
eight  feet  long,  to  admit  two  or  three  similar 
operations  to  go  on  at  the  same  time.  The 
stamp  being  thus  fixed,  with  the  embroidered 
aide  uppermost,  a  piece  of  the  prepared  bark  f  is 
laid  on  it,  and  smeared  over  with  a  folded  piece 
of  gnatoo  dipped  in  one  of  the  reddish  brown 
liquids  before  mentioned,  so  that  the  whole 
surface  of  the  prepared  bark  becomes  stained, 
but  particularly  those  parts  raised  by  the  de- 
sign in  the  stamp :  another  piece  of  gnatoo  is 
now  laid  on  it,  but  not  quite  so  broad,  which 
adheres  by  virtue  of  the  mucilaginous  quality 
in  the  die,  and  this,  in  like  manner,  is  smeared 

•  Making  these  cobtchi*  is  another  employment  of  the  wo* 

„  and  mostly  women  of  rank. 
f  The  edges  of  the  beaten  bark,  which  is  generally  hard, 
r,  and  ragged,  are  cut  off  straight. 

u2 


292  ARTS  JlND  manufactures. 

over ;  then  a  third  in  the  same  way  ;  and  thtf 
substance  is  now  three  layers  in  thickness: 
others  are  then  added  to  increase  it  in  length  and 
breadth,  by  pasting  the  edges  of  these  over  the 
first,  bu,t  not  so  as  there  shall  be  in  any  place 
more  than  three  folds,  which  is  easily  managed, 
as  the  margin  of  one  layer  falls  short  of  die 
margin  of  the  one  under  it.  During  the  whole 
process  each  layer  is  stamped  separately,  so 
that  the  pattern  may  be  said  to  exist  in  the 
very  substance  of  the  gnatoo ;  and  when  ow 
portion  is  thus  printed  to  the  size  of  the  cofccft, 
the  material  being  moved  farther  on,  the  next 
portion,  either  in  length  or  breadth,  becomes 
stamped,  the  pattern  beginning  close  to  where 
the  other  ended.  Thus  they  go  on  printing 
and  enlarging  it  to  about  six  feet  in  breadth, 
and  generally  about  forty  or  fifty  yards  in 
length.  It  is  then  carefully  folded  up  and 
baked  under  ground,  which  causes  the  die  to 
become  somewhat  darker,  and  more  firmly 
fixed  in  the  fibre ;  besides  which,  it  deprives 
it  of  a  peculiar  smoky  smell  which  belongs  to 
the  coca.  When  it  has  been  thus  exposed  to 
heat  for  a  few  hours,  it  is  spread  out  on  a  grass- 
plat,  or  on  the  sand  of  the  sea-shore,  and 
the  finishing  operation  of  toogi  hea  commences, 
or  staining  it  in  certain  places  with  the  juice 


ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES.  208 

of  the  hea,  which  constitutes  a  brilliant  red 
Tarnish ;  this  is  done  in  straight  lines  along 
those  places  where  the  edges  of  the  printed 
portions  join  each  other,  and  serves  to  conceal 
the  little  irregularities  there ;  also  in  sundry 
other  places,  in  the  form  of  round  spots,  about 
Hi  inch  and  a  quarter  in  diameter :  after  this 
die  gnatoo  is  exposed  one  night  to  the  dew, 
and  the  next  day  being  dried  in  the  sun,  it  is 
packed  up  in  bales  to  be  used  when  required . 
When  gnatoo  is  not  printed  or  stained,  it  is 
called  tapa. 

They  make  also  an  inferior  kind  of  gnatoo 
of  the  bark  of  young  bread-fruit  trees,  which, 
however,  is  coarse,  and  seldom  worn,  but  is 
chiefly  used  for  various  purposes  at  funerals. 

The  whole  of  these  operations  are  performed 
by  women  :  the  embroidering  of  the  cobechis, 
or  stamps,  is  always  done  by  women  of  rank. 

In  respect  to  mat  and  basket-making,  they 
have  mats  of  various  kinds,  made  of  strips  of 
leave*  or  bark  selected,  dried,  and  otherwise 
prepared ;  all  of  which,  except  one  or  two  of  a 
coarser  kind,  are  fabricated  by  women.  The 
following  are  the  names  and  qualities  of  them. 

Q**fi  gnqfij  mats  to  wear,  of  a  finer  quality, 
made  of  the  leaves  of  the  fa,  or  paoongo,  that 


294  ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES. 

have  been  transplanted,  in  order  to  give  them 
a  finer  and  softer  texture. 

Gie9  stronger  mats  made  of  the  bark  of  the 
fow  or  olongd,  worn  chiefly  by  people  in  canoes 
to  keep  out  the  wet,  as  the  water  does  not  da- 
mage them :  they  appear  as  if  they  were  made 
of  horse-hair.  Labillardiere  mentions  that  he 
saw  a  woman  of  rank  with  a  sort  of  mat  made 
of  the  white  hair  of  a  horse's  tail.  He  supposed 
that  it  must  have  been  procured  from  some 
horses  that  Cook  had  left  there. 

Fa'lla,  mats  to  sleep  on,  made  of  the  leaves 
of  the  paoongo.  These  are  double,  and  are  of 
various  sizes,  from  six  feet  by  three,  to  seventy 
or  eighty  feet  by  six  ;  to  lie  along  the  whole 
length  of  the  house. 

£#,  mats  for  sails,  made  of  the  leaves  of  the 
fa ;  they  are  very  strong  and  light. 

Tacapow,  mats  for  flooring  houses,  made  of 
the  young  leaves  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree. 

Tatto'w,  a  sort  of  matting,  plaited  in  a  veiy 
ornamental  way,  made  of  young  cocoa-nut 
leaves:  they  are  used  to  screen  the  aides  of 
houses  from  the  weather. 

CatOy  baskets :  these  are  of  various  construc- 
tions; sometimes  of  a  sort  of  matting  made 
with  the  leaves  of  the  fa,  paoongo,  b  acow,  &c ; 


ARTS   AND    MANUFACTURES.  206 

*t  other  times  of  the  fibrous  root  of  the  cocoa- 
nut  tree  interwoven  with  plait  made  of  the  husk 
of  the  nut,  and  have  rather  the  appearance  of 
wicker-work :  the  latter  are  sometimes  variously 
stained  and  ornamented  with  beads  or  shells 
worked  in.  The  larger  and  coarser  baskets 
are  generally  made  by  men,  to  hold  axes  and 
other  tools  in :  also  the  baskets  used  to  hold 
victuals,  made  of  the  leaves  of  the  cocoa-nut 
tree,  are  generally  made  by  men. 

Bawla,  mats  for  thatching  houses,  are  either 
made  by  men  or  women,  but  more  frequently 
by  the  former. 

Most  of  these  mats,  baskets,  &c.  are  made 
by  women  of  some  rank  as  an  amusing  as  well 
as  profitable  occupation,  exchanging  them  af- 
terwards for  other  things :  (see  p.  100  of  this 
volume).  Making  of  combs,  the  teeth  of  which 
consist  of  the  mid-rib  of  the  cocoa-nut  leaf,  is 
alsoanemployment  of  women  of  rank.  Making 
thread  is  an  occupation  of  females  of  the  lower 
order :  it  is  performed  by  twisting  the  separate 
parts  of  the  thread,  in  the  act  of  rolling  them 
with  the  palm  of  the  hand  along  the  thigh, 
and  by  a  return  of  the  hand,  twisting  them  to- 
gether the  contrary  way.  The  material  of  the 
thread  is  the  prepared  bark  of  the  olonga. 


290  GENERAL    HABITS    OP    SOCIETY. 


CHAP.  XXIII. 

General  habits  of  chiefs,  matabooles,  mooas,  women  and 
children — Quotation  from  Cook's  Voyages,  affording  a 
very  correct  view  of  their  public  festivals  and  rejoicings 
in  honour  of  illustrious  visitors,  and  describing  very  as- 
curately  their  boxing  and  wrestling  matches,  and  sundry 
dances :  the  whole  including  a  point  of  time  when  Cap- 
tain Cook  and  his  companions  were  to  have  been  assas- 
sinated by  the  natives — An  account  of  their  different 
dances  and  songs — Specimen  of  their  songs  in  rhyme — 
— Specimen  of  their  music — An  account  of  their  various 
sports  and  games — The  pastimes  of  a  day—-  Conclusion. 

Under  the  head  of  religion,  we  have  given  * 
cursory  view  of  the  general  habits  of  Tooi- 
t6nga,  Veachi',  and  the  priests :  we  shall  now 
set  forth,  in  a  similar  manner,  those  of  the  rest 
of  society,  as  they  regard  chiefs,  matabooles, 
mooas,  tooas,  women  and  children. 

Respecting  the  general  habits  of  chiefs,  ma- 
tabooles, and  mooas ;  the  higher  chiefs  seldom 
if  ever  associate  freely  together,  unless  at  the 
morning  cava  parties,  and  those  meetings  are 
to  be  considered,  in  a  great  measure,  as  visits 
of  custom  and  form.     The  matabooles  aud 


GENERAL    HABITS    OF   SOCIETY.         297 

hiooas  freely  associate  with  the  chiefs  to  whom 
they  belong ;  they  are  their  necessary  attend- 
ants at  cava  parties,  &c.  and  form  the  bulk  of 
their  fighting  men  and  followers :  they  not  only 
associate  freely  with  one  another,  but  also  with 
the  followers  of  other  high  chiefs,  and  even 
with  those  high  chiefs  themselves,  without  any 
reserve,  excepting  the  requisite  ceremonies  of 
respect  which  occasion  may  require. 

Every  high  or  governing  chief  has  his  cow 
nojb  (those  who  settle  or  dwell  with  him),  or, 
as  they  are  sometimes  called,  cow-mea  (ad- 
herents), who  consist  of  inferior  chiefs  and 
matabooles :  each  of  these  inferior  chiefs  has 
his  cvw-tongata,  or  body  of  lighting  men,  con- 
sisting chiefly  of  mooas :  the  matabooles  have 
no  cow-tangata.  The  retinue,  or  cow-nqfo,  of 
a  great  chief,  therefore,  consists  of  inferior 
bhiefe  (with  their  cow-tangatas)  and  mata- 
booles; and  the  retinue  or  cow-tangata  of  an 
inferior  chief  consists  of  mooas,  and  perhaps, 
also,  a  few  tooas,  who  have  been  found  brave 
fellows.  A  great  number  of  these  cow-nqfo, 
perhaps  about  eighty  or  ninety,  actually  dwell 
in  and  near  the  superior  chief's  fencing  (each 
fencing  having  many  houses),  whilst  there  are 
Insny  others  who  sleep,  and  pass  a  great  por- 
tion of  their  time  at  their  own  plantations ;  for 


GENERAL    HABITS    OF   SOCIETY. 

not  ouly  inferior  chiefs,  but  also  matabooles 
and  mooas  have  plantations  of  their  own :  the 
matabooles,  however,  excepting,  perhaps,  two 
or  three  inspectors  of  the  chief's  plantations, 
dwell  always  in  or  near  his  fencing,  as  their 
presence  is  so  often  required  by  him  for  the 
regulation  of  different  matters :  with  respect  to 
the  inferior  chiefs,  they  generally  live  at  their 
plantations ;  but  the  greater  part,  or,  at  least, 
about  half  of  the  mooas,  dwell  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  the  great  chief,  to  whom  they 
belong. 

We  shall  now  explain  how  these  different 
individuals  come  to  attach  themselves  to  a  par- 
ticular chief.  We  will  suppose  that  the  present 
king  or  any  other  great  chief  has  a  son  six  or 
seven  years  of  age,  his  playmates  are  the  sons 
of  the  inferior  chiefs,  matabooles,  and  mooas 
of  his  father's  establishment,  who  freely  asso- 
ciate with  him,  accompany  him  upon  excur- 
sions, and  imitate,  in  many  respects,  the  habits 
of  their  parents :  he  does  not,  however,  de- 
signedly play  the  chief,  and  conduct  himself 
with  arrogance  towards  them  ;  they  know  his 
superior  rank  without  being  reminded  of  it ;  and 
although  they  wrestle  and  box,  and  play  all  man- 
ner of  games  with  him,  they  never  fail  before 
they  eat  to  perform  the  ceremony  of  mo'e-mo'c% 


GENERAL    HABITS    OF    SOCIETY.         209. 

to  take  off  the  taboo  which  his  superior  rank 
has  imposed  upon  his  inferior  associates :  in 
some  of  his  country  excursions,  he,  perhaps, 
meets  with  two  or  three  of  the  sons  of  tooas, 
who  by  their  strength  and  agility  in  wrestling, 
or  bravery  in  boxing,  or  some  other  ostensible 
quality,  recommend  themselves  to  his  notice, 
ind  therefore  become  also  his  companions. 
Thus  they  grow  up  in  years  together,  and  as 
the  young  chief  approaches  towards  manhood, 
be  does  not  exact,  but  he  receives,  with  more 
or  less  affability,  the  respect  and  attention  which 
his  inferior  associates  readily  pay  him,  and 
who  now  may  be  termed  his  cow-tangata,  i.  e. 
associates,  supporters  and  defenders  of  his 
cause.  He  has  not  yet,  however,  any  mata- 
booles  in  his  train,  for  all  these  are  in  the  im- 
mediate service  of  the  old  chief,  and  the  son  of 
ft  mataboole  cannot  be  a  mataboole  till  his 
father  is  dead,  and  then  he  would  not  perform 
the  functions  of  a  mataboole,  unless  he  were 
grown  to  man's  estate,  and  even  then  he  would 
sot  be  in  the  service  of  the  younger  chief,  but 
tf  the  elder.  By  and  by  the  old  chief  dies,  and 
the  young  one  succeeds  to  bis  authority,  and 
all  the  matabooles  of  his  father  become  his 
uatabooles,  and  the  inferior  chiefs  and  mooas 
also  enter  his  service  in  addition  to  those  he. 


800  GENERAL    HABITS    OP   SOCIETV. 

had  before ;  and  though  several  of  them  upon 
this  change  may  choose  to  retire  to  their  plant- 
ations, they  are,  nevertheless,  in  his  service 
whenever  he  may  call  upon  them.  In  this 
order  of  things  it  happens,  generally,  that 
young  superior  chiefs  have,  for  the  most  part, 
old  matabooles,  and,  as  they  grow  older,  they 
begin  to  have  younger  matabooles,  who  suc- 
ceed their  deceased  fathers. 

In  respect  to  the  tooas,  they  may  be  subdi- 
vided into  three  ranks,  viz.  those  few  who  arc 
warriors,  and  are  part  of  the  cow-tangata  of 
chiefs ;  those  who  are  professed  cooks,  in  the 
service  of  chiefs  ;  and  those  who  till  the  ground. 
The  latter  live  entirely  in  the  country  with 
their  wives  and  families,  and  occupy  them- 
selves wholly  in  cultivating  the  land:  their 
wives  and  daughters  make  gnatoo,  mats,  &c, 
but  never  till  the  ground,  nor  do  any  hard 
work. 

The  natives  of  Fiji,  Hamoa,  and  the  Sand- 
wich islands,  who  were  resident  at  Tonga,  used 
to  say  that  it  was  not  a  good  practice  of  the 
people  of  the  latter  place  to  let  their  women 
lead  such  easy  lives  ;  the  men,  they  said,  had 
enough  to  do  in  matters  of  war,  &c.  and  the 
women  ought  therefore  to  be  made  to  work 
hard  and  till  the  ground :  no,  say  the  Tonga 


UBXERAL    HABITS    OF    SOCIETY.  301 

nen,  it  is  not  gndlefafi'ne  (consistent  with  the 

i 

feminine  character),  to  let  them  do  hard  work; 
fomen  ought  only  to  do  what  is  feminine: 
vho  loves  a  masculine  woman  ?  besides,  men 
ire  stronger,  and  therefore  it  is  but  proper  that 
hey  should  do  the  hard  labour.  It  seems  to 
be  a  peculiar  trait  in  the  character  of  the 
Tonga  people,  when  compared  with  that  of  the 
other  natives  of  the  South  Seas*,  and  with 
lavage  nations  in  general,  that  they  do  not 
consign  the  heaviest  cares  and  burdens  of  life 
to  the  charge  of  the  weaker  sex ;  but,  from  the 
most  generous  motives,  take  upon  themselves 
all  those  laborious  or  disagreeable  tasks  which 
they  think  inconsistent  with  the  weakness  and 
delicacy  of  the  softer  sex.  Thus  the  women 
of  Tonga,  knowing  how  little  their  own  sex  in 
other  islands  are  respected  by  the  men,  and 
how  much  better  they  themselves  are  treated 
by  their  countrymen,  and  feeling  at  the  same 
time,  from  this  and  other  causes,  a  patriotic 

•  If  there  is  any  exception  to  this  in  the  South  Seas,  it  i» 
with  the-  natives  of  Otaheite,  but  there  neither  men  nor 
wosmu  work  hard :  the  natives  of  the  latter  place  appear 
altogether  a  soft  effeminate  race,  strongly  addicted  to  volup- 
habits;  whilst  in  Tonga  the  men  are  of  a  more  noble 
manly  character,  and  the  women-  considerably  more 


902  GENERAL    HABITS    OF    SOCIETY. 

sentiment  joined  to  their  natural  reserve,  sel- 
dom associate  with  foreigners.  Thus  when 
the  Port  au  Prince  arrived  at  the  Sandwich 
islands,  the  ship  was  crowded  with  women 
ready  to  barter  their  personal  favours  for  any 
trinkets  they  could  obtain ;  but  how  different 
at  Lefooga !  where  only  one  woman  came  cm 
board,  and  she  was  one  of  the  lower  order, 
who  was  in  a  manner  obliged  to  come  by  order 
of  a  native,  to  whom  she  belonged  as  a  prisoner 
of  war,  and  who  had  been  requested  by  one  of 
the  officers  of  the  ship  to  send  a  female  on 
board.  Captain  Cook,  also,  strongly  notices 
the  reserve  and  modesty  of  the  females  of  these 
islands  ;  and  the  observations  of  this  accurate 
narrator  will  serve  to  corroborate  what  we  have 
been  stating.  We  have  already  noticed  the 
humane  character  of  the  Tonga  females,  and 
in  addition  we  beg  to  observe,  that  their  be- 
haviour as  daughters,  wives,  and  mothers,  is 
very  far  from  being  unworthy  of  imitation: 
children,  consequently,  are  taken  the  utmost 
care  of;  they  are  never  neglected  either  in  re- 
spect to  personal  cleanliness  or  diet :  as  they 
grow  older,  the  boys  are  made  to  exercise 
themselves  in  athletic  sports;  the  girls  are 
made  occasionally  to  attend  to  the  acquirement 
of  suitable  arts  and  manufactures,  and  of  a 


GENERAL    HABITS    OF   SOCIETY*.         303 

number  of  little  ornamental  accomplishments 
which  tend  to  render  them  agreeable  compa- 
nions, and  proper  objects  of  esteem  :  they  are 
taught  to  plait  various  pretty  and  fanciful  de- 
vices in  flowers,  &c.  which  they  present  to 
their  fathers,  brothers,  and  superior  chiefs, 
denoting  respect  for  those  who  fill  higher  cir- 
cles than  themselves.  There  is  still  one  ob- 
servation to  be  made  in  respect  to  females, 
and  which  is  not  of  small  importance,  since  it 
tends  to  prove  that  the  women  are  by  no  means 
slaves  to  the  men  ;  it  is,  that  the  female  chief* 
are  allowed  to  imitate  the  authority  of  the  men. 
by  having  their  cow-fafine9  as  the  male  chiefs 
have  their  cow-tangata:  their  cow-fqfine  con- 
sists of  the  wives  and  daughters  of  inferior 
chiefs  and  matabooles,  and  it  mav  be  easily 
conceived  that  such  an  association  tends  to 
support  their  rank  and  independence. 

The  subject  v&  are  now  treating  of  naturally 
leads  us  to  speak  of  the  more  domestic  habite 
and  manners  of  the  people ;  but  these  may  be 
considered  in  two  points  of  view ;  first,  on  the 
grand  and  extensive  scale,  such  as  they  are 
presented  to  foreigners,  by  way  of  shewing 
themselves  off  to  the  best  advantage ;  and  se- 
condly, in  their  more  familiar,  true,  and  unre- 
ached state.     In  respect  to  the  first,  it  would 


304   QUOTATION  FROM  COOK'S  VOYAGES. 

be  difficult  to  give  a  more  correct  and  descrip- 
tive account  than  has  already  been  given  in 
Cook's  Voyages,  written  principally  by  Mr. 
Anderson,  and  which  we  shall  beg  leave  to 
quote,  first,  out  of  respect  to  its  accuracy,  and 
secondly,  because  it  involves  a  most  interesting 
point  of  time,  that  in  which  the  natives  had 
come  to  the  resolution  of  assassinating  Cap- 
tain Cook  and  his  companions,  as  mentioned 
in  page  64  of  this  volume.  Those  places  which 
require  explanation  we  shall  elucidate  by  notes. 
The  date  of  the  following  circumstances  is  die 
18th  of  May,  1777. 

"  Next  morning  early,  Feenow  and  Omai, 
"  who  scarcely  ever  quitted  the  chief,  and  now 
*'  slept  on  shore,  came  on  board.  The  object 
u  of  their  visit  was  to  require  my  presence 
v'  upon  the  island.  After  some  time,  I  accom- 
"  panied  them  ;  and  upon  landing  was  con- 
"  ducted  to  the  same  place  where  I  had  been 
"  seated  the  day  before,  and  where  I  saw  a 
"  large  concourse  of  people  already  assembled. 
"  I  guessed  that  something  more  than  ordinary 
"  was  in  agitation,  but  could  not  tell  what,  nor 
"  could  Omai  inform  me. 

"  I  had  not  been  long  seated  before  near  a 
"  hundred  of  the  natives  appeared  in  sight, 
"  and  advanced  laden  with  yams,  bread-fruit, 


QUOTATION  FROM  COOk's  VOYAGES.   305 

c'  plantains,  cocoa-nuts,  and  sugar-canes.  They 
"  deposited  their  burdens  in  two  heaps  or  piles, 
"  upon  our  left,  being  the  side  they  came  from. 
"  Soon  after  arrived  a  number  of  others  from 
"  the  right,  bearing  the  same  kind  of  articles, 
"  which  were  collected  into  two  piles  on  that 
u  side.  To  these  were  tied  two  pigs  and  six 
14  fowls,  and  to  those  upon  the  left  six  pigs  and 
"  two  turtles.  Earoupa  seated  himself  before 
".the  several  articles  upon  the. left,  and  another 
■H  chief  before  those  upon  the  right,  they  being, 
".as  I  judged,  the  two  chiefs  who  had  collected 
"  them  by  order  of  Feenow,  who  .seemed  to  be 
"  as  implicitly  obeyed  here  as  he  had  been  at 
"  Anamooka :  and  in  consequence  of  his  com- 
44  manding  superiority  over  the  chiefs  of  Ha* 
"  paee,  bad  laid  this  tax  upon  them  for  the 
"  present  occasion. 

"  As  soon  as  this  munificent  collection  of 
"  provisions  was  laid  down  in  order,  and  dis~ 
"posed  to  the  best  advantage,  the  bearers  of 
"  it  joined  the  multitude,  who  formed  a  large 
44  circle  round  the  whole.  Presently  after,  a 
41  number  of  men .  entered  this  circle  or  area 
44  before .  us,  armed  with  clubs  made  of  the 
•4\  green  branches  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree.  These 
"paraded  about  for  a  few  minutes  and  then 
44  retired  ;   the  one  half  to  one  side  end  the 

VOL.  II.  X 


44 
44 


306   QUOTATION  FROM  COOk's  VOYAGES. 

"  other  half  to  the  other  side,  seating  them- 
"  selves  before  the  spectators.  Soon  after,  they 
successively  entered  the  lists,  and  entertained 
us  with  single  combats.  One  champion  ris- 
"  ing  up  and  stepping  forward  from  one  side, 
u  challenged  those  of  the  other  side,  by  ex- 
"  pressive  gestures  more  than  by  words,  to 
"  send  one  of  their  body  to  oppose  him.  If 
"  the  challenge,  was  accepted,  which  was  ge-a 
"  nerally  the  case,  the  two  combatants  put 
"  themselves  in  proper  attitudes,  and  then  be- 
"  gan  the  engagement,  which  continued  till 
"  one  or  other  owned  himself  conquered,  or  till 
"  their  weapons  were  broken.  As  soon  as  each 
"  combat  was  over,  the  victor  squatted  himself 
down  facing  the  chief,  then  rose  up  and  re- 
tired. At  the  same  time,  some  old  men  who 
"  seemed  to  sit  as  judges,  gave  their  plaudit  in 
"  a  few  words ;  and  the  multitude,  especially 
"  those  on  the  side  to  which  the  victor  be- 
"  longed,  celebrated  the  glory  which  he  had 
"  acquired,  in  two  or  three  huzzas. 

"  This  entertainment  was  now  and  then  sus- 
"  pended  for  a  few  minutes.  During  these  in* 
"  tervals  there  were  both  wrestling  and  boxing 
"  matches.  The  first  were  performed  in  the 
"  same  manner  as  at  Otaheite,  and  the  second 
"  differed  very  little  from  the  method  practised 


44 
44 


QUOTATION    FROM    COOk/s   VOYAGES.      307 

in  "England.  But  what  struck  us  with  most 
surprise  was,  to  see  a  couple  of  lusty  wenches 
step  forth  and  begin  boxing  without  the  least 
ceremony,  and  with  as  much  art  as  the  men. 
This  contest,  however,  did  not  last  above 
half  a  minute,  before  one  of  them  gave  it  up. 
The  conquering  heroine  received  the  same 
applause  from  the  spectators  which  they  be- 
stowed upon  the  successful  combatants  of 
die  other  sex.  We  expressed  some  dislike 
at  this  part  of  the  entertainment,  which,  how- 
ever, did  not  prevent  two  other  females  from 
entering  the  lists.  They  seemed  to  be  girls 
of  spirit,  and  would  certainly  have  given  each 
other  a  good  drubbing,  if  two  old  women 
had  not  interposed  to  part  them  #.  All  these 
combats  were  exhibited  in  the  midst  of,  at 
lent,  three  thousand  people,  and  were  con* 
ducted  with  the  greatest  good  humour  on 
all  sides ;  though  some  of  the  champions, 
women  as  well  as  men,  received  blows  which 
doubtless  they  must  have  felt*for  some  time 
after. 

"  As  soon  as  these  diversions  were  ended, 
the  chiefe  told  me  that  the  heaps  of  provi- 
sions on  our  right  hand  were  a  present  to 
Omni,  and  that  those  on  our  left  hand,  being 

•   •  The  women  are  always  soon  parted. 

x2 


11 


308      QUOTATION    PROM    COOk's    VOYAGES; 

44  about  two  thirds  of  the  whole  quantity,  Were 
"  given  to  me.  He  added,  that  I  might  take 
"  them  on  board  whenever  it  was  convenient, 
"  but  that  there  would  be  no  occasion  to  set 
"  any  of  our  people  as  guards  over  them,  as  1 
"  might  be  assured  that  not  a  single  cocoa-nut 
"  would  be  taken  away  by  the  natives.  So  it 
"  proved,  for.  I  left  every  thing  behind  and  re- 
"  turned  to  the  ship  to  dinner,  carrying  the 
"  chief  with  me,  and  when  the  provisions  were 
removed  on  board  in  the  afternoon,  not  A  din- 
gle article  was  missing.  There  was  as  much 
"  as  loaded  four  boats,  and  I  could  not  but  be 
"  struck  with  the  munificence  of  Feenow,  for 
"  this  present  far  exceeded  any  I  had  ever  re- 
"  ceived  from  any  of  the  sovereigns  of  the  va- 
"  rious  islands  I  had  visited  in  the  Pacific 
"  Ocean.  I  lost  no  time  in  convincing  my 
"  friend  that  I  was  not  insensible  of  his  libera- 
"  lity ;  for  before  he  quitted  my  ship  I  be- 
"  stowed  upon  him  such  of  our  commodities 
4C  as  I  guessed  were  most  valuable  in  bid  estt- 
"  mation.  And  the  return  I  made  was  so 
"  much  to  his  satisfaction,  that  as  soon  as  he 
"  got  on  shore,  he  left  me  still  indebted  to  him, 
"  by  sending  me  a  fresh  present,  consisting  of 
"  two  large  hogs,  a  considerable  quantity  of 
"  cloth,  and  some  yams/' 


^DOTATION  FROM  COOk's  VOYAGES.   30& 

Here  follows  an  imperfect  account  of  the 
dance  called  meS  too  bu'ggi,  but  which  we  shall 
now  omit,  and  quote  a  fuller  description  of  it 
afterwards.  Other  circumstances  not  neces- 
sary here  to  enumerate  are  also  omitted.  Af- 
ter describing  an  exhibition  of  fire-works,  the 
account  goes  on  thus : 

44  Our  water  and  sky  rockets,  in  particular, 
44  pleased  and  astonished  them  beyond  all  con- 
44  ception  ;  and  the  scale  was  now  turned  in 
u  our  favour.  This,  however,  seemed  only  to 
44  furnish  them  with  an  additional  motive  to 
44  proceed  to  fresh  exertions  of  their  very  sin- 
44  gular  dexterity,  and  our  fire- works  were  no 
44  sooner  ended  than  a  succession  of  dances 
u  which  Feenow  got  ready  for  our  entertain- 
44  ment  began.  As  a  prelude  to  them,  a  band 
44  of  music,  or  chorus  of  eighteen  men,  seated 
44  themselves  before  us,  in  the  centre  of  the 
44  circle  composed  by  the  numerous  spectators, 
44  the  area  of  which  was  to  be  the  scene  of  the 
44  exhibitions.  Four  or  five  of  this  band  had 
pieces  of  large  bamboo,  from  three  to  five  or 
fix  feet  long,  each  managed  by  one  man,  who 
heM.it  nearly  in  a  vertical  position,  the  upper 
u  end  open,  but  the  other  end  closed  by  one 
4*  of  the  joints.  With  this  close  end  the  per- 
44  formers  kept  constantly  striking  the  ground, 
"though  slowly,  thus  producing  different  notes 


t« 


*< 


310   QUOTATION  FROM  COOK's  VOYAGES. 

46  according  to  the  different  lengths  of  the  iu- 
44  struments,  but  all  of  them  of  the  hollow  or 
"  base  soil; ;  to  counteract  which  a  person  kept 
"  striking  quickly,  and  with  two  sticks,  a  piece 
"  of  the  same  substance,  split  and  laid  along 
44  the  ground,  and  by  that  means  furnishing 
"a  tone  as  acute  as  those  produced  by  the 
44  others  were  grave.  The  rest  of  the  band,  as 
44  well  as  those  who  performed  upon  the  bam* 
44  boos,  sung  a  slow  and  soft  air,  which  so 
44  much  tempered  the  harsher  notes  of  the 
44  above  instruments,  that  no  by-stander,  how- 
44  ever  accustomed  to  hear  the  moat  perfect 
44  and  varied  modulations  of  sweet  sounds, 
44  could  avoid  confessing  the  vast  power  and 
44  pleasing  effect  of  this  harmony. 

44  The  concert  having  continued  about  aquar- 
44  ter  of  an  hour,  twenty  women  entered  the 
44  circle.  Most  of  them  had  upon  their  heads 
44  garlands  of  the  crimson  flowers  of  the  China 
44  rose,  or  others ;  and  many  of  them  had  or- 
44  namented  their  persons  with  leaves  of  trees, 
44  cut  with  a  deal  of  nicety  about  the  edges. 
44  They  made  a  circle  round  the  chorus,  tarn- 
44  ing  their  faces  toward  it,  and  began  by  sing* 
44  ing  a  soft  air,  to  which  responses  were  made 
44  by  the  chorus  in  the  same  tone,  and  these 
44  were  repeated  alternately*  All  this  while  the 
4  women  accompanied  their  song  with  several 


QUOTATION  FROM  COOk's  VOYAGES.   311 

44  very  graceful  motions  of  their  hands  towards 
44  their  faces,  and  in  other  directions,  at  the 
44  same  time  making  constantly  a  step  forward, 
44  and  then  back  again  with  one  foot,  while  the 
44  other  was  fixed.  They  then  turned  their  faces 
"  to  the  assembly,  sung  some  time,  and  re- 
44  treated  slowly  in  a  body  to  that  part  of  the  cir- 
fcC  cle  which  was  opposite  the  hut  where  the  prin- 
"  cipal  spectators  sat.  After  this,  one  of  them 
"  advanced  from  each  side,  meeting  and  passing 
"  each  other  in  the  front,  and  continuing  their 
44  progress  round  till  they  came  to  the  rest :  on 
44  which  two  advanced  from  each  side,  two  of 
"  whom  passed  each  other  and  returned  as  the 
"  former ;  but  the  other  two  remained,  and  to 
"  these  came  one  from  each  side  by  intervals, 
"  till  the  whole  number  had  again  formed  a 
44  circle  about  the  chorus. 

44  Their  manner  of  dancing  was  now  changed 
44  to  a  quicker  measure,  in  which  they  made  a 
"  kind  of  half  turn  by  leaping,  and  clapped 
"  their  hands,  and  snapped  their  fingers,  re- 
"  peating  some  words  in  conjunction  with  the 
44  chorus.  Toward  the  end,  as  the  quickness 
"  of  the  music  increased,  their  gestures  and 
44  attitudes  were  varied  with  wonderful  vigour 
and  dexterity ;  and  some  of  their  motions, 
perhaps,  would  with  us  be  reckoned  rather 


312   QUOTATION  FROM  COOk's  VOYAGES. 

"  indecent.  Though  this  part  of  the  perform- 
"  ance,  most  probably,  was  not  meant  to  convey 
44  any  wanton  ideas :  but  merely  to  display  the 
Ci  astonishing  variety  of  their  movements  #. 

44  To  this  grand  female  ballet  succeeded  one 
44  performed  by  fifteen  men.  Some  of  them 
44  were  old ;  but  their  age  seemed  to  have  al- 
44  tered  little  of  their  agility  or  ardour  for  the 
44  dance.  They  were  disposed  in  a  sort  of  circle, 
44  divided  at  the  front,  with  their  faces  not 
44  turned  out  toward  the  assembly,  nor  inward  to 
44  the  chorus ;  but  one  half  of  the  circle  faced 
44  forward  as  they  had  advanced,  and  the  other 
44  half  in  a  contrary  direction.  They  sometimes 
44  sung  slowly  in  concert  with  the  chorus ;  and 
44  while  thus  employed  they  also  made  several 
44  very  fine  motions  with  their  hands,  but  differ- 
44  ent  from  those  made  by  the  women ;  at  the 
44  same  time  inclining  the  body  to  either  side 
44  alternately,  by  raising  one  leg  which  was 
44  stretched  outward,  and  resting  on  the  other  : 
44  the  arm  of  the  same  side  being  also  stretched 
44  fully  upward.  At  other  times  they  recited 
44  sentences  in  a  musical  tone,  which  were  an- 
44  swered  by  the  chorus ;  and  at  intervals  in- 
44  creased  the  measure  of  the  dance,  by  clapping 

*  Our  accurate  observer  is  perfectly  correct 


it 


QUOTATION    FROM    COOk's    VOYAGES.      313 

44  the  hands,  'and  quickening  the  motions  of 

44  the  feet,  which,  however,  were  never  varied. 

44  At  the  end,  the  rapidity  of  the  music  and  of 

44  the  dancing  increased  so  much,  that  it  was 

44  scarcely  possible  to  distinguish  the  different 

44  movements  ;  though  one  might  suppose  the 

44  actors  were  now  almost  tired,  as  their  per- 

44  formance  had  lasted  near  half  an  hour. 

"  After  a  considerable  interval,  another  act, 

as  we  may  call  it,  began.     Twelve  men  now 

advanced,  who  placed  themselves  in  double1 

rows,  fronting  each  other,  but  on  opposite 

"  sides  of  the  circle ;  and  on  one  side  a  man  was 

"  stationed,  who,  as  if  he  had  been  a  prompter, 

repeated  several  sentences,  to  which  the  twelve 

new  performers  and  the  chorus  replied.  They 

then  sung*  slowly,  and  afterwards  danced  and 

"  sang  more  quickly  for  about  a  quarter  of  an 

44  hour,  after  the  manner  of  the  dancers  whom 

44  they  had  succeeded. 

44  After  this,  we  had  a  dance  composed  of  the 
"men  who  attended  or  had  followed  Feenow. 
14  Tbey  formed  a  double  circle  (i.  e.  one  within 
44  another) ,  of  twenty-four  each ,  Tound  the  chorus, 
"  and  began  a  gentle  soothing  song,  with  cor- 
*4  Responding  motions  of  the  hands  and  head. 
44  This  lasted  a  considerable  time,  and  then 
44  changed  to  a  much  quicker  measure,  during 


u 

44 
44 


314      QUOTATION    FROM    COOIt'$   VOYAGES. 

Cfc  which  tljey  repeated  sentences  either  in  con- 
"  junction  with  the  chorus,  or  in  answer  to 
"  some  spoken  by  that  band.  They  then  re- 
"  treated  to  the  back  part  of  the  circle  as  the 
"  women  had  done,  and  again  advanced  on 
"  each  side  in  a  triple  row,  till  they  formed  a 
"  semicircle,  which  was  done  very  slowly,  by 
"  inclining  the  body  on  one  leg,  and  advancing 
"  the  other  a  little  way  as  they  put  it  down. 
"  They  accompanied  this  with  such  a  soft  air 
"  as  they  had  sung  at  the  beginning,  but  soon 
"  changed  it  to  repeat  sentences  in  a  harsher 
"  tone,  at  the  same  time  quickening  the  dance 
"  very  much,  till  they  finished  with  a  general 
"  shout  and  clap  of  the  hands.  The  same  was 
"  repeated  several  times ;  but  at  last  they  formed 
"  a  double  circle  as  at  the  beginning,  danced 
"  and  repeated  very  quickly,  and  finally  closed 
"  with  several  very  dexterous  transpositions  of 
"  the  two  circles. 

"  The  entertainments  of  this  memorablenight 
"  concluded  with  a  dance,  in  which  the  princi- 
pal people  present  exhibited.  It  resembled 
the  immediately  preceding  one  in  some  re* 
"  spects,  having  the  same  number  of  performers, 
who  began  nearly  in  the  same  way :  but 
their  ending  at  each  interval  was  different ; 
"  for  they  increased  their  motions  to  a  predi- 


ct 


QUOTATION  PROM  COOk's  VOYAGES.   315 

"  gious  quickness,  shaking  their  heads  from 
"  shoulder  to  shoulder,  with  such  force,  that  a 
44  spectator  unaccustomed  to  the  sight  would 
44  suppose  that  they  ran  a  risk  of  dislocating 
"  their  necks.  This  was  attended  with  a  smart 
44  clapping  of  the  hands,  and  a  kind  of  savage 
44  holla !  or  shriek,  not  unlike  what  is  some- 
44  times  practised  in  the  comic  dances  in  our 
"  European  theatres.  They  formed  the  triple 
44  semicircle  as  the  preceding  dancers  had  done, 
44  and  a  person  who  advanced  at  the  head 
4(  on  one  side  of  the  semicircle  began,  by  re- 
peating something  in  a  truly  musical  recita- 
tive, which  was  delivered  with  an  air  so  grace- 
ful, as  might  put  to  the  blush  our  most  ap- 
plauded performers.  He  was  answered  in 
the  same  manner  by  the  person  at  the  head 
44  of  the  opposite  party.  This  being  repeated 
several  times,  the  whole  body  on  one  side 
joined  in  the  responses  to  the  whole  corre- 
sponding body  on  the  opposite  side,  as  the 
44  semicircle  advanced  to  the  front ;  and  they 
finished  by  singing  and  dancing,  as  they  had 
begun. 

44  These  two  last  dances  were  performed  with 
44  so  much  spirit,  and  so  great  exactness,  that 
they  met  with  universal  approbation.    The 
native  spectators,  who,  po  doubt,  were  perfect 


64 
66 
44 
(4 
46 


64 
44 
46 


44 

44 


46 
4t 


316   QUOTATION  PROM  COOk's  VOYAGES. 

"  judges  whether  the  several  performances  were 
"  properly  executed,  could  not  withhold  their 
"  applauses  at  some  particular  parts  ;  and  even 
"  a  stranger  who  never  saw  the  diversion  before 
Xi  felt  similar  satisfaction  at  the  same  instant. 
"  For  though,  through  the  whole,  the  most 
"  strict  concert  was  observed,  some  of  the  ges- 
"  tures  were  so  expressive,  that  it  might  be  said 
"  they  spoke  the  language  that  accompanied 
"  them,  if  we  allow  that  there  is  any  connexion 
"  between  motion  and  sound.  At  the  same  time 
"  it  should  be  observed,  that  though  the  music 
"  of  the  chorus  and  that  of  the  dancers  corre- 
"  sponded,  constant  practice  in  these  favourite 
"  amusements  of  our  friends  seems  to  have  a 
''  great  share  in  effecting  the  exact  time  they 
"  keep  in  their  performances.  For  we  observed 
"  that  if  any  of  them  happened  accidentally  to 
"  be  interrupted,  they  never  found  the  smallest 
"  difficulty  in  recovering  the  proper  place  of 
"  the  dance  or  song :  and  their  perfect  disci- 
"  pline  was  in  no  instance  more  remarkable 
"  than  in  the  sudden  transitions  they  so  dex- 
"  terously  made  from  the  ruder  exertions  and 
"  harsh  sounds,  to  the  softest  airs  and  gentlest 
"  movements. 

"  About  eleven  o'clock  (in  the  morning), 
"  they  began  to  exhibit  various  dances,  which 


it 
ct 

C( 

M 
c< 

(C 


QUOTATION    FROM    COOk's   VOYAGES.      317 

"  thev  called  mat.  The  music  consisted  at  first 
44  of  seventy  men  as  a  chorus,  who  sat  down, 
44  and  amidst  them  were  placed  three  instru- 
"  ments,  which  we  called  drums,  though  very 
44  unlike  them.  They  are  large  cylindrical  pieces 
u  of  wood  or  trunks  of  trees,' from  three  to  four 
feet  long,  some  twice  as  thick  as  an  ordinary 
sized* man,  and  some  smaller,  hollowed  en- 
tirely out,  but  close  at  both  ends,  and  open 
only  by  a  chink  about  three  inches  broad,  run- 
ning almost  the  whole  length  of  the  drnms  : 
by  which  opening  the  rest  of  the  wood  is  cer- 
44  tainly  hollowed,  though  the  operation  must 
44  be  difficult.  This  instrument  is  called  naffa ; 
44  and,  with  the  chink  turned  towards  them, 
44  they  sit  and  beat  Strongly  upon  it  with  two 
44  cylindrical  pieces  of  hard  wood,  about  afoot 
44  long,  and  as  thick  as  the  wrist:  by  which 
means  they  produce  a  rude,  though  loud  and 
power  Ail  sound.  They  vary  the  strength  and 
rate  of  their  beating  at  different  parts  of  the 
dance,  and  also  change  their  tones,  by  beating 
44  in  the  middle,  or  near  the  end  of  their  drum. 
44  The  first  dance*  consisted  of  four  ranks,  of 
twenty-four  men  each,  holding  in  their  hands 
a  little  thin,  light,  wooden  instrument,  above 
"  two  feet  long,  and  in  shape  not  unlike  a  small 

*  This  is  the  dance  called  m&  too  bvggi. 


U 
4i 


it 


318      QUOTATION    PROM    COOk's    VOYAGES. 


ti 


oblong  paddle:  with  these,  which  are  called 
pagge,  they  make  a  great  many  different  mo- 
"  tions,  such  as  pointing  them  toward  the 

» 

"  ground  on  one  side,  at  the  same  time  inclin- 
"  ing  their  bodies  that  way,  from  which  they 
"  were  shifted  to  the  opposite  side,  in  the  same 
"  manner ;  then  passing  them  quickly  from  one 
"  hand  to  the  other,  and  twirling  them  about 
"  very  dextrously ;  with  a  variety  of  other 
"  manoeuvres,  all  which  were  accompanied  by 
"  corresponding  attitudes  of  the  body.  Their 
"  motions  were  at  first  slow,  but  quickened  as 
"  the  drums  beat  faster ;  and  they  recited  sen- 
"  tences  in  a  musical  tone  the  whole  time,  which 
"  were  answered  by  the  chorus ;  but  at  the  end 
"  of  a  short  space  they  all*  joined,  and  finished 
"  with  a  shout. 

After  ceasing  about  two  or  three  minutes, 
they  began  as  before,  and  continued  with 
"  short  intervals  above  a  quarter  of  an  hour, 
"  when  the  rear  rank  dividing,  shifted  them- 
"  selves  very  slowly  round  each  end,  and  meet- 
"  ing  in  the  front,  formed  the  first  rank :  the 
"  whole  number  continuing  to  recite  the  sen- 
"  tences  as  before.  The  other  ranks  did  the 
"  same  successively,  till  that  which  at  first 
"  was  the  front  became  the  rear ;  and  the  evo- 
"  lution  continued  in  the  same  manner  till  the 


QUOTATION  FROM  COOK**  VOYAGES.   319 

"  last  rank  regained  its  first  situation.  They 
;< then  began  a  much  quicker  dance  (though 
"  slow  at  first),  and  sung  for  about  ten  minute?, 
"  when  the  whole  body  divided  into  two  parts, 
"  retreated  a  little,  and  then  approached,  form- 
"  ing  a  sort  of  circular  figure,  which  finished 
'  the  dance ;  the  drums  being  removed,  and 
"  the  chorus,  going  off  the  field  at  the  same 
"  time. 

44  The  second  dance  had  only  two  drums, 
"  with  forty  men  for  a  chorus ;  and  the  dancers, 
14  or  rather  actors,  consisted  of  two  ranks,  the 
"  foremost  having  seventeen,  and  the  other 
fifteen  persons.  Feenow  was  at  their  head, 
or  in  the  middle  of  the  front  rank,  which  is 
"  the  principal  place  in  these  cases.  They 
'-  danced  and  recited  sentences,  with  some  very 
44  short  intervals,  for  about  half  an  hour,  some- 
44  times  quickly,  sometimes  more  slowly,  but 
44  with  such  a  degree  of  exactness  as  if  all  the 
motions  were  made  by  one  man,  which  did 
them  great  credit.  Near  the  close,  the  back 
"  rank  divided,  came  round,  and  took  the  place 
44  of  the  front,  which  again  resumed  its  situa- 
44  turn,  as  in  the  first  dance ;  and  when  they 
"  finished,  the  drums  and  chorus,  as  before, 
44  watt  off. 
"  Three  drums  (which  at  least  took  two,  and 


It 


41 


'20      QUOTATION  FROM  COOK's  VOYAGES. 

"  sometimes  three  men  to  carry  them),  were 
"  now  brought  in  ;  and  seventy  men  sat  down, 
"  as  a  chorus  to  the  third  dance.     This  con- 
"  sisted  of  two  ranks,  of  sixteen  persons  each, 
"  with  young  Toobou  at  their  head,  who  was 
"  richly  ornamented  with   a  sort  of  garment 
"  covered  with  red  feathers.     These  danced, 
"  sung,  and  twirled  the  paggi  as  before ;  but 
"  in  general  much  quicker,  and  performed  so 
"  well,  that  they  had  the  constant  applauses  of 
"  the  spectators.     A  motion  that  met  with  par- 
"  ticular  approbation  was  one  in  which  they 
"  held  the  face  aside  as  if  ashamed,  and  the 
"  Pagg*  before  it.     The  back  rank  closed  be- 
"  fore  the  front  one,  and  that  again  resumed 
"  its  place,  as  in  the  two  former  dances ;  but 
"  then  they  began  again,  formed  a  triple  row, 
"  divided,  retreated  to  each  end  of  the  area, 
"  and  left  the  greatest  part  of  the  ground  clear. 
"  At  this  instant  two  men  entered  very  hastily, 
"  and  exercised  the  clubs  which  they  use  in 
"  battle.     They  did  this  by  first  twirling  them 
"  in  their  hands,  and  making  circular  strokes 
"  before  them  with  great  force  and  quickness ; 
"  but  so  skilfully  managed,  that,  though  stand* 
"  ing  quite  close,  they  never  interfered.    They 
"  shifted  their  clubs  from  hand  to  hand  with 
"  great  dexterity ;  and,  after  continuing  a  little 


it 


QUOTATION   FROM    COOk's   VOYAGES.      321 

"  timet  kneeled,  and  made  different  motions, 
tossing  the  clubs  up  in  the  air,  which  they 
caught  as  they  fell ;  and  then  went  off  as 
hastily  as  they  entered.  Their  heads  were 
"covered  with  pieces  of  white  cloth,  tied  at 
"  the  crown  (almost  like  a  night-cap)  with  a 
"  wreath  of  foliage  round  the  forehead  ;  but 
u  they  had  only  very  small  pieces  of  white 
"  cloth  tied  about  the  waists ;  probably  that 
they  might  be  cool,  and  free  from  every  in- 
cumbrance or  weight*.  A  person  with  & 
spear,  dressed  like  the  former,  then  came  in, 
"  and  in  the  same  hasty  manner ;  looking 
"  about  eagerly,  as  if  in  search  of  somebody  to 
"  throw  it  at.  He  then  ran  hastily  to  one  side 
"  of  the  crowd  in  the  front,  and  put  himself  in 
"  a  threatening  attitude,  as  if  he  meant  to  strike 
"  with  his  spear  at  one  of  them,  bending  the 
knee  a  little,  and  trembling,  as  it  were,  with 
rage.  He  continued  in  this  manner  only  a 
"  few  seconds,  when  he  moved  to  the  other 

•  This  exhibition  with  the  clubs,  as  well  as  the  following 
one  with  a  spear,  are  practices  of  Hamoa  (the  Naviga- 
tor^ Islands),  at  which  the  natives  of  that  place  are  said 
to  be  very  expert :  they  are  occasionally  adopted  at  Tonga 
by  wif  of  interludes,  but  they  do  not  form  an  essential  pari 
ef  dse  above  performance :  the  particular  dress  which  these 
ueisVciueia  had  on,  was  the  war  dress  of  the  Hamoa  Islands. 
VOL.  II.  Y 


it 

41 


$28      QUOTATION   FROM   CfOO&'s   VOtAOBf^ 

"  side,  and  having  stood  ia  tbe  same  posturq 
•*  there,  for  the  same  short  time,  retreated  from 
"  the  ground  as  fast  as  when  he  made  his  ap» 
"  pearance.  The  dancers,  who  had  divided 
u  into  two  parties,  kept  repeating  something 
"  slowly;  and  now  advanced,  and  joined  again, 
"  ending  with  universal  applause.  It  should 
44  seem  that  this  dance  was  considered  as  one 
"  of  their  capital  performances,  if  we  might 
"judge  from  some  of  the  principal  people 
"  being  engaged  in  it;  for  one  of  their  drums 
"  was  beat  by  Futtafaihe,  the  brother  of  Poo* 
"  lubo,  another  by  Feenow,  and  the  third, 
"  which  did  not  belong  to  the  chorus,  by  Ma- 
"  reewagee  himself,  at  the  entrance  of  his  but*. 
"  It  is  with  regret  I  mention  that  we  could 
"  not  understand  wbjtt  was  spoken,  while  we 
"  were  able  to  see  what  was  acted  ia  these 
"  amusements.  This,  doubtless,  would  have 
"  afforded  us  much  information  as  to  the  ge- 
"  nius  and  customs  of  these  people.    It  was 

•  It  must  here  be  noticed  that  it  is  a  difficult  matter  to 
beat  these  drums  properly,  consequently  it  is  considered  a 
great  accomplishment,  and  never  practised  by  the  low 
orders :  it  must  also  be  observed,  that  whenever  among  the 
dancers  there  are  principal  chiefs,  as,  no  doubt,  there  wait 
on  the  above  occasion ;  the  drums  are  always  beast*  bf 
persons  of  the  first  consequent. 


4C 

u 


Quotation  from  cook's  voyages.  323 

C4  observable,  that  though  the  spectators  always 
"  approved  of  the  various  motions  when  well 
44  made,  a  great  share  of  the  pleasure  they  re- 
44  ceived  seemed  to  arise  from  the  sentimental 
•*  part,  or  what  the  performers  delivered  in  their 
44  speeches  #.  However,  the  mere  acting  part,* 
44  independently  of  the  sentences  repeated,  was 
44  well  worth  our  notice,  both  with  respect  to 
44  the  extensive  plan  in  which  it  was  executed, 
44  and  to  the  various  motions,  as  well  as  the 
exact  unity  with  which  they  were  performed.  , 
Neither  pencil  nor  pen  can  describe  the  nu- 
merous actions  and  motions,  the  singularity  of 
44  which  was  not  greater  than  was  the  ease  and 
44  gracefulness  with  which  they  were  performed. 
44  In  expectation  of  this  evening  show,  the 
44  circle  of  natives  about  our  tent  being  pretty 
44  large,  they  engaged  in  wrestling  and  boxing : 
44  the  first  of  which  exercises  they  caWfanga  too  a, 

*  AD  the  dances  where  the  paddle  is  used  are  borrowed 
from  the  natives  of  the  islands  of  Neuha  (Cocos  island,  and 
Traitor's  island),  situated  between  Vavaoo  and  Hamoa  (the 
Navigator's  islands).  The  accompanying  songs  are  in  the 
laagoage  of  Hamoa,  whence  the  people  of  Neuha  have 
borrowed  thtm,  and  both  dances  and  songs  have  been  thus 
adopted  at  Tonga ;  but  as  very  few  of  the  Tonga  people 
wHhnitand  the  Hamoa  language,  it  is  presumed  that  the 
asfssuseof  tta  people  on  the  above  occasion  was  not  excited 
Yf  tb»  MfSownt!  bit  by  the  mafic  and  genettri  performance. 

y2 


324      QUOTATION    FROM   COOk's    VOYAGES. 


u 


cc 


u 


and  the  second  Jbohoo.  When  any  of  them 
chooses  to  wrestle,  he  gets  up  from  one  side 
of  the  ring,  and  crosses  the  ground  in  a 
sort  of  measured  pace,  clapping  smartly  on 
the  elbow  joint  of  one  arm,  which  is  bent,  and 
produces  a  hollow  sound;  that  is  reckoned  the 
challenge.  If  no  person  comes  out  from  the 
opposite  side  to  engage  him,  he  returns  in 
the  same  manner,  and  sits  down ;  but  some- 
times stands  clapping  in  the  midst  of  the 
ground,  to  provoke  some  one  to  come  out.  If 
an  opponent  appear,  they  come  together  with 
marks  of  the  greatest  good  nature,  generally 
smiling,  and  taking  time  to  adjust  the  piece  of 
cloth  which  is  fastened  round  the  waist.  They 
then  lay  hold  of  each  other  by  this  girdle,  with 
a  hand  on  each  side,  and  he  who  succeeds  in 
drawing  his  antagonist  to  him,  immediately 
tries  to  lift  him  upon  his  breast,  and  throw  him 
upon  his  back  ;  and  if  he  be  able  to  turn  round 
with  him  two  or  three  times  in  that  position, 
before  he  throws  him,  his  dexterity  never  foils 
of  procuring  plaudits  from  the  spectators.  If 
they  be  more  equally  matched,  they  close 
soon,  and  endeavour  to  throw  each  other  by 
entwining  their  legs,  or  lifting  each  other 
from  the  ground;  in  which  struggles  they 
shew  a  prodigi  ous  exertion  of  strength,  ever? 


cc 

4C 


44 
4( 


QUOTATION    FROM    COOK'S   VOYAGES.      325 

u  mugcle,  as  it  were,  being  ready  to  burst  with 
straining.  When  one  is  thrown,  he  immedi- 
ately quits  the  field :  but  the  victor  sits  down 
44  for  a  few  seconds,  then  gets  up,  and  goes  to 
"  the  side  he  came  from,  who  proclaim  the  vic- 
4C  tory  aloud,  in  a  sentence  delivered  slowly, 
"  and  in  a  musical  cadence.  After  sitting  a 
"  short  space,  he  rises  again  and  challenges, 
"  when  sometimes  several  antagonists  make 
their  appearance  ;  but  he  has  the  privilege  of 
choosing  which  of  them  he  pleases,  to  wrestle 
44  with ;  and  has  likewise  the  preference  of 
"  challenging  again,  if  he  should  throw  his 
"  adversary,  until  he  himself  be  vanquished ; 
"  and  then  the  opposite  side  sing  the  song  of 
victory  in  favour  of  their  champion.  It  also 
often  happens,  that  five  or  six  rise  from  each 
side,  and  challenge  together :  in  which  case 
44  it  is  common  to  see  three  or  four  couple  en- 
"  gaged  on  the  field  at  once.  But  it  is  astonish - 
44  ing  to  see  what  temper  they  preserve  in  this 
44  exercise :  forwe  observed  no  instances  of  their 
"  leaving  the  spot  with  the  least  displeasure  in 
"  their  countenances.  When  they  find  that  they 
44  are  so  equally  matched  as  not  to  be  likely  to 
"  throw  each  other,  they  leave  off  by  mutual 
"  consent.  And  if  the  fall  of  one  is  not  fair, 
Ci  or  if  it  does  not  appear  very  clearly  who  has 


4C 

44 
44 


r 


90S   QUOTATION  FROM  GOOk's  VOYAGES. 

"  had  the  advantage,  both  sides  sing  the  victory/ 
"  and  then  they  engage  again ;  but  no  person 
"  who  has  been  vanquished  can  engage  with 
(<  his  conqueror  a  second  time*. 

"  The  boxers  advance  sideways,  changing 
44  the  side  at  every  pace,  with  one  arm  stretchfd 
"  fully  out  before,  the  other  behind ;  and  hold- 
"  ing  a  piece  of  cord  in  one  hand,  which  they 
"  wrap  firmly  about  it  when  they  find  an  an- 
"  tagonist,  or  else  have  done  so  before  they 
"  enter.  This  I  imagine  they  do  to  prevent  a 
"  dislocation  of  the  hand  or  fingers.  Their 
"  blows  are  directed  chiefly  to  the  head,  but 
"  sometimes  to  the  sides ;  and  are  dealt  out 
(C  with  great  activity.  They  shift  sides,  a«d 
"  box  equally  well  with  both  hands.  But  one 
"  of  their  favourite  and  most  dexterous  blows 
"  is,  to  turn  round  on  their  heel  just  as  they 
"  have  struck  their  antagonist,  and  to  give  him 
44  another  very  smart  one  with  the  other  taad, 
"  backward. 

"  The  boxing  matches  seldom  last  long ;  and 
"  the  parties  either  leave  off  together,  or  one 
"  acknowledges  his  being  beat.  But  they  never 
"  sing  the  song  of  victory  in  these  cases,  unless 

•  Nor  with  any  body  else  in  xvrestfing,  but  he  may  box  with 
any  one :  if  he  had  been  beaten  in  boxing,  lie  could  not  on 
the  tame  occasion  box  again :  but  he  might  wrestfo 


QUOTATION   FROM   €66%'*   VOYAGES.      $ft 


"  one  strikes  his  adversary  to  the  gtound, 
*'  which  shews,  thAt,  df  the  two,  wrestling  is 
€t their  most  approved  diversion*.  Not  «mly 
"  boys  engage  in  both  the  exercises,  but  fre- 
*i  quently  Rttle  girls  box  very  obstinately  for  a 
M  short  time.  In  all  which  cases  it  doth  not  ap- 
■•■  peat  that  they  ever  consider  it  as  the  smallest 
"  disgrace  to  be  vanquished ;  and  the  person 
"  overcome  sits  down  with  as  much  indiffer- 
*  ence,  as  if  he  had  never  entered  the  lists. 
*'  Some  of  our  people  ventured  to  contend 
"  with  them  in  both  exercises,  but  were  always 
"  wonted ;  except  in  a  few  instances,  where  it 
"  appeared  that  the  fear  they  were  in  of  of- 
"  fending  us  contributed  more  to  the  victory 
"  than  the  superiority  of  the  person  they  en- 
"  g*ged." 

Stach  is  the  account  we  read  in  Cook's  Voy- 
fcge* ;  and  the  accuracy  with  which  every  thing 
is  Stated  evinces  a  spirit  of  observation  and 
facility  of  description  deserving  of  the  highest 
tiftdit.  The  last  remark  which  he  makes  in 
regard  to  the  contention  between  the  English 

•  Tliis  inference  it  not  correct :  the  circumstance  above 
alluded  to*#  means  merely  to  say,  that  when  a  man  is  knocked 
do#tt,  be  may  be  considered  as  dead,  for  it  certainly  is  in 
As  power  of  die  other  to  kill  hhn  if  be  pleases,  and  for  this 
only  bt  has  a  right  to  the  song  of  victory. 


028  REMARKS, 

people  and  the  natives  is  a  tolerably  just  one. 
The  natives  themselves  mentioned  the  cir- 
cumstance to  Mr.  Mariner,  stating,  that  they 
allowed  the  Papalangies  to  get  the  victory 
sometimes,  because  they  did  not  like  to  beat 
(he  poor  fellows  so  much.  There  was  proba- 
bly, at  the  same  time,  a  little  apprehension  of 
pffending  their  visitors ;  for  it  is  certain,  that 
when  a  man  is  engaged  singly  with  a  chief 
much  superior  to  him,  he  sometimes  allows 
himself  to  be  beaten,  or  rather  yields  out. of 
respect  to  his  opponent ;  and  the  sign  by  which 
he  shews  his  disposition  to  do  so ,  is  a  sudden 
toss  of  the  head  on  one  side,  upon  which  his 
antagonist  immediately  retires  to  his  seat. 
There  is  something  admirable  in  the  perfect 
good  humour  and  forbearance  of  temper  which 
is  always  manifested  on  the$e  occasions,  suffi- 
ciently so  to  astonish  natives  of  European 
countries:  for  on  occasions  when  there  is  a 
general  combat,  (as  related  p.  218.)  even  Tooi- 
tonga  sometimes  gets  miserably  handled  by 
Qne  of  the  lowest  fellows  in  the  island ;  but 
nevertheless  he  retires  from  the  games  with- 
out the  least  inimical  spirit,  although  perhaps 
with  his  eyes  black,  his  mouth  and  nose  dread- 
fully swelled,  and,  it  may  happen,  with  his  arm 
broken  ;  all  done  by  a  man  over  whom  he  has 


OTHER    DANCES.  329 

the  power  of  life  and  death:  for  it  must  be 
observed,  that  when  there  is  a  general  combat, 
no  quarter  is  given  on  either  side. 

In  the  account  given  by  Cook,  there  is  only 
mention  made  of  two  principal  dances,  viz. 
me&  low  folia,  and  nice  too  buggi ;  but  there  are 
two  others  of  some  note,  called  hea  and  oo'la : 
the  first  is  one  of  the  most  ancient  dances  of 
Tonga,  and  is  practised  only  by  chiefs  and  su- 
perior matabooles ;  and  is  a  dance  very  diffi- 
cult to  execute,  not  only  on  account  of  the  ac- 
companying gesture,  but  also  of  the  singing. 
The  chorus  is  composed  of  ten  or  twelve  of  the 
chiefs  or  principal  matabooles,  in  the  middle  of 
whom  sits  one  who  beats  time  upon  a  loose 
flat  piece  of  hard  wood,  about  three  feet  long, 
and  an  inch  and  a  half  square,  fastened  only 
at  one  end  upon  another  similar  piece  :  this  is 
struck  by  two  small  sticks,  one  in  each  hand, 
and  produces  a  rattling  sound.  The  difficulty 
of  keeping  the  time  is  owing  to  the  extreme 
velocity  with  which  they  beat,  particularly  to- 
wards the  latter  end.  The  dancers,  who  are  all 
men, in  the  mean  w  hile  perform  their  evolutions 
round  the  chorus,  exhibiting  a  vast  variety  of 
very  graceful  movements  with  the  arms  and  head, 
accompanied  by  expressions  of  countenance 
suitable  to  the  character  of  the  dance,  which  is 


380     THE  DANCE  CALLED  OOLA  ; 

that  (abstractedly)  of  a  manly  and  noble  spirit, 
consistent  with  the  mind  and  habits  of  a  so* 
perior  person,  and  therefore  it  is  deemed  e*> 
sential  that  every  chief  and  mataboole  should 
learn  it.  As  among  the  ancient  Greeks,  it 
was  thought  inconsistent  with  the  character 
of  a  gentleman  not  to  know  how  to  strike  the 
lyre,  so  among  the  Tonga  people  it  would  be 
considered  a  marie  of  great  ignorance  to  be 
unaccomplished  in  the  graceful,  manly,  and 
expressive  movements  of  this  dance. 

The  night  dance  called  oo'la  is  a  very  an- 
cient one  in  Tonga,  though  borrowed  no  doubt 
originally  from  the  people  of  the  Navigator's 
island  (Hamoa).  This  dance  was  formerly 
only  adopted  in  the  Tonga  islands  among  the 
lower  orders  of  people;  but  of  late,  some 
Tonga  chiefs,  on  a  visit  to  Hamoa,  were  so 
pleased  with  the  superior  gracefulness  of  the 
oola,  which  was  danced  there,  that  they  after- 
wards brought  it  into  fashion  among  the  higher 
classes  in  Tonga,  with  many  improvements 
and  graceful  embellishments  borrowed  from 
the  former  place :  since  which,  the  oola  of 
Tonga  is  grown  quite  out  of  use,  even  among 
the  lower  orders,  though  it  was  once  danced 
in  Mr.  Mariner's  time,  by  order  of  the  present 
king,  on  purpose  to  contrast  it  with  the  ooki  of 


ME'E    LOW   FOLLA.  331 

Hamoa;  but  it  was  a  very  awkward  exhibi- 
tion in  comparison  with   the  Hamoa  refine- 
ments, and  probably  will  never  be  introduced 
again.     There  are  no  particular  figures  in  this  v 
dance  different  from  what  have  already  been  de- 
scribed in  the  other  dances ;  but  the  arrangement 
of  the  movements  is  very  different :  the  whole 
dance  is  considerably  more  quick  throughout, 
and   there  are  several   other  motions  of  the 
feet  and  postures  of  the  body.     The  night 
dance  which  Captain  Cook  saw  (the  mSe  low 
fotla)  is  perhaps  the  only  one  which  can  be 
considered  of  Tonga  invention,  and  is  the  only 
one  accompanied  throughout  with  Tonga  songs : 
the  rest  belong  to  Hamoa   and  Neuha,  and 
are  accompanied  chiefly  with  Hamoa  songs ; 
for  •  although  the  dance  called  hea  is  consi- 
dered a  very  ancient  Tonga  one,  there  is  not 
innch  doubt  of  its  being  of  Hamoa  extraction, 
audi  accordingly  most  of  its  songs  are  in  that 
language.    The  mtt  too  buggi  is  a  Neuha* 
',  but  the    songs   accompanying  it  are 
The  principal  public  dances  are  the 
four  following : 

•  The  islands  of  Neuha  lie  between  Hamoa  and  Vavooa* 
and  are  known  to  navigators  by  the  names  of  Traitor's  is- 
land, and  Cocos  island. 


332  SOJtfGS    AND    MUSIC. 

MefS  low  folia,  i.  e.  a  dance  with  the  arms 
outspread  :  a  night  dance. 

Med  too  buggi,  i.e.  a  dance  standing  up 
with  paddles :  a  day  dance. 

Hea;  sometimes  a  day  dance,  but  mostly  a 
night  dance. 

Oola  ;  a  night  dance. 

These  public  exhibitions  of  dances  naturally 
lead  us  to  speak  of  their  music  and  poetry : 
in  regard  to  their  musical  instruments,  they 
have  already  been  mentioned,  except  the fango- 
fango,  which  is  a  sort  of  flute  blown  by  the 
nose :  it  is  always  filled  by  the  right  nostril, 
the  left  being  closed  with  the  thumb  of  the 
left  hand.  There  are  generally  five  holes  for 
the  fingers,  and  one  underneath  for  the  thumb; 
though  some  have  six  holes  for  the  fingers, 
and  others  only  four.  The  sound  of  them  is 
soft  and  grave :  they  are  only  used  as  an  ac- 
companiment to  one  species  of  song  called 
oo'be.  At  all  concerts  where  there  is  no  danc- 
ing, the  singers  sit  during  the  whole  time. 
The  following  are  the  different  kinds  of  song 
used  among  them. 

Low  folia  ;  this  is  only  used  with  the  dance 
so  called,  and  is  in  the  Tonga  language. 

L&ve ;  of  a  similar  character  with  the  above : 
sung  without  dancing,  but  accompanied  with 


SONGS    AND    MUSIC.  993 

motions  of  the  hands ;  also  in  the  Tonga  lan- 
guage. 

Langi  mefS  too  buggi ;  that  which  is  always 
used  with  the  dance  so  called  :  in  the  Hamoa 
language. 

Hefa ;  only  used  with  the  dance  thus  named : 
sometimes  Tonga,  but  mostly  Hamoa. 

Hi'va;  similar  to  the  above,  but  sung  with- 
out dancing :  they  call  European  singing  hiva, 
because  probably  the  hiva  is  very  seldom  ac- 
companied either  with  music  or  clapping  of 
the  hands  :  always  in  the  Tonga  language. 

Oo'la  ;  that  kind  of  singing  which  is  accom- 
panied by  the  dance  so  called :  to  this  the 
annexed  specimen  belongs :  generally  in  the 
Hamoa  language. 

Fucca  Neuha  ;  or  the  Neuha  fashion  of  sing- 
ing :  this  is  never  accompanied  with  dancing, 
and  is  always  sung  in  the  Tonga  language. 
Most  of  their  songs  are  descriptive  of  scenery, 
but  some  of  these  are  descriptive  of  past  events, 
or  of  places  which  are  out  of  their  reach,  such 
as  Bold  too  and  Papalangi:  the  accounts  they 
give  of  the  latter  place  are  ludicrous  enough. 
The  poet  describes,  among  other  things,  the 
animals  belonging  to  the  country,  stating  that 
in  the  fields  there  are  large  pigs  with  horns, 
that  eat  grass,  and  at  the  mooa  there  are 
bouses,  that  are  pulled  along  by  enormous 


884  SONGS    ANU    MUSIC. 

birds.  The  women  are  described  to  be  to 
covered  with  dress,  that  a  native  of  Tonga 
coming  into  a  house  takes  a  lady  for  a  bundle 
of  Papalangi  gnatoo,  (linen,  &c.)  and  accord- 
ingly places  it  across  his  shoulder  to  carry  it 
away,  when  to  his  great  amazement  the  bundle 
jumps  down  and  runs  off.  One  of  these  songs 
describes  the  principal  events  that  happened 
during  Captain  Cook's  visit,  and  which,  ex- 
cepting a  little  exaggeration,  is  tolerably  cor- 
rect: another  describes  the  visit  of  Admiral 
d'Entrecasteaux :  another  the  revolution  of 
Tonga,  and  the  famous  battle  that  was  there 
fought,  &c.  The  song  which  is  given  in  the 
first  volume,  p.  307,  belongs  to  this  class  of 
musical  composition.  Some  of  these  songs 
have  neither  regular  measure  nor  rhyme,  but 
others  have  both. 

Oofbe  ;  this  kind  of  singing  is  always  accom- 
panied with  the  fa'ngo-fa'ngOi  (or  nose-flute): 
the  subjects  of  the  song  are  much  the  same  as 
those  last  described,  but  the  style  of  music  is 
different,  being  more  monotonous  and  grave. 
It  is  now  very  seldom  sung. 

Tow  dlo,  is  never  accompanied  with  instru- 
mental music ;  they  are  mostly  short  songs, 
sung  in  canoes  when  paddling,  the  strokes  of 
the  paddle  being  coincident  with  the  cadence 
of  the,  tune.    They  are  very  frequently  sung 


SONGS    AND    MUSIC.  335 

on  leaving  Vavaoo,  whilst  paddling  out  of  the 
inlet.  It  may  not  be  unacceptable  to  give  the 
following  as  an  example  :  it  is  a  very  usual  one, 
and  expresses  regret  at  leaving  Vavaoo  and  its 
beautiful  prospects,  famous  for  the  manufac- 
ture of  superior  toogi  hea,  (gnatoo  stained  with 
the  hea>)  to  go  to  the  islands  of  Toofooa  and 
Kao,  noted  for  making  coarse  mats. 

Oiafoo6!  goo'a  mofw  t6oo  feloV, 

Ca  too^goo  Mo'oonga-la'fa,  bea  mo  Talo'w  \ 

Goo'a  te  ho'U  ger  noTo ;  coha'i  tenne  a'loo  ? 

Ca"  too'goo  Vava'oo,  mo'e  mo/too  laflo  ; 

Licoo-on'e,  mo'e  Va'oo-a'ca ; 

Moe  HaTla-vy'  gi  Ma'ccapa/pa ; 

Msrttalo'co,  mo  fa'nga  myile, 

Afea  a  Tootaw-i,  be'a  Mofoo/e  ;— ■ 

Iky*  tooo  too"  gi  he  hifoa'nga, 

JfohrTo  gi;  he  felo'w  tafa'nga : 

Too'goo  he  toogi-hea  a  Ha'fooJooho'w 

Gerrala  he  gna'fi-gna'fi  a  Tofoo'a  mo  Ka'd. 

Alas!  we  are  entering  upon  our  voyage 
By  leaving  Mo  oonga-la'fa  and  Talo'w  ! 
Anxious  am  1  to  stay ; — who  can  wish  to  go  ? 
Departing  from  Vavaoo  and  her  neighbouring  isles. 
And  Licoo-o'ne,  and  Va'oo-a'ca, 
The  road  of  springs  near  Maccapa'pa, 
Mafttaloco  and  the  myrtle  plain, 
The  cave  of  Tootaw-i,  the  beach  of  Mofoo'e,— 
Mo  longer  can  I  stand  upon  high  places  *, 


*  This  alludes  to  the  Hapai  inlands  being  for  the  most  part 


886  SONGS    AND    MUSIC. 

And  look  downwards  on  the  fleet  of  small  canoesw— 
We  must  leave  the  crimson  gnatoo  of  Hafoo'looho'w 
To  wear  the  coarse  mats  of  Tofoo'a  and  Ka'd ! 

The  aboVe  is  a  translation  as  literal  as  the 
sense  will  allow  of  this  song:  it  must  nott 
however,  be  taken  as  a  specimen  of  the  best ; 
it  is  given  because  it  is  the  only  one  of  this  kind 
that  Mr.  Mariner  is  acquainted  with. 

Such  are  the  names  of  their  different  kinds  of 
songs,  some  of  which  are  to  be  considered 
pieces  of  recitative,  particularly  those  according 
to  the  Neuha  mode  :  others  again  have  a  con- 
siderable variety  of  tone,  and  approach  to  the 
character  of  European  music :  such  for  exam- 
ple is  the  latter  part  of  that  which  we  have  given 
the  notation  of*.  Those  who  are  skilled  in  the 
composition  of  songs  and  music  often  retire  for 
several  days  to  the  most  romantic  and  retired 
spots  of  Vavaoo,  to  indulge  their  poetic  ge- 
nius, and  then  return  to  the  mooa  with  several 
new  compositions,  which  they  introduce  at  the 
first  opportunity.  The  man  who  is  related  p. 
264.  to  have  cut  off  his  own  leg,  was  very  ex- 
flat,  and  although  Tofoo'a  and  Ka'o  are  both  high  islands,  yet 
they  have  not  such  steep  descents  as  are  common  at  Vavaoo. 
*  They  have  no  distinction  of  term  between  recitative  and 
actual  singing,  they  call  it  all  hiva  (to  sing)  this  word  hap- 
pens to  mean  also  the  number  nine. 


MUSIC  AND   SONGS.  337 

pert  in  the  composition  of  humorous  pieces : 
but  a  man  of  the  name  Teng6  Mas  famous  for 
the  higher  order  of  composition :  he  was  one 
of  the  lowest  mooas  belonging  to  Hala  A'pi 
A'pi :  but  he  was  much  esteemed  for  his  abili- 
ties. He  was  principal  instructor  of  one  of  the 
classes  (or  bands)  of  singers. 

The  following  specimen  of  their  music  be- 
longs to  the  kind  called  Oola  :  it  is  always  ac- 
companied by  the  dance.     The  first  part,  as 
will  be  seen,  is  a  sort  of  recitative,  and  appears' 
to-be  merely  introductory  to  the  rest,  for  the 
dancing  only  commences  with  the  second  part. 
What  for  distinction's  sake  we  call  the  first 
part  ends  with  the  word  ne^a-oo-e^  in  a  sort  of 
flourish  difficult  to  describe,  but  in  a  louder 
tone  of  voice  than  the  rest,  and  very  abruptly,/ 
as  if  significant  of  a  sudden  rush  or  assault. 
Immediately  the  second  part  commences,  with 
dancing,  and  is  repeated  several  times  ad  libi- 
tum: after  which  the  third  in  like  manner : 
then  the  whole  is  sung  over  again  with  a  dif- 
ferent introduction  probably,  but  of  the  same 
character.    The  words  are  in  the  Hamoa  lan- 
guage; part  of  them  Mr.  Mariner  has  forgotten, 
and  the  meaning  of  the  rest  he  does  not  know : 
they  are  spelt  according  to  the  system  laid  dqwn 
ill  the  grammar. 

vot.  II.  t 


338 


MUSIC   AMD   SONGS. 


1. 


A       to       i      chi  •  na    te     loo  -  a     se       to      tt    i 


-    i,    fang  -  oo  -  a      mi  -  air  -   i      fe-  low  tow     gi 


Tong -  a : 


A     we      i    -   a    taw  -    foo-na 


foo  -  na     te        le      te      i  ae       i 


fbo-M     U        le       te      i 


ne  -  a  -  oo  - 


2. 


MUSIC    AND   SONGS, 


Laag-i      my    mng-i      ee        towlang-imy    laof-i       eW 


torn       laafi       my        laugi      ee       tow     laagi     my 


mag-i    £0 


telle     telle     ootoo        taw  -  i      mi  •  • 


telle    tetie  ootou       taw-i     mi 


e      telle      telle 


The  games  and  familiar  pastimes  in  use 
among  them  are  numerous,  and  we  shall  give  a 
short  account  of  each,  according  to  the  order  in 
which  they  are  generally  esteemed. 

&*gi:  this  is  the  first  and  most  important  of 
all  Tjmga  games :  it  is  one  which  every  chief  and 
mataboole  is  expected  to  be  well  acquainted 
with ;  and  no  others  ever  attempt  to  learn  it.  It 

is  played  either  by  two  persons,  or  four :  for  rim* 

z2 


(MO  GAMES   AND   PASTIMES. 

plicity's  sake,  we  will  first  suppose  that  two  are 
playing :  they  sit  opposite  to  each  other,  and 
make  signs  with  the  hands  simultaneously  :  the 
one  whose  turn  it  is  to  count  making  one  or 
other  of  three  signs,  i.  e.  by  a  sudden  jerk  of  his 
arm,  presenting  either  his  open  hand,  his  closed 
hand,  or  the  extended  index  finger,  (the  others 
and  the  thumb  being  clinched),  his  opponent 
at  the  same  moment  also  makes  a  sign,  and  if  it 
happens  to  be  the  same,  it  becomes  his  turn  to 
play,  and  the  first  gains  nothing ;  but  if  he  suc- 
ceeds in  making  one  or  other  of  these  three  signs, 
without  his  opponent  making  the  same,  fire 
different  times  running,  he  throws  down  a  little 
stick,  of  which  he  holds  five  in  his  left  hand:  it 
is  now  the  other's  turn  to  play,  and  he  must  en- 
deavour to  do  the  same ;  and  whichever  in  this 
manner  disposes  of  his  five  sticks  first,  wins  the 
game  :  but  if  the  other  imitates  him  before  he 
can  make  five  signs,  we  will  suppose  at  the 
fourth,  he  has  a  right  to  demand  what  were  die 
three  other  movements  on  each  side  ;  and  if  his 
opponent  cannot  mention  them  in  the  order  in 
which  they  happened,  and  give  a  feigned  reason 
for  every  individual  motion  on  both  sides,  in  the 
technical  language  of  the  game,  according  to  a 
certain  invariable  system  laid  down,  he  may 
begin  his  count  again :  giving  these  supposed 


GAMES   AND   PASTIMES.  341 

or  artificial  reasons  for  each  move  is  the  most 
Difficult  part  of  the  game,  because  it  will  vary 
according  to  the  order  of  each  of  the  moves  that 
preceded  it.  When  four  play,  they  sit  as  in  our 
game  of  whist,  but  each  is  the  antagonist  of  the 
one  opposite  to  him  ;  and  when  one  has  got  out 
bis  five  sticks,  he  assists  his  partner  by  taking 
one  or  two  of  his  sticks,  and  continuing  to  play. 
The  rapidity  with  which  these  motions  are 
made  is  almost  incredible,  and  no  inexperienced 
eye  can  catch  one  of  them :  the  eagerness  with 
which  they  play,  the  enthusiasm  which  they 
work  themselves  into,  the  readiness  with  which 
those  that  are  clever  give  the  requisite  expla- 
nation to  every  combination  of  signs,  always 
appear  very  extraordinary  to  a  stranger. 

Famai  Kalai :  for  a  description  of  this  sport, 
aee  Vol.  I.  p.  246. 

Fasma  Gooma,  or  rat  shooting  :  for  a  descrip- 
tion of  this  sport,  see  Vol.  1.  p.  279. 

Jia  Loobe,  catching  pigeons  with  a  net.  This 
is  not  a  very  usual  sport  at  present,  though  for- 
it  used  to  be.  The  net  used  for  the  pur- 
is  small,  with  a  narrow  opening,  affixed  to 
the  end  of  a  rod  of  about  twelve  feet  in  length  : 
the  sportsman  who  holds  it  is  concealed  in  a 
small  cabin  about  five  feet  high,  nearly  in  form 
•fa  bee-hive,  in  which  there  is  a  perpendicular 


548  GAMES   AND    PASTIMES. 

slit  dividing  it  quite  in  half,  by  which  he  can 
move  his  rod  completely  from  side  to  side. 
There  are  eight  or  nine  of  these  cabins,  in  each 
of  which  perhaps  there  is  a  sportsman  with  his 
net :  the  only  mode  of  entrance  is  by  separating 
the  two  halves  of  the  cabin  from  each  other. 
These  receptacles  are  usually  situated  round  the 
upper  part  of  a  raised  mount.  On  the  outside 
of  each  there  is  a  trained  pigeon  tied  by  the 
leg,  and  near  at  hand  stands  an  attendant  with 
another  trained  bird,  tied  in  like  manner  to  the 
end  of  a  very  long  line,  which  is  suffered  to  fly 
out  to  the  whole  extent  of  the  string,  the  other 
end  being  held  by  the  man :  the  pigeon  thus 
describes  a  considerable  circle  in  the  air  round 
the  mount  beneath  :  the  flight  of  this  bird,  and 
the  constant  cooing  of  those  below,  attract  a 
number  of  wild  pigeons  to  the  neighbourhood, 
when  the  man  by  checking  the  string  calls  in 
his  pigeon,  which  immediately  perches  upon  his 
finger :  he  then  conceals  himself  with  the  other 
attendants,  in  a  sort  of  alcove,  at  the  top  of  the 
mount.  The  wild  pigeons  now  approaching 
the  tame  ones,  are  caught  in  the  nets  by  the 
dexterous  management  of  the  sportsmen. 

Alo,  catching  Bonito.  This  is  performed  by 
a  line  and  hook  affixed  to  a  long  bamboo,  and 
is  so  placed  that  the  line  falls  very  near  the 


OAMB8   AND   PASTIMJR8.  343 

•tftrn  of  the  canoe,  and  the  hook  just  touches 
the  surface  of  the  water,  upon  which  it  skims 
along  as  the  canoe  proceeds  with  velocity.  The 
hook  is  not  barbed,  and  there  is  no  bait  at- 
tached to  it.  The  moment  the  fish  is  hooked, 
die  fisherman,  by  a  dexterous  turn  of  the  rod, 
gives  the  line  a  sweep  round,  and  the  fish  swings 
into  his  hand. 

To'lOy  throwing  up  a  heavy  spear,  tf  ith  intent 
that  it  shall  fall  on,  and  stick  into  the  top  of  a 
piece  of  soft  wood  fixed  on  the  end  of  a  post. 
There  are  generally  six  or  eight  players  on  each 
ride,  and  whichever  party  in  three  throws  sticks 
in  most  spears  wins  the  game.  The  post  is 
about  five  or  six  feet  high,  and  the  surface  of 
die  soft  wood  is  about  nine  inches  in  diameter. 
The  thrower  may  stand  at  what  distance  he 
pleases. 

Famfo,  swimming  in  the  surf.  This  bold 
and  manly  exercise  has  been  well  described  by 
Cook,  as  seen  by  him  at  the  Sandwich  islands ; 
bat  the  natives  of  Tonga  use  no  board. 

Fungatoo'a^  wrestling ;  Fetagi,  club-fighting; 
Ao'jboo,  boxing  ;  Toitaco'w,  a  general  boxing- 
match,  have  been  already  described.  L&ffb,  or 
pitching  beans  upon  a  mat,  with  endeavours  to 
strike  off  others  that  have  been  pitched  there 
before. 


344  GAMES   AND  PASTIME*.      - 

Tow  papa1,  or  throwing  false  spears  at  out 
another,  to  practise  the  eye  in  avoiding  them. 

They  have  a  sport  the  name  of  which  is  for- 
gotten ;  but  it  consists  in  carrying  a  large  stone 
under  water  ten  feet  deep,  from  one  post  to  an* 
other,  at  the  distance  of  seventy  yards,  the  party 
who  carries  the  stone  running  along  the  bot- 
tom :  the  difficult}'  is  to  pursue  a  straight  course; 
a  person  may  thus  run  twice  as  fast  as  another 
can  swim. 

Matooa :  this  game  is  somewhat  similar  to 
Iiagi,but  there  is  no  discussion  about  the  moves: 
it  is  usually  practised  by  the  lower  orders. 

Hico,  throwing  up  balls,  five  in  number,  dis- 
charging them  from  the  left  hand,  catching 
them  in  the  right,  and  transferring  them  to  the 
left  again,  and  so  on  in  constant  succession, 
keeping  always  four  balls  in  the  air  at  once. 
This  is  usually  practised  by  women  :  they  re- 
cite verses  at  the  same  time,  each  jaculation 
from  the  right  to  the  left  band  being  coincident 
with  the  cadence  of  the  verse :  for  every  verse 
that  she  finishes  without  missing  she  counts 
one :  sometimes  seven  or  eight  play  alternately. 

Hdbo :  this  is  a  game  similar  to  cup  and  ball, 
and  is  also  practised  by  women  only. 

The  natives  very  often  amuse  themselves 
with  these  games :  when  any  dispute  arises  in 


GAMES   AND   PASTIMES.  345 

their  play,  the  women  decide  it  by  spinning  a 
cocoa-nut,  and  the  men  by  a  wrestling-match : 
as  to  a  serious  quarrel  from  this  source,  Mr. 
Mariner  never  witnessed  one  during  the  whole 
time  he  was  there.     Conversation  with  people 
who  have  travelled  is  another  great  source  of 
amusement  to  them :  they  are  very  fond  of 
tales  and  anecdotes,  and  there  are  many  in- 
dividuals who  are  tolerably  skilful  in  inventing 
-these  things,  which  are  then  mostly  of  a  bur- 
lesque or  humorous  tendency,  but  always  given 
as  fables.     The  kind  of  conversation  which 
appears  to  afford  them  most  pleasure  is,  con- 
cerning  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  people 
of  Papalangi,  as  being  not  only  strange  and 
wonderful,  but  also  true !     They  employ  them- 
selves in  conversation,  not  only  at  any  time 
during  the  day,  but  also  at  night :  if  one  wakes, 
and  is  not  disposed  to  go  to  sleep  again,  he 
wakens  his  neighbour  to  have  some  talk  * :  by 
and  by,  perhaps,  they  are  all  roused,  and  join  in 
the  conversation :  it  sometimes  happens  that  the 
chief  has  ordered  his  cooks,  in  the  evening,  to 
bake  a  pig,  or  some  fish,  and  bring  it  in  hot 
in  the  middle  of  the  night,  with  some  yams ; 

•  Sometimes  two  or  three,  at  other  times  thirty  or  forty, 
may  be  sleeping  in  the  same  house. 


346  GAMES   AND    PASTIMES. 

i 

in  this  case  the  torches  are  lighted,  and  they 
all  get  up  to  eat  their  share ;  after  which  they 
retire  to  their  mats ;  the  torches  are  put  out ; 
some  go  to  sleep,  and  others,  perhaps,  talk  till 
day-light  The  first  appearance  of  day  is  the 
time  of  rising:  they  then  get  up,  wrap  their 
gnatoos  round  them,  and  go  out  to  bathe  either 
in  the  sea  or  in  a  pond ;  or,  if  neither  is  at 
hftnd,  they  have  water  poured  over  them  cut 
of  cocoa-nut  shells :  they  are  very  particular 
in  cleaning  their  mouths,  and  frequently  nib 
their  teeth  either  with  cocoa-nut  busk  or  char- 
coal :  they  dry  themselves  with  a  piece  of  gpa* 
too,  wrap  their  dress  loosely  round  them,  re- 
turn to  their  houses,  and  oil  themselves  all 
over,  generally  with  oil  scented  with  the  aroma 
of  flowers ;  great  chiefs  frequently  use  sandal- 
wood oil.  When  bathing,  they  either  wear  an 
apron  of  gnatoo,  or  of  the  leaves  of  the  chi 
tree.  When  they  have  bathed  and  oiled  them- 
selves, they  put  on  their  dress  with  all  possible 
neatness :  that  of  the  men  consists  but  of  one 
piece  of  gnatoo,  measuring  about  eight  feet  by 
five  or  six;  this  is  folded  round  the  body  in 
a  very  neat  manner:  there  are  two  or  three 
modes,  but  the  one  which  is  considered  the 
most  elegant,  and  therefore  the  most  usual 
among  chiefs,  is  represented  in  the  frontispiece: 


GAMES   AND   PASTIMES.  947 

that  part  which  circles  round  the  waist  is  rea- 
dily loosened,  and  brought  over  the  head  and 
shoulders,  in  case  it  should  be  necessary  to  go 
out  at  night.  There  is  a  band  which  goes 
round  the  body  just  above  the  hips,  made  also 
of  gnatoo,  but  which  is,  for  the  most  part,  con- 
cealed by  the  folds  that  go  round  the  waist. 
There  is  some  little  difference  in  the  way  in 
which  females  adjust  their  gnatoo  s,  but  the 
chief  distinction  of  their  dress  is  a  small  nmt#, 
which  they  wear  round  the  middle,  and  is 
about  a  foot  in  breadth.  Pregnant  women, 
and  did  women,  wear  their  dress  in  front  so 
as  to  cover  the  breasts.  Children  are  not  en- 
cumbered with  dress  when  at  home  till  they 
are  about  two  years  old :  when  they  go  out, 
they  have  a  piece  of  gnatoo  wrapped  round 
them. 

Having  bathed,  oiled,  and  dressed  them- 
selves, the  chiefs  hold  cava  parties,  at  which 
women  seldom  attend,  for,  as  they  are  no  great 
cava  drinkers,  they  generally  form  a  circle  of 
their  own,  and  eat  a  meal ;  they  take  cava, 
however,  at  the  same  time,  in  a  small  quan- 
tity ;  whilst  the  men,  on  the  contrary,   take 

•  It  would  be  considered  highly  indecorous  for  the  fe- 
males lb  appear  without  this  mat. 


$48  GAMES    AND    PASTIMES. 

a  large  quantity  of  cava,  and  most  of  them 
very  little  food,  as  they  generally  eat  a  hearty 
meal  about  the  middle  of  the  day.  The  morn- 
ing cava  party  usually  lasts  from  two  to  five 
hours,  according  to  the  pleasure  of  the  chiefs. 
After  cava,  the  old  men  generally  retire  to  their 
houses  to  sleep,  or  to  amuse  themselves  with 
farther  conversation.  The  younger  ones  fol- 
low the  example  or  wishes  of  their  superior 
chiefs,  and  make  an  excursion  with  them  to 
some  distant  part  of  the  island ;  and  whilst  an 
entertainment  is  preparing  for  them  at  the 
plantation  of  some  friend  or  relation,  they 
amuse  themselves  at  some  game,  or,  perhaps, 
in  inspecting  the  building  of  a  canoe,  or  a 
large  house,  or  examining  the  state  of  die 
plantations ;  or  in  sailing  about,  if  near  the 
sea,  or  in  fishing;  or  in  practising  dancing 
and  singing.  In  these  excursions  the  unmar- 
ried women  generally  accompany  them.  The 
married  women,  and  those  who  choose  to  stay 
at  the  mooa,  in  the  mean  time  employ  them- 
selves in  one  or  other  of  the  occupations  suit- 
able to  their  sex,  or,  if  their  husbands  make 
an  excursion  to  another  island,  they  usually 
take  a  trip  with  them.  The  very  young  girls 
are  generally  employed  in  the  early  part  of  the 
day  in  making  wreaths  of  flowers,  which  they 


GAME*  AND   PASTIMES.  349 

have  been  out  to  gather  ia  the  morning  before 
sun-rise,  while  the  dew  was  yet  on  them ;  for, 
being  plucked  at  that  time,  they  remain  longer . 
fresh. 

About  mid-day  it  is  usual  to  have  another 
meal,  when  the  chiefs  receive  a  number  of 
presents,  of  different  kinds  of  provisions,  from 
their  dependants  or  friends,  which  the  mata- 
beoles  share  out.  In  the  afternoon  some  again 
join  in  conversation,  others  go  out  shooting 
rate,  &c.  In  the  evening  they  have  dancing 
and  singing,  which  is  often  continued  till  very 
late  at  night,  on  which  occasion  they  burn 
torches,  each  being  held  by  a  female  domestic, 
who,  after  a  time,  is  relieved  by  another. 
These  dances  are  generally  kept  up  for  about 
four  hours  after  dark.  When  no  dances  are 
proposed,  they  retire  to  rest  at  sun-set,  after 
bathing  and  oiling  themselves.  It  cannot  be 
Strictly  said  that  they  have  any  fixed  times  for 
meals,  though  it  generally  happens  to  be  in 
the.  morning,  about  noon,  and  again  in  the 
evening;  but  it  depends  greatly  upon  how 
the  chiefs  are  occupied,  or  what  presents  have 
been  made  to  them:  it  frequently  happens 
that  several  presents  come  at  the  same  time 
from  different  quarters ;  then  they  have  a  feast : 
bat  whatever  they  have,  whether  much  or 


360  GAMES    AND   PASTIMES. 

little,  it  is  always  shared  out  to  all  present, 
each  having  a  portion  according  to  his  rank : 
strangers  and  females  generally  obtain  some- 
what more  than  is  due  to  their  rank.  Those 
who  get  more  than  they  want  never  fail  to 
supply  others  who  have  not  enough :  selfishness 
is  a  very  rare  quality  among  them :  if  a  mas 
lias  a  piece  of  yam,  though  it  be  not  enough 
for  a  meal,  he  will  readily  give  half  away  to 
any  one  who  may  want  it ;  and  if  any  body 
else  comes  afterwards  in  like  need,  with  the 
greatest  good  nature  he  will  give  half  the  re* 
mainder ;  scarcely  saving  himself  any,  though 
he  may  be  very  hungry. 

If,  during  the  day,  a  chief,  mataboole,  or 
mooa,  but  particularly  a  chief,  finds  himself 
fatigued  with  walking,  or  any  other  exercise, 
he  lies  down,  and  some  of  his  attendants  come 
and  perform  one  of  the  three  following  opera- 
tions upon  him,  viz.  toogi-toogi,  miH,  or  foU, 
i.  e.  being  gently  beaten  upon,  or  having  the 
skin  rubbed,  or  having  it  compressed :  these 
several  operations  are  generally  performed 
about  the  feet  and  legs ;  the  first  by  constant 
and  gentle  beating  with  the  fist;  the  second 
by  rubbing  with  the  palm  of  the  hand ;  and 
the  last  by  compressing  or  grasping  die  inte* 
guments  with  the  fingers  and  thumb.    They 


CONCLUSION.  £51 

• 

all  serve  to  relieve  paid,  general  lassitude,  and 
fatigue;  they  are  mostly  performed  by  the 
wires  or  domestics  of  the  party,  and  it  is  cer- 
tain that  they  give  very  great  ease,  producing 
&  soothing  effect  upon  the  system,  and  lulling 
to  sleep.  Headach  is  found  to  be  greatly  re- 
lieved by  compressing  the  skin  of  the  forehead 
and  the  scalp  in  general.  Sometimes,  when 
a  man  is  much  fatigued,  he  will  lie  on  the 
ground  whilst  three  or  four  little  children 
ratnple  upon  him  all  over;  and  the  relief 
which  this  operation  gives  is  very  great. 

Seen  is  the  history  of  the  politics,  religion, 
and  knowledge, — and  the  manners,  customs, 
and  habits  of  the  people  of  the  Tonga  islands ; 
and  all  that  remains  now  to  be  done  is  to  fur- 
nish an  account  of  their  language :  for  this 
purpose  we  have  constructed  a  grammar  and 
dictionary,  or,  at  least,  an  extensive  vocabulary, 
which  contains,  it  is  presumed,  more  than 
eight-tenths  of  the  genuine  Tonga  words,  ac- 
centuated as  they  are  pronounced  by  chiefs 
and  those  who  think  it  an  honour  to  speak 
correctly.  The  greater  part  of  those  words 
which  are  omitted  are  such  as  may  be  termed 
technical,  belonging  to  their  arts,  and  which, 
therefore,  are  easily  forgotten,  as  expressing 
objects  and  actions  which  Mr.  Mariner  is  no 


368'  CONCLUSION* 

longer  accustomed  to :  at  the  same  time  it  must 
be  confessed  that  there  are  a  few  other  objects 
which  are  more  familiar,  but  of  which,  also, 
by  an  unaccountable  lapse  of  memory,  the 
Tonga  is  forgotten;  among  these  we  may 
mention  the  rainbow,  the  word  for  which  Mr. 
Mariner  has  in  vain  endeavoured  to  recover : 
but  these  are  imperfections  to  which  all  human 
endeavours  are  liable.  If  it  be  asked,  what  is 
the  use  to  us  of  a  grammar  and  dictionary  of 
the  language  of  an  uncivilized  people,  with 
whom  cultivated  nations  have  so  little  concern* 
the  answer  is,  that  as  the  structure  of  their 
speech  forms  part  of  the  history  of  the  human 
mind,  it  may  be  found  in  some  degree  in- 
teresting to  the  philologist,  and  still  more  so 
to  the  philosopher. 


GRAMMAR 


OF  TBI 


TONGA  LANGUAGE. 


A  language  which  it  only  spoken  by  a  nation  ignorant 
•f  every  principle  of  grammatical  construction,  and  possess- 
ing not  the  least  knowledge,  nor  the  most  remote  idea, 
either  in  theory  or  practice,  of  the  art  of  writing,  cannot 
be  supposed  to  be  richly  endowed  with  variety  of  words, 
choice  of  expression,  or  clear  and  accurate  definitions,  ex- 
cept of  those  ideas  which  are  in  common  use.  The  rules 
by  which  at  is  spoken,  and  which  can  have  no  other  security 
or  foundation  but  in  the  constant  habit  of  those  who  speak 
it,  are  nevertheless  sufficiently  well  established ;  and  if  we 
could  but  readily  and  for  a  time  emancipate  our  minds 
from  a  sense  of  the  nicer  grammatical  distinctions  in  our 
own  languages,  it  is  presumed  that  the  Tonga  dialect,  and 
perhaps  others  of  the  same  class,  would  be  found  very  sim- 
ple and  easy  to  be  attained,  but  as  it  is,  the  wide  differ- 
ences of  our  own  habits  of  speech  will  give  it  the  appear- 
ance of  a  language  replete  with  idioms,  and  abounding  in 
circumlocutions. 

The  orthography  of  this  language  we  have  settled  ac- 
cording to  the  following  rules:  first,  in  respect  to  the 
vowels, 

.  VOL.  IJ.  A  A 


354  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

A  i*  always  pronounced  m  in  the  English  words,  tar,  car, 
papa;  or  in  the  French  article  la,  except  when  two  con- 
sonants follow,  when  its  sound  is  much  less  open,  ap- 
proaching very  near  to  the  a,  in  man,  can,  began. 

E,  like  the  English  a,  in  ray,  say,  day,  or  the  French  accented 
i  in  accabli,  ordonni;  except  where  a  double  consonant 
follows,  or  teh,  then  it  is  sounded  as  in  men,  ten,  den. 

I,  like  the  English  e,  in  see,  we,  be,  or  i,  as  it  is  pronounced 
in  most  European  languages. 

O,  as  the  long  English  o,  in  mole,  roll,  dele;  but  short  before 
a  double  consonant. 

U,  like  the  sound  of  the  English  word  you;  or  ew  in  few. 

Y,  like  the  English  i,  in  sigh,  die,  white;  or  the  German  a, 
in  mesn,  sein;  but  somewhat  more  short  and  sodden,  net- 
haps  rather  like  the  English  y  m  ally,  apply:  the  sane 
sound,  when  long,  is  expressed  by  the  following  diphthong: 

Al,  like  the  long  English  i,  in  dine,  mine,  wkine.  It  lb  a 
true  diphthong,  generated  from  the  coalition  of  a  and  it 
as  above  defined :  the  first  being  heavy,  the  second  light. 

AW,  as  in  law,  saw,  paw. 

OW,  as  in  how,  allow,  now.  When  the  w  is  preceded  by  a 
or  o,  it  must  be  joined  in  sound  with  it,  not  with  any  rowel 
or  aspirate  that  may  follow;  n%,fsfwka  is  to  be  pronounced 
JHw-ka,  notjaw'-wha ;  for  in  point  of  fact  the  w  h)  dot  hi 
such  instances  a  separate  letter,  it  only  serves  to  give  a 
peculiar  sound,  as  above  defined,  to  the  a  or  the* 

OY,  as  in  the  English  words  toy,  coy,  &c» 

00,  like  the  Italian  or  Spanish  u,  or  like  oo  in  tod,  end,  kt+ 
unless  one  of  them  be  marked  thus,  6,  in  which  cusethey 
are  pronounced  distinctly :  when  ov  is  accented  the  m> 
cent  is  uniformly  upon  the  latter,  thus,  oo*:  when  thtte 
o's  come  together,  the  two  which  are  not  marked  thus,  a, 
constitute  the  diphthong ;  or  if  the  first  of  the  three  is  ac- 
cented thus,  o'oo,  the  two  latter  are  the  diphthong. 


THS  TONUA  XAK4U1GB.  355 

At  to  the  consonants,  the  following  only  need  be  particu- 
larly mentioned. 
B  is  sounded  between  the  b  and  />,  but  it  has  more  the  sound 

of  the  b. 
C,  before  a  and  o,  partakes  in  like  manner  of  a  little  of  the 
.sound  of  the  hard  g.    It  never  occurs  before  e  and  r.    To 
express  the  sound  of  the  soft  c,  the  letter  *  is  always  used. 
D :  the  sound  of  this  letter  is  scarcely  known  in  the  Tonga 
language :  there  is  indeed  a  sound  approaching  to  it,  but 
it  is  only  the  careless  conversational  way  of  pronouncing 
the*. 
G:  this  letter  is  always  hard,  as  in  game,  gill  (of  a  fish), 
begin,  &c.    Wherever  the  soand  of  the  soft  g  occurs,  j  is 
always  used  to  express  it. 
CH,  is  always  sounded  as  in  the  English  words  choose, 

ckmge,  ckmr,  &e. 
SR :  die  r  is  never  pronounced  strongly :  when  it  follows  i 
it  is  scateely  sounded,  giving  merely  a  power  to  the  e  simi- 
lar to  what  it  has  in  the  French  words  It,  me,  U. 
NG,  aa  in  the  words  among  y  song,  wrong. 
GHt  beat  the  g  is  not  sounded  strongly,  but  somewhat 
note  to  than  in  the  word  gnomon. 
The  accent  upon  the  heavy  syllable  is  always  marked 
ipso  its  vwweL 

Ae  Tonga  language  may  be  divided,  like  most  others, 
into  sight  or  nine  parts  of  speech,  and  if  nicer  distinctions 
oswM  aid  in  rendering  the  subject  mere  dear,  two  or  three 
might  be  added :  but  we  apprehend  that  the  usual  number 
«JP  b*  fcund  quite  as  many  as  will  suffice  for  our  purpose; 
as  these  are  not  always  properly  defined,  the  noun, 
verb,  and  participle,  being  often  one  and  the 
wotd,  distinguished  only  by  the  general  sense  of  the 
phrase,  and  sometimes  scarcely  by  thai,  we  might  be  dis- 
posed to  lessen  father  than  to  increase  the  quantity,    in 

iA2 


356  A  5RAMMAR  OF 

respect  to  those  parts  of  speech  which  might  be  super- 
added, they  consist  of  a  peculiar  particle  used  before  the 
article,  noun,  adjective,  and  pronoun,  according  to  certain 
rules,  signs  of  the  plural  number,  signs  of  the  tenses  of 
verbs,  and  two  or  three  others,  whose  uses  cannot  be  ex- 
plained  in  a  few  words  :  of  these  we  shall  treat  under  the 
different  parts  of  speech  to  which  they  are  generally  at- 
tached, or  to  which  they  seem  most  referable. 

The  following,  then,  are  nine  divisions  of  speech,  which 
we  shall  adopt  in  the  present  investigation,  and  of  which 
we  shall  discourse  in  this  order: 

Article,  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Coo- 
junction,  Preposition,  Interjection. 

THE  ARTICLE. 

We  6nd  in  this  language  a  very  frequent  use  of  these  three 
particles,  viz.  he,  co,  and  cot :  on  a  strict  investigation,  how- 
ever, we  find  that  only  the  first,  het  can  properly  be  called 
an  Article,  being  chiefly  used  before  nouns,  and  la  some- 
times useful  in  distinguishing  them  from  verbs,  though  it 
is  occasionally  used  before  what  in  our  languages  would 
be  called  the  participle  of  the  present  tense,  by  which  it  is 
converted  into  a  sort  of  noun, :  whereas  the  particle  co  is  used 
not  only  before  nouns,  but  also  proper  names,  to  mark  cer- 
tain significations  more  distinctly;  besides  which,  His  fre- 
quently prefixed  to  pronouns.  As  to  the  particle  cde,  it  is 
only  a  coalition  of  the  two  former,  he  and  co,  the  aspirate 
being  dropped.  Upon  these  considerations  we  restore  to 
state,  that  there  is  but  one  Article  in  the  Tonga  language, 
viz.  he :  but  as  the  particles  co  and  ccft  seem  to  have  a  straeg 
relation  to  it,  we  shall  treat  of  them  under  the  same  head. 

The  article  he  has  no  distinction  either  of  gender  or  lum- 
ber; it  may  be  used,  we  believe,  before  all  nouns,  though 
ahere  are  some  occasions  where  it  must  be  dispensed  with, 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  357 

instance*  of  which  we  shall  give  by  and  by.  Its.  use  may 
be  exemplified  thus:  he  tamgdta,  a  man ;  Af/bjf'ae,  a  woman ; 
he  to*gi9  en  axe.  When  the  conjunction  mo  (and)  precedes 
it,  the  aspirate  is  generally  dropt,  thus,  he  tofgi,  mo*e  cod  la, 
mt/epofpalangi,  mo'ejidwta  ;  axes,  and  beads,  and  cloth,  and 
looking-glasses.  The  occasions  where  it  should  be  entirely 
left  oat  will  be  best  explained  when  illustrating  the  use  of 
the.  particle  co  ;  and  some  farther  observations  will  be  made 
opon  this  subject  when  treating  of  nouns. 

The  particle  co  is  very  frequently  used  before  nouns, 
pronouns,  and  proper  names  :  the  instance  where  it  appears 
most  essentially  to  occur  is  in  answer  to  the  question  who 
or  whmt  f  and  will  then  generally  bear  to  be  translated  by 
the  verb,  it  it  or  it  toot,  &c. :  thus,  who  is  there  ?  a  man, 
co  he  tangaHa :  what  is  that }  an  axe,  co  he  to*gi :  who  was 
with  yon  ?  a  woman,  co  hefajlfne :  it  is  a  man,  it  is  an  axe, 
it  was  a  woman,  &c. 

Before  proper  names  it  is  used  in  like  manner,  the  arti- 
cle being  left  out,  as  in  answer  to  these  questions :  who  did 
you  see  there  ?  co  Fmow :  who  else  did  you  see  there  ?  co 
Tooho  Ifeuha:  but  if  the  names  of  a  number  of  persons  are 
mentioned,  the  particle  co  is  only  put  before  the  first,  as, 
who  came  in  afterwards  r  co  Hovi'H,  mo  Mooa'la,  mo  Ta'lo, 
mo  £s/IS9,  &c  (mo  being  a  repetition  of  the  conjunction). 
In  like  manner  it  is  used  before  the  proper  names  of  brutes, 
or  of. inanimate  things,  as  dogs,  hogs,  canoes,  clubs,  axes, 
Ac;  lor  axes  formerly  had  proper  names,  on  account  of 
their,  extreme  scarcity  and  consequent  value ;  and  clubs 
which  have  become  valuable  on  account  of  having 
used  in  killing  great  chiefs,  or  from  having  done  much 


» 


t  the  names  of  different  varieties  of  the  same 
tins,  particle  is  also,  used,  but  the  article  he  is  omitted; 
as,  co  too*,  co  cowmc'U,  co  cdho-arhQ,  co  gnoof  all  which  are 


$38  a  oiahm**  or 

different  binds  of  yam :  but  when  speaking  of  the  yam  ur 
general,  they  would  put  the  article  kt  after  co:  at  ie  Ac  osj(0» 
the  yam :  that  is,  iu  answer  to  a  question,  as  before. 

Sometimes  (not  particularly  in  answer  to  a  question} 
the  name  of  the  species  and  variety  are  both  mentioned,  as 
the  chief  Ooloo  Valoo,  the  man  Boboto;  and  in  such  cases 
the  particle  co  is  always  used  (die  article  Ac, being  omitted) 
before  the  proper  name  of  the  person  spoken  of,  and  oftm 
before  the  word  expressing  chief,  man,  &c ;  but  in  this 
Utter  case  (i.  e.  without  the  article)  it  shews  that  die 
party  spoken  of  is  known  to  the  person  addressed:  as,  co  4gi 
co  Ooloo  Vafloo,  the  chief  Ooloo  Valoo ;  co  tanga'ta  co  £s» 
botot  the  man  Boboto :  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  chief  Ooloo 
Valoo,  or  the  man  Boboto,  is  unknown  to  the  party  addressed, 
then  the  article  he  as  well  as  the  particle  co  would  be  used 
before  egi,  or  tangdta:  as,  cohte'gi  co  Ooloo  Valoo,  le.  a  cer- 
tain chief  called  Ooloo  Valoo;  co  he  tanga'ta  co  Boss***  a 
certain  man  named  Boboto. 

We  have  intimated  just  now  that  the  particle  co  is  net 
always  used  before  the  words  e'gi  and  tanga'ta,  as  in  the 
above  examples,  and  we  shall  now  point  out  when  it  is  net 
to  be  used.    If  the  above  phrase,  the  chief  Ooloo  Falsa*  or 
tic  man  Boboto,  were  to  occur  in  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence, 
the  particle  do  would  be  left  out  before  egi  or  tonga**,  but 
the  article  he  would  remain:  as,  nai  how  giate  am  kt  tanga'ta 
co  Paloo,  there  came  to  me  the  man  Paloe :  but  if  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  sentence  be  altered,  thus,  the  man  Moo 
came  to  me,  then  both  the  article  and  particle  tnay  be  pre- 
fixed to  tangafta,  as  before:  as,  co  he  tanga'ta  co  Nn  sui 
how  giate  au.    These  two  examples,  however,  intimate  the! 
the  man  Paloo  is  unknown  to  the  party  addressed ;  but  if  4* 
contrary  were  the  case,  the  last  form  of  the  sentence  oirfy 
could  be  toed,  and  the  article  he  must  be  left  out:  as*  cs 
tonguta  co  Paho  mi  how  gkk  an,  the  men  Paloe  wee  Is 


THE  TONGA  I«4HftP*GB.  35$ 

%  b*t  s*t  km  Q*te  9*  cq  tanga  t *  cq  Poioo  would  not  be 
gramaaatvcaUy  expressed  for  any  sense. 

Id  consequence  of  the  frequent  use  of  co  before  Je,  the 
two,  in  Jlhe  rapidity  ef  speech,  are  coalesced  iuto  one,  the 
aspirate  being  omitted  j  thus,  c&e  instead  of  co  be$  as  cotie 
Umg*U  co  Boboto,  We  have  hitherto  expressed  them  se- 
pam£aly  tor  the  sake  of  clearness,  but  shall  henceforth  write 
esJc,  according  to  the  strictest  pronunciation ;  for  co  he  tm- 
gtHim  .would  not  sound  very  well  in  the  ears  .of  a  Tonga 
chief  who  took  .pains  to  pronounce  his  language  correctly. 


THE  NOUN. 

The  noun  has,  properly  speaking,  neither  gender  nor 
number:  i.  e,  the  gender  is  distinguished  neither  by  any  pe- 
culiarity in  the  word,  nor  by  any  sign;  and  the  number  is 
only  distinguished  sometimes  by  a  sign,  or  by  some  other 
word  of  singular  or  plural  signification :  hut  the  use  of  this 
prefcltd .sign  or  word  will  depend  upon  whether, the  noun 
be  significant  of  an  animate  .or  inanimate  nature :  if  of  an 
animate  nature,  it  will  depend  upon  whether  it  be  ^rational 
or  irrational  nature. 

The  jpognlar  number  of  inanimate  beings  is  usually  ex.- 
fseaaaiby.the  simple  noun,  with. the  articled  befojceit:  as, 
«*  <*^,nn  axe;  kcfalle,  a  house.  When  it  is  intended  to 
laf  *  jMtrtkalar  stress  upoo  the.  circumstance  of  .there  being 
j, ithe  numeral  is  used  with  the  word  be  (only),  ami 
.is  loft  out :  ,as,  Jofgi  be  lotaa,  .axe  .only  one ;  fa'iU 
only  one.  Wben.a  certain  and  [fixed  number 
jd  inawimntr  objects  are  meant  to  be  expressed,  the  numeral 
isiwead  according  .to  the  following  /orm ;  to'gi  e  .osfa,  axes 
itjmlk  e )lafte,  >bonsas  tbcee;  footca  cja,, canoes  four: 
it  as  seen  that  the  particle,*  comas  between  the 
And  the  annteca),  and  which  jn  all  jpsabjabili^y  is.  the 
^rtkle^  iwithi  the Aspiiat^ emitted,  and  pWflftd  jn  tbis  situs- 


3*R>  A  OftAMMAft  Off 

tion  for  the  sake  of  euphony.  When  speaking  of  an  mde~ 
finite  number  of  inanimate  things,  the  word  UM  (many  or 
several),  is  used  before  the  noun,  the  article  intervening, 
with  its  aspirate  dropped,  as,  kfki  e  t&gi,  many  the  axes; 
In'ki  e  va'ca,  many  the  canoes. 

This  sign  of  the  plural,  however,  is  not  always  used ;  as, 
for  instance,  whose  axes  are  these  ?  c</e  tfgi  akcfi  co-clsi,  i.e. 
the  axes  whose  these  ?  Here  there  is  nothing  of  a  plural 
signification,  for  cocni  means  tfns  as  well  as  then,  and  only 
the  general  sense  or  the  visible  objects  can  determine  it: 
or  it  would  be  better  perhaps  to  express  the  rule  thus :  the 
singular  number  is  often  used  for  the  plural,  when  it  is  snf* 
ficiently  evident  that  the  plural  must  be  meant  though  not 
expressed,  as  in  the  foregoing  example. 

In  respect  to  animate  beings,  the  singular  is  formed  in 
the  same  way  as  exemplified  in  regard  to  inanimate :  as,  Ac 
booafca,  a  hog ;  he  g<x/li>  a  dog ;  he  tanga'ta,  a  man ;  and  if 
a  particular  stress  is  laid  upon  there  being  only  one,  the 
same  form  as  with  inanimate  natures  is  used,  provided  it 
be  an  irrational  living  being,  as,  booafca  be  tdka,  hog  only 
one ;  goo'li  be  to* ha,  dog  only  one ;  and  such  might  be  the 
answer  to  the  question,  how  many  hogs,  (dogs,  Ac.)  are 
there?  but  if  the  word  booafca,  (goo'H,  &c.)  is  not  repeated 
in  the  answer,  then  ta'ka  must  come  before  be,  as,  taka  be* 
one  only.  But  if  the  living  object  spoken  of  be  a  ratio**/ 
being,  as,  only  one  god,  one  man,  one  chief,  fee.  then  the 
word  to'eca  (for  which  no  particular  meaning  can  well  be 
given,  unless  we  translate  it  person  or  rational  indtvidoal), 
must  be  used  before  u/ha,  as,  tanga'ta  be  to'eca  tdkm,  man 
only,  person  one ;  and  if  in  answer  to  such  a  question,  as, 
how  many  men  were  there  ?  the  word  tanga'ta  be  not  re- 
peated in  the  answer,  it  must  be  constructed  thus:  t¥a* 
tafiha  be,  person  one  only,  to'eca  coming  first,  and  be  last 

In  respect  to  this  word  to'eca,  another  observation  most 
he  made,  viz.  that  it  is  never  used  unless  with  a  numeral. 


TBS  TONGA  LAtfGUAGB.  301 

%r  some  word  expressive  of  number;  as,  la  hi,  many;  chi, 
few. 

The  plural  number  of  animate  irrational  beings  is  some- 
times formed  exactly  In  the  same  way  as  exemplified  when 
•peaking  of  inanimate  beings;  as  in  the  following  in- 
stances :  if  a  certain,  definite  number  is  to  be  expressed, 
thus*  booa'ca  e  ooa9  hogs  two ;  gooli  e  k/loo,  dogs  three :  if 
an  indefinite  number  is  to  be  expressed,  thus,  la' hi  e  boodca, 
many  hogs  j  Id  hi  e  gooM,  many  dogs :  but  if,  in  similar  in- 
stances, rational  beings  were  to  be  spoken  of,  then  to'cca 
must  be  used,  and  the  article  e  left  out,  according  to  this 
form,  tango1  t  a  tofcca  oca,  two  men ;  fafint  tdcca  tolloo,  three 
women:  bnt  if  the  number  of  rational  beings  be  indefinite, 
the  mode  of  expression  will  be  the  same  as  with  the  irra- 
tional beings,  with  this  only  difference,  that  tofcca  will  come 
before  !***%,  as  to'cca  la  hi  e  tango*  ta,  many  men ;  tofcca  la'hi  t 
kotmfm,  many  gods. 

There  are  two  other  modes  of  expressing  the  plural 
nnaaher  of  nouns  of  animate  natures,  and  these  are  by  the 
words  cow9  and  too'nga,  which  appear  to  be  collective 
noons,  and  to  have  the  signification  of  company,  body,  so- 
ciety, or  multitude:  they  may  be  used  indifferently,  either 
with  rational  or  irrational  natures ;  always  observing,  that  in 
the  former  case,  where  a  numeral  is  used,  or  the  word  la'hi  or 
est  (many  or  few),  to'cca  must  also  be  used,  but  not  otber- 
:  as,  cow  tango'ta,  or  too'nga  tangata,  men,  or  a  body 
cow  booo/ca,  or  too'nga  booa*c*>  a  quantity  of  hogs : 
and  if  besides  such  a  collective  noun  a  numeral  is  also 
I,  then  the  word  to'cca  must  be  used  before  the  nu- 
1,  as  in  this  phrase ;  a  body  of  men  to  the  amount  of  a 
I,  cow  tanga'ta  to'cca  tec/oo;  i.  e.  a  body  of  men,  a 
handled  $  or  too'nga  tangafta  tdcca  tca'oo. 

*  Th*  partkls  com  b  •oa%etimes  used  to  inanimate  substance*,  as, 
*s»s»/«,  esrdafs;  cat  oc^S,  yarn* :  bnt  these  arc  particular  phrases. 


8ft  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

The  Tonga  nouns  cannot  be  said  to  have  the  sign*  ef 
cases,  or  any  sort  of  declension;  and  although  the  particle 
gi  has  frequently  a  dative  signification,  it  much  more  fre- 
quently is  to  be  taken  in  the  sense  of  a  preposition*  The 
genitive  case,  where  the  proper  name  of  a  person  is  meed,  is 
often  expressed  by  the  sign  a,  as,  Finow's  speech,  Mafehtgmm 
Faow :  but  in  this  example,  viz.  them&meefihe  per**,  there 
is  no  sign,  as,  he  hingp'a  hejie'na,  i.  e.  the  name,  the  person. 

There  is  one  more  remark  to  make  in  regard  to  nouns  ex* 
pressing  animate  natures,  (whether  intelligent  or  not)  ;  but 
as  this  regards  rather  the  personal  pronouns  which  are  used 
for  them,  we  shall  only  mention  it  here  by  the  way,  and 
speak  more  fully  upon  the  subject  under  the  proper  bead. 
The  remark  to  be  made  is,  that  when  such  pronouns  ate 
the  subjects  of  a  verb,  or  of  a  question,  as  (speaking  of 
dogs  for  instance),  give  them  to  me;  or  in  the  question, 
what  did  you  do  with  them  ?  they  admit  either  of  a  dual  or 
plural  number,  accordingly  as  there  are  two  or  more:  the 
dual  number  of  the  third  personal  pronoun  {in  the  above 
sense)  being  gino'wooa,  and  the  plural  number,  gim'wNh* 
But  more  of  this  hereafter. 


ADJECTIVES. 

The  words  of  this  class,  lor  a  general  rule  (not 
exceptions),  follow  the  substantives  whose  qualities  sbsy 
express:  as,  heiangka  tilli,  a  good  man;  he  togi  sisviaw,  a 
sharp  axe.  They  have  no  distinction  of  gender  or  number: 
**,cov>tangdt*  lille,  good  men ;  cow; 
Uki  he  t6gi  machila,  several  sharp  axes. 

In  the  exceptions  to  the  rule  that  tl 
substantive,  it  never  comes  immediately  before  the 
tive  except  in  one  or  two  instances,  that  we  can  discover, 
and  that  is  with  the  adjective  (and  sometimes  adverb),/**, 


TUB  TOnmk  ftAlMKJAGB.  3® 

grout,  rtrj ;  and  >#e,  whole,  entire,  single  j  which  always 
comes  immediately  before  its  substantives:  as  feo  ldH*9 
vwry  many,  or  it  may  be  translated,  as  an  adverb,  exceedingly 
gtmtijbo  itOf  groat  anger,  or  as  it  may  also  be  rendered, 
vury  uugry.  For  ©oVoo  a  single  head,  or  the  whole  head ;  yoe 
•40?,  a  single  yam,  or  an  entire  yam»  la  other  instances, 
the  adjective  precedes  the  substantive,  some  word  or 
always  intervene :  of  this  we  have  an  instance  in  one 
of  the  examples  to  the  former  rnle,  via.  Idhi  he  to'gi  mackiU; 
where  die  adjective  machiia  immediately  follows  its  noun, 
serving  to  illustrate  that  rule ;  and  the  adjective  la'ki  comes 
before  the  noun,  serving  to  illustrate  the  present  rule,  where 
it  is  seen  that  something  intervenes,  viz.  the  article  he :  but 
far  another  instance,  we  have  this :  viz*  he  has  many  axes, 
goo*  JKaV  eaxe  tdgi,  i.  e.  are  many  his  axesf ;  here  the  pos- 
sessive prououu  emu  (his)  comes  between  the  adjective 
and  substantive. 

The  adjective  in  this,  as  well  as  other  languages,  is  often 
•sod  for  m  substance :  as,  I  regard  those  brave  men,  gmmtid* 
to  #•«  goda  tt  6/u  dngi  J,  i.  e.  (to)  those  brave  (men)  do  I 
esteem  gfve :  here  it  is  seen  that  the  adjective  t6a,  brave,  is 

*  IflfcjtattY  also  mean  great  or  large :  in  facte  examples  we  have  in- 
of  the  indeterminate  nature  of  the  elements  of  the  Tonga  lan- 


f  In  this  example  goda  is  the  sign  of  the  present  tense,  and  as  it  has 
stoat  sfgalication,  we  translate  it  by  the  word  ore. 
ftitore  Aeword  £*n*rf<fl»  implies  that  three  or  mors  -pantos  are 
of;  had  there  been  only  two,  it  woaU  have  free*  la  the  duel 
:  tans,  ginfaooa,  them  two,  those  two,  &c  The  word  dngi  may 
of  two  meanings  ;H  may  either  be  the  verb  to  give,  or  the  prepo- 
i  Inwards  s  if  the  first,  then  6fm  (esteem)  must  be  a  substantive,  as 
;  -butif4*tbe  the  preposition,  then  4f«  must  be  the 
i,  to  feel  esteem,  and'  the  sentence  may  be  thus  trans- 
it tiswefw*  (mr*  J //*f*«Uf»t«u«^    Bee  4a*S>  under  Vj 


304  A  GRAMMAR  OF 


used  as  a  substantive,  signifying  brave  men,  taag&tB  being 
understood. 

On  the  other  hand,  substances  are  often  used  as  adjectives : 
thus,  tcmgdta,  a  man,  often  signifies  manly :  as,  kefiina  ias> 
gdia,  a  manly  person,  i.  e.  a  person  being  such  as  a  nan 
ought  to  be  j  Ac  idea  Fiji,  a  Fiji  canoe. 

Adjectives  are  for  the  most  part  the  same  as  the  substan- 
tives, from  which  they  have  derived  their  signification ;  as 
lilW>  good,  goodness ;  UlU',  good  (the  adj.)  covt,  evil ;  cow, 
bad,  &c. 

They  are  frequently,  however,  formed  from  the  substan* 
tive  by  the  addition  ofw,  or  ea:  assta/fttno,  warmth,  heat; 
mafdnnaia,  warm,  hot ;  and  where  the  substantive  ends  in  e, 
they  are  mostly  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  letter  a;  as 
gc*U,  mud,  clay ;  geUfa,  muddy,  clayey. 

They  are  also  sometimes  formed  by  repeating  the  substan- 
tive :  as  l6lof  oil ;  IdMolo,  oily  :  but  it  will  be  difficult  to 
avoid  being  deceived  by  this  rule,  for  there  are  many  in- 
stances where  the  double  word  is  a  substantive ;  many  where 
it  is  a  verb ;  many  where  the  single' word  has  no  meaning  at 
all,  not  being  used ;  others  where  the  single  word  has  a 
meaning  very  different  from  the  double  word :  sometimes 
the  word  is  doubled  to  increase  the  degree  of  a  quality,  Ac. 
as  co6loo-co6loo,  a  species  of  dove ;  oTb,  to  hunt ;  6h-4b,  to 
fan  ;  boot,  (no  meaning)  ;  looi-boo'i,  a  screen ;  cooHa,  beads; 
coola-co&la,  red;  kina%  a  bottle ;  hina-hina,  white ;  lilU,  good; 
lUltf-lilW,  very  good.  The  vocabulary  must  be  often  referred 
to,  to  decide  this  rule. 

DEGREES  OF  COMPARISON. 

What  is  properly  called  the  comparative  degree,  in  this 
language,  is  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  word  <mge  to  the 
adjective ;  and  the  superlative  mostly  by  the  addition  of  tbs 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  365 

word  obito,  exceedingly.  As  to  the  word  dnge,  it  is  often  used 
to  signify  against,  leaning  against;  and  also  like,  similar  to  : 
allowing  a  little  latitude  to  the  first  meaning,  it  may  easily  be 
conceiyed  to  signify  being  opposed  to9  or  compared  with  ;  and 
this  is  the  sense  in  which  it  must  be  taken,  in  quality  of  a  sign 
of  the  comparative  degree:  it  is  also  often  used  as  a  sign  of 
adverbs,  according  to  its  other  meauing,  viz.  like,  similar  to, 
after  the  manner  of.  As  to  the  word  obito,  it  requires  no 
farther  explanation  at  present ;  fer  its  simple  signification, 
excemdingly,  is  clearly  appropriated  to  express  the  superlative 
degree.  Both  these  signs  of  degrees  follow  the  adjective : 
as,  UU4,  good  ;  lilliangc,  better ;  UUc  obito,  best,  or  exceed- 
ingly good. 

For  an  example  of  the  comparative  degree  we  will  say, 
this  thing  is  better  than  that.  To  render  this  into  Tonga,  the 
principal  circumstance  to  be  attended  to  is  the  arrangement 
of  the  words ;  the  substantive  verb,  or  rather  the  sign  of 
the  present  tense,  will  come  first,  and  the  whole  sentence 
will  run  thus :  is  better  the  thing  this,  than  the  thing  that,  gotfa 
HBa  dnge  he  nufa  cotfni  gi  he  me* a  coia :  the  word  gi,  which  li- 
terally means  to,  towards,  we  may  translate  than,  in  conformity 
with  our  idiom  of  speech.  This  is  greater  than  that,  gocta 
iahi  dnge  he  me*  a  coe'ni  gihe  me  a  coia ;  i.  e.  is  greater  the  thing 
this  to  the  thing  that,  or  than  the  thing  that. 

But  when  the  subject  with  which  the  comparison  is  made 
is  a  proper  name,  the  con  nectivegi, which  joins  the  subjects  of 
comparison,  is  changed  to  gia :  as,  Toobo'  is  taller  than  A  Too, 
gnont  Iahi  dnge  Toobo*  gia  Jtfbo  ;  i.  e.  is  taller  (  more  tall,  more 
great)  Toobo/  than  A'foo.  Finow  is  a  greater  chief  than 
Toobo* :  \m  rendering  this  into  Tonga,  the  word  egi,  a  chief, 
beeomea  an  adjective,  and  the  word  ange  will  follow  it  ac- 
cordingly :  as,  goeta  efgi  dnge  Finoxogia  Toobo9 ;  i.  e.  is  chiefer 
Finow  than  Toobo'. 

The  superlative  degree  is  signified  for  the  most  part  by 


36#  A  OftAMKA*  OV 

the  word  obito,  most,  very,  exceedingly :  as,  tbit  age  k  the 
best,  co'e  togi  coeni  gooa  lille  obiio:  i.  e.  the  axe  this  u  good 
exceedingly.  But  the  word  ohito  may  be  left  out,  and  if 
(only)  used  in  its  stead,  according  to  this  form :  this  axe  only 
is  good,  which  will  have  exactly  the  same  meaning  as  the 
foregoing  example,  for  it  will  not  imply  that  the  others  art 
bad,  bat  that  they  are  not  good  (or  inferior)  compared  to  it: 
for  example,  co'e  tofgi  he  eoem  goo'a  IU14%  this  axe  is  the  best, 
or,  literally,  the  axe  only  this  is  good. 

If,  in  reference  to  the  last  example  given,  it  were  intended 
to  be  implied  that  the  axes  with  which  the  good  oee  was 
compared  were  absolutely  bad,  this  additional  circumstance 
would  likewise  be  expressed :  as,  this  axe  is  the  only  good  one 
among  them,  co'e  togi  be  coeni  goo'a  hlli,  ca  goof  a  cdvijoVBke 
gmowt&loo:  i.  e.  the  axe  only  this  is  good,  for  are  bad  al 
them :  or  what  is  a  more  usual  form  of  expression,  goo'*  gin 
fooiibe  he  ttfgh  co'e  t</gi  be  cotm  goo'a  lille1:  i.  e  are  bad  all 
the  axes,  the  axe  only  this  is  good.  It  seems  rather  an  in- 
consistency to  say  all  the  axes  are  bad,  and  in  the  same  sen- 
tence to  acknowledge  one  of  them  to  be  good ;  this,  however, 
is  the  Tonga  idiom. 

When  it  is  required  to  express  the  superlative  degree  in 
a  very  extended  sense,  the  word  ohito  is  repeated ;  and  if  it 
is  so  exceeding  as  to  be  in  a  manner  almost  beyond  compa- 
rison, it  is  repeated  twice :  as,  co'e  tofgi  coeni  god*  bU  ohito 
obito,  obiio.  But  if  the  axes  with  which  this  exceeding  good 
axe  is  compared  are,  on  the  other  hand,  exceedingly  bed,  this 
is  to  be  expressed  by  the  word  covi,  bed,  with  obiio  also  at- 
tached, according  to  this  form :  co'e  ti/gijix/iibi  coeni  goe** 
c&vi  ohito,  ca  co't  togi  coini  goo'a  WU  obito,  ohito ;  which,  word 
for  word,  is  thus :  the  axes  all  these  are  bad  exceedingly, 
but  the  axe  only  this  is  good  exceedingly,  exceedingly. 

Lastly,  the  form  of  the  superlative  degree  may  be  need 
even  though  there  be  only  one  more  axe,  or  whatever  sob* 


^  ^^^»  •^^W^BI^^  VflMR^^^p^^^n  ^^  *^W^^ 


*sSJb!  SS>  CjSJSSjySJr#  W  WSISJ^  1HM  WNa  jSj  %  S^fcwWSS/  Wl 

ij  to  uaad  mi  »»ch  *  etaa  iiw^*w^w»**^ 


language  »*y  b*  »*W  ^  hftW  fow  kiwi*  ttf 
pronouns,  tie.  personal,  posset*]**)  i*ttm»g*tWt»t  ami  de- 
monstrative. 

1.  There  arc  two  kinds  of  personal  pronmimH  lil.Thttt* 
which  cone  before  verbs,  oral  least  art*  tt|f*nt*  i  tt*i  I  ytu  w  * 
webt;  they  love*:  2dly.  Those  h!»IoIi  rUh*>r  urn  (lit*  stil^Ms 
of  a  verb,  as,  strike  him  ;  love  her  j  or  arti  u*m\  in  uihwmi  Hi 
a  question,  as,  who  got»»  )  I  \  who  %\\\%*)  lis*  |  or  ura  MiUil 
more  strongly  to  identify  the  agent,  likfl  the  proiimui*  mysulfi 
thyself,  kc.  in  English,  when  they  aw  im'«l  Im  aihlltlOM  hi 
the  true  personal  pronouns ;  as,  I  myself  will  |f0#  Ami, 

The  personal  pronouns,  as  Those  jfovtrwl  iff  varl*  m 
•gents  to  verbs,  pf*|wtitMrf»*i  or  ws*d  in  *h- 

L  Te;  Oo.  Am;  fJHe, 

hLt,  it,    Ul  Km ;  I*, 


Ye.  JsV.  Owftv/***;    <bm&*/U** 


lM44**m+mdb*m#*ii4p*'*i*  ***** 
i%  «  so**  ***«•  f*,4a* 


368  A  GftaMlf  AR  OF 

it  then  usually  joined  in  one  word  with  the  sign  of  the 
tense:  as,  nioo*  dloot  I  went ;  Moo*  dloo,  I  shall  go;  nttst 
o'fa,  I  loved  or  esteemed ;  tioo  crfa,  I  shall  love  or  entoem. 

3.  Gert  thou :  this  pronoun  is  used  in  all  the  trmaqy  and 
comes  between  the  sign  of  the  tense  and  the  verb :  the  prin- 
cipal thing  to  be  observed  respecting  it  is,  that  when  the  sign 
of  the  present  tense,  gooa,  conies  before  it,  goofa  is  changed 
into  goo :  as,  goo  ger  nu/kt,  thou  deepest ;  na  ger  nu/kt,  thou 
didst  sleep ;  te  ger  mofhe,  thou  shalt  sleep. 

4.  Ia,  he :  this  pronoun  follows  the  verb  in  all  the  tenses: 
as,  goo'amo'  he  ia,  he  sleeps ;  na  m&he  ia,  he  slept ;  e  f  sWIe  M, 
he  shall  sleep :  though  sometimes  ia  is  changed  for  nt,  and 
which  is  then  joined  to  the  future  tense :  thus,  tinm  *Wir, 
he  shall  sleep ;  tinne  a' loo,  he  shall  go ;  and  in  the  past 
ia  is  sometimes  omitted,  and  the  sign  na  changed  into 
as,  not  mo* he,  he  slept ;  instead  of  na  mdke  ia. 

5.  Mow,  we  :  this  pronoun  comes  between  the  sign  of  the 
tense  and  the  verb:  as,  goo  a  mow  a' loo,  we  are  going,  Ac*; 
but  the  use  of  it  is  limited  to  those  instances  in  which  the 
person  spoken  to  is  not  included :  as,  when  one  person  tolls 
another  that  himself  and  others  owe  him  much  respect,  say 
ing,  we  greatly  esteem  you,  the  pronoun  mow  must  be  used, 
because  the  person  spoken  to  is  not  involved  in  the  sense  of 
the  word  we.  (See  the  following). 

6.  Tow,  we :  this  comes  also  between  the  sign  and  the 
verb ;  its  use  is,  however,  restricted  to  those  instances  where 
the  person  addressed  is  meant  to  be  included ;  as,  when  one 


*  The  proper  aigo  of  the  past  tense  is  wa,  but  in  the  ftr»t 
oo  is  joined  with  it,  it  is  changed  into  me.    The  pronoan  U  is 
into  oo  in  the  future  tense,  probably  became  it  Is  also  the  alga  ef  that 
tense ;  and  a  repetition  of  the  word  te  would  be  ambiguous,  as  an¥i 
•fenoat,  and  tfM  dloo  would  mean  ebnaat  fone . 

t  Te,  the  sign  of  the  future  tense,  nukes  e  in  the  third 
gular. 


THB  TONtfA  LANGUAGE.  3fig 


perion  reminds  another  that  boflr  of  them  are  to  go  some- 
where to  do  something,  Ac.:  as,  we  li.  e.  thou  and  1),  are 
going  the  wrong  way;  or,  we  (i  e.  thou  and  I),  aire  sitting 
here  idle.  In  short  wnw  is  always  used  in  this  sense,  viz. 
I  and  be,  or  I  and  they  ;  and  tow  is  always  used  in  this,  viz. 
I  and  thou,  or  I  and  yon,  or  I,  thou,  and  they,  or  I,  you,  and 
they,  &c. 

7.  Afo9  ye ;  moid,  they ;  there  are  no  particular  observa- 
tions to  male  respecting  these  pronouns :  for  examples  of 
ttrfcrr  use ;  te  mo  oJho9  ye  shall  go ;  na  now  ntffb,  they  re- 
mained; where  it  is  seen  they  are  placed  between  the  sign  of 
ttie  tense  and  the  verb. 

In  regard  to  the  second  column  of  pronouns ;  they  are 
used  either  in  addition  to  the  first,  the  better  to  identify  the 
person  by  laying  a  greater  stress';  or  to  distinguish  the  dual 
frotn  the  plural  numbei ;  or  in  answer  to  the  question  who  f 
oV  afif  the  subjects  of  a  preposition. 

When  a  particular  stress  is  intended  to  be'  lold,  as  I  my- 
self, thou  thyself,  &c.  any  of  these  pronouns  may  be  used 
in  Addition  to  the  corresponding  ones  in  the  first  column,  with 
the*  exceptions  of  aut  aco'y,  and  aPa ;  as,  tdoo  a'lvo  gita,  I  will 
go*  myself;  feger  a'loti  coy,  thou  shalt  go  thyself;  tinnt  cfldo 
in*,  tie  shall  go  himself  (for  this  last,  see  rule  4) ;  so  much 
for  the  singular  number :  in  respect  to  the  following,  at- 
tention must  be  paid  to  the'  circumstances  of  dual  and 
plural  numbers ;  if  dual,  those  ending  in  oofa  are  to  be  used; 
if  three  or  more  individuals  are  included,  those  ending  in 
toho  must  be  adopted.  In  the  first  person  dual  and  plural, 
attention  must  also  be  paid  to  the  differences  of  signification 


9  Ifttwm  the  past  tease,  at,  ke  waif  Msuejf,  it  would  be  w/Hb* 
•«,  for  it  woald  sound  awkward  to  say*  *•  <tlo*  ia  ia  -  therefore  one  of 
tae  proaoaas  U  dropped,  and  the  sign  na  chaagtd  into  Wi .  sad  it  has 
already  beea  icatio— d  that  mil  ssay  be  adopted  instead  of  na  iu.  Hee 
rale  4. 

VOL.  II.  BR 


370  A  GRAMMAR  OP 

between  mow  and  tow  (see  rules  5  and  6) ;  as,  te  mow  a' loo 
gimohoooa,  we  will  go  our  (two)  selves,  (i.  e.  without  you) ; 
te  mow  a'loo  gimowto' loo,  we  will  go  our  (three  or  wore)  selves, 
(i.  e.  without  you)  ;  te  tow  a'loo  gito'wooa,  we  will  go  our 
two  selves  (i.  e.  you  mid  I);  te  tow  a  loo  gitovto'loo,  we  will 
go  our  (three  or,  more)  selves,  (i.  e.  including  the  person 
spokeu  to,  and  others,  so  as  to  make  at  least  the  Dumber 
three) ;  te  mo  of  loo  gimtfooa,  ye  shall  go  ye  (two)  selves ;  Umo 
a'loo  gimut</ioo9  ye  shall  go,  ye  (three  or  more)  selves;  temow 
a'loo gino'wooa,  they  shall  go,  them  (two)  selves;  te  now  etloo 
ginowto'loo,  they  shall  go,  them  (three  or  more)  selves*. 
This  rule,  therefore,  not  only  serves  to  strengthen  the  sense, 
but  also  to  mark  the  dual  and  plural  numbers  where  it  is 
necessary  to  do  so. 

In  regard  to  these  pronouns,  as  being  used  in  answer  to 
the  question  who  f  it  must  be  observed,  that  some  of  them 
in  the  singular  number  must  have  the  particle  co  before 
them,  others  must  not:  and  those  in  the  dual  and  plural 
numbers  may  either  have  it  or  not,  according  to  the  option 
of  the  speaker.  Those  which  cannot  have  the  particle  co, 
are  gita,  aco*y,  and  aia;  while  those  which  must  have  it  are, 
aut  co*y,  and  ia :  as,  who  did  it  ?  co  au9 1 ;  co  coy,  thou  ;  co 
ia,  he :  or  gita,  1 ;  acoy,  thou  ;  aia,  he ;  without  the  co. 
Giia  is  seldom  used  but  in  very  familiar  conversation,  and  if 
rather  to  be  considered  a  vulgarism.  Any  of  those  in  the 
dual  and  plural  numbers  may  be  used  either  with  or  without 
co ;  care  beiug  paid  to  the  circumstance  of  two  or  more,  and 
to  the  habits  of  mow  and  tow. 

Whenever  the  preposition  giate  (to,  towards),  occurs 
before  a  personal  pronoun  in  the  singular  number,  it  must 
be  rendered  into  Tonga  by  those  which,  in  the  above  nil*, 

•  It  may  here  be  remarked  that  ooo,  ia  these  compound  weeds,  it 
the  numeral  two,  and  totoo  the  numeral  three;  but  the  pronouns 
pounded  of  the  latter  are  used  for  an  indefinite  number  of  persons. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  3JT1 

had  the  particle  co  before  them,  though  in  this  that  particle 
will  be  omitted  ;  as  giate  au9  towards  me ;  giate  coy,  towards 
thee;  giate  to,  towards  him.  In  the  dual  and  plural  num- 
bers they  are  all  used  in  like  manuer;  as,  gdate  gimdwooa  ; 
gjtate  gi*<mtolbo,  &c. 

POSSESSIVE  PROKOUN8: 

These,  in  the  singular  number,  do  not  seem  to  have  much 
reference  to  the  personal  pronouns,  except  ai'a,  his,  which 
appears  to  be  derived  from  ia9  he.  In  the  dual  and  plural 
numbers  they  are  exactly  the  same  as  the  personal  pro- 
nouns of  both  classes ;  as, 


Singular. 

My. 

E'oocoo;  a'coo. 

Tby. 

Ho;  ow. 

His. 

Enne;  a'na;  ai'a. 
Dual. 

Our  (not  thy) 

Gimotwooa. 

Our  (my 

and 

thy)             Gito'wooa. 

Your 

Gimotaoa. 

Their 

Gino'wooa. 

Plural. 

Our  (not  thy  or  your).  GimowtoMoo. 

Our  (also  thy  or  your).  Gitowtoloo. 

Your  Gimotoloo. 

.Their  Ginowtofoo. 

Indefinite  plural,  i.  e.  either  dual  or  plural. 
Our  (not  thy  or  your)       Mow. 
Our  (also  thy  or  your).     Tow. 
Your.  Mo. 

Their.  Now. 

BB2 


372  A  MAMMAE  OF 

Of  these  possessive  pronouns  torn*  are  used  always  before 
their  substantives,  viz.  ioocoo,  inmf  mow,  tow,  mo,  and  »w: 
as,  4joc0Q  mdnoo,  my  bird ;  entufo'ka,  his  son,  &c. 

Two  of  them  are  only  used  after  their  substantives,  viz. 
ow,  thy;  and  ai'a,  his;  as  gna'too  a? a,  his  gnaftoo;  Mfce 
adw*9  thy  canoe. 

All  the  rest,  viz.  afcoo,  ho,  a'na,  and  those  beginning  with 
gi  may  be  used  either  before  or  after  their  substantives,  with 
this  difference,  that  the  last  mentioned,  viz.  those  beginning 
with  gi,  if  they  are  put  after  their  substantives,  the  gi  is 
changed  into  a :  and  if  akoo%  ho,  and  ofao,  are  used  after 
their  substantives,  a  precedes  them ;  thus, 

A'coo  fa'lle ;  my  house,  or  bouses. 
Falle  aa  coo ;  my  house,  or  houses. 
Ho  booa'ca ;  thy  hog. 
Booa'ca  aho';  thy  hog. 
A'na  to'gi ;  his  axe,  or  axes. 
To'gi  aa'na ;  his  axe,  or  axes. 
Gimo'wooa  oo'fi ;  our  yam,  or  yams. 
Oo'fi  amo'wooa ;  our  yam,  or  yams. 
Gito'wooa  va'cn ;  our  canoe,  or  canoes. 
Va'ca  ato'wooa;  our  canoe,  or  canoes. 
GinWooa  acow ;  your  club,  or  clubs. 
AccAr  amofooa ;  your  club,  or  clubs. 
Gino'wooa  goo'li ;  their  dog. 
Goo'li  anofaooa ;  their  dog. 

Those  among  the  above  phrases  which  have  living  being* 
for  their  subjects  may  be  converted  in  plurals  by  the  use  of 
the  word  todnga,  (see  nouns)  ;  this  word  coming  immediately 
before  the  noun ;  as,  thy  hogs,  ho  totfnga  booafcap  or  tod*- 

»  When  the  pronoun  ow  is  attached  to  a  noun,  the  letter  m  must  pit* 
eede  it,  and  thus  it  U  ooavtrted  into  cow.    8e*  the  following  sale. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  373 

ga  booafca  oJkd :  their  dogs,  gtaotoo*  tatMga  goo'li,  or 
todnga  gocfli  andwooa.  The  particle  cow  cannot  be  used 
for  the  same  purpose.  Those  which  have  inanimate  sub- 
jects are  either  singular  or  plural,  as  they  above  stand ; 
they  may,  however,  admit  a  specific  plural  by  the  addition 
of  the  numeral,  but  in  no  other  way. 

The  possessive  pronoun  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the 
personal,  particularly  where  the  verba,  my  and  angi,  are  ex* 
pressed ;  as,  give  it  to  him,  angi  ia  ma  a*na9  i.  e.  give  it  for 
his  own :  give  it  to  me ;  my  ia  ma  a*coo9  i.  e.  give  it  for  my 
own :  I  will  give  it  to  you,  tioo  of  too  ia  ma  ow,  i.  e.  I  will  give 
it  for  your  own.  The  pronouns  possessive  of  the  dual  and 
plural  numbers  may  also  be  used  in  the  same  way.  One 
more  observation  must,  however,  be  made,  respecting  the 
singular  number,  that  those  placed  first  on  their  respective 
lines  cannot  be  used  according  to  this  rule,  viz.  Soocoo,  hot 
and  time;  unless  some  noun  follows,  and  then  these  may, 
and  not  the  others ;  as,  give  it  for  his  dog,  angi  ia  ma  irmt 
godli ;  not  a!na  goi/li ;  and  so  of  the  other  two. 

Interrogative  pronouns  are  the  following,  and  are  never 
used  but  as  interrogatories. 

Co  hai  ?  ahai  ?     Who  ? 
Coe  ha  ?  Which  ? 

Coeha?he-ha?  What) 
Ahai  ?  Whose  ? 

When  they  form  part  of  a  sentence,  he  km  and  ahai  are 
always  put  at  the  end  ;  the  others  are  alwey*  pot  in  the  be- 
ginnings* 

Cohainafy?  Who  did  it? 

Coe  ha  te  ger  fili  ?    Which  will  yon  cboat e  ? 

Coe  ha  te  ger  fy  ?      What  will  you  do?  ■  K-; 


374  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

Te  ger  fy  he-ha }      You  will  do  what  ? 

Coeha?) 

He  ha?    i  W  *  ' 

Coe  goo  lihcni  dhoti  f  Whose  dog  is  this  ? 

The  English  word  what,  when  applied  to  mankind,  ia  ren- 
dered by  co  ka'i,  or  ahai,  as,  co  An'i  taiga* t  a  co  h£maf  or,  ,c* 
tangdta  co-hena  ah&it  what  roan  it  that  ?  But  when  brutes, 
or  inanimate  subjects,  are  implied,  it  must  be  rendered  bf 
coc-ha,  or  he-ha ;  as,  coe  to'gi  co-ena  he-ha  ?  what  axe  is  that?. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

These  are  co-Jteni  and  ahkni,  this ;  co-hena  and  ahimaf  that 
Very  little  if  any  distinction  is  made  between  co-Aeaf  and 
ahini ;  or  between  co-hena  and  ahena ;  it  is  rather  more  cus- 
tomary, however,  to  use  those  with  the  particle  co  before 
them. 

VERBS. 

The  Tonga  verb  is  exceedingly  simple  in  construction, 
perhaps  more  so  than  is  consistent  with  perfect  clearness  of 
speech ;  it  does  very  well,  however,  for  the  common  pur- 
poses of  discourse.  At  most,  there  are  only  two  different 
kinds  of  verbs ;  viz.  verbs  regular,  and  verbs  defective,  and 
the  distinction  between  these  is  easily  made,  as  there  are  bat 
three  of  the  latter  class  in  the  whole  language,  viz.  my,  ottoo, 
and  avgi ;  these,  from  the  way  in  which  they  are  often  used, 
may,  perhaps,  be  considered  verbs  auxiliary ;  but  more  of 
this  when  we  treat  of  them. 

The  sense  of  the  verb  substantive,  I  am,  thou  art,  he  tf» 
&c,  is  mostly  involved  in  the  regular  verb,  with  the  sign  rf 
i he  tense  and  the  pronoun,  and  is  seldom  used  alone:  those 
which  are  usually  called  verbs  neuter,  as,  to  sleep,  to  boast, 
to  walk,  &c.  are  constructed  the  same  as  the  verb  regular; 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  375 

those  whicl}  in  other  languages  are  called  verbs  passive  are 
not  known  in  the  Tonga  language;  instead  of  saying,  he  was 
struck  by  a  stone,  they  would-  say,  a  stone  struck  him ;  for 
the  tree  was  sfiaken  by  the  wind,  the  wind  shook  the  tree. 

The  verb  has  but  three  teuses,  present,  past,  and  future, 
denoted  by  the  signs  god  a,  na9  and  te;  and  three  moods, 
indicative,  imperative,  and  potential :  the  indicative  is  de- 
noted by  the  want  of  a  modal  sign ;  the  imperative,  or  pre- 
cative,  by  the  deficiency  both  of  a  modal  and  temporal  sign ; 
and  the  subjunctive  by  the  use  of  the  modal  sign  gcr.  In 
respect  to  the  order  of  construction  in  the  indicative  mood, 
first  comes  the  sign  of  the  tense,  then  the  pronoun,  and 
lastly  the  verb ;  except  in  the  third  person  singular  of  each 
tense,  where  the  pronoun  is  placed  last.  In  the  dual  and 
plural  numbers,  the  pronouns  eoding  in  oda  and  t&loo  are 
also  expressed,  and  follow  the  verb. 

THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

The  present  tense  is  denoted  by  the  sign  goo*af  whieh 
runs  unchanged  through  all  the  persons,  except  the  second 
person  singular,  where  the  a  is  dropped :  the  first  personal 
pronoun  is  tc.     See  Pronouns. 


G«ofa  te  aloo.  .  I  go. 


Goo  a  aloo  i*a.  He  goes. 

Dual. 


We  (tar*)  go  (oot  f  «•% 
We  (t»#»)  £*  (I  msA  jum ; 
Ye  1t»o)  ^su 
GWa  fwv  4ft**  ps*******      TA*jr  (tsw)  9*, 


3J 6  A  GRAMMAR  Of 

Pluiml. 

Goofe mow  a4oo  gimowtoloo.  We  (three  or  more)  go  (not 

you). 
Goo'a  tow  aloo  gitowtoloo.     Ye  (three  or  more)   go  (I, 

you,  Ire). 
Goo'a  mo  aloo  gimotoloo.      Ye  (three  or  more)  go. 
Goo'a  now  aloo  ginowtoloo.  They  (three  or  more)  go. 

The  PAST  TENSE  is  denoted  by  the  sign  na>  which  if  pre- 
fixed to  all  the  persons,  except  the  first,  where  it  is  changed 
into  fte>  and  is  joined  to  the  personal  pronoun  oo:  in  this 
tense,  also,  it  must  be  remarked,  that  the  third  personal 
pronoun  may  either  follow  the  verb  as  in  the  present  tease, 
or  it  may  be  left  out,  and  the  sign  changed  into  nt/u 

Singular. 

Neoo  aloo.  I  went. 

Na  ger  aloo.  Thou  didst  go. 

Na  a'loo  i'a  (or  na/i  aloo).       He  went. 

Dual. 

Na  mow  aloo  gimo'wooa.  We  (two)  went  (not  you). 

Na  tow  aloo  gito*wooa.  We  (two)  went  (I  and  yon). 

Na  mo  aloo  girao'ooa.  Ye  (two)  went. 

Na  now  aloo  gino*wooa.  They  (two)  went. 

Plural. 

Na  mow  aloo  gimowtoloo.  We  (several)  went  (not  yoa). 

Na  tow  aloo  gitowtoloo.  We  (several)  went  (I,  yon,**-) 

Na  mo  a'loo  gimo'ooa.  Ye  (several)  went. 

Na  now  aloo  gino'wooa.  They  (several)  went. 


THE  Y9M94  h 


0AGE. 


877 


FUTURE  TBNSK. 

This  is  denoted  by  the  sign  te,  except  in  the  third  per- 
son singular,  where  it  is  changed  to  t :  in  this  tense,  as  in 
the  past,  oo  is  used  for  the  first  personal  pronoun,  instead 
of  te,  because  te  being  also  the  sign  of  the  tense,  the  repe- 
tition would  create  confusion  in  the  signification,  Uti  mean- 
ing almost.  In  this  tense  it  roust  also  be  noticed,  that  the 
third  personal  sign  instead  of  being  e  is  sometimes  changed 
to  tinne,  and  the  pronoun  ia  omitted:  but  this  is  for  the 
most  part  optional.     (See  rule  4  of  the  pronouns.) 

Singular. 

Teoo  a'loo.  I  shall  go. 

Te  ger  aioo.  Thou  shall  go. 

£  aioo  ia,  (or  tenne  a'loo).     He  shall  go. 


Deal. 


Te  mow  a'loo  gimo/wooa. 
Te  tow  a'loo  gito'wooa. 
Te  mo  a'loo  gimo'ooa. 
Te  now  aioo  gino'wooa. 


(two)  shall  go,  (not  you). 
;  (two)  shall  go,  (I  apdyou.) 
(two)  shall  go. 


We 

We  (two;  snail  go,  { 
Ye  (two)  shall  go. 
They  (two)  shall  go. 


Plural. 

Te  mow  aioo  gimowtoloo.     We  (several)  shall  go,  (not 

you.) 
Te  tow  aioo  gitowtoloo.         We  (several)  shall  go,  (I,  you, 

&c.) 
Te  mo  aioo  gimotoloo.  Ye  (several)  shall  go. 

Te  now  aioo  ginowWloo.       They  (several)  shall  go. 


The  imperative  or  precatire  mood  Is  chiefly  denoted  by 


3JF8  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

the  deficieucy  botb  of  a  modal  and  temporal  sign :  it  hat 
the  secoud  person  singular,  and  the  first  and  second  person* 
dnal  and  plural.  In  the  second  person  singular,  the  pro- 
noun coy  or  subject  of  the  verb  comes  after  it ;  but  in  the 
first  and  second  persons  dual  and  plural,  the  pronouns  torn 
and  mo  come  before  the  verb,  and  the  pronouns  that  dis- 
tinguish the  numbers  follow  the  verb. 


Example* — Si  ngular. 
A'loo  cov.  Oo  thou. 

Dual. 

Tow  a'loo  gito'wooa.         Let  us  go,  (you  and  I). 
Mo  a'loo  gimofooa.  Go  ye,  (ye  two). 

Plural. 

Tow  aloo  gito'wtoloo.      Let  us  go,  (you,  I,  &a) 
Mo  a'loo  ginWto'loo.        Go  ye,  (ye  three  or  more). 

The  first  person  dual  and  plural  of  this  mood  cannot  be 
used  unless  the  person  or  persons  spoken  to  are  requested 
to  include  themselves  also ;  as  in  the  phrase  toxv  atloo,  let  us 
go,  the  person  spoken  to  is  requested  or  ordered  to  go 
likewise ;  for  in  no  other  sense  can  the  first  person  dual 
and  plural  be  rationally  used  in  this  mood.  With  this  ex* 
ception,  therefore,  the  imperative  or  precative  mood  con- 
sists,  as  it  ought  to  do,  of  the  second  person  only  in  each 
number;  but  even  the  first  person  dual  and  plural  when 
the  pronoun  tow  is  used,  cannot  altogether  be  considered 
irrational.  All  other  forms  that  may  be  conceived  to  be- 
long to  this  mood  must  be  expressed  by  the  help  of  the. 
subjunctive  mood,  discovering  the  object  or  purpose  for 
which  the  command  is  made ;  according  to  these  forms,  at. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  379 

M>  noite  that  we  may  sleep,  (i.  e.  let  ut  sleep,  using 
r  the  pronoun) ;  let  him  go,  (i.  e.  permit  or  grant 
i  may  go),  &c. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOO. 

re  is  but  one  form  in  this  mood,  and  that  is  denoted 
sign  ger,  and  is  applicable  to  any  tense,  as, 

Singular. 

Ger  te  a'loo. 
Ger  ger  a'loo. 
Ger  a'loo  ia. 

Dual. 

Ger  mow  a'loo  gimo'wooa. 
Ger  tow  a'loo  gitowooa. 
Ger  mo  a'loo  gimo'ooa. 
Ger  now  a'loo  gino'wooa. 

Plural. 

Ger  mow  a'loo  gimowto'loo. 

Ger  tow  aloo  gitowto'loo. 

Ger.  mo  a'loo  gimoto'loo. . 

Ger  now  a'loo  ginowtottoo.  <  . 

i  not  always  necessary,  however,  in  the  Tonga  verbs, 
inguish  between  the  dual  and  plural  numbers;  for 
lefinite  plural,  i.  e.  without  the  pronouns  ending  in 
d  Uttoo,  is  often  used :  this  is  done  when  the  former 
Fine  sentence  sufficiently  indicates  whether  it  is  dual 
ml ;  or  where  an  uncertain  number  (two  or  more)  ia 


380 


A  GRAMMA*  OF 


spoken  of;  or  where  precise  accuracy  is  not  required.    An 
example  of  the  verb  without  these  duel  end  plural  pronouns 
will  be  useful  to  bring  into  one  view  the  simplicity  of  its 
1    construction :  we  shall  take  the  rerb  m&ket  to  sleep* 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Singular. 

Goo's  te  mo'he. 
Goo  ger  mo'he. 
Goo'a  mo'he  i'a. 


Present  tense. 


Plural. 

GoCa  mow  (or  tow)  mo  he. 
Goo'a  mo  mo'he. 
Goo'a  now  mo'he. 


Singular. 

Ne'oo  mo'he. 
Na  ger  mo'he. 
Na  mohe  ia. 


Fast  tense. 


Plural. 


Na  mow  (or  tow)  mo'he. 
Na  mo  raolie. 
Na  now  ne'he. 


Singular. 

Te'oo  mo'he. 
Te  ger  mo'he. 
£  mo'he  ia. 


Future  Sense. 


Plural. 

Te  mow  (or  tow)  mo'he. 
Te  mo  mo'he. 
Te  now  mo'he. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Mo/be  coy. 
Tow  mo'he. 
Mo  mo'he. 


THE  TONGA  LAN4GA6E.  381 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Ger  te  mo'he. 
Ger  ger  mo'he. 
Ger  mo'he  iu. 

Ger  mow  (or  ton)  mo'he. 
Ger  mo  mo'he. 
Ger  now  mo'he. 

The  third  person  of  the  past  teffte  may  be  changed  from 
na  mo'he  ia,  into  ita'i  mo'he.  The  third  person  of  the  future 
may  be  changed  from  e  m&he  ia,  into  tfnne  mo'he.  If  the 
dual  number  is  required  to  be  expressed,  it  must  be  done 
by  the  addition  of  the  pronouns  ending  in  oo'q  ;  if  the  plural, 
by  those  ending  in  to1  ho. 

In  respect  to  that  form  of  the  verb  usually  called  the  in- 
finitive mood,  it  must  be  acknowledged,  that  the  Tonga 
verb  has  very  little  claim  to  a  distinction  of  this  kind :  but 
with  a  view  to  shew  how  the  infinitive  mood  in  our  own* 
language  is  to  be  expressed  in  this,  we  shall  make  a  few 
observations  respecting  it. 

There  are  three  points  of  view  in  which  we  may  consider 
the' infinitive  mood  of  our  own  language,  with  regard1  to  its' 
translation  into  Tonga,  viz.  first,  where  object,  scope,  or 
purpose  is  signified :  as,  he  came  here  tojigkt;  I  went  there 
to  sleep,  &c. ;  i.  e.  for  the  purpose  of  fighting,  of  sleeping, 
&c:  secondly,  where  wish  or  desire  is  signified :  as,  t  Want 
feat;  I  wish  to  dk:  thirdly,  where  the  infinitive  mood'as- 
somes  still  more  evidently  the  nature  of  a  noun,  allowing 
(even  in  English)  an  adjective  expressive  of  its  quality:  as, 
to  sleep  is  refreshing ;  t o  dk  is  awful. 

In  the  first  case,  that  is  to  say,  where  object,  scope,  or 
purpose  is  signified,  the  particle  ger  most  be  put  before  the 


382  A  GRAMMAR  OP 

word  expressing  the  object :  as,  na  how  ia  gi-hini  GBR  mo'h~, 
he  came  here  to  sleep;  na  a'loo  ia  gi-hena  ger  tow,  be 
went  there  to  6ght:  ger  mothe  and  ger  tow  may  here  be  con* 
sidered  the  subjunctive  mood,  that  he  might  sleep,  that  ke 
fright \fight ;  for  ger  is  actually  the  sign  of  that  mood,  though 
the  pronoun  ia  is  not  repeated  after  mtfhe  and  tow,  because 
it  was  already  indicated  after  how  and  a  loo. 

In  the  second  case,  viz.,  where  wish  or  desire  is  expressed, 
the  noun  is  used  without  the  article :  as,  goo' a  tejpa  mo'he, 
I  wish  to  sleep;  goo'a  tefia  mate,  I  wish  to  die;  and  this 
is  exactly  the  form  in  which  it  may  be  expressed  in  En- 
glish :  as,  I  wish  death ;  I  want  sleep :  where  it  is  seen  that 
the  noun  is  used  without  the  article,  as  if  it  were  the  proper 
name  of  a  being. 

It  often  happens  in  the  Tonga  as  well  (probably)  as  in 
other  uncivilized  tongues,  that  ideas  are  expressed  by  the 
aid  of  nouns,  which  could  not  bear  to  be  translated  into 
cultivated  languages,  but  as  verbs,  or  at  least  as  participles; 
though  in  the  language  to  which  they  belong  they  shall 
have  all  the  character  of  nouns,  even  with  the  article  before 
them  :  as,  in  this  sentence,  he  met  the  man  walking :  the  par-. 
ticiple  walking  would  have  in  the  Tonga  the  article  before 
it,  like  a  noun  :  as,  naijeccatagi  he  e'va  he  tmmgaHa,  he  met 
the  walking;  (i.  e.  in  the  walk),  the  man.  As  therefore 
the  noun  in  this  language  is  proportionably  so  much  more 
frequent  than  the  verb,  wherever  it  may  be  doubtful  whe- 
ther a  word  be  a  verb  or  a  noun,  for  the  sake  of  uuiformhj, 
we  call  it  a  noun. 

The  third  and  last  form  of  the  infinitive  is  where  it  hsi 
decidedly  the  character  of  a  noun,  and  is  therefore  in  tie 
Tonga  expressed  with  the  article ;  (that  is  to  say,  where  de- 
sire or  wish  is  not  expressed) :  as,  to  sail  is  pleasant,  go*** 
HUe  hefeU/w ;  i.e.  is  pleasant  the  sailing ;  got/a  UM  he  s*fc» 
i.  e.  is  good  the  sleep,  or,  to  sleep  is  good. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  383 

There  jure  three  words  in  this  language  which  may  be 
used  either  as  verbs  or  prepositions ;  these  are  my,  u'too,  ami 
amgi;  as  verbs,  they  mean  to  give  ;  as<prepositions,  they  sig- 
nify to,  or  towards :  they  are  to  be  used,  accordingly,  as  the 
first,  second,  or  third  person  follows ;  thus,  my  signifies  to 
give  any  thing  to  me,  or  us ;  a1  too,  to  give  to  thee,  or  you  ; 
a*git  to  give  to  him,  her,  it,  or  them :  for  example, 

My  ia  giate  au:  give  it  to  me. 

My  ia  giate  gimowtotloo :  give  it  to  us. 

T600  a'too  ia  giate  c*ty  ;  I  will  give  it  to  thee. 

T600  (/too  ia  gi'ate  gimowto'loo :  I  will  give  it  to  you. 

Angji  ia  giate  ia  :  give  it  to  him,  or  her. 

Angi  ia  gi'ate  ginoxvtoloo:  give  it  to  them. 

They  mean,  therefore,  not  only  to  give,  but  they  signify, 
also,  the  direction  of  the  gift :  as  prepositions  they  biguify 
not  only  towards,  but  also  the  direction  in  which  the  motion 
is  made;  i.e.  whether  it  is  towards  the  first,  second,  or 
third  person. 

The  present  tense  of  the  verb  to  give  is  never  used  by 
itself,  the  future  being  substituted  for  it:  but  when  my, 
dtoo,  and  angi  are  joined  to  other  verbs,  which  is  often  the 
case  where  transferring  or  giving  is  signified,  or  motion 
towards  is  implied,  they  may  be  used  in  the  present  tense 
if  the  sense  require  it.  Thus  of  a  means  to  lore;  but  for  / 
hve  yow,  it  is  not  sufficient  to  say,  gooa  te  6fa  coy  $  the  verb 
dtio  must  also  be  used  :  example,  gooa  te  6fa  dtoo  giate  coy ; 
literally,  I  love  give  to  you  ;  gooa  tc  6fa  angi  giate  ia,  I  love 
give  to  her :  in  which  two  examples,  if  dtoo  and  angi  be  con- 
sidered verbs,  then  qfa  assumes  the  character  of  a  noun  : 
bat  if  they  be  considered  prepositions,  then  ofa  remains  a 
verb,  mud.  the  literal  translation  will  run  thus :  I  love  towards 
to  you  ;  I  love  towards  to  her ;  in  which  giate  (to)  will  ap- 


384  A  OK  AM  MAR  OF 

pear  superfluous.  But  it  it  not  of  much  consequence  whe- 
ther they  are  verbs  or  prepositions,  provided  we  understand 
how  to  use  them.  The  best  role  to  be  given  is,  that  when 
the  pure  simple  act  of  giving  or  making  a  present  is  signi- 
fied, they  are  used  without  any  other  verb,  as  ttoo  dtoo  ia 
giate  coy,  I  will  give  it  to  thee ;  and,  in  this  case,  either  the 
pass  or  the  future  tense  must  be  used  as  the  sense  will  best 
indicate.  In  respect  to  their  junction  with  other  verbs,  it 
is  generally  either  with  verbs  neuter,  expressing  motion 
towards,  as  to  fly,  to  swim,  to  walk,  to  go,  &c,  or  with  such 
other  verbs,  the  Tonga  words  for  which  may  be  used  either 
as  nouns  or  verbs,  and  being  nouns,  may  be  conceived  to 
be  transferred,  or,  at  least,  to  be  directed  from  one  object 
towards  another;  thus  6fa  mean?,  to  love;  also,  love:  jio 
means,  to  see,  or  look  at ;  also,  a  look ;  ta  means,  to  strike ; 
also,  a  stroke,  or  blow,  &c.  as, 

Teoo  &fa  angi  giate  ia  :  I  shall  love  give  to  her ;  or,  I  shall 
love  towards  to  her. 

Nioo  jio  dtoo  giate  coy :  He  a  look  gave  to  thee ;  or  he 
looked  towards  at  thee. 

Na  ta  my  ia  gfatc  au :  He  a  blow  gave  to  me ;  or,  he 
struck  towards  at  me. 

In  these  instances  the  words  my,  dtoo,  and  angi  are  per- 
haps  best  translated  as  verbs  of  giving,  transferring,  or  di- 
recting towards ;  but  when  they  are  joiued  with  verbs  of 
motion,  they  appear  to  assume  more  of  the  character  of 
prepositions. 

Na  boo'na  a' too  he  ma* ttoo  gitate  coy:    Flew  towards  the 
bird  to  thee;  or,  the  bird  flew  towards  thee. 

Jfioo  telle  angi  gi  he  folic:  I  ran  towards  to  the  house. 

Na  Wit  my  ia  gtate  au :  Ran  towards  he  to  me;  or,  he 
ran  towards  me. 

In  both  cases,  the  words  my,  dtbo,  and  angi,  imoiedittfK 
follow  the  verb  or  noun  to  which'  they  belong,  tfhd  if''"" 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  305 

agent  of  the  verb  be  in  the  third  person,  whether  a  pronoun, 
a  proper  name,  or  any  thing  else,  it  always  comes  after  dtoo, 
sty,  or  angi ;  as  in  two  of  the  examples  last  given,  he  mdnoo 
(the  bird),  follows  dtoo,  and  ia  (he),  follows  my. 

They  also  form  parts  of  compound  words :  as,  talamy,  ta- 
Uioo9  and  talartgi,  which  signify  to  tell,  say,  or  disclose ; 
but  the  first,  from  tola  and  my,  means  to  inform  me  or  us ; 
the  second,  from  tola  and  a! too,  to  inform  thee,  or  you ;  the 
third,  from  f«7a,  and  angi,  to  inform  him,  her,  them. 

As  the  words  my,  dtoo,  and  angh  involve  the  idea  of  the 
person,  the  personal  pronoun  is  often  not  expressed ;  as, 
my  means,  give  to  me,. instead  of  saying,  my  gVaU  au. 

ADVERBS. 

Most  of  the.  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  by  the 
addition  of  fucca  (mode,  or  manner),  or  angc  (like  or  similar 
to) :  when  the  former  is  used,  it  constitutes  the  first  part  of 
the  adverb ;  when  the  latter  is  adopted,  it  forms  the  latter 
part :  for  examples, 

MamaJa.     Heavy.  Mamafa-ange.     Heavily. 

Liili.    Good.  Lille-ange.     Well. 

Malolii.     Strong.  Malobi-ange.     Strongly. 

Yf-rf.    Weak.  V^-vy'-ange.     Weakly. 

TVa.     Brave.  Fucca-to'a.    Bravely. 

Hatta-matta  tow.  Warlike.  Fucca  matta-matta  tow.     In 

a  warlike  manner. 

Ita.     Anger.  Fucca-i'ta.    Angrily. 

Bibfco.    Laiy.  Fucca-bibi'co.    Lazily. 

In  the  formation  of  the  greater  part  of  adverbs  that  are 
thus  derived  these  affixes  may  be  used  indifferently ;  or,  to 
ipsak  linn  i  explicitly,  any  of  tbem  may  be  formed  by  a*gc, 
itted  as  a  suffix,  and  the  greater  part  by  fucca,  used  as  a 

vol..  11.  cc  . 


3$0 


A  GRAMMAR  Off 


prefix:  but  a*Jvcca  is  often  employed  to  form  verbs 
adjectives,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  vocabulary  by  the  list  of 
words  beginning  with  it,  the  adoption  of  it  is  not  so  safe  as 
that  of  angc :  for  instance,  liliS  means  good;  but fmcca  titti 
means  peace,  peaceful,  to  make  a  peace ;  we  must  there- 
fore say,  lille'  angc,  tor  uxll. 

As  there  are  several  adverbs,  chiefly  those  of  time  aod 
place,  which  are  not  formed  according  to  the  foregoiag 
rules,  it  would  be  well  to  subjoin  a  list  of  tbem. 


Be.     Onlv. 

Blhe;   tattow   be.     In  like 

manner. 
Tete.     Almost. 
Fefe.     How. 
Foofa-be.  Universally;  whol- 

Fucca  tdha.     Together. 

Gehe  j  g6he-g6he.  Sepa- 
rately. 

Iky'  obi'to.     Not  at  all. 

Abe.    Perhaps. 

Mali'e.     Well. 

Mdo*ni-ange.     Truly. 

Gi'-fe;  i'-f6.  Where;  whither. 

H6ui.     Here  ;  this  place. 

Gi-h6ni.  Here;  to  this  place. 

H£na.     There  ;  that  place. 

Gi-h6na;  gi-he.  There;  to 
that  place. 

Gi-lo'to.    Within. 

Gi-tooto.    Without. 

Gi-bo'too;  tow-bo'too.  On 
one  side. 


Gi-ha'ge;  gi-aloo'nga.  Up- 
wards. 

Gi-hi'fo ;  gi-lalo.  Down- 
wards. 

Gi-moo'a;  moo'a-ange.  For- 
wards; in  front;  in  pre- 
sence of. 

Gi-moo'i ;  moo'i-ange.  Back- 
wards; behind. 

Gi-matow.  To  the  right 
hand. 

Gi-hema.     To  the  left 

Me-fe.     Whence. 

Me-hdni.     Hence. 

Me-h6na.     Thence. 

M  e-aloo'nga ;  me-ha'ge.  Fran 
above. 

Me-hifo ;  me-lalo.  Froa 
below. 

Mama'oo.     Afar  off. 

Tow-bo'too  gi  heni.  On  tab 
side. 

Tow  botoo  gi  tens.  Ofrtktt 
side. 


THE  TONOA  LA»OU  AGE.  387 

Gcbe.       Differently;    else-  Aft.     When    (in   a  future 

where;  otherwise.  sense). 

He  t/ho    colni;    he  aho'oi.  Aniffc.     When    (in    a    past 

To-day.  sense). 

Alto-be ;  ahoa'nge-be.  Daily,  Lo'a.   Long  since ;  long  ago* 

Abofagi-bcngi.    To-morrow.  Ik/.    Never. 

Anibo'.    Last  night.  Co(wca'.     Whilst  (only  used 

Aniaffi.    Yesterday.  with  the  first  person). 

IVki.    Lately.  Lofloto'nga.      Whilst    (only 

Ts/loo.     Since.  used  with  the  second  and 

Any*.  Presently;  by-and-by.  third  persons). 

Tesjiehi'.     Not  yet  j    before  To'e.    Again ;  over  again. 

that. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

There  are  but  few  words  that,  strictly  speaking,  come 
under  this  head ;  and  some  of  those  that  do  are  often  not 
expressed.  There  are  many  others  that  partake  so  much  of 
the  nature  of  adverbs,  that  they  are  classed  accordingly. 

Afy;  of  too;  angi.  To,  towards.  The  use  of  these  has 
been  already  explained  under  the  head  of  verbs.  (See  p.  383). 
My  always  precedes  the  first  personal  pronoun  expressed  or 
understood :  (/too,  the  second  personal  pronoun :  angi,  the 
third,  or  any  noun. 

Gi ;  gCa ;  gi'ate.  To,  at,  among.  These  three  words 
have  the  same  signification ;  but  gi  is  used  before  nouns  and 
proper  names  of  places ;  gCa  before  the  proper  names  of 
persons,  and  giate  before  pronouns. 

Gi,  and  gifa,  also  signify  than,  being  used  to  connect  the 
two  terms  of  comparison :  before  the  proper  names  of  per- 
tone,  £fa  must  be  used. 

Gi  signifies  likewise,  against,  opposite ;  and  about,  or  cor- 


c  c  2 


388  A  OBAMMAft  OF 

Mo.  With,  along  with,  besides*  it  ii also  the  conjunction 
and ;  it  is,  moreover,  the  pronoun  you,  your* 

Tad.  Without;  destitute  of ;  not  having.  This  particle 
is  in  very  frequent  use  as  a  deprivative,  joined  to  other  words, 
like  our  particles  m,  umf  it,  leu,  &c. :  it  always  precedes  the 
word  to  which  it  is  joined. 

&fi.    By ;  at  hand ;  near  to. 

Me.    From ;  as,  from  Vavaoo  to  Lefooga. 

A.  Of,  or  belonging  to ;  but  it  is  only  used  before  proper 
navies  of  persons  and  places  j  as,  mala'nga  a  Toobo4,  the  speech 
of  Toobo' :   he  gna'too  a  Vavaoo,  the  gnatoo  of  Vm 

Ma.  For ;  it  is  very  commonly  used  before  the 
sive  pronoun,  when  adopted  instead  of  the  personal,  at, 
instead  of  saying,  my  ia  gCate  au,  give  it  to  me,  we  may  say, 
my  ia  ma  acoo,  give  it  for  my. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

In  respect  to  these,  we  need  only  give  a  list  of  those  that 
are  in  common  use. 
Oiao!  exclamation  of  surprise. 
Seoo'ke !  of  surprise  or  astonishment ;  the  oo  is  dwelt  long 

upon. 
Seooke !    Seook61e !  Oiaooi!    Of  pity,  pain,  or  distress. 

dwelling  very  long  upon  the  c'. 
Oia'oo !  the  same  as  above ;  dwelling  long  upon  the  oo  t* 

well  as  the  a. 
Aw-i !  of  pity,  pain. 
Wo'i !  of  wonder. 
Wi!  of  disgust;  fye! 

Psa !  of  anger,  vexation,  and  rage  ^dwelling  long  upon  tbei. 
Tangi  moc/ni !  a  sort  of  oath  ;  solemnly  declaring  the  truth* 
Fi'amo-aloo  !  begone ;  out  of  my  sight. 
N6-n6 !  no  wonder. 
To!  yes  indeed ;  well. 
O'ooa!  forbear;  softly. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  369 


NUMERALS. 

1  tana. 

• 

10  ongofooloo,  or  ooloo.  * . 

2  oo'a. 

20  oo'a  ongofooloo,  or  oo'a- 

3  tolo. 

fooloo. 

4  fa. 

30  toloo  ongofooloo. 

5  ni'tna. 

40  &  ongofooloo. 

6  cno. 

50  ni'nta  ongofooloo. 

7  fi'too. 

60  o'no  ongofooloo. 

8  va'loo. 

70  fi'to  ongofooloo. 

9  hi'va. 

80  va'loo  ongofooloo. 

90  hi'va  ongofooloo. 

1GO  tea'oo. 

1000  a'fe. 

200  oo'a  gnea'oo. 

2000  oo'a  a'fe. 

300  toloo  gnea'oo. 

3000  toloo  a'fe. 

400  fa  gnea'oo. 

4000  fa  a'fe. 

10,000  mano.  20,000  ootofoo'loo  ma'no. 

1 1,000  ina'no  mo  a'fe.  30,000  toloo  ongofooloo 

12,000  ma  no  mo  oo'a  a'fe.  ma'oo. 

13,000  ma'no  mo  toloo  a'fe.     40,000  fa  ongofooloo  mauo. 

100,000  giloo. 

In  respect  to  further  combinations  of  these  numbers,  they 
run  thus: 

1 1  ongofooloo  ma  ta'ha.  21  ootofooloo  ma  ta'ha. 

12  ongofooloo  ma  otom.  28  oo'afoodoo  ma  oo'a. 

13  ongofooloo  ma  oloo.  31  toloo  ongofooloo  ma  ta'ha. 

14  ongofooloo  ma  fa.  41  fa  ongofooloo  ma  ta'ha. 


101  tea'oo  ma  ta'ha.  1001  iffe  ma  ta'ha. 

120  tea'oo  ma  oo'afooloo.  1100  m*fe  mm  tea'oo. 

121  tea'oo  ma  oo'afoo'loo  mm  1800  affi»  mm  vaftoo  gneafoo. 

taha. 


tgO  A  OlANMAB  Of 

95,741  Hitvamdno,  ma  ni'ma  dfe,ma  Ji'too  gnedoo,  mafaom- 

goofooloo,  ma  tdha :  that  is,  nine  ten-thousands,  and  &** 

thousand,  and  seven  hundred,  and  four  tens,and  one. 

It  mutt  be  observed,  that  there  are  two  words  for  tea, 
viz. :  ongnfooloo,  and  odloo,  which  may  be  used  indifferently 
for  that  number  simply  $  but  in  combinations  the  former 
only  can  be  adopted.  For  twenty  there  are  also  two  words, 
viz.  oo*a  ongofoo'foo,  and  oo'qfoo'loo,  either  of  which  may  be 
employed  in  combination  with  the  digits.  In  regard  to  the 
number  of  a  hundred,  tca'oo,  it  is  never  used  in  the  plural, 
gnea'oo  being  substituted  for  it :  thus,  200  cannot  be  ex- 
pressed by  on  a  teofoo,  but  oda  gnedoo. 

In  counting  out  yams  and  fish,  they  reckon  by  pairs,  in  the 
particular  method  explained  in  the  Vocabulary  under  the 
word  Ucow. 

What  are  called  ordinal  numbers  they  express  by  pottiag 
the  article  he  immediately  before  the  number:  this  indeed 
is  one  mode  of  forming  the  plural  (see  NOUNS),thus:  arts* 
to  loo,  or  a  ho  he  to' loo,  means  the  third  day,  whilst  it  also  signi- 
fies three  days :  but  the  sense  in  most  instances  sufficiently 
points  out  the  distinction. 

In  connecting  cardinal  numbers  by  the  conjunction  and, 
they  generally  use  the  word  ma  instead  of  mo,  except  before 
a'fe,  a  thousand,  when  010  is  more  commonly  used.  The 
conjunction  ma  is,  however,  never  employed  but  for  con- 
necting numbers :  on  other  occasions  this  word  is  either  the 
prepositions/or,  or  the  name  of  a  certain  preparation  of  food. 

It  may  appear  strange  that  they  have  particular  oames 
for  such  high  numbers  as  10,000,  and  100,000,  *mts*, 
and  giVoo,  for  they  certainly  have  no  use  for  them.  They 
often  have  occasion  to  count  yams  to  the  number  of  a 
thousand,  or  more,  and  sometimes  to  the  amount  of  two 
or  three  thousand,  but  never  higher.  M.  Labillardiere, 
however,  has  had  the  perseverance  to  interrogate  the  na- 
tives, and  obtain  particular  names  for  numbers  as  high  as 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  391 

IyO0O,0O0,O0OJO00>O0O ! !  Here,  however,  he  hat  overshot 
the  mark,  and  instead  of  names  of  number*,  has  only 
famished  its  with  names  of  things  very  remote  from  his 
speculations  at  that  time :  for  1,000,000  he  gives  us  nanoOi 
which  has  no  meaning  that  we  can  discover :  for  10,000,000 
fedflfart,  which  should  be  Ivodh  (according  to  our  spelling), 
which  means  the  prseputium ;  for  100,000,000 /ooitrtotia  (low 
as/a),  which  means  nonsense  .•  ]  ,000,000  000  //<?#  wer,  which 
ww  take  for  Ha*gi,  and  is  the  name  of  a  game  played  with  the 
hoods,  with  which  probably  he  made  signs:  for  10,000,000,000 
fofs  tmfai  fto'lc  ho  fate),  for  which  see  the  Vocabulary : 
Ij00O»O0O,0OQ,0OO,  Hngka  (litoga)  see  the  Vocabulary :  for  a 
higher  number,  they  give  him  nana  (the  glans  penis) ;  for  a 
still  higher  number,  kaimaau  (ky  ma  ow),  by  which  they  tell 
htm  to  eat  up  the  things  which  they  have  just  been  naming  to 
him:  but  M.  Labillardiere  was  not  probably  the  first  sub- 
ject of  this  sort  of  Tonga  wit,  which  is  very  common  with 
them.  In  die  other  numbers  he  is  tolerably  correct,  except 
in  putting  giloo  for  mano,  and  mano  for  giloo :  his  general 
iimcy  in  respect  to  the  numbers  does  him  great  credit. 


SYNTAX. 

i* 

To  enter  minutely  into  this  subject,  according  to  the  usual 
form  of  grammars,  would  perhaps  tend  rather  to  perplex  the 
memory  than  to  assist  the  judgment :  for  we  are  not  treating 
of  a  language  the  rules  of  which  have  been  before  systema- 
tically investigated,  and  written  down ;  we  are  at  present  only 
in  the  act  of  making  an  investigation,  in  which  the  reader  is 
requested  to  accompany  us  *.    General  rules  have  already 

•  Mr.  Mariner  of  course  only  obtained  a  practical  knowledge  of  (be 
r,  for  the  natives  theaiAeWes  have  no  other.  I  have  depended 
him  to  furniah  me  with  good  composition,  aud  upon  this  the  pre- 
sent investigation  is  built. 


9$2  *     A  GRAMMAR  Of' 

been  given  under  each  part  of  speech,  we  shall  now  therefore 
merely  furnish  a  few  other  observations  in  regard  to  cob* 
ttruction,  and  give  a  few  of  the  more  difficult  idioms  of 
speech ;  and  in  order  that  the  reader  may  be  better  enabled 
to  construe  the  ensuing  specimens  of  composition,  and 
thereby  arrive  at  the  genius  of  the  language,  a  strictly  li- 
teral translation  will  be  adjoined  to  each, 

1.  In  the  first  place,  it  must  be  noticed,  that  the  tenses 
of  vet  be  are  often  confounded;  the  future  is  frequently 
used  for  the  present,  and  the  present  for  the  past ;  thus, 
I  do  not  know  is  rendered  in  Tonga  by  ify  tioo  tfo'a,  literally, 
I  shall  not  know.  The  present  tense  is  generally  used  for  the 
past,  when  the  action  spoken  of  happened  not  long 

2.  The  future  tense  is  also  often  used  to  express 
vould,  likewise  can,  could :  thus,  iky*  tioo  aloo,  I  cannot  go; 
capdw  tinnc  Moo,  if  he  should  go. 

3.  When  the  future  tense  is  used  to  express  can,  could, 
would,  should,  &c.  and  the  negative  is  connected  with  it ; 
the  latter  always  comes  immediately  before  the  sign  of  the 
tense  te.  It  must  also  be  observed,  that  in  this  appticarioe 
of  the  future,  the  second  class  of  personal  pronouns  (or 
those  which  follow  verbs,  and  may  be  Englished  by  ssjwejf, 
tfynlf,  &c.)  may  either  be  sjsed  or  not,  in  addition  to  those 
that  come  before  the  verb :  note  also,  that  in  this  form  of 
the  future  the  third  person  singular  is  always  tenm,  ftc : 
for  example. 

Iky  te'oo  a'loo  (git  a  J  ;  I  can,  could,  would,  or  should  not 
go. 

Iky  te'gger  aloo  (cot/) ;  thou  canst,  wouldst,  or  shouMst 
not  go. 

Iky  te'nne  aloo  (ia)  ;  he  can,  could,  would,  or  should 
not  go. 

Iky  te  mow  aloo  (gimo'wooa,  or  gimovto'ho);  we  cam, 
could,  would,  or  should  not  go. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  393 

Iky  tetcw  adoo  (git&wooo,  or  gitowtuloo)  ;  we  can,  could, 
would,  or  should  not  go. 

Iky  tern©1  uloo  (gimo'ooa,  or  gimoto'loo);  ye  can,  could, 
would,  or  should  not  go. 

Iky  teno'w  a'loo  (gino'wooa,  or  ginowto'loo) ;  they  can, 
could,  would,  or  should  not  go. 

Where  the  use  of  the  pronouns  gita,  coy,  ia,  gimowooa,  Spc. 
is  quite  optional :  if  this  form  of  teuse  is  used  interroga- 
tively, there  is  no  distinction  but  in  the  tone  of  voice. 

4.  When  verbs  of  the  same  tense  are  repeated  in  a  sen- 
tence, or  even  in  several  consecutive  sentences,  the  sign  of 
the  tense  is  often  left  out,  except  in  the  first. 

5.  The  personal  pronouns  that  come  before  verbs,  (see 
pronouns),  and  are  agents  of  verbs,  are  sometimes  omitted; 
but  then  the  corresponding  personal  agents  that  follow  verbs 
are  used  instead:  as,  low  git  a,  I  think,  instead  of  te  low; 
where  it  is  seen  that  the  sign  of  the  tense  is  also  omitted  : 
ca  tmdngc  git ow to' loo  gi  he  htfodnga,  whilst  we  stand  near 
the  descent,  (upon  the  heights) :  here  gitowtoloo  follows  the 
verb  taoangc,  but  tow  does  not  come  before  it. 

6.  The  agent  to  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular, 
whether  pronoun,  proper  name,  or  noun,  always  follows  the 
verb,  end  even  other  words  so  uptimes  intervene :  as,  na  fc~ 
ctfw  gUte  ginowto'loo  leva  Tangaltfa,  Tangaloa  ordered  to 
them  accordingly. 

7*  The  possessive  pronoun,  when  a  noun  follows,  usually 
has  the  article  preceding  it :  as,  he  now  vaca,  the  their  ca- 


8.  Co'ia,  which  signifies  that  is,  that  is  it,  the  very  same,  is 

often  separated,  co  being  put  at  the  beginning,  and  ia  at  the 

of  the  sentence :  as,  co  he  leo  moo'ni  ia,  that  is  the  true 

or  guarding  $  literally,  is  the  watch  true  that. 

9*  The  particle  be  may  generally  be  Englished  by  one  of 

these  conjunctions,  andf  also,  or :  often  it  may  be  translated 


\ 


3p4  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

**ly;  particularly  when  it  comes  at  the  end  of  any  member 
•fa  sentence,  or  before  the  pronoun  ia:  it  is  frequently  a 
mere  expletive.  For  the  explanation  of  co  and  co'e  see  the 
Article,  (P.  5.  of  the  Grammar).  Mo  may  either  be  the 
conjunction  and,  or  the  pronouns  you,  your;  or  the  prepo- 
sition with.  The  pur  tide  tie  is  occasionally  annexed  to 
wofds  for  euphony's  sake:  as,  no/one  for  nqfo,  to  dwell  or 
remain,  Sec. ;  but  the  e  of  this  particle  is  scarcely  pro- 
mounced ;  it  serves,  however,  to  lengthen  the  o,  and  the  syl- 
teblefonc  is  then  pronounced  like  our  words  cone,  prone:  the 
some  with  taco'tone  for  tacofto  ;  Whene  for  be' Ac,  &c. 

10.  Many  of  the  minor  parts  of  speech  are  often  omitted ; 
such  as,  which,  that,  since,  with,  in,  is,  are,  he,  she,  U,  &c. 

As  to  particular  idioms  of  speech,  we  shall  take  them 
■•ore  or  less  in  the  order  in  which  they  occur,  in  the  ensu- 
ing pieces  of  composition. 

1 1 »  Maio  is  a  term  of  salutation,  approbation,  and  good 
wishes:  it  may  mean  welcome,  well  done,  well  borne,  well 
said,.  &c.  When  one  person  visits  another,  the  latter  says, 
maio,  your  coming  or  arrival :  the  other  answers,  tnalo,  your 
staying  here:  so  they  may  sa}-,  maio,  your  harangue  or 
speech  •,  maio,  your  work.  If  a  man  has  borne  a  surgical 
operation  with  fortitude,  they  will  say  to  him,  maio9  your  pa- 
tience or  fortitude. 

12.  The  figure  of  speech  which  grammarians  call  onti- 
phrasis  is  very  much  used  in  the  Tonga  luuguage,  not 
ironically,  but  on  the  most  common  and  the  mo*t  serious  oc- 
casions: if  they  wish  to  express  how  great  any  thing  is,  they 
call  it  little;  or  how  many  there  are,  how  few:  instead  of 
saying,  what  a  number  of  yams  are  here,  they  wilFtay,  here 
is  only  one  yam  f  For  I  love  you  much,  /  don't  lave  yom  at 
a.  I :  hence  the  word  chiodofa,  a  term  of  affection  aud  en- 
dearment, is  derived  from  chi  atoo  qfa,  signifying,  literally, 
small  towards  you  (my)  love;  but  really  meaning,  my  love  for 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  $Q 

you  it  Tcry  great  Several  examples  of  this  figure  occur  in 
Finow's  speech  to  the  Vavaoo  people  on  his  accession  to  the 
government.  The  sense  of  the  context,  or  the  maimer  or 
voice  of  the  speaker  always  sufficiently  indicates  what  i* 
Italy  meant:  this  figure  is  also  used  in  derision,  and  it 
must  be  acknowledged  they  have  a  vein  for  irony. 

13.  If  a  man  is  very  breve,  it  is  an  usual  form  of  phrase 
to  say,  he  is  the  only  brave  man :  if  a  woman  is  very  beau- 
tiful, she  is  the  only  beautiful  woman,  and  so  with  other 
things. 

14.  There  are  several  familiar  phrases  which  often  occur 
in  conversation,  some  of  which  it  would  be  difficult  to  un- 
derstand from  a  literal  translation,  such  as, 

Coe  low ;  they  say ;  it  is  said  that. 

Cote  moVni ;  true ;  it  is  true. 

Co  bo  moofai ;  it  is  your  truth ;  you  are  in  the  right. 

Goo*  lillc ;  very  well. 

Na  ger  ifet?  where  hast  thou  been  ?  where  wert  thou  ? 

Na  ife7  ia  ?  where  has  he  been  ?  where  was  he  ? 

Iky'  chi ;  not  so  much  as  a  little ;  not  at  all ;  also  (by  an- 
tiphrasis),  a  great  deal. 

CoVce'  eloo  au ;  whilst  I  go.  Here  is  another  instance  of 
the  pronoun  au  following  the  verb,  instead  of  the  pro- 
noun te  coming  before  it. 

Iky*  obito ;  not  at  all ;  by  no  means. 

In  Fioow's  speech,  which  is  given  the  last,  there  are  se« 

veral  phrases  difficult  to  translate;  for  it  is  not  only  the  finest 

piece  of  composition,  but  it  has  more  idioms  than  those 

which  precede  it;  for  which  reason  it  is  placed  after  the 

others,  and  to  render  it  more  easy  to  be  understood,  we 

km  explain  those  phrases  which  are  the  most  difficult  to 

comprehend. 
Id.  He  mov.mow  vai  tocboo  he  tow  tai  too'goo 

HETACO/TO  gi  Ma  LAI ;  he  www-maw,  the  destruction ;  *at, 


396  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

the  sign  of  the  past  tense  nay  and  the  proutron  ia  (he);  looftoo, 
caused  by,  or  which  has  sprung  from  ;  he  tow,  the  war ;  ftv 
toogoo,  unceasing ;  he  taco'to,  the  chief  lying  prostrate  (meta- 
phorically, dead)  ;  gi  malaH,  in  the  malai  or  place  where  his 
grave  was;  i.  e.  the  destruction  (which)  has  been  caused  by 
the  war  unceasing  (of)  the  prostrate  chief  (now)  in  the  malai 

16.  Co  lolotonoa  ENI ;  iolotonga,  period,  duration; 
eat,  this ;  i.  e.  now  is  the  time. 

17>  Gooa  ft- FY  bba-ha  ?  Gooa9  the  sign  of  the  present 
tense  used  for  the  past  \fy~fy*  to  keep  doing,  to  be  inces- 
santly doing ;  bca-ha,  and  what  ?  or,  and  what  is  the  result; 
i.  e.  we  have  been  doing  a  great  deal,  (waging  wars,  &c.) 
and  what  good  results  from  it  ? 

18.  TAHA  HE  FOO  EG  I  MO  TANG  ATA  TOW  GOOA  TAW! 

Taha,  one ;  hefoo  egi,  the  great  chief  ;  mo  tangata  low,  and 
warrior ;  gooa  rate,  is  fallen ;  meaning  (by  antiphrasif), 
most  of  the  great  chiefs  and  warriors  are  fallen !  • 

19.  Co  he  loto  aha'i  ?  Co  he  loto,  it  is  the  disposition 
or  wish;  ahait  of  whom?  whose  wish  or  intention  is  it? 
meaning,  how  could  it  be  helped ;  it  has  happened  in  spite 
of  our  disposition  to  the  contrary. 

2a  Ilonga  be  TANGA7ta  :  iionga,  a  mark,  sign,  or  cha- 
racter; be,  only;  tangata,  (of)  a  man,  (the  wisdom  of  s 
man)  ;  i.  e.  it  is  a  manly  or  noble  characteristic. 

21.  He  MBA  COIA  Tai  LOW -no' a  :  he  men,  (it  is)  s 
thing ;  coia,  truly  ;  tai  low-noa,  not  at  all  foolish ;  meaning) 
(by  antiphrasis),  it  is  a  thing  exceedingly  foolish* 

22.  Toonga  MBA  ;  toonga,  a  sign  of  the  plural  number  of 
animate  beings;  mea,  things,  affairs;  toonga  mea  is  used 
idiomatically  to  express  persons,  people. 

23.  O'ooa  na  mo  manatoo  gi  hb  tow  ;  cfooa,  desist; 
na>  in  case  that ;  mo  manaftoo,  you  (are)  thinking ;  gi  hetmh 
about  war ;  i.  e.  in  case  that,  or,  if  your  thoughts  ate  beat 
upon  war ;  desist,  or  give  up  those  thoughts. 


.     THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  397 

24.  Ofa-BB  ;  Oh  that ;  would  to  God ;  let  but :  a  con- 
traction for  ofa-be  ho  egi ;  which  it  an  idiom  of  speech  pray- 
ing the  god*  to  shew  so  much  love  or  mercy  as  to  permit 
that,  Ice. 

25.  LaHI  LE/VA  MB  TOW  GNOtaOB,  TATWW-BB  MO  1A 

■B  TOW  TOA :  laM  leva,  great  accordingly ;  he  tow  gmfooe, 
our  agricultural  works ;  tattdw-bt,  in  like  manner ;  mo  ia, 
with  it ;  he  tow  toa,  our  bravery ;  meaning,  as  the  cultiva- 
tion of  our  land  becomes '  improved,  our  bravery  in  like 
proportion  will  become  greater,  as  we  shall  have  something 
worth  fighting  for. 

36.  COB  LBO  moo'NI  IA;  coefleof  the  guarding;  moVai, 
true;  to,  that:  that  is  the  true  guarding  (he  towfonnooa, 
of  our  land),  alluding  to  the  above  method,  cultivating  it. 

37*  O'OOA  CHI  NA  MO  BB'HB  HB  MO  LOTO;  dooa,  de- 
sift  ;  db°,  a  little ;  na  mo  behe,  in  case  you  say ;  he  mo  ioto,  in 
your  minds.  In  case  you  say  in  your  minds  (so  and  so), 
desist  a  little  from  so  saying;  meaning  (by  antiphrasis),  de- 
sist wholly  or  entirely  from  saying,  Arc. 

28.  Mo  MANA'TOO,  CA  L*'a  A  TOO  LB/TA  AU,  COE 
rUCCA-ONGO   ATOO    IA,   HR    LOTO    A   To'B   OOMOO,   MO 

A  POO,  Arc. ;  mo  manatoo,  recollect  ye;  ca  Ua,  whilst  speak  ; 
atoo  leva  am,  to  you  accordingly  I ;  co'2  fueca-ongo$  is  the 
echoing ;  atoo$  to  you ;  ia9  it ;  he  loto,  (of)  the  minds ;  a  Toe 
Omwoo,  mo  Afoo,  Stc9  of  Toe  Oomoo  and  Afoo,  &c.  Recol- 
lect, whilst  I  speak  to  you,  my  voice  only  echoes  to  your 
ears  the  sentiments  of  Toe  Oomoo,  and  Ooloo  Valoo,  and 
Afoo,  and  Fotoo,  and  Alo,  and  all  the  chiefs  and  matabooles 
of  Vavaoo. 

30.  FlLI-FlLl  HE  MO  UAKACO ',Jiti-Jili9  choose;  he  mo 
mmmsco,  your  wish ;  i.  e.  take  your  choice. 

Id  Fibow's  speech,  it  will  be  observed,  that  the  particle 
me  is  occasionally  attached  to  the  ends  of  words  for  the  sake 
of  euphony,  but  this  has  beeu  noticed  before,  (9). 


396  A  GRAMMAR  Of 

The  dialogue  that  immediately  followg  genres  to  ihosy  a 
few  of  the  more  colloquial  phrases.  It  is  the  substance  af 
an  actual  conversation  at  Vavaoo,  between  two  young  chiefa* 
one  of  whom  has  just  arrived  from  Hapai.  The  other  nieces 
of  composition  are  what  have  already  been  given  in  the 
English,  in  the  body  of  the  work,  and  may  be  referred  to, 
to  assist  the  sense:  the  small  numbers  refer  to  the  rules 
and  idioms  which  have  just  been  given.  The  words  in  the 
Tonga  part  that  are  put  in  Italics  are  either  mere  exple- 
tives, or  else  cannot  be  expressed  in  English  without  sound- 
ing so  uncouthly  as  to  darken  the  sense*  The  Eoglisn 
words  in  parentheses  are  such  as  are  not  expressed  to 
Tonga. 

Malofrlowmy.  (U)  Welcome  (jour)  vejsfs 

hither. 

Malo  ndfo  mo  ho  egi.  Well   done    (your)    remaiaisf 

with  your  chiefs. 

Na  ger  how  anife  me  Hapai  ?  Did  you  come  when  from  Ha- 

pai? 

Oooa  ho  ooa  ht  mow  bow ;  oa  Are  days  two  (since)  ear  as* 
mow  mohe  aoibo  gi  Motoo.  ing :  *  we  slept  last  might  at  Motoe. 


Cue  vaca  gnaholo  ho  vaca ?  Is  the  canoe  swift,  your  esse*? 

Seooke!  coia  be  taha  gooa  gna-  Eh  !  it's  (the)  only  oas  is  swift 

nolo  he  felow  Hapai.  (13)  (in)  the  fleet  (of)  Hapei. 

Low  gita  coe  vaca  lahi  a  Toob6  Think  I  the  canoe  large  of  Toe- 


Toa  gooa  gnaholo  be  tali  a.  bo  Toa  is  snift  (the)  only 

O'ooa !  co  mow  vaca  ia.  Hold  (there)!  is  eur  canoe  that 

Io !  eohai  fooa  he  mo  eow-iaea.        Ah  indeed !  who  all  (7)  year 

crew? 
Coe  mataboole  co  Mooala,  bea        The  mataboole  Mooala   alaa, 
mo  Afoo,  mo  cow-tnngata  a  Voogi.    and  Afoo,  and  the  suite  of  Voogi 
Cobai  he  cow-fafine  gooa  how  ?        Who  are  the  females  that  are 

come? 


*  Our  coming,  here  means  beginning  to  come  or  setting  ost 
Hapai. 


THE  TONGA  LANGUAGE. 


Coe  fkflne  co  Atoo,  bea  mo  La- 
too  Lyfotoo  lea,  mo—. 

8eo6ke!  a6na  be  oeoefooa  he  me 
eow-fafine:  nal  how  ia  eoiha? 
low-gtta  gooa  lata  be  ia  gi  Ilapai. 

Co  ho  mooni !  coe  fonaooa  be 
gooa  latata  ia,  ea  iky'  tegger  iloa 
gooa  mamina  gi  he  tamaehi  co 
Papani. 

Ne-ne  enne  bow !  hamoochia  be 
tama.    Io !  cohai  mo  ia. 

Coe  fafl'ne  co  Paloo,  bea  mo  fa- 
Ane  Tonga  co  Fekika. 

Coe  fkflne  Tonga!  na  mo  gi 
Tonga. 

Na  mow  gi-ai;  co  gimowtoloo 
na  empachia  he  colo  co  Nookoo 
Nookoo. 

Nai  toca  lahi  ht  mo  cow-tow? 
<eohai  mo  gimotoloo. 

Co  gimowtoloo  be,  bea  moe  oow- 
tangita  a  Ata  me  hihifo. 

Cohai  fooa  gooa  cafo-? 

Gooa  toca  lahi  he  mow  cafo ;  coe 
toonga  jiena  fa  fanna  he  colo: 
gooa  mate  he  tangata  co  Falo,  bea 
mo  Boboto ;  be  gooa  cafo  oovi  he 
tama  co  Powfooo,  bea  Panafi. 

Seooke !  mow-mow  he  toonga 
tangata  toa. 

Co  ho  mooni !  g«os  mow  nofo 
manatoo  be  giate  ginowtoloo. 

Coe  fafl'ne  me-fe,  he  faflne  na 
ger  low  my. 

He  fafl'ne  co  Fekika  ? 

Otfabe. 


The  woman  Atoo  alto,  and  La- 
too  Lyf6too  lea,  and— 

Ah!  ahe  only  (is)  beautifal 
(among)  (7)  your  women :  hat  die 
come  for  what  ?  I  think  is  (1)  coo- 
tented  only  she  with  Hapai. 

True !  (14)  is  the  land  only  eon- 
tents  her,  for  not  (1)  shall  yon 
know  (she)  is  enamoured  with  the 
young  man  Papani. 

No  wonder  her  coming !  (how 
I)  envy  the  youth !  well !  who 
with  her  ? 

The  woman  Paloo,  also  and  the 
Tonga  woman  Fekika. 

The  Tonga  woman !  have  been 
you  at  Tonga? 

We  have  been  there ;  (they  were) 
ourselves  (who)  did  besiege  the 
fortress  (of)  Nookoo  Nookoo. 

Was  it  a  body  large  (7)  your 
army  ?  who  (were)  with  you. 

(There  were)  we  only,  also  and 
the  adherents  of  Ata  from  Hihifo. 

Who  all  are  wounded  ? 

Are  persons  many,  our  wound- 
ed :  the  men  (were)  clever  (at  the) 
bow,  (of)  the  fortress:  are  killed, 
the  man  Falo,  also  and  Boboto; 
and  are  wounded  badly  the  youth 
Powfooo,  also  Panafi. 

Alas!  destroyed  arc  (many^ 
brave  men. 

True!  we  remain  rrgmltif 
only  towards  them. 

The  woman  from  whene;  41m 
woman  you  spoke  to  me  (about). 

The  woman  Fekika? 

The  same. 


400 


A  GRAMMAR  OF 


Can  fal'ne  me  Mattaga;  iky 
tegger  manatoo  he  faft'ne  matta- 
boon  gi  he  ibi  a  Motoo  Lftlo  ?  nei 
tiffi  mama  he  bo  na  tow  mone 
gi-ai. 

Nai  tamaehi  he  mflne  edia ! 

Nai  ge  tamaehi,  lolotfaga  ho 
nofo  gi  Tonga,  be  gooa  foo  loa  ho 
nofo  gi  Varaoo. 

Coe  tama  ahii  he  faflne  cdia  ? 

Co*  lama  he  mataboole  «•  Fo- 
too. 
Coe  low,  gooa  to*  obilo  ia. 

Coe  mooni !  nai  toloo  enne  cafo 
he  tow  tow  gi  Nookoo  Nookoo. 

Te  mo  wo  aft  gi  Hapai  ? 

Iky  teoo  iloa :  coe  tow,  te  mow 
tat 41  i  heni  bo  valoo  baa  ongofoo- 
loo. 

Eooa-ger  ger  aloo  teoo  atoo  he 
mea  ma  eooco  fae,  gi-ai. 

Gooa  lille. 

Tow  wo  gi  he  cava  gi  lotoi  ? 

Io,  tow  wo. 


The  woman  from  Maikmga:  net 
shall  ( 1 )  you  remember  the  woman 
beautiful  at  the  house  of  Motso 
Lalo?  she  held  the  light,  tht 
night  we  slept  there. 

Was  a  child  the  woman  that! 

She  was  yet  a  child,  during  your 
stay  at  Tonga,  and  is  (now)  very 
long  your  residence  at  Varaoa. 

The  child  whose,  the 
that? 

Is  the  child  (of)  the 
Fotoo. 

They  say,  is  bra?e  ex< 
be- 
lt is  true!    be  had  three  Mi 
wounds  (in)  our  battle  at  Nook* 
Nookoo. 

Shall  you  go  when  to  Hapai  ? 

Not  shall  I  know  (1) :  they  say 
shall  we  remain  here  eight  or  tea 
days. 

When  you  are  about  to  go,  I 
will  give  (to  you)  some  things  for 
my  mother  there. 

Very  weU ! 

Let  us  go  to  the  cara  within 
the  fencing. 

Yes,  let  us  go. 


The  following  is  the  story  of  Tangaloa  aud  his  two  boos, 
related  p.  122  of  this  volume.  The  sentences  are  here  pat 
into  paragraphs,  the  better  to  assist  the  eye  id  distinguish- 
ing the  English  for  each  principal  word. 

Tomooa  caky  hefonnooa.  First  peopling  the  laid* 

Coehotooa  « Tangaloa*  mo  enne        The  god   Tangaloa,    and  kit 


THB  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  408 

ToealJcoe  to  bene  my  be  toon-    Taoo,TooaLieee,  when  said  to  tit 
ga  fMkne,  the  women, 

Tow  aloo  fon6nga  gi  Liceo  ger  Let  us  go  (a)  walk  to  Licoo,  thai 
maroata he hifo belli:  towfonongo  (we  may)  behold  the  going-down 
gihemaWsttina'noomohetangi  (of)  the  mm:  we  (will)  listen  to 
be  loobe.  the  singing  (of)  the  birds,  and  the 

lamentation*  (of)  the  wood-pigeon. 

TewteUAreaoilagihehifb'anga  We  (wjll)  gather  flowers  near 
gi  Matawto.  the  precipice  at  Matawto. 

Tow  nolb-nofo  bea  tow  toofa  he  We  (will)  remain,  and  we  (wilt) 
tatali  omy  me  Licoe  Cne.  share  out  the  provisions  brought  ufl 

from  Licoo  Cne". 

Tow  ooweow  gi  tahi,  bea  tow  la-  We  (will)  bathe  in  the  sea,  and 
no*  gi  he  Vaoo  A'ea  mo  tow  taky*  we  (will)  rinse  in  the  Taoo  Ac*, 
*r  fango  nana'moo:  tow  tool  ea-  and  we  (will)  anoint  (with)  oil 
eala,  mo  tow  ft  he  chi  k*  tow  toli  sweet-scented :  we  (will)  string 
me  Matawto.  flowers,  and  we  (will)  plait  the  chi 

(which)  we  (hare)  plucked  from 
Matawto. 

Ca  tooange  gitowloloo  gi  he  hi-  Whilst  (are)  standing  we  upon 
feanga  gi  Ana  Manoo,  tew  jio  hifo  the  precipice  at  Ana  Manoo,  we 
nan  tsri-mnna'Yft  •  gi  he  mamaoo  (will)  look  down  without  breath, 
fee  tahi  gi-lalo.  in  the  distance  (upon)  the  sea  be- 

low. 

Gooa  tow  loto  manatoo,  he  too  As  onr  minds  (are)  reflecting, 
ntatangi  gooa  mabooange  my  me  be  the  great  wind  whittles  towards  us 
§m  toa  gi  toogoo-oetoo  gi  tafan-  from  the  great  (lofty)  Toa-treesift 
ga-fanga.  the  inland  upon  the  plains. 

Gooa  te  lote  lahi  f  be  mamata  Is  (to)  me  (the)  mind  large,  be* 
fee  gnaloe  gi-lalo,  footeange  noa-ai-  holding  the  surf  below,  endeavour 
be  ger  lyigi  he  macen  fefeea.  ing  in  Tain  to  tear-away  the  rook* 

firm. 

Goea  ifl-on,  tow  aloo  gi  Moon :  (It)  is  evening,  (let)  ma  ge  to 
sanongo!  gooa  ongo  my  he  langi :  (the)  Mooa:  hark1,  there  sounds 
gooa  now  aee  he  -boe-eto  ger  fy    to-me   the  band  of  singers :   are 


v 


*  Tai-maaava ;  breathless,  meaning  wHn  wonder 

j  JLoto  lahi,  meant  here,  a  mind  ekvnlgd  frith  tHinplHfp, 


402  A  GRAMMA*  OF 

Fehooi  leva  it,  *  eaeha  aa  ger  Asked  then  he,  «  why  hav* 

tamate    ho    tehina?    iky    tegger  killed  your  brother?    not 

gniooe  coy  angeeo  iaf  wi!  moe  co-  you  work  (3)  tike  himr  fye!  and 

fi!  damo-aloo!  wicked!  begone! 

Talangi  gi  he  cow-men  a  Vaea  Tell  to  the  family  of  Tara,  Aeew- 

Aeow  ooli:  talangi  ger  now  how  ooll:  tell  (them)  that  they  coast 

gi-heni.  hither. 

Now  how  leva,  bea  feeoNr  giate  They  came  accordingly,  wkca 

ginowtoloo  leva  Tangaloa :  commanded  to  them  tkaa  Tm> 

galoa: 

Mo  wo  toho  vaea  gl  tahi ;  mo  You  go  (and)  launch  canofiw 


fel6w  gi  toral6w  gi  he  fonnooa  lahi  tea ;  and  sail  to  the  weat,  to  (the) 

ft -at,  mo  nooofo  ai t  land  great  there,  and  dwell  thert. 

Be  mo  glle  tea  ange-be-co  mo  And  your  akin  fbe  it)  white  Jmt 

loto,  eoe  loto  lillc :  like  your  mind,  it  ia  a  mind , 

Te  mo  boto,  gnahi  togi,  moe  Shall  you  (be)   wise, 

colon  (boli-be,  be  mo  vaca  lahi.  axes,  and  riches  all-' 


and  also  canoes  large. 
Cowcaaloo  au  talangi  gi  he  ma-        In  the  mean  time,  go  I  (te)teH 


taogi  ger  how  me  mo  fonnooa  gi  to  the  wind  that  (it) 

Tonga.  your  land  to  Tonga. 

Iky  chi  te  now  felo  w  giate  gimo-  ( But)  not  little,  (I.  e.  not  at  aft) 

toloo  moe  now  vaca  covi.  shall  they  sail  to  yon  with  their 

canoes  bad. 

Lea-angi  leva  Tangaloa  gi  he  Spoke  thus   Tangalea  to  the 

towgete,   tegger  ooli-ooli  coy,  co  elder  brother,  shall  yon (be) Mack, 

mo  loto  coTi ;  be  ger  sese.  as  your  mind  (is)  bad;  and  yen 

(shall  be)  destitute. 

Iky  obito  tegger  mea  Hill,   iky  Not  much  shall  you  (hate)  tkiaff 

tegger  aloo  gi  he  fonnooa  ho  te-  good ;  not  shall  yon  go  to  thelasd 

bina ;  fefe  tegger  aloo  ai,  moe  mo  (of)  your  brother  ;  how  can  ysa 

▼aca  covi  ?  go  there  with  yonr  eanoea  bad  } 

Co  ho  tehina  be  tenne  how  gi  You  brother  only  shall  comets 

Tonga  fuccatow  mo  gimotoloo.  Tonga  to  trade  with  yon. 

The  following  is  the  song,  of  which  the  translation  was 
given  in  the  first  volume,  p.  307  *•  it  belongs  to  the  Nenhn 
mode  of  composition.     (See  p.  334  of  this  vol.) 
Mow  nofo-aofo  talanoa  gia  YaTaoo      We  remained  talking  about  Ya- 


THB  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  «jQ§ 

lieoo  to  bob*  my  he  toon-    Yaoo,TeoaLicoo,  when  said  to  tit 
gft  Mil,  the  women, 

Tow  aloo  fon6nga  gi  Lieoo  ger  Let  us  go  (a)  walk  to  Lieoo,  thai 
auunfttahehifonelai:  towfonongo  (we  may)  behold  the  going-down 
gfsttssVbooheme'noomohetangi  (of)  the  hub:  we  (will)  listen  to 
fee  loot*.  the  singing  (of)  the  birds,  and  the 

lamentations  (of)  the  wood-pigeon. 
IWtoUsVeftoimgihehifb'angft        We  (will)  gather  flowers  near 
fi  Mmtftwto.  the  precipice  al  Mstawto. 

Tow  nofo-nofo  ben  tow  toofa  he  We  (will)  remain,  and  we  (wilt) 
tsthsH  omy  sse  Lieoo  Ota.  share  out  the  provisions  brought  vt 

from  Lieoo  CnS. 

Tow  eowcow  gi  tahi,  bea  tow  la-        We  (will)  bathe  in  the  sea,  and 

aemfi  he  Vaoo  A'oa  mo  tow  taky*    we  (will)  rinse  in  the  Vaoo  Aca, 

ana'moo:  tow  tooi  ea-    and  we  (will)  anoint  (with)  oil 

use  tow*  he  chi  A#  tow  toli    sweet-scented:    we  (will)   string 

ant  Mmsmwto.  flowers,  and  we  (will)  plait  the  chi 

(which)  we  (hare)  plucked  from 
Matawto. 
Cft  tooange  gitowloloo  gi  he  hi-        Whilst  (are)  standing  we  upon 
astvmgft  gi  Ana  Manoo,  tow  jio  hifo    the  precipice  at  Ana  Manoo,  wo 
sno  lBMBS«s/vm  •  gi  he  mamaoo    (will)  look  down  without  breath, 
sn>  Issni  gi-lftlo.  in  the  distance  (upon)  the  sea  bo- 

low. 
Goon  low  loto  manatoo,  he  loo        As  our  minds  (are)  reflecting, 
•aas  sftfthooftnge  my  me  he    the  great  wind  whittles  towards  us 
Ism  fi  toofee-oeteo  gi  tafan-    from  the  great  (lofty)  Toa-treosift 

the  inland  upon  the  plains, 
to  loto  lahl  f  be  mamata        Is  (to)  me  (the)  mind  large,  be- 
am gsmleofUeJo,  footeange  noa-ai-    holding  the  surf  below,  endeavour 
he  ger  ryigi  ho  maoea  fefeea.  ing  in  Tain  to  tear-away  the  rooks 

firm. 
hWft,  tow  aloo  gi  Moon  :        (It)  is  evening,  (let)  us  go  to 
!  gooft  oogo  my  he  langi :    (the)  Moos:  hark  1  there  sounds 
now  nee  ho  boo-olft  ger  fy    to-me   the  band  of  singers :    are 


*  TfaVmaaovft  ;  breathless,  meaning  with  wonder  and  aslnnkhnwint 
f  JLnun  laid,  mean*  here,  a  mind  elevated  with  the  sublime. 


404  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

nbo  gi  he  Malai gi  Taaea  ?  they  practising  a  booala  to 

form  to-night    at  the  Malai  at 

Tenee? 

Tow  aloo  gi-ai.  Let  us  gv  there. 

Iky  te  tow  manatoo  fi  he  tow         Not  tball  we  think  (bf  periak 

oolooagl  nofo,  lolotonga  gooa  tegi-    we  shall  deeply  think)  to  our  Jer* 

chi  1/ig  i  he  tow,  he  tow  fonnooa.     mer  state  (of  affaire),  whilst  est 

yet  (had)  torn  the  war  our  land. 

Oiaool!  coe  mea  fucca-mana-        Alas!  (it)  is  a  thing  Imtfch, 

▼ahe*  eo  he  tow;  Yakkyange  gooa    the  war;  behold  is  bushy  (orer- 

ya'ooa  be  Ibnoooa  bea  gooa  ma'te    grown  with  weeds  and  bushes) tat 

covy  he  toonga  tenga'ta.  land,  and  are  dead  sadly  may 


Gooa  nofo  noa  al-be  ho-egi :  iky  Are  remaining  unsettled  that 

te  now  fa  tango  toca-taha-be  be  our  chiefs :  not  shall  they 

mahina  gi  he  now  fea'ooe'gl  wander  singly  (by)  the 

to  their  mistresses. 

OWana   tow    mana'too-nateo  Deaist  us  reflecting :  how  esa  it 

co-he-loto  gooa  tow  he  tow  foa-  be  helped  is  (at)  war  our  land! 
aooa. 

Co  he  fonnooa  co  Fiji  nai  oray'  The  land  (of)  Fyi  has  bresfbt 

he  tow  giAe  tow  fonnooa  eo  Tonga,  the  war  to  our  land  (eQTeaja, 

hca  gooa  tow  tooboo  le?a  ange-co  and  (as)  it  is,  let  us  act  aeasfe- 

ginowloloo.  ingly  like  thein :  (i.e.  like  the  F|ji 

people). 

O'ooa  na  tow  mana'too-natoo,  Desut  us  (being)  mdanehefy: 

4ow  mate  abc  abongi-bongi.  (i.  e.  let  us  be  merry),  we  (shall 


be)  dead  perhaps 
Tow  ya'la  he  chi-coola  Jbea  tow        Let  us  dress  (with)  the  eVi- 


oawa'gi  be  ta'pa  he  gnatoo,  tow  y    cool  a,  and  let  ua  hind 
bt  fow  he  tow  tooi  jiale,  bea  tow    wilb   tapa  (of)  the 
cahooa  he  hooni  ger  fucca-haange    (will)  put  on  the  bead-dress (i 
tow  gnano-gnano.  of)  our  strong  jialetewers;  sad 

(put  on)  our  necklaces  (el)  tat 
hooni-flower  te  shew  off  our  asa- 
colou  red- skins  *. 


*  On  being  exposed  a  little  while  to  the  sun,  their  skins,  parttealsrly 
of  women  and  children,  and  others  not  much  subjected  to  the  heat,  be- 


THB  TOrTSA  LAWGUACE. 


Liitra  to  lbs  applaoMa  (of)  Um 
multitude :  (I.  a.  mirk  how  fliey 


hill   be    oola;    be  gooa  Now   ii   ended    the    oafa;  and 

B   genanga   he  law  emtoo-  (they)  are  diitributinf  the  W» 

ow  aloo  abo'ogi-boagi   gi  riali  (of)  our  (bait :  let  u«  go  lo- 

holi-my  he  toongatangila  Not    (are)    eager    toward!  oi, 

ye  tow  twinga  ca'cala,bea  (meaning,    are    rery    eager)  the 

p  he  now  liboo  mj.  (young)  men  begging  our  wreathi 

(of)  Bowera,  and  tbut  their  flattery 

towards  un. 

tai  oeoefooa  he  They  (are)  net  beautiful,  our 

n.  fafl'ne  me  Lieoo  iky'  (young)  women  (cooling)  from  li- 

r   gili  gnagnaao  :  too  *,  not  good  their  aklaa  ana- 

low  nuinuw  no  coloured  ;  ii  to  be  compared  their 

»  gi  Matalocb  mo  Vj-  Fragrance,  with  the  preduiee  at 

■1*  boli  gar  aloo  gi  Li-  Blataloeo.    aad  Vy-bnoa  :    I  am 

m  gitowtoloo  abongi-  aoxioui  to  go  to  Iieoo :   let  U  go 


i  the  speech  which  Finow  the  Second 

iefs  and  warriors  of  Vnvaoo  on  hit  coming  into 

a  be  considered  the  best  piece  of  Tonga  com- 

glithof  it  hai  been  already  giveu.   See  Vol.  I. 


W  gimoLJloo,  Ha- 


Te,  UileD  to  me,  chief*  and  w 


■aha  giile  giau-       If  ii  tlm     ooe  amoog     . , 
a  Jke  tow  nnfonf    diaesaleama  (with) 
ll  Q6)  gcr  iloo     if  lift)  ne»   i>  tbe   lime  to  go  bi 
Haeei; 
o  ht  tiha        For  aot  it  ill  u  ill  I  permit  nam 

■.reddiab  tint,  *bidi,  kfelb      - 

*  fpr  young  maaa  from  Line  art 
■sio*  of  their  Amti""!  ■ 


405  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

ger  nofo  gi  HafoolooHow  mo  enne    to  remain  at  Hafooloo  How  with 
loto  tai-lata  mo  fealooagi.  his  mind  discontented  and  wan- 

dering. 
Na  mamafa  eeoo  loto  he  mamata        Has  been  heavy  my  mind,  he- 
bo  foo  mow-mow  nai  tooboo  he    holding  the  great  destruction  hat 
tow  tai-toogoo  he  taco'to  gi  Ma-    caused  the  war  unceasing  (of)  tht 
lai  (15).  prostrate  chief  in  the  Malai. 

Oooa  fy-fy  bea-ha?  gooa  tai-  We  have  been  doing  much,  and 
caky'gooa  vaooa  he  fonnooa,  be  what  is  the  consequence?  (17}  is 
gooa  iky  taha  gcr  enne  gnoooe;  unpeopled  and  overrun  with  weeds 
eani  tow  nofo  lille,  nai  caky  y-be.    the  land,  and  (there)  is  not  one  to 

its  culture ;  if  we  (had)  remained 
peaceful,  it  (would)  have  been  po- 
pulous still. 
Taha  he  foo  Egi  mo  tangata-        One  the  great  chief  and  war- 
tow  gooa  taw !  mo  tow  nofo  fucca-    rior  is  fallen  !  (i  e.  many,  18)  and 
taha  mo  he  tooa $  co  loto  ahai  ?        we  remain    associated  with  the 

tooat ;  how  can  it  be  helped  r  (19). 

Gooa  tow  loto-Tale !   low-gita        Are  we  mad !   I  think  is  yet 

gooa  ge  chi  he  tow  moobine  (9).       little  (i.  e.  already  too  abort) 


lives. 
116nga  be  tangata  bea  nofo  ia  ger        It  is  a  manly  characteristic  (SO) 
furra-raauaco,  mo fucca-lata,  enno    when  remains  he  (i.e.  a  maa}to 
nofoue  (9).  be  fond  (of),  and  contented  (with) 

his  station  (place). 
He  tnea  coia  tai  lew-noa   ger        (It  Is)  a  thing  traJy  not  foolish 
fucca-n6n6  he  mea  gooa  tegichi    (i.e.  very  foolish,  21)  to  shorts* 
loloa-ange  (  the  things  (which  J  are  not  yetlouf 

(enough). 
Cohai  giate  gitowtoloo  tenne  be-        Who  among  yon  shall  say  (ia) 
he  enne  loto  "  gooa  te  fia  mate    his  mind  ,l  I  desire  death— I  aw 
—gooa  te  Goo  he  mdooi."  weary  (of)  life." 

Vackt'-my !  na  iky7  tow  fy  gi-        Behold  f  hare  not  we  acted  list 
tu'uio'loo   ange-co    he   toonga-mea    people  foolish- minded? 
<22)  foto-noa  > 

Na  tow   goo  mi  he  mea,  gooa        We  have  been   seeking  thiafi 
ffooa  fboa-be  he  tow  mea  mboni.       (which)  deprive  (us)  altogether 

(of)  our  true  things  (L  e.  thief 
really  useful). 


THB  TONGA  LANGUAGE.  407 

Iky  teoo  behe-atoo  giate  gtmo-  toor  will  I  say  to  ycM,  gf W  Up 

t6loo,  6eoa-fta  mo  mana'too  gi  he  your  thoughts  of  fighting; 
tow  (33). 

Ofm-be  (94)  ger  matta-tow  my  Let  but  the  front  of  War  (lip- 
he  fonnoom,  bea  how  nihi  ger  veto  proach)  towards  oar  land,  •  ant 
he  tow  abi,  tow  fucra-ha-angi  come  any  (force)  to  plunder  on* 
giate  ginowtfleo,  ca  lahi  tera  he  homes,  we  (will)  make  shew  forth 
tow  gooooe,  tattew-be  mo  ia  he  to  them  (that)  whilst  great  ao 
tow  tea :  cordingly  our  agricultural  Works, 

in  like  manner  with  H  our  bravery 
(86). 

Tow  tf  be  leva  gitowtoloo  he  Let  us    do    accordingly,  ottf- 

gnoooe,  eoe  leo  mdoni  ia  (26)  he  selve*,  the  agriculture,  (tbt)  that 

tow  fonnooa.  i*  truly  guarding  our  land. 

Goom  tow  holi  gi  he  fbnnooa  We  are  anxioms  towards  a  land 

gehe  eo-ooma  ?  different,  wherefore?  (i.  e.  why 

should  we  be  anxious  for  an  in* 
crease  of  territory  ?) 

Gooa  lahiange-few  he  fonnooa  Ia  sufficiently  great   the  land 

eoeni  ger  fafanga  gitowtdloo ;  iky-  this  ibr  supplying  food  (to)  us : 

eU  te  tow  fa  gena  enne  tow.  not  little  (not  at  all)  shall  we  be 

able  to  devour  its  produce. 

Neoo  iky*  abe  lem-atoo  fucca-  I  have  not,  perhaps,  spoken  to 

loto-boto;  coe   cow-motooa   gooa  you  wisely  ;  the  elders  (i.  e.  the 

nofo-my,  gooa  te  hoo-ange  giate  matabooles)  are  sitting  near  me  ; 

ginowtoloo  ger  tala-my,  cap6w  te  I  entreat  to  them  that  (they)  tell 

hala :  me  if  I  (am)  wrong. 

Goom  te  ge  tamachf,  goom  te  I  am  yet  a  youth,  I  know,  not 

ilaw  iky'  teoo  boto  he  boole  ca-  should  I  be  wise  (in)  governing  if 

p6w  ail  fneea-taha  acoo  Into,  mo  were  alike,  my  mind  and  the  mind 

he  loto  he  taeotoAe  ger  fy-teliha  (of)  the  prostrate  (dead)  chief,  to 

toea-taha  ne,  iky'  ger  ongo  gi  he  act  optionally,  of  one's  own  ac- 

oowlea:  cord,  not  to  listen  to  their  dis- 
course: 

Faeee-fetal  mo gtmotoloo  he  ofm,  (My  )  thanks  for  your  love,  and 

bem  mo  be  aofo*mow  giate  ia.  also  fidelity  towards  him. 

Co  flnow  PQi  mo  hecow-mata-  Fiaow  Fiji  and  the  matabooles 

boole  goom  nofo-my,  now  tlaw-be  are  present,  they  know  my  fre- 

gmowto'loo  eoocoo  fa  fucca-fehooi  gl  quent  enquiries  concerning  (the) 

he  lille  he  tow  nofone.  good  (of)  our  government. 


408  A  GRAMMAR  Off 

Otaa  chi  na  (27)  mo  bene  he  0*  not  say    In  your   salad*, 

mo  loto,—"  io,  oo  tow  fbnongo  gi  u  truly,  (do)  we  listen  to  the  sHly 

he  low-noa  he  tamechi  eoehi ?"  talk  (of)  a  boy  wherefore?" 

Momanatooea  lea  atoo  leva  au,  Recollect  ye,  whilst  seeak  le* 

eo  he  fueea-oofo  asoo  ia  be  loto  a  you  therefore  I,  it  is  thoachelatl 

Toi  Oomoe,  mo  Ooloovaloo  mo  of  the  mind  of  Toi  Oomoe,  ami 

Afoo,  mo  Fotoo,  mo  Alo,  bee  mo  Ooloovaloo  and  Afbo,  and  Fetes 

fooli-be  he  eow-Ho-egi  mo  he  ma-  and  Alo,  also  and  all  the  eaieft 

taboole  he  Vavaoone  (88).  and  the  matabooles  (of)  Vevaee, 

Mo  fonongo  my!  cow  fueca-ma-  listen  ye  to  me !  I  remind  y*» 

aatoo*toogiategimotoloo;  capow  (that)  if  there  any  one  Is  (ef> 

gooa  ai  nihi  gooa  fonaooa  gehe,  be  another  land,  and  there  any  eat 

gooa  ai  nihi  gooa  tai-laU  ger  nofo  is    diseontented    (with)    reessie~ 

fueca-bebene  (9)  eo  lolotonga-be  ing  in  this  way,  this,  is  the  wnjfj 

eoeni  teoo  atoo  giate  gimotoloo  opportunity  I  will  give  Io  yoarts 

ger  aloo,  ca,  hill  lera  eoeni,  iky  depart ;  for,  let  pass  accordingly, 

ehi  to  tow  felowagi  mo  Hapai;  this  (occasion),  not  little  (L  e, 

not  at  all)  shall  we  eommuaicsls 
with  Hapai ; 

Ffli-fili  leva  he  mo  nofoanga  eo  Choose    then    your   dwelling- 

Fjji  e,  eo  Hamoa  e,  eo  Tonga  e,  places ;  is  Fiji  there,  is  Hsmea 

co  Hapai  e,  co  Fotoona  mo  Lo-  there,  is  Tonga  there,  is  Hapai 

toomae.  there,  is  Fotoona  and  Lolooms 

there. 

Ilonga-be  mea  gooa  loto-fucca-  Marked  be  those  having  minda 

taha  ger  mansco  he  nofo  he  lille*  unanimous,  that  they 

tai-toogoo,— gioowtoloo-be  te  now  ing  (in)  the  peace  un< 

nofo  gi  Hafooloo  How.  only,  shall  they  remain  at  Hafee- 

loo  How. 

Iky-chi  teoo  behe  ger  lolomi  he  Not  at  all  will  I  suppress  tss 

toa  he  taha  loto- tow.  brarery  (of)  one  warlike  mind. 

Vack  j-ange !  he  fonnooa  co  Ton-  Behold  1  the  land  of  Tonga  sad 

ga  bea  mo  Fiji  gooa  nofo  tow  be,  of  Fiji  are  remaining  (at)  war: 

mo  flli-nlt  he  mo  manaco  ger  aloo  choose  ye  your  wish  to  go  te  tat 

gi  he  taha,  ger  fy  ai  he  mo  toa.  one,  to  perform  there  your  breter/. 

Mo  too !  taggi-taha»be  aloo  gi  Arise !  each  one  go  to  his  hems, 

enne  abi,  bea  mo  manitoo  gi  he  also  and  reflect  upon  thcdcpailaff 

aloo  he  vac*  he  bongi-boagi  gi  (of)  the  canoes  to-morrow  to  H* 

Hapai.  pal. 


.  The**  ft*  pre«tfmec)»  frill  be  found  sufficient  to  give  the 
reader  a  just  idea  of  the  nature  aad  genius  of  the  Tonga 
leagttage ;  *)*1  *iU  sufficiently  eaable  him  to  compare  it 
iM  ethers*  to  which  jt  may  be  sappoaed  to  have  soaae  affi- 
nity ?  as,,  the  MeJagr »  for  instance,  or  hereafter,  perhaps 
with  tfaslie  ef  the  Fiji,  the  Sandwich,  and  the  Society  is- 
lands; (if  each  af  which  places  we  ought,  io  a  few  years*  ta 
eo^se  better  account  than  we  have  hitherto  had;  for. 
ate  English  dnd:  American  people  who  hare  been  rev  * 
aw  those  several  clusters  of  islands  for  a  number  of 
19  aad,  *f  coarse,  ought  to  be  perfectly  acquainted  with 
ir  asjateene,  aad  tolerably  well  versed  in  their  language. 
m  ao  donbt  but  that  the  farther  enquiry  is  carried 
into  the  history  of  the  South  Seas,  the  more  clearly  it  will 
appear  that  a  very  strong  relationship  exists  between  the  na- 
tives of  the  different  islands,  notwithstanding  the  distance 
of  their  geographical  situations.  Affinities  between  their 
several  languages  have  already  been  shewn  by  Cook  and 
other  navigators,  but  under  a  very  disadvantageous  circum- 
stance, the  want  of  a  free  communication  of  ideas;  in  con- 
sequence of  which,  many  wrong  words  have  been  given  ; 
thus,  MlUf  is  the  Tonga  word  for  goody  but  Cook  gives  say 
fogg*  (ary  fofri),  which  means,  give  it  me  if  you  piea$e: 
for  a  bead  he  gives,  attakoa,  which  should  be  eakooa:  be 
gives  koooma  (co-ooma')  for  the  burnt  circular  marks  in  the 
skin;  bat  this  word  means  trAy  f  what  for  t  whilst  the  pro- 
per word  for  those  marks  is  lafa.  JFor  to  sneeze,  he  gives 
0a**j».{e%Gango),  signifying,  to  bhw  the  nose ;  the  word  for 
meeting  being  nujfatooa :  for  the  head,  00/00  pokko  (ooloo- 
boco)  which  means  the  skull :  for  the  number  IO'\000,  he 
gives  Imoo  noa  (fow-noaj,  which  literally  means  nonsense,  6r 
foattth  discourse!  From  at  least  fifty  to  a  hundred  other 
instances  of  this,  out  of  the  same  vocabulary,  might  he 
quoted  ;  and^abe  same  with  Labillardiere's  Vocabulary,  of * 
vol.  ix.  >  * 


410 


A  GBAH M AE  OF 


which  indeed  we  have  already  noticed  a  few  renatkable  in* 
stances.     ( See  p.  890  of  this  volume). 

In  respect  to  the  Malayan  language,  Mr.  Mariner  has, 
with  great  diligence  and  attention,  looked  over  the  whole  of 
the  English  part  of  Mar*den's  Malayan  Dictionary,  nod  hat 
selected  the  following  list  of  above  sixty  words,  which  bear  a 
considerable  resemblance  to  the  corresponding  Tonga  words. 
It  is  here  very  worthy  of  remark,  that  those  Tonga  words 
which  contain  the  sound  of  the  letter  f  have  in  its  place 
the  letter  p  or  0  in  the  Malayan :  and  the  above  author  no- 
tices in  his  preface  to  the  same  excellent  work,  that  the 
Malays,  not  having  the  sound  /in  their  own  language,  ge- 
nerally substitute  p  for  it  in  those  adopted  Arabic  words 
where  it  occurs., 


TOIOA. 

MALAYAN. 

■aouasu 

lea 

ikaa 

fish 

nima 

linia 

are 

lango 

langau 

a  fly,  (the  insect) 

lie 

dahi 

forehead 

fo6a 

buah 

fruit 

matingi 

angta 

wind 

mill*  kikila 

mata  bilas 

goggle-eyed 

fodloo 

bulu 

hair  of  the  body  ; 

fooloo  fooloo 

berlSlu 

hairy 

ooloo 

ttlu 

the  head 

toonga 

tangga 

ladder 

ate 

all 

liver 

godtoo 

kGtfi 

louse 

lioohoo 

sftsS 

milk;  also  theft* 

nils 

mars 

misfortune 

paloo 

paid 

to  mix 

namoo 

niamok 

mosquito 

matta  he  hoohoo 

mita  iQsu 

the  nipple  of  the 

motooa 

tuah 

old 

A^  ** 

til 

ordure 

tfi 

filth 

to  choose 

THB  TONGA  LANGUAGE. 


411 


cot 

ubi 

yams 

tooboo 

tumbuh 

• 

to  spring  or  grow  up,  as 
plaota 

fboloo-fooloo 

ber  bulu 

•bK*7»  hairy 

Ota 

mtlu 

shame-faced 

MU 

lari 

4orun 

aaotooa 

tuah 

aged,  ancient 

4f~ 

abu 

ashes 

toola 

sulah 

bald 

•Wo! 

ka-luar 

begone  1 

m*Yt» 

mala 

the  blade  of  a  knife,  o? 
edge  of  any  thing 

gaigaila 

niala 

to  blaze 

mattagoila 

mat  a  nila 

blear-eyed 

Ilk 

chela 

a  mole  in  the  skin 

aeow-fanna 

pinah 

a  bow 

low-pap* 

papan 

aboard 

oorn 

4oa 

two 

■MM 

mimah 

to  chew 

fill 

pilih 

to  choose,  to  select 

foODOOft 

henua 

land  or  country 

tangi 

Ungit 

to  weep,  to  shed  tears 

male 

mat! 

dead 

toolli 

tuli 

deaf 

fele 

*0i 

to  dig 

matta 

mata 

the  eje 

wool 

muda 

young 

aft 

apt 

fire 

laagi 

langit 

the  sky 

towfa 

tufaa 

a  gale  of  wind 

telinga 

telinga 

the  ear :  the  handle  of  a 
ressel 

ia 

>y» 

he,  she,  it 

malanaa 

pan  as 

hot,  (glowing) 

aeow 

kaya 

timber,  wood 

oagofooloo 

sa-puluh 

ten                                      » 

•oisaoloo 

dua-ptiluk 

twenty 

tow 

taoa 

year,  season 

41S 


A  GRAMMA*  Of  THB  TOMOA  LANGUAGE. 


The  following  are  nearly  alike. in  eeund,  but  have  eeme 
little  shade  of  difference  in  their  meaning. 


tOMOA. 

Toonoo;  to  roast. 
Low  papa;  aboard. 
Fooloo  he  matta ;  the  eye-brow. 
Acoo ;  the  pou.  pron.  mine. 
Mamata ;  to  inspect,  to  riew. 
Tacabe;  poor,  friendless. 
Boto;  wise. 
Cata ;  to  lauf  h. 
Boto-boto;  round. 


MALAYAN. 

Tfinu;  to  burn. 

Loh  papan ;  a  copy-book  or  table. 

Bill  a  mlta;  eye-lashes. 

Aku,  I. 

Mata-mata ;  an  inspector. 

Tef-chab?;  ragged. 

Budi;  wisdom.  • 

Kata ;  to  speak. 

Bontar;  around. 


In  regard  to  the  following  Vocabulary  of  the  Tonga  Ian* 
guage,  the  reader  is  requested  to  observe,  that  there  it,  at 
the  end  of  the  second  part,  a  list  of  these  words  which  have 
been  discovered  to  be  omitted  in  the  body  of  it;  and  that 
the  greater  part  of  those  English  words  which  he  does  net 
find,  and  whose  synonimes  neither  are  to  be  found,  may  be 
presumed  to  be  such  as  there  is  no  Tonga  for,  and  which 
necessarily  constitute  a  very  numerous  class. 


.  ■  «  w  ■ 


■s  ."•■  -1. 


» 


VOCABULARY, 


TONGA  AND. ENGLISH. 


ACO 

A.    A  fence. 

A.    Of  or  belonging  to,  (used  only  before  proper  Mines  of 

persons,)  as  Fmow's  speech,  coe  mal&iga  a  Ajiow. 
A'i*.    To  awake. 

A'anga.     Pincers  or  forceps  of  any  kind. 
— — .     A  spider. 
Ab6.    Perhaps,  likely. 
A'bi.     Habitation;  home. 
Ab6.    To-night. 
Ab6ngi-b6ngi.     To-morrow. 
A'ca.     A  root. 
-■  To  kick  ;  a  kick. 

A'chi.     Through ;  bored  through ;  to  pierce  through. 
A  co.    To  inculcate;  to  teach  ;  also  to  learn. 
A'coo.     My  own :  in  composition  it  can  only  follow  my,  to 

give  me,  as  mj/  ia  ma  a'coo,  give  it  me,  or  literally,  give 

it  for  my  own. 
Ac6w.    Wood ;  a  plant  or  shrub  ;  any  sort  of  club. 
Ac6w-awla.     A  particular  kind  of  spear. 
Ac6w-fanna.    A  bow. 

"  •    ■     ■  ■ 

Ac6w-ffinna-tang6ta.    A*war-bow. 

vol.  ii.  b 


ALO 

Ac6w**6oo.    A  particular  kind  of  spear. 

Acoy.  You:  this  word  is  used  only  when  it  is  the  subject 
of  the  verb,  or  in  answer  %to  the  question  who? 

A-cna.  The  relative  pronoun,  that :  it  is  more  usual,  how* 
ever,  to  say,  co-maf 

A-eni.  The  relative  pronoun,  this :  it  is  more  usual,  how* 
ever,  to  say,  co-em*. 

Aft.    A  hurricane,  a  storm* 

Atfe.    A  thousand. 

Afc.    When  (used  only  in  aiiiiux&  sense.) 

A  fi.    Fire. 

A'fi-nima.    The  palm  of  the  hand. 

A  fi-v$e.    The  sole  of  the  foot. 

AMi?    Who. 

Alii.    Sandal  wood. . 

Alfl-ihi.  To  try,  essay,  endeaVour,  strive ;  an  essay  or  en- 
deavour. 

AW  Day-light;  a  day;  the  day-time;  by  day:  he  eb 
coeni;  to-day. 

A'hd*ngeb£.    Daily. 

A4io-be.    Daily. 

A'hoo.     Smoke  of  burning  bodies  ;  soot. 

A'hoofa.    Sooted ;  smeared  with  soot ;  browned  with  smoke. 

Ai.    There,  in  that  place,  (gt-ai,  is  the  more  proper  wonL) 

Aia.  The  pronoun,  he,  used  only  after  the  verb,  or  in  an* 
swer  to  the  question  who?  also  the  possessive  pro- 
noun, his. 

Ala.    Applicable,  fit,  suitable. 

A'la.  A  term  of  appeal  to  draw  attention,  mostly  used  bf 
children ;  a  term  of  solicitation. 

Alinga.    A  haunch ;  a  limb. 

Alo.  The  suet  of  a  hog;  also  the  circular  piece  cut  ost 
round  the  navel  of  the  hog,  to  embowel  it :  this  nkof 
is  prepared  in  a  particular  way  and  eaten. 


A  NO 

A4o.    To  hunt.  '      '     ' 

Alo-iUo.    To  fan. 

Alofta.    A  volcano. 

Aloo.    To  go,  to  depart :  got  along  t  begone! 

— — .    The  gait  or  walk  of  a  potion. 

A'looanga.    The  footsteps  of  man,  or  any  animal ;  the  track 

left  by  any  thing  moving. 
Alooangi.    To  proceed,  (as  to  locomotion,)  progression. 
Aloo-hage.    To  ascend. 
Aloo-hifo.    To  descend,  to  alight. 
A4o6nga.    High,  lofty. 
9  A  pillow ;  any  thing  to  rest  the  head  on. 


A'mo.    To  carry  on  a  stick  between  two  men's 

one  following  the  other :  the  stick  ao  used  is  also  calleA 
dmo :  if  a  man  singly  carries  any  thing  upon  a  itkfc 
across  his  shoulders,  it  is  called,  tmojkcca  tefada. 
Amoo'chi.    To  snatch,  to  pluck  forcibly. 
A  na.    A  cavern ;  the  cabin  of  a  ship. 

.    His  own :  it  can  only  be  used  in  composition  with 
<**gi*  to  give  to  him,  as  a'ngi  ia  ma  afna,  give  it  to  hfcni 
or  literally,  give  it  for  his  own. 
A'oga.    A  shark. 

x         Place  or  situation  of  any  thing. 
■    <     .  The  disposition  or  temper  of  the  mind. 

A'nga  c6vi.     Bad  disposition;  illnatured;  disob- 
liging. 
A'nga  lilK.    Good  disposition ;  goodnatured ;  ob- 
liging. 
Habit,  custom,  knack. 
Against,  leaning  against. 

Alike,  similar  to  each  other :  a  frequent  sign  of  the 

-■  •«-   -*■ 

HfRVt 

Like  to,  (one  thing  being  compared  with  an- 
.other ;  see  a*gc-co, )  Just  like. 

b* 


A.TO 

A'nge-co.  As,  alike,  (one  action  being  compared  with  an- 
other.) 

A'ngi.  To  give :  but  used  only  when  th$  third  person  fol- 
lows the  verb,  as  give  hfan,  give  then.  When  the  first 
person  follows  the  .verb,  as  give  me,  sty  is  used  instead 
.of  dugi}  and  when  the.  second  person  follows,  as  lit' 
give  you,  dtoo  is  used.  See  the  verb  to  give  in  the 
.other  part  of  the  vocabulary . 

— .  Towards;  but  like  the  above,  can  only  be  used 
when  it  has  a  relation  to  the  third  person,  as,  ctlaa  aagi* 
go  towards  him.  See  towards  in  the  other  part  of  the 
vocabulary. 

AnitfL  ,  Yesterday, 

4'nib6> .  Yester-nigbt. 

4nUE     When,  (used  only  in  a  past  sense.) 

A 'no.  .  A  lake ;  a  marsh* 

A'noo.    Saliva ;  to  spit* 

A'noo-anoo.    To  puddle  in  the  water,  to  dabble* 

4fcuy'. .  Presently,  by-and-by. 

AW    A  cloud. 

A'oochi.    The  buttocks :  the  more  proper  word  ia  ooclu. 

A'oochia.     To  grow  cloudy. 

A'oonga.     Of  use;  valuable;  useful. 

A'pi-api.  Crowded  ;  full :  as  a  road  crowded  with  men ;  a 
basket  full  of  any  thing. 

A'ta.     Reflecting  ;  shining  ;  resplendent. 

Ata.    Wide ;  capacious. 

A'te.     The  liver. 

A'te-bili.     The  kidneys. 

A' to.     To  roof;  to  thatch. 

A' to  falle,  roof  of  a  house,  to  roof  a  houso.         .     - 

Atoo.  To  give  ;  but  used  only  when  the  second. person  fol- 
lows.   See.  Angi. 

Towards ;  but  used. only  when  it  lias  a  relation  to  die 
third  person,  as,  towards  him  or  them. 


BEL 

Au.    The  pronoun,  I.  J      ...  I 

A' va.    A  cove,  crevice,  creek ;  a  hole ;  a  gap ;  a  atreighL   ( 
— .  A  fish  resembling  the  mullet,  peculiar: to  the  salt 

water  lakea  o£^amoociu 
A-ve.    To  take  away  ;  to  deprive  .of.,  ,  tj 

— .  To  conduct,  \...»q 

Aw-i.    An  expression  of  pity ;  alaopf  pain. 
Awi-a>i-fooa.    Fair,  beautiful.  .     » 

Awla,    Name  of  a  certain,  kind  of  tree  of  which  spears  are 

made. 
Awta.    Raw,  not  cooked. 
Awta-awta.    Dirt;  filth;  refuse;  sweepings.  ,-[ 

.   .  1 

. :    B.  , 

Bawla.    Matting  made  of  the  branches  of  the  cocoa-nut 
tree,  with  which  house*arethaichdd :  hduoUiio,  maW 
to  thatch  with.    Batda  Jucca  tefiM,  ;mattiiig;  itsed  Id 
cover  the  ridge  of  a  house. 
Be.     Only ;  alone  ;  solely ;  by  oneself. 
— •    The  conjunction,  and,  also.  nt»«( 

— .    The  adverb,  when.  i "    .•      t 

Bea*  /The  conjunction,  or,  also.  .; 

Bea.    A  contraction,  of  be  iat  and  he*  or  wiien  kev 
Bea-ha; .  Arid  what  ?  i.  a.  what  if  the  resold  .  /I 

B6ca-beca;    The  swallow*  (a  bir4.)  »  •   -owli 

Becoo%    Blum,  not  sharp ;  obtuse.  -'i 

Becooange.    Bluntly,  obtusely.  ;  '        ■    C 

Belie.    So,  m  this  manner ;  alike.  .  i 

.   To  signify,  to  give  another  to  understand*  tcvebttf^ 
to  say.  -"I 

Beito.    A  kitchen  or  place  where  cooking  m  carried  on.  -  j. 
Bflav3  Mi ukaee  $)canfoptie»>  pnar  iaattppurate.  .,u!r-»;I 
Bilaw  /k't^vkd^^ wrtaUBatu  o;    ------.,—  <  -. .     .■■  •■..»'! 

Mo*  ..Cops  to  drink** 44  aside: of  the  Banaa*  leaf. 
9   Bdoo  cdva,  Cava  cups. 


BOO 

filpe.    Butterfly. 

Bibieo.    Lazy;  indolent;  (contracted  from  titoe  oi'osj ;  ah* 

obstinate. 
Bibigi.    A  child,  not  more  than  two  er  three  years  old. 
Bico.    Crooked;  curved;  awry. 
Bico-bico.    Lazy;  indolent;  (v.  Bibifco)  crooked. 
Bico4rfco-6nge.    Crookedly. 
Bigi.    To  cement  j  to  stick ;  to  adhere. 
Kgi-Mgl.    Adhesive ;  stzy ;  to  stick, 

* 

Bihi.     To  splash. 

Bihla.    Contagious  :  makagi  bikio,  contagion. 

Bili.    A  species  of  lizard. 

Bisi.  This  word  has  no  particular  meaning  of  itself,  but 
with  hw,  to  speak,  before  it,  thus,  lotobm,  it  means 
nonsensical  discourse ;  tittle  tattle :  vide  Jew, 

9ta>.    Full ;  brimful ;  the  navel. 

Bo.    A  post ;  a  pillar. 

— .    Day. 

Boa.    To  relate ;  to  say. 

Boboola.    A  prisoner ;  a  slave* 

Boca.    To  castrate. 

Bolata.    The  stem  either  of  the  banana  or  the  plantain  tree; 

Bongi-bongi.    To-morrow ;  to-morow  morning. 

Bo6a.    A  kind  of  flower  resembling  the  Jmti,  but  yellow. 

Booaca.  Swine;  pork;  pig,  Ac.  (probably  derived  from 
the  English  Pori,  or  the  Portuguese  or  Spanish, 

Booaca  tangdta.    A  boar,  (literally  a  man  swme.) 

Booaca  fafme.    A  sow,  (literally  a  woman  ewiat.) 

$o6boi6.    A  gargle. 

Boobooha.    Sultry;  hot. 

Booboom.    To  swell. 

Booboono*.    Tocmne;  to  shut;  the  Kd  of  any  thing. 

Boogc.    To  apprehend;  to  beUj  4o.aemoJmU.of;  tenfr 


BOO 

planted:  those  parte  of  a  double  Orifitte  extending  be- * 

yood  the  platform. 
Bo6ge-mow.    To  clinch.  v* 

Bo6goo-bo6goo.    Squab ;  short  and  thick. 
Bo6ha.    A  box ;  a  chest. 
Bo6hi.    To  blow  any  thing  out  of  the  mouth  with  force; 

also  the  name  of  the  party  that  go  out  to  distribute  the 

bait  for  rats,  which  is  done  by  blowing  it  forcibly  out 

of  their  mouths. 
Bo6i  bo6i.    A  curtain ;  a  screen* 
Boola.     To  swell :  fifcca  boo' la  matta,  to  hector ;  to  swag- 

ger ;  look  big. 
Bo61a-bo61a.    A  swelling. 

Bo61e.    To  order  or  conduct;  to  give  directions;  to  ma- 
nage ;  to  declaim. 
Boo!le.    A  kind  of  spotted  shell. 
Bo61e-bo61e.    Spotted;  party-coloured. 
Bool6.  Veiled ;  concealed ;  something  thrown  over  the  head 

and  face ;  to  Veil ;  to  mask. 
Boolo-boolo.    A  mask  ;  a  veil  for  the  head. 
Bool6a.    A  mask. 
Bool6nga.    Hat;  cap: 

B06I00.    Gum ;  pitch,  or  any  adhesive  substance. 
Bo6loo«bo'oldo.    To  draw  up  the  dress  so  as  to  cover  the 

shoulders ;  to  shelter. 
Booloo'hi.     Sick ;  ill ;  sickness :  only  used  when  speaking 

of  Tooitonga. 
Bocna.    To  fly ;  to  vault ;  to  jump  high  fin  the  air. 
Boono'.    to  incline ;  to  bend  down ;  to  droop ;  to  stoop  the' 

body,  or  head. 
Bo-oo^i.    Night ;  (from  bo,  day,  and  odli,  black.) 
Bo-ooliange.    Obscurely;  darkly;  by  night. 
Boofei.    A  cat :  (probably  from  the  English  word  fussy.) 
Boc^ta.    To  bet ;  also  a  wager.  ' 
Bootoo.    Burial  ceremony. 


■  1 


CAJf 

Bopau.  A  Bmsdl  paddling  canoe  made  of  t^ie  follow  trunk  of 
a  tree. 

BoJpo.    Rotten ;  mouldy. 

Ik/to.    Wise ;  cunning  ;  knowing. 

Bo'to-bo'to.    Round. 

Bo'too,  Alongside ;  near  to ;  the  side  of  any  Uiins>  except 
pf  man  or  animal,  then  it  is  va'ca  vaJca ;  a  part  of ;  a  por- 
tion. 

Buggi-buggi.     A  certain  kind  of  dub. 

C. 

Ca.    If;  but;  for;  because. 

C&be.     Abusive,  abuse ;  cursing ;  execration, 

■  '     ^    A  certain  plant. 

Cabea.    To  abuse ;  to  call  ill  names. 

C4ca.    To  climb. 

Csxa.    Deceit,  imposition. 

CJac^ha.    Lighted  in  flames ;  kindled. 

Cac&la.     Any  flower ;  a  wreath  of  flowers ;  a  necklac*  of 

flowers. 
Cac6va*    To  sweat ;  to  perspire. 
Cac&vaia.     Sweaty;  all  in  a  perspiration, 
Cacc6w.    fo  &wim ;  to  wade. 
CSfo.    Plait  made  of  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut. 
C&fo.     A  wound  in  battle ;  or,  if  not  in  battle,  at  least  with 

a  warlike  instrument. 
Cafoo.     Any  covering  with  which  a  person  may  be  covered 

whilst  resting,  or  sleeping, 
CsUii.    jScrofulous  indurations  of  th/e  glands,  po  which  the 

Tonga'  people  are  very  subject. 
C6ho.    A  reejj. ;  an  ?rrow  for  spor$. 
C6ho-caho.    A  superior  species  of  the  yam. 
Cihooa,    A  necklace. 
Cainga.     A  relation ;  a  kin. 
Caky'.    Inhabitants;  population;  ponuloui.        -r 


CAW 

Galanga.    To  roar  oat ;  to  shriek ;  to  halloo :  a  shojut.         -  > 

Calanotf.    Green  beads. 

Caliva.    Vein;  sinew;  tendon. 

Call.    A  pillow  (made  of  wood,  after  the  Tonga  fashion.) 

Calia.    A  double  sailing  canoe. 

Calo.    To  bark ;  to  yelp  like  a  dog. 

Cilo.    To  turn  aside  an  arrow ;  or  to  parry  any  weapon. 

Caloa.    A  cockle.    Gnidji  cal6a;  a  cockle-shell  fixed  on  a 

stick  to  scrape  out  cocoa-nut. 
Quia.    Sponge ;  any  thing  spongy. 
Can4he.    The  fish  called  mullet. 

Candnga.  Any  phrase,  or  proverbial  expression ;  a  cant  word. 
Cano.     The  inmost  substance  of  any  thing,  particularly. 

kernels  of  fruit;  also  flesh. 
Cano  he  mitta.    The  eye-ball. 
Cino  mite.     Lean  of  flesh  (cano,  flesh ;  mdle,  dead.) 
CtnognattL  Hard-hearted ;  refractory ;  stubborn  (from  of**, 

the  flesh  or  heart,  aoid  gndta,  hard.) 
Cipa.    A  siege ;  to  besiege. 
Capacow.    The  wing  of  a  bird. 
Cap6w.    If. 

Cippa-cappa.    To  flap  the  wings  with  a  noise,,  (as  a  bird.) 
Gita.    To  laugh. 

Catagi.    Patience ;  sufferance ;  to  endure ;  to  suffer. 
C4to.     A  bag  ;  a  basket. 
Catoftfinga.    A  feast ;  feasting  and  jollity. 
Cava.    The  pepper  plant ;  also  the  root  of  this  plant,  of 

which  is  made  a  peculiar  kiml  of  beverage;  being  first 
chewed,  and  then  mixed  up  with  water. 
Fo6a  Cafva.    An  oath :  see  Foo. 
Cava,    The  beard. 

Give.    A  handle  or  sling  to  a  basket. 
Ctve-cfcve.    A  swing ;  to  swing. 

Cavgnga.    Burden ;  load  j  freight  of  a  canoe  or  other  vessel. 
.Ciwle.    To  beg ;  to  request. 


COB 

C6wna<    Bitter;  brackish:  tbo  intoxicated  with  cava,  er 
any  thing  else. 

Chi.    Small;  little;  thin. 

The  name  of  a  certain  plant. 

To  throw,  or  cast  away  gently;  to  tarn. 

Chichi.   Softly;  slightly;  lightly ;  in  a  very  moderate  degree. 

■  An  ornamental  dress  round  the  waist  for  either 

sex,  made  generally  of  leaves  of  the  efts  tree,  bat 
sometimes  of  leaves  and  flowers  of  other  plants. 

Chiigi.    To  throw  away ;  to  leave;  to  separate  from  a  wHfe 
or  husband ;  to  divorce. 

Chiange.    The  least,  or  smallest ;  less. 

Chibi.    A  slap;  a  sweeping  blow  from  a  dob;  s  particular 
kind  of  club.  r 

Cbkot&.    A  particular  kind  of  dub;  also  a  certain  species  of 
bird. 

Chieoocoo.    A  muscle  (shell-fish.) 

Chila.    The  sprits  of  a  canoe. 

Chili.    To  cast  with  a  hand-net. 
Cob£nga  chili ;  a  hand-net. 

Chfnam&noo.    A  sow  after  she  has  had  a  litter. 

ChinSfoo.    The  wife  of  a  king,  or  superior  chief. 

China.    The  body ;  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

.    Stout,  large,  fat. 

Chino-cbi.    Thin;  slender. 

Co.    A  partide  very  frequently  used  hi  the  Tonga  language : 
H  is  often  joined  with  the  article  ke,  when  the  aspirate  is' 
generally  omitted,  and  the  compound  word  we  write 
thus,  c6t:  it  is  also  used  before  proper  names,  nouns 
and  pronouns,  in  the  manner  explained  in  the  grammar. 

C6a.    Froth;  foam. 

Coa  Papalingi ;  soap. 

Co-6u.    It  is  I;  /,  in  answer  to  the  question,  whof 

Cdblnga.    Any  kind  of  net. 


Cobcnga  cfalli ;  a  hand-not 
Cobechi    The  learns  of  the  jieoasgis,  dried  tad  worked 

with  the  fibres  of  the  cocoa-nut  husk,  ao  as  to  farm  an, 

instrument  for.  imprinting  gwafos. 
Coca.    A  brownish  red  juice,  expressed  from  the  bark  of  a 

tree  also  called  aka :  this  juice  k  used  to  stain  or  dio 

gnatoo  with. 
Cochi.    A  goat  (derived  from  the  English);  to  cut  with 

scissors  (from  i£c  coca*  scissor  •) :  also  to  eat  the  hair 

of  the  head* 
Cocoho.    Eruption  of  a  volcano,  or  of  fire :  vapour ;  steam. 
G6e.    A  word  compounded  of  the  particle  co,  and  the  ertsoit 

he:  see  the  gramma* 
Cds>16to.    Interj.    What's  to  be  done  I  how  can  it  be 

helped ! 
Colni.     This. 
Coena.    That. 
Cofe.    The  bamboo. 

C6foo.    To  inclose,  or  wrap  up;  to  clothe. 
Cobei?    Who? 

Cofau    That  (the  relative  pronoun). 
Cofr.    Well  donel  that's  right! 
Coiabe.    The  asm*  j  literally,  co  m  *c,  it  is,  he,  aba,  or  it, 

only. 
Coiha?    What?  which? 
Coihae?    Why? 

Colo.    A  fortress.  * 

Coloa.    Biches;  property;  any  thing  of  Mine. 
Co»m66ni.    Indeed;  h  is  true. 
Conga*    A  piece* 
Coo.    A  deprivative,  applied  only  to  nhma,  a  hand,  and  *tfo9 

a  tooth.    N*ma-coo,.wiA  the  loss  of  a  finger*  mffn 

coo,  toothless.  ■  *..  *.     ) 

Coocoo.    The  muscle  ;(shs*lisk. J  .-...■  *.    .  ..  -■  /j 


•  J     I      ■ 


.   cow> 

Coo'goo.    To  grasp ;  a  handful* 

CooJa.    Beads;  a  species  of  the  paroquet. 

Ca6la~eo61a.    Red. 

Co61oo*co61oo.    A  species  of  tba  dove ;  (the  columbftyur* 
purata.)  ■.       '  ■    1  * 

Co6moo-co6«x>o»    The  chin*  <-  ju    * 

Cote.    Gibberish ;  jargon;  chattering  of  birds:  the  synch 
-  •  of  foreigners,  which  they  do  not  understand,  they  cesv 
■  pare:  to  the  chattering  of  birds,  and  call  it  trite. 

Cotoa.     Mass;  whole;  bulk. 

—— .    Complete;  entire.* 

Cot4ab&    Wholly. 

Co'vi.    Bad ;  malicious ;  a  bad  design  *  a  wicked  snteskioa, 
■    or  act.  .    .!  f>  • 

Co'viange.    Badly. 

Cow.    I ;  (probably  a  corruption  of  Co-au.)  » 

Many :  it  is  a  sign  of  the  plural  numbs*  ;'  but  mtf 
used  when  speaking  of  men,  or  of.  brute  anisaals:  it  if 
sometimes,  however;  used  jn  the  singular  aamber,  as 
Cow-tan  gdta,  a  friend:  this  arises  from  the 
stance  that  this  wor<J  is  also  taken  in  the  sense  of  a  i 
lective  noun,  and  may  mean  company,  or  asescisfien ; 
hence  Cow-tangata  means,  literally,  a  man  of  one's  as- 
sociation, or  company.  See  FrUnd,  in  the  other  part 
of  the  vocabulary. 
Stalk ;  stem. 

CoV-a.    A  fence.  * 

Co-ooahe.    The  aheak,  ••  :  v 

Co-ooma.    For  what  purpose;  what  for. 

CoVca.    Whilst ;  (used  only  when  the  first  persao  i 

.»■  >ti*tted)«  '    A 

Go'>ucoV./.  Ta  bathe-*:  ts> 'foments 

Co'w-fafi'ne.    Female  companion. 

Co%-mea.    An  adherent^  or  Ibiawsr,       - 


. « • 


EVA 

Co'w-no'fo.    A  companion  dwelling  with  one ;  an  inmate'; 
a  family. 

CoV-ninga.    A  female  servant,  or  attendant. 

Co'w-tanga'ta.    Male  companion;  a  friend  (tngofta,  a»man.)  # 

Co'w-va'e.     The  leg. 

Cown&too.  The  stick  which  is  forcibly  rubbed  on  a  flat- 
piece  of  dry  wood  to  procure  fire:  the  flat  piece  of 
wood  is  called  tohnga. 

Coy.    The  pron.  you :  this  word  is  used  only  as  the  subject 
^  of  the  verb,  or  in  answer  to  the  question,  who  ? 

E. 

E.     A  contraction  of  the  article  he. 

— .   The  sign  of  the  third  person  singular  of  the  future  tense. 

Etoo.    To  weed;  to  clear  of  weeds. 

Icliia.    The  handle  of  an  axe,  hatchet,  or  ads*. 

E'coo.    Mine ;  my  own. 

YAoo.    Ashes;  dust. 

E'foo-efoo.    Dusty ;  covered  with  ashet. 

E'fooia.    Dusty ;  covered  with  astyei. 

E'gi.     A  chief;  a  god. 

M6tta  m&tta  4gi.    Lite  a  prince  or  chief;  of  or  be- 
longing to  a  chief;  magnificent ;  pompous. 
E'ho.     Fetid ;  putrid. 
EI6I0.    The  tongue  of  any  animal. 
E'lo.     Stinking;  putrid. 
EI6a.  •  Having  the  knowledge  of;  being  acquainted  with.    ' 

Fucca  el6a.    Communicative. 
E'nio.    To  lick. 

E*na.    There  (see  Hena.)  '  r 

E'nga.    Turmeric.  » 

E'nt.     Here;  in  this  place  (pee  Hen?.) 
E'nne.    The  possess,  pron.  his,  her,  its* 
Efoocod.     The  possess,  pron.  Ifiy. 
E'va.    To  walk. 
E'va  6va.    To  promenade  or  walk  about  at  leisure. 


t  AF 

F. 

Fa.    The  numeral  four. 
-*— •  Much;  exceedingly* 
— .  Capable  of. 
—*   Hoarse. 
Fa-booie.    Eloquent. 
Fa-cawle.    Importunate. 

Fachi.    To  break;  to  dislocate;  to  sprain:  broken;  dis- 
jointed. 
Fucca  fachi.  .Malevolence  (fee  Fachi-fachi.) 
Fachi-fachi.    A  grudge. 

Fie.    This  word  aignifiea  mother,  but  is  never  need  In  tht 
vocative  case  :  if  8,  person  calls  td  his  mother,  he  nubs 
use  of  her  name ;  or  as  children  do,  he  calls  ouira  j 
see  a* la. 
Faeno.    A  stinking  breath. 
Faefine.    The  armpit. 
Fa-fa.    To  feel ;  to  grope  about ;  to  carry  on  the  back. 

Faf&he  bo-ooTi.    To  grope  about  in  the  dark. 
Fafa'nga.    To  feed ;  to  nourish ;  to  supply  with  food. 
Fafs/ngo.    To  whisper. 
'■'.  To  awaken. 
Fafa'oo.    To  fill  up ;  to  stuff  full ;  to  load ;  to  burthen* 
Fafa'too.     To  curl ;  to  fold  up. 
Fa-fehoo'i.    Inquisitive. 
FaMy'.    Capable  of;  able  to  do. 

Fafine.    A  woman ;  a  female  of  any  animal ;  a  daughter. 
Fa'Ane  tacabl.     A  single  or  unmarried  won— 

■    oha'na.    A  married  woman. 
— —  motoofe.     An  old  woman ;  s  widow ;  si* 
a  wife. 
Fa'-foos/gi.     Free-hearted;   generous.    (ft,  apt  or  abb; 
Jbocfgi,  to  make  a  present.) 


FAN 

Etf-f<x*L    Prolific  " 

Fa-gnaoo'e.  .  Diligent. 

Fagns/wta.    Shell-$sh  of  any  kiad ;  to  gather  shell-fish« 
Falie-g&e.    A  primal;  (>'A*,  a  division  or  das*  of*  men; 

and  gShe,  original,  distinct,  or  different,) 
Fs/hi-falii.    To  split ;  to  rend ;  cracked,  broken. 
Fa-iiaw.    Perceivable ;  (from^/a,  able;  iVa,  to  perceive.} 
Fai'te.    The  posture  in  which  the  women  ait  on  the  ground, 

not  cross-legged  as  the  men,  but  with  the  legs  doubled 

up  on  one  side. 
Faf-ky'.    To  eat  much;  to  gormandise;  to.  eat  heartily; 

{fi%  much ;  ky%  to  eat.) 
Fala.    A  mat  to  sleep  on. 
Fa-leo.    Vigilant. 
Falifti.    To  pare ;  to  floor. 

Faligi  low  papa.    To  floor  with  boards. 
Fali'gi  tacapotw.    To  cover  the  floor  with  plaited 
mats  of  the  cocoa-nut  leaf. 
Falle.    A  house.    Falle  booafca,  a  hog-sty.    Fatte  vac**  a 

small  house  in  a  canoe. 

Falle  manoo.    A  bird-cage. 
Falle  lahi.    The  large  house  on  a  marly. 
Fs/lle-booa'ca.    A  pig -8ty9  (fa'Ue,  a  house ;  totwYo,  a  hog 

or  pig. 
Faflle-ma'noo.    A  cage,  (Ja'Uc,  a  house ;  ma'noo,  a  bird.) 
Fallr-gi.    (Seefaligi.) 
Fallfgi  tafccapCw.    To   cover   the  floor  or  ground  with 

plaited  mats  of  the  cocoa. 
Fak/.    To  stretch  in  point  of  length ;  no  word  for  to  stretch 

in  point  of  expansion :  for  this  they  would  say,  "  to 

make  it  larger,  this  or  that  way." 
Falofalo'.        do.  do. 

Fanafaga,    A  fable ;  a  fictitious  tale. 
Pa'nga.    Beach ;  shore. 


FEA 

Pa'ngo-fango.    To  blow  the  nose  ;  also  flutes  blown  by  dft 

nose. 
Fanifo.    The  art  of  swimming  in  the  surf. 
Finna.    A  mast ;  to  shoot  as  with  a  gun  or  bow. 

Tcfillo  fanna,  the  heel  of  the  mast ;  ooho  fa***, 
*     the  mast  head, 
Fa'nna~fonnoo*a.    Great  guns  j  ordnance?  cannon  ;  (/«»*, 

to  shoot,  and  fomno'on;  the  land.) 
Fatona-tanga'ta.    A  musket. 
Fano'w.    Pregnancy;    childbirth;   progeny;   offspring;  to 

bring  forth  young. 

Fatoow  moo/a.    A  miscarriage,  (as  to  childbirth.) 
FanoV  ma'te.    Still-born. 
Fa  6.    A  peg. 
Fa'oo.    To  take  away  by  main  force,  or  by  virtue  of  stn#- 

rior  rank  or  authority ;  also  to  load ;  to  burthen ;  to 

stock  with. 
Fa'ooa'gi.     Laden  with,  (as  a  canoe.) 
Fa'oo  va'ca.     To  load  a  ship  or  canoe. 
Fa'ta.     A  shelf;  a  loft  ;  also  a  hand-barrow. 

r 

Fa'ta-fa'ta.     The  chest ;  the  thorax. 

Fa'tongi'a.     A  tax ;  impost. 

Fa'too.    The  stomach ;  also  a  bale. 

Fatoo.     To  fold  or  wrap  up ;  fatoo  la,  to  furl  the  saB. 

IVioo-fa'too.     To  fold  or  wrap  up. 

Fatoola.     Beardless. 

Fa'too-oo'a.    A  double  garment  ofgnatuo,  not  plaited ;  what 

plaited,  it  is  called  vaky\ 
Fa'wha.     Offspring ;  son  or  daughter. 
Fe.     To  do,  (not  often  used;  probably  a  corruption  of/jfc 

to  do.) 
— .     Where  ;  what  place. 
Fca'looo'gi.     Variable;   inconstant;   unsettled;    wander** 

about. 
Fca'oo.     To  watch  ;  to  guard. 


FBI** 

Featooa/gi.  An  amour ;  intrigue ;  also  a  mistreat;  lovetf ;  « 
sweetheart. 

Feccata'gi.    To  meet ;  to  encounter. 

Fecbw.    Ta  bi«t;  coflamand?  order %  a  message ;  an  order. 

FcTe?     How? 

Feftca.  Strong;  athletic;  sturdy;  hard;  hardness;  stiff; 
inflexible. 

Fegf.    Controversy;  discussion. 

FeTifa.    To  hate;  abhor;  dislike;  hatred. 

Fehoci.     To  enquire ;  an  enquiry ;  a  question. 

Feichi.    Copulation ;  act  of  generation.         * 

Felce-fSke.    The  ague. 

Feki'ta.     To  congrete  ;  to  salute ;  to  hug. 

Fekke.    The  fish  commonly  called  cat-fish. 

Fekki'ta.     A  certain  kind  of  tree. 

Fekky'.  A  disposition  to  devour  or  bite  mankind;  applied 
to  cannibals  or  to  any  animal  that  bites  or  eats  men  ;  a 
dog  that  is  disposed  to  bite  one,  is  said  to  be  fikh/. 

F61e.     Interspersed  ;  spread  about. 

Fcleno'a.     Strewed  about ;  scattered; 

Fellio'co.     A  store- house. 

Felo  w.  To  navigate ;  to  make  a  voyage ;  a  canoe  j  a  fleet 
of  canoes ;  a  voyage. 

Feta'i.    Thanks. 

Fetaftgi.    To  fight  with  dubs. 

Feta'gi.    To  meet. 

Feta'ma.  Gestation;  pregnancy:  (from  Jk to* make,  «tma9 
a  child.) 

Fltata'Qgi.    To  safe;  to  shed  tears. 

Fetatecbili.  To  lighter*;  (to  flash  with  lightning ;>  light- 
ning. 

Fe'tchi.    To  break ;  to  stave;  ta  split ;  to  snap  in  two. 

Fetoof.    A  star ;  a  planet. 

Fetowla'gi.    To  meet ;  to  cross ;  ajaeeting ;  a  croeeiug.  - 

VOL.  II.  c 


FIO 

Fi.    To  twist ;  to  plait. 

Fi'a.    Want ;  being  without ;  to  want ;  to  desire  to  be,  or 
to  have. 
Fooa  mbWi  fia;  sudden  death.    (Fooo,  entirely; 
mo Wt,  life;  J?a>  wanting.) 

Fi'a-alooargi.    Wandering;  unquiet;  discontented. 

Fi'a-fei'chi.     Venery ;  venereal  desire. 

Fi'a-fi'a.  Delight ;  gladness ;  joy ;  pleased;  delighted ;  con- 
ceit or  pride  arising  from  rank;  abilities;  extraordi- 
nary actions,  &c. 

Fi'a-ky'.     Hunger;  hungry. 

Fi'a-Jalii.  To  brag;  to  boast;  {fia,  to  wish  or  desire; 
lahiy  great  or  powerful,)  boasting. 

Fi'amo'-a'loo !  Away !  begone !  (from  fia  mo*  afloo ;  desire 
you  go.) 

Fi'chi.    To  fillip ;  to  snap  with  the  fingers. 
Fu'cca-fi'chi.    To  apologize. 

Fi'fi'e.     Firewood ;  fuel. 

Fi'ha.     How  many  ? 

Fi'hi.     To  entangle  ;  to  entwine ;  to  twist. 

Filii-fftti.    To  entwine ;  to  twist. 

Fill.  To  select ;  to  choose ;  to  guess ;  a  choice  ;  to  sttive ; 
to  search  ;  also  an  adversary,  (probably  from  the  cus- 
tom of  singling  out  an  enemy  to  fight  with;)  to  contend 
with :  fill  mo  he  macca,  to  strive  against  rocks ;  to  at- 
tempt impossibilities. 

Fi'li-fi4i.     To  choose ;  to  pick ;  to  select. 

Fi'lian'ge.     To  throw  over ;  to  turn  on  one  side. 

Fili  he-lc/to.  Literally,  to  search  the  mind;  to  try  to  re- 
member ;  to  ruminate ;  to  consider. 

Filihi.     To  overturn  ;  to  make  topsy  turvy :  upset. 

Filo.     Thread,  string :  the  perineum* 

Fioo.    To  satiate ;  to  have  enough  o£ 
Satisfied;  tired  of. 


FOL 

Fftoo.    The  numeral  leren. 
Fitoo~ongofoo/loo.    Seventy. 
Fota.    To  burs*;  to  crack ;  to  break  to  pieties. 
Foccatoof.    On  end ;  endwise ;  to  set  up  on  end. 

— .    To  heap  up |  to  collect  together;  to  jumble 

together ;  to  amass. 

.    To  transport,  or  convey  goods  in  a  canoe* 

Va'ca-foccatoo';  a  small  paddling  canoe. 


Foffo'lla.     To  unfold ;  to  spread  t>ut. 

Fofo'nga.     The  visage,  or  countenance ;  appearanoa. 

.     A  feature  of  the  face. 
Fo'ha.    A  son. 
Fofie.    A  paddle. 

Fo'he-oo'lli.    A  paddle  to  steer  with ;  a  rudder;  a  helm. 
FoTii-ftyhi.    To  peel ;  to  strip  off  as  bark,  drc. 
Fci.     Cowardice. 

.    One,  or  rather  a  whole,  bulk,  ball,  or  head :  9*fifi 

la'ho,  a  testicle,  from/o'i,  a  whole,  a  ball  or  nucleus, 

and  lafkof  the  scrotum,  a  ball  of  the  scrotum. 

Foi-va'ca.    Either  of  the  canoes  of  a  double  canoe. 

Fo'i-oo'fL    One  yam.    Frf-ufoo.    One  cocoa-nut,  &c. 
the  same  as  we  use  the  word  head  for  tme9  when  we 
say  a  head  of  cattle,  &c. 
Fo'i-ma/noo.    An  egg  (from/oi,  a  ball,  or  nucleus;  mafnooy 

a  bird). 
Frf-vate.    The  calf  of  the  leg  (from/oi,  the  body,  or  bulk, 

va'e,  the  leg). 
Fo*ki.     Pray !  if  you  please  1  now  do  1 
Fo(ki-fa.    Forthwith ;  suddenly. 
Foky'.    A  species  of  the  lizard. 
Fo4i.    Round  about ;  encircling. 

.    To  circumvent ;  to.  surround* 

— — .    To  spread  about  (aa  vegetation). 
Fo4o.    To  swallow, 

C2 


POO 

Fo/io  hWo  ky ;  to  swallow  greedily, 
Fo'nno.    To  inlay. 

Fonnoo'a.    Land ;  bliine  ;*  country  round  about ;  »  people 
Fonnoo'a  ta'ha*    Of  one  country ,  compatriot, 
Lo'bo  fonnoo'a.  Midland;  inland. 
Fonnoo'a-lo'to.    The  stone  sepulchre,  in  which  the  bodiei 

of  chiefs  are  interred*    See  Lot*. 
Fotao.    A  public  harangue  on  matters,  generally  of  civil 

policy.     See  vol.  i.  p.  285. 
—  The  food  thai  is  eaten  at  cava  partiee;  also  the  act  rf 

eating  it, 
Fonotaga.    A  walk ;  a  journey  by  land ;  a  jaunt* 
JFono'ngo.     Hark !  to  listen ;  to  hearken. 
Fo'neo.    A  turtle. 
Fofaoo-colo'a.    The  sea  tortoise. 
Foo.     Great ;  exceeding. 
.-'■■•'  '.    To  dap  the  hollow  palms  of  the  handa  together, 

Foo'a  ca*va  (corruptien  oi\foo  he  caVa,  to  clap  the 
hands  for  the  cs/va),  an  oath  ;  because  a  so- 
lemn oath  is  generally  confirmed  by  takings  cup 
of  cava.     Ndijbo  Ac  ca'va  ;  he  took  an  oath. 
Fooa.    The  shape* 

Fruit;  blossom. 

Bearing  fruit;  to  carry  a  parcel*  or  burden. 
All ;  (in  quantity  of  mass,  or  bulk). 
Also  a  corruption  of  Foo-  he.  as/ooo  cat*.    See  ft* 
Foo'a-W.     AH;  (all  in  quantity  of  bulk,  or  mas*)*  every: 

universally;  wholly. 
Foo'a-be  foo/a-l>6.     Altogether  (h*  respect  of  eaten** 

or  bulk). 
Foo'a-ca'va.    An  oath.     Sea  Foo. 
Fo<ya-ca'va  lolii.    Perjury  (/tf*W,  false). 
Foo-acco'w.    A  general  naaaa  for  the  vegetable  kingdoie. 
Foo'a-caca'la.    A  flower ;  a  Woasotn. 


FOO 

.Foaa«CQ*r&.  An  oath  (derived  from  /oris,  to  eaH,  at  cdva9 
the  cava,  as  a  solemn  oath  is. generally  taken  4ft  a  cava 
ring.)     See  Foo. 

Fooa-feoike-ariga.    .The.  name,  of  the  twelfth  lunar  month. 

Foo'a-foo'a.  A  pimple ;  any  eruption  on  the  skin ;  a  car- 
buncle, &c. 

Foo'afooa'nga.     Pumice-stone. 

Fooa'gi.    To  make  a  ptescNit;  to  give :  given* 

Meafcojfgi ;  a  present,  or  gift  (a  thing  given.) 

Foo'a-hifo.  To  lie  along  on.  the  gcoand,  with  the  face 
downwards. 

Foo'a-mdoo'i»fi!a.     Suddei*  death ;  a  swoon. 

Fooa'oga.    A  grindstone ;  a  whetstone* 

Foo'chi.    Te  haul.;  to  pull,  as/oodW  la ;  to  haul  on  the  sheets 

j    To  deplume  (as .Co  pluck  a  fowl). 

■■  ■■    —     The  plantain. 

Foofe.    A  whisk  used  to  keep  off  flies. 

* 

FoofW.     To  hide ;  to  conceal ;  to  disguise. 

Retired  ;  hidden ;  snug ;  concealed ;  disguised* 

Foo  fool  a.     Swollen ;  protuberant ;  bloated ;  large-bellied ; 

intumescence. 
FbofWloo.    To  wash :  lavation ;  washing* 
Foo*ga.     A  flag :  colours ;  a  streamer,  as  used  in  canoes. 
Foolioo.     Boxing. 

Foola.    Swollen;  bloated;  large -bellied* 
— — —    Habitual  expectoration  from  disease.    • 
Foo-lahi.     Huge ;  very  great. 

FooHi.    All ;  (in  number,  not  mast,  or  quantity  of  hulk). 
Foo4i-be.    All ;  (in. number,  not  mass,  or  quantity  pf,bulk). 
Foofoo.    Hair  of  the  hody.  -      - 

Fooloo-fooQoo.     Hairy. 

Fooloo-he-raa'noo.    feathers.  .   . 

Foomga,    TheJaeaeh ;  the  daj*  of  a  vessel ;  the  U^a*eum- 

mit  of  a  hill  where  it  is  flat :  the  top  of  any ; thing. 
Foonga  vaca ;  the  deck  of  a  vessel. 


FYG 

Foonga  mooo'nga.  The  top  of  •  hill,  or  mountain:  the 
iiimmit  of  an  island. 

Foo'o.    Afresh;  anew:  new. 

Foootiagi.  To  lie  along  on  the  ground  with  the  face  up- 
ward*. 

Foo'ta.    To  boast ;  to  vaunt. 

Foo'te.     Effort. 

To  strive  with  muscular  energy:  to  struggle. 

Fow.    A  frontlet ;  a  fillet  round  the  forehead :  headband 

A  turban  of  any  sort. 
Sufficiently. 

Fowa'gi.    To  load ;  to  freight,  Arc.  as  a  basket,  or  canoe. 

Fucca.  To  make,  to  fashion;  after  the  manner  of:  a  fre- 
quent sign  of  the  adverb :  also  often  the  sign  by  which 
the  noun  is  changed  into  the  verb ;  consequently  it  it 
often  used  in  compound  words.  See  the  list  of  words 
of  this  class,  at  the  end  of  the  letter  F. 

Fu'ngatoo'a.     To  wrestle. 

Fy.    A  fish  called  the  sting-ray. 

—  To  do,  to  make. 

Fy-fy.     To  go  on  incessantly  doing ;  as,  gooa  tomfyjy  hs* 

hdy  we  go  on  incessantly  doing,  and  what  ?  i.  e.  what  ii 

the  result. 
Fyatoga.     Competition;  rivalship. 
Fya'nge.    To  proceed  in  a  discourse,  or  performance. 
Fyfo'ki.    Encore!  as  exclaimed  at  public  assemblies  (firosi 

fy,  do ;  and  f</ki,  if  you  please). 
Fyffy'Maho'w.    Casual,  accidental. 
•  Fyg6he.    To  differ ;  to  do  differently. 

■        A  peculiarity,  or  something  different  from  tst 

common. 

Marvellous;  strange;  original. 


Fy*gna-m6a. 


FUC 

Fy'gna*ptf .     Ananas,  or  the  pine-apple* 

r^ygtoati.    Difficult;  arduous. 

F/gnofboa.    Easy  to  be  accomplished ;  easy. 

Fy^nofooa-ange.     Easily. 

Fy'-telrTia.    To  choose,  or  do  as  one  pleases ;  choice  j  will ; 

pleasure. 
Fytoca.    A  grave  or  burying-place. 
Fy'-y-b&    Suddenly;  unexpectedly, 
Fucca.     See  this  word  under  the  proper  alphabetical  ar- 
rangements. 
Fucca  aa.    To  arouse ;  to  awaken  ;  to  keep  awake* 

afoo-m6te.     The  name  of  the  ninth  lunar  month. 
■  dfoo-moo6i.    The  name  of  the  tenth  lunar  month. 

inga  g&e.    According  to  a  different  turn ;  mode  or 
disposition. 

T6gi  fucca  anga  g6he.    An  axe :  i.  e.  a 
tofgit  (an  adze,)  having  the  blade 
differently  turned  in  respect  to  the 
handle. 
£00.    To  become  cloudy. 
6ta.    To  aim. 
6ta.    To  widen, 
ava.  *  To  perforate. 

aw  tow.    An  advanced  party  going  forward  to  en- 
courage the  enemy  on  to  battle.    It  is  more  usually 
pronounced  Jircca  haw  towf  which  see. 
becoo.    To  blunt ;  to  obtund. 
bibico.     See  fucca  bico-bico. 
bico.    To  bend ;  to  incurvate. 

•  «  -  

bico-bico,  or  fucca  bibico.    To  be  lazy  or  dronish ; 
io.harass ;  remiss,  or  faulty  in  one's  duty, 
bico  bico-ange.    Indolently. 
bigL    To  cement  or  cause  to  adhere*  -  -   - 

bibs.    To  splash ;  to  i«fect.  >^ 


FUC 

Fuccabtto.    To  fill. 
'         boo&ca.    To  go  on  all  fours,  like  a  swipe  j  awinuk 

boobo6ha«     To  swelter ;  to  be  uncomfortable  «th 

heat. 
-w— -  bodlemttta*  To  hector  or  bluster,  (literally,  to  mshe 


the  eyes  swell.) 

—  bool6.    Blindfold. 

b6-o61i.     To  encloud  or  become  cloudy;  to  be 


lurid  or  dark. 

—  bo6ta.    To  lay  a  wager. 

—  bopo.    To  moulder. 

—  tattoo  oCa.    On  both 

—  cactha.    To  enkindle ;  to  enflame. 

— -  caot*  a.    Sudorific ;  sweaty ;  causing  sweat. 

—  dufb.     To  maim. 

- —  caky*.    To  people. 

—  c&ta.    To  cause  laughter ;  risible. 

~  ciwna.     To  envenom ;  to  intoxicate  (with  cava.) 

—  chino.     Alible  ;  nutritive  \  fattening ;  to  fatten, 
chi-chi.     Softly ;  quietly  ;  slightly ;   to  abbrevit!? 


or  reduce ;  to  decrease. 

I'noo  flucca  chi  chi.    To  sip. 

Vicoo  fu'cca  chi  chi.     Moist. 
— -  c6a.     To  spume ;  to  froth. 

—  co'foo.    To  wrap  up  ;  to  inclose  as  a  parcel ;  anr 
part  of  European  dress,  as  cqfoo  v&e9  a  stocking,  *c. 

—  coo*la-coo1a.    To  rubify  ;  to  redden. 

—  co*vi.     To  calumniate ;  to  vitiate ;  to  make  bad. 

—  tfoo.    To  pulverize. 

— •  6gi.    To  consecrate ;  like  a  chief;  noble. 

Mo'wmo'w  mea  fifcca  cgi.    To  profint ; 
profanation;  sacrilege. 

—  Qo.    To  turn  putrid ;  to  become  tttokiqg. 

—  etoa.    To  betray;  to  coto*nunicale;  *o  tell;  to  idttr. 


FU€ 

Fucca  fa/chL    To  owe  a  grudge. 

fa'chi-fiVchi.    Enmity. 

i         fafifae.    Feminine. 

faite.    The  sitting  posture  of  females.    To  sit  as 

the  women  do,  with  the  legs  doubled  up  on  one  side.  . 
— -  fanoAv.    To  impregnate;  to  get  with  child. 
— —  feffica.    To  harden. 
— —  fehoo'i.    To  interrogate. 

1   ■  (Be.    To  disperse ;  to  intersperse. 

■  Kile.    To  strew ;  to  spread. 

■  fe-ta'ma.     To  impregnate. 
fe-tal.    To  thank. 

fetowls/gi.    To  cross ;  to  meet. 

fi'a-fiia.    To  pleate  mentally ;  to  sjflbad  Joy. 

■    fi'chi.    To  apologise. 

fihi.    To  entwine;  toeoUWgle* 

fi'oo.    To  satiate ;  to  satisfy. 

—  foli.     To  expand* 

foo'oha'gi.    To  lie  with  ,the  face  .downwards. 

Todito  fucca  fa/ohagi.    Lying  on  the 

.grounjl  with  the  lace  downwards. 

foo'ohifo.     To  lie  with  the  foce  upwards. 

»  Toc6to  fucca  fooohifo.    Lying  along  su- 

pine on  the  ground. 
■  gfle.    To  bemire ;  to  dirty  with  mud  or  mire. 

— —  gooli.    Canine ;  like  a  dog. 

gigi'hi.    To  cavil;. tenacity  or  obstinacy  in  prin- 


ciple. 

—  gi  m£noo.    To  ohirp  as  a  bird. 

—  gi'o.    To  peep;  to  pry. 

—  gnac6w.    To  embowel. 

—  gntlo.    To  obliterate. 

—  gnapfc.    Tobestir. 

—  gnignila.    To  burnish ;  to  brighten. 


Fire 

Fucca  gnofooa.    To  facilitate. 

'  ■        g6oi.*    Occecation ;  the  act  of  blinding. 

■  ha.    To  display ;  to  exhibit ;  to  shew ;  to  indicate. 
"  hah6w.    To  bedew. 

■     ■     hamo.    To  hanker  after;  to  long  for;  to  envy. 
■     haw-tow.    To  skirmish ;  a  skirmishing  party ;  (cor* 
ruption  tf fucca  how  he  tow,  to  make  come  the  battle.) 

— —  Me.    To  bewilder. 

—  heca.    To  embark. 

■  hela.     To  tire  for  want  of  breath  ;   to  be  out  of 
breath. 

— — —  hifo.     To  sally ;  to  descend. 
— —  hina.    To  whiten. 
— — —  hina  he  laa.    To  bleach  in  the  son. 
—  hina  hina.    To  blanch  or  whiten. 

hingo'a.    To  denominate ;  to  give  a  name. 

hooa.    To  banter  |  to  joke. 

ho6hoo.    To  suckle. 

— —  ho6o  melie.    To  sweeten. 

■  ifi-afi.    Of  or  belonging  to  the  evening. 

Ky  fucca  ifi  afi.    An  evening  meal ;  a  sup- 
per. 
'       il6nga.    To  betoken ;  to  note ;  to  mark ;  to 


ominous. 

TVW  fucca  i!6nga.     Indiscriminately ;  with- 
out selection  or  distinction, 
ita.     To  affront ;  aggravate ;  make  angry ;  dispfea*; 
to  pout  or  look  displeased. 

—  kevi'gi.    Backwards,  like  the  motion  of  a  crab. 

—  ky.    To  feed ;  also  to  wean. 

—  14a.    To  bask  in  the  sun.  • 

— -  laa.     Insolation  ;  exposure  to  the  sun. 

—  lahi.    To  inlarge ;  the  name  of  a  ceremony. 

—  lalata.    To  tame ;  to  make  mOd. 


FU.C 

Fucca  lata.    To  tame ;  to  make  mild. 
■■    ■■      lflle  mdooi.    To  amaze  ;  to*  wonder ;  Co  astonish ; 
to  start. 

leo.    To  watch ;  a  watchman ;  a  sentry. 

lia-lia.     Abominable;  filthy;  odious;  ugly. 

■  lili.     To  put  in  a  passion ;  to  irritate. 

UWL    To  make  good ;  to  mend ;  to  make  peace ; 


reconcile ;  a  pacification ;  an  armistice. 

—  16a-16a.     To  elongate. 

Taffe  ftcca  loa-lfia.    To  slit ;  a  slit :  a  cut. 

—  lolongo  or  16ngo-16ngo.     To  quiet ;  to  recompose ; 
to  hush ;  quiet. 

—  long6a.     Noisy ;  to. roar;  to  make  a  noise. 
— 1066.    To  excavate.  . 

—  ly.    Adulation ;  to  cajole  j  to  coax  ;'  to  wheedle. 

—  ma.    To  abash ;  also  to  defecate ;  to  cleanse. 

—  machila.    To  sharpen. 

—  ma£ne.     To  titillate ;  to  irritate  gently ;  to  tickle. 

—  maha.    To  drain. 

—  raahagL    To  sicken ;,  to  disorder. 

—  raallca.    Sensual  pleasure. 

—  malo.    Ease ;  to  rest.  - 

—  mal6hi.    Forcibly ;  by  force. 

T6ho  fuoca  malohu    To  drag  by  force  v 

—  mal6)6.    To  refresh. 

—  m&loo.    To  shade. 

—  mamahi.    To  excruciate ;  to  hurt ;  to  pain. 

—  mamtita.    To  indigitate. 

—  manaco.    Amiable ;  to  endear ;  to  be  fond  of. 
— •  manatoo.    Memento ;  to  remind. 

—  man&va  gnat£.    Depectible ;  tough  or  clammy. 

—  manaTa-he.    To  frighten  or  alarm ;  to  appal. 

—  minava-chi.    To  frighten,  &c. 

—  manga.    To  open  the  mouth ;  to  gape;  to  gasp. 


FUC 

Fucca  manga  rae.    Astride ;  to  get  astride. 
— — - —  maoo.    To  explain ;  define ;  elucidate ;  explanation ; 
also  to  compensate. 

Tai  fa  racca  mioo.    Inexplicable. 
■  mataffa.    A  gash  or  great  cut* 
■     matoloo.    To  mcraisate  ;  to  inspissate ;  to  thictai. 
■  ■   ■  ■     matta.    To  sharpen. 
m6le-ra61e.    To  mingle  among ;  to  be  strewed  or 


dispersed  among. 

—  mimi.      To  make  or  encourage  a  child  to  make 


•water. 
-^-  m6a  ra6a.     To  desiccate  or  harden ;  to  dry  up. 

jnoco-moco.    To  cool* 

m6he.    To  lull ;  to  make  sleepy. 

— -  molle-molle.    To  plane ;  to  smooth. 
-*— moloo.    To  intenerate ;  to  soften'. 
momoco.     To  cool. 


—  momoho.    To  ripen;  to  maturate. 

—  moo'ni.     Proof. 

—  moooi.    To  quicken ;  to  animate :  to  lieaL 

—  raooonoo.    To  bless. 

— Wtooa  tangata.    To  be  .economical;  (to  act  the 

old  man  ;)  thrifty ;  saving. 

-—  sow.    To  makeiast ;  to  fasten  ;  to  secure ;  to  tie; 


to  furl,  (as  a  sail.) 

—  mow  alo6nga.    To  heighten. 

—  ■■    helalo.    To  deepen. 

—  na.    To  appease ;  to  quiet ;  to  silence,  (as  a  chM) 

—  namoo  cac^la.   .To  scent ;  to  perfume. 

—  n6fo.    To  seat,  or  cause  to  sit. 

—  non6.    To  shorten, 
fohi.    To  conclude ;  to  perfect  ;  to  extirpates i0 


demolish. 
'!■.■■  of*.    To oare**  io  fondle. 


FUC 

uoca  criti.    To  approach'. 

oo'a.    To  divide  id  two?  to  bisect. 

odK.    To  begrime  or  make  dirty  and  black ;    to 
blacken. 

•fee.    To  impoverish. 

tiboo.     To  interdict. 

t£ha.    To  adjoin;   unite  to;   coalesce4;   connect; 


interlace ;  to  league  j  to  be  in  company  with ;  toge- 
ther ;   inseparate. 

Paloo  fucca  tftha.  To  intermix  as  fluids- 
(pdloo,  to  mix  with  water.) 

I^to  fucca  taha.    Unanimity  ;  unanimous. 

Tai  fucca  t&ha.    Separate ;  not  irMirimoTts; 

—  takky/.     To  begird ;  to  coil. 

—  tammachi.     Boyish ;  childish. 

L£a  fucca  tarmrehf.    To  prattle, 
tane.   To  sit  cross-legged  on  the  ground  as  the  men 


do :  the  way  the  women  sit  is  called'  fucca  fafte  (vid. 
futccajaite. ) 

—  tangfta.    Manly  ;  as  a  man ;  (worthy  of  a  man.) 

Lo'to  fucca  tangftta.    Magnanimous. 

Tai  fticca  tangdta.  Unmanly ;  ungenerously. 

—  tattow.     To  equalize. 

—  te.     To  review  troops. 

tee.    Water  excursions ;  to-  c<ra#e  to  float. 

tfefoo'a.    To  denude ;  to  divest ;  to  strip. 


"■       tetftne.    Trembling;  shivering. 

Aloo  fucca  tetewe.     To  waddle ;  to  walk 
feebly  and  tieinMiBgly. 
to'ca.     To  strand, 
lo'noo.    To  demonstrate; 

tdto*.    To  degrade;  comrooit;  vulgar;  inelegant. 
Un/boo.    To  beget;  to  cause  to  spring  up  op  grow, 
to-o'chi.    Jointly. 


GEL 

Fucca  tocgoo.    To  appease ;  Ju'cea  ioo'ga  4ut#  iftm  (to 

appease  his  anger,)  to  interrupt. 
»»         tootWe  he  momo'co.    To  tabefy ;  to  waste  away*  as 

the  body  with  a  consumption. 
■  ■■  ■     toto'noo.    To  straighten ;  to  make  a  discourse  clear 


and  direct ;  upright. 

—  totoo'e.     To  macerate. 

■—  tow.    To  barter,  truck  or  deal  with ;  to  .commute ; 


to  lay  a  wager  or  bet. 

—  To  squeze  or  wring  out,  as  water  out  of  a  sponge. 
— -  va.    To  disport,  play,  or  toy.  n 

—  v6ca.    Haft ;  handle. 

—  vakky'.     Mindful. 

—  vakkyange.    Warily;  carefully. 

—  vaky.    To  plait ;  to  pucker. 

—  vave.    To  accelerate ;  quicken  ;  to  go  faster;  cur- 


sory. 

—  vavea.    To  huddle. 

—  vicoo.     To  dip  or  wet  any  thing. 

—  vy'.    To  dissolve ;  to  melt ;  to  indrench. 

—  vy-vy'.     To  enervate ;  weaken ;  invalidate. 


G. 

Ge.    Yet. 

G6a.    A  species  of  the  bread  fruit. 

G6he.     Different;  differently;  apart;  separate;  separately; 

removed ;  contrary ;  uncommon;  also  elsewhere ;  which 

last  word  cannot  be  expressed  by  gdke-gJhe,  which  see. 
G6he-g6he.    The  same  meaning  as  gcfke,  only  that  it  does 

not  mean  elsewhere. 
G61e.    A  dike ;  a  ditch  ;  to  dig ;  to  intrench. 
G61e-gele.    Earth  or  mould ;  the  ground ;  no/6  gJU,  livug 

in  mud. 
Gfie-gelea.    Muddy;  miry. 
Gelea.    A  conch ;  also  muddy ;  slimy. 


GI 

G61emootoo.    The  common  earth-worm, 

G6mo.     The  eyelash. 

G6moo.    To  wink. 

Gena.  To  champ;  to  munch;  to  devour;  to  eat;  to 
corrode  or  canker,  as  iron  or  cloth  with  age  and  ex- 
posure. 

Qenanga.  Food ;  also  any  place  where  people  „have  sat 
down  to  eat. 

Ger.  The  sign  of  the  infinitive  mood  to ;  also  of  the  sub- 
junctive or  potential  mood  that* 

Ger.     Thou. 

Gete.  The  abdomen ;  the  belly;  the  stomach ;  the  gizzard 
of  fowls. 

Getoo.    Lame ;  to  hobble ;  mik-mtlc  gitoo,  to  hop. 

Ghe.  A  quarrel ;  disturbance  ;  affray ;  dispute ;  to  wran- 
gle ;  to  dispute. 

Gi.    To  whistle. 

Gi.  At;  to;  into;  than  (see  gi*9)  towards;  among; 
through ;  until ;  before  (in  point  of  excellence ;) 
against ;  opposite. 

Gia.  Than;  (only  used  when  the  subject  referred  to. for 
comparison  has  a  proper  name,  as  this  box  is  heavier 
than  Toobo' ;  otherwise  gi  is  used ;)  also  to  or  towards, 
used  before  proper  names. 

Gi-ai.    There ;  in  that  place. 

Gi-alotonga.     Above ;  aloft  ;  on  ;  upon. 

Giate.  To;  nafecow  ia  giate, gfuawtc/loo,  he  commanded 
them  i  he  bade  to  them ;  among ;  used  chiefly  before 
pronouns. 

Gi-bo'too.    On  one  side ;  towards. 

Gi-fc  ?     Where  ?  whither  ? 

Gi-hage.    Upwards. 

Girhtna.    There;  thither. 

Gi-h6ni     Here ;  hither;  to  this  place. 


GIN 

Oi-hifo.     Downwards 

Gi-ldlo.     Below  ;  down ;  downwards. 

Gi-loto.     In  the  middle;  amidst;  halfway;  inside ;  kt. 

Gi-moofe*    In  fronts  first  in  rank  or  place ;  forwards;  be- 
fore* 

GUmoo'i.     Behind;  or  last  in  rank  or  place;  backwards. 

Gi-moo*li,    Abroad;  in  a  distant  country. 

Gi-oo'ta.     On  shore ;  inland.    * 

Gi-towr.    Outside;  out;  without. 

Gi-tow  mooli.    Abaft;  asfeftt. 

Gia.    The  gorge  or  throat;  the  neck. 
Naw  gia.    To  strangle* 

Gife.    Where. 

Gigihi.  To  argue  obstinately  <*  contradictorily ;  to  clash ; 
to  contradict. 

Gihe.     There ;  in  that  place ;  thither. 

Gihtma.    To  the  left  hand ;  on  the  left  hand  or  tide. 

Gihena.     There;  in  that  place;  thither. 

GSJi.     Bark  of  a  tree  ;  paring  ;   skin,  husk,  or  hull ;  hide  or 
skin  of  an  animal,  living  or  dead. 
"■  A  file.    A  saw. 

GiKchi.    To*  file;  filings. 

Giloo.     A  million. 

Gi-mato'w.     To  the  right  hand. 

Giino'ooa.     Both ;  the  dual  number  of  the  pronoun  mo* 

Gimo'to'loo.  Ye ;  you ;  your ;  (used  only  when  three  or 
more  persons  ate1  signified;) 

GfhioHrooa*  We  two ;  both  of  us ;  our ;  (the  <hial  nuasber 
of  mow,  used  only  when  the  person  spoken  to  is  not  is- 
eluded.) 

Gim6wtoloo.  Us;  our;  (used  only  when  the  person  spokes 
to  is  not  included,  and  when  three  or  nwetate  meant) 

Gino'wooa.  They;  them;  their;  (when  only  two  are  sig- 
nified ;  vide  f  1*09*0%*,)'  bt>tfi  of-them. 


GNA 

Ginowoo'a-be.    Themselves;;  their  own;  (when  two  only 
are  signified),  vide  ginowto'loobe. 

Ginowtoloo.    They;  them;   their;   (when  three  or  more 
are  siguified),  vide  guu/wooa. 

Ginowto'loo-be.     Themselves;  their  own;  (when  three  or 
more  are  signified),  vide  giao'wooa-bc 

Gioo.     A  crane  5  (a  bird).. 

Gfta.     The  pronoun  I,  (used  in  answer,  to  a  question,  or 
after  a  verb). 

—  Tetanus,  trismus.    Spasms;  convulsions.  ... 

Gi'te.    To  view  at  a  distance,  as  tjbe  land  when  at  distance ; 
to  appear ;  to  view. 

Gi-too'a.    Behind ;  at  the  back  of. 

Gitowto4oo.     We. 

Gnaco.    Blubber;  fat;  grease. 

Panignaco.    Greasy ;  to  rub  with  grease. 

Gnacofw.    The  plural  of  tcc6w%  a  score;  used  only  in  count- 
ing out  yams  and  fish. 

Gnac6w.    The  inside  ;*  viscera ;  bowels.  . 

Gnafi-gnafi.     A  mat. 

Gnahi.    To  make;  to  fashion. 

Gnahi  c6vi.    Maltreatment. 

Gnahi-g6he.     To  alter. 

Gnah61o.    Fleetness ;  swiftness;  fast  sailing.  , 

Gnahow.    A  war  arrow* 

Gnalo.    To  disappear;  to  forget. 

Gnaloo.     A  billow ;  surf;  surge. 

Gnano.    Red-faced ;  flushed ;  sun-burnt ;  blowzy. 

Gnagn6w.    Headache* 

Gnaooa.  A  kind  of  cutaneous  eruption,  much  resembling 
the  itch,  (psora,)  but  confined  generally  to  the  soles  of 
the  feet,  and  between  the  toes,  and  supposed  to  arise 
from  not  washing  the  feet  sufficiently  before  going  to 
bed,  particularly  after  walking  in,  clayey  .places ;  it 
sometimes  appears  on  the  hands ;  is  not  contagious. 
VOL.  ii.  d 


GOO 

Griab6£.    Employment ;  work ;  also  motion. 

Fagnaooe.    Diligent. 
Gnaja'.    Difficult. 

Ca'ca  gnata'.    To  climb ;  (i.  e.  to  get  op  with  diffi- 
culty.) 
Mow  gnata*.    Settee. 
Gna'too.  The  substance  used  for  clothing*  prepared  front  the 
bark  of  the  Chinese  paper  mulberry  tree,  and  im- 
printed :  before  it  is  imprinted,  it  is  called  t*p*. 
Gnaw~gnaw.    A  great  cowardly  fellow  that  does  nothing 

but  talk;  a  braggadocio. 
Gnedji.    Hull ;  husk ;  pod ;  a  shell.     Gnedji  *fc*,  eocoa- 

nnt  shells. 
Gnfle.    A  baboon ;  a  monkey. 
Gnignila.     Bright;  polished;  brilliant. 
Gnofo6a.    Easy;    easRy;    plain;  evident;   unprohibited; 

not  forbidden;  not  tabooed. 
Gn6ngo.    A  seagull. 
Gn6ooe.    To  till  the  land ;  agricultural  work. 

Tai  gno'ooeia.    Uncultivated. 
Gnootoo.    Mouth  of  any  animal ;  beak  of  a  bird. 

Gnootoo  hoda.    Droll  in  speech. 
Gnooto61ow.    Lequacity;  garrulity;  talkative;  loquacious. 
Gnow-afi.    A  firebrand ;  a  firestick. 
Goo.     The  sign  of  the  second  person  singular  of  the  pieatnt 

tense;  gooaf  being  changed  into  goo.     (See  gooa.) 
Go6a.    The  sign  of  the  present  tense ;  in  the  second  person 

singular,  it  makes  goo. 
Gooa-loa.    Heretofore ;  formerly ;  a  long  time  ago. 
Go6i.    Blind;  blindness. 
G06H.    A  dog. 

Gooli  finite.    A  bitch. 
Goolo.    A  cauldron ;  a  kettle. 
Goo'mfi.    A  mouse}  a  rat. 
Goomila.    The  sweet  potatoe. 


HAW 

Gootnfte.    A  trough ;  a  dish. 

Go6mi.    To  investigate ;  to  search ;  to  explore. 

Goo/too.    A  louse. 

GootWa.    Lousy. 

H. 

Ha.    To  display ;  to  shew ;  to  appear. 
Habe.    A  cripple. 

Ye  hibe.    Club-footed. 
Hige.    Up. 
Haha'nga.    A  reef. 

Hab6w.    The  dew ;  a  fog ;  a  mist ;  a  haze. 
Hahsjg*.    That  end  of  any  island  which  is  most  towards  the 

north ;  or  if  it  should  happen  to  lie  east  and  west,  that 

end  which  is  most  towards  the  east :  (from  hagc,  up.) 
H4L    To  tear;  to  cut. 
H*i  Mi.    To  (Macerate. 
Haichia.    To  enchain ;  to  tear  to  pieces. 
Hila.    Entrance ;  door-way ;   road  into  a  plantation   or 

wood ;  an  error ;  to  err. 
HilafeioV.    A  house  where  canoes  are  kept. 
Hilla.    To  miss;  to  fail ;  to  blunder ;  ta'i  kaWa,  inevitable ; 

wrong ;  amiss ;  a  mistake  ;  a  road  or  path ;  a  channel 

into  a  port. 

Hilla  totio.    A  drawbridge;  (id ho,  to  drag;  to 
draw.) 

Hlimna,    The  smallest  canoe  of  a  double  canoe. 

*         • 

Hanwna  tefoofe.    A  single  sailing  canoe. 
HJuno.    Envy;  a  wish. 

Fu'cca  hamo.    To  envy ;  to  wish. 
Hamoc'chi.    To  snatch. 
Hamoochia.    To  grudge;  to  envy. 
HtiilL    A  blast;  a  gale. 
Havfli-vili.    A  breeze. 
Htwla.    To  escape ;  to  flee. 

d2 


HIF 

He.    The  article  the  or  a  j  there. 

— .    A  grasshopper. 

Hea.  The  name  of  a  tree,  from  the  fruit  of  which  is  ex- 
pressed a  glutinous  red  varnish,  called  also  tar,  and  is 
used  to  varnish  and  stain  the  finest  gnatoo,  which  is 
then  called  toogi  hda.  The  hea  tree  is  only  plentiful  at 
Vavaoo. 

Heafho.    Future. 

Heahofai.    To  day,  (contracted  from  he  ako  coeni.) 

H6ca.    To  sit  down  on  a  chair,  hank,  or  bench ;  to  embark. 

H6ca-6nga.    A  bench. 

Hie..    To  err ;  astray ;  wandering. 

He-h&?    What? 

Heh&e.    an  incision ;  to  cut. 

Hehengi.    Early. 

Hike  hike.    Slippery ;  slimy ;  slipperiness  ;  to  slide. 

H6la»    Fatigue ;  breathless ;  short  of  breath. 
T&i  h61a.     Indefatigable. 

Hcle.    To  cut ;  also  a  knife ;  htflt  oota,  to  cut  in  two ;  t* 
divide ;   evasion ;  to  dissemble  ;  to  decoy ;  a  trap ;  a 
snare ;  nam  kdk,  to  snare  (with  a  string.) 
H61e  t£.    A  sword. 

Helecochi.     Scissars* 

H6I00.    A  comb ;  to  comb. 

H6ma.    The  left. 

Ni'ma  hema.      The  left  hand;  nma  matoho,  the 
right  hand. 

He  mooti.     Hereafter. 

Heoa.    There;  thither. 

H6ngi-h€ngi.    Morning;  break  of  day. 

HtSni.    Here. 

Hi.    Emissio  seminis  animalium :  semen  animal ium. 

HFoo.  To  take  up  any  thing  that  has  been  coUeoted  to- 
gether:  the  name  of  a  gamer 

HiYo.    Down;  below. 


HO 

Hifoajiga.    Declivity. 

Hi'ggi.    To  raise ;  to  lift ;  to+eave. 

Hihf  fo.  That  end  of  an  island  which  is  towards  the  south ; 
if  the  island  should  lie  east  and  west,  thai  end  which  is 
towards  the  west,  (from  k$fo%  down.)    See  Hahage. 

HilL  To  leave  off  or  finish  any  work  or  operation ;  to  put 
or  place  up  or  upon. 

Hilianga.  End  or  termination,  (in  a  moral  sense,)  as  the 
termination  of  happiness  or  misery. 

Hili'nga  g£le-g£le.  The  fifth  lunar  month ;  kUinga,  a  cor- 
ruption of  hilianga ;  gele-geU,  to  dig,  because  in  this 
month  they  cease  digging  the  ground  for  planting  yams. 

Hili'nga-mla.  (The  end  of  things  ;)  the  name  of  the 
eighth  lunar  month ;  the  month  in  which  the  princi- 
pal agricultural  work  of  the  season  is  finished. 

HiAo.    The  anus. 

Hi'na.  A  gourd ;  a  bottle  ;  a  spider ;  hoary  headed ;  grey 
with  age. 

Hr'na-hina.    White. 

Hi'nga.    To  fall ;  to  tumble. 

Hingo'a.    Name;  appellation. 

Hi'va.    The  numeral  nine. 

Hi'va.    To  sing, 

Hi'va  ongofboloo.    Ninety. 

Ho.    The  possessive  pronoun  your. 

UoTbo.    To  caper ;  to  jump ;  a  jump. 

HoWhota).     To  frisk. 

Ho'ca.    To  stab ;  a  lance ;  a  thrust ;  a  passado. 

Ho*co.    To  flow. 

T4hi  ho'co.    High  water. 

Hohelo.    To  grind. 

Hobo'ni.    Large  cocoa-nut  shells  to  hold  water. 

HoiL    Eager. 

Holfchi.    The  open  part  of  a  house  from  the  eaves  to  the 
ground. 


HOT 

Holla.    To  run  away,  {as  from  danger ;)  to  desert* 

Holo.    Friction;  rubbing. 

Hofo-holo.    A  towel ;  to  scrub  ;  to  wipe. 

HoWi.    To  chafe ;  to  rub ;  to  wipe. 

Ho'nge.    Dearth  ;  famine ;  starvation. 

Hoo.  To  deprecate ;  to  pray ;  to  intreat ;  to  be  sobmistire; 
to  beg  pardon  ;  to  boil  or  stew. 

Hoo' :  vy  hoo.  Broth  made  from  fish,  (having  no  other  broth.) 

Hoo'a.    A  joke  ;  jocose  ;  merry. 
M&tta  hoo'a.    Handsome. 

Hoo'goo.    To  dive ;  to  flounce  in  the  water ;  to  immerge. 

Hoo  hi'fo.    To  crouch. 

HooTioo.  The  female  breast :  the  dug  or  teat  of  any  ani- 
mal ;  also  milk ;  a  fork  or  skewer ;  also  to  stick  or 
pierce  with  a  fork  or  skewer, 

Hoo'i.  A  bone;  also  a  needle  or  pin,  (being  originally 
made  of  bone.) 

Hoo^i .    A  sprout  from  the  root  of  a  plant ;  a  sapling. 

Hoo/noo.     To  singe. 

Hoo'noo  hoo'noo.      To  singe. 

Hoonoo'gi.  To  stick  a  skewer. or  peg  in  any  thing;  the 
name  of  the  stick  put  in  the  ground  for  the  tendrils  of 
the  yams  to  rest  on. 

Hoo  o.  To  till  the  land ;  also  a  wooden  instrument  used 
for  digging,  &c;  also  taste  or  flavour,  kocfio  liilt, 
luscious. 

Hoo'o  gcle.    An  instrument  to  dig  holes  for  plant- 
ing yams. 
—  boo/e.     An  instrument  to  weed  with. 

Hoo'o  ky'.    Greedy  ;  gluttonous  ;  eager  after  food. 

Ho'pa.    The  banana. 

Hotoo'a.  An  immaterial  being,  as  a  god,  spirit,  soul,  appari- 
tion or  phantom  ;  also  any  evil  coming,  as  it  were,  by 
the  infliction  of  the  gods ;  a  bodily  complaint ;  ft  boil. 
This  word  is  also  sometimes  applied  to  foreigner!. 


ILO 

Hptoofe  pp V.    A  demon. 

How.    A  king :  the  supreme  chief,  not  as  to  rank  but  as  to 

power. 
How.    To  come  ;  to  appproach. 
How-ohi'a.    Misty;  foggy;  cloudy. 
How  nofa.    To  come  or  happen  accidentally,  or  without  any 

indention,  as  it  were  by  chance  ;  incidental* 

L 
I.    A  fan. 

fa.    The  pronoun  he,  (used  either  before  or  after  the  verb.) 

Ia-oo-&    Interjection  Ah !  Repressive  either  of  pity  or  pain. 

Ia-whc.    An  interjection  of  disdain,  contempt,  disgust. 

Ifcoo.    A  cup;  mug;  saucer;  a  cocoa-nut  shell  to  drink 

out  of. 
Ilea.    A  fish ;  fish. 
Iffc.    Where;  whither. 
M.    To  blow. 
rfi  6fi.    Evening ;  from  ifi  to  blow,  affi  the  fire,  because  at 

the  coming  on  of  the  night  they  blow  up  the  embers 

into  a  flame  to  light  the  torches  or  lamps. 
I'gi,     Diminutive  ;  exiguous ;  little  ;  tiny  ;  the  mallet  with 

which  they  beat  out  the  bark  of  the  ktafbo  to  form  to/pa. 
I'goo.     The  tail. 
Phoo.    The  nose;  also  used  as  our  word  nozfe,  applied 

fantastically  to  the  prominence  of  any  thing. 
Ihoov&ca.   Having'a  large  nose. 
Ik/.    The  negative  no ;  never ;  none. 

Iky'-obiKo.     Not  at  alL 
Iky'  taha.    No  one ;  nobody. 
11a.    A  mole  or  mark  in  the  skin. 
Ilaw.    To  perceive ;  to  ascertain ;  to  see. 
Sofa.    To  ascertain  ;  to  perceive ;  to  detect  or  discover. 

TaluVa.    Invisible. 
Kotaga.    A  crease,  inark,  or  impression ;  a  symptom,  omen, 

or  sign. 


Ilo'oga  caffo.    The  cicatrix  of  a  wound  made  fcy  a 

warlike  instrument. 
U6nga  e  lav6a ;  the  cicatrix  of  a  wound  from  an 

ulcer,  &c. 
—  vie  ;  a  footstep,  or  mark  of  the  foot  on  the 
ground, 
lnachi.    A  share;  also  the  name  of  a  certain  public  cere- 
mony of  a  religious  nature. 
Inoo.     To  drink. 
Po.    The  affirmative,  ye*. 
I6ho.    To  yell ;  to  scream. 
I'sa.' '  An  expression,  either  of  anger  or  vexation. 
I'ta.    Anger;  displeasure;  vexed;  angry. 

J. 

Jia.    To  net ;  to  entangle  ;  a  place  to  catch  birds* 

Jiaw'ta.     A  looking-glass. 

Jienna.    A  person. 

Jio.    A  stare ;  a, look ;  to  peep. 

Jio  angi  (     Behold !  look  there  ! 

—  my!     Behold !  look  here  ! 

—  a  too.    Look  at  yourself  (as  in  a  mirror,  or  reflect- 

ing surface). 

K. 

Keve-keve.    A  familiar  phrase,  implying  one's  disbelief  of 

any  thing  asserted. 
Kevigi.    The  crab-fish. 
Kijildjivy'.    The  horse-fly. 
Kikila.    Dazzling ;  to  flare ;  to  shine  powerfully. 
Kila-kila.     Same  as  kiki'la. 
Ky.    To  eat ;  to  take  a  meal. 

Ky  b6ngi  bongi.  The  first  meal  taken  in  the  mom* 
ing ;  breakfast :  but  they  hare  no  set  hours  for 
eating. 


LAH 

Ky  ftcca  ii  i&.  A  meal  taken  in  the  evening;  supper. 
Fia-ky .    Hanger ;  hungry :  ftd,  to  want ;  *y,  to  eat. 
Ho6o-ky.  Ravenous  after  food ;  greedy :  hod  6,  taste, 
or  flavour. 
Ky.    This  word  has  a  very  different  meaning  from  the  above, 
when  joined  to  Jbnnoo'a,  the  land,  or  country;  as  Jy 
Jbnnoo'a,  a  vassal,  or  servant;  also  the  common  peo- 
ple in  general;  the  populace.    It  also  forms  the  first 
syllable  of  some  words,  the  other  part  of  which  might 
originally  have  some  meaning  now  lost  or  corrupted  into 
a  different  sense. 
Kyha'.    To  thieve ;  to  steal. 
Kyhachia.    Stolen. 
Kyinga.    A  relation  or  kinsman. 
Kynanga.    A  meal ;  victuals. 
Ky-vale.    Greedy;  gluttonous. 

L. 

La.    A  sail  of  a  canoe,  or  other  vessel* 

Fy  la.    Hoist  the  sail ;  toogoo  la,  lower  the  sail  ;fdtoo 
la,  furl  the  sail;  kiggi  la,  tack  about ;foochi  la, 
haul  on  the  sheet. 
L6a.     The  sun ;  sunshine. 
Laboo.     To  flatter ;  to  coax ;  flattery;  sycophantic 

Lalaboo.    The  same  meaning. 
Lac.     The  brow,  or  forehead. 
Lata.    Flat. 

Lafa-lafa,  Lattfa.    Flat;  more  frequently  used  than 
Ldfa. 
"  '     .    The  ringworm,  or  tetter.  * 
Ldffo.    A  sort  of  game,  or  sport. 

L6he.    Lime,  which  they  make  from  coral,  and  use  in  dying, 
as  a  mordant;  they  abo  use  it  to  the  hair  (mixed  up 


LAV 

with  water),  to  make  it  of  a  flaxen  colour,  aod  ren- 
der k  strong  aad  stiff. 

L6be-l&he.    Limy ;  neplete  with  lime* 

Lahi.  Many ;  abundant ;  enough  :  powerful ;  great ;  big : 
divers;  several. 

fia-lahi.    To  brag ;  to  boast  (Ji'a,  to  want  or  wish; 

lathi,  great,  or  big), 
Lahiange.    Bigger;  more. 

L£ho.    The  scrotum. 

Letfboo.    Same  as  lafboo,  to  flatter;  to  coax ;  flattery* 

Lalaffii.    Flat. 

Lalanga.     To  weave  (derived  from  lafnga). 

Lalata.     See  Lata. 

Lalava.  To  tie  or  fasten  the  beams  of  canoes,  or  of  bouSff 
with  plait,  made  of  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut* and  which 
is  done  in  a  particular  manner. 

Lalo.  Down ;  below ;  beneath ;  deep ;  the  bottom  of  any  thing. 

Lamoo.  To  chew  ;  to  craunch  ;  to  grind  between  the  teeth. 

Langa.  To  plait  mats ;  to  weave  ;  to  build,  make,  or  ma- 
nufacture :  a  long  pole  used  to  loosen  or  break  the 
ground  for  the  purpose  of  planting  yams. 

L&ngi.  The  sky :  also  die  name  given  to  the  burial  place 
of  Tooitonga  during  the  time  of  the  ceremony  of  burial ; 
the  ceremony  itself  is  also  so  called.  To  sing ;  a  body 
of  singers. 

Langi  mo.    A  clear  sky. 
06I1.     Cloudy. 

Lango.     A  fly  (the  common  house-fly). 

Laoo.     To  exfoliate ;  to  shell,  or  peel  off. 

J^a'pachi'a.     To  rush  upon  and  kill. 

Lata.  Tame;  domesticated;  to  be  contented  with  one's 
situation  or  circumstances. 

Lavea,  A  wound,  as  an  abscess,  or  uloer;  or  any  wwurt 
except  from  a  warlike  instrument* 


LIO 

L6a.    Speech  ;  voice ;  language. 

L6a  fa.    Hoarseness. 
L6bo.    Leaves  of  the  bread-fruit  tree,  sewed  together  for 

the  purpose  of  covering  food  in  cooking,  to  keep  in  the 

steam. 
L6lle.    To  run. 

Lelle  tnoo6i.     Astonished;  surprised  (mfro'j,  life), 
because  under  great  surprise  or  astonishment, 
one  is  seemingly  left  without  powers  of  life  or 
action. 
Lei  16a.     Adrift ;  driven  to  leeward. 
L6moo.    The  buttocks. 
Leo.     To  guard ;  to  watch ;  a  sentinel. 

Fa-J6o.    Vigilant. 
Lepa.    A  well. 
Leva.    Adv.  accordingly. 
Li.    To  toss  (as  any  thing  light). 
Lia-lia.     Disagreeable  to  the  sight ;  abominable. 
Liagi.     To  abandon ;  to  throw  away ;  the  name  of  a  game. 
Lichi.     To  fling ;  to  throw  with  force,  as  a  stone,  or  a  ball ; 

but  is  not  applicable  to  throwing  a  spear,  which  is  veto. 
Liha.     A  nit ;  an  egg  of  a  louse. 
Liha-mooa.     The  name  of  the  first  lunar  month   (stopfe, 

first). 
moo'i.    The  name  of  the  second  lunar  month  (moo'i, 

the  second,  the  one  following). 
Lili.     Anger. 

Lilingi.    To  diffuse ;  pour  out  (same  as  tf*gi). 
Lill6.    Good ;  kind :  also  peace ;  order ;  good  state  of  things. 
Lille-y'.    To  approve. 
Limoo.    Sea-weed. 

Ltnga.    The  male  organs  of  generation  (a  vulgarism). 
Lingi.    To  pour  out;  to  diffuse  (see  lili'ngi). 
Lioo.    The  hold  in  a  vessel. 


LOO 

Lo.    An  ant ;  the  leaf  of  a  plant. 

Lo-gncx/too.    The  lips.    Lo-fow,  the  inside  bark  of  the 
/oto,  split  into  shreds  to  strain  cava,  or  cocoa-nut 
juice. 
Lo-too'too.    The  bark  of  the  heabo,  when  beaten  out, 
in  the  preparation  of  t£pa« 
L6a.    Ancient;  former;  long  ago;  tedious:  also  to  paint 
the  face  in  time  of  war. 
Grooa  16a.    Heretofore,  % 

——16a.    Long;  extended;  tall;  tallness;  sea-sickness. 
L6fa.    To  soar ;  also  a  paper  kite, 
L6hi.     Falsehood;  assumed  conduct;  sham;  false;  to  lie; 

to  relate  erroneously. 
L6hi&gi.     An  aspersion ;  a  false  report ;  to  delude  by  a  false 

report. 
L6hoo.     A  crook  to  hook  down  the  branches  of  trees,  far 
the  purpose  of  gathering  their  fruit  (aa  the  bread 
fruit,  &c). 
L61o.    Oil. 

•       L6I0-I6I0.     Oily. 
Lolca.    See  Loa-loa. 
Loloa-ange.    Long  enough. 
Lolomi.    To  defer;  to  put  off;  to  press  down. 
Lol6ngo.     Quiet ;  still ;  peaceful. 
Lol6to.     Deep;  depth. 

Lolot6nga.     Already;  time;  period;  then;  at  that  time; 
during  that  time ;  whilst. 

Lolot6nga  he  moo6i.    Lifetime.        * 
L6na.     The  hiccups  (singultus). 
L6ngo-16ngo.    Quiet ;  still ;  peaceful.    See  LoU/ngo. 
Long6a.    Noise  ;  noisy ;  blusterous  in  speech. 
Lo6a.    To  disgorge ;  to  vomit :  sea-sickness* 
Lo6be.    A  dove. 
L06I00.    An  owl. 


I 
I 


LOT 

o6loo-lo6loo.    To  shake;  to  jolt. 
»68»    A  hole;  a  pit;  a  valley ;  a  hollow  place. 
L060  he  lo.    An  ant-hill. 

I060.    Hollow . 

foole.    Pneputium. 

oooioo.  The  hair  of  the  head.  This  word  is,  perhaps, 
derived  from  tow,  and  ooloo :  tow,  of  itself,  means  the 
hair  of  the  head ;  but  ot/ho  (the  head),  is  sometimes 
added,  and  both  words  condensed  into  low/loo.  This 
word,  however,  is  only  used  to  express  long  hair.  Vide 
Low. 
otyft.    A  sea  terra,  usually  joined  with  fahma,  a  mast ;  as 

bpa  hcfafnua,  to  set  up  the  mast  by  the  backstays. 
/to.    Mind;  temper;  idea;  opinion;  disposition. 
Lo'to  boto.    Wise ;  having  knowledge, 
hee.    Frantic;  insane;  delirious. 
l£hi.      Ambitious;    haughty;    high  minded; 
spirited. 

1316.    Good  disposition  ;  good  nature, 
mahllo.    Jealous;  jealousy;  suspicion. 
t4ha ;  or  loto  fucca  t&ha.    To  be  of  one  mind ; 
unanimous. 

oo'a.    Double  minded ;  deceitful, 
tow.    Brave;  courageous;  heroic, 
vile.    Ignorant. 
Co  icoo  lo'to.     It  is  my  mind ;  that  is  my  opinion. 
rte.    This  word  also  means  the  middle,  the  centre,  or 
that  which  is  inclosed. 

Lo'to  fonnoo'a.    Midland. 

Fonnoo'a  lo'to.    A  sepulchre  (as  being  inclosed  in 

the  ground). 
Lofo  6pi.    Plantation  round  a  house  (inclosed  in). 
Gi  lo'to.    Amidst;  among;  halfway. 


LOW 

Loto. .  This  word  is  also  used  with  ate  (co  he)  before  it,  as 
a  sort  of  interjection :  thus  co'e  Idiot  what's  to  be  done! 
coc-loto-aha'i!  who  can  help  it! 
Lotoa'.    An  inclosed  place ;  a  fenced  place* 

Lotoa'  booa'ca ;  a  hogsty. 
Lo'toa'nge.    Inwardly. 

Lotoo.    Adoration;  invocation;  to  invoke;  to  pray* 
Lavosaf.    A  pitfall  with  pointed  stakes  driven  into  the  bot- 
tom, the  hole  being  covered  over  with  slight  twigs, 
leaves,  grass,  Sec. 
Low.    To  discourse :  to  talk ;  to  relate ;  to  inform ;  to  nar- 
rate :  hearsay ;  report. 
Low-bitst.    Nonsensical  discourse;  tittle  tattle:  km 
alone  is  not  used,  it  were    therefore  better, 
perhaps,  to  join  the  two  into  one  word,  thus, 
lowbifiu 
Low  n&a*    To  talk  at  random,  or  carelessly,  without 
any  particular  intent,  either  through  ignorance, 
or  want  of  attention.    Vide  Noa* 
Gnodtoo  tow.    Loquacity ;  talkativeness :  gmMoo,  the 

mouth. 
Low  gifta  (an  idiomatic  phrase).     I  should  hive 

thought;  methinks. 
Measure  of  the  Burface  of  any  thing ;  quantity  of 
area,  or  expansion. 

Low  14hi.    Broad ;  expansive. 
■        chi.    Narrow. 
The  hair  of  the  head. 

Loocloo.  A  long  head  of  hair :  it  is  some  doubt 
whether  this  word  is  derived  from  low  etribo,  or 
lo'a  ocfloo  (loa,  long,  odloo*  head) ;  but  low  odko 
does  not  afford  the  idea  of  length,  nor  does  kk 
odtoo  afford  the  idea  of  hair. 


MAC 

Loir.    To  count ;  to  calculate. 

.  To  nip,  or  pinch. 
.    A  leaf  (of  a  tree) ;  lowfeta'gi,  a  single  sheet,  or  piece 

of  tafpa. 
Lowbisi.    Nonsensical  discourse;  tittle  tattle.    Vide  Low* 

to  discourse. 
Lowcow*    Proud;  haughty;  arrogant. 
Low-nima.    The  hand/   Nfma  k  a  word  significant  of  the 

hand  and  arm  together;  lam  means  surface,  and  the 

hand  is  that  part  of  the  nUma  which  has  proportionally 

most  surface. 
Ljigi*    A  crash ;  to  presif  or  break  to  pieces. 

M. 

Ma.    Ashamed;  bashful. 

— .    Clear;  white;  pure;  immaculate;  sheer. 
— .    To  chew ;  a  mouthful ;  a  morsel. 
— .     A  sort  of  food  consisting  of  bread  fruit,  plantains,  er 
bananas,  buried  for  a  considerable  length  of  time  under 
ground,  so  as  to  ferment. 
— .    The  conjunction,  and,  probably  corrupted  from  mo, 
but  used  only  in  connecting  numbers :  also  the  prepo- 
Monjbr. 
Maanga.    A  mouthful ;  a  morsel. 
Maboo.    To  whistle. 

Mabo6aL    To  shut,  or  close  up ;  to  block  up. 
Macca.    A  stone ;  a  rock. 

Macca-raacca.     Stony ;  craggy  t   maccm-macc*->Hi> 

the  same. 
Faligi  macca.    Paved  with  stones. 
Macca  hoonoo.    A  particular  sort  of  black  pebMe, 
made  hot  for  the  purpose 
Macoata.    A  sling  to  throw  stones  with. 


MAH 

Macawna.    Full  fed ;  a  bellyful ;  satisfied.  r 

Machfla.    Sharp ;  having  an  edge,  as  a  knife. 

Machinftvoo.    A  particular  kind  of  club. 

Macohi.    To  scratch. 

Malnne.     To  tickle  j  to  irritate  by  tickling. 

Ma£nne-6nne.     To  tickle ;  to  irritate  by  tickling. 
— — —  gnofa/a.    Ticklish ;  easy  to  tickle. 
MatiL    Crack;  rent;  fissure;  flaw;  split. 
Mafachi  (probably  a  corruption  ofmqfScki,  which  see)* 
Mafthi.    A  cleft ;  a  crack,  or  fissure,  in  any  thing  (sane  u 

ma/6). 
Mafanna.    Heat ;  warmth ;  either  of  the  sun,  fire,  or  any 

thing  else. 
Mafatooa.    To  sneeze. 

Maf6chi.     Broken ;  disjointed  ;  separated  from  by  fracture. 
Mafohi.    Stripped  off  as  the  bark  from  a  tree;  marked  witk 

scratches. 
MaToo.     The  heart  of  any  animal. 
Maha.     Empty;  vacant. 

Maha  hifo.    To  ebb. 
T6he  mamiha.     Ebb  tide. 
■  ■   ■  m&ha.    A  shelf,  or  shallow. 
Maha'gi.     Sickness;  disease. 

Maha'gi  bihia ;  contagion. 
Maha'i.     To  tear.     See  Mahai-hai. 

ha'i.    To  tarter ;  to  tear ;  to  make  ragged. 

Maha'lo.    Distrustful;  suspicious:  doubt;  suspicion. 

Maha1o-ha1o.     To  suspect. 
Ma  he.    Acid  ;  sour ;  tart. 

Matie-ma/he.     Sourish;  very  sour. 
Malie-malie.     A  dolphin. 

Mahlle.    A  cut ;  a  gash  made  with  any  sharp  instrument. 
MaTii.    A  peculiar  kind  of  bandage,  resembling  what  b 
called,  in  surgery,  the  T  bandage)  passing  round  (he 


MAL       , 

waist,  aud  between  the  legs :  it  is  worn  by  the  natives 
of  these  islands  chiefly  in  time  of  war,  being  then,  in 
other  respects,  naked:  it  forms,  however,  the  only 
dress  of  the  Fiji  islands. 

Mahlna.  The  moon;  moonlight;  moonshine:  a  lunar 
month. 

Mahoa'.  A  plant ;  the  glutinous  root  of  which  is  used  for 
the  same  purpose  as  the  to,  which  see. .  Of  this  root  is 
also  prepared  a  sort  of  flour,  used  as  an  article  of  diet. 

Mahoonoo.  A  blight:  parched;  blighted  by  intense  heat 
(same  as  moho6noo). 

Makila.    To  twinkle  like  the  stars ;  starlike. 

Ma'la.    Ill  luck  of  any  kind. 

Mala'i.  A  piece  of  ground,  generally  before  a  large  house, 
or  chief's  grave,  where  public  ceremonies  are  princi- 
pally held.  r 

Mala'ia.  Unlucky;  unfortunate;  an  evil;  a  public  ca- 
lamity. 

Malala.     Charcoal;  embers;  cinders. 

Mala'nga.     A  public  speech. 

M aleca.     Bodily  pleasure ;  sensual  gratification. 

Malie.  Well !  well  done !  bravo !  (expression  of  appro- 
bation on  public  occasions). 

— -.     Exactly;  nicely. 

Va'he  06a  malie.    To  divide  exactly  in  two. 
H61e  06a  malie.    To  cut  exactly  in  two. 

Malo'.     Rest;  ease;  welcome. 

■i  ■  .  A  term  of  encouragement  to  bear  pain  or  hard 
labour;  well  borne  !  bravely  suffered ! 

"Malc4ii.     Strong;  able. 

Chtao-malo'hi ;  able-bodied. 

■■  ange.    Potently ;  strongly  ;  with  bodily  strength. 

Malolo*.     Rested;  refreshed:  rest';  refreshment. 
vol.  ii.  e 


MAN 

Maloo.  The  slnde ;  shadow  of  any  large  object,  at  a  house, 
hill,  or  tre^s ;  sunless ;  cool ;  refreshing. 

—  maloo.    Shady.     See  Mafiloo. 

Ma/ma.     The  world  ;  human  beings ;  society  at  large. 
M6a  ma'raa ;  any  tbing  belonging  to  this  world. 

■  Light  from  the  sun,  or  fire ;  a  torch  ;  torch-light. 

M6m£.    The  lungs,  or  lights  of  any  animal. 

— — .    Light,  in  contradistinction  to  heavy. 

Mama'e.    The  plantain;  either  the  tree  or  the  fruit. 

Mamafa.    Heavy;  weighty;  ponderous. 

Mama'ha.    Shallow ;  not  deep. 

Talii  mamaha.    Ebb  tide. 

Mama'hi.     Ache,  or  pain ;  to  give  pain ;  painful ;  severe. 

— — —  afage.     Painfully ;  severely. 

Mama/na.    To  be  in  love  with ;  to  be  enamoured  of. 

Mama'oo.    Distant;  afar;  aloof. 

— —  ange.     Farther. 

Mama'ta.    To  look  ;  to  look  at ;  to  behold ;  to  discern. 
—  a'ngi.    Look  there  !  behold ! 

— — -  my.    Look  here  ! 

Ma'mma.    To  leak ;  leaky,  as  a  ship,  or  canoe* 

.    To  chew :  a  mouthful ;  a  morsel. 

.     A  ring  of  any  kind. 

Ma/na.    Thunder  ;  also  an  omen ;  a  sign. 

Mana'co.  To  love ;  to  like ;  to  admire ;  to  esteem :  also  to 
envy:  beloved;  esteemed. 

Mana'co  faflne.    To  love  women  ;  amorous. 

Mana'too.  To  bethink;  to  recollect;  to  consider  witiut 
one's  mind  ;  to  ponder  ;  to  muse  :  thoughtful. 

— — —  na'too.     See  Mana'too. 

Mana'va*  Breath.  As  the  breathing  is  more  or  less  affected 
by  certain  passions  of  the  mind,  some  of  these  take  their 
names  from  this  circumstance;  as,  for  instance,  feor 
and  courage :  the  former  is  called  Mancfva-1*  (hit,  to 


,  Man 

Wander),  or  matutva-tht  (chi,  little),  became*  in  fear,  the 
breath  grows  tremulous  and  undecided,  or  small  in 
quantity :  and  the  latter  is  called  manafva  la*ki  (lafki, 
large,  or  touch),  because,  when  the  mind  is  excited, 
and  feels  itself,  as  it  were,  enlarged  by  courage*  the 
chest  is  raised,  and  the  breath  becomes  full,  bold,  and 
decided.  In  common  conversation,  the  adjunct  words, 
he,  chi,  and  It/hi,  are  so  melted  into  one  word  with  ma- 
na'va,  that  the  quantity  of  this  word  becomes  altered, 
and  the  compounds  are  pronounced  md novate,  matna- 
vaclu',  matnavala'ki. 
Ma'navachi.  Fear;  consternation.  Vide  Mancfva. 
Manavah6.    Fear ;  want  of  courage,  &c.    Vide  Mamlva. 

Manavahe*  gnofooa.    Startlish ;  easy  to  startle. 
Manavalalii.    Bold;  courageous.    Vide  Manatoa. 
Manga.    The  barb  of  an  arrow,  or  spear ;  any  thing  open, 
diverging,  or  fork-shaped. 

Fucca  manga  vs/e.    To  straddle;  to  sit  astride. 

manga  gno6too.    To  open  the  mouth. 

Manga-manga.    Forked. 

Manifi.    Thin,  slender  (as  applied  to  boards,  cloth,  &c.  im- 
plying the  proximity  of  the  opposed  surfaces). 
Manifi-nifi.    Same  as  above. 
Manifi-ange.    Thinly. 
M&no.    Ten  thousand. 
M6noo.    Any  pain,  or  ache,  in  or  about  the  nice. 

Nifo-mdnoo.    The  tooth-ache. 
■  A  bird  (of  any  kind). 

F6i  raanoo.    An  egg. 
Manoo  tangata.     A  cock  bird. 
■  faflne.    A  hen  bird. 
Ma'noo-ma'noo.    To  covet :  to  envy  very  much :  parsimo- 
nious; stingy. 
Manooki.    To  deride ;  to  jeer  at  or  mock ;  to  scoft 

e2 


MAT 

Ma'oo.    Explanatory ;  clear ;  distinct :  to  de6ne ;  to  make 

clear. 
Marly'.  An  open  grass  plat,  set  apart  for  public  ceremonies : 

there  are  several  on  each  large  island.    See  Mafau 
Msjima.    Salt  (muriate  of  soda). 
Mita'.    A  peculiar  kind  of  club,  consisting  of  an  entire 

young  tree. 
M6ta'  gooli-gooli.    A  peculiar  kind  of  club,  artificially  cut 

in  imitation  of  the  rootaf. 
Matabooie.    A  rank  next  below  chiefs  or  nobles. 
Matafa.    A  cut ;  a  gash ;  a  notch. 
Mata'ngi.    The  wind;  windy. 

Ma/tta  he  mata'ngi.    To  windward. 
Matapa'.    A  door;  an  entrance  into  a  house  or  fortress. 
Mate.    Death ;   carnage ;    slaughter ;  a  corpse :   also  so 
eclipse. 

To  die ;  to  wither ;  to  go  out  as  a  flame. 
Ca'no-ma'te.    Lean  of  flesh. 
Ma*te  he  lali.    An  eclipse  of  the  sun. 
Ma'te  he  mahina.    An  eclipse  of  the  moon. 
To  guess ;  to  conjecture. 
Matochi.    Serrated;  notched;  marked  with   the  teeth  ot 

rats  or  mice. 
Mat6chi-t6chi.     See  Mat</chi. 
Matooa.    An  old  man. 

Matooa-tanga'ta.    A  thrifty,  or  miserly  man. 
Mat61oo.     Thick  in  respect  of  bulk,  or  extension  (not  ss  to 

fluidity). 
Mat6w.    A  fish-hook.     See  Pa. 
Tow  mat6w.    To  fish. 
.     Right,  in  contradistinction  to  left. 
■.     The  largest  canoe,  of  a  double  canoe. 
Ma'tta.    The  eyes,  countenance,  complexion,  look,  *PPetr* 
ance. 


MAT 

Ms/tta-bo'to.    Subtle;  wise;  cunning. 
Ma'tta-gehe.    To  defeature  -,  to  spoil  tbe  appear- 
ance of  any  thing. 
Ma'tta-ta'ngi.    Peevish;  fretful. 
Ma  tta-tea.    Pale  in  the  face ;  natural  paleness  of 

the  face. 
Ma'tta-va've.    Quick-sighted. 
F ticca  boola  ma'tta.    To  hector;  to  bluster  (to 

make  the  face  swell,  or  look  big). 
Ma'tta-kikila.    Full-eyed. 
Ma'tta-tepa.    Goggle-eyed. 
Low  ma'tta.    The  eye-lid. 
Malta  teve.    Fearful ;  cowardly. 
Matta-looloo.    Owl-eyed, 
atta.    The  eye  or  countenance  (in  a  metaphorical  sense). 
Ma'tta  he  ho6hoo.     Hie  nipple  of  a  woman's 

breast. 
Ma'tta  he  la  a.    The  east. 
Ma'tta  mata'ngi.    To  windward. 
Ma'tta  he  o61e.    The  orifice  of  the  urethra. 
Ma'tta  tow.    Having  a  good  eye  for  taking  aim. 
Ma'tta  valea.    To  act  incautiously. 
Ma'tta  he  t6fe.     Pearls  (eyes  of  oysters). 
Ma'tta  he  tow.    The  front  of  battle. 
Matta-a'oochi.    The  anus;  also  vexatious,  trou- 
blesome. 
rtta.    Edge  of  any  thing ;  brink ;  boundary. 
Ma'tta  fonnoo'a.    Coast,  or  shore. 
Ma'tta-he-la'ngi.    The  horizon. 
Ma'tta-he-talii.    The  sea-shore. 
Malta  falle.    The  edge,  or  threshold  of  a  house, 
ttta-ma'tta.    Having  the  appearance  of;  resemblance. 

Ma'tta-ma/tta  cobenga.    A  cobweb. 
Matta-maftta  too*.    Shabby. 


MEL 


Maftta-ma'tta  toofc-ange.    Shabbily. 
Ma'tta-ma'tta  ita.    Angry ;  baying  a  stern 

look. 
Ma'tta-raa'tta  to*w.    Military ;  warlike. 
Matta-ma'tta-6gi.     Princely;    having  the 
appearance  of  a  chief. 
Mava'va.    Acclamation ;  applause:  to  acclaim,  or  applaud. 
Ma'wle.    To  vanish ;  to  disappear,  as  a  ghost,  or  something 

that  has  suddenly  flown,  or  gone  away. 
Ma'wquaw.    Presently!  bare  patience  !  directly! 
Me.    From ;  (a»>from  any  place). 
— .    The  bread-fruit  tree :  the  bread-fruit. 
M6a.     Affairs;  matters;  things;  effects;  property:  some; 
a  part  of. 

Mea  inoo.    Beverage  ;  any  kind  of  drink. 

Mea  vala.    Apparel ;  clothes  of  any  sort. 

M6a  ky.    Food. 

M6a  fooa'gi.    A  present ;  a  gift. 

M6a  mama.     Beings,  things,  or  affairs  belonging  to 

this  world. 
Mea  hotooa.    Beings,  things,  or  affairs  belonging  ts 
the  next  world. 
Me-alootaga.    From  above. 
Mee.     A  dance  :  to  dance. 
M6-f6.     Whence ;  from  what  place. 
Me-ha'ge.    From  above. 
M6hegitataga*    An  aunt. 
Me-hena.    Thence ;  from  that  place. 
Me-h6ni.    Hence ;  from  this  place. 
Me-hifo.     From  below. 
Me-lalo.     From  below. 

Mele-tnile.  To  mingle  among ;  strewed  among. 
M6Ie*mete-g6too.  To  hop ;  to  go  upon  one  leg. 
Melie.    Sweet :  any  thing  sweet. 


MOH 

Mfllo.     Brown;  yellow. 

Mlllo-mtllo.    Tawny. 
Mia/w-i.      Wreathed;  twisted;  serpentine:  to  contort;  to 

twist.. 
Mfchi.     A  dream :  to  dream. 

.    To  suck ;  to  inhale. 
Mill.     To  rub ;  to  stroke ;  to  smooth  down. 
Mflo.    A  top ;  a  tetotutn ;  the  name  of  a  tree :  to  spin 

round. 
Mimi.    To  make  water;  to  micturate:  urine. 
Mo.     And;  also;  likewise;  with;  besides. 
— .    Thepron.ye;  your. 
Mo'a.    The  domestic  fowl. 

Mob  tanga'ta.     A  cock. 
Mo'a  fafine.     A  hen. 
Oohigi  mo'a.     A  chicken. 
Motanofe.    Dryness;  dry. 
Mo*achfbo.    The  cotton  tree. 
Mo'chi-mo'chi.     To  crumble. 
Mo'co.    A  species  of  lizard. 
Mocoboo'na.    A  nephew,  or  niece. 
M6cochia.    Cold,  chilly. 
Mtfcohoofa.    An  earwig. 
Motoomo'co.    Cold ;  chilly  ;  cool. 
Mod.    Compounded  of  mo  and  he ;  and  the ;  with  the. 
■     s    To  press  down  with  the  hand  or  feet;  to  tread  down. 
Mo'e-mo'e.    A  ceremony  so  called;  and  used  to  take  off 
the  taboo  from  persons  who  have  accidentally  incurred 
it :  the  ceremony  consists  in  touching  a  chiefs  feet,  fcc. 
Morfboige.    An  earthquake. 
Motie.    Sleep ;  to  sleep. 

Fife  mo'he.    Drowsiness. 
Ta'i  mo/he.    Watchfulness. 
TooH  mo'he.    Nodding  with  sleep :  to  dose. 
1  To  brood,  as  birds ;  to  hatch. 


MOO 

Mohe.    To  freeze  with  cold,  as  oil. 
Mohenga.    A  bed ;  a  mat,  or  sleeping-place. 
Mohoo'goo.    Long  weedy  grass ;  weeds. 
Mohoofooo.    Parched ;  blighted  by  intense  heat,. 
M611e.    Glossy;  smooth;  sleek. 

MolleMnolle.    Glossy;  smooth;  sleek. 
Mo'lle-mo'Uea'nge.    Smoothly. 
Moloo.    Soft ;  flexible,  as  dough  or  lead. 
Momo'co.    Cold;  bleak:  a  consumption,  or  wasting  awty 

of  the  body. 
Momo'e*    Petty;  small;  insignificant. 

Momo'e  mea.    A  scrap  of  any  thing ;  a  crumb. 
Momolie.    Coition ;  cohabitation ;  sexual  intercourse  (lite- 
rally, to  sleep  with). 
MomoQio.    Ripe ;  full  grown  (as  fruit,  or  vegetables) :  to 

become  ripe  (as  a  boil,  or  pustule). 
Mo/nga.    The  protuberant  cartilage  of  the  throat. 
Mongamofaga.    A  cockchafer ;  a  beetle  of  any  kind. 
Monooi'a.     Fortunate ;  lucky  ;  successful. 
Moo  a.    First ;  preceding :  the  capital  town  of  an  island :  a 
rank  in  society,  the  next  below  matabooles. 
Fano'w  mooto.    A  miscarriage  of  a  child. 
Mooa-tow.     The  front  of  battle ;  the  van  of  an  army. 
Moo'a-mocya.    Precedent;  preceding. 
Moo'a-mooa-a'nge.    To  precede. 
Mooa-ange.    Forwards;  before,  or  in  presence  of;  ante- 
cedently. 
Mooa'na.    The  ocean ;  deep  water. 
Lo'to  mooa'na.    Mid-sea. 
Moo'ca.    The  young  unopened  leaves  of  the  baneae,  or 

plantain  tree. 
Moochi'e.     Any  grass  plat. 

Moo'i.  Afler ;  following;  the  end,  tip,  or  extremity  of  any 
thing ;  conclusion  ;  the  hindermost ;  ego ;  in  time  past ; 
unripe ;  young. 


MOW 

Taw  mo6i.    Behind-hand* 
Mo6i  fonno6a.  -  A  point  of  land ;  ar  cape. 
He  mooi.    Hereafter ;  the  younger. 
Moo&nge.  Same  as  moot ;  backwards  in  time  or  place* 
Mo6i  matdngi.    To  leeward. 
t61o*t61o.     A  promontory, 
-tow.    Libidinous;  amorous. 
•vie.    The  heel. 
Mooitow.    Amorous;  libidinous:  (applied  only  to  women) 

fond  of  a  variety  of  men. 
Mooli.    Foreign ;  behind ;  abaft :  a  foreigner  j  a  stranger. 

Tow  ma61i.    The  stern  of  a  vessel. 
Mooni.     Truth  ;  actual ;  true ;  trusty ;  faithful ;  sincere. 
Tangi  m66ni.    A  solemn  asseveration ;  to  take  an 
oath :  nax  tangi  moo'ni  gi  he  egico  Toobo  Totoi, 
he  swore  by  the  god  Toobo  Totai. 
—  ange.    Truly. 

Moooi.    Life;  covalescence ;  fertile,  (as  a  field):  to  live; 
subsist. 

Fooa  moooifi'a.     Sudden  death. 
Moooi  foo  16a.    Longevity. 
Tai  moooi.     Sterile ;  barren. 
Mooonga.     An  eminence  ;  a  hill ;  a  mountain. 
Mooo'ngaia.    Mountainous ;  hilly. 
Mooonoo.     Prosperity  ;  good  luck. 
Mooonooia.    Prosperous  ;  fortunate  ;  lucky. 
Moo'too.    To  break ;  to  separate ;  to  part. 
Mo'tohico.     A  blow  with  the  fist. 
Moioo.    Dependant  islands. 

Motoo'a.    Age  ;*  old ;  state  :   also  applied  to  bread-fruit, 
yams,  &c. ;  signifying  full  grown ;  ripe. 
Motooa  nima.    The  thumb. 

vae.     The  great  toe. 

Mo*6te.    Slack ;  loose ;  undone,  (as  the  dress  of  a  person). 
Mow.    To  obtain ;  to  attain  ;  to  catch ;  obtained  or  gotten 


NAA 

hold  of;  to  overtake;  fast,  or  secure;  steady;  fixt; 
faithful. 

Mow-gnata.    Valuable;  scarce. 
Mow.    We ;  our :  (only  used  when  the  person  spoken  to  m 
not  included).    See  tow. 

Mo'w-ooa.    The  dual  number  of  the  pronoun  I. 
Mow-toloo.    The  plnral  number  of  the  pronoun  /. 
".     Much ;  very  :  in  this  sense  it  is  only  used  before 
nouns  expressive  of  height  or  depth,  as  mow  he  lab, 
deep ;  maw  hc-loonga,  high. 
Mow-aloo'nga.    Height ;  above ;  high  ;  lofty. 
Mow-gnata.    Valuable;  scarce. 
Mow-he-hUo.    Depth ;  below ;  low. 
Mo'wmoV.    To  break ;  to  spoil ;  to  render  useless ;  to  waste; 
to  consume. 

Mo'w-moV  m6a  fu'eca  6gi.     To  profane  or 
abuse  holy  things.  . 
My.    To  give  to  me;  give  it  me!  (only  used  when  the 
person  to  whom  the  thing  is  given  is  the  first  person 
singular  or  plural).     See  to  girt. 
— .     To ;  towards :  (only  used  when  the  first  person  singu- 
lar or  plural  js  implied).     See  towards. 
My'a.     A  cord  or  rope. 

Cow-my'a.     Tackle  or  cordage  of  a  canoe  or  vessel. 
My'ili.     A  species  of  the  myrtle. 

N. 

Na.    Lest ;  in  case  that. 

Na.     The  sign  of  the  past  tense :  it  makes  ne  in  the  first 

person  singular.    See  the  grammar. 
Naa.    This  word  is  generally  used  with  f  ticca  before  it,  as 

fitcca  iwr'a",  to  appease,  as  one  would  a  child  when 

fractious. 

Hush !  a  term  only  used  to  children  when  they  are 

crying. 


NIM 

>ttfiu     A  drum. 

Nai.    A  contraction  for  na9  the  sign  of  the  past  tense,  and 
iaf  he,  as  naifoo  he  cafva,  he  called  for  cava ;  instead  of 
saying,  nafoo  he  cava  ia. 
Namoo.    Odour,  (either  good  or  bad.) 

K&moo  cacala.    Sweet  scent,  (as  of  flowers)  odor- 
ous. 
N&moo.    The  mosquito. 
Namooa'.     A  bad  smell :  to  smell  badly. 
Nanimoo.    To  smell :  the  act  of  smelling ;  aromatic ;  scent- 
ed ;  having  a  sweet  smell. 
Nanivi.    Meddlesome  ;  busy  about  other  people's  affairs. 
N&too.    To  commix  ;  to  knead,  as  clay  or  dough. 
Naw.    To  tie;  a  band  or  binding;  belt;  girdle:  to  gird 
round  the  waist. 

N£w-naw.    See  naw. 

N£w  fu'eca  taha.    To  join,  by  binding  or  tying. 
Naw-gia.    To  strangle. 
Naw-bHe.    To  noose. 
Ne.    The  first  person  singular  of  the  sign  of  the  past  tense. 

See  fw. 
— •     A  particle  frequently  joined  to  the  end  of  words  for 
the  sake  of  euphony :  women  more  frequently  use  it 
than  men. 
N6-ne\    Interjection.     No  wonder ! 
N6oo.    The  first  person  singular  (see  ne),  of  the  past  tense, 

joined  in  one  word  with  the  sign  of  the  tense. 
NSfo.    A  tooth  ;  teeth  :  a  tusk. 

Nifo-coo,    Toothless. 
Nihi.    Some;   any;  (used  with  reference  to  animate  be- 
ings). 
Nima.    The  arm ;  the  hand ;  the  fist. 

Gndegi-nima.    The  nails  of  the  hand. 
Nima  hema.    Left-handed. 


NOW 

Nima  matofw.    Right-handed. 
Cew  nima.    The  fingers. 
Motoofe  nima.    The  thumb. 
Nima.    The  number  five :  (-derived  from  the  hand  having 
five  fingers.) 

Nima  o'ngofooloo.    Fifty. 
Nioo.    The  cocoa ;  the  cocoa-nut. 
Nisi.    To  blink ;  to  leer ;  to  ogle ;  to  wink  the  eyes. 
No'a.    At  random ;  wandering ;  ill-directed ;  without  inten- 
tion. 

Loto-noa.    A  mind  without  understanding :  foolish. 
Dumb;  speechless,  from  organic  defect,  or  firon 
deafness. 

Trivial;  trifling;  of  little  use. 
Nofo.    To  abide ;  dwell ;  remain :  to  rest  or  ait  down ;  to 
pass  one's  time. 

NoTo-noTo. )  _  .  .     M     . . 

™      ./.         ?  To  associate  or  dwell  with. 
NonoTo.      > 

No'fo  no'a.    Disengaged ;  at  leisure. 

No'fo  mow.     Constant ;  fixt ;  constancy ;  fidelity. 

Cow  no'fo.     A  family. 

Notfo-my.    At  hand;  present;  (ndfo,  remaining  or 
being,  my,  towards  me,  or  near  me. ) 

Na  no'fo  eva-eva  be  ia.    He  passed  his  time  in  doing 
nothing  but  walk  about. 
— — .    Government;  state  of  public  affairs ;  order  of  things. 
Nofo&.    A  chair  or  bench  to  sit  on. 
Nofo&nga.    A  dwelling  place ;  a  habitation  ;  a  sitting  place. 
NoTo-moo'li.    Being  abroad,  or  in  a  foreign  country. 
NoW.    Short ;  of  little  length. 
Nonotfo.     (See  nofo.) 
Now.    They;  their. 

Now'ooa.    The  dual  number  of  the  pronoun  they,  used  after 
the  verb  them. 


ONE 

NowtoHoo.    The  plaral  number  of  the  pronoun  they,  used 

after  the  verb :  them. 
Ny.    Perhaps ;  may  be ;  I  wonder  if. 

O. 

Obito.    The  sign  of  the  superlative  degree  :  very ;  most ; 
extremely;  excessive. 
Iky7- obito.     Not  at  all. 

O'chi.  To  conclude;  to  make  an  end  of:  perfect;  com- 
plete ;  ended. 

O'e-o'efoo'a.  Beautiful,  (applied  only  to  women.)  See  awi- 
axvi-fooa,  as  it  is  sometimes  pronounced ;  but  the  true 
pronunciation  is  perhaps  between  both. 

OTa.    Love  ;  esteem ;  affection  ;  pity ;  mercy. 
Tai-o'fa.    Merciless ;  cruel. 

O'fa'.  To  measure  out  lengths ;  to  fathom :  the  name  given 
to  the  length  of  the  extended  arms,  measuring  from  the 
finger's  ends  of  one  hand,  to  the  finger's  ends  of  the 
other ;  and  which  is  the  mode  of  admeasurement  they 
adopt,  to  ascertain  the  length  of  their  canoes,  masts,  &c. 

O'fa-be.  (An  idiomatic  phrase),  let  but!  would  to  God! 
Oh  that ! 

O'fi.     Near  ;  close  to ;  at  hand. 

0'fi-&nge.    Near  to  ;  approaching. 

O'fiange  gi  fe*  ?    Whereabout  ?  near  what  place  ? 

Ohana.    A  husband  or  wife ;  a  spouse ;  a  married  person* 

O'hoo.    A  scoop  to  bale  out  water  with ;  to  bale  out* 
O'hoo  lioo.    To  bale  out  Ufee  hold. 

Oiaooe.     Alas !  an  expression  either  of  pity  or  pain. 

Oiaop.    An  expression  of  pity,  or  of  pain,  also  of  surprise. 

O'mi.     To  bring ;  to  fetch. 

CKne.  I 

O/ne-0rne.  J 


OOF 

Ouc-patta.    Gravel  \  (pcrt/a,  coarse.) 

O'ne-o'neia.    Sandy ;  gravelly. 

Ongo.  Eclio ;  sound ;  noise ;  fame ;  reputation ;  glory ; 
news;  tidings. 

Ongofoo'loo.     The  number  ten. 

O'ngo-o'cgo.    Sonorous  ;  loud  sounding. 

O'no.     The  number  six. 

O'no-ongofoo'loo.     Sixty. 

Oo.     A  bundle. 

Oo-mea.    A  bundle  of  things. 

Oo.  The  personal  pronoun  I,  used  in  the  future  tense, 
because  te9 1,  is  also  the  sign  of  the  future  :  it  is  like- 
wise used  in  the  past  tense,  when  tut,  the  sign  of  this 
tense,  is  changed  into  ne9  and  is  usually  joined  in  one 
word  with  the  pronoun  ;  thus,  wfoo,  I  did. 

Oo'a.    The  numeral  two. 

Oo'afoo'loo.         i  ^  , 

^  .    .       >  The  numeral  twenty. 

Ooa-ongofooloo.  J 

.    The  sign  of  the  dual  number  of  personal  and  posses- 
sive pronouns. 
Oo&nga.     A  maggot  in  a  nut  or  meat. 
Oo&ngaia.    Maggotty. 

Oo'ca.     A  bow-string :  (either  of  a  war-bow  or  sporting- 
bow.) 
Oo'chi.     The  buttocks. 
Oochia.     To  bite ;  to  sting  :  bitten ;  stung. 
Oofcummea.     Metal  of  any  sort,  particularly  iron. 

Oocummea  coola.      (Copper,  i.  e.  red  metal) 
Oocummct)  hina-hina.      (Silver,  i.  e.  white 
metal. 
Oo'fi.    The  yam  :  the  common  name  for  every  species  of 

yam. 
Oo^fi^oo'fi.    To  cover  over. 

Oo'fi-lo-aco'w.    To  spread  over  with  leaves. 


OOL 

Ocha.    Rain. 

Ooha  macca.  (i.&  Stony  rain),  liail.  It  hailed  at 
Vavaoo  in  the  year  1809,  about  the  month  of 
June,  to  the  great  astonishment  and  wonder 
of  the  natives :  two  or  three  old  men  said  they 
recollected  this  phenomenon  once  before. 
Oolmia.     Rainy ;  showery. 

Oohfgi.     Small;  diminutive;  young  of  any  animal. 
Oohigi  m4noo.     A  young  bird ;  a  nestling. 

niooa.     A  chicken.  # 

— • —  boo&ca.    A-  farrow  ;  a  young  pig. 
— —  pdto.    A  gosliug.    See  pa! to. 


Oohila.     Lightning  :  to  lighten  ;  to  flash  like  lightning. 
06i.    To  call  out ;  to  call  after  ;  to  cry  or  exclaim  against : 

the  interjection^ye  / 
06le.     The  penis. 

M4tta  he  o61e.    The  urethra. 
061i.     Black  ;  dark  ;  gloomy. 

L&ngi  06I1.    Cloudy. 
O6U-06I1.    Black  ;  gloomy  ;  dark  ;  of  a  dark  colour. 
Oolli.     To  steer. 

F6he  o611i.    A  rudder  or  paddle  to  steer  with. 
Oolo.    Blaze ;  flame :  to  glow ;  to  blaze ;  to  flame. 
O6I00.    The  head. 

Tooto6  06I00.    To  behead. 

M061  06I00.    The  back  of  the  head ;  the  hair  of 

the  head. 
O0I00  fauna.     The  mast  head. 
Oolooigi.    The  first,  (in  relation  tatime). 
061oo4gi-m&te.    The  name  of  the  eleventh  lunar  month, 

(when  tb#  tendrils,  of  the  yams  begin  to  die). 
O61oo~b6co.    A  skull. 
Ooloolnga.    The  name  of  the  seventh  lunar  month. 


PA 

Oolo6nga.    A  pillow  ;  any  thing  to  rest  the  head  upon  whilst 

sleeping. 
Ooloongia.     Beaten  at  a  game. 

f 

06tna.     A  kiss :  also  their  mode  of  salutation,  by  applying 

the  nose  to  the  forehead  of  the  party  saluted,  (as  it  were 

smelling). 
06ma.     The  shoulder. 
Ooraea.     Clay. 
Oom6chi.     A  bung,  cork  ;  a  stopple  of  any  kind :  to  stop  or 

bung  up. 
06moo.     Victuals  dressed  under  ground,  or  baked. 
Fe  o6moo.     To  cook. 
Tangdta  fe  o6moo.    A  cook. 
M6a  fe  oomoo.    Cooking  utensils. 
06no.     Scale  of  a  fish ;  tortoiseshell. 
Oono-oono.     Scaly. 
O6-0.     Craw-fish. 
06-o.     To  crow,  as  a  cock. 
O'-ooa.    To  desist :  hold !  forbear !  softly  ! 
O6-06.     To  bite. 
06ta.    Land  or  shore. 

Gi-o6ta.     Ashore. 
06to.     The  brain.   The  cocoa-nut,  when  it  is  in  the  act  of 

germinating. 
Otoo.     A  line  or  row  of  any  thing,  as  of  yams  planted. 
0'tta-6tta.     Raw;  uncooked. 
Ow,    Thy  own. 

•        P. 

Pa.  A  certain  kind  offish-hook,  made  of  tortoiseshdl  and 
mother  of  pearl  shell,  on  which  no  bait  is  put ;  for  as  H 
is  trailed  along  the  surface  of  the  water,  it  has  the 


*AP 

appearance  of  a  flying  fish:  all  other  kinds  of  fish* 
hooks  are  called  matdw. 

Pachi.  To  clap  the  hands  together  flat,  so  as  to  make  a 
noise :  this  is  one  of  the  methods  used  to  keep  time  in 
dancing  or  singing. 

P6coo.  Crimp ;  crisp ;  cracknel  of  baked  pork :  also  the 
scab  of  a  sore. 

Pagia.     To  impinge ;  to  fall  or  strike  against ;  to  squash. 

Pagnati.  Backward;  disobedient;  stubborn;  unwilling; 
obstinacy. 

Pagnofooa.    Willing;  obedient. 

Palacalica.    A  kind  of  spear,  made  of  a  wood  so  called. 

Palalooloo.  Always  used  with  hoo'i  before  it :  its  meaning 
not  exactly  known. 

Hooi  palalooloo.    A  rib. 

Pale.  To  push  or  shove  along,  as  a  canoe  in  shallow  water, 
with  poles  that  reach  the  bottom.  Ptflevaca,  the  name 
of  the  poles  used  as  above. 

■  To  parry  a  spear  or  arrow. 

Pali.    The  os  pubis ;  the  share  bone. 

Paila.  A  sore ;  an  ulcer;  to  fester ;  to  suppurate ;  the  name 
of  a  disease. 

Paloo.    To  mix  with  water. 

Pango.    Crossness ;  obstinacy ;  perversity  of  disposition. 

Pani.    To  bedaub ;  to  smear. 

Paniagi.    To  besmear. 

Paniooli.    All  'black  and  dirty ;  smeared  with  dirt. 

Paoonga.  The  tree ;  the  leaves  of  which  being  worked  with 
the  fibres  of  the  cocoa-nut  huak^bre  used  for  imprint- 
ing gnat oo  i  also,  when  not  worked,  for  mattsy  sleeping 
mats. 

Papa.    The  male  organ  of  generation ;  the  penis.    ■ 

The  hollow  piece  of  board  on  which  gaofo*  is  im- 
printed. 

Low  papa.    A  beard. 

VOL.  II.  f 


8E9 

Papd.    The  stem  either  of  the  banana  or  the  plantain  lea£ 

Papal$ngi.  White  people ;  Europeans ;  also  European  ma- 
nufactures, such  as  cloth,  linen,  &c. 

Papa'nga.    A  face  deformed  by  the  disease  called  pdlia. 

Papani.  To  forage;  to  seek  out  for  provisions ;  aforagiog 
party. 

Papata.     Grained ;  rough. 

P&ssa-p&sa.  A  conversational  phrase,  familiarly  used,  isa- 
plying  one's  disbelief  of  any  thing  that  is  said. 

Pato.  A  goose :  they  have  no  geese  at  Tonga,  but  tliey 
have  seen  them  on  board  of  European  ships,  and  give 
them  this  name  because  they  think  we  call  them  so. 
They  have  an  increasing  breed  of  fine  Muscovy  docks, 
procured  from  the  Port  au  Prince,  which  brought  then 
from  the  Sandwich  islands :  these  they  also  call  jntVo. 

Patta.    Grained;  rough;  coarse. 
Cne  pitta.    Gravel. 

Pa  too.  An  escar ;  mark  of  a  wound  not  gained  in  battle, 
nor  by  a  warlike  instrument. 

Pato6.    Occursion ;  a  clapping  together  with  a  noise. 

Peca.    A  species  of  bat;  (the  vespertilio  vampyrus.) 

Pechi-pechi.     Pigs  feet,  (trotters). 

P6coo.    Blunt;  obtuse;  not  sharp. 

P6pe.    The  butterfly. 

Pepine.    Meanness,  (rather  economy), 

P6te-pete.  Rough ;  rugged :  (a  face  marked  with  thesnsfl 
pox  they  would  call  thus). 

Pow.    Mischievous;  audacious, 

Py'a.    Destitute ;  akne ;  without  friends  or 

Seook£!    Aha!  an  interjection  denoting  | 

distress. 
Seooke !   An  interjection  denoting  surprise  or 
S6se.    Friendless  and  destitute. 


TAB 

Sestle.     Eccentric ;  odd ;  strange  and  uncommon. 
Songo.    A  Fiji  word  adopted  at  Tonga,  implying  the  act  of 

closing  the  door  of  a  fortified  plaee. 
Sow&gi.    To  wreak  vengeance;  to  retaliate:  (this  is  a  Fiji 

word  adopted  by  the  Tonga  people). 
Sowia.    Revenge ;  (adopted  from  the  Fiji  language). 
Sy-sy.    A  kind  of  spear. 

T. 

Ta.     To  strike  or  beat ;  to  hew ;  to  carve  or  cut  wood  or 
stone :  this  name  is  also  given  to  their  mode  of  marking 
their  bodies.    See  ta  tattdw. 
T£-t6.    To  buffet  or  beat  about;  a  mallet ;  a  hammer. 
Ac6w-t£.    A  club  of  any  kind. 
Ta-mite.    To  kill  by  striking. 
TamatS.    Kill  him ;  kill  it. 

Ta-tattow.    (To  strike  the  tattow).    This  operation 
consists  in  puncturing  the  body  with  an  instru- 
ment resembling  a  small  tooth  comb,  which  is 
dipped  in  a  mixture  of  soot ;  so  that  the  place 
becomes  indelibly  marked.     The  instrument  is 
struck  with  a  piece  of  wood. 
Tfifi.    An  obstacle;  to  obstruct;  to  obviate;  to  curb;  to 
check ;  to  frustrate ;  to  detain ;  to  intercept ;  to  inhibit. 
To  fix  on  by  choice ;  to  select 
To  challenge,  (in  battle,  or  in  a  game);  a  challenge. 
TiagL    To  deracinate ;  to  pull  up  by  the  roots. 
Tiine.    The  ceremony  of  marriage,  or  rejoicings  on  the  oc- 
casion of  a  chiePs  marriage. 
Tianga,    A  song ;  poetry ;  verse ;  rhyme. 

.    To  cut  down  wood ;  to  hew  trees.    . 
Tabfli.    Bellows :  also  the  act  of  blowing  the  fife  with  a  fan 
or  the  breath. 

fa 


TAH 

Taboo.  Forbidden  ;  illicit :  also  sacred ;  consecrated ;  on- 
der  a  prohibition ;  any  thing  forbidden  to  be  eaten  or 
touched. 

Tabooni.    To  shut ;  a  bolt  or  bar  to  fasten  a  door. 

Tacabe.  Unmarried ;  (applied  only  to  females),  whether  a 
widow  or  not. 

Tacabe.     Necessitous;  poor. 

Tacanga.    An  attendant  of  a  chief. 

Cow  tacanga.    The  suite  of  a  chief. 

Tacapow.    Mats  of  the  cocoa-nut  leaf,  used  for  8ooring. 

Tacca.  .To  look  on ;  to  be  present  at,  or  to  assist  at  any 
amusement. 

Tacca-milo.    Flexuous;  winding. 

Tacca  tacky'.     To  engird  or  circle  round. 

Tack/.  To  wheel  or  turn  about ;  to  wind ;  to  surround ;  to 
roll  up,  as  cloth*  &c. 

Taooto.  To  lie  along ;  to  lie  down ;  one  lying :  (this  word 
is  also  used  when  speaking  of  deceased  chiefs). 

Tae.    Dung;  excrement. 

Tafa.  To  cut ;  to  intersect :  also  to  cut  the  skin  with  s 
shell  or  piece  of  bamboo,  so  as  to  create  an  effusion  of 
blood,  for  the  purpose  of  alleviating  pain  ;  to  lay  open  s 
wound  for  the  purpose  of  curing  it,  or  to  take  out  ex- 
traneous bodies. 

Tafa'nga.    A  paddling  canoe. 

Tafe.     To  stream  or  run  like  water. 

Vy  tafe.    A  brook ;  a  stream  of  water. 

Taffi-taffi.     To  sweep ;  to  use  a  broom ;  to  brush  off  dust 

Taf6ki.  To  turn  back ;  to  return  ;  to  turn  round ;  to  tori 
over. 

Taggi-taggi.  To  carry  in  the  hand,  as  a  parcel ;  to  leads 
child  by  the  hand. 

Taggi-taha-be.    Each ;  each  one. 

Tfcha.    The  numeral  one,  individually  standing  by  itself. 


TAI 

Iky  taha.    None;  not  one. 
Fan6w  fucca  tiha.    At  one  birth, 
liha-be.    Single;  singly. 
Toca-taha-be.     An  individual ;  one  person. 
Tiha-be.    Once  only  ;  tingle ;  only  one. 
Tiha-g6he.    One  betide ;  another. 
Tahi.    The  tea ;  the  wide  ocean ;  sea  water. 
Tahi-hoco.     High  tide. 
Tahlne.     A  virgin ;  a  young  girl :  alto  a  term  of  respect  to 

female  noblet,  even  if  they  be  old  and  have  a  family. 
Ttj.     Without;  not  having:  (it  often  used  to  form  com* 
pound  words,  like  the  English  deprivatives,  in,  «*,  leu.) 
Tai-ibi.    Houseless ;  without  home. 
Tii-alhu    Incongruous;  unfit;  inexpedient. 

Tii«illa-tatt6w.    A  mismatch;    (said  of  things 
not  conformable). 
Tii-ioonga.    Useless;  worthless;  unnecessary. 
TO*boobo6noo.    Not  shut;  not  fastened  up. 
Tai-b6to.    Unskilful. 

Tii-catigi.    Unbearable ;  intolerable,  as  pain. 
Tii*cot4a.    Incomplete ;  imperfect ;  not  the  whole. 
Tii-fa.    Impossible ;  unable. 
TiWafinga.    Unfed;  not  been  fed. 
Tii-fa fucca inaoo.    Inexplicable;  unintelligible:  also  not 

to  be  unravelled,  at  tangled  string. 
Tii  fa  lea.    Speechless ;  not  able  to  speak  from  any  cause 

whatever. 
Tai  fa  low.    Numberless  ;  not  to  be  counted. 
Tii  la  mite.    Inextinguishable ;  invulnerable ;  immortal. 
Tii  fa  m6be»    Restless ;  inability  to  sleep. 
Tii-f»-vete.    Indissoluble ;  inextricable :  (applied  to  a  knot 

which  cannot  be  undone). 
Tii4an6w.    Sterile  ;  barren :  (applied  to  women)  childless 
Tii-froo.    Insatiable ;  (with  regard  to  any  appetite), 


TAI 

Ta>foofo61oo.    Unwashed. 

Taj-foo6.    Stale  ;  old ;  (literally,  not  new). 

T6i-fucca-il6nga.    Indiscriminately ;  with  mark  or  distinc- 

tion. 
T&i-fu'cca-tang4ta.    Unmanly;  dishonourably;  cowardly. 
T£i-fu'cca-tatt6w.    Disparity;  inequality. 

T6i-ry-g6he.    Unalterable ;  not  liable  to  change,  (in  a  phy- 
sical sense). 

Tdi-g6na.    Uneaten ;  (not  yet  devoured). 

T&i-gigihi.    Incontestable  ;  so  true  as  not  to  be  disproved; 
of  a  nature  not  to  be  investigated  by  argument. 

Tjii-gnaooe.    Motionless ;  still ;  uncultivated,  as  land. 

Tii-halla.    Inevitable;  infallible;  unerring}  certain. 

.    Pathless;  without  a  road. 

T6i-h61a.     Indefatigable;  unfatigued,  (literally,  not  out  of 
breath). 

Tai-heloo.    Uncombed. 

T4i-ho6o.    Untitled;  undug;  unweeded. 

T&i-ilaw.    Imperceptible ;  unseen. 

T&i-ita.    Wrathless ;  without  anger. 

Tdi-lia.    Sunless ;  having  no  sunshine. 

Tdi-l&ta.    Discontent 

Tai-16to.    Insensible  $  deprived  of  sense  or  motion,  from  an 
accidental  blow ;  thoughtless  ;  improvident. 

Tii-16to-mow.    Capricious ;  unsteady  minded. 

Tai-low.    Leafless. 

Tii-ma.     Bare-faced;  shameless;  unclean;  dirty. 

TaU-machila.    Blunt;  obtuse. 

Tii-mahsUo.    Mistrustless ;  unsuspicious;  unthought  af. 

T4i-mam6hi.    Painless ;  without  bodily  suffering. 

T&i-manfitoo.    Forgetful;  inconsiderate. 

Tai-man£va.    Breathless;  short  of  breath. 

Tai-m4navachf.    Bold;  unterrified;  courageous. 

Taj*m6navah6.    Bold;  unterrified;  courageous. 


TAI 

T6i->m£oo.    Indefinite ;  not  distinctly  understood. 

Taj-in6he.    Sleepless;  restless. 

Taj-m6Ue.    Uneven ;  rough;  (applied  to  a  surface). 

Tsj-mooioao.    Unripe,  (as  fruit). 

Tsj-nionooia.     Unpropitious ;  unfavourable. 

Tai-raooni.    False ;  incredible. 

Tsj-mdo6i.     Unfertile ;  barren,  (as  land). 

.    Mortal ;  mortally ;  (with  reference  to  a  wound 

or  disease). 
Tfii~mow.     Inconstant;  untenable;  moveable;  unobtained; 

not  made  certain  of;  unsafe,  or  insecure. 
Tai~mow*angu    Irrecoverable,  or  lost  to  him  or  them.    "See 

Tai-mmr-atoo.  Irrecoverable,  or  lost  to  thee  or  you.  See 
ofoo. 

TJu-mow-my.    Irrecoverable*  or  lost  to  me.    See  mjr. 

Tai-nansjnoo.     Inodorous ;  having  no  odour,  good  or  bad. 

T£i-n6fo-mow.    Itinerant;  wandering;  unsettled. 

T4i-6chi    Endless  ;  unexhausted  j  inexhaustible. 

Tsj-6fa*  Without  love ;  merciless;  cruel ;  oppression ;  over- 
bearing conduct. 

T£i-6fi.    Incontiguous;  not  near  together. 

TiUohsjaa.    Unmarried ;  having  no  wife  or  husband. 

Isli-togo.    Noiseless ;  quiet ;  unheard. 

Tii-taifi.    Unobstructed ;  without  obstacle. 

Tii-tammy*.    Fatherless. 

T6i-tatt6w.    Disproportionate ;  unequal ;  matchless. 

Ta>toli.    Uogathered,  as  fruit  or  flowers. 

Tai-USnoo.  Incorrect,  (as  an  account  or  statement  not 
agreeing  with  other  accounts). 

TsjUtoofDo.    Incessant;  perpetual;  continual. 

T6i-to6too.     Unburnt ;  not  ignited  ;  saved  from  the  fire. 

Ts>vacky/.    Heedless;  inattentive. 

TiinrfkL    Unburnt ;  the  same  as  tmriootoo:  also  unscalded. 


TAN 

T6i'v6te.    Unstripped;  unspoiled. 

Taky*.    To  anoint  or  f mcar  with  oil* 

T61a.    To  tell;  to  relate;  to  disclose ;  to  bid. 

Talaho6i.  Impudent ;  saucy ;  impertinence  from  an  infe- 
rior to  a  superior. 

Talla.    A  thorn. 

Tallaia.    Prickly. 

Tala-16hi.    A  false  recital. 

Talamy'.    To  tell  to  me  or  us.    See  my. 

Talangi.  To  relate  to  a  third  person ;  (from  tola,  to  tell ; 
angi,  to).    See  angi. 

Tftlanoa.  A  narrative ;  a  relation ;  a  discourse  -,  chat ;  con- 
versation. 

Talitoo.  To  relate  or  tell  to  thee  or  you,  (from  leia  and 
atoo).    See  atoo. 

Tili.    To  wait  for  a  person's  coming  or  going. 

— •.    To  entertain,  or  to  give  a  meal  or  feast  to. 

Talla.    A  thorn. 

Talla-talla.    Thorny ;  prickly. 

Talo.    A  certain  esculent  root. 

Taloo.    To  beckon. 

T6I00.    Since;  (after  which  time). 

Tama.    A  boy;  a  young  man. 

Tama-bo6a.    A  doll ;  (from  tana,  a  boy,  and  foa, 
the  name  of  the  wood  of  which  it  is  made). 

Tamachi.    A  child  of  either  sex. 

Tamate.    To  kill.    See  tamatela. 

Tamatea.    To  kill ;  (from  ta  mate  iaf  strike,  death,  him). 

Tammy'.    A  father. 

Tanagi.  To  gather  together ;  to  collect ;  to  convocate  ;  to 
accumulate :  an  assemblage  of  people,  or  collection  of 
any  thing. 

Tanga  mimi.    The  bladder  of  urine. 

Tangftta.    A  man ;  any  male  t  also  a  term  of  honour  ap- 


TAT 

plied  to  a  brave  man;  (as  having  the  true  manly  cha- 
racter). 

Lo'toftfcca  tanga'ta.  Magnanimity. 
TangAta-tow.  A  warrior  (literally,  a  war  man). 
T&ngi.    To  weep ;  to  implore ;  to  lament ;  to  supplicate ; 

to  beg  pitifully,  or  earnestly. 
T&ngi-fe-to6gi.     To  bemoan ;  to  beat  the  face  with  grief. 
T6ngi-mo6ni.    Asseveration;  an  interjection  denoting  sur- 
prise ;  (modni,  truth). 
Tangooloo.     To  snore. 

Tino.     A  grave,  or  pit,  in  which  a  body  is  buried. 
Tinoo.    To  overwhelm  ;  to  bury. 
Tanoo-minga.    The  sixth  lunar  month  (when  the  yams  are 

already  planted). 
T&o.    A  dart ;  javelin ;  lance ;  spear. 

T&o  v61o  ica.     A  fizgig,  or  spear  to  strike  fish  with. 
Tao  fotoi.    A  spear  headed  with  the  sting  of  the 

sting-ray.  « 

Tio  t&laUUa.    A  bearded  spear. 
TAoo.    To  cook  victuals  under  ground  (according  to  thrir 
method). 

Fy  tfoo.     To  get  ready  the  leave**  &c.  with  which 
the  victuals  are  covered  during  the  process  of 
cooking. 
Tioobe.    Pendent;  hanging. 

Tioonga  malie.    Exactly  fitted,  or  suited :  very  suitable. 
Tipa.    The  substance  manufactured  from  the  bark  of  the 
Chinese  paper  mulberry  tree,  which,  when  imprinted, 
it  called  gnatoo.    See  gnatoo. 
T4-UL    A  mallet ;  a  hammer. 
TatAlL    To  await ;  to  expect  ;  to  pause. 
TaftAo.    To  way-lay ;  an  ambuscade ;  people  lying  in  wait. 
The  name  of  a  charm  by  which  people  are  supposed 


TEA 

to  be  injured,  and  consists  in  burying  something  be- 
longing to  them  in  the  house  of  a  principal  god,  or  of 
the  tutelar  god  of  their  family,  or  in  the  grave  of  a  su- 
perior relation. 

Tattingi.    To  clink ;  to  jingle  together. 

Tattow.  The  custom  of  marking  the  body  by  puncturing,  Ac 
See  ta-tattow,  under  the  article  fa. 

■  Alike ;  like ;  similar  to ;  co-equal. 

■  A  screen. 
Tatt6w-6nga.    Conformity;  similarity. 
Tatt6w.be.    Alike ;  similar ;  in  like  manner. 
Taw.    To  cure ;  to  heal :  a  remedy ;  a  cure. 

To  drop;  to  slip  down;  to  fall;  to  let  fall;  to  be 
killed  in  battle. 

To  implant ;  to  plant. 
To  open,  as  a  box,  or  door* 
The  sugar-cane. 
Tawgia.    To  ravish ;  to  commit  a  rape. 
T6wto.    Blood. 

P6ni  tAwto.    Smeared  with  blood. 
T&wto-t6wto.     Bloody. 
Te.    Almost. 

Te-how.    About  to  come. 
T6-t£.    Same  as  te. 
— .    The  personal  pronoun,  /,  except  in  the  future 

when  it  is  Oo. 
— .    The  sign  of  the  future  tense ;  it  makes  e  in  the 

person  singular. 
— ».    This  word,  taken  interrogatively,  often  means,  to  can, 
or  to  be  able,  as  te  ger,  canst  thou  ?  U  now,  can  they? 
See  ttgger. 
T6a.    Pale;  white. 

Mittatoa.    Pale  in  the  face. 


TEF 

Tedooj    A  hundred. 

Tebi.  To  trip  along ;  to  pace ;  to  step :  the  gait  or  walk  of 
a  person. 

T6000.    Knotty;  uneven;  prominent. 

Teboo-t£boo.     Rough  with  knots ;  lumpy. 

Teca.  To  trundle,  or  roll  along  the  ground:  a  wheel;  a 
ball :  the  name  of  a  boyish  sport. 

Tec6w.  A  score.  Used  merely  as  a  collective  noun,  as  our 
words  dozen  for  twelve,  score  for  twenty;  but  only  in 
nnmbering  yams  and  fish ;  both  which  are  counted  by 
pairs ;  as  Oofi  idha  gnahoa,  yams  one  pair,  yams  two 
pair,  &c. ;  but  when  the  quantity  amounts  to  ten  pair, 
instead  of  saying  06fi  ongofooloo  gnahoa,  yams  ten  pair, 
they  say  Ocffi  teco'w,  twenty  yams ;  leaving  out  gnakota, 
the  word  expressive  of  pair.  When  the  number  amounts 
to  more  than  twenty,  they  say  a  score  and  one  pair,  a 
score  and  two  pair,  &c.  teco'w  mo  tdha  gnako'a,  Ac.  When 
it  amounts  to  two  or  more  scores,  the  word  gnaccfw  is 
used  instead  of  teco'w,  as  oda  gnaa/w,  two  twenties,  Arc. 
When  it  amounts  to  five  scores,  or  a  hundred,  they  say 
Oofi  tefoo'hi;  as  eof/S  tefodki  mo  teco'w,  a  hundred  and 
twenty  yams. 

Tee.     To  swim ;  to  float. 

Fucca  tee.    A  water  excursion  for  pleasure. 

Tee-tee.    Afloat;  to  float  on  the  water;  to  be  buoyant 

Tfife.    To  circumcise. 

Teflto.    The  root  of  any  plant 

Tefito  fanna.    The  heel  of  a  mast 

Te&oa*    Single ;  alone ;  by  one's  self. 

Atao  fucca  tefooa.  To  carry  any  thing  ofi  a  stick 
over  the  shoulder. 

TefooJu.  A  word  for  one  hundred,  used  only  in  taunting 
out  yams,  fish,  &c 


TEO 

T6ggaftti.    Prostrate ;  thrown  dew*  by  accident :  lying  on 

the  ground. 
Tegger.     (From  te>  the  sign  of  the  future,  and  ger,  thou), 
thou  shalt,  thou  wilt:  taken  interrogatively,  it  often 
means,  canst  thou  > 
Tegichi.     Not  yet ;  ere. 
Tehina.    A  brother. 

Cow  tehina.    Brethren. 
T6h6w.    About  to  come. 
Tfia.    To  belabour ;  to  thump,  or  beat ;  (from  ta>  to  strike, 

ia9  him). 
T61e.    To  scrape ;  also,  sometimes,  used  for  to  shave. 
■  '        A  razor. 
Telefooa.    Bare;  naked. 

Fucca  telefo6a.  To  strip  naked. 
Telle.    The  name  of  a  certain  tree. 
Teliha.    Choice ;  will. 

Fy-teliha.  Option ;  choice ;  will :  do  as  you  please. 
Telinga.     The  ear. 
T6nga«     The  thigh  ;  the  ham. 

Ho6i  t6nga.    The  thigh  bone. 
Tenne.    Used  instead  of  te  and  ia9  he  shall  or  will ;  as  feast 
aloo,  he  shall  go,  instead  of  le  aloo  ia. 

.     (Used  interrogatively,  it  may  imply  power  or  abi- 
lity of  doing  any  thing ;  as  tenne  aloo  t  can  he  go  ? 
Teoo.    To  adorn  with  dress ;  to  attire ;  to  bedeck  or  equip; 
to  prepare  to  go  any  where. 
Finery  in  dress. 

Ready ;  prepared ;  (whether  in  respect  to  dress,  or 
any  thing  else). 

(Used  interrogatively),  can  I?  (see  te).    It  is  also 
the  first  person  of  the  future  tense,  I  shall  or  will. 
T6oot6?r.     A  rray  of  battle. 


TOE 

Tepa.    To  goggle;  to  squint. 

M6tta-t6pa.    Goggle-eyed. 
T66.    Well  nigh ;  almost.     See  te. 
T6te-t6te.    Tremulous ;  chilliness  witfi  shivering. 
TeteinN    To  flutter  ;  to  tremble ;  to  vibrate  as  a  cord. 
T6ve.    The  name  of  a  particular  plant,  the  root  of  which,  in 

time  of  scarcity,  is  eaten  for  want  of  better  food. 
To.    The  name  of  a  tree,  bearing  berries,  of  which  the  glu- 
tinous pulp,  (called  also  to),  is  used  to  paste  together 
the  different  sheets  of  tapa. 
T6-6chi.     (This  word  is  always  used  with Jucca  before  it). 

Seefucca  to-ochi.  t 

To*.    Brave;  magnanimous:  prowess;  bravery. 
T6a-he»t6w.    Strong  in  arms :  armipotent. 
T6a.    The  casuarina,  or  the  wood  of  this  tree. 
T6bet    A  lock  or  tuft  of  hair. 
T6boo-v&e.    The  sole  of  the  foot :  a  shoe,  or  sandal. 
Toca*    Aground  ;  to  get  aground. 

Fucca  t6ca.     To  run  aground. 
.    A  word  applied  only  to  human  beings,  and  means  the 
same  as  person,  or  individual. 
Toca-chi.     Few  (people). 
T6ca-o6a.     Both. 

Toca  tiha  be.    Only  one  person ;  by  one's  self,  with- 
out  the  assistance  of  others. 
Tocalow.    Western  ;  in  the  west :  the  west. 
Tochi.    See  tJchi-tdcki,  which  is  the  more  usual  word. 
Tochi-tochi.    Nibbled;  notched. 
T6co.    A  post  used  to  make  fast  canoes  to. 
T6co-t6co.    A  staff;  a  short  pike,  used  as  a  walking  stick. 
Toooto.    To  lie  along ;  to  lie  down. 
T6e.  .Remainder;  residue;  superfluous  quantity. 
T6e  mea.    Leavings. 


TOL 

T6e.    Again  ;  once  more. 
T6fe.    The  oyster. 

Matta  he  to'fe.    Pearls  (i.  e.  the  eye  or  the  oyster). 
To'fi.    To  mince ;  to  cut  into  small  pieces. 
Toti-to'fi.    See  tofi. 
Tofoa.    A  whale. 
ToToo.    A  calm  (no  wind). 
To'ge.    A  water  snake,  like  the  conger  eel. 
To'gi.    An  adze. 

To'gi  fucca  anga  gehe.    An  axe ;  i.  e.  an  adze  of  a 
different  turn,  or  disposition ;  because  they  ex- 
press an  axe,  by  calling  it  an  adze,  having  the 
blade  differently  turned  with  respect  to  the  handle. 
To/ho.    To  drag;  to  tow  a  vessel  along. 

ToTio  fucca  malo'hi.    To  drag  by  main  force. 
To*ho  gi  ttihi.    To  launch. 
Halla-to'ho.    A  drawbridge. 
Torho-to/ho.    A  rape  ;  to  ravish,  or  commit  a  rape. 
To'i.    See  to'i-tdi,  which  is  the  more  usual  word. 
To'i-to'i.    To  hide;  to  conceal  oneself  (whether  through 
cowardice  or  not). 

Hawla  to'i-to'i.    To  abscond. 
Tola.    Pierced  with  an  arrow,  or  spear,  or  any  pointed  in- 
strument; pricked. 
■  To  meet  one's  expectation  of  profit  in  the  act  of 

bartering,  or  trading. 
To'ki.    Newly;  lately  ;  just  now. 
To'ki  fy'.    Lately  done. 
M6a  to/ki  fy.    A  recent  event. 
T61e.    Pudendum  muliebre. 

Tolcccalecca.  Beautiful  (not  applied  to  women,  but  only 
to  men,  though  sometimes,  metaphorically,  to  plan*, 
trees,  and  canoes.) 


TOO 

To4i.     To  gather,  to  pluck,  as  flowers  or  fruit* 

Toflo.     To  pitch,  or  throw  any  thing  heavy;  the  name  of  a 

certain  game. 
Toto-afi.    To  produce  fire  by  rubbing  the  end  of  a  dry  stick 

on  a  piece  of  dry  wood. 
Tolo'a.    The  duck  (properly  the  wild  duck). 
Tolcnga.    Permanent;  lasting;  durable. 
■  The  piece  of  dry  wood  on  which  the  end  of  a 

stick  is  forcibly  rubbed  to  produce  fire :  the  stick  is 

called  comatoo. 
Ttfloow    The  number  three :  the  sign  of  the  plural  of  per- 
sonal and  possessive  pronouns. 
ToTloo-ongofooloo.    The  numeral  thirty. 
Totoia.    Pride  in  dress,  or  appearance. 
To'me.    A  sort  of  torch. 
Tomoofe.    Before ;  first  (in  relation  to  time). 
Tofogi.    To  engrave ;  to  carve,  as  they  do  the  handles  of 

clubs.  &c. 
Tongia'gt.     A  double  sailing  canoe. 
Totaomea.    A  kind  of  spear. 

Tcnoo.    Manifest ;  clear ;  distinct ;  direct ;  even  ;  in  a  row. 
.    Candid ;    open ;   sincere ;   methodical ;    precise ; 

punctual. 

Facca  to'noo.   To  demonstrate ;  to  make  evident. 
Totaooafagi.    Plain ;  evident  to  him.  her.  or  them.     See 

angi. 
Tofaooitoo,    Plain ;  evident  to  thee,  or  you.    See  atoo. 
Tonooia.    Guiltless :  in  the  right. 
Tmoomy'.    Plain ;  apparent ;  evident  to  me,  or  us.    See 

sty. 
Tto.    To  stand ;  to  tread :  also  to  rise :  interjection,  stand 

up!  get  up! 

Too  gi  moo'a.     To  front 
Too-moV.    Stagnant  (as  water). 


TOO 

Too-totaoo.    Upright. 
Too-oota.    To  land. 
Too.    To  cut ;  to  separate  by  cutting. 
Toofa.    The  lower  class  of  people :  the  name  of  the  lowest 

rank  in  society. 
— — .    The  back ;  the  loins ;  behind ;  external. 
Toofe-nf  ma.  <   The  back  of  the  hand. 
Too'a-v£e.    The  instep. 
Too'a»gfa.    The  nape  of  the  neck. 
Too'a-bico.    Hump-backed. 
Too'a-ftlle.    The  outside  of  the  roof  of  a  house ;  the 

back  of  a  house. 
Too'a-boo'ge.    The  flat,  or  upper  surface  of  the 
booge  (part  of  a  canoe).    Seefoege. 
Too/achlna.     A  cousin,  either  male  or  female:  also  aa 

uncle. 
Toofenga.    A  post,  or  standing  place:  a  place  where  any 

thing  has  stood. 
Too'boo.     To  spring  up;  to  grow:  a  shoot;  a  sprout;  a 
bud. 

Toot>oo~£nga.     Ancestry;  origin,  or  source  of 

any  thing. 
Too'boo-la'hi.    To  increase. 
Too'boo-vy .    Aquatic ;  belonging  to  the  water,  as 

aquatic  plants,  fish,  &c. 
Too'boo-vdoo.     Growing  wild. 
Fucca  too'boo.    To  cause  to  spring  up. 
.    The  groin. 
Toofoooa'nga.     Origin ;   source  (too'boo,  to  spring;  dag*t 
place) ;  ancestry. 

Oo'looagi  toobooa'nga.    First  fruits  (of  the 
season). 
Tof-o'chi.    See  fucca  to-ockL 
Tpochia.    To  crop;  to  cut  off. 


TOO 

Too&iga.    Residual. 

Tooenga  m6a.    Leavings, 
To6fa.    To  assort ;  to  deal  out ;  to  dispense ;  to  share  out/ 
Toofo6nga.    A  workman,  orartificer. 

Toofo6nga  ta  mftcca.    A  mason. 

■  ■    "■ fy  diva.    A  barber, 

—  t£-t£.    Any  artificer  that  uses  th* 

axe,  &c.  &c. 
To6gi.    To  strike ;  to  hammer :  also  a  hammer,  or  mallet ; 

a  blow  with  the  fist. 
Toogia.    To  stumble ;  to  tumble  down. 
To6goo.     To  abolish ;  to  quit ;  to  leave  off;  to  bequeath ; 
to  relinquish ;  to  leave  off  work ;  to  lower  (as  a  sail)* 
1  Termination,  or  completion  of  labour* 

•  ■  To  retain  ;  to  remain. 

■  To  allow,  or  permit :  tod  goo-be,  to  let  or  allow  ofc 

■■  To  desist;  to  cease;  to  delay \  fucca  todgoo,  to 

appease  (anger). 
'.    Hold!  avast  1 
-.    To  die,  or  stain ;  todgoo  coola,  to  die,  or  stain  red. 


Toogooanga.  The  end,  or  termination  (used  principally  in 
a  moral  sense,  as  the  termination  of  happiness  or 
misery). 

— .    A  place  where  any  thing  is  kept,  or  suffered 

to  remain. 

To6gooanga-g61e.    A  quagmire. 
To6gooloa\     For  a  long  time* 
To6goo-o6ta.    Inland. 
To6goo-y-b6.    Be  it  so. 

To6hoo.    The  forefinger ;  to  point  with  the  finger. 
Tooi.    A  chief,  or  tributary  governor  of  an  island,  or  di- 
strict. 

A  kind  of  club* 
— .    The  knee. 

VOL.  II.  g 


TOO 

To6i.    To  string  beads,  or  flowers;  to  plait  wreaths  tf 

flowers* 
— .    To  sew  with  a  needle  and  thread. 
Too&nga.    A  seam  (in  sewing). 
Toela.    Bald;  (bald-headed). 
To61i.    To  run  after;  to  chase,  or  pursue. 
Toolli.    Deaf,  from  any  cause  whatever. 
T06I00.    To  drop,  like  water. 

Tooloo  he  m&tta.    A  tear. 
To61oo-to61oo.    Instillation ;  dropping  (as  a  fluid). 

.    Eaves  of  a  house ;  the  edge  of  the  thatdf 
(whence  the  rain  drops). 
T00I061.    To  drop  into  (as  a  fluid) ;  any  fluid  to  drop  into 
the  eyes  to  abate  inflammation ;  or  to  drop  into  an  ulcer 
for  the  same  purpose. 
Toonga.     A  pile,  or  heap,  of  any  thing. 

-.    The  core  of  fruits;  a  knot  in  wood;  a  kernel; 
the  seed  of  plants. 

To6nga  &wta-awta.    A  heap  of  dirt,  wr  filth. 
To6nga-fgoo.     A  joint  of  pork,  consisting  of  the 
lower  part  of  the  back  and  the  tail. 
■ »  A  ladder. 

— — .    Also  a  corruption  of  toodnga ;  which  see. 

.    A  row  of  plantain  or  banana  trees. 

A  sign  of  the  plural  number  of  animated  being*. 


Toonga-mea.     A  number  of  people ;  many  people. 

Toonoo.    To  broil,  as  victuals  upon  hot  embers. 

TooJ-oo.    To  rise  from  the  ground,  or  bed ;  to  get  up :  get 

up  I 
T06-00I00.    To  decapitate. 
To6pa.    A  window,  or  small  opening,  in  a  house :  also  s 

hole  in  the  fencing  of  a  fortified  place  to  dischargt 

arrows  through. 
Toota'nga.    A  block ;  a  large  piece  of  any  thing* 


TOW 

0 

TooUvnga-acow.     A  log  of  wood, 
Toota'nga-oofi.     A  large  piece  of  yam* 
Tootoo/.    To  cut ;  to  separate  by  cutting ;  to  cut  off. 

Tootoo/-oo/Ioo.    To  behead. 
Tootoo'.    A  chisel  (either  of  iron  or  stone). 
Too'too.    Heat ;  ignition ;  burning :  to  burn ;  to  kindle ;  to 

boil. 
Too'too.    The  bark  of  the  Chinese  paper  mulberry  tree,  of 

which  gnat oo  is  made. 
Tootoo'e.    Thin;  emaciated;  lean;  raw-boned;  lankness. 
Tootoo'loo.    Dropping  off,  or  out  of  (as  a  fluid) :  to  be 
permeable  to  water,  as  the  roof  of  a  house  when  the 
rain  drops  through. 
Too-/.     Dilatory;  slow. 
Tot6ca.     Slow;  tardy:  softly;  quietly* 
Tot6ca-dnge.     Slowly;  softly. 
Tot61o.    To  crawl ;  to  creep ;  to  grovel* 
Tot6noo.    Manifest ;  clear ;  distinct :  direct;  straight ;  even ; 
in  a  row. 

.     Candid;  open;  sincere. 

Totonooagi.     Minutely. 

Toty'.     A  sailor ;  a  man  accustomed  to  work  canoes ;  a 
fisherman. 

To  fish,  either  with  a  net,  or  with  line  and  hook. 
*ow.     War ;  an  army ;  a  battle  by  land. 

The  end,  or  extremity  of  any  thing. 
Tow-mo61i.    The  stern  of  a  vessel. 
Tow-mooa.    The  stem  of  a  vessel. 
The  year ;  a  season ;  the  produce  of  a  season. 
Fit;  suitable:  to  fit;   to  suit  (as   one   body  does 
another). 

To  barter ;  to  trade. 
Fucca  t6w.    To  exchange. 


_  r% 


TOW 

Tow.    To  excern,  or  squeeze  out,  as  water  from  a  sponge; 
to  wring  out. 

.    To  reach,  or  extend  to* 

To  meet  one's  expectation  of  profit  in  the  act  of 
bartering,  or  trading  (the  same  as  toia). 

The  pronoun  plural,  we  (only  used  when  the  persoa 
spoken  to  is  included). 
Tow-alla.    To  luff;  to  bring  a  vessel's  head  nearer  to  the 

wind. 
Towalo.    To  row,  or  to  paddle.  . 

Towb6too.    Nearly  adjoining;  neighbouring;  by  the  side 
of;  abreast  of. 

Towbotoo  gihena.    On  that  side. 
Towbotoo  giheni.    On  this  side* 
Towbotoo-my.    Hithermost. 
Towbotoo-ange.    Thithermost. 
T6wfa.     A  squall  of  wind ;  a  gale. 
Tow-f&lle.     A  besom ;  a  broom. 
Towg6te.     An  elder  brother  ;  the  first  born,  either  male  tr 

female. 
Tow-hifo.     To  impend ;  to  hang  over. 
T6wla.     An  anchor;  a  cable. 
Towlanga.     An  anchorage. 
T6wma't6w.    To  fish  with  a  line  and  hook. 
Tow-mo6a.    The  prow,  or  head  of  a  ship,  or  canoe. 
Tow-mo61i.    The  stern  of  a  vessel ;  astern. 
T6w-o6a.    The  dual  number  of  the  pronoun  tow. 
Tow-tea.     To  chide  ;  to  rebuke :  chiding ;  reproof. 
Tow-t61oo.     The  plural  number  (in  contradistinction  to  tU 

dual)  of  the  pronoun  tow.  • 
T6w-t6w.    To  hang. 

T6w-t6w-hifo.    Dependent;  hanging  down. 
'  A  religious  ceremony  so  called ;  (an  offering  tt 

the  god  of  weather). 


VAH 

Tow-tow.    To  wring,  as  a  sponge. 

T6wt6woonga«  A  circular  flat  piece  of  wood,  surrounding 
the  middle  of  the  string,  by  which  the  oil  baskets,  hang, 
so  as  to  prevent  rats  getting  to  the  basket. 

Twa'wfa.    A  heath ;  a  common. 

Twinga.    A  wreath  (as  of  flowers) ;  a  string  (of  beads). 

V. 

Va.     A  piece  (only  applied  to  wood,  or  trees). 

Va  ac6w.    A  piece  of  wood. 
Va'ca.    A  ship,  vessel  or  canoe. 

Va'ca  foccatoo.    A  boat ;  small  canoe. 
Cow-va'ca.    Crew  of  a  boat. 
Vafca-fa'wha.    A  boil. 

Va'ca  va'ca.    The  side  of  a  man,  or  any  animal. 
Va'cca-vacky.    Careful;  cautious. 

Vacky*.    To  heed;  to  look  to;  to  inspect;  to  view;  to 
search ;  to  be  provident.  Interjection,  look !  behold !  lo ! 
Aloo  vacky.    To  proceed  carefully ;  to  go  circum- 
spectly. 
Tcd-vacky.    Incautiously. 
Va'cky-ja'nge.    With  circumspection. 
Vs/e.     The  foot,  leg,  paw,  of  any  animal. 
Fucca  ma'nga  vae.     Astride. 
I16nga  va'e.     A  footstep ;  footmark. 
A'fe  va'e.    The  sole  of  the  foot. 
M061  va'e.    The  heel. 
Cow-va'e.    The  toes. 
F6e  va'e.    The  leg. 
To6a  va£.    The  back  of  the  foot. 
Moto6a  va'e.    The  great  toe^ 
Va/he.    To  parcel,  or  separate  into  parts ;  to  divide. 
■  To  separate,  or  be  separated,  as  two  combatants. 

■  Parted  from ;  broken  off;  divided. 


VEL 

Vaky'.    Gathers ;  to  plait,  ox  gather :  also  a  doable  garment 

of  plaited  gnatuo,  worn  on  particular  occasions. 
Vafta.    Apparel;  dress. 

Mea  va  la.    Clothes. 
Vale.    Mad;  insane;  foolish;  crazy;  delirious:  also  igno- 
rant. 

M a'tta  vale.    Dull;  without  thought. 
Valea.    Insane.     See  Vale. 
Va'loo.    The  numeral  eight. 
Vaioo-6ngofooloo.     Eighty. 

Va'nge.  A  curse  $  malediction ;  a  string  of  abusive  and  im- 
perative language,  recommending  the  party  abused  to 
do  something  that  is*  horrible,  such  as  "  Dig  up  your 
"  father  by  moonlight,  and  make  soup  of  his  bones;"  in 
which  sort  of  cursing  some  of  the  Tonga  people  are  so 
well  versed,  that  they  will  run  on  with  it  for  half  an 
hour  without  any  repetitions. 
Va  oo.  A  bush ;  a  wood ;  a  thicket ;  a  field  overrun  with 
grass,  or  weeds. 

To6boo  va'oo.    Growing  wild. 
A' loo  va'oo.     Fallow  ;  uncultivated. 
Va'ooa.    Uncultivated  (as  land),  overrun  with  weeds. 
Vasia.     Flattery  ;  false  praise. 
Vata.     The  semen  of  animals. 
Va've.     Speed ;  velocity :  quick ;  swift-footed  ;  brisk. 

Ma'tta  va've.    Quicksighted. 
Vav6a.    See  Va've. 
Va've-a'nge.     Quickl)';  speedily. 

Ve.     Corruption  of  vae>  the  leg  or  foot,  and  is  only  used  in 
the  formation  of  certain  compound  words ;  as,  vecefrc, 
li^rht -footed  ;  vcbfco,  bandy-legged. 
Vebico.     Bandy-legged.     See  Ve. 
Veha'ca.    A  sea-fight. 
Vela.     Calid  ;  hot ;  fervent :  to  burn  ;  to  scald. 


wo 

Vfii.    Prurient ;  itchy :  to  itch. 

Vfio.    Jaculation ;  projection  (as  of  8  spear) ;  also  to  launch, 
or  slide  along. 

Tafo  v61o  ica.     A  fizgig ;  a  spear  to  strike  fish  with. 
V6te.    To  despoil ;  to  divest ;  to  plunder ;  to  dispossess  of  • 
to  pillage. 

.    To  loosen ;  to  untie. 

Visa.     A  bracelet  of  any  kind. 
VevaVe.    Light-footed.    See  Vc. 
Vicoo.     Wet;  damp. 

Vicoo  facca  chi-chi.     Moist ;  damp. 
Vfli.    A  gimblet ;  any  instrument  to  bore  holes  with. 
Vflo.     To  twirl ;  to  spin  round. 
Vhricoo.    Wet;  inriguous;  watery. 
Vow-vow.    To  scrape  (with  a  knife,  or  shell,  &c.). 
Vy.     Water;  liquid;  fluidity;  juice;  a  pond;  any  thing 
serous  or  watery. 

Fucca  vy.    To  dissolve,  melt,  infuse ;  to  drench  with 

any  fluid. 
Vy-hoo.    Broth  made  of  fish ;  (koo,  to  boil :  they 
have  no  other  broth). 
Vy-mooa.     The  third  lunar  month;  {mooa,  the  first,  it  being 

the  first  ty,  watery,  or  rainy  month). 
Vy-mooi.    The  fourth  lunar  month,  or  second  rainy  month ; 

(swot,  following). 
Vy'-vy1.    Weak;  debilitated;  ineffectual. 
Vyi-vyt  motooa.    Weak  with  age. 

W. 

WL    Interjection.    Fie !  for  shame ! 

Wo.  To  go ;  to  proceed :  this  word  can  only  be  used  in  a 
plural  sense ;  thus,  we  cannot  say,  gooa  te  wo9 1  go,  but 
we  may  say  gooa  www  vo,  we  go.  Aloo  may  be  used 
both  singularly  and  plurally'. 


YAO 

W061.    Interjection.    La!  (of  surprise), 
W6i.    Interjection.    La!  (of surprise). 

Y. 

Y.    To  put;  to  place ;  to  deposit. 
Y'-a'nga.    A  case ;  a  sheath. 
Y-be.    Notwithstanding;  yet;  still. 
Y-vala.    To  dress ;  to  clothe. 
Yaoo6.    See  iaoai. 


VOCABULARY, 


ENGLISH  AND  TONGA. 


ABO 

* 

Abaft.    Gi-t6w-mo61i. 

Abandon  (to  quit).    Liagi. 

Abashed  (to  be).    Fucca-m£. 

Abate  (to  lessen).  Toogoo;  hili;  fucca  chi-chi,  e.  g.  the 
storm  abated,  na'i  to&goo  he  t&wfa.  He  lowered  his 
voice,  ndijulcca  chi-chi  ennt  Ua. 

Abbreviate  (to  shorten  or  curtail  in  any  fray).  Fu'cca  chi- 
chi ;  fu'cca  no-no. 

Abdomen.     G6te. 

Abhor.     F6hia. 

Abide  (to  dwell,  to  remain  in  any  place).    Nofo. 

Abject  (low,  mean).    Fu'cca  too'a. 

Ability  (mental  ability).  L6to  b6to;  (strength  of  body), 
chino  malohi. 

Able  (strong).    Mal6hi;  (to  be  capable  of),/e. 

Able-bodied.     Chino  mal6hi. 

Aboard.    Gi-v&ca. 

Abode.    Afoi;  nofoanga. 

Abolish  (to  give  up,  to  do  away  with).  Toogoo;  hili; 
chiagi;  liagi. 


y  ACQ 

Abominable' (disgusting  to  the  sight  or  feelings).  Fu'cca- 
li'ali'a. 

Abortion  (premature  birth).  Fan6w  mooi,  (i.  e.  unripe 
birth). 

Above  (in  point  of  place).  Gi-aloonga,  gi-hige ;  (in  rank) 
moo*.     (Vide  before). 

Abreast.    Tow  botoo. 

Abroad  (in  distant  country).  Gi  mo61i ;  (out,  i.e.  out  of 
doors)  gi-to6a. 

Abrupt  (sudden).  F6ki-fa;  (broken  and  uneven)  pile* 
p6te ;  pap&ta. 

Abscond.    Hawla. 

Absent  (at  a  distance,  abroad).  Mamaoo:  (not  actually 
present)  gehe. 

Absume  (to  destroy).    Mo'wmo'w. 

Abundant  (plentiful,  large).    Labi. 

Abuse  (bad  language).  C&be :  a  string  of  abusive  foul  lan- 
guage, frequently  in  a  sort  of  verse,  is  called  vangi. 

Accelerate.     Fu'cca  vave. 

Acclamation.     Mavava. 

Account  (to  narrate).  Talan6a;  (to  reckon  up)  low;  (t 
narration),  talanoa. 

According  (agreeing).     Tatt6w. 

Accordingly  (thereupon).     Leva. 

Accumulate  (to  heap  up).    Tanagi. 

Accustomed  (disposed,  habituated).     A'nga;  4nga.be. 

Ache  (any  pain).  Mamahi;  (head-ache)  gnagn6w;  (tooth- 
ache) ni'fo  manoo. 

Acid.    M&he. 

Acquaint  (to).     Tala. 

Acquaintance  (friend).  Cow  tangata;  (friendship)  fu'cca 
cow  tangata:  no  word  for  bare  acquaintance  without 
friendship. 


AGO 

Across  (transverse).      Tetowlagi;  (on  the  other  side)  gi 

botoo  gi-hena. 
Actions  (deeds,  behaviour).    F/gna  m6a;  (battles)  tow. 
Actual  (true).     Mo6ni. 

Adam's  apple  (the  prominent  cartilage  of  the  throat).  Mo'nga. 
Adherent  (partizan).    Cow-mea. 
Adjacent.    CKfi. 

Adjoin  (to  join  together).    Fu'cca  t4ha. 
Adjoining.     O'fi. 
Adieu.     CKfa;  chiodofa;  chiacoo-o'fa :    (meaning   love,  or 

not  little  mj  love  ;  expressions  used  m  taking  leave  and 

also  on  meeting). 
Adoration  (prayer).     Lotoo. 
Adrift.     Lei  16a :  (this  word  is  strictly  applied  to  a  vessel  at 

sea,  driven  by  wind  without  guidance). 
Adversary  (an  antagonist  either  in  sport  or  battle).     Fifli ; 

(the  enemy )  he  tow. 
Adulation.     Fu'cca-ly. 
Adze.    T6gi. 
Afar.     Maraaoo. 

Affray  (to  frighten).     Fucca  manavahe. 
Affray  (a  quarrel).     Ghe. 
Affliction.    Ho'lo-ho'lo. 
Affright.    Mdnavah£;  m&navachi. 
Affront  (to  aggravate).     Fucca  i'ta. 
Afloat.    Tee-t6e. 

Afresh  (anew).    To/e;  (recent,  new)  Foo-o/. 
After  (in  place  or  time).     MooVmoo'i. 
Again.    Tote. 
Agape.    Jio. 

Aged.    Motoo'a;  (full  grown)  the  same;  (young)  moo/i. 
Ago  (lately).     Moo'iange;   (one  day)  he  alio  ;  (long  ago) 
mo6a-ange,  lo'a-ange. 


,   AMB 

Aground  (striking  the  bottom,  as  a  vessel).     To>ca. 

Ague.     Fcke-feke. 

Ah!    Yaooc! 

Aim  (to  take  aim).     Fu'cca  4ta:  (this  expression  is  also 

used  for  the  act  of  looking  along  a  stick  or  any  such 

object,  to  see  if  it  is  straight). 
Air :  no  word  for  still  air :  wind  is  called  matan'gi  ;  a  breeze, 

havi'li-vi'li. 
Alas!     Oyaooe!  Seookl! 

Alert  (quick  in  action  or  in  resource).    Mitta  bo'to. 
Alible  (nutritive).    Fu'cca  chi'no. 
Alien  (foreign  or  strange).     Moo'li. 
Alight  (to).     Aloohi'fo. 
Alike.    A'nge-be;  &nge-co. 
Aliment.    M6a  ky. 
All   (or  rather  whole  of  any  thing,  not  in  number  but 

quantity).     Foofe-be. 
All  (in  number).     Foo1i-b6. 
Almost.     Te;  t£-t£. 
Aloft.     Gi-aloo'nga ;  gi  h&ge. 
Alone.     Taha ;  (by  one's  self)  to'ca  taha  be. 
Aloof  (at  a  distance).    Mam&oo. 
Already  (during  the  time).     Loloto'nga. 
Also.     Mo;  bea;  bemo. 
Alter  (to  change,  verb  active).    Gnalii  gehe,  (i.  e.  to  make 

different). 
Altogether  (as  a  whole  or  mass).     Foo'a-be  ;  (in  number) 

foofli-be. 
Amass  (to  gather  together).     Tana'gi;  (to  heap  up)  foc- 

catoo7. 
Amaze.     Fu'cca  1611e  mooo'i. 
Ambition.     L6to  lahi  -,  ti'a  6gi. 
Ambuscade  (men  concealed  in).     Tatao. 


A  NO 

Amiable.    Fucca  nian£co. 

Amiss  (wrong,  erroneous).     Hallo. 

Amidst  (among).     Gi-16to. 

Amity  (friendship, Jove).     Ofa. 

Among.     Gi-lo'to. 

Amongst.     Gi  lo'to. 

Amorous.     Manaco  fafi'ne  ;  mooi-tow. 

Amour.     Fe£ooagi. 

Ample.     L6hi. 

Ananas.     Fy'gna-pu'. 

Ancestor.     Toobooanga.     Tod  boo,  to  spring  ;  a'nga,  place. 

Anchor  (also  the  cable).  T6wla:  (this  word,  differently 
accented,  viz.  thus,  tovolti,  means  the  sail  set). 

Anchorage.     Towlanga  (to  via,  anchor ;  an* a,  place). 

Ancient.    Lo'a. 

And.  Mo;  ma;  he:  ma  is  only  used  with  numerals :  mo 
may  also  be  used  with  numerals,  but  not  so  well.  Be 
is  never  used  with  numerals ;  it  is  often  joined  to  the 
pronoun  ia,  he,  and  pronounced  tea  instead  of  be  ia. 

Anger.     Lili ;  it  a. 

Anger  (to  make  angry).     Fu'cca  i'ta. 

Angle  (to  catch  fish  with  a  line  and  hook).     Tow-matoV. 

Angler.     Jiena  tow-mato'w. 

Angry.     I'ta;  lili. 

Anguish  (excessive  pain).  Mamahi  obito;  (excessive 
grief  of  mind)  tangi  obito. 

Animal  (rather  a  bird).     Manoo. 

Animate.     Fucca  moo6i. 

Animosity.     Fachi-fachi. 

Announce.    Tar*. 

Anoint  (to  anoint  the  face,  trunk  of  the  body  or  limbs)* 
Taky;  (to  anoint  the  hair  of  the  head)  pani. 

Another.     Taha  gehe ;  (another  person)  t6ca  tahfc  g6he. 


ARI 

f 

Ant  (the  small  ant),    ho ;  (the  large  black  ant  J  loatki 

Antagonist.     Fili ;  (the  enemy)  he  tow. 

Antecede.    Mo6a-mo6aange. 

Antipathy.     Fa  f&hia  (much  hate). 

Anthill.     L060  he  lo ;  looo  he  loata. 

Apace.    Vaveange  (quick,  cither  in  locomotion  or  work). 

Apart  (separate).    G6he  (on  one  side,  aside) ;  gi-botoo. 

Apiece  (each).    Taggi  t£ha. 

Apologize  (to  excuse).     Fucca  fichi. 

Appal.     Fucca  manavahe ;  fucca  manavachi. 

Apparel.    Vala ;  (European  apparel)  cot'06  papakingi. 

Apparent  (plain,  evident).     T6noo. 

Apparition  (a  spirit,  a  god).     Hotooa. 

Appearance  (resemblance).    Matta-ange. 

Appease  (to  silence,  or  quiet  a  child) .     Fucca  na. 

Appease  (his  anger).     Fucca  toogoo  (enne  it  a). 

Appellation.    Hing6a. 

Appetite  (hunger).  Fiaky';  (appetite  in  general)  fia;  (lustj 

fia  feichi. 
Applaud  (to).     Mav&va. 
Applicable  (fit,  suitable).     Ala. 

Apprehend  (to  lay  hold  of,  to  seize,  or  arrest).     Booge. 
Apprehensive.     Manavahe;  manavachi. 
Apprize.    Tala;  fucca  flaw. 

Approach.     Fucca  6fi  (used  either  as  verb  or  noun). 
Approve  (to).     Lille-y';  (approval)  the  same. 
Aquatic.     To6boo  vy'  (springing  up  in  the  water,  as  certain 

plants,  applied  also  to  fish). 
Arduous  (difficult  to  do).     Fy'gnatii. 
Are.     Go6a  (the  sign  of  the  present  tense). 
Arid  (dry,  from  any  cause).     M6a-m6a. 
Arise  (from  the  ground  or  bed).     Too;  Too-00. 


ASP 

Arm.     Nima  (both  hand  and  arm,  either  distinctly,  or  to- 
gether). 

Armipotent.    T6a-he-t6w. 

Armistice.     Fucca  H116. 

Armpit.     Faifine. 

Army.     Tow. 

Aromatic.    Nanamoo;  (sweet  scented,  as  flowers)  n4moo 
cacala* 

Arow  (in  a  row).     Tot6noo. 

Aroynt  (begone !).     A'loo !  fi£m6  aloo  ! 

Arrant.     C6vi  obito. 

Array  (order  of  battle).     T600  tow ;  (dress)  t£oo. 

Arrive  (to,  at  a  distant  place).     Tow;  (:it  the  place  where 
one  is)  tow;  how. 

Arrogant  (proud,  lofty).     Low-c6w ;  (presumptuous,  inso- 
lent) f  i.i  egi. 

Arrow  (for  war).     Gnah6w;  (for  sport)  cuho. 

Artful  (deceitful).    L6too6a:  (wise,  knowing)  b6to. 

Artificer.     Toofo6nga. 

Artillery.     M6a  fanna  fonno6a  (things  to  shoot  the  land). 

As  (like).     A'nge-co  ;  (the  conjunction,  as)  ca. 

Ascend  (to  climb).     Caca;  (to-  go  up,  as  up  a  hill)  &I00 
hage. 

Ascertain.    116a;  ilaw. 

Ashamed  (bashful).     Ma. 

Ashes.     E'foo. 

Ashore  (on  land).     Gi-o6ta;  (aground)  toca. 

Aside  (ipart).     Tow  b6too;  (leaning  on  one  side)  hili. 

Ask  (to  enquire).     Fehooi;  (to  petition)  hoo;  (to  request) 
cawle. 

Asleep.    M6he. 

Aspect   (face,  look,  appearance).      M&tta;   m&tta-m£tta: 
mamatta. 

Aspersion  (false  accusation).    Lohiagi. 


AWA 

Assassinate.    Lapachia ;  (assassination )  lipa. 
Assemble  (to).    Tanagi;  (assemblage)  tlie  same. 
Asseveration  (an  oath;  strong  affirmation).     Tingi  mofai; 

fo6a  cava. 
Associate  (or  to  dwell  with).    Non6fo. 
Assort  (to  portion  out).    To6fa;  v&he. 
Astern.     Tow-mooli. 

Astonish.     Fu'cca  1611e  moo6i ;  (to  make  life  run  away). 
Astray  (to  go  astray,  to  wander).    H6e. 
Astride.     Fu'cca  manga  vae. 
Asunder.     G6he  g6he. 
Argue  (to  argue  obstinately).    Gigihi;  (to  discourse)  U- 

lan6a. 
Around  (encircling,  round  about).    F61i;  tacky'. 
Arouse  (to  awaken).    Fu'cca  6a. 
Asperse  (to  calumniate).     Fu'cca  c6vi. 
Athirst.     Fia  inoo  (wanting  drink). 
Athletic.     FefSca;  maI6hi. 
Atom  (a  small  particle,  a  crumb).     Mom6i  m£a. 
Attain  (to  procure).     Mow. 
Attire  (dress).     T600  ;  v61a. 
Avarice.    Pepine ;  man 00  manoo ;   (avaricious,  stingy)  the 

same. 
Avast  (hold  !  stop  ! ).     To6go!  6-ooa ! 
Avaunt!     Aloo!  fiam6  &loo! 
Audacious  (saucy).     Talaho6i;  (mischievous)  pow. 
Aversion  (hatred).     F6hia. 
Avidity  (in  eating).     Ho66-ky  :  (eagerness,  strong  desvt) 

holi. 
Aunt.    Mehegitanga. 
Auspicious  (favourable).     Monooia. 
Authentic  (true).    Mo6ni. 
Await  (to  wait).     Tatali. 
Awaken.     Fu'cca  aa ;  fafango* 


BAN 

Axe.  T6gi  fu'cca  anga  g£he  (meaning  an  adze  of  a  differ- 
ent turn,  the  blade  of  the  adze  being  transverse  to  the 
handle). 

Aye.    I/o. 

B. 

Babble  (nonsensical  discourse).  Low  n6a;  (tale-telling) 
nanivi. 

Babbler  (a  silly  talker) .  Jiena  low  n6a ;  (a  mischief  maker) 
jicoa  fu'cca  c6vi. 

Babe  (of  either  sex).     Tamachi;  bibigi. 

Baboon.  Gncli ;  (they  have  seen  baboons  on  board  ships, 
and  give  them  this  name,  which  is  probably  a  corrup- 
tion of  some  proper  name  by  which  they  have  heard  a 
monkey  called). 

Back  (the  back ;  the  loins).    To6a. 

Backbite  (to  calumniate).    Fu'cca  c6vi. 

Backside.    Oo'chi;  ao6chi;  lemoo. 

Backward  (behind).  Gi  mo6i;  fu'cca  moo'i;  (obstinate) 
pagnati. 

Bad  (in  any  sense).    CCvI. 

Baffle  (to  defeat  a  designer  intention).    Taa'fi. 

Bag  (of  any  sort).    C6to. 

Bait  (for  fish,  or  rats).  Fu'cca  ky ;  (motive,  or  temptation) 
inea  fu'cca  ho'li. 

Bald.    Toofla. 

Bale  (a  large  package).    Co'foo. 

Ball  (cannon  ball).    M6cca  f&nna  fonnoo'a. 

Bamboo.     C6fe. 

Banana.    Fo6ji ;  hopa. 

Bapd.  Naw.  (They  strangled  the  man)  na  norm  ntno-gia  he 
tangafta :  naw,  to  bind,  gfaf  the  throat. 

Bandy  (crooked).  Bico;  bico-bico;  (bandy-legged)  vebico. 

Bang  (to  beat;  to  thrash).    Ta. 

vol.  u.  k 


BEA 

Banter  (to  jest ;  to  ridicule).    Fucca  ho6a. 

Bantling.    Biblgi. 

Barb  (of  an  arrow,  spear,  or  fish-hook).     Manga;  till*. 

Barbarity  (cruelty).    Tai-6fa;  i.  e.  without  love  or  mercy: 

barbarous. 
Barber.    Toofoonga  fy  diva. 
Bare  (naked),    Telefooa;  (from  tele,  to  scrape  clean,  or 

shave;  and Jb6a9  all). 
Barefaced.    T6i  ma  (without  shame). 
Bark  (of  a  tree).    Gili ;  (to  bark,  like  a  dog)  cii6. 
Barren  (applied  to  women,  or  female  animals).    T4i-(kp£w; 

(applied  to  land)  tai-foo'a. 
Barter  (to  exchange;  to  trade).    FuccatoV. 
Bashful  (shamefaced).    Ma ;  (to  be  bashful)  fu/cca  ma. 
Bask.    Fucca  laa ;  (he  basks  in  the  sun)  goo'a  fuJqcatfaia. 
Basket  (of  any  kind).    Cato  j  (a  basket  lor  oil  bottles)  cto 

lolo ;  (a  strong  basket,  made  of  the  husk  of  the  opcosr 

nut,  for  carrying  valuable  things)  cato  c£fsu 
Bat  (the  vesper tilio  vampyrus).     Peca. 
Bathe  (to  swim ;  to  wash  one's  self).    Co'w-coNr;  toofoofoo; 

paloo'too  (to  rince  in  fresh  water,  after  washing  in  set* 

water)  lanoo. 
Battle.    Tow;  (the  time  of  battle)  Udott/nga  he  far;  (the 

front  of  battle)  moo1  a  ht  tow. 
Bawl  (to  squall,  or  scream  out).    Calanga;  (to  call  oat  to 

any  one  loudly)  oo'i. 
Beach  (shore).    Fanga ;  matta  he  tahi. 
Bead.      Coo'la;   (red  beads)   coo'la  coola-coola;   (giee* 

beads)  calanoo'i. 
Beak.    Gnoo'too;  (this  word  also  means  the  mouth  of  man, 

or  any  animal). 
Bear  (to  carry).    Foo'a ;  amo    titggi-taggi ;  imo  fucca  tt- 

foo'a;   fafa,     Vide  these  words  in   their    respective 

places. 


ftEF 

Beard  (of  an  arrow).    Manga ;  taHa  (hair  of  the  cfcio)  cava. 

Beardless.    Fatoola. 

Beat  (to  beat  a  person  with  the  hand,  club,  &c).  Tew  ; 
(to  beat  a  person  with  the  open  hand)  chtbi ;,  (to  beat  a 
person  with  the  fist)  too'gi;  motohi'cv;  (to  beat  a  per- 
son with  a  club)  ta  ;  (to  beat  the  bark  of  the  kUtbo  in 
the  preparation  ofgnmtoo)  tootoo;  (to  conquer,  or  over- 
come in  battle)  no  specific  word ;  for  Voona  beat  Talo9 
tfcey  would  say,  eat  maU/hi  Varna  gi'a  T*h,  Toona 
stronger  than  Talo  :  (.beaten  at  a  game)  ootoongSa. 

Beautiful  (as  a  man :  sometimes  applied  to  trees,  &c, 
phoncally).    Toleccalecca ;  (as  a  wobiab)  idofefooto. 

Because.    Ca. 

Beckon  (to  make  a  sign  to  approach,  wkh  the  hand,  *r  any 
tfcfeg  else).    Tiloo. 

(to  suit).    Alia;  (to  aker,  or  change  to)  no  proper 
W40td  lor;  as,  it  became  rotten,  nai  hopcf,  literally,  it 
rotted, 
(a  mat  to  sleep  on).    Fala ;  (a  bed-pfaoe)  mehlnga. 

Bedaub  (to  besmear).    Pani. 

Bedclothes.  Cafoo.  This  word  is  applied  to  any  takg  to 
cover  one  while  sleeping. 

Bedeck  (to  dress  out  handsomely).    T600. 

Bedew.    Fufcca  haho'w. 

Beetle.    Motaga-mo'nga. 

Befid  (to  happen).    Fold  fit :  (it  happened)  nai  fo'ki  fa. 

Befit  (to  be  suitable).    Alia. 

Before  (in  time).  To-moo'a ;  (in  place,  or  procession)  gi± 
noo%;  moo/a-moofa-ange ;  (in  point  of  rank)  no  pro* 
per  word  for :  Finow  is  higher  in  rank  than  Talo,  nay 
be  tendered  thus,  gotta  igi  ange  FmmgfmTth,  i.  e.  Fi- 
now is  nore  a  chief  than  Tale. 

Befoul  (to  make  black,  or  dirty).    Fu'cca  ocAi. 

h2 


BEL 

Befriend  (to  behave  well  towards;  to  protect).  Fmcca 
lill6  ange ;  fu'cca  cow-tangita. 

Beg  (to  entreat).    C4wle;  (to  beg  pardon)  boo. 

Beget  (to  generate).  No  word  for;  (to  be  begotten  by) 
tooboo;  literally,  to  spring  from. 

Begone !    Aloo !  fiamo'  aloo ! 

Begird  (to  gird  round  the  waist).  Naw ;  (to  encircle  any- 
thing) t£cca-tacky. 

Begrime  (to  make  black,  dirty,  or  sooty).    Fu'cca  oolL 

Behead.    Tootoo'  oo'loo. 

Behest.    Feco'w. 

Behind  (in  place,  or  procession).  Gi-mooi,  mooTnoKxA- 
ange ;  (at  the  back)  gi-too'a. 

Behindhand  (in  time).    Taw  moo*!. 

Behold!  Mam£ta-4ngi !  vacky-6ngi!  jio-ingi!  Afy,  sod 
atoo,  may  also.be  used  as  the  latter  part  of  these  war* 
instead  of  angi,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  be- 
holding.    Vide  My,  atoo,  and  angi. 

Being.  No  word  for.  (Beings  of  this  world)  m6a  mfat; 
(beings  of  the  other  world)  m£a  hotoota. 

Be  it  so.    TWgoo-y-bc. 

Belabour  (to  beat,  or  thrash  a  person).    T6ia. 

Belay  (to  make  fast).  Fu'cca  mow ;  (to  lay  wait  for,  with 
intention  to  kill)  tatdo. 

Believe  (no  direct  word  for).  "  I  believe  it,"  may  be  ren- 
dered thus,  low  gi'ta  cote  mo&rri,  I  say  it  is  true,  or  goo* 
mikfni  my  gi'ate  au,  it  is  true  to  me. 

Bellow  (to  squall,  or  scream  out).    Calanga. 

Bellows.  Tabili  papala'ngi ;  (tabili,  to  blow  the  fire  with  s 
fan). 

Belly  (the  abdomen).    G6te. 

Beloved  (as  a  wife,  or  mistress).  Mama'na;  (valued  mock 
as  a  friend)  o/fa. 


BET 

Below  (under).    Oi  Wo;  gi  hifo:  (inferior  in  dignity)  no 

proper  word  for ;  *•  Talo  is  inferior  in  dignity  to  Finow," 

may  be  rendered  thus :  goo'a  egi  cki  a  Tab  gCa  Fmow ; 

i.  e.  Talo  it  lest  a  chief  than  Finow. 
Belt  (to  go  round  the  wailt).    Naw. 
Bemtre  (to  splash,  or  dirty  with  mud).    Pani  gele. 
Bemoan  (to  moan  over ;  to  beat  the  face  with  grief).   Tan- 

gi  fe  too'gi ;  (to  weep)  tangi. 
Bench  (a  form  to  tit  on).     Hecaanga. 
Bend  (to  bow,  to  make  crooked).  Fircca-bico  ;  fu'cca  bico- 

bfco. 
Beneath   (underneath,   below).      Gi  Mlo;    gi  hifo.     See 

Below. 
Beneficent    A'nga  lille.    "He  is  a  beneficent  man,"  a/e 

tamga'ta  a'nga  hlU  ia. 
Bequeath.    Too'goo. 
Bereave  (to  deprive  of;  to  take  away  by  force).    A've; 

faoo. 
Beseech  (to  beg,  to  request).  Cawle;  (to  entreat  earnestly) 

boo. 
Beahrew  (to  abuse;  to  curse;  to  call  ill  names).    Cabe; 

vangi. 
Beamear  (to  rub  over  with  any  thing).     Pani. 
Besmut  (to  blacken,  or  paint  the  face  for  war).     Lo'a ;  (to 

cover  with  soot,  or  any  black  substance)  fti'cca  ooli. 
(a  broom  of  any  kind).    Tow  falle. 
(to  engage  beforehand).    Taa'fi. 
Bet  (a  wager;  to  lay  a  wager).    Fuccatow;  boo'ta;  (the 

stake)  fu'cca-ky. 
Bethink  (to  recollect ;  to  reflect).    Manatoo. 
Betoken  (to  denote).    Fu'cca  uVnga;  (to  be  the  omen  of) 

ma'na ;  e.  g.  this  lightning  is  ominous  of  some  calamity, 

cor  wutna  malaHa  he  fita-techi 'U  coeat. 
Betray  (to  divulge,  as  a  secret).    Fu'cca  flo'a. 
Between  (betwixt).    Gi  lo'to. 


BLA 

Beverage  (any  thing  to  driok).    Mea  inoo.  - 

Bewilder  (to  confuse  die  understanding ;  to  wander  about). 

Fu'ccahee. 
Beyond  (in  point  of  place).  Mama'ooa'nge ;  (back,  in  point 

of  time)  lo'a. 
Bid  (to  command);    Ta'la;  feoo'w;  (to  offer,  or  propsesi 

price)  fu'cca-toV. 
Bide  (to  dwell).    No'fo;  norfo-no'fo  ;  nono?*. 
Biding  (residence).    Nofoafogft. 
Big  (large).    La/hi ;  (big  with  child)  fete/saa. 
Bigness.    Foo'a. 

Billow  (waive ;  swell  of  the  sea ;  suff  )•    Gnaloo. 
Bind  (to  tie  together).    Naw ;  (to  bind  firmly  witk  rape  or 

sinnet)  le/va-la'va. 
Bird.    Ma'noo. 
Birdlime  (the  gum  of  the  bread-fruit  tree,  used  to 

with).    Boo'loo* 
Birth  (the  act  of  bringing  forth  young).     FanoNr. 
Bisect  (to  cut  in  two).    Fu'cca  oo'a;  (to  cut  in  two 

parts)  h61e  oo'a  malie. 
Bit  (a  piece).    Co'nga;  (a  small  bit  or  crumb) 

(bitten)  oochia. 
Bitch.     Goo'li  fafine. 

Bite  (to  bite).    Oo/-oo;  (a  mouthful)  matogsw 
Bitter  (to  the  taste)*    Ca'wna;  (in  a  moral  sense) 
Black  (in  colour).    Ooli-oo'li  r  (dirty)  ooli. 
Blacken  (to  cover  with  black).     Fu'cca  ooli;  (to 

black)  too'goo  oo'li. 
Bladder  (the  bladder  of  urine).    Ta'nga  mimi ;  (die  gall- 
bladder) they  have  a  particular  name  for  this,  but  it  ■ 

forgotten. 
Blanch  (to  whiten).    Fu'cca  hina  himv;  (to  bleach  in  the 

sun)  fu'cca  la'a. 
Blade  (of  a  knife).    Low  hcle ;  (of  grass)  low  mohoo'goo. 


Blank  (clean;  white).    Ma;  (without  prne  or  profit)  tai 

aoofaga. 
Blast  (of  wind).    Havili;  (a  blight)  mahoo'iioo;  (a  curse) 

va'oge;  ca'be. 
Bias*  (of  flame).    0<A<r;  (of  light)  gulgnila. 
Bleach  (to  whiten  in  the  sun).    Fu'cca  mnahe  lat ;  fu'cca 

krtL 

Bleak  (with  wind,  or  weather);    Momofo>. 

Blend  (to  mix  as  fluids).    Pa'loo ;  (to  flrix,  as  soil  solids) 

mrtbo. 
Bless  (or  wish  prosperous).    Fu'cca  mo'oonoo. 
BHjgftS  (to  wither  op,  or  destroy  vegetation  by  wind  or  sun). 

Mahoonnoo. 
■Kid*    Goof:  (to  make  blind  by  depriving  of  sight)  fucca 

gotf;  (to  cover  the  eyes)  fucca  boo!6» 
Btindfatt.    Fufccaboel6. 
link  (to*  twifckle  the  eyes,  to  wink  intentionally).    Nisi. 
(happiness).    Mono6ia ;  (blissful)  the  same. 
(tv  grow  puffy,  bloated).    Foofo6la. 
Block  (of  wood  or  of  any  thing  else).     Toontngtf ;  (a  stupid 

Mow?  tangftta  tile. 
Blockish  (in  a  stupid  way).    M&tta  vaKa. 
Blood  (sanguineous  fluid).   T&wto. 
Bloody.    Ptf nt  tafwro ;  ttwto-tlwto. 
Blooflt  (of  fruit).    Fo6e. 
Blow  (a  stroke  with  the  fist  onTy%  Motohfco;(withac!ub, 

lie.)  t*. 
Blow  (with  the  breath) .    Iti. 
Blow  (the  nose) .    F£ngo-fango. 

Blow  (to,  with  force  any  thing  out  of  the  mouth).    Bo6hi. 
Blowzy  (red  with  the  sun).    Gnino. 
Blabber  (of  a  fish  or  fat  of  any  animal ) .    Gn*co. 
Blunder  (a  stupid1  mistake,  an  accidents!  error).      Hflhu 
Blunt  (obtuse).    Pecoo  (to  make  blunt)  fu'cca  pecoo. 
Blusterous  (noisy).    Long6a. 


Boar.    Booaca  tangata. 

Board  (of  wood).    Lour  pa^pa ;  (diet)  men  ky. 

Boast.    Fo6ta. 

Boat  (small  canoe).    V4ca  ftccatoo. 

Body  (of  an  animal  or  of  a  tree).  Chi'no ;  (a  body  of  men) 
toonga  tangata. 

Boil  (to  boil  over  the  fire).  Tootoo ;  (an  inflammation  in  the 
skin)  vaca  fawha ;  hotooa. 

Bold  (brave).    T6a;  tai  manavahl;  (impudent)  tai-ma. 

Boldness  (bravery).  Toa;  (impudence)  tai->ma ;  (imperti- 
nence) talahooi. 

Bolt  (fastening  of  a  door),  Tabooni ;  (to  swallow  whole)  ftlo 
tefooa ;  (on  a  sudden)  fo*ki-ra. 

Both.  To'cca-oo'a  (used  only  in  the  third  person ;  as,  they 
both  went) :  gi-mo'ooa,  used  in  speaking  to  one  of  the 
parties ;  as,  "  you  both  go :'.'  gi-mowooa,  used  when 
one's  self  and  a  third  person  are  included,  the  person 
spoken  to  not  being  included:  as,  "  Finow  and  I  will 
both  go,  but  you  may  stay :"  gi-no'wooa,  used  when 
speaking  of  two  other  persons;  as,  "  they  both  went:0 
gito'wooa,  used  when  the  person  spoken  to  is  included ; 
as,  "  you  and  I  will  boik  go." 

Bowsprit.    F6nna  toco' to. 

Bowstring  (either  of  a  war  bow  or  sporting  bow).     Qofee. 

Born  (to  be  born).  Fano'w ;  (first  born)  no  word  for;  (eldest 
brother  or  sister)  towgete. 

Box  (a  trunk  or  chest).    Bocba ;  (to  fight  with  fiats)  footao. 

Boxer.    Jiena  fa  foo'hoo. 

Boy  (a  little  boy).    Tamachi';  (scarcely  a  man),  the  same. 

Boyish.    Fucca  tamachi'. 

Bowl.    Goom6te  (their  bowls  are  made  of  tofe-wood). 

Brace  (to  tie  or  bind).  Naw ;  (a  couple)  oofe. 

Bracelet  (for  the  arms  or  legs).  Vesa.     This  is  a  Fiji  word. 

Brackish  (bitter).  Catena;  (like  sea-water  in  taste)  tabis 
tfhi.  *n 


BRO 

Brag.    Fi'a  lahi,  foote. 

Braid  (to  ornament  or  plait  the  hair).    FafStoo. 

Brains.    Ooto ;  (good  sense)  lo'to  boto. 

Brainless  (foolish).    Vale ;  (without  the  brains)  tfci  ooto. 

Brave  (courageous).    To' a. 

Break  (or  snap  asunder).    F6tchi. 

—  (to  pieces,  or  to  crack).    Fob.     F6a  is  also  used  to 

the  head,  to  expreas  the  cutting  or  wounding  of  it  at 

certain  ceremonies ;  as  F6a  ooloo. 
Breakfast.    Ky  tM/ngi-botogi. 

Breast  (of  either  sex).    Hoolioo ;  (the  chest)  fotafata. 
Breath.    Manava. 

Breathless  (short  of  breath).  Tai  manava ;  h61a ;  (dead)  mite. 
Breech  (buttocks).  Oo'chi;  16moo;  (breach  in  a  wall,  fencing, 

Arc.)  a'va. 
Breed  (as  animals).    Fano'w ;  to  cultivate  the  breed  of  any 

thing)  fafa'nga. 
Breexe.    Havilivfli. 

Brethren.    Cow  tehi'na ;  (the  elder  brother)  towg6te. 
Bright  (polished).    Gnigni'la ;  (clear  headed)  matta-bo'to. 
Brimful.    Bi'to. 
Brilliant  (shining).    Gnignfla. 

(to  bear  or  carry).    Omi',  om/;  (to  produce  or  bring 

forth)  tooT>oo. 
(edge  of  the  water,  &c.)     Malta. 
Brisk  (quick  in  motion).    Va've. 
Brittle.    Fetch i  gnofoCa ;  i.  e.  easy  to  break. 
Broad  (expansive).    Low  larhi :  a  broad  plank,  he  lov-pcpa 

Ian  Idhi. 
Broil  (on  hot  embers).    Too'noo. 
Brood  (as  hen  birds).    MoTie:  (to  brood  over,  to  reflect 

upon)  mana'too-na'too. 
Brook  (rivulet).    Vy-ta'fe;   (to  put  up  with,  to  endure) 

catafgi. 
Broom.    Tow-falle. 


BY 

Broth  (fish  broth  or  soup).    Vy-hoc. 

Brother.    Tenia*;  (the  elder  brother)1  fowge'ee. 

Brow  (eye-brow).    Fooftoo  he  matta:  (brow  of  a  kffl) 

famsja  udWhga. 
Brown  (colour).    M6II0 ;  (to  brown  by  the  fire)  tocfoo*  ger 

pa'coo. 
Bubby.    Heolioo. 
Bubo  (ft  suppuration  of  the  glands,  particularly  of  the  groin, 

neck,  and  armpits).     Cattf. 
Bud  (of  a  flower;  also  to  bring  forth  bods).    Too'boa* 
Budge  (to  rise  up  or  move  away).    1W-40. 
Buffet  (to  beat  or  knock  about).    T6ia. 
Build  (a  house).    Langs?  (a  canoe)  fo;  fbw. 
Balk  (the  whole).    Cotcfe. 
Bump  (a  rise  or  swelling).     Foola. 
Bundle  (parcel).    Carengtf. 
Bung  (a  cork  or  stopple;  also  to  bung  or  close  up  the 

mouth  of  any  vessel).     Oomo'chi. 
Burden.    Cave'nga  ;  (to  load  with  a  burden)  fa'oo. 
Burial  (funeral  rites).    Boo'too. 
Burn.     Too'too;  v61a. 
Burnish  (to  make  bright).     Ftfcea  gnignila. 
Burst  (to  splits  to  crack) .    Fo'a. 

Bury  (to  bury  a  corpse  or  any  thing  in  the  ground  ).     Taboo. 
Bush.    Va'oo. 
Buss.    Oo'ma. 
Butterfly.    Pepe. 
Buttock  (a  joint  of  pork  consisting  of  the  lower  part  of  the 

back  and  the  tail).    Too'nga  i'goo. 
Buttocks.    Oochi;  aoochi;  lemoo. 
By-word.    Cana'nga. 
By-and-by.    An/. 
By-day.    Aho-a'nge. 
By-night.     Bo  -oolia'nge. 


CAP    % 

C. 

^Cafein.    Am*. 

Cable.    To'wla. 

Cage.    Falle-ma'noo,  (from /(tile  a  house,  metnoo  a  bird.) 

Cajole  (to  wheedle,  to  flatter).    Fu'cea-ry. 

Calculate.    Low. 

Calculous  (stony).     Ma'cca-ma'cca. 

Cauldron  (any  thing  to  boil  fluids  in).    Croofo. 

Calf  (of  the  leg).    Fci  va'e. 

Call  (to  call  out  to  any  one).    Oo1. 

Callous  (hard).    Feffca ;  (hard-hearted)  ta/i  cfk. 

Callow  (unfledged).    Telefoo'a ;  ta1  fboloo  fooloo. 

Calm  (stillness  of  wind).    Totfoo  ;  (to  calm  or  appease  the 

crying  of  a  child)  fu'eca-na. 
Calumniate.    Fu'cca  co  vi. 
Campestral  (growing  wild).    TWboo  vatoo. 
Can  (to  be  able).   Fa.   The  sign  of  the  future  tense  is  often* 

used  to  express  this  idea.    See  Grammar. 
Candent  (hot),    vela. 
Candid  (open,  sincere).    Toto'no*. 
Cane  (sugar  cane).    Taw. 
Csteine.    Fu'cca  gooli. 
Cannibal.    Fekk/ ;  ky  tanga/ta. 
Cannon.    Fa'nna  fonnoofa ;  from  fd***f  to  shoot,  and  /on- 

sWsf  the  tend :  from  a  notion  thai  guns  were  made  to 

destroy  land  rather  than  men. 
Csfnoe.    Va'ca;  (a  double  sailing  eanoe)  tongfo'gf;  eaKa; 

(a  single  sailing  canoe)  ha'raatefoo'a ;  (a  paddling  canoe) 

tafafnga ;  (a  paddling  cano**  ***  bnitt>  btft  consisting 

of  a  trunk  of  a  tree  hollowed  out)  bopara. 
Cant  (gibberish).     Co'te. 
Cap.    Boolo'nga. 
Capable.    Fa  teia,  (from/0,  to  be  able;  /cirf,  to  do;  from 

fe%  to  do,  ia  it). 


CAT 

Capacioui  (wide,  expansive).    A  to'. 

Cape.    Mool  fonnoo'a,  (from  moo'i,  end  or  extremity,  aid 
fonnooa,  land). 

Caper  (to  jump).    Hc/bo. 

Capital  (excellent).    Lille'  obito. 

Capricious  (subject  to  whim).    Ta'i  lo'to  mow;  i.  e.  with* 
out  a  fixed  mind. 

Captive.    Boboola. 

Carbuncle  (or  rather  a  boil  or  any  inflamed  tumour  in  the 
skin).    Foo'a-foo'a. 

Caress  (to  fondle).    Fu'cca  o'fa. 

Carcass'  (a  dead  man).    Tangata  ma'te;   (a  dead  hog) 
•    booa'ca  ma'te,  &c 

Careful  (cautious).    Va'cca  Tacky* ;  (full  of  care  and  con- 
cern) raana'too-na'too. 

Careless.    Tai-vacky'. 

Carious  (rotten).     Bo'po. 

Carnage.    Ma'te. 

Carneous  (fleshy,  plump).     Chi'no  gna'co. 

Carpenter.    Toofoo'nga.  ta'-ta'. 

Carry.     Foo'a ;  i.  e.  to  carry  on  the  shoulder  simply. 

A'mo ;    to  carry  on  a  stick  between  two  men's 

shoulders. 
Ta'ggi-ta'ggi ;  to  carry  m  the  hand. 
A'mo  fu'cca  tefoo'a ;  to  carry  on  a  stick  retting  oa 
the  shoulder. 

Carre  (to  cut  wood  or  stone).     Tongi ;  (to  cut  meat)  tatia. 

Case  (a  sheath).    Y-auga. 

Cast  (to  throw  away)  chia'gi;  (to  cast  a  look)  jio. 

Casting-net.    Cob6nga  chili. 

Castrate.     Bo'ca. 

Casual  (accidental).     Fy'fy'beaho'w ;  no'a. 

Cat.    Boom  :  (it  is  conjectured  this  word  is  derived  from 
the  English,  putty.) 


CHA 

Catch  (to  seize  any  thing).    Mow;  boo'ge ;  (to  catch  as  a 

baH)  haT>o ;  (to  catch  a  disorder)  bihi'a. 
Cater  (to  provide  victuals,  to  feed).    Fafa'nga. 
Cave  (or  cavern).     Ana. 
Cavil  (to  dispute,  to  argue).    Fu'cca  gigiliL 
Cautious.    Vs/cca-vacky. 
Cease  (to  leave  off,  to  discontinue).    Too'goo. 
Ceaseless.    Ta'i  too'goo. 
Cecity  (blindness).     Goo'i. 
Celerity  (speed  of  foot).    Ve  vafve. 
Cement  (any  thing  sticky).    Fu'cca  bi'gi:  (the  gum  of  the 

bread-fruit  tree,  with  which  they  cement  their  canoes) 

boo'loo. 
Centre.     Gi  lo'to. 
Certify  (to  relate,  to  tell).    Ta'la;   (to  declare  by  oath) 

fotfa  ca'va. 
Chafe  (to  rub).     Holo'i;  mi'li. 

Chain.    Oocurae'a  filii.     Ooc*meay  metal ;  J?hi,  entangled. 
Chair.    Nofo'a. 

Challenge  (in  war,  or  at  a  game).     Taafi. 
Champ.    Gena ;  lamoo. 
Cfcance  (to  happen  without  intention,  unexpectedly).  How 

noa. 
Chanael  (a  road  or  entrance).    Hilla. 
Charcoal.    Malala. 
Charge  (to  command).     Boole ;  (a  commission  or  message) 

fecow. 
Chark  (to  burn  to  a  cinder).    Tootoo  malala. 
Chase  (to  pursue).    T06I1 ;  (to  hunt)  alo. 
Cat-fish.    F6kke. 

Chat  (familiar  conversation).    Talanoa. 
Chatter  (to  talk  gibberish  like  a  parrot  or  child,  without 

meaning).    C6te. 


CIC 

i 

Chawdron  (entrails).    Gnacow. 

Check.    TaSfi. 

Cheek.    Cowahe. 

Cherup  (as  birds).    Gi ;  (to  imitate  the  ntise  of  bJrib  or 

rats)  fu'cca-gi. 
Chest  (a  box).    Booha ;  (the  thorax)  fata-ftta. 
Chew.    Lamoo. 
Chicken.     Oohigi  m6a. 
Chide.    Tow-tea. 
Chief  (a  noble).     Egi ;  (chief  of  a  district  or  island)  teai; 

(supreme  chief  or  king)  how. 
Child  (an  infant).    Bibi'gi;  (a  child  above  two  #r  4kree 

years  old ;  a  youth)  tamachi'. 
Child-bed.     Fan6w. 
Childish*    Fu'cca  tamachK 
Childless.    T&i  fano'w. 
Children  (offspring).     Fano'w. 
Chilliness  (shivering).    T6te-t6te. 
Chin.     Coo/raoo-coo/moo. 
Chine.    Hoo'i-toota. 
Chirp  (as  a  bird).     Gi. 

Chisel  (any  sort  of  chisel  either  of  stone  or  iron).    Taotow* 
Chitterlings  (entrails).    Gnactfw. 
Choice.     Fi'li :  this  word  also  means  an  adversary ; 

at  public  games  of  wrestling,  fighting  with  chibe, 

a  man  singles  out  or  chooses  his  adversary. 
Choler  (anger).     LMi ;   i'ta:   (they  calmed  his  pttfCj) 

nvwjvfcta  toc/goo  enne  fta. 
Choose.    Fi'li-fili. 

Chronic  (for  a  long  time).     Foo  lo'a. 
Cicatrix  (of  a  wound  in  battle,  or  with  a  warlike 

ment).    Uo'nga  cafib ;  (of  any  other  kind  of  wovnd) 

patoo. 


Cicurate  (to  tame  or  make  mild).    Ftfcca  Uta;  fu'cca  la- 
lata. 

Cinder.    Malala. 

Cion  (a  sprout,  a  shoot).    Hoo'li. 

Circumcise.    TeTe :  (consisting  in  a  longitudinal  incision  of 
the  praeputium). 

Circumvest  (to  surround).    Foli. 

Clack  (to  talk  much).    Fa'-io'w. 

Clamber  (to  climb  with  difficulty).     C6ca  gnata. 

Clammy  (any  thing  sticky).    Bi'gi-bi'gi. 

Clamour  (uproar).    Longod. 

Clan  (party,  tribe,  or  relation).    Kyi'nga. 

Clap  (with  the  hands  wide  open).    Pachi ;  (to  clap  with 
the  hands  hollow)  foo ;  (to  slap  a  person)  chiti, 

Clash  (to  quarrel).    Gigi'hi;  (as  bodies  meeting  with  con- 
cussion) pagi'a. 

Clay.    Omea. 

Clean  (cleanly,  free  from  dirt).    Ma. 

Clear  (transparent).    Ma;  (plain,  evident)  toto'noo. 

Cleave  to  (to  stick  to).    Bi'gL 

Clever  (in  mental  power).     Bo'to. 

Cliff  (a  rock).    Mdcca. 

Climb.     C6ca. 

Clime  (region  or  country).    Fonnoofa. 

Clinch  (to  hold  fast).    Boo'ge  mow ;  (to  clinch  the  fist) 
coo'goo. 

Clink.     Tat&ngi. 

Close  (to  shut).    Maboo'ni ;  taboo'ni j  boobootaoo. 

Clothes  (wearing  apparel).    M6a  v£la;  (European  dress) 
co'foo. 

Cloud.    A'oo. 

Cloudless  (clear  sky).     L6ngi-m£. 

Cloudy.    La'ngi-ooQi. 

Cloy  (or  satiate,  to  have  enough  of).    Fl'oo. 


COM 

dab.  Acotw-W.  They  ba?e  different  sorts  of  clubs  ex* 
pressed  by  the  names  of  foe/*,  ckicotof,  wtackincfvoa, 
maita'y  ck?bi>  ma'ta'~goo'li-goullit  bwggi-btiggi. 

Clutch  (to  seize  hold  of).    Boo'ge.; 

Coalesce.    Fu'cca  ta'ha. 

Coast.    Matta  fonnoo'a ;  i.  e.  the  edge  of  the  land. 

Coax  (to  wheedle,  to  flatter).    Lalbooa/nge. 

Cob-web.  Matta-ma'tta-cob6nga ;  i.  e.  a  net-like  appear- 
ance. 

Cockle.    Calo/a. 

Cockchafer  (any  insect  of  the  beetle  kind).  Mo'nga-mcnga. 

Cocoa  (the  tree  or  the  nut).  Nroo;  (cocoa-nut  shefl) 
gn6dji-ni'oo. 

Coction  (boiling).    Too/too ;  (digesting  or  soaking  in 
water)  fu'cca  vy  mafa'na. 

Co-equal  (in  rank  or  power).    Tatto*w. 

Coffin.    Fonnoo'a  lo'to :  (this  phrase  rather  means  a 

vault ;  for  they  have  no  coffins,  but  they  would  call  a 
coffin  by  this  name). 

Cognation  (kindred).    Kyi'nga. 

Cohabit  (to  dwell  with  another).  Nono'fo ;  (to  live  in  sex- 
ual intercourse)  fea 'ooa'gi. 

Cohere.    Bi'gi. 

Coil.    Fu'cca  tacky*. 

Coition.    Fei'chi;  momo'he. 

Cold  (chilliness  of  the  body,  coldness  of  the  air).   Momofc*. 

Collect  (to  gather  together).    Tana'gi. 

Colour :  no  word  but  that  for  appearance,  (Matta). 

Comb.     Heloo. 

Combat.    Tow. 

Come.    How. 

Comical.    Gnoo'too  boo 'a. 

Coming.    T6-ho'w. 

Command.     Boole. 


CON 

Commix  (as  fluids).     Pa'ioo;  (as  soft  solids)  na'too. 
Common  (low,  vulgar).    Fu'cca  too/a :  (waste  land)  twa'wfa. 
Commune  (to  converse).    Talan6a. 
Communicate.    Fu'cca  il6a. 
•    Commute  (to  exchange).    Fu'cca  tcV. 
Compact  (close,  fixed,  tight).    Mow. 
Companion   (male  companion  or  friend).     Cow-tanga'ta ; 

(female  companion  or  friend)  cow-fafine. 
Compare  (to  collate).    Fucca  tatto'w. 
Compatriot.    Fonnoo'a  taha:   (they  are  of  one  country) 

goo'a  now  fonnoo'a  ta'ha. 
Compensate.    Fu'cca  matoo. 
Competition  (rivalship).    Fya'nga;  filia'nga. 
Complain  (to  murmur,  also  to  lament).    Ta'ngi. 
Complete  (perfect).    Cotofe ;  o'chi :  (to  end  or  finish)  fu'cca 

o'chi;  fu'cca  cot6a. 
Complex.     Fygnata'. 
Complexion   (colour  of  countenance,  appearance  of  any 

thing).    Ma'tta. 
Compress  (to  squeeze  out  as  a  sponge).     Tow-tow. 
Computation  (reckoning).    Low. 
.  Comrade.     Cow  tanga'ta. 
Conceal  (to  hide).     FoofoC. 

Conceit  (vanity).    Fi%  fi'a.  %  ' . 

Conch.    Gelea ;  (sound  t*he  conch)  i'Ji  he  gcUfa. 
Concision.     Hehe'le. 
Conclude  (to  make  an  end).    Fu'cca  o'chi;  (to  resolve  or 

come  to  a  determination)  belie. 
Conclusion  (end).     Moo'i;  (determination)  bene. 
Concur.    Lo'to  ta'ha;  i.  e.  to  be  of  one  mind. 
Conduct  (to  lead  along,  to  accompany).     A've. 
Conformity   (agreement).     Ttotto'w  a'nge :    (there  .  was  a 
vol.  ir.  i 


CON 

conformity  in  their  disposition)  nafi  ialttfw  4*g*  mm 

Wto. 
Conger-eel.    To'ge. 
Congreet  (to  salute  mutually).    Feki'ta. 
Conjecture  (to  guess).    Fili ;  ma'te. 
Connate  (born  with  another).    Fanofw  fu'cca  ttfha ;  (twin*) 

fa'now  oo'a. 
Connect.    Fu'cca  ta'ha. 
Consciousness.    Mana'too. 
Consecrated.    Fu'cca  6gu 
Consider  (to  think,  to  reflect  upon).     Manaftoe. 
Consociate  (a  male  friend ) .    Cow.  tanga'ta ;  (a  female  Mead) 

cow  fafi'ne  ;•  (a  companion  of  either  sex)  cow  nolo* 
Consort  (the  wife  of  a  chief).    Chini'fo. 
Constant  (fixed  to  the  same  spot).     Mow ;  (constant  b 

mind)  Jpfto  mow. 
Consternation.    Ma'navachi' ;  i.  e.  having  the  breath  Utile. 
Construct  (to  make,  to  build).    Langa. 
Consume  (to  waste,  to  spoil).    Mowmo'w:  (to  decrease) 

fu'cca-chi. 
Consumption  (phthisis  pulmonalis;  any  wasting  of  the  body). 

Momo'co. 
Contabulate  (to  floor  with  boards).     Fali'gi  low  pa'pa* 
Contagion.    Maha'gi  bihi'a ;  (contagious)  bihia. 
Content.    Lata. 
Contest.     Ghe. 

Contingent  (accidental,  uncertain).    How  noto. 
Continual.     Tai  too  goo ;  i.  e.  without  ceasing. 
Contort  (to  twist,  to  writhe  about.)     Mio'i. 
Contradict.     Gigi'hi. 
Contrarily  (in  a  different  manner).     GeTie  ge*he;  (tram- 

versely)  fu'cca  feto'wlagi  j  (contrary)  ge'he. 
Controversy  (dispute).    Fege'. 
Convalescence  (state  of  returning  health).    Mood. 


Ct)U 

Conversation.    Talano'a. 

Convey  (to  carry).     A've ;  (to  lead  along)  ta'ggi-ta'ggi. 

Convocate  (to  call  the  people  together):    Tanafgi. 

Convolve  (to**%4og£ther,  to  turn).    Tacky'. 

Convoluted  (twisted,  plaited).    Fi. 

Cook  (to  prepare  food).    FeHK/moo.     (Fe  corruption  offy, 

to  do  or  make,  and  oJmoo  victuals). 
Cook.    Tanga'ta  feoo'moo. 
Cool.    Fu'cca  momo'co. 
Coolness.    Mo'co  mo'co. 
Copious  (abundant).    Lalii. 

Copper.    Oocume'a  coola.     (OocumJu,  metal ;  coo  la,  red). 
Copulation.    Fefchi;  momo'he. 
Cord.    Mya. 

Cordage  (rigging  of  a  vessel).    Coir  mya. 
Core  (inner  part  of  fruit).     Toonga. 
Cork  (a  stopple  of  any  sort,  also  to  cork  up).    Oomo'chi. 
Corpse.    Ma'te:    (of  a  man)   tanga'ta  ma'te;  (of  a  hog) 

booaca  ma'te,  &c. 
Corpulent.    Chi'no  la'hi. 
Corruption    (rottenness).      Bo'po :    (putridity)   61o;    cho: 

(pus)  b61a. 
Cotton.    Moachfbo. 
Cove  (a  creek).     A'va. 
Cover  (to  put  something  over),   Oo'fi-oo'fi ;  (to  copulate  as 

quadrupeds)  f6ichi ;  (a  coverlid)  ca'foo. 
Covet  (to  wish  for).    Ha'mo. 
Count  (to  calculate).    Low. 
Counterchange  (to  barter).    Fuccatcw. 
Country   (land  or  clime).     Fonnox/a:    (in  opposition  to 

town  or  the  mo&a)  too'goo  oo'ta.  ' 

Courage.    Loto  to'a  ;  i.  e.  a  brave  mind :  (courageous)  to/a. 
C  ousin  ( of  either  sex ) .    Tocachroa. 

i  2 


.      ~m  .     mm  .    _Jk  ' *_.    -._.    *# 


CRO 

Cowardice.     Fo'i. 

Coy  (bashful)^.,    Ma. 

Crab  (fish).     Kevi'gi:  (to  walk  like  ft  crab)  aioo  foot* 

kevi'gi.  ^ 

Crabbed  (sour,  illnatured).    A'nga  ccvi. 
Crack   (a  rent  or  figure).      Mafa';    ma&'hi;  (to  crack) 

fetcbi. 
Cragged  (rocky,  stony,  rough).    Ma'cca  ma'cca:  (a  craggy 

road)  ha'lla  papa'ta. 
Crane  (the  bird  so  called).     Gi'oo. 
Crash,  (to  break  to  pieces).    Ly'igi :  (a  peculiar  loud  sod- 
den noise)  pagi'a. 
Crave  (to  ask  pardon,  to  intreat  with  earnestness).    Hooj 

(to  beg,  to  request)  caw'le ;  (to  crave  after  food)  fito-kj. 
Craw  (stomach).    G6te. 
Craw-fish.    Oo'-o. 
Crawl  ^as  an  insect).    Totolo :  (tp  walk  slowly)  aloo  fi/cca 

toto'ca. 
Crazy  (split,  cracked).     Falii  faTii;  (insane)  vale. 
Cxease  (tp  mark  by  folding)..    Fucca  ilo/nga;  (a  crease,  a 

mark)  ilonga. 
Creep  (as  an  insect).    Totoio :  (to  wall$, slowly)  aloo  fu'cct 

tot^ca. 
Crevice.    A'va. 

.  Crew  (the  people  of  a  canoe  or  ship).     Cow  va'ca. 
Crimp  (crisp).     Pa'coo. 
Cripple  (lame  of  foot)  ve  hal>e ;  (lame  in  the  hand  or  arm) 

ni'ma  ha'be. 
Crisp.     Pa'coo. 
Crook  (a  long  hooked  stick  used  to  gather  bread-fruit,  &c) 

Lo'hoo. 
Crooked  (bent,  twisted).    Bi'co. 

Cross  (to  meet  transversely).    Fu'cca  feto*wla'gi :   (surly) 
loto  ha. 


:m;  cut 

Crossness  (sulky  obstinacy).    Parngo ;  (surliness  of  temper) 

lo'to  i'ta. 
Crouch  (to  stoop  the  body).    Hoo  hi'fo ;  boono*. 
Crow  (to  crow  as  a  cock).    Oo'-o;  (to  swagger,  to  boast) 

fucca  boola  matta ;  fucca  malo/hi. 
Crude   (unripe).     Ta'i  momo'ho;   (imperfect,  unfinished) 

Ta'io'chi. 
Cruel  (severe  and  unjust).    Ta'i  o'fa ;  i.  e.  without  love  or 

mercy. 
Crumb  (a  morsel).    Momon  mea. 
Crumble  (to  reduce  to  small  pieces).    Mo'chi  mo'chi. 
Cry  (to  call  after).  Ool ;  (to  cry  out  with  pain)  o'i ;  (to  weep) 

ta'ngi ;  (to  cry  out  loudly  from  any  cause)  calauga. 
Culinary  (belonging  to  cooking).    M6a  fe  oo'moo. 
Cull  (to  pick,  to  choose).    Fill ;  (to  pluck  flowers,  fruit, 

&c.)  toli. 
Cultivate  (as  in  agriculture).    Hoo  o ;  gnofooe. 
Cumulate  (to  heap  up).    Tana'gi.     , 
Cup  (a  vessel  to  drink  out  of,  made  of  the  shell  of  the  co- 

coa-nut).    I1)oo :  (made  of  plantain  or  banana  leaves) 

beloo. 
Curb  (to  check  or  restrain  the  temper).    Ta'afi. 
Cure  (to  remedy  a  disease).    Taw. 
Curl  (or  to  fold  up).     Fafa'too. 

Curse  (a  malevolent  wish).    Cabe;  (a  string  of  foul  lan- 
guage) va'nge. 
Cursory  (slight,  superficial)*    Fu'cca  vwe. 
Curtain  (a  skreen  of  any  kind).    Boo'i-boo'i. 
Curve  (to  bend  in  any  way).    Fucca  bico:  (curved,  bent) 

bico. 
Cut  (with  a  knife).    Hfie;  tarfa;  (to  cut  with  sciasars) 

co'chi. 
Cut  (to  cut,  a  cut).    Mata'fa;  Ufa;  mah&e. 


t      a    ,'    ;  ■ . 
..•V*' 
¥*•*        V." 


*<*» 


DEC 


D. 


Daily  (by  day,  day  after  day).    Ahowngebe. 

Dale  (valley ).    Loo^o.  ] 

Damage  (to  injure,  to  spoil).    Mo'wmo'w. 

Damp  (with  water  or  any  thing  else).    Vi'coo. 

Dance  (any  kind  of  dance).    Me'e. 

Dank  (wet).    Vivi'cob. 

Daring  (bold,  courageous).    Mana'va  lain. 

Dark  (wanting  light).   '  Bo-ooli;   (dark  in  colour)  oofi; 

ooli-ooli. 
Dart  (a  spear).    Ta'o;  (to  pass  quickly)  boo'na;  literally, 

to  fly. 
Dastardly.     Fo'i. 
Daub  (to  smear  or  paint  with  any  thing).    Pa'ni ;  (to  mitt 

foul  or  dirty)  pa'ni-oo'li. 
Daughter.     Faii'ue. 

Dauntless.     Ta'i  ma'navachi ;  tal  ma'navahe';  too* 
Dawn  (of  day).     H£ngi  hfingi. 
Day  (day-time,  day-light).     Alio;   (a  day)  bo;  (upon  s 

day)  he  a' ho ;  (to-day)  he  alio  coe'ni. 
Day-light.     A'ho. 

Dead  (deceased ;  also  withered  as  plants).    Ma'te. 
Deaf.     Toolli. 
Deal  (to  share  out).    Toofa. 

Dearth  (scarcity,  famine).     Houge.     (See  Famine). 
Debase  (to  render  bad  or  impure ;  to  lessen  or  degrade). 

Ftfcca  co'vi j  (to  render  low  and  unworthy)  ftrcca  teofe 
Debate  (to  dispute).    Gigitii ;  (to  consider  within  oneself) 

mana'too-na'too. 
Debility  (want  of  bodily  strength).     Vy'-vy';  i.  e.  watery, 

or  like  water. 
Decapitate.    Too  oo'Ioo. 
Deceit  (imposition  of  any  kind).    Ca'ca'. 


DEL 

» 

Deceitful.    Lo'to  o&a ;  i.  e.  having  a  double  mind. 

Deck  (to  ornament).  T600 ;   (deck  of  a  vessel)  fbon'ga  va'ce. 

Declaim  (to  harangue,  to  speak  in  public).    Boole;  fo'ao; 

malanga. 
Declivity  (a  steep,  a  descent,  side  of  a  bill).    Hifoamga. 
Decoct   (to  boil).    Too'too;  (to  digest  in  warm  water) 

fu'cca- vy  maiaiia* 
Decorate  (to  ornament  m  any  way).    T6oo. 
Decoy  (to  ensnare  or  entrap  as  birds).    Htle. 
Decrease  {to  grow  less  in  bulk,  to  lessen).    Fu'cca  chi'-chk. 
Decrepit  (with  age).    Vy'  rf  motoo'a ;  (lame  of  foot)  g&oo. 
Deed  (any  act  or  doing).    F/gna  mea. 
Deep  <io  descent  as  water).    Loio'to;  (the  sea)  mooafaa*  > 
Defame  (to  destroy  reputation).    Fu'cca  oo'vi ;  1.  e«  to  make 

bad. 
Defeature  (a  change  of  look  or  feature).    Ma'tta  g£ke. 
Defecate  (to  make  pure  or  clean).    Fu'cca  ma. 
Defence  (the  act  of  guarding).    L60;  fea'oo. 
Defer  (to  put  off  for  a  time).    Lolo'mi. 
Define  (to  explain  or  make  clear).  -  Fu'cca  nuroo. 
Deflower  (to  ravish).    To'ho  tolio ;  i  e.  to  drag  by  force. 
Defunct.    Ma'te. 

Deity  (any  god  or  spirit  Or  supernatural  being).    Hotoo*. 
Delate  (to  carry,  to  bear).    A've. 
Degrade  (to  make  low  or  reduce  in  rank).    Fifcca  too'a; 

(to  reduce  in  merit)  fu'cca  cori. 
Delay  (to  linger).    Too'goo;  (to  put  off  for  a  time)  lolowi. 
Deliberate  (to  oonaider  within  oneself).    Fi1i  loto ;  i.  e.  to 

search  the  mind. 
Delight  (great  mental  enjoyment).    Fi'a  fi'a;  (pleasures  of 

the  senses)  ma)£ca. 
Delirious  (from  fever  or  disease).    Vale. 
Deliver  (to  give  up).      Angi,  myt  a'too ;  which  see  sepa- 
rately :  (to  deliver  a  woman)  fu'cca  fano'w. 


DES 

Dell  (pit  or  valley).    Loo7-*). 

Delude  (to  deceive  by  false  report).    Lo1ii*gt. 

Demand  (a  message,  an  order).  Feco'w ;  (to  demand  or  ask) 

ca'wle. 
Demolish  (to  destroy).    Fu'cca  o'chi;  raoVmo'w;  (to  eat 

up  or  devour)  ge'na. 
Demon.    Hotoo'a  pow ;  i.  e.  a  mischievous  god. 
Demonstrate  (to  make  clear,  to  prove).    Fu'cca  tofaoo. 
Den  (cavern,  cabin  of  a  ship).    A'na. 
Denial  (support  of  the  contrary).    Gigftri ;  (refusal)  iky. 
Denigrate  (to  blacken  or  dirty).    Fu'cca  oo'li. 
Denominate.    Fu'cca  hingtfa. 

Denote  (to  set  s  mark  upon,  to  distinguish)*    Fu'cca  ilongt. 
Denude.    Fu'cca  telefoo'a. 
Deny  (to  disown,  to  refuse).    Fucca  iky'. 
Depart  (to  go,  to  set  out  on  a  journey).    Aloo;  (to  die) 

ina'te. 
Dependent  (hanging  down).    To'wto'w  hi'fo;  ta'oobe. 
Deplume  (to  pluck  off  feathers),    Foo'chi. 
Depopulate k(to  uhpeople).    Fu'cca  ta'i  caky'. 
Deportment  (conduct,  behaviour).    A'nga. 
Deprecate.    Hoo. 

Depredate  (to  rob;  also  robbery).    Kyha. 
Deprive  (to  rob  by  force,  to  seize  upon).     Fa'oo;  vete. 
Depth  (of  water).     Lolo'to;  (descent)  hi'foa'nga;  maouvoo. 
Deracinate  (to  tear  up  by  the  roots).     Tafegi. 
Deride.    ManooTd. 
Derive  (to  obtain  from).    Mow;  (to  deriye  one's  ofigfo) 

too'boo. 
Descend  (to  come  down).  How  hi'fo;  (to go  down)  aloo* hife. 
Descent  (any  declivity,  side  of  a  hill).     Hi'foan'ga. 
Descry  (to  discern  at  a  distance  as  land,  &c.)     Gffte:  (we 

descried  the  land),  na'i  gi'te  my  hefunnooa  giatc  gi 

to  loo. 


DIF 

Desert  (to  leave  dishonourably,  to  run  away  from) .  Ha'wla. 
Desiccate  (to  dry  or  harden  by  heat  or  the  air).    Fu'cca 

mo'a  mo'a.  .  . 

Desire  (to  wish).     Fi'a;    (to  desire  with  great  eagerness) 

holi. 
Desist  (to    leave    off   an  action  or  speech).     Too'goo; 

ofooa. 

kite  (malice).  .  Fu'cca-fa'chi ;  (anger)  lili;  i'ta. 
Vete. 

Despise  (to  hate).    F6hia* 
Destitute  (without  friends  or. assistance).   Pya ;  sese ;  (void 

of  any  thing,  without)  ta'i. 
Destroy  (to  spoil).    Mo'wmo'w  ;  (to  kill)  ma'te. 
Destruction  (ruin;  putting  out  of  existence).     Mo'wmo'w ; 

(death)  ma'te. 
Desudation  (sweat).    Caca'va. 
Detain  (to  hold  in  custody).    Talifi. 
Detect  (to  discover  or  discern  any  thing).     Ilo'a. 
Detest  (to  hate  exceedingly).     Fehia, 
Devest  (to  undress,  to  unclothe).    Vete;   (to  pillage,  to 

plunder)  vote;  fa'oo. 
Deviate  (to  wander  from).     He'e. 
Devoid  (void  of).     Ta'i. 
Devour  (to  eat  up).     Gena. 
Dew.     Hahb'w ;  (a  dew  drop)  tootoo'loo  hahcw. 
Die  (to  expire,  to  die  as  a  flame).    Ma'te ;  (to  stain  or  co- 
lour) too'goo. 
Diet  (food).    iyi6a  ky. 
Differ  (to  be  unlike).     Fy-g6he;  (to  quarrel  or  disagree) 

gigftii;  ghe. 
Difficult.    Fygnata';  gnata'. 
Diffidence  (arising  from  bashfulness).     Ma. 
Diffident.    Ma. 


DIS 

Diffusa  (to  pour  out).  Lili'ngi;  (u>scfrfter,  to  spread  aboug) 
ftle.  ,  ' 

Dig  (to  turn  up  the  ground,  to  make  a  pit,  ditch,  or  grpve). 
G61e. 

Dike  (a  ditch,  a  bank  or  mound).    G£le. 

Dilaoerate  (to  tear)*    Ha'i-ha'u 

Dilatory  (slow,  lingering).  Too'y;  (lazy,  idle)  UbPco; 
bi'co-bi'co. 

Diminish.     Fu'cca  chi'-chi'. 

Diminutive  (small  in  bulk).    Igi;  soOtoo'e. 

Dingle  (a  narrow  valley  between  two  iteep  hilb).  Lefts* 
looZ-o*  • 

Dip  (to  wet  any  thing)*    Fu'cca  vi'coo. 

Direct  (straight).    Toto'noo;  (to  order)  fea/w* 

Directly  (in  a  straight  direction).  Toto'nooa'nge  ;  (imme- 
diately) va'vea'nge. 

Dirt  (particularly  rubbish  or  sweepings).  Awta  JswH; 
(mud)  gelc. 

Dirty  (black,  smutty).    Ooli ;  (muddy)  gelea. 

Disagree  (to  quarrel).    Fege* ;  (to  be  unlike)  g6he. 

Disappear  (to  go  out  of  sight).  GnaTo;  (to  vanish  as  s 
ghost)  ma'wle. 

Discern  (to  discover).     Mama'ta ;  (to  descry  land)  gite. 

Disclose  (relate  or  tell).  Tala;  (to  expose  to  view)  fu'cca 
ha. 

Discontent  (dissatisfaction  from  any  cause).     Ta'i  la'tt. 

Discover  (to  perceive).  Ilo'aj  (to  lay  open  to  view)  fu'cca 
lia. 

Discourse  (to  argue,  to  hold  conversation).     Talano'a. 

Disease.  Maha'gi ;  te'nga-ta'ngi ;  booloo'hi.  (See  Sick- 
ness). 

Disengage  (to).     No'fo  no'a ;  (to  loosen  or  untie)  vete. 

D'.i^orge  (to  vomit,  to  give  out  of  the  throat).     Loo'a. 

Disgraciuus  (unkind).     Angacovi. 


DIV 

Disguise  (in  dress,  also  in  sentiment).    PWfo*. 

Dislocate  (to  put  out  of  joint).    Fa'chi. 

Dismantle  (to  strip).    V6te. 

Dismay.    Ma'navahe,  ma'navachi'. 

Disobedient.     Pa'gnata. 

Disorder  (to  make  ill).    Fu'eca  maha'gi;  (a  disorder)  ml- 
ha'gi. 

Disparity  (any  kind  of  dissimilarity).    Ta'i  fu'eca  tattcrtr. 

Dispense  (to  distribute).     Too'fa. 

Disperse  (to  separate  diversely).    Fu'eca  fele. 

Display  (to  shew  forth).    Fu'eca  ha. 

Displease.     Fu'eca  i'taj  (displeasure)  i'ta. 

Disport  (to  frolic,  to  play).    Fu'eca  va. 

Dispose  (to  prepare,  to  put  in  order,  to  be  in  readiness  for). 
Teoo. 

Disposition  (inclination  of  mind).     A'nga;  lo'to* 

Dispossess  (to  deprive  of,  to  strip  by  force).     V6te. 

Disproportion.     Ta'i  tatto'w. 

Dispute  (a  discussion).  Gigihi;  (a  quarrel)  ghe;  fuccaghe. 

Dissemble  (to  act  hypocritically).    He1e. 

Dissever.     Hele  oo  a ;  valie  oca. 

Dissolve  (to  make  fluid).     Fu'eca  vy$  (to  embody  with  a 
fluid)  pa  loo,  fu'eca-vy. 

Distance  (of  place).     Mama'oo;  (of  time)  16a. 

Distemper.    Maha'gi;  t6nga-ta'ngi ;  booloofoi.     (See  Sick- 
ness). 

Distinct  (separate  from,  or  different  from).    G£he;  (dear) 
toto'noo. 

Distinctly  (separately).   Gehe6nge ;  (clearly)  toto'nooa'nge. 

Distrustful  (suspicious)*1  Mahalo. 

Ditch.     G61e. 

Dive  (to  descend  under  water).     Hoo'goo. 

Divers  (several).    Lahi. 
Diverse.    Ge'he. 


DRO 

Diversion  (amusement).    Fu'cca  va. 

Divest  (to  strip  naked).    Fu'cca  telefoca ;  (to  deprive  of) 

v6te;  fa 'oo. 
Divide.    Valie. 

Divorce.    Chia'gi,  (literally,  to  throw  away). 
Do  (to  act,  to  effect).    Fy. 
Dog.    Gooli. 
Doll  (a  cylinder  of  wood  drest  up  for  children  to  play  with). 

Ta'ma  boo'a. 
Dolphin.     MaTiemaTie. 
Don't  (do  not;  be  quiet;  cease).    O'ooa;  (do  not  do  it) 

o'ooa  tegger  fy. 
Door  (of  a  fortified  place,  store-house,  Ac.)    Matapaf. 
Dormant.    Molie. 

Double-minded.    Lo'to  oo'a ;  i.  e.  having  two  minds* 
Doubt.    Maba'Io. 

Dove  (different  specie*).     Loo1>e  j  cooloo-cooloo. 
Down  (of  a  bird,  &c.)     Fooloo  foo'loo  mate ;  (below)*  gi 

la'lo. 
Doziness.     Fi'a  mo'he. 
Drag  (to  draw  along).     ToTio. 
Drain  (to  empty).     Fu'cca  ma'ha. 
Draw  (to  drag  or  pull  along).     Tcho;  (to  sketch  a  figure) 

toTii. 
Drawbridge.    HaTla  tblio. 
Dread.     Ma'navahi';  i.e.  a  wandering  breath  :  raa'navachi; 

i.  e.  a  small  or  little  breath.     (See  Mana'va). 
Dream.     Mi'chi. 

Dress  (to  clothe).     Y  vala;  teoo;  (clothing)  mea  vala. 
Drib  (to  crop  or  lop  off).     Toochi'a. 
Drift  (to  float  about  on  the  water).     Tee-tee. 
Drink  (to  swallow  liquids).     I'noo ;  (beverage)  mea  i'noo. 
Droll.     Gnoo'too  hoo'a. 
Dronish.     Fu'cca  bibi'co. 


EAS 

Drop  (to  let  fall).    Taw;  (to  drop  as 'water)  tootooloo; 

tooloo'i. 
Drought  (thirst).     Fi'a  i'noo ;  (dry  weather)  tai  ooTia ;  la'a. 
Drowsy  (sleepy).     Fia  molie. 
Drub  (to  beat  or  thrash  with  a  stick  or  club).     Ta ;  (to 

beat  with  the  fist)  too'gi ;  motohico. 
Drum.    Na'ffa. 

Drunk  (intoxicated  with  any  thing).     Ca'wna. 
Dry  (to  dry ;  dry).     Mo'a-mo'a. 
Duck.    Tblo'a. 
Dug  (teat).    HooTioo. 
Dumb  '(speechless  from  any  cause).    No'a. 
Dung  (excrement  of  any  animal).     Ta'e. 
Dunny  (deafish).    Too'lli. 

During  (in  the  mean  while,  at  that  time).     Lolo'tonga. 
Dust.     EToo ;  (dusty)  6foohu 
Dwell  (to  rest,  remain,  or  live  any  where).     NoTo ;  no'fo- 

noTo;  nono'fo. 
Dwelling  (a  house  or  place  to  dwell  in).    No'foa'nga:  (nofo, 

to  dwell;  anga>  place). 


E. 


Each  (each  one).    Ta'ggi-taTia-be. 

Eager.     Holi ;  (eagerness)  ho'lia'nge. 

Eagle-eyed  (quick-sighted).     Ma'tta  va've. 

Ear.    Teli'nga. 

Earwig.    Mo'cohoola. 

Early  (early  in  the  mornings  by  dawn  of  day).     Heoigi- 

h6ngi ;  hehengi ;  (soon,  quickly)  va'vea'nge. 
Earth  (soil,  mould,  clay,  &c. )     Gele-g61e ;   oom£a ;   (the 

world)  ma'ma.  ' 

Earthquake.     Mofooi'ge. 
Ease  (to  give  rest).     Fu'cca  malo7. 


ELO 

Easily.    Fy'gnofooMfnge. 

East.    Ma'tta  he  la'3  3  i.  e.  the  appearance  of  the*u*« 

Easy  (not  difficult),    Fygnpfoo'a;  (soft)  moioo. 

Eat.    Ky;  gcna. 

Eaten.    Ky ;  gena :  (the  latter  word  is  meetly  used). 

Eaves  (of  a  house).  Too'loo-tooloo ;  i.  e.  dropping  as  water; 

because  from  the  too'loo-too'loo  he  jallet  (the  eaves  of 

the  house),  the  rain  drops. 
Ebb  (to).    M a'hahi'fo  :  it  is  ebb  tide,  god*  mahahifo  he  Utki. 
Eccentric  (irregular,  strange,  uncommon).    Sestie. 
Echo.    Ongo. 
Eclipse  (of  the  moon).    Ma'te  he  mahi'na;  (of  the  sub) 

ma'te  he  la'a. 
Economic  (sparing,  stingy).    Fu'cca  motoo'a  tanga'ta ;  Lt. 

to  play  the  old  man,  to  be  sparing. 
Edacity  (greediness).    Hoo'a  ky. 
Edge  (boundary  of  any  thing).    Ma'tta. 
Edgeless  (blunt,  dull  of  edge).     P6coo. 
Effete  (worn  with  age,  weak).     Vy'-vy'  motoo'a. 
Effort  (a  strong  exertion).     Foo'te. 
Effulgent  (bright,  shining,  sparkling).     Gnigni'la. 
Effuse  (to  pour  out).     Li'ngi. 
Egg.     Fo*i  nia'noo ;  i.  e.  ball  of  a  bird. 
Eject  (to  cast  away).     Chia'gi;  lia'&i. 
Eight.     Va'loo. 

Eighteen.     Ongofoo'loo  ma  va'loo. 
Eight-score.    Va'loo  gnaco'w  ;  va'loo  gnahoa.  (See  T6cow» 

in  the  other  part  of  the  Vocabulary). 
Eighty.     Va'loo  o'ngofWloo. 
Elderly.     Motoo'a. 

Elect  (to  choose,  chosen,  selected).     FHi. 
Eleven.     O'ngofooioo  ma  ta'ha. 
Elide  (to  break  in  pieces).     Lylgi. 
Elongate  (to  make  longer).    Ftvcca  loa-lo'a. 


ENE 

Elope.    Ha/wU. 

Eloquent.    Fa  boole:  fa,  capable  of;  booU,  to  command  or 

give  orders. 
Else  (one  beside;  another).    T6ha  glhe ;  (otherwise)  na. 
Elsewhere  (in  any  other  place).    G6he. 
Elucidate.    Fu'cca  maoo. 
Emft*V«  (to  waste ;  to  become  lean).    Fu'cca  tooto6e ; 

(emaciated)  tootoce. 
Emasculate.    B6ca. 
Embar  (to  block  up).    Maboo/ni. 
Embark  (to  go  on  board).    Fu'cca  h6ca;  (to  commence  an 

undertaking)  teoo. 
Embellish  (to  ornament).    T6fto. 
Embers.    MaKla. 
Embowel.    Fucca  gnac6w. 
Eminence  (a  hill ;  a  rising  ground).     Mooo'nga. 
Emmet.    Lo. 
Employment   (any  sort  of  work).     Gnaoofe;   (tilling  the 

ground)  gn6ooe. 
Empoverish.     Fu'cca  sese. 
Empty.     Mtha. 
Encircle  (to  encompass).    F61i. 
Enclosure  (ground  inclosed,  or  fenced  in).    Loto&. 
Enclose  (to  wrap  up).    C6foo. 
Encore  I    Fy  f6ki :  fy,  to  do ;  fafki,  if  you  please. 
End  (in  a  physical  sense).     Moo'i ;  (in  respect  of  time) 

hili. 
Endear.    Fu'cca  mans/co. 

Endeavour  (any  attempt  or  exertion,  either  bodily  or  men- 
tal).   AtriaOu. 
Endless  (in  a  physical  sense).    Tai  mooi :  (eternal)  ta'i  hfli. 
Endure  (to  bear;  to  put  up  with).     Catt'gi. 
Endwise  (standing  on  an  end).     Foccatoo'. 
Energetic  (as  to  bodily  strength).  Malo'hi ;  (mental  energy) 

loto  lahi. 


£QU 

Enervate  (to  weaken  the  body,  or  mind).    Fu'cca  vy-vy. 

Enflame  (to  light  with  fire)*  Fu'cca  cacalia;  fucca  ooJo? 
(as  a  wound  or  sore)  coo'la-coo'la. 

Engagement  (by  land).    Tow ;  (by  sea)  veha'ca. 

Engird  (to  surround  with  any  thing).    Ta'cca  tacky7. 

Enkindle  (to  light ;  to  make  flame),    Fu'cca  cacaluu 

Enlarge  (to  make  larger).    Fu'cca  lain. 

Enmity.    Fu'cca  fa'chi-fa'chi. 

Enmesh  (to  make  like  a  net).    Jia. 

Enough  (sufficient ;  plenty).    La'hi. 

Enrage.    Fu'cca  ita. 

Enripen.     Fu'cca  momo'ho. 

Enrobe  (to  put  on  dress).    Va'la. 

Entame  (to  domesticate  an  animal).     Fu'cca  la'ta. 

Entangle.     Fihi-fihi. 

Entertainment  (public  feasting).  Catoa'nga;  (in  a  more 
friendly  or  familiar  way)  tali. 

Entire  (whole  ;  all).     Coto'a. 

Entrails  (the  guts  ;  contents  of  the  abdomen).     Gua'co'ir. 

Entrance.     Hala. 

Envenom  (to  make  baleful  by  the  addition  of  any  thing  dele- 
terious). Fu'cca  ca'wna :  this  word  also  means  to  in- 
toxicate :  they  have  no  known  poisons* 

Environ  (to  surround  any  place  5  to  hem  in).  Foli;  (en- 
virons, or  parts  about)  loto;  botoo. 

Enumerate  (to  count;  to  number).     Low. 

Envy.     Ma'noo-ma'noo. 

Epilepsy.  Foo'a  mooo'i  fia :  i.  e.  to  die  suddenly ;  to  fall  in 
a  fit. 

Epulation  (feast  and  jollity).     Catooa'nga. 

Equal  (equivalent  in  size,  number,  &c  also  in  rank). 
Tatt6w. 

Equalize.     Fu'cca  tatto'w\ 

Equip  (tp  dress,  or  fit  out)*  -  Tcoo. 


EXC 

Eradicate  (to  tear  up  by  the  roots).    Ta'agi. 

Ere  (before ;  sooner  than).     Tegichi'. 

Erelong  (before  a  long  time  passes).    Va've-my. 

Err  (to  be  wrong ;  to  wander  unintentionally  from  the  truth). 

Hee;  halla. 
Erode  (to  destroy  by  rust ;  to  eat  into  a  canker).  G6na. 
Errand  (any  message  or  business  on  which  a  person 4s  sent). 

FecCw. 
Error  (false  idea).     Hadta. 
Eruption  (of  volcano,  or  other  fire).     Coctfho. 
Escape  (to  escape  by  flight).    Ha'wla. 
Eschar  (of  wound  in  battle,  or  with  a  warlike  instrument). 

Pa'too  he  ca'ffo ;  (of  any  other  kind,  as  from  an  ulcer, 

fcc.)  pa'too  be  palla ;  (of  any  wound  by  accident,  as 

from  a  cut,  fall,  &c.)  pa'too  he  lavea. 
Espy  (to  see  at  a  distance,  as  land).     Gite. 
(a  bodily,  or  mental  effort).     A'hi-a'hi. 
(of  flowers;  also  any  sweet  smell).  Na'moo  cacala; 

(to  scent,  or  perfume)  fu'cca  na'moo  cacala. 
Evanid  (faint ;  weak).     Vy'vy'. 
Evasion.    Hcle. 

Even  (straight  j  direct).    Totcnoo. 
Evening*    I'fi  a'fi ;  from  ijl,  to  blow ;  q/i,  fire ;   because  in 

the  evening  hot  embers  are  brought  into  the  house,  and, 

being  blown  into  a  flame,  the  torches  are  thus  lighted. 
Every.    Foo'abe. 

Evil  (any  thing  bad,  or  disadvantageous).    Co*vi. 
European.    Papala'ngi :  this  word  is  often  used  to  signify 

cloth,  or  linen  of  any  kind;  as  being  supposed  to  be 

European  manufactures. 
Examine  (to  examine  the  quality  of  any  thing).    Vacky7; 

(to  ask  questions)  fehool. 
Bwn^f^p^  (dead,  or  almost  lifeless).    Mate. 
Excavate.    Fu'cca  looo. 

vol.  ii.  k 


EXT 

Excern  (to  squeeie  out,  as  water  out  of  a  cloth,  &c  by 
wringing).    Tow. 

Exchange  (to  barter ;  to  trade).    Fu'ccato'w. 

Exclaim.    Ool;  calinga. 

Excrement  (of  any  animal).    Ta'e. 

Excruciate  (to  give  great  pain).    Fu'cca  mamalii ;  (excru- 
ciating) mamalii. 

Execrate  (to  curse ;  to  wish  ill  to).    Ca!be ;  va'nge. 

Exfoliate  (to  scale,  or  peel  off).    La'oo. 

Exhalation  (smoke).    Coco'ho. 

Exhibit  (to  hold  up  to  view).    Fucca  ha. 

Exiguous  (small ;  little).    I'gi. 

Exotic  (foreign ;  not  belonging  to  Tonga).    Mo61i. 

Expand  (to  spread  out;  to  unfold).  Fucca  ffili  j  fucca  ttk. 

Expect  (to  wait  for).    Tatili. 

Expedient  (proper).    Ala;  tow;  guile. 

Expeditious  (with  much  velocity ;  in  a  little  time).  Vfo. 

Expire  (to  die ;  to  go  out  as  a  flame,  or  candle).    Mite. 

Explain  (to  make  clear;  to  establish).    Fdcca  mioo. 

Explicit.    Mioo. 

Explore  (to  search  into).    Go6mi. 

Expose  (to  hold  up  to  view).    Fucca  ha. 

Extensive  (wide ;  capacious).    A'ta ;  low  lihi. 

External  (on  the  outside ;  outward).    Tooa. 

Extillation  (the  act  of  dropping,  as  a  fluid).    Tootoiloo; 
toolooi. 

Extinguish  (to  put  out,  as  a  fire).    Mite. 

Extirpate.    Fu'cca  6chi. 

Extol  (to  praise  highly).    Maviva. 

Exudation .     Caca'va. 

Extraordinary  (out  of  the  common  way).    Mia  gibe ;  se- 
s61e. 

Extravagant  (profuse  and  wasteful)  no  word  for:  (extrav*» 
gantly  used)  mow-mow ;  i.  e.  spoiled ;  wasted. 


FAT 

Eye.    Mitt* ;  (to  eye)  16o. 
Eyeball.    Cano  e  matta. 
Eyebrow.    F06I00  e  mfitta. 
Eyelash.    G6mo. 
Eyelid.    Low  matta. 

F. 

Fable  (any  tale,  false  or  true;  a  popular  tale),    Fananga. 

Face.    Matta ;  fofc/nga. 

Facilitate.    Fu'cca  gnofoofa ;  i.  e.  to  make  easy. 

Faint.    Fo6a  motooi  fia ;  i.  e.  all  life  wanting. 

Fainthearted  (cowardly).    Foi. 

Faintly  (slightly;  without  endeavour).    Vy-vy$nge. 

Fair  (handsome,  as  women).    O'eo'efooa:  (just)  tonooia. 

Faithful.    Mow ;  i.  e.  fixed ;  steady. 

Fall  (to  drop,  or  tumble  down).    Hinga;  taw. 

Fallow  (as  the  land).    Aloo  vaoo. 

False.    Tai  mofoi ;  i.  e.  without  truth. 

Falsehood  (a  lie).    L6hi. 

Fame  (reputation;  character).    O'ngo. 

Family.    Cow  nofo ;  i.  e.  a  company  dwelling  together. 

Famine.    Honge  ;  (famine  from  intense  heat)  honge  161; 

(famine  from  destructive  hurricanes)  h6nge  aft. 
Famish  (to  starve  to  death).    Mate  hfage. 
Fan  (to  winnow).    Alo  a|p ;  (a  fan)  L 
Far  (distant;  afar  off).    Mamaoo, 
Fardel  (any  burthen).    Oo  mea ;  cavenga. 
Fare  (food).    Mcaky. 
Farrow.    Oohigi  booaca. 
Farther.    Mamaootoge. 
Fashion  (mode;  manner).    Fufaa. 
Fast  (firm;  fixed).     Mow;  (quick,  swift)  vivo. 
Fat.    Gnico. 

ka 


FIL 

Fatten.    Fu'cca  chino. 

Father.  •  Tammy'. 

Fatherless.    Tai  tammy'. 

Fathom  (to  measure  any  thing  by  the  length  of  the  extended 

arms).    O'fa. 
Fatigue.    H61a. 
Fatness.    Chino. 

Favourite  (a  person,  or  thing  beloved).     B61e. 
Fear.  Manavah6;  manavachi;  (fearful)  the  same;  (fearless) 

tai  manavahe ;  tai  manavachi. 
Feast.    Catooanga  ky. 

Feather.    F06I00  e  manoo ;  i.  e.  hair  of  a  bird. 
Feature  ( of  the  face) .    Fofonga. 
Feeble.    Vyf-v/. 
Feed.    Fu/cca  ky. 
Female  (of  any  animal).    Fafine. 
Feminine.    Fu'cca  fafine. 

Fen  (a  marsh ;  any  watery  ground ;  a  lake).    Afno. 
Fence  (a  fencing  of  any  kind).     A. 
Fend  (to  parry).     H600. 

Fester  (to  inflame,  as  a  wound ;  to  suppurate).   Palla ;  bck 
Fetch  (to  bring  hither).    Cmi ;  omy'. 
Fetid  (stinking).    E'ho;61o. 
Feud   (quarrel;  broil).    Ghe. 
Few.    Chi ;  (few  persons)  toca  chi.     See  toca. 
Fib.     L6hi. 

Fie  (for  shame ! )     Wi ! 
Field.    Vaoo. 

Fifteen.    Cngofooloo  ma  nima. 
Fifty.    Nima  6ngofo61oo. 
Fight.    Tow ;  (with  clubs)  fetaagi. 
Filch  (to  steal).    Kyha/. 
File.    Gili ;  (filings)  gilichi. 


FLA 

Fill  (to  fill).    Fucca  bito;  (one's  fill;  a  fall  meal)  froo; 
macawna. 

i 

Fillip  (a  jerk  of  the  finger  and  thumb).    Fichu 

Filth  (dirt,  but  rather  sweepings  or  leavings).    Awta  aWta. 

Filthy.    Fucca  Haifa. 

Final  (last  of  all).    Mo6i  obito;  i.  e.  the  very  end. 

Find  (to  discover,  to  hit  upon  by  searching).    Ho  a. 

Finger.    Cow  nima  ;  (the  fore-finger)  toohoo. 

Finish.    Fucca  6chi. 

Fire.     A'fi. 

Fire-stick  (fire-brand).    Gnow  afi. 

Firing  (fire-wood,  fuel).    Fifi'e. 

Firm  (in  strength).    Mal6hi ;  mow. 

First  (in  place  or  rank).    Mooa ;  (in  time)  oolooagi. 

w 

First-fruits*    Oolooagi  toobooinga. 

Fish  (the  aquatic  tribe).     Tea;  (to  fish)  cobenga;  toty 

i/ca. 
Fisherman.    T6ty  cobenga ;  toty  ica. 
Fissure  (crack,  crevice,  &c.)     Mafahi. 
Fist.    Ni  ma. 

Fisty-cufis  (boxing).    Foohoo. 

Fit  (suitable).     Tow ;  ala ;  (a  swoon,  &c.)  fooa  moo6i  fi'a. 
Five.    Nima. 

Fix  (to  make  fast  or  firm).    Fucca  mow. 
Fizgig  (a  spear  to  strike  fish  with).    Tao  vflo  ica. 
Flag  (an  ensign  or  colours).     Fooga. 
Flaggy  (growing  weak  in  strength,  also  watery).     Vy-vy. 
Flambeau  ( any  kind  of  torch ) .    Mama. 
Flame  (to  blaze,  a  blaze).    Orfo. 
Flare  (to  cast  a  dazzling  indeterminate  light).    Kila-kila. 
Flat  (plane,  even ).    Lafa-lafa ;  lalafa :  (a  shallow)  mamaha; 

hahanga. 
Flatten.    Fucca  lala'fa. 


FLY 


Flatter  (to  praise  falsely  with  some  design).   Laboo;vasra; 

(flattery)  the  same. 
Flavour  (taste,  relish).    H060;  (smell)  nanamoo. 
Flavourous  (smelling  sweet  as  flowers,  Ac.)    Namoo  ca- 

cala. 
Flaw.    Maflu 
Flee.    H&wla ;  (he  flew  from  the  enemy),  nm  hefwim  me  he 

tow. 
Fleet  (swift  of  foot).    Ve  vave ;  (as  a  canoe)  gnah61o :  (s 

fleet  of  canoes)  fel6w. 
Flesh.    Cano;  (fleshy)  chino. 
Flexible  (easy  to  bend,  soft).    M6I00. 
Flexuous.    Tacca  milo. 

Flight  (of  birds).    Bo6na;  (escape  by  flight)  hawku 
Flimsy  (weak,  not  solid).    Vy-vy. 
Fling  (to  cast  as  a  stone,  &c.)    Lichi. 
Flirt  (to  flutter).    Tetemi. 
Fliks  (down,  fur,  hair  of  the  body).    F06I00. 
Float  (to  be  buoyed  up  on  the  surface  of  a  fluid).    T&Mee. 
Flock.    F61e. 
Flop  (to  clap  the  wings  with  a  noise  as  birds).     Cappa- 

cappa. 
Flounce  (to  dive  in  the  water).    Hocgoo. 
Floor  (to  cover  with  mats,  &c.)    Faligi:  (boards  art  not 

generally -used  for  flooring). 
Flow.     H6co :  (the  sea  flows)  goo'a  hefco  he  tethL 
Flower  (the  blossom  of  a  plant).    Cacila. 
Flower  (to  produce  flowers).    Fo6a  cacala. 
Flute  (which  they  blow  with  the  nose).    Fango-fingo. 
Fly  (to  pass  through  the  air  as  a  bird,  to  run  swiftly). 

Bo6na. 
Fly  (the  insect).    L6ngo. 
Fly-blow  (to  turn  maggotty  as  meat).    Ootagafa. 


FOW 

Foam  (froth  of  the  sea,  ipume).    Coa ;  (soap)  coa  papa- 

langi. 
Fog.    Hahow. 
Folk*  (people).    Caky'. 
Follow  (to  go  after).    Mooiange. 
Foment  (to  bathe  with  warm  water)*    C6wc6w. 
Fondling  (a  darling).    B61e. 
Food  (provisions  in  general).    M6a-ky. 
Foot.    Vae. 

Footstep  (trace  either  of  man  or  beast).    U6nga  vie. 
Forage  (to  search  for  provisions  as  in  war).    Papani. 
Forbear  (to  hold,  to  desist).    Oooa. 
Forcible  (physically  strong).    Mal6hi. 
Forcibly.    Fuccamal6hi;  malohiange. 
Forehead.    Lae. 
Foreign  (not  belonging  to  Tonga).    Mooli:  (to  be  foreign) 

ger  mooli ;  (a  foreigner)  mooli. 
Foreland  (a  cape  or  point  of  land).    Moot  fonnooa. 
Forerank  (rank  in  front).    Mooa. 
Forget.    Gnalo. 
Fork.    Hoohoo. 
Form  (shape).    Fo6a. 
Formerly.    Go6a-16a. 

Fortress  (any  place  built  for  defence).  X6lo. 
Forthwith  (thereupon,  hereupon,  immediately).    Foki-fa. 
Fortunate  (prosperous,  lucky).    Monooia. 
Forty.    Fa  ongofo61oo. 
Fosse  (any  kind  of  ditch).    Gek.  . 
Fool  (dirty,  black,  filthy).    Ooli;  (ba4)  c6vi. 
Fool  (to  besmear  with  dirt,  to  blacken).    Pani  ooli. 
Four.    Fa. 

Four-score.    Valoo  ongofooloo. 
Fourteen.    Ongofooloo  ma  fa. 
Fowl  (a  bird)  manoo ;  (the  domestic  fowl)  moa. 


FUL 

Fragrant  (aromatic).    Namoo  cacala. 

Frantic  (delirious,  mad,  insane).     Lo'to  hee  ;  vale. 

Fraught.     Faooagi. 

Fraj  (a  broil  or  quarrel).    Ghe. 

Free-hearted  (generous  in  giving).    Fa  fooagi:  fa,  apt; 
jboa'gi,  to  make  a  present. 

Freeze  (to  congeal  with  cold,  as  oil,  Ac.)  Mohe;  i.  e.  to 
sleep. 

Freight  (burthen  or  load  of  a  canoe )  •    Cavenga. 

Frequent  (often).  Fy'-y-be:  (to  frequent)  faaloo  gi;  i.  e. 
much  to  go  to. 

Friend.  Cowtangata.  Cow  is  not  only  the  sign  of  the  plu- 
ral, but,  joined  in  one  word  with  tangata,  means  t 
friend ;  arising  from  the  circumstance  of  applying  tan 
term  to  the  people  or  adherents  of  such  a  one ;  whick 
implies  his  friends  or  party. 

Friendless  (destitute,  alone)*    Pya ;  s&e ;  tactbe. 

Frighten.    Fucca  manavah6. 

Fright.     Mdnavahe. 

Frigid.     Momoco. 

Frisk  (to  wanton,  to  play  about).    Hobo-hobo. 

From.     Me. 

Front  (face,  appearance).  Malta:  (in  front,  or  first  in 
place  or  rank),  gi  moo'a,  moda-moo'a-dngc. 

Front  (to  be  opposite).    Too  gi  mooa. 

Frontier  (borders  of  a  country  or  district).     Tow  lotoo. 

Frontless  (shameless,  bold,  impudent).    T6i  ma. 

Frontlet  (turban  ;  fillet  round  the  head).     Fow. 

Froth  (of  the  sea  or  any  other  fluid:  see  Foam).     C6a. 

Fruit.     Fo6a  ac6w. 

Frustrate  (to  thwart  any  one's  intention).    T6afi. 

Fucus  (paint  for  the  face  or  body).     Loa. 

Fuel  (for  fire).     Fifi'e. 

Fulgent  (sparkling,  dazzling,  bright).    Gnignila. 


GAZ 

Full  (replete).    Bito. 

Full-eyed.    Mfttta  kikfla. 

Full-fed.    Maciwna. 

Fume  (smoke).    A'hoo ;  (steam  or  vapour)  cocohoo. 

Fun  (joke,  merriment).    Hooa. 

Funny  (droll,  merry).    Gno6too  hooa. 

Fundament.     Hilo. 

Funeral.    Bo6too ;  (funeral  of  Tooitonga)  l&ngi. 

Furcated  (any  thing  shaped  as  a  fork).    M&nga-msjiga. 

Furl  (as  a  sail).    Fucca  mow. 

Further  (beyond).    Mam&ooinge. 

Furtive  (stolen).    Kyh&cbia. 

Fuse  (to  melt,  to  dissolve).    Fucca  vy. 

Future.    He  sJio. 

Fy!    Wi! 


G. 


Gad  (to  walk  about).    E'va  eva. 

Gale  (of  wind).    Havili. 

Gap  (chasm,  fissure,  opening).    A'va. 

Garb  (dress,  habiliments).    Vila. 

Garden  (plantation  round  a  house).    L6to  4pi. 

Garland  (a  wreath  of  flowers).    Twinga  caca'lfu 

Garment.    Vala. 

Garnish  (to  dress  out,  to  ornament).     Teoo. 

Garrulity  (loquacity).     Gno6too-low. 

Gash.    Foo  mata/fa ;  i.  e.  a  great  cut. 

Gate.    Matapaf. 

Gather  (to  pluck  as  flowers,  fruit,  &c)     Toli  •,  (to  collect) 

tana'gi. 
Gathers  (plaits  in  gnatoo,  &c.)     Vaky7. 
Gaudery  (finery,  ornamental).  |T6oo. 
Gaie  (to  look  intently  and  earnestly).    Jio« 


GLO 

Geld.    B6ca. 

Generous.    A'nga  lillc* ;  (in  giving)  fa  foosvgi. 

Germe  (a  sprout  or  shoot).    Hooli. 

Germinate.    Tooboo. 

Gestation  (child-bearing).     Feta'ma. 

Get  (to  procure).    Mow. 

Ghost  (an  apparition).    Hotoo'a. 

Gibberish  (jargon).    C6te. 

Gift.    Fooagi. 

Gimlet  (any  thing  to  bore  a  hole  with).    Vi'li. 

Gin  (a  trap).    He'le. 

Gird  (to  circle  round,  to  bind).    Naw-naw. 

Girdle.    Naw. 

Give.  My i  a/too;  a'ngi.  When  the  first  person  follows 
the  verb,  sty  is  used  to  express  the  idea  of  giving:  when 
the  second  person  follows,  a'too  is  used,  and  when  the 
third  person,  a'ngi:  as  for  example. 

1.  Give  it  to  me,  myia  ma  a'coo:  give  it  to  us,  sty  ia 

ma  mowtoloo. 

2.  I  will  give  it  to  thee,  tc'oo  a'too  ia  mm  ow:  1  will 

give  it  to  you,  tefoo  atoo  ia  ma  motcfloo. 

3.  Give  it  to  him,  dngi  ia  ma  ana :  give  it  to  then, 

a'ngi  ia  ma  no'wtoloo. 
Gizzard.    G6te. 
Glad  (pleased).    Fi'a-fi'a;  (to  gladden  or  make  joyful)  the 

same. 
Glaring.    Gnignila. 
Glass  (looking  glass).    Jiaw'ta. 

Glib  (smooth).    M6Ue-m611e;  (glibly)  m6Ue-m6Ueangc. 
Glisten  (to  sparkle,  to  shine).    Gnignila. 
Gloomy  (dark).     061i. 
Glory  (fame).     Ofago. 
Glossy  (smooth,  shiny).    MoUe-moUe. 
Glow  (to  be  fervid  or  hot).    Ooio;  v6la. 


GRI 

Go  (to  proceed  forth).    Moo ;  (go along!)  fitamo  aloo. 

Goat.    C6chi,  (probably  from  the  English  word). 

Gobble  (to  swallow  quickly).    F61o  ho6a  ky. 

Goblin  (an  evil  apparition).    Hotooa  pow. 

God  (a  spirit  of  any  kind).    Hotooa. 

Goddess.    Hotooa  fafi'ne. 

Goggle  (to  look  asquint).    T6pa. 

Goggle-eyed.    Malta  tlpa. 

Good.    Lille ;  i.  e.  well,  peaceful,  advantageous. 

Goose.    P&to. 

Gore  (blood).    Tawto. 

Gorge  (the  throat).    Gia. 

Gory.    Tawto-tawto. 

Gosling.    Oohi'gi  p4to. 

Govern  (to  rule  as  a  king).    Boole. 

Gourd  (also  a  bottle  of  any  kind).    Hi'na. 

Graft  (a  young  shoot  of  a  tree).    H06U. 

Grained  (rough  as  wood,  &c.)    Papfita;  patta-patta. 

Grass-hopper.    He. 

Grasp  (to  seize  fast  hold  of,  to  clinch  the  fist).    Coogoo. 

Grass.    Mohoogoo;  moochi'e. 

Grave  (a  place  to  deposit  the  dead).  Tano ;  (to  engrave  in 
wood,  &c.)     TVngi. 

Gravel.    One  pata. 

Gravid  (pregnant).    Fetama ;  (heavy)  mamafa. 

Grease  (fat).  Gnaco;  (any  animal  or  vegetable  oil)  lo'lo; 
(cocoa-nut  oil)  lo'lo  nfoo. 

Greasy.    Pani  gnaco. 

Great  (large).    Lahi. 

Greedy  (rapacious  in  appetite).  Hoota  ky7;  (covetous) 
inanoo-manoo. 

Green  (unripe,  young).  liWi ;  (colour)  no  word  for,  ex- 
cept that  for  black,  odU :  (green  beads)  calanoo'i. 

Grime  (to  blacken).    Fucca  o61i. 


HAI 

Grind  (to  whet  or  sharpen).     Hobo»lo. 

Grindstone.    Foo&nga. 

Gripe  (to  seize  fast) .    Bodge  moV ;  (to  pain  in  the  boweb  , 

mama'ki  he  ge'te. 
Groin.     Tootooo. 

Grope  (to  feel  about  in  the  dark).    F&ft. 
Grovel  (to  creep  or  crawl  on  the  ground).    Totolo  ;  (to  be 

low  minded),  ger  loHo  fu'cca  fa/a,  ger  lo'to  ta'ifmccc 

tangata. 
Ground  (the  earth).    G61e-g61e. 

Grow  (to  increase  in  size  as  a  plant  or  animal).     Toofcoa. 
Grudge  (ill  will).     Fucca  fa'chi. 

Grudge  (to  give  unwillingly,  to  envy).    Ma'noo-ma/noo. 
Guard  (to  take  care  of).    Fea'oo ;  (to  watch)  leo. 
Guess  (to  conjecture).    Ma'te ;  fili. 
Gull  (a  bird  so  called).     Gno'ngo. 
Gullet  (the  throat).    Gito. 
Gulp  (to  swallow  whole).    Folo  ta'i  la'moo ;  i.  e.  to  swallow 

without  chewing. 
Gum  (the  adhesive  exudation  of  a  plant).    B06I00. 
Gut  (an  intestine).    GnaWw;  (to  embowel)  fu/cca  gna- 

ccV. 


H. 


Habiliment  (dress).    Vala. 

Habitable.     Ala  noTo. 

Habitant.    Caky'. 

Habitation.     No'foa'nga. 

Hail  (a  handle).     Fu'cca  va'ca. 

Hair  (of  the  head).    Low-oolo ;  low :  (or  other  parts  of 

the  body)  foo'loo. 
Hairy.     Foo'loo  foo'loo. 


HAS 

Hale  (to  drag  by  force).    TVho  fu'cca  mak/hi :  (to  call  out 

to)  oci ;  (sound,  healthy)  moool. 
Half.    Ta'oonga  mali'e. 
Half-way.    Gi  loOo. 
Halloo.    Calamga;  oo'i. 

Halve.    "Whe  oo'a  mali'e ;  i.  e.  to  divide  in  two  exactly. 
Ham  (the  thigh).     Tenga. 

Hammer  (any  sort  of  hammer  or  mallet ;  to  knock,  to  ham- 
mer).   Ta'ta'. 
Hand.    Low-ni'ma ;  L  e.  the  expansion  of  the  arm.    (See 

Low-nima). 
Handle  (to  feel  about  with  the  hand).    Fa'faf. 
Handle.    Edji'a. 
Handsome  (as  a  woman).    Malta  hooaf;  oeoefooa;  (as  a 

man,  or  by  metaphor,  as  a  tree,  &c.)  tol6ccal6cca. 
Hang  (to  suspend  any  thing  from  above).     To'w-to'w. 
Hanker  (to  wish  for).    Fu'cca  ha'mo. 
Happen.     Fo1ti-fa-goo'a-b6he. 
Happily  (fortunately,  also  happiness).    Monooi'a. 
Happiness.    Mcoonoo  monooia. 
Harangue  (a  public  speech).    Makraga;  (a public  order  or 

regulation)  fo'no. 
Harass  (to  weary).    Fu'cca  bibi'co. 
Hard  (with  a  resisting  surface).    Fefeca;  (difficult)  fygna- 

ta';  (unjust,  cruel)  ta'i  o*fa. 
Harden  (to  make  any  thing  firm).    Fu'cca  fefeca;  (to  harden 
the  body  against  suffering)  cata'gi;    (to  make  hard* 
hearted)  fu'cca  ta'i  ofa. 
Hard-hearted.    Ta'i  o'fa ;  ca'no  gnata'. 
Hardness  (resisting  quality).    Fefeca* 
Hardy  (brave).    To'a ;  (bearing  pain  with  fortitude)  cata'gi. 
Hark!    Fono'ngo! 

Harm  (evil,  misfortune,  bodily  injury).    Mafia ;  coVi. 
Haste  (speed).    Valve. 
Hasten  (to  forward  or  expedite).    Fucoa  va've. 


HEA 

Hastily.    Va'vea'nge. 

Hat  (made  of  straw,  sometimes  worn  in  battle).    Boo* 

lo'nga. 
Hatch  (to  incubate).    MoTie. 
Hatchet.    To'gi  fu'cca  a'nga  gelie :  literally  an  axe  with  i 

different  disposition.     (See  togi). 
Hate  (detestation,  dislike).    F6hia. 
Have  (to  have  obtained,  or  to  have  gotten  hold  of).    Mow. 
Haughtiness    (pride,  high-mindedness).    Lo'w-coV;   (the 

conceited  pride  of  any  one  who  wishes  to  be  respected 

as  a  chief)  fi'a  egi. 
Haul  (to  pull,  to  drag  by  violence).    Foo'chi ;  tolio. 
Haunch  (the  thigh,  &c.)    Tenga ;  ala'nga. 
Hay.    Mohoo'goo  moto-mo'a ;  i.  e.  dry  grass. 
Haze  (a  fog  or  mist).    Haho'w. 
Hazel  (a  colour;  brown).    M6U0. 
He  (the  pronoun)  I'a. 
Head  (of  an  animal  body,  also  the  top  of  some  peculiar 

trees).    Ooloo. 
Head-ache.     Gnagno'w. 
Headband  (a  turban,  a  fillet).    Fow. 
Headland  (a  point  of  land).    Mo6i  fonnooa. 
Headstrong  (heedless).    T6i  man£too ;  (obstinate)  pagnati. 
Heal  (to  cure,  to  remedy).    Taw ;  Fucca  moo6i ;  i.  e.  to 

make  alive. 
Health.    Moooi ;  i.  e.  life. 

Healthless.  Mah£gi;  tenga  tfegi ;  booloo'hi.  (See  Sickness). 
Heap  (to  accumulate).    Foccato6 ;  (a  large  quantity,  a  pile) 

to6nga. 
Hear  (to  perceive  by  the  ear).    Ongo ;  (to  hearken,  attend 

or  listen  to)  fonotago. 
Hearsay.     Low. 
Heart  (the  chief  organ  of  the  sanguineous  circulation).  Mifeo; 

(a  core  or  kernel)  cano;  (courage,  fortitude)  tosu 
Hearty  (cordial,  true).    Moo'ni ;  (healthy,  sound)  moo6i. 


H1N 

Heat  (sensation  of  heat).    Maftna ;  (to  make  hot)  tattoo. 

Heath.    Twawfa. 

Heave  (to  vomit).    Loo/a ;  (to  lift)  hPggi. 

Heaven  (rather  the  sky).    Langi;  (Paradise,  or  future  life) 

bolotoo. 
Heavy  (as  to  weight).    MamaTa;  (dark  in  colour)  oo'li; 

(dull,  as  weather)  aoochi'a. 
Hector  (to  bluster).    Fu'cca  boola  mttta ;  i.  e.  to  make  the 

eyes  swell. 
Heed  (to  attend  to ;  to  look  to).     Vacky'. 
Heedless  (careless ;  inattentive).    Tai  vakk) •'. 
Heel  (of  the  foot).    Moolvae. 
Heft  (handle  of  any  thing).    Fu'cca-vfica. 
Height  (perpendicular  length).    Mow  aloouga. 
Heighten  (to  make  higher).    Fu'cca  mow  aloo'nga. 
Helm  (paddle  to  steer  with).    Fo'he  eo'li. 
Hen  (of  any  bird).  Ma'noo  fafi'ne ;  (the  domestic  hen)  mote 

fafifae. 
Hence  (from  this  place  to  a  distance).    Mamaoo. 
Here.    Gi  heoi. 

Hereafter  (in  future  time).    He  mooi. 
Heretofore  (in  past  time).    He  moo6,  goo'alo'a. 
Heroic  (brave ;  bold ;  courageous  in  battle).    To'a. 
Hew  (to  cut  down).    Ta ;  (to  hack  and  cut)  chtoi. 
Hickup.    Lota. 

Hide  (to  conceal ;  to  disguise).     Foofoo/. 
Hide  (skin  of  any  animal).    Gili. 
High  (lofty).    Mow  aloo'nga. 
Highminded  (haughty;  proud).     LoV-cow. 
Highspirited  (brave;  warrior-like).    Tote. 
Highwater.    Tahi  ho/co. 
HQL    Moootaga. 

Hinder  (to  retard  in  any  way).    Talfi,  lolomi. 
Hindermost  (last  in  place  or  rank).    Mooti. 


HOW 

Hip  (rather  the  buttocks).    Lemoo. 

Hit  (to  strike  with  a  club  or  hammer).    Ta ;  (to  strike  with 

the  fist)  too'gi,  motohi'co.  , 

Hither.     Gi  heni. 
Hithermost.    Tow  bo/too  my. 
Hoar  (gray  with  age).    Hfaa. 
Hoarse.    Fa.  \ 

Hoary  (with  age).     Hina. 
Hobble  (to  walk  lamely).    G6too. 
Hog  (swine).    Boo4ca ;  (a  dirty  coarse  fellow)  tooto  fu'cc* 

booa'ca. 
Hogcote.    Faile  booa'ca. 

Hoist  (to  lift  up).    Higgi ;  (to  hoist  a  sail)  fy  la. 
Hold  (to  arrest;  to  stop).    Bocge;  (to  have  hold  of;  to 

possess)  mow. 
Hole  (a  perforation ;  a  hollow  place).    Loo'o;  kva. 
Hollow  (cavernous).    Loo'o-loo'o. 
Home.     Al>i. 
Hook  (a  fish-hook).  Matow  ;  (a  wooden  hook  used  to  hang 

up  baskets,  &c.  by)  towto'woonga;  (a  crook  for  gather- 
ing bread-fruit,  &c.)  lotioo. 
Hoop  (a  large  ring).     Ta'cky';  (an  iron  hoop)  tacky' vy; 

(tackyi,  to  encircle  ;  ry,  water). 
Hop  (to  jump  on  one  leg).    Mele  m61e  g6too. 
Horizon.     Ma'tta  e  la/ngi ;  i.  e.  the  edge  of  the  sky. 
Horrible  (also  horribly).     Fucca  ma'navah6,  fucca  nutfoa- 

vachi'. 
Horror.     Ma'navah6,  ma'navachi'. 
Hostility.     Tow. 

Hot  (with  caloric).    V61a;  (angry)  i'ta,  lili. 
Hotheaded  (passionate).    Lo'to  lili. 
House.    Fa'Ue. 

Houseless  (having  no  home).    Ta'i  al>i. 
How  (in  what  manner).    Fete. 


JAN 

Huddle  (to  do  a  thing  in  a  flurry  or  hurry).     Fu'cca  Tav6a. 

Huff  (to  chide;  to  check).    Towtea. 

Hug  (to  embrace ;  to  salute).    Feki'ta. 

Huge  (very  large).     Foo  lfc'hi. 

Hulk  (the  body  of  a  ship  or  canoe).     Chi'no  e  Ts/ca. 

Hull  (husk  or  pod).    GnSdji. 

Human.     Mama.     SeemdW. 

Humanity  (esteem ;  friendship;  mercy).    O'fiu 

Humid  (wet;    moist;  damp).    VFcoo;    (humidly)  vi'coo- 

a'nge. 
Humorous  (droll ;  witty).    Hoo'a ;  (humorously)  fucca  hoo'a; 
Humpback.     Too'a  bi'co. 
Hundred.     Teaoo. 
Hunger  (also  hungry).     Fhi-ky. 
Hunt  (to  chase ;  to  pursue).    Ala. 
Hurl  (to  throw  with  violence).    Li'chi. 
Hurricane.     A'fa'. 
Hurry.    Fucca  va've. 

Hurt  (to  give  pain).    Fucca  manWhi ;  (to  spoil)  mow-mow. 
Hurtful  (mischievous).     Pow. 
Husband.     Oha'na. 
Hush  (to  quiet).     Fucca  lolo'ngo ;  (to  quiet  a  child  when 

crying)  fu'cca  na. 
Hustle  (to  shake  together).    Loo'loe-too'loo. 

I. 

I.     Au;  gi'ta. 

Jabber  (to  talk  nonsense).  Lownoa;  (unintelligible  jargon) 

cote. 
Jaggy  (uneven ;  notched ;  ragged).    Pete-pete. 
Jam  (to  press ;  to  squeeze).    Lolcmi. 
Jamb  (a  door-post).    Bo  he  matapa'. 
Jangle  (to  dispute  in  a  quarrelsome  manner).    Ghe. 

VOL.  II.  1 


IMP 

Jargon  (unintelligible  jargon ;  chattering  of  birds).    Cote. 
Javelin.     T£o. 

Jaunt  (to  walk  about ;  to  travel  by  land).     Fono'nga. 
Idea.     L6to :  this  word  rather  means  the  mind,  sentiment, 

or  disposition. 
Idle.     Fucca  bico-bi'co :  (idly)  fucca  bico-bico&nge. 
Jealous.     L6to-mahalo  $  i.  e.  of  a  suspicious  mind. 
Jeer  (to  laugh  at).     Mano6ki;  (a  scoff)  the  same. 
Jerk  (a  sudden  check) .     Hamoochi.  - 
If  (the  conjunction).     Capow ;  ca. 
Ignition  (the  act  of  setting  on  fire).    To6too. 
Ignitible.    To6too  gnofo6a. 
Ignorant  (uninformed ;  untaught).     Lo'to  vale. 
Ill  (bad;  badly).     C6vi;  (sick)  mahagi ;  t6nga-t£ngi;  boo- 

loo'hi.    See  these  several  words. 
Illicit  (contrary  to  the  orders  or  regulations  of  the  chiefi). 

T£boo. 
Illness.    Mahagi ;  tengata'ngi ;  boolo6hi.    See  these  several 

words. 
Illnature.     A'ngi  covi ;  i.  e.  a  bad  disposition. 
Illustration  (explanation).     Fucca  maoo;  (to  illustrate)  the 

same. 
Imbecile.     Vy>-vy'. 

Immature  (unripe,  as  fruit).     Mo6i ;  (youthful)  the  same. 
Immerge  (to  sink  or  plunge  under  water).     Ho6goo. 
Immodest  (shameless;  impudent).     T£i  ma. 
Immortal.     Tai  m&te. 

Immoveable  (uxt;  fast).    Mow  ;  (firm  in  mind)  l6to  mow. 
Impede  (to  hinder  ;  to  cause  to  linger).     Talfi ;  lol6mi. 
Impend.     Tow  hifo. 
Imperceptible  (not  to  be  seen  ;  not  to  be  felt ;  not  sensible ; 

not  under  the  evidence  of  the  senses).     Tai  flaw ;  (not 

to  be  heard)  tai  o  ngo. 


.  INC 

Implacable  (constant  in  enmity).    Fucca  fiVcbi. 

Implicate  (to  entangle).     Fihi-fihi. 

Implore  (to  entreat  pathetically).    .Ta'ogi ;  (to  pray  to  any 

god)  I6too ;  (to  beg  earnestly)  hoo. 
Importunate  (incessantly  soliciting).     Fa  ca'wle. 
Impotent  (weak  in  any  respect).     Vy-vy. 
Imprecate  (to  curse).    Ca'be;  va'nge. 
Impregnate  (to  engender).    Fu'cca  ian6w ;  fucca  feta'ma. . 
Impression  (a  mark  on  any  thing;  an  effect  on  the  mind). 

I16nga. 
Impudent.     Talaho6i ;  tai  ma;  (impudently)  tatahooia'nge. 
In.     Gi  16to. 
Inactive  (lazy;  idle).    Bibico;  (not  doing;  at  rest;  still) 

nofo  noa. 
Incapacious  (not  holding  much ;  narrow).     Low  chi. 
Incautious  (without  looking,  or  paying  attention).     Ta'i 

vacky'.  '  . 

Incense  (to  vex).     Fu'cca  i'ta. 
Incessant.     Tai  to6goo. 
Incidental.      How  noa;    i.  e.  coming    or  happening   by 

chance. 
Incinerate.     Tootoo  ger  6foo. 
Incised.     Mab61e;  mataffa;  (incision)  the  same. 
Incline  (to  be  slanting ;  to  lean  forwards).     Boon6. 
Incloud  (to  become  dark,  or  cloudy).    Fu'cca  boooli. 
Incomplete  (not  whole).     Ta'i  cotoa ;  (unfinished)  ta'i  ochi. 
Incongruous  (unsuitable ;  not  fitting).     Ta'i  ala. 
Inconsiderate  (thoughtless).     Ta'i  maua-too;  i.e.  without 

thought. 
Inconspicuous  (not  discernible).     Ta'i  ilaw. 
Inconstant  (varying ;  unfaithful).     Ta'i  mow. 
Inconsumable  (not  to  be  wasted,  or  consumed).     Tafi  ochi. 
Incorrect  (not  accurate)*    Ta'i  tonoo.  . 
Increase  (to  multiply).    Tooboo  la'hi. 

IS 


INF 

Incredible.  Tai  mooni ;  i.  e.  not  true ;  they  hare  no  other 

word. 
Incubate  (to  hatch).    M6he ;  (incubation)  the  aame. 
Inculcate  (to  instruct).     A'co. 
Inculpable  (in  the  right ;  unblamable).    T6noohia. 

Incurvate  (to  bend).     Fucca  bico. 

* 

Indeed  ?     Co  mooni  ? 

Indefatigable  (unwearied  with  labour).    Ta'i   htia;  L  r. 

not  short  of  breath. 
Indefinite  (unlimited).     Ta'i  ma'oo. 
Indicate  (to  show).    Fucca  ilonga. 
Indication  (a  mark;  a  sign).    I16nga. 
Indigent  (needy;  friendless).     P/a. 
Indigitate  (to  point  out ;  to  shew).  Fu'cca  mam&ta ;  fu'cca  ha. 
Indignant  (angry).    I'ta. 
Indiscernible  (not  to  be  perceived).    Ta'i  iloto. 
Indiscriminately  (without  distinction).     T6i  fucca  ilonga. 
Indisposition.     Mahfigi. 

Indissoluble.     Mow  ;  (not  to  be  untied)  tai  fa  movete. 
Indolent.     Fu'cca  bico-bico. 
Indulgent  (kind  ;  generous).     A'nga  11116. 
Indurate  (to  harden  in  any  way).     Fu'cca  fefcca. 
Inebriate  (to  stupify  with  cava,  or  any  thing  else).    Fu'cca 

caw'na. 
Ineffectual  (weak;  without  power).    Vy-vy. 
Inelegant  (low ;  vulgar).    Fucca  to6a. 
Inevitable.     Tai  halla. 
Inexhaustible.     Tai  ochi ;  i.  e.  without  end. 
Inexplicable.     TaU  fa  fucca  maoo ;  i.  e.  incapable  of  being 

made  plain. 
Inextinguishable.     T&i  fa  mate. 
Inextricable.    Tai  fa  vete. 
Infallible.     Tai  h*lla. 
Infancy.    Lolotonga  he  tamachi ;  i.  e.  daring  childhood. 


INS 

Infant  (of  either  sex).     Tamachi ;  bibigi. . 

Infantile  (childish;  like  a  child).     Fucca  tamachi. 

Infect  (to  taint).    Fucca  61o. 

Infirm.     Vy-vy. 

Inflame  (to  set  fire  to).    Fu'cca  cac&ha. 

Inflammable  (combustible).  Tootoo  gnofooa;  u  e.  easy  to 
burn. 

Inflexible  (hard;  unyielding).    Fef&ca. 

Inform  (to  relate;  to  tell).     Tala;  low. 

lnfoliate  (to  spread  over  with  leaves).    Oo'fi  lo  ac6w. 

Infrigidate.   .  Fu'cca  moco-moco. 

Infuriate  (angry).    Iili. 

Infuse  (to  pour).    Li'ugi. 

Ingurgitate.    F61o. 

Inhabit.    Caky' ;  (inhabitant)  the  same. 

Inhale  (to  draw  in  the  breath).    Mi'chi. 

Initiate.  A'co:  this  word  means  rather,  to  teach,  or  in- 
struct; also,  to  learn; 

1  nland.     Toogoo  oota. 

Inlay.    F6nno. 

Inly  (within).     L6to£nge. 

Inmate.     Cow  n6fo. 

Inmost.    Mamaooange ;  L6to6nge. 

Innumerable.    Tai  fa  low :  i.  e.  cannot  be  counted. 

Inodorous  (having  no  smell,  good  or  bad).     Tai  nan&moo. 

Inquire.    Fehooi. 

Inquisitive.    Fa  fehooi. 

Insane  (mad ;  also  foolish).    Vale. 

Insatiable.    Tai  fa  fi'oo. 

Insensible.    Tai  16to. 

Inseparable.    Tii  v£te. 

Inside.    Gi  16  to. 

Insnare  (to  catch  with  a  trap  or  snare).    Hfle. 

Insolation.    Fu'cca  lafe. 


INV 

Inspect.    Vacky'. 

Inspire  (to  draw  in  the  breath).  Mana'va;  (the  god  inspired 
him)  nai  how  he  hotooa  giate  ia;  i.  e.  the  god  came  to 
him. 

Instep.    TWa  va'e. 

Instillation.    Tooloo  tooloo. 

Instruct.     A'co. 

Intellect.  Lo'to :  this  word  means  the  disposition  and  tem- 
per. 

Intelligible,    llo'a  gnofoo'a ;  ms/oo. 

Intelligibly.     Ilofa  gnofoo'a-a'nge ;  ma'oo-a'nge. 

Inter.    Ta'noo  ;  (interment)  the  same. 

Intercept.     Ta'afi. 

Interchange  (to  barter,  to  trade  with).     Fuccato'w. 

Interdict.     Fu'cca  ta*boo. 

Interdiction  (a  curse).     C4be  ;  (a  prohibition)  tiboo. 

Interior.    Gi  16to. 

Intermingle  (as  fluids).     P&loo. 

Internal.     Gi  16to. 

Interpret  (to  make  clear).     Fucca  m£oo. 

Interrogate.     Fucca  feho6i. 

Interrupt  (to  hinder,  to  stop).     Fucca  toogoo. 

Intersperse.     Fu'cca  f61e. 

Interweave.    Lalinga. 

Intestines.     Gnaco'w. 

Into.     Gi. 

Intolerable.     Tai  cata'gi. 

Intrenchment.     G61e. 

Intrepid.     Tai  ma'navahl ;  tai  ma'navachi' ;  toa. 

Intricate.    Fihi. 

Intrigue  (an  amour).    Fea'ooa'gi. 

Intwine  (to  twist  together).     Fihi-filii. 

Invalid  (weak).  Vy-vy;  (a  sick  person)  mahagi;  taiga* 
tangi ;  booloo'hL     Which  see. 

Invariable.     Mow ;  i.  e.  fixed. 


KEE 

Invert.    Filihi. 

Investigate  (to  enquire  into).     Fehoo'i ;  goo'rai. 

Invigorate.    Fu'cca  mal6hi. 

Invisible  (not  to  be  seen).     Ta'i  ilo'a. 

Invite  (to  entreat).    CaVle. 

Invoke  (to  petition  the  gods).     Lo'too. 

Inward.    Gi  lo'to. 

Join.    Fu'cca  taTia ;  i.  e.  to  make  one. 

Jointly.     Fu'cca  to-o'chi. 

Joke  (to  jest).     Fu'cca  hoo'a;  (a  jest)  ho6a. 

Jollity.    Hoo'a. 

Jolt  (to  jog,  to  shake).     Loo'loo-looHoo. 

Journey  (by  land).     Fono'nga. 

Joy  (gladness).    Fi'a-fi'a. 

Ire.     Li'li. 

Iron.    Oocummea. 

Irrecoverable.    Ta'i  fa  mow  my. 

Irremovable  (fixed).    Mow. 

Irritate  (to  make  angry).    Fu'cca  i'ta. 

Island:  tbey  have  no  word  for  an  island,  except  the  proper 
name  of  it,  or  the  word  fonnoo'a,  land  or  country :  they 
have  no  word  for,  or  idea  of  a  continent. 

Issueless  (without  progeny).     Tai  fano'w. 

Juice.  Vy :  this  word  expresses  any  thing  fluid,  more  espe- 
cially water. 

Juiceless.    Mo/a-mo/a ;  i.  e.  dry. 

Jump  (to  leap,  to  bound).     Hc/bo. 

Just  (applied  to  the  fair  decision  of  a  dispute).  Totonoo ; 
(exact,  fitting)  taoo'nga  malie. 

Just  now.    TVki. 

K. 

Keen  (sharp ;  with  a  good  edge).    Machila. 


LAM 

Keep  (to  detain,  also  to  hold  or  retain).    Tocjgoo. 

Kernel.    Caca'no. 

Kettle  (any  sort,  either  earthen  or  metal).    Goolo. 

Kick.     A'ca. 

Kidney.    A'te  Dili :  (a'te,  the  liver;  tffc,  a  lizard.) 

Kill.    Tamatga;  L  e.  to  strike  to  death. 

Kin  (kindred).     Cataga. 

Kind  (generous,  cordial) «.    A'nga.lill6. 

Kindle.    Fu'cca  cacalia. 

King.    How. 

Kiss.    06ma. 

Kitchen  (a  house  for  cooking).    Beito. 

Kite  (of  paper,  &c.)     L6fa« 

Kitten.     Oohigi  boosi. 

Knee.    To6i. 

Knife.    H61e. 

Knob.    T6boo. 

Knock  (to  strike,  to  hit).    Ta. 

Knot  (to  tie  a  knot).     Naw. 

Knotty  (rough  with  knots,  as  wood  or  string).  T£boo*t£boo. 

Know  (to  understand,  to  perceive).    116a. 

Knowing  (cunning,  wise).    L6to  b6to. 

Knowledge  (wisdom).    B6to. 

L. 

La !    Wool,  or  rather  woi. 

Laborious.    Fa  gnaoo'e;  i.  e.  apt  to  work. 

Labour  (work  of  any  kind).    Gnaoo'e ;  (parturition)  fa€le. 

Lacerate  (to  tear,  to  rend).     Hai. 

Lad.     Tama. 

Ladder.     Too'nga. 

Lake  (any  pond  or  piece  of  water).    A  no. 

Lame.    G6too. 


LEE 

Lament.    Tiagi. 

Lance  (a  spear).    T6o. 

Land  (country).    Fonnoofe ;  oo'ta ;  (to  land)  too  oo'ta. 

Language  (tongue,  dialect).     Lea. 

Languid  (feeble).     Vy-vy  ;  (languidly)  vy-vy$nge. 

Lankness.    Tootoo'e. 

Lard.    Gnaco  he  boo&ca. 

Large.    L&hi. 

:ivious.    Moo/ito/w. 
i.    Hela. 

Last  (ultimate).    Moo'i  obi'to ;  (last  past)  moo  i. 
Lasting.     T6i  too'goo. 
Late.    Taw  moo'i. 
Lately.    To'ki  fy. 
Latent.    Foofoo'. 

Lather  (froth,  foam  of  any  kind).    Cca. 
Lave  (to  bathe ;  to  wash).  Co'wco'w ;  paloo'too ;  foofoo'loo. 
Laugh.    C&ta. 
Launch.    Tolio  gi  ta'hi. 
Lazy.    Fufcca  bico  bfco. 
Leaf.    Lo  acow. 
Leafless.    T4i  low. 

League  (to  join  in  alliance).    Fu'cca  t£ha. 
Leak  (to  let  water  in  or  out).     M&mma. 
Lean.    Tootoo'e. 
Lean  (of  flesh).    Cino  mite. 
Leap  (to  jump,  to  bound).    Ho1x>. 
Learn.    A'co. 
Least.    Chi'ange. 
Leave  (to  separate  from ;  to  divorce).    Chiegi;  (to  leave  a 

place)  too'goo. 
Leavings.    Toe  mea ;  tolnga  mea. 
Lee  (opposed  to  the  windward).    Mool  matingi. 
Leer  (to  look  archly).    Ni'si. 


LIM 

Left  (in  opposition  to  right).  H6ma;  (to  the  left)  gi  h£- 
ma;  (left-handed)  nima  he  ma. 

Leg.    Cow  vie. 

Length.    Lo'a-lo'a;  lolofe.  • 

Less.    Chi'ange. 

Lest  (in  case  that).    Na. 

Let  (to  permit).    Too'goo  be. 

Lethargic.    Fi'a  mo*he. 

Level  (smooth).    McUe-molle. 

Liar.    Ji6na  lo'hi. 

Lick.     E'mo. 

Lid  (a  cover).     Booboo'noo. 

Lie  (to  tell  a  falsity).  Lo'hi ;  (to  press  upon,  being  ex- 
tended horizontally)  toco'to ;  taco'to. 

Life.    Mooo'i. 

Lifeless.    Mate ;  tai  mooo'i. 

Lifetime.    Lolotcnga  lie  mooo'i. 

Lift  (to  raise  up).     Higgi. 

Light  (light  from  the  sun  or  flambeaux,  &c.)     Mama. 

Light  (not  heavy).     Mam 6. 

Light  (to  kindle).     Fu'cca  cacaha. 

Lighten  (to  flash  with  lightning).   '  F6ttatechi'li ;  oohi'la. 

Light-footed.    Ve  vave. 

Lightning.     Oohiia. 

Lights  (lungs).     Mama. 

Like  (in  like  manner).  Tatto'w  ;  tatto'w-be ;  behc ;  (to  be 
fond  of)  manaco. 

Likewise.     Bea;  mo. 

Limb  (a  member).     Alanga. 

.Limb  (to  tear  asunder).    Ha'ichi'a. 

Lime  (calx).     Latie. 

Likely.    Abe\ 

Limit  (or  boundary).     Ma'tta. 

Limy.    La'he  la'he. 


LUC 

Lip.    Lo  gnoctoo. 

Listen.    Fono'ngo. 

Little.    Chi. 

Live.    Mooo'i. 

Liver.     A'te. 

Lizard.     Bi'li ;  mo'co ;  foky' :  there  are  different  species. 

Lo !    Va'cky'  a'nge !  ji'o-a'nge !  mama'ta-a'nge  ! 

Load.     Cav6nga ;  (to  load)  fa'ooa'gi. 

Loft.    Fa'ta. 

Lofty.    Mow  aloo'nga. 

Log.    Toota'nga  aco'w. 

Loin.     Too'a. 

Long.    Lo'a-lo'a;  lolo'a. 

Longevity.    Mooo'i  foo  lea. 

Look !   Va'ckya'nge  !  mama'taa'nge ! 

Look  (to  behold,  to  inspect).     Vacky' ;  mamata. 

Look  (countenance,  appearance).     Fofo'nga. 

Looking-glass.     J  ia'w  ta. 

Loose.    V6te. 

Loquacious.     Gnoo'too  lo'w. 

Loud  (sounding  much).  Fao'ngo;  (noisy)  longo'a;  (loudly) 

longo'aa'nge. 
Love  (affection  in  general) .    OTa ;  (sexual  love,  sentimental 

love,  in  love).    Mama'na. 
Lough  (a  lake).    Vy-a'no. 
Louse.    Goo'too. 
Low  (mean,  vulgar).    Fu'cca  toca ;  (deep,  down)  mow  he 

lalo. 
Lower  (to  look  cloudy).    A'oochi'a;    (to  bring  down,  to 

level)  fucca  mow  be  la'lo ;  (to  reduce,  to  lessen)  fu'cca 

chi. 
Lowness  (degradation).     Fu'cca  too'a ;  (depth)  lolo'to. 
Lucent  (shining,  glittering).  -  Gnignila.  • 
Luck.    Mo'oonoo;  (lucky)  monooi'a. 


MAL 

Ludicrous.     Hoo'a ;  (ludicrously)  gnoofoo  hoot. 

Luff  (to  keep  close  to  the  wind).    Tow  ala. 

Lug  (to  pull  along  with  violence).    TVho. 

Lull  (to  make  sleepy).    Fu'cca  molie. 

Lumpy.    T6boo-t6boo. 

Lungs  (the  pulmonary  organs).    Ma'ma'. 

Lurid  (dark).     Bo-ooli. 

Luscious.    Hoo'olille;  maleca. 

Lusty  (strong).     Malolii;  (lustily)  malo'hia'nge. 

Lutulent  (muddy).     G61e  gelea. 

Luxate  (to  dislocate).     Fachi. 

Lying  along  on  the  ground  with  the  face  downward.  Tacoto 

fu'cca  fooo*hi'fo. 
Lying  along  on  the  ground  with  the  face  upwards.     TtfCoto 

fu'cca  fooo'ha'gi. 

M. 

Macerate  (to  steep  in  water).     Fu'cca-vy. 

Mad  (insane,  foolish,  thoughtless,  silly).     Va'le. 

Maggot.     Ooa'nga;  (magotty)  ooa'ngaia. 

Magnanimous.    Lo'to  fu'cca  tanga'ta. 

Maid  (virgin).    Tahi'ne ;  (a  woman  servant)  cowna'nga. 

Maim  (to  wound  or  hurt  in  any  way).     Fu'cca  lave* ;  (to 

wound  in  battle,  or  with  a  warlike  instrument)  fu'cca 

ca'ffo. 
Main  (ocean).     Mooa'na. 
Make  (to  fabricate).  Gna'hi ;  (to  oblige  or  force ;  to  cause  ; 

to  fashion)  fu'cca. 
Malady.    Mahagi;  (of  Tooi tonga)  booloohi ;  (of  any  other 

chief)  t6nga  ta/ngi. 
Male  (of  the  human  species  or  any  animal).     Tangata. 
Malediction  (curse,  abusive  language).    Va'ngi. 
Malevolence.     Fu'cca  fa'chi. 


MAT 

Mallard  (the  male  of  wild  ducks).    Tolc/a  tanga'ta. 

Malleate  (to  strike  with  any  thing).    Too'gi. 

Mallet  (any  thing  used  at  a  hammer).    Ta'-ta'. 

Maltreatment.    Gnafhi  co'vi. 

Man.    Tanga'ta ;  (manly ;  brave  or  noble,  at  a  man)  fu'eca 

tanga'ta. 
Manducate  (to  chew ;  to  eat).    Lamoo. 
Manful  (brave ;  courageous).    Tote. 
Manifest  (plain ;  clear).    Totofaoo  maoo ;  (to  make  evident) 

fu'eca  toto'noo ;  fucca  maoo. 
Mankind.    Mima. 
Manly.     Fu'eca  tanga'ta. 
Mansion  (dwelling-house ;  any  building).    Falle. 
Manufacturer  (any  artisan).    Toofoo'nga. 
Many.    Lani;  toonga.    See  Todnga. 
Mar  (to  spoil).    MoVmo'w ;  (to  frustrate  a  plan)  ta1& 
Margin  (edge  or  boundary).    Ma'tta. 
Mark  (distinctive  character).    Ilonga ;  (to  mark,  to  score, 

to  scratch)   fucca  ilo'nga:    (marked,  scratched,  Sec.) 

ilotaga. 
Marksman.    Tanga'ta  ma'tta  to'w :  i.  e.  a  man  with  an  eye  to 

aim. 
Marsh  (any  watery  or  wet  ground).    A'no. 
Martial  (warlike).    Ma'tU-maftta  to'w. 
Marvellous  (wonderful;  uncommon).    Fy  g6he. 
Mash  (to  bruize  and  squeeze  together).    Naftoo. 
Mask  (a  covering  for  the  face).    Boolofe. 
Mason.    Toofoo'nga  ta  ma'cea. 
Massiveness  (weight).    Mamaft. 
Mast  (of  any  vessel).    Fa'na. 
Mastication.    Ma/mma. 
Mat  (to  wear).  Gnafti-gna'fi ;  (to sleep  on)  falla ;  (to  thatch 

with)  ba'wla  a  to ;  (to  floor  with)  tacapoV. 


MET 

Match  (to  pair;  to  suit ;  to  be  equal  to).    Fo/cca  tattofw. 

Matchless.   Tal  tattoo. 

Maturative  (ripening).    Fu'cca  raonu/ho. 

Mature  (ripe).    Momolio;  (full  grown)  motoo'a. 

Maw  (stomach).  Gete. 

May-be  (perhaps).     Ab6;  Ny. 

Meagre  (thin,  emaciated).  Tootoce ;  (scanty,  small  in 
quantity)  chi. 

Meal.    Kyna'nga;  gena'nga. 

Meanness  (want  of  generosity).  Pepi'ne  ;  (baseness;  vul- 
garity) fu'cca  too'a. 

Measure  (to  ascertain  length,  depth, or  breadth).     O'tW. 

Meddlesome  (enquiring  into  other  people's  affairs).  Na- 
nivi. 

Meet  (to  encounter  in  the  way).    Feccata'gi ;  feta'gi. 

Mellow  (soft).     Moloo ;  (ripe,  juicy)  momolio. 

Melt  (to  render  fluid) .     Fu'cca  vy. 

Member  (a  limb).     Ala'nga. 

Memento.     Fucca  mana  too. 

Memory.     Mana'too. 

Mendacity  (lymg)«     Lo'hi. 

Mention.     Behe;  tala. 

Merciless.     Ta'i  ofa :  i.  e.  without  love  or  humanity. 

Mercy  (love,  esteem,  kindness,  friendship).     Ofa. 

Mend.     Fu'cca  1U16:  i.  e.  to  make  good. 

Mere  (only).     Be;  ta'ha-be. 

Merry.     Hoo*a. 

Mess  (a  meal).     Gena'nga ;  kyna'nga. 

Message  (information  sent ;  an  errand).     Feco'w. 

Metal  (of  any  kind).     Oocummea. 

Methodical  (in  a  precise  manner ;  according  to  some  rule). 
TVnoo. 

Mettle  (spirit,  bravery).    Lo'to  lalii. 


MIS 

Mew  (to  shut  up).    Booboo'noo ;  (to  mew  as  a  cat)  Urtigi ; 

i.  e.  to  cry  or  weep. 
Micturate.     Mimi. 
Middle.    Loto. 
Middlemost.    Too-lotto. 
Midland.     Lo'to  fonnoo'a. 
Midsea.  '  Lo'to  mooa'na. 
Mien  (air ;  deportment) .     Ma'tta. 

Mild  (in  disposition).     Anga  lille  :  i.  e.  good  disposition. 
Military.     Ma'tta  ma'tta  tow. 
Milk.      Hoo'hoo. 
Million.     Giloo. 

Mince  (to  cut  in  minute  pieces).     Toffi  U/fi. 
Mind  (to  notice,  to  pay  attention  to).     Vacky'. 
Mind  (temper,  disposition).     Lo'to;  atoge. 
Mindful  (careful  and  attentive).    Fu'cca  vacky. 
Mindless  (careless).     Ta'i  vacky'. 
Mine  (my  own).     A'coo. 
Mingle  (to  mix  as  fluids).     Paloo. 
Mire  (mud,  dirt).     Gele;  (to  bemire)  fuccag61e;  (miry,* 

muddy)   gele-gelea. 
Mirror.     Jiaw'ta. 
Mirth.     Hoo'a. 

Misadventure  (mishap;  misfortune).    Mala. 
Misbecome  (to  be  unsuitable).    Tai  a'la. 
Miscarriage    (abortion,  premature  birth).    Fa'now  moo'a ; 

(failure  of  an  undertaking)  halla. 
Mischance.    Mala;  mala'ia. 
Mischief  (any  evil  whatsoever).     Co'vi. 
Mischievous  (having  a  disposition  to  plague  and  molest * 

others).     Pow. 
Miscount  (to  calculate  erroneously).    Low  halla. 
Misfortune.    Ma'la;  mala'ia. 
Misinform  (to  bring  false  intelligence,  to  lie).    Lo'hi 


MOV 

Mismatch.    Tal  a'la  tattcw. 

Miss  (to  make  an  unsuccessful  endeavour).    Ha' 11a. 

Mist  (fog,  vapour).    Haho'w. 

Mistake  (an  error  of  any  kind).    Ha  11a. 

Mistrust  (to  suspect).    Mahalo;  (mist rustless)  tai-mabalo. 

Misty.    Howchia. 

Mix  (to  mingle  fluids).     Pa' loo  ;  (to  mingle  any  thing  eke, 

as  sand)  fucca  ta'ha. 
Moan  (to  grieve,  to  lament).    Tangi:  literally,  to  weep. 
Moat  (ditch).     G6Je. 
Modest  (bashful).    Ma. 
Moist.     Vicoo ;  (to  moisten)  fu'cca  vicoo. 
Mole  (or  mark  in  the  skin),     l'la. 
Monarch.    How. 
Monkey.    They  have  seen  monkeys  on  board  ships,  and 

coll  them  gneli. 
Month  (lunar).    Mahfna. 
Moon ;   moonlight ;  moonshine.     Mahfna. 
Morass.     A'no. 

More  (a  larger  quantity).     Lahiangc. 
Morning.     Hengi-hengi. 
Morrow.     Bo  ngi-bo'ngi. 
Morsel.    Ma'anga. 
Mortal  (belonging  to  this  wsrld,  subject  to  destruction). 

Mama  ;  (deadly)  tai  maoo'i. 
Mosquito.     Na/moo. 
Most.     La/hia'nge;  lahi  obi/to. 
Mother.     Fa'e. 
Motion.     Gnaoo'e. 
Motionless.    Ta'i  gnaoote. 
Motive  (reason,  or  cause  of  conduct).    M6a  fucca  holi ;  (if 

used  in  the  way  of  a  question :  as,  wkai  was  yo*r  mo* 

tivc  t  they  would  express  it  by  the  question,  why  ?) 
Motley  (spotted).    Boofo-boole. 
Moveable.    Tai  mow. 


NAS 

Movement.    Gnao6e. 

Mould  (earth).    G61e-g61e ;  (to  knead,  as  clay)  natoo. 

Moulder  (to  rot  away).     Fu'cca  bo'po. 

Mountain.    MooCnga. 

Mountainous.     Mooo'ngai'a. 

Mourn.    Tangi :  literally,  to  weep. 

Mouse.    Gooma. 

Mouth  (of  any  animal ;  beak  of  a  bird).    Gnoo'too. 

Mouthful.    Ma&nga. 

Much.    L&hi. 

Mud.    Gfle ;  (muddy)  ge!6a. 

Mug  (cup  to  drink  out  of).    Fboo. 

Mullet  (the  fish  so  called).    Canahe. 

Muscle  (a  shell-fish).    Chicoo'coo. 

Muse  (to  be  thoughtful).    Manatoo-natoo. 

Musket.    M6a  fanna  tangata. 

Muster  (to  assemble).    Tanagi. 

Musty.    Bo'po. 

Muzzle.    Gnoo'too. 

Myriad  (ten  thousand).    Mano. 

Myrtle  (a  species  of).    My'ili. 

Myself.    Gi'ta;  ow. 

N. 

Nail  (a  pin;  a  peg).    Fao;  (of  the  fingers)  gn6dje  ntana; 

(of  the  toes)  gn6dje  vie. 
Naked.    Tflefoo'a. 
Name  (an  appellation).    Hingca;   (to  give  a  name  to) 

fucca  hingo'a. 
Nape  (of  the  neck).    Too/a  gi'a. 
Narration  (discourse ;  relation).    Low. 
Narrow.    Low  cbi ;  i.  e.  of  small  expanse. 
Natty.    Fucca  lia-lia. 

vol.  ii.  m 


NIK. 

Nation  (a  people ;  a  country).    Fonnooto. 

Nativity.    Fano'w. 

Navel.    Bi'to. 

Naught  (nothing  worth).    T&i  6oonga. 

Navigate  (to  sail ;  to  travel  by  water).    Fel(Kw. 

Navy  (fleet  of  canoes).    Felo'w. 

Nay.    Iky'. 

Neap  tide.    Ta/hi  mam&ha ;  i.  e.  sea  empty. 

Near  (stingy ;  mean).    Pepi'ne ;  (close  at  hand)  o&. 

Necessaries  (requisites).    Mca  aoonga. 

Necessary.     A'oonga. 

Necessitous  (poor;  destitute).     Taca'be. 

Neck.    Gi'a. 

Necklace.    Ca'hooa;  cacala. 

Needle.     Hoo'i. 

Needless  (useless).    Tati  a/oonga. 

Nephew  (also  niece).    Mocoboo/ha. 

Nerveless  (weak).     Vy-vy. 

Nest.     Falle  ma'noo. 

Nestling.     Oohi'gi  ma'noo. 

Net  (to  fish  with  a  net).    Cobenga ;  (to  make  nets)  jk  c* 
benga;  (a  net)  cobenga. 

Never.     Iky7. 

New.     Foo-o';  (newly;  of  late)  to'ki. 

News  (rumours;  reports).     Ongo. 

Nibble.     To'chi-tochi. 

Nick  (to  notch).     Mato'chi. 

Niggardly.    Pepi'ne. 

Nigh  (close  at  hand).    Ofi;  (nearly ;  almost)  t6t& 

Night     Bo-ocli. 

Nightly.    Fu'cca  bo-ooli. 

Nimble  (quick;  agile).    Vave;  (nimbly)  v»/ve-*'Bg*. 

Nine.     Hi'va. 

Nineteen.    Ongefooloo  ma  hi'va. 


0B8 

Ninety.    Hfvg  oogofoofoa. 

Nipple.    Ma'tU  he  hoolioo. 

Nit  (of  a  louse).    Lilw, 

No.    Iky. 

Nobody.     Ik/taTia. 

Nocturnal.    Fu'cca  bo-ooli. 

Noiae.     Longo/a  ;  (noiiy)  fucca  longo/a. 

Noueleu.     Ta'i  longo'a ;  urt  (Vngo. 

None.     Iky  talia. 

Nonsense.    Low  no'a;  i.  e.  unmeaning  talk. 

Noow.    Naw  hole. 

Note.    11km. 

Notch.    Mato'chi-to'chi. 

Novel.    Foo-o". 

Nourish  (to  feed;  to  aftard  nourishment),     FatVngn. 

Nourishment  (food).    Mea  ky. 

Nucleus  (the  kernel,  or  core  of  any  thing).    Cacano. 

Nudity.     TelefWa. 

Number  (to  count).    Low. 

Numberless.     Tal  fa  low. 

Numerable.    Fa  low. 

Nutritive  (nourishing  ;  fattening),     fu'cca  dirno. 


Oar  (or  paddle).     Fotie. 

Oath.    Foo  be  cs/ta.    See  Foo. 

Obdurate  (hard-hearted).    Ca'no  gnata/. 

Obliterate   (to  rub  out  any  mark,  or  trace;  to  forget). 

Fu'cca  gi  tlo. 
Oblong.     Foogt  io'a-lffa. 
Obacene  (immodeit;  lewd).    Tal  ma;  (filthy;  dirty)  fucca 

lia-lia. 


OME 

Obscure  (dark).     B6-o61i ;  (to  darken)  fooca  b*-oc4L 

Obscurely.    Bo-o61ia'nge. 

Obsequies  (funeral  rites).    Mea  bootoo. 

Observe  (to  notice ;  look  at).    Vacky. 

.Obstacle  (any  impediment).     TafefL 

Obstinate  (perverse).    Pafago. 

Obstruct  (to  throw  obstacles  in  the  way).    Talfi. 

Obtain  (to  procure ;  to  get).    Mow. 

Obtainable.    Fa  mow. 

Obtund  (to  blunt).    Futeca  becoo. 

Obtuse  (blunt).    Becoo ;  (obtusely)  becooatage. 

Obvert  (to  turn  upwards;  to  turn  on  one  side';  to  throw 

over).    Filihi. 
Obviate  (to  prevent;  to  hinder).    Talfi. 
Obvious.    Ho'a  gnofoo'a. 
Occecation  (the  act  of  blinding).    Fu'cca  gool. 
Occiput  (the  back  of  the  head).    Mo&\  ooloo. 
Occursion  (a  clash ;  a  mutual  blow).     PatoC. 
Ocean.    Mooa'na. 

Odd  (uncommon).    Fy  g6he ;  sesele. 
Odious  (disagreeable  to  the  sight).    Fu'cca  li'a  li'a. 
Odour  (good  or  bad  smell).    Nana'moo. 
Off  (at  a  distance).     Mama'ooa'nge. 
Offend.     Fu'cca  ita. 

Offset  (a  sprout  from  the  root  of  a  plant).     Hoo'ii. 
Offspring  (children;  progeny  of  any  animal).     Fano'w. 
Ogle.    Nisi. 
Oh!  (an  exclamation  of  pity,  or  pain).    Oia'oo6!  (of 

der,  or  amazement)  oia'oo !  (an  exclamation  of 

as,  oh  that !  would  to  God!  let  but!)  oTa-bl. 
Oil.     Loio  ;  fa'ngo ;  (oily)  lolo-lolo. 
Old  (as  a  man,  woman,  canoe,  &c).    Motooto;  (ancient; 

long  ago)  loa. 
Omen.    Ma'na;  uVnga. 


O  YS 

Fu'cca  iloliga. 
On  (above).    Gi  aloo'nga. 
Once.    Talia  be. 
One.    Taflia. 

One-eyed.    Ma/tu  tefoca. 
Only.    Be. 

Open  (to  unclose;  to  uncover).    Taw;  (unclosed;  unco- 
vered ;  not  shut)  tai  booboo'noo. 
Open-hearted.    A'nga  HU6. 
Opening  (a  hole ;  a  crack  j  a  crevice).    A'va. 
Opinion.    Loto. 

Oppressive  (mercfless).    Tai  o'fa. 
Option.    Fill ;  fy  telfoa. 
Or.    Bea. 
Oration.    Fotio. 
Ordnance.    Mea  fa'nna  fonnoou. 
Ordure.    Ta'c:  mea  co'vi. 
Overtake  (to  come  up  with ;  to  catch).    Mow. 
Overturn.    Filftii. 

* 

Overwhelm  (to  crush).    Lylgi ;  (to  bury)  tafaoo. 

Our.    Mow;  tow. 

Ourselves.    Mo'wooa;  mo'wtoioo;  to'wooa ;  tow-tdoo. 

Out  (outside).    Gi  toCa. 

Outlandish.    Mooli. 

Outlet.    A'va. 

Outlive.    MoWi  lo'a-ange. 

Outmost.    Gi  too*  obi'to. 

Outside.    Gi  too'a ;  (outwardly)  gi  tooa-ange. 

Outworn.    Mo*winow. 

Owl.    Looloo. 

Own  (to  tell ;  to  acknowledge).    Tola. 

Oyster.    To'fe. 


PAS 

V 

p. 

Pace  (to  step ;  a  step).    T£bi. 
Pacification.    Fu'cca  H11& 

Paddle  (to  play  in  the  water).  A'noo  auoo ;  (a  sort  of  oar) 
fohe. 

« 

Pain  (hurt;  disagreeable  feeling).  MamaTii;  (to  pain)  fucca 
mamalii. 

Painfully.    Mama'hia'nge. 

Painless.     Ta'i  mamalii. 

Pair  (a  couple).     Gnahca. 

Palatable.    Hoo'aliU6. 

Pale  (pale  in  the  face).  Ma'tta  t6a;  (of  a  light,  or  pale 
colour)  hina-hina. 

Palm  (of  the  hand).    A'fe  ni'raa. 

Palpitate.     Patoo'. 

Pappy  (soft).    Moloo. 

Parcei  (to  separate).     Whe. 

Parch  (to  scorch).     Mahoo'noo. 

Paring  (rind j  bark;  skin).     Gili. 

Parity  (similarity ;  likeness).     Tatto'w. 

Parley  (conversation).    Talano'a. 

Parsimonious  (stingy  ;  mean).  Pepi'ne ;  fucca  motoofe  taa- 
ga'ta. 

Part  (to  separate,  or  go  from ;  to  divide).  Whe ;  (to  part 
persons  quarrelling ;  to  suppress  a  quarrel)  Ta'afi. 

Part  (portion  of  any  thing).  Bo'too ;  (piece  of  any  thiof 
to  eat)  conga. 

Particular  (fastidious ;  whimsical).  Fy  gch# :  aealle ;  (in  par- 
ticular) be. 

Partition  (a  fence  of  any  sort).     A. 

Party-coloured.     Boole- boo'le. 

Pass  (road).     A'looa'nga;  halla. 

Passage  (by  sea),     FeloV. 


PER 

Passion  (anger).    Ita;  lMi. 
Passionately  (angrily).    I'taange;  li'lia'nge. 
Pass  (to  go).    Aloo. 
Pat  (to  slap).     Chi'bi. 
Path.    Halla. 
Pathless.    Ta'i  halla. 
Patience  (rather  fortitude).    Cata'gi. 
Pave  (to  floor  with  stones).     FaJi'gi  ma'cca. 
Pause  (to  stop ;  to  desist ;  to  wait).    Tatali. 
Paw.    Va'e. 
Peace.    Lille*. 
Peaceful.    Lo'ngo-lo'ngo. 

Peak  (of  a  mountain,  or  hill).    Foo'nga  mooonga. 
Pearl.     Ma'tta  he  to'fe. 
Peasant.    Ky  fonnooa. 

Peculiar  (peculiar  to;  proper  to).     A'ngy'-be. 
Peculiarity  (an  uncommon  circumstance).    Mea  gehe. 
Pedicular  (lousy).    Gootoo'a. 

Peel  (to  strip  the  rind  off  any  thing).  Folii-folii;  (the  peel- 
ing, skin)  gili. 
Peep  (to  pry  into).     Fu'cca  ji'o. 
Peerless.    Ta'i  tatto'w. 
Peg  (a  nail).    FaU 
Pelt  (to  throw  at).    Li'chingi'a. 
Pendent  (hanging;  jutting  over).    Tafoobe. 
Penis,    Oo1e. 
Fensife.    Manatoo-na'too. 
Penurious.    Pepi'ne ;  fucca  motoo/a  tanga'ta. 
Penury  (poverty).    Taca*be. 
People  (inhabitants).    Cak/ ;  (a  nation)  fonnooa. 
People  (to  populate).    Fu'cca  caky'. 
Perceivable  (perceptible  to  any  of  the  senses).    Failaw. 
Perfect  (whole).    Coto'a. 
Perfect  (to  finish).    Fu'cca  ofchi. 
Perfidy. .  Lofo  co'vi. 


PIN 

Perforate.    Fu'cca  arra. 

Perform.    Fy. 

Perfume  (sweet  odour,  or  smell).  Namoo  cacala;  (ta 
scent)  fucca  na'moo  cacala. 

Perhaps.     Ab6. 

Perish  (to  wither  or  die  away).    Ma'te. 

Perjury.     Foo'a  cava  lolii. 

Permanent.     Tolo'nga. 

Perpend  (to  consider,  to  ruminate  on  something  past,  to 
search  the  memory).     Fili  he  lo'to. 

Perpendicular.     Too  U/noo ;  foccatoo'. 

Perpetual.    Tati  too  goo. 

Perspire  (to  sweat).    Cacara. 

Perspiration  (sweat).    Cacfiva. 

Petition  (to  entreat).  Caw'le  ;  (to  beg  with  great  earnest- 
ness) hoo :  (an  entreaty)  cawle ;  boo. 

Petty  (little,  trifling).     Momo'i. 

Petulant  (saucy,  impertinent).    Talahoo'i. 

Phantom  (ghost,  apparition).     Hotoo'a. 

Phrase  (a  saying).     Cana'nga. 

Phrenetic  (mad,  delirious).     Vale. 

Pick  (to  choose).     Fi'li  fili. 

Piece  (speaking  of  food).  C6nga;  (portion  of  any  thing 
else)  bo'too'. 

Piercer  (a  gimblet,  brad-awl,  &c.)  Vi'li. 

Pig.     Eooa'ca. 

Pile  (heap,  hillock).  Too'nga;  (to  pile,  to  heap  up)  foe- 
cato6. 

Pilfer.    Kyha'. 

Pillage.    V6te. 

Pillar  (post).     Bo. 

Pillow  (to  lay  the  head  on).    Kali ;  aloo'nga. 

Pimple.    Foo'a  fooa. 

Pin.     Hoo'i. 

Pincers  (forceps  of  any  kind,  tongs,  &e.).    Alnga. 


PLE 

Finch  (to  squeeze,  to  nip).  Low;  (to  be  sparing  or  fru- 
gal) fucca  motoo'a  tangata. 

Pine-apple.    Fy'gna-pu'. 

Pismire.     Lo ;  (the  large  black  ant)  loa'ta. 

Piss.     Mftni. 

Pit.     Loo'-o. 

Pitch  (tar,  gum,  &c.  or  any  thing  of  that  nature).  Boo4oo  : 
the  name  o^  the  gum  of  the  bread-fruit  tree,  with 
which  they  close  the  seams  of  canoes. 

Pitch  (to  throw,  also  a  particular  game  so  called).    Tolo. 

Pitfall.    Lovosa'. 

Pity  (commiseration).  O'fa:  this  word  also  means  a  fel- 
low-feeling, hence,  love,  esteem,  friendship,  mercy,  &c; 
(to  pity)  ger  o/fa. 

Placid.    Lol^ngo. 

Place  (situation,  post,  station).    A'nga. 

Plain  (flat).  La'fa  la'fa ;  lalaTa:  (clear,  evident)  ma'oo ;  to- 
to/noo. 

Plainly  (with  truth).     Moo'nia'nge. 

Plainly  (smoothly).    Molle-mo'llea'nge. 

Plait  (to  twist,  te  twine  together).     Fi. 

Plane  (to  smooth).    Fu'cca  mo'lle-mo'lle. 

Planet  (either  star  or  planet).    Fetoo'. 

Plank  (a  board  of  any  sort).    Low  pa'pa. 

Plant  (any  shrub  or  small  vegetable;  a  tree).    Foo  aco*w. 

Plant  (to  set  in  the  ground).     Taw. 

Plantain.    Mama'e. 

Plantation  (farm,  landed  property).    Fonnoo'a;  abi. 

Play  (to  sport).    Fu'cca  va. 

Please  (to  delight  the  mind).  Fu'cca  fi'a  fi'a;  (to  please 
sensually) ;  fu'cca  malfca;  (if  you  please)  fold. 

Pleasure  (mental  pleasure).  Fia*fia;  (bodily  pleasure)  raa- 
l&a. 

Plebeian  (one  of  the  lowest  class).    Too'a. 


POS 

Plenty  (much,  abundance).     La'hi. 

Pliant  (soft,  flexible).    Moloo. 

Pluck  (to  snatch  forcibly).  Hamoo'chi ;  (to  gather,  at  fruity 

flowers,  Sec.)  toll. 
Plug  (to  cork  or  stop  up  witb  any  thing).    Oomo'chi. 
Plumage  (feathers).    Fooloo-fooloo. 
Plump  (fat,  in  good  condition).     Chrno. 
Plunder  (to  rob,  spoil,  &c.)    Vete ;  (to  steal,  thieve)  kyha'. 
Plunge  (to  sink  suddenly  in  any  fluid).    Hoo'goo. 
Pluvial  (rainy,  wet,  moist).    Vi'coo. 
Point  (fine  end  to  any  thing).  Ma'tta:  (to  point,  or  make  a 

sharp  point)  fu'eca  ma'tta ;  (to  point  the  finger)  toohoo. 
Pointed  (sharp).    Machila. 
Pointless  (blunt).     Becoo. 
Poison.    Fu'eca  ca'wna. 

Poke  (to  grope  about  in  the  dark),     Fa'-fa'  he  booo'li. 
Polish   (brightness).     Gnignila;  (to  brighten)   fu'eca  gni- 

gni'la ;  (to  smooth)  fu'eca  molle-molle. 
Pompous  (lofty,  chief-like).     Ma'tta-ma'tta  egi. 
Pond  (lake  or  piece  of  water).     Vy;  ano. 
Ponder  (to  consider).     Manatoo. 
Ponderous.     Mama'fa. 
Pool  (a  lake  of  standing  water).     A 'no. 
Populace.     Ky  fonnoo'a. 
Populous.     Caky'. 
Pork.     Booa'ca. 
Portion   (part  of  any  thing).     Bo'too;  (a  piece)   conga; 

(share  or  allowance)  ina'chi. 
Portliness  (chieflike  .appearance).     Ma'tta  ma'tta  6gi. 
Position.  Nofoa'nga  ;  from  nofo,  to  stay  or  dwell;  and  tag*, 

a  place  :  i.  e.  a  staying  or  dwelling-place. 
Possible  (that  which  may  be).     Fa-ry\ 
Post.     Bo ;  (a  post  to  fasten  a  canoe  to)  to'co ;  (station) 

no'foo'anga  too'nga. 


PRE 

Posteriors.    L6moo;  oo-chi. 

Pot  (to  drink  out  of),     lboo;  (to  cook  victuals  in)  goo'lo. 

Potatoe  (the  sweet  potatoe).    Gooma'Ia. 

Pot-bellied  (large  bellied,  in  consequence  of  having  eaten 
something  tabooed).    Foola. 

Potent  (strong).    Malo'hi. 

Potently.     Malo'hia  nge. 

Pour  (as  a  fluid).     Lingi. 

Pout  (to  look  cross  or  angry).    Fucca  ita ;  matta-matta  ita. 

Powdery  (covered  with  dust,  &c.)     E'foo-eToo ;  eTooia. 

Powerful  (strong).    Malo'hi;  (large)  lalii. 

Powerless  (weak).     Vy'-vy':  i.  e.  like  water. 

Practice  (custom,  habit,  &c.)     A'nga ;  fucca. 

Practise  (to  exercise  oneself  in  any  art).     Aco. 

Pragmatical  (rather  meddling  with  other  people's  business, 
talking  about  other  people's  affairs).    Nani'vi. 

Praise.    Mava'va. 

Prate  (to  talk  foolishly  about  what  one  does  not  understand). 
Lo'w  no'a. 

Prattle.    Lea  fu'eca  tamachi'. 

Pray  (to  petition  the  gods).    Lotoo;  (to  beg,  to  entreat) 
hoo;  (pray  do)  ft/ki. 

Precede.    Moo'a  moo'aa'nge. 

Precedent  (former).    Moo'a ;  moo'a  moo'a. 

Precedence.    Moo'a ;  moo'a  moo'a. 

Precious  (valuable).  Mow  gna'ta :  i.  c.  difficult  to  be  ob- 
tained. 

Precise  (nice,  exact).    Toto'noo. 

Pregnant  (with  child).    Feta'raa. 

Prepuce.    Lo-oole ;  lolo  oo'Ie. 

Present  (with  me).  No'fo  my  ;  from  nofo  to  dwell  or  exist, 
and  my  near  me ;  (with  you)  no'fo  6too ;  aftoo,  with  you, 
or  near  you ;  (with  them)  nofoange  ;  a  nge,  with  him. 

Present  (a  gift).     Mea  fooa'gi ;  fooa'gi;  (to  present  or  give) 


PRO 

my,  atoo,  angi.     See  these  words  in  the  other  Vocabu- 
lary. 
Presently  (by  and  by).    Marwquaw. 
Presl  (to  squeeze).     Lolo'mi ;  (to  urge  a  request)  ca'wle. 
Pretty.    Lille  ;  ocotfooa,  pretty  as  a  woman,  a  pretty  woman. 

ToUcateca,  a  handsome  man,  a  fine  man :  this  word  is 

frequently  applied  by  way  of  metaphor,  to  plants,  trees, 

birds,  &c. 
Prevalent  (strong).    MaloTii ;  (frequent,  common)  fa. 
Prevent  (to  hinder,  to  obstruct).    Ta'afi ;  lolomi. 
Previously  (beforehand).  '  Moo'a  raoo'a  a'nge. 
Prick  (to  puncture).    Hoolioo. 
Prickle  (thorn,  splinter,  &c)     Talla;  (prickly,  thorny,  full 

of  thorns)  tallai'a. 
Pride  (in  dress  or  appearance).    Toma;  (in  conduct  or 

speech)  low  cow. 
Priest.     Fa'be-gehe. 
Prime)  morning.     H6ngi-h6ngi. 
Primitive  (prior  in  point  of  place  or  time).  Moo'a;  oolooa'gi; 

tomoo'a. 
Principally.     La'hiatoge. 
Prisoner.     Boboola. 
Prithee.     Foki. 
Private.     Foofoo'. 
Proceed  (to  walk,  or  go  on).     Alooa'nge;  (to  continue  s 

discourse,  or  performance)  fyange. 
Procumbent  (lying  down  flat).  Tacoto. 
Procurable.     Fa  mow. 

Procure  (to  obtain,  to  catch  hold  of).     Mow. 
Prodigality  (wasteful  extravagance).     Mo'wmo'w. 
Productive  (as  a  land,  or  country).    MoWi;  (as  a  plant,  or 

tree)  fa  foo'a ;  (as  any  animal  species)  fa  fano'w. 
Profanation.     Mo'wmo'w  mca  fu'cca  egi. 
Progeny  (offspring,  children).     Fano'w. 


PUP 

Prohibit.    Fu'cca  ta4>oo ;  (prohibition)  ts/boo. 

Prolix  (tedious  in  discourse).    Too'goo  lota. 

Prominent  (from  small  knots,  or  lumps).  Tcboo;  (swelling, 

protuberant;  applied  chiefly  to  diseased  swellings)  foo- 

foola. 
Promiscuous  (confused,  mingled,  without  design).     Felle- 

no'a. 
Promontory.    Mood  tolo  to'lo. 
Prompt  (quick,  sudden,  apt).     Va've. 
Prone  (bent  down).     Boono'  hi'fo. 
Proof  (evidence,  demonstration).     Fucca  moo'ni. 
Proper  (fit ;  suitable.)     A'la. 
Prosperity.    Monooi'a. 
Prostrate.    TeggerfiU 
Protuberant.    Foofoo'la.     See  Prominent. 
Proud  (in  dress,  or  appearance).     To'ma;  (in  conduct  or 

speech)  hywcow;  (in  respect  of  rank  or  ability)  fia  fia. 
Prove  (to  essay,  to  endeavour,  to  ascertain).     Aht-a'hi. 
Proverb  (any  common  or  trite  saying).    Cana'nga. 
Provide  (to  obtain  beforehand).    Mow. 
Provident  (cautious).    Vacky'. 
Provision  (food).    Mea  ky. 
Provoke  (to  irritate,  to  make  angry),    Fu'cca  i'ta ;   fucca 

1FIL 
Prow  (the  head  of  a  canoe,  &c.)     Tow  moo*. 
Pry  (to  peep,  to  look  into).    Fucca  ji'o. 
Puerile  (after  the  manner  of  a  child).     Fucca  ta*machi'. 
Pull  (to  drag,  to  draw).    ToTio. 
Pullet.     Mo'a  mood. 

Pulverize  (to  reduce  to  dust).    Fucca  6foo. 
Pumice.    Foo'afooa'nga. 
Punctual  (exact  in  time).    Totaoo. 
Punish  (to  castigate,  to  reprove,  to  scold).     Towtea. 
Pupil  (of  the  eye).     Ca'no  e  ma'tta. 
Puppy.     Oohigi  gooli. 


RAI 

Purchase  (to  obtain  by  exchange).    Fuccato%. 

Pure  (clear,  free  from  stain  or  fault).    Ma. 

Purify  (to  make  clean,  or  clear).    Fucca  ma. 

Pursue  (to  chase).    Tooli. 

Pus  (purulent  matter,  corruption)     Bela. 

Pusillanimity.    Foi. 

Puss  (a  cat).    Boo'si. 

Pustule  (boil,  pimple,  phlegmon).     Foo'a-foo'a. 

Put  (to  place,  lay,  impose).    Y. 

Putrid  (corrupt,  stinking).     Eho;  elo. 

Q. 

Quagmire.     Too'gooa'nga  gele. 

Quake  (to  tremble,  to  shake).     Teteini. 

Quarrel.    Ghe. 

Quarrelsome.    Loto  i*a. 

Queen  (the  chief  wife  of  the  How).    ChiniToo. 

Queer  (unusual,  odd).    Ge'he. 

Quench  (to  put  out  as  fire).     Ta  ma'te. 

Question  (an  interrogation).     Fehoo'i. 

Quick  (speedy,  swift).     Vave;  (quickly)  vave  ange. 

Quicken  (to  animate,  or  reanimate).  Fucca  moood ;  not  used 

in  respect  to  the  foetus  in  utero. 
Quiet  (not  wandering).  No'fomow;  (contented,  peaceable) 

lo'ngo-lc/ngo. 
Quiet  (to  calm).     Fucca  longo  longo ;  fucca  lolo'ngo. 
Quite  (perfectly,  to  the  utmost).    Obi'to. 

R. 

Race  (line,  descent,  progeny).     Fano'w;  (a  running  matcb) 

fea'fe. 
Racket  (confused  noise).    Longo'a. 
Radiant  (splendid,  shining).     GnigniTa. 
Rage.    Li'lij  i'ta. 
Rail  (a railing,  or  fence).    A. 


REC 

Rain.    Oolia;  (rainy)  ooliai'a. 

Rainbow.    This  word  is  forgotten. 

Raise  (to  lift  up).     Hi'ggi. 

Rancid.    Namooa'. 

Rancour  (inveterate  hatred).    Fu'cca  fa'chi-fachi. 

Random  (wandering,  ill-directed,  without  intention).  No*. 

Ransack  (to  despoil).    V6te. 

Rap  (to  strike,  to  hit).    Ta. 

Rape.    Torho-to/ho :  i.  e.  to  drag  by  force ;  (to  ravish  a  fe- 
male prisoner  of  war)  ttnogia. 

Rapid.     Vave;  (rapidly)  vavea'nge. 

Rare  (scarce,  peculiar).    Fy  gehe. 

Rasp  (any  kind  of  rasp,  or  file).    Gili;  (to  rasp  or  file) 
gili'chi. 

Rat  (or  mouse).    Gooma'. 

Ravenous.    Hoo'a  ky. 

Raw.    Awta-aw'ta.    See  Aufta. 

Razor.    T61e. 

Reach  (to  extend  to).    Tow;  (to  vomit)  loo*. 

Readily  (easily).    Fygnofooaa/nge. 

Ready  (in  point  of  preparation).  Teoo;  (willing)  paguo- 
foo'a. 

Real  (true;  unfeigned).    Mckmi. 

Re-ascend.    To'e  alooha'ge ;  (to  climb  up  again)  to'e  ca'ca. 

Reason  (motive,  or  cause  of  conduct).  Mea  fu'cca  hcli ; 
(the  rational  faculty)  they  have  no  express  word  or 
phrase  for  this  faculty ;  perhaps  Idto,  mind,  or  wuuuUcfo, 
thinking,  might  be  used  for  it. 

Reave  (to  take  by  stealth).  Kyha';  (to  take  by  violence) 
faoo. 

Rebuke  (to  chide).    Tow  t&. 

Recent  (of  late ;  new).    Foo-o'. 

Reckon  (to  count ;  to  calculate).    Low. 

Recollect,    liana'too ;  fili  he  loto;  L  e.  to  search  the  mind. 


REN 

Recount  (to  relate).     Talanca;  low. 

Recreant  (cowardly).     Fofl. 

Red.    Coola-coola. 

Reduce  (to  make  lest).    Fu'cca  chi'ange.  ■ 

Reed.    Ca'ho. 

Reef  (a  shelf  of  rocks).    Haha'nga. 

Refection  (repast;  meal).     Gena'nga. 

Refractory   (stubborn).       Ca'no-gnata' ;    literally,  bard  of 

heart,  or  of  flesh. 
Refresh  (to  recreate).    Fu'cca  malolo'. 
Refulgent  (bright ;  sparkling;  glaring).     Gnignila. 
Regain  (to  get  again).     Tot  mow. 
Regal.    Malta  matta  egi. 

Region  (a  country ;  a  tract  of  land).     Fonnooa. 
Rehear.     Toi  fouo'ngo. 
Rejoice  (to  be  glad).     Fra  fi'a. 
Rekindle.     To'i  totvtoo. 
Relate  (to  narrate).     Ta'lo;  low. 

Relation  (kindred).     Tehrna;  (a  narration)  talanon;  low. 
Relentless  (impi  tying  ;  merciless).     Ta'i  ofa. 
Relinquish  (to  give  up).    Too  goo. 
Relish  (taste).     Hoo'a. 

Reluctant  (unwilling  and  obstinate).     PagnaU'. 
Remain  (to  continue).     No'fo. 
Remainder.     To'e. 

Remedy  (to  remove  a  complaint).     Taw. 
Remember  (memory).     Mana'too;  (to  recollect)  mana'too; 

fill  he  lota ;  i.  c.  to  search  the  mind. 
Remind.     Fucca  mana'too. 
Remnant  (what  is  left).     To'e. 
Remorseless.     Ta'i  o>fa. 
Remote.     Mama'oo. 
Removed  (separated).     Gehe. 
Rend  (to  tear  asunder).    Ha'i ;  (rent  asunder)  mahal-hai 


RIL 

Repast.    Gena'nga. 

Replete.    Br*to. 

Report  (news).     Ongo;  low. 

Repose  (sleep).    Mofe*;  (rest  from  fatigue)  malo'16. 

.    Taco'to. 

Reprehend.    Towtea. 

Repudiate  (to  divorce).     Chia/gi ;  i.  e.  to  throw  away. 

Request  (an  entreaty).    Ca'wle;  (to  ask';  solicit,  Ac.)  the 

same. 
Resemblance.    Tattcw. 
Resentful.    Fu'cca  fa'chi-feTchi. 
Residence  (a  place  of  abode).    Nofoataga. 
Reside.     No'fo. 
Residue.     Toe. 

Resound  (to  echo;  to  sound).     Ongo. 
Respire  (to  breathe ) .    Maoe/va ;  (to  rest  from-  toil)  malo'16. 
Resplendent.    Gnignila. 

Rest  (repose  after  fatigue).    Mak/lo';  (sleep)  mo'he. 
Restless.    Tai  fa  mo'he. 

Retain  (to  keep ;  preserve).    Too/goo ;  (to  continue)  no'fo. 
Retard  (to  hinder).    Ta'afi. 
Retch  (to  vomit).    Loo's. 
Retired  (hidden).    Foofoc 
Return  (to  come  back).    Tafo'kw 
Revenge.    Fucca  fa'chi-fa^cbi. 
Review  (to  examine).    Vacky  ;  (to  review  military  forces) 

fuccat6.  .  . 

Revive.    Fu'cca  mooo/i. 
Reunite  (to  join  again).    7o$  fuocfc  tafoa. 
Rib.     Hoo'i  palalooloo.    .     . 
Rifle  (to  pillage).    V6te. 
Right  (just;  straight).    Toto'noo;  (the  right  hand)  nima 

mato'w. 
Rill  (a  running  stream)*    Vy  ts'fe*..   . 

vol.  it.  n 


RUM 

Kim  (edge ;  brink).    Ma'tta. 

Rind  (bark).    Gill ;  (husk)  booloo ;  (to  skin)  rVhi ;  (to  strip 

the  husks  off  cocoa-nuts)  hofca. 
Ring  (a  circle).    Mamma;  (tortoise-shell  rings,  worn  on 

the  fingers  or  thumb)  mamma  oo'no. 
Ringworm.    Lafla. 
Rip  (to  tear).    Hal-ha'i. 
Ripe  (as  fruit ;  full  grown);    Momofah 
Rise.    Toobooanga. 

Rise  (to  get  up).    Too ;  (to  grow  ;•  to  incvease>  too*boo». 
Risible.    Fu'ccaca'ta. 
Road.    Halla. 
Roam  (to  wander).    H6e. 
Roar.    Fucca  longo'a. 
Rob.    £yha'. 

Robust  (strong;  sinewy).    Malolii. 
Rock.    Foo  ma'cca. 
Rocky.    Ma'cca-ma'cca ;  ma'ccai'a. 
Roll  (to  enwrap).    Takky';  (as  a  ball,  wheel,  &c.)  tfau 
Roof  (of  a  house).    IWa  falle ;  (to  cover  with  a  roof;  to 

thatch)  a'to. 
Root  (of  a  tree;  plant,  Sec).    A'caj-  teffto;  (to  take  root) 

too1>oo ;  (to  tear  up  by  the  roots)  ta'agi. 
Rotten  (unsound).    Bo/po. 
Round  (orbed).    Foofe  bo'to-bo'to. 
Rough  (rugged).    Papa'ta. 
Rouse  (to  awake).    A'a. 
Route.    Halla. 

Row  (to  impel  with  paddles,  or  oars).    Towalo. 
Rub  (to  exercise  friction).    Mi'li. 
Rubify.    Fu'cca  coo4a-coo/la. 
Rudder.    Fohe  oolli  j  i.  e.  a  steering  paddle. 
Rugged  (rough).    Papata. 
Ruminant  (musing ;  thinking).    Minatoonatoo.  • 


SCA 

Rumour.    O'ngo;  low. 

Rump  (the  buttock*).    L&noo;  (of  a  fowl)  mo6i  he  m£a. 

Run  (to  more  with  a  swift  pace).    Lelle:  (to  run  a  race) 

fetfe;  (to  run  at  water ;  to  stream)  tafe. 
Ruthless.    Tfii6&. 


S. 

Sable  (any  dark  colour).    06li. 

Sack  (to  plunder).    Vete. 

Sacred.    Fucca  <gi. 

Sage  (wise).    L6to  b6to» 

Sail.    La;(tosail)fel6w. 

Sailor.    Toty. 

Saliva.    A'noo. 

Sally  (to  go  forth).    Fucca  hifo. 

Salt.    Masima;  (to 'preserve  with  salt)  fucca  roasima. 

Salute  (by  kissing).    Ooma;  fekfta. 

Same.    C6iabe;  tattowbe. . 

Sand.    (Xne-6ne;  (sandy)  6ne-6nefa. 

Sane  (healthy).    Moo6i. 

Sapless  (dry).    M6a  m6a. 

Sapling  (a  young  tree).    Ho61i. 

Satiate  (satisfied;  glutted).    Fioo;   (to  satisfy;  to  glut) 

fucca  fioo. 
Saucy.    Talaho6L 

Savour.    N6moo;  (savoury)  nAmoolilll. 
Saw  (the  carpenter's  instrument).    Gili. 
Say.    Lea;  b6a. 
Scab.    Picoo  he  p&lla. 
Scalp.    Gili  he  06I00. 
Scale  (of  a  fish).    O6no. 
Scamper.    Hawla. 
Scant  (near;  parsimonious).    Pepi'ne. 

n2 


6E  A 

Scanty  (narrow).     Low  chi. 

Scapula.    Hooi  f6hc :  from  kooi,  bone,  and/bke,  a  paddle. 

Scar  (of  any  kind),    Patoo. 

(from  a  wound  received  in  war).    PAtoo  be  ctfb. 
(from  a  wound,  not  received  in  war,  nor  by  any  war* 

like  instrument).    Patoo  be  lavea. 
(from  an  ulcer,  or  any  other  sore).    Patoo  ha  pills. 
Scarce  (difficult  to  be  procured).    Mow  gnati. 
Scarcity  (famine;  want  of  plenty).    Hotige. 
Scare.    Fucca  minavahl. 
Scarlet  (red).    Co61a-co61a. 
Scent  (smell ;  flavour).    Nanamom ' 
Scissars.    Hfle  c6chi. 

Scoff  (to  ridicule).    Mano6ki  •  (a  scoff)  the  4ame. 
Scold  (to  chide).    Towtea. 
Scoop  (a  wooden  instrument  used  to  bale  out  the  etjneas). 

Ohoo ;  (to  scoop)  the  same. 
Scorch  (to  barn).     V61a ;  (to  blight)  moho6noo. 
Scour  (to  cleanse).     H61o-h61o.  ' 
Scraggy  (lean j  thin).'  Tootooe. 
Scrape.    Vow ;  vow-vow. 
Scratch.    Mac6hi. 
Scream.  '  Calanga. 
Screen  (to  shelter).    Bo6i-booi. 
Scrub  (to  rub).    H61o-h61o. 
Scull  (cranium).    O6I00  b6co. 
Sea.    Tahi;  (the  wide  ocean)  mooana. 
Sea-gull.    Gn6ngo» 
Seaman.    Tot/. 
Sea-engagement.    Vehaca. 
Sea-shore.    Matta  he  tahi. 
Sea-sickness  (excessive  nausea).    L6a»16a j' (actual  vomit* 

ing)  lo6a. 
Sea-weed.    Li'moo. 


SHA 

Seam  (future).    To6i6nga. 

Sear  (to  burn ;  to  scorch).    Tootooi  (dry)  m6a-m6a. 

Search  (to  seek  after).    Go6mi. 

Season. .   Loiot6nga. 

Seat  (a  sitting  place).    Nofoinga;  (to  cause  any  one  to  sit) 
fucca-n6fo. 

Second.    He  oob. 

Secret  (hidden).    Foofoo';  (to  secrete)  the  same. 

Secure  (safe).    Mow ;  (to  secure)  fucca  mow. 

See  (to  behold).    Mamlta;  i'law. 

Seed  (of  plants).    Too'nga ;  (of  animals)  hi ;  vata. 

Seek..   Goo'mi. 

Seem  (to  appear).    B6he. 

Seine  (a  net).    Cobenga. 

Seldom.    Tai  fa;  L  e.  not  much. 

Select  (to  choose).    Fili  fili. 

Sell  (to  barter).    Fuccatorw. 

Semen  of  animals.    Hi;  vata. 

Send.    A've. 

Sense.    Loto. 

Sentinel  {a  guard).    L6e» 

Separate  (to  divide).    V6he. 

Sepulchre  (a  tomb).    Fytoca;  tano. 

Settle  (to  fix).    Notfo. 

Settlement  (place  of  abode).    Nofoanga. 

Seven.    Fi'too. 

Seventeen.    Ongofooloo  mail  too. 

Seventy.    Fi'too  ongofoo'loo. 

Several.    L6hi. 

Severe  (painful).    Mam&hi ;  (severely)  mfimahttngj*. 

Sew.    Tool 

Shabby  (of  mean  appearance).    Matta-maftta  t#o*;  (shab- 
bily) matta-matta  too'aa'nge. 


SHU 

Shade  (a  shadow).     Maloo ;  (to  put  in  the  shade)  fuoci 

maloo ;  (shady)  maloo-waloo. 
Shaggy.    Fooloo-fooloo. 
Shake.    Looloo-looloo. 
Shallow  (not  deep).    Mamaha. 
Sham.    LoTiL 

Shame.    Ma;  (shameless)  taj  ma. 
Share  (portion).    Inachi. 

— —  (to  portion  out).    Toofa ;  (a  part,  or  portion)  'wikbL 
Share-bone  (os  pubis).    Pali. 
Shark.    A'uga. 
Sharp.     Machila;  (to  sharpen)  fiicca  mitta;  fucca  nst- 

chi'la. 
Shatter.    Lytigi. 
Shave.    Tfle ;  i.  e.  to  scrape. 
Shelf  (a  board  to  pat  things  on).    Fate ;  (a  shallow )  maha- 

mfiha. 
Shell.    Gnedji. 
Shellfish.    Fagnawta. 
Shine.    Gnignila. 
Ship.    Vaca  papalangi;   (to  load  a  ship,  or  canoe)  foot 

vaca. 
Shipboard.    Gi  vica. 

Shiver  (to  shake,  or  tremble).   T6te-t6te;  (to  break)  fachi. 
Shoe  (or  sandal).    T6boo  vae*. 
Shoot.     F6nna. 

Shore  (beach).    Matta  he  tahi. 
Short.    N6n6;   (to  shorten)  fucca  n6n6;  (shortly)  vavr- 

£nge. 
Shoulder.    06ma. 

Shower  (a  fall  of  rain).    06ha;  (showery;  rainy)  oohait. 
Shriek  (to  scream).    Calanga. 
Shut.    Tabo6ni. 


-      SKI 

Sick.    Same  at  sickness. 

Sickness.    Boolo6hi,  t6nga-t£ngi,  mahigit  when  Tooitonga 
~  is  ill9  they  say  ha  is  boolodki:  when  any  other  chief  is 

ill,  they  say  he  is  tinga  tafngi:  when  any  one  not  a 

chief  is  ill,  they  say  he  is  mokctgL    The  word  boolo6hi 

is  confined  solely  to  Tooitonga. 
Sicken.    Fucca  mahagi. 
Side  (the  side  of  the  body).    Vara  vaca;  (the  side  of  any 

thing,  as  a  box  or  house)  b6too. 
Siege  (to  besiege).    C£pa. 
Sigh  (a  mark).    I16nga. 
Signiry.    Blhe. 
Silent.    L6ngo-16ngo. 
Similar.    Tattow. 
Since.    Tiloo. 
Sincere.    Mo6ni. 
Sinew.    Cal&va. 
Sinewy  (strong).    Mal6hL 
Sing.    HWa. 

Singe  (to  scorch).    Ho6noo;  ho6noo-ho6noo. 
Single  (alone).    T6ha  be;  (if  speaking  of  a  person)  t6c4 

t6h$be;  (unmarried)  t£i  ohina. 
Sink.    Gn&lo  hifo ;  i.  e.  lost,  or  disappeared  down  . 
Sip.    I'noo  fucca  chi-chi. 
Sister.    To6*-&fine. 
Sit.    N6fo|  (sit  as  men  do,  cross4egged)  ftccatane;  (as 

wonjen  do,  with  the  legs  doubled  up  on  one  side)  faite. 
Situation.    Atoga. 
Six.    Cno. 

Sixteen.    Ongofo61oo  ma  too. 
Sixty.    (Vno  ongofooloo. 
Siay  (glutinous).    BfgKbigi. 
Skilful    B6te. 


SLO 

Skin.    Gili ;  (to  pull  or  strip  off  the  •kin)  Utti. 

Skip  (to  mm).    H411a ;  (to  leap)  htto. 

Skirt  (edge).    Malta. 

Skirroishiog-party  (an  advanced  party  to  bring  on  the  en- 
gagement, by  encouraging  the  enemy  forward)  ;  fucca 
kow-tow,  from  Jucca  haw  he  tow  ;  i.  e.  make  come  the 
battle. 

Skittish  (startlish ) .    Mdnavahc  gnofooa. 

Skinny  (thin).    Tooto6e. 

Skreen  (to  shelter).     Boo/i  boo'i ;  (a  skreen)  tatt6w. 

Skulk  (to  hide).    T6Uto'i. 

Sky.    L&ngi. 

Slack  (loose).    Mov6te ;  Ui  mow. 

Slander.    Fucca  co'vi. 

Slap  (to  strike  with  the  open  hand).    Chibi. 

Slay.    Ta  m&e. 

Sleek  (smooth).    Molle-moWe. 

Sleep.    MoTie. 

Sleepiness.  Fia  molie;  (sleepy;  to  nod  with  sleep)  looli 
mo'he. 

Sleepless.     Tai  mo'he. 

Slender  (small,  thin).     Tootoo'e;  chino  chi. 

Slide  (to  slip).    Hcke-hcke. 

Slight  (small,  insignificant).     Momo'i ;  clii. 

Slightly  (a  little  ;  in  a  small  degree).     Fucca  chi.chi. 

Slim.     Chi'no  chi ;  tootoo'e. 

Sling.    M&cca  ta;  (to  throw  with  a  sling)  the  same. 

Slip  (to  slide  accidentally).     Taw  ;  heke. 

Slippery.     H6ke-h6ke. 

Sloppy  (wet).     Vicoo. 

Slothful.    Fucca  bico  bico ;  fucca  bibfco. 

Sloughy.    Gelea. 

Slow.     Toto'ca. 


SON 

Sluggish.     Bibico. 

Small.    Chi ;  oohigi :  the  latter  word  applied  chiefly  te  the 

young  of  animals. 
Smear  (to  bedaub).    Wni. 
Smell  (to  smell ;  the  act  of  smelling ;  to  give  out  a  good 

smell).    Nanaraoo ;  (to  give  out  a  bad  smell ;  to  stink ; 

a  stink)  naraooa/ ;  (to  smell  either  well  or  badly)  nSmoo  j 

(smell  of  flowers)  nafmoo  cacala. 
Smile.    Carta. 
Smite  {to  strike).    Ta. 
Smoke.    A'hoo. 

Smooth.    Molle-mo'lle. 

» 

Snap  .(with  the  Angers).    Fi'cbi. 

Snare  (to  entrap).    H&e ;  (a  trap  #r  gia  of  any  sort)  the 


Snatch.    Hamoo'chi. 

Sneeze.    Mafato(/a. 

Snore.    Tangoo/loo. 

Snout  (the  nose  of  any  animal).    Ilioo. 

Snug  (concealed).    To'i-to'i ;  foofoo'. 

So  (in  like  manner).     B6he. 

Soak  (to  steep  in  water).     Fu'cca  vy. 

Soar  (to  fly  aloft).    LoTa. 

Sob.     Fetatangi. 

Soft.    Moloo ;  (to  soften)  fucca  moloo. 

Softly  (quietly).    Lo'ngo-lo'ngoa'nge ;  (slowly)  toto'caa'nge. 

Sole  (of  the  foot).    TVboo  va'e. 

Sole  (only).    Ta'ha  be. 

Solicit  (to  beg,  to  request).    Cawle ;  (to  intreat  with  ear* 

neatness)  boo. 
Solid  (Arm,  hard).    Fefeca. 
Solve  (to  define).    Fucca  ma'oo. 
Some.     Nlhi;  mea. 
Son.    Folia. 


SPI 

Sonorous.    Ongo-cngo. 

Soon.    Va've. 

Soot.    ATioo;  (sooty)  ihooia. 

Soothe  (with  flattery).    Laboo;  vasia:  (to  quiet  a  child 

when  crying)  fucca  na. 
Sord  (grass-plot,  turf).    Moochie. 
Sordid  (covetous,  stingy).    Pepfne ;  ma'noo-ma'noo. 
Sore  (painful).    MaraaTri  -,  (sorely)  mama'hia'nge. 
Sort  (to  divide,  to  parcel  out).    Va'he. 
Sound  (whole,  healthy).    Mdool ;  (noise,  tone)  Cngo ;  (to 

measure  depth)  to'co. 
Soup  (fish  soup).    Vy-hoo'. 

Sour  (acid).    Malie-malie  ;  (sourly)  ma'hi-ma'hia'nge. 
Source.     IWboo-afnga ;  (tafeoo,  to  spring ;  *'*ga9  place).   . 
Sow  (a  female  pig).    Chfnamanoo. 
Sow  (to  plant).    Taw. 
Spacious  (wide,  extensive).    A't4. 
Spark:  (no  other  word  than  that  for  fire).    A'fi* 
Speak.    Lea. 
Spear.    Ta'o. 
Speckled.    Boo4e-boo1e. 
Spectre  (apparition,  ghost,  god,  or  supernatural   being). 

Hotoo'a. 
Speech  (talk).    Lea ;  (an  harangue)  mala'nga. 
Speechless.    Noa ;  tal  fa  lea. 
Speed  (speedy).    Va've ;  (speedily)  va'vea'ngc. 
Spew.    Loo/a. 
Spider.    A'anga;  hina. 
Spill  (also  to  pour).     Lili'ngi. 
Spine  (the  back  bone).    Hoofutoo'a;  (a  thorn,  prickle) 

ta'lla ;  (spinous)  talla-talla. 
Spiral  (curved).    Ta'cca  takky'. 
Spit  (to  expectorate).    A'noo ;  (spittle)  the  same* 
Spite.    Fucca  fa'chi. 


STA 

Splash.    Fucca-brni. 

Splay-foot.    Ve-ha1>e. 

Splinter.    Va  aco*w. 

Split  (to  divide).    Ftfii-fa'hi. 

Spoil  (to  plunder).    V6te ;  (to  injure)  mywmofw. 

Sponge.    Ca'na. 

Sport  (to  sport  in  a  playful  way).    Fucca  va. 

Sportful  (sportive).    Hooa. 

Spouse.    Oha'na. 

Sprain.    Fa'chi. 

Spread  (to  extend,  cover  over).    Fo4i ;  foffolla. 

Sprig.    Va  aco'w. 

Spright  (a  spirit,  an  apparition).    Hotoo'a. 

Spring  (to  grow).    Toot>oo ;  (to  jump)  ho^o. 

Springe  (to  catch  with  a  noose).    H6le. 

Sprout    TWboo. 

Spume  (froth).    Co'a ;  (to  spume)  fucca  co'a. 

Spurn  (to  kick).    A'ca. 

Spy  (to  discover).    Haw ;  (to  espy  land  at  a  distance)  gitc. 

Squab  (short).    Boo'goo  boo'goo. 

Squill  (to  scream).    Cala'nga;  (a  sudden  wind)  to*wfa; 

(squally)  havi'li. 
Squeeze  (to  press).    Tolo'mi;  (to  wring  out)  tow. 
Squint.    T6pa. 
Stab  (to  pierce).    Ho'ca. 
Stable  (fixed).    Mow. 
Staff  (also  a  short  pike) .    TVco-to'co. 
Stagnant.    Too  mow. 
Stain  (a  mark).    IU/nga;  (to  die)  too^goo. 
Stake  (a  post).    Bo ;  (to  pledge  for  a  wager)  beo'ta ;  (a 

pledge)  fucca  ky. 
Stale  (old,  long  kept).    Motoo'a ;  tai  fooo'. 
Stalk  (a  stem).    Cow. 


STI 

Stand  (to  be  on  the  feet).  Too:  (stand,  a standing  place) 
too'anga ;  too'nga ;    (standing,  fixed)  nofo  mow. 

Star  (either  a  fixed  star  or  planet).    Fetoo'. 

Stare.    JKo. 

Startle  (also  to  start).    Fu'cca  l£lle  rooooi. 

Starve  (to  death).    Ma'te  he  ho'nge. 

Starvation  (famine).    Ho'nge* 

Stationary  (fixed).    Mow. 

Stave  (to  break).     Fltchi. 

Stay  (to  remain).    N6fo. 

Stedfast.    Mow. 

Steal.    Kyh*. 

Steep  (to  soak  in  water).    Fiicca  vy. 

Steer.    0611i. 

Stem.    Cow. 

Stench.    ETio;  61o. 

Step  (gait).    T&i. 

Steril  (barren,  uncultivated).    Tai  moo6i. 

Stern  (in  look).  M6tta  m£tta  ita;  (of  a  navigating  vessel) 
tow  mooli. 

Sternly.    M&tta  m&tta  ita4nge. 

Sternum.     H061  fata  ftta. 

Stick.    Va  ac6w. 

Suck  (to  adhere).    Bigi  bigi. 

Sticky.    Bigi  bigi. 

Stiff.    Fefeca. 

jStill  (to  quiet).    Fucca  16ngo  16ngo. 

Still  (quiet).    L6ngo  longo  ;  (yet)  ge. 

Stillborn.    F&now  m£te ;  i.  e.  born  dead. 

Stinginess.    Pepi'ne. 

Stingray  (a  fish  so  called).    Fy. 

Stingy.    Pepi'ne. 

Stink.    Eho;  elo. 


STR 

Stir  (to  more,  to  buttle).    Gnaooe. 

Stitch  (to  sew).     T061. 

Stock  (to  lay  in  store).    Faooftgi. 

Stomach.    G6te. 

Stone.    M6oca ;  (stony)  mfecca-msxca ;  miccata. 

Stoop.    Bood6. 

Stop  (to  hinder).    T436. 

Stopple  (any  sort  of  cork).    Oom6chi. 

Storehouse.    F611i6oo. 

Storm  (a  tempest).     A'ffi. 

Story  (a  tale).    Fangnga;  t41an6a. 

Stoutly.    Mal6hi6nge. 

Stout  (strong,  powerful).    Mal6hi;  (stoutly)  malo'hi&nge. 

Stow  (to  pack,  or  lay  in  order).    Fiooigi. 

Straggle  (to  stray,  to  wander).    H6& 

Straight  (not  crooked )  direct).    Toto'noo. 

Straighten  (to  make  straight).    Fucca  toto'noo. 

Strain  (to  squeeze  out).    Tatto'w ;  (style  of  speaking)  16o. 

Strait  (narrow).     Low  chL 

Strand  (the  verge  or  shore  of  the  sea).    Matta  he  t&hi. 

Strand  (to  run  aground).    Fu'cca  to'ca. 

Strange  (uncommon).    G6he ;  (foreign)  moeti. 

Stranger  (a  foreigner).    Mooli. 

Strangle.    Nawgi'a. 

Stray.    H6e. 

Stream  (running  water).    Vy  taffe. 

Streamer  (a  flag).    Foo'ga. 

Streight  (a  narrow  passage).    A'va. 

Strength   (also  strenuous).    Malolu;    (strengthen)    fucca 

maJolji. 
Stretch  (to  draw  out).     Falof. 
Strew.    Fucca  ffile. 
Strife.    Ghe. 
Strike.    Ta. 


SUE 

String  (twine,  thread).  Fflo ;  (to  string  as  beadit  Ice.) 
tooi. 

Strip.    Facca  tflefoo'a ;  v6tq. 

Stripling  (a  youth).    Tima, 

Strive  (with  muscular  energy)  foo'te ;  (mildly,  or  with  men- 
tal energy)  alii  alii. 

Stroke  (a  blow).    Ta ;  (to  rub)  mili. 

Stroll  (to  wander).    Hft. 

Strong.    Malolii ;  (strongly)  malo'hia'nge. 

Struggle.    Foo'te. 

Stubborn.    Pagnata'. 

Stumble  (to  trip  up  in  walking).    Toogta. 

Stump  (of  a  tree).    Tefi'to  aco%. 

Stupendous  (astonishingly  so).    Fu'cca  ma'navaht ;  ry  gene. 

Stupid.    Lo'to  va'le. 

Sturdy  (hard,  strong).    FeflSca ;  malolii. 

Sty  (a  pig-sty),  Lo'toa  booa'ca ;  from  hto'm,  a  fenced  place, 
and  booafca,  a  hog* 

Style  (to  name).    Fu'cca  hingo'a. 

Subitaneous  (quick,  sudden).    Va*ve. 

Sublunary.    Ma'ma. 

Subsidy  (a  tax).    Fatongfa. 

Subsist.    M6oo/i. 

Substantial  (real).    Moo'ni. 

Subtle  (cunning).    Ma'tta  bote 

Successful  (fortunate).    Monooi'a. 

Such  (in  like  manner).    Blhe. 

Suck.     Mi'chi. 

Suckle.    Fu'cca  hooTioo. 

Sudden.  Fold  fa;  (sudden  death)  foc/a  mooo'i  fi'a;  i.e. 
entire  life  want. 

Sudorific.    Fu'cca  cateava. 

Suet  (of  a  pig).    A'lo. 


SUR 

Suffer  (to  allow).    Toogoo ;  (to  bear)  cata'gi. 

Sufficient.    Lalii. 

Sufficiency.    Lahi. 

Suitable  (fit).    Ala ;  fucca  tow. 

Suite  (attendants).    Cow  takanga. 

Sulky.    Matta  fta ;  matta  H12. 

Sully  (in  a  physical  sense).    Fucca  oo4i. 

Sultry.    Boobo6ha. 

Sum  (to  count).     Low. 

Suraiess  (not  to  be  counted).    Tai  fa  low. 

Summit  (of  a  mountain,  &c).    Fo6nga. 

Sun.    Ua. 

Sunburnt.    Gmtno. 

Sundry  (many).    Lahi. 

Sunless.    Tai  lit ;  m£loo. 

Sunny ;  Sunshine ;  Sunshiny.    L6i. 

Sunrise.    H6ngi-hengi. 

Sunset.  I'fi-kfi;  from  ifi>  to  blow,  and  <t/S9  fire;  because  in 
the  evening  hot  embers  are  brought  into  the  house 
from  which  torches  are  lighted  by  blowing. 

Superfluity.    T6c. 

Superfluous.    Tai  £oonga. 

Supine  (indolent).  Fucca  bico  bico;  (lying  with  the  face 
upwards)  tac6to  flicca  feoohigi. 

Supinely  (indolently).    Fucca  bico  bkotnge. 

Supper  (a  meal  in  the  evening).    Ky  fucca  ifi«6fi. 

Supplicate.    Hoo;  tangi;  caw'le. 

Suppose.    Belie. 

Suppress.    Lol6mi;  t&ifi. 

Suppurate.    Bela. 

Surcle  (a  shoot;  a  sprout,  &c).    H06U ;  to6boo. 

Sure  (certain).    T4i  hflla. 

Surge  (a  swelling  sea ;  a  surf).    Gniloo. 


SYM 

Surplus.    T6e. 

Surprise  (to  astonish).    Fucca  lflle  moooi. 

Surprising.    Fy  gghe. 

Surround.    F61i. 

Suspect    Mah&lo. 

Suspend  (to  hang).    Towtow;  (to  put  off)  lol6mi ;  Uiafi. 

Suspicious.    Mah61o-h61o. 

Sustain  (to  bear;  to  endure).    CatigT. 

Swagger  (to  bully).    Fucca  bo61a  m£tta. 

Swallow  (a  bird).    B6ca«b6ca;  (to  ingurgitate)  f61o. 

Swamp  (watery  ground).    A'no. 

Sward  (green  turf).    Moochie. 

Sway  (to  direct);    Bo61e. 

Swear  (to  declare  upon  oath).    Fo6a  diva. 

Sweat.    CacAva;  (sweaty)  cadi vaia. 

Sweep  (with  a  broom).    TftJUtiff. 

Sweepings  (rubbish ;  dirt).     Aw'ta  aw'ta. 

Sweet.    H060  melie. 

Sweeten.    Fucca  ho66  melie. 

Sweetheart.    Fe4oo4gi. 

Swell.    Boobo61a ;  foofo61a ;  (a  swelling)  the  same. 

Sweltry  (sultry).    Boobo6ha. 

Swelter  (to  be  uncomfortable  with  heat).    Fucca  boobo6ha. 

Swerve  (to  wander).     H6e. 

Swift.    V&ve ;  (swiftly)  v6ve6nge* 

Swim.    Caccow ;  (to  float,  as  inert  matter)  tee- tie. 

Swine.     Boo&ca. 

Swing.     Cdve-cdve. 

Swinish.     Fucca  boo£ca  :  this  word  also  means  on  all  fousfc 

Swoon.     Fo6amoo6ifi'a. 

Sword.     H61e  ta. 

Sycophantic.     Lalaboo;  vasia. 

Symptom,     llonga. 


Tea 


t. 


Tabefy  (to  waste  away  by  disease).    Fucca  tootoofc  he  mo- 
m6co. 

Tabid.    Tooto6e  he  motnoco. 

Tacit.    Lolongo. 

Tacitly.    L6ngo-16ngo&nge* 

Tackle  (the  rigging  of  a  canoe,  &c).    Cow  my'a. 

Tail.    I'goo;  mooi. 

Taint  (to  corrupt;  to  infect  as  flesh,  Jkc).    Fucca  6lo. 

Take  (to  appropriate,  or  seize  by  violence,  or  power  of  au- 
thority).   F*oo. 

Tale  (a  relation;  a  narrative).    Talanoa. 

Talk.    L6a. 

Talkative.    Gnootoo  low  j  fa  16a. 

Tall.    L6a-16a;  loloa;  (tallness)  the  same. 

Tallow  (fat).    Gn*co. 

Tame.    Lal£ta;  (to  tame)  fucca  lalfita. 

Tangle  (as  string ;  rope,  &c).    Fucca  filiL 

Tantamount.    Tattow. 

Tardy  (slow).    Tot  oca;  (tardily)  tot6ca£nge. 

Tarnish  (to  soil;  to  sully).    Fucca  o6lf. 

Tarry.    N6fo ;  tatAli. 

Tart  (sour).    M6he-m*he ;  (tartly)  m£he-m*he*nge. 

Taste  (flavour).    Hooo;  (to  taste)  ky. 

Tatter  (to  tear).    Mahiihti.     « 

Tattle.    Low  noa ;  lew  bisi. 

Tawny.    M6llo-mello. 

Tax.    Fatongia. 

Teach  (also  to  learn).    A'co. 

Tear  (water  from  the  eye).    To6ta>  he  mitta ;  (to  rend  m 
pieces)  mah£ih6i. 

Tearful  (weeping).    Tingi. 

Teat.    Hoohoo. 

vot.  II.  • 


THA 

Techy  (peevish ;  fretful).    M&tta  tingL 

Tedious.    Fucca  bibico ;  (tediously)  fucca  bibicofinge. 

Teem  (to  bring  forth  young)*    Ftnfrr* 

Teemful  (pregnant).    Fet£ma. 

Teemless  (iteril,  as  a  female).     Tai  fimiw;  (j*nm§ 

land)  tai  mooo'i. 
Tell.    Low;  t&a. 

Temper  (disposition  of  mind),    hoio\  ipgft. 
Tempest.    A'flu 

Tempestuous  (windy).    Havili-rili, 
Ten.    Qngofoofloo;  ooloo. 
Tenacity  (stiffness  in  opinion).    Gigihij  {tenacious)  1 


Tender  (easily  pained;  also  much  subject  to 

wounds).    B61e-Wle  gnldjl 
Tender-hearted.    Lo'to  lUle:   fafo,  mind,  or  difpttttieof 

lille,  good. 
Tendinous  (strong;  sinewy).    Malothi. 
Tendon.    Calava :  this  word  also  means  a  vein,  or  artery. 
Term  (to  name).  Fucca  hingo'a ;  (a  term*  or  name)  hingrtl 
Termination  (leaving  ofi,  or  end,  in  a  moral  sense;  as,  tbf 

termination  of  our  happiness  or  misery ;  also  the  act  of 

leaving  off,  or  finishing  any  work  or  labour),  HiliMfH 

too'gootoga* 
■  (an  end ;  boundary,  &c)«    M6tta, 

Termless  (boundless).    Tai  m&oo. 
Terrible.    Fucca  m£navah6  $  fueoa  migavacbi' j  ftcc*  Ult 

mooo'i. 
Territory.    Fonnoo'a. 
Terror.    M&navahl;  m&navachK, 

Testicle.    Fo'iliho, 

Tetter  (a  pimple).    Foo'a  foo'a. 

Than.    Gi. 

Thank  (to  give  thanks).    Fucca  fet&i. 


THO 


•»* 


Thatch.    Ato. 

The  (the  article).    He. 

Theft.    KyheA 

Their.    Now. 

Themselves.    Gi  ncirooa  be ;  gi  nowtoloo  be. 

They.    Gi  now'-ooa;  gi  now-toQoo. 

Then  (whilst;  during  the  time).    Loftote'nga. 

Thence.    Me  hena. 

There.    Gi-hena;  gi-ai. 

Thereabout  (near  that  place).    Oiatage  gfi  he. 

Thick   (in  bulk;  also  thick,  in  liquids;  i.  e.  tenacious). 

Matoloo. 
Thicken.    Fucca  matoloo. 
Thicket.    Va'oo. 
Thief.    JtfnakynsS. 
Thieve.    Kyh»/. 
Thievish.    Fa  kyha'. 
Thigh.    Tenga. 
Thin  (lean).     Toot 006;    (slender,  as  applied  to  beards. 

cloth,  &c  implying  the  proximity  of  the  opposed  sur* 

faces)  mani'fi ;  mani'fi-ni'fi. 
Things  (affiurs).    Mea. 
Itiinlf.    Manrttnifiafage. 
Think.    Mans/too. 
Third.    Toioo. 

Thirst.    Fia  inoo ;  (thirsty)  the  same. 
Thirteen.    Oagefooioo  ma  toleo. 
Thirty.    Toioo  engotWloo. 
This.    Coeni. 
Thither.    Gi  hena. 

Thorax  (the  front  part  of,  or  breast).    Fs/tafirYa. 
Thorn.    Talk ;  (thorny)  urikra. 
Thorough  (entire ;  whole)  cpfc/a.     • 
Though.    No  proper  word  for. 

02 


TIN 

Thoughtful.    Mana'too. 

Thoughtless.    Tai  mans/too. 

Thousand*    Mafao. 

Thread  (small  line,  or  string).    Filo;  (to  thread,  as  a 

needle)  tool.    ' 
Three.    Toioo. 

Three-score.  .  Toloo  gnaco'w ;  toioo  ongofboloo. 
Threshold  (a  doer).    Matapa'. 
Thrifty.    Fiicca  motoo/a  tanga'ta. 
Thrive  (to  grow,  as  a  plant,  or  animal).    Mooo/i. 
Throat  (the  neck).    Gifa. 
Throb  (to  palpitate).    Pa/too. 
Throttle  (the  windpipe).    Mofaga. 
Through  (from  end  to  end).    A'chi. 
Throw  (to  throw  with  force,  as  a  ball  or  stone).  Li'chi;  (to 

throw,  or  launch  a  spear)  v61o ;  (to  throw,  or  pitch  any 

thing  heavy)  tolo. 
Thrust  (to  stab).    Ho'ca;  (a  stab)  the  same* 
Thumb.    Motoo'a  ni'ma. 
Thump  (to  beat).    Ta. 
Thunder.    Ma'na. 
Thus  (in  this  manner).    Blhe. 
Thyroid    (cartilage  of  the   throat,   or  Pomum   Adami). 

Motoga. 
Tickle.    Ma6nne-6nne ;  (ticklish)  ma£nne  gnofoca. 
Tidings.     ODgo. 
Tie  (in  a  knot).    Naw;  (to  fasten)  fticca  mow;  (to 

or  tie,  by  winding  the  rope  round ;  to  seiae  in  the 

phrase)  lala'va. 
Tight.    Mow. 

Till  (to  cultivate  the  land).    Hoo'o;  gno'ooe. 
Time.    No  word  for. 
Timid  (timorous).    Ma'navabl gnofin/a. 
Tincture  (to  dye).    Too'goo. 


TOW 

Tiny  (little).    Momol ;  i'gi. 

Tip,    Mori. 

Tire  (to  fatigue).    Fucca  h£la;  fircca  bwfco;  (tiresome) 

fucca  bibi'oo-afnge. 
Titillate  (to  tickle).    Fucca  ma6nne;  (titfflation)  ma&ine? 

ma6nne*ma£nne. 
Title  (a  name).    Hingo'a ;  (to  name)  fucca  hingofe. 
Tittle-tattle  (to  talk  idly).    Low  bi«. 
To.    Gi. 
Toe.    Cow  vfc. 
Together.    F&cca  tiha. 
Toil  (to  labour).    Gnao6e. 
Token  (a  mark,  or  aign).    U6nga* 
To-night    Any'. 
Tongue.    Elllo. 
Tooth.    Nifou 
Tooth-ache.    Nifo  m&noo. 
Toothless.    Nffb-coo. 
Top  (summit;  surface).    Focnga. 
Topsy-turvy.    FiHIh. 
Torment  (pain).   Mamfthi ;  (to  torment,  or  give  pain)  fticca 

mamihi. 
Torrid  (burning).    Vfla. 

Tortoise  (sea).    F6noo  col6a ; /oaoo,  turtle ;  -cofeu,  riches. 
Tortoise-shell.    Oo'no. 

Tortuosity  (variously  turned,  or  twisted).    Miawt 
TotaL    Coto'a:  applied  either  to  single  or  plural  nouns,  in 

relation  to  mass,  bulk,  or  entire  quantity. 
Tough  (hard;  stiff).    Fdgca. 
Tow  (to  draw  forward  by  a  rope).    T6ho. 
Towards.    My;  a'teo;  a'ngi*  one  of  these  three  words  is 

used,  accordingly,  as  the  meaning  is  towards  the  first, 

second,  or  third  person;  at,  tap  my,  come  towards  me | 

Moo  dtoo  du»>  I  will  go  towards  you;  aUo  aigi,  go 


TUB 

toward*  him :  gi  is  another  word  for  towards*  ifld  atf 
be  used  without  any  modification,  whether  tufnuoll  • 
person  or  place* 

Towel  (a  piece  of  cloth  to  wipe  on)..   He'lo* 

Trace  (to  mark  oat).    Fu'eea  ile'ngt. 

Track  (path).    Haiku 

Trackless  (pathless).    Tal  haiku 

Trade  (traffic).    Fuccato'w. 

Traduce  (to  misrepresent).    Fucca  co'vi. 

Train  (to  bring  up).    Fafa'nga. 

Tranquil  (quiet;  still)  Lolotogo;  lofagO-Iofag*. 

Travel  (by  land).    Fono'nga ;  (by  aea)  fcloV* 

Trap  (to  ensnare).    H61e. 

Traverse  (crosswise).    Fucca  fetowla'gi. 

Tread.    Too. 

Tree.  Aco'w :  this  word  is  applicable  to  any  pkurt  tr  ve- 
getable. 

Tremble  (to  shake).    Tetemi;  t6te-t£te. 

Tremendous  (dreadful).     Fucca  ma'navahi* 

Tremulous  (trein')ling).     Tetemi;  t6te*t6t8. 

Trench  (a  ditch).     Gele. 

Tribute  (a  tax).     Fatongi'a. 

Trip  (to  stumble).    Toogi'a. 

Tripe  (entrails).    GnacoV. 

Trivial.     No'a. 

Trough  (also  a  bowl  of  any  kind).    Goomtte* 

Truce.    Fu'cca  lille'. 

Truck  (to  traffic).    FuccatoV, 

True.     Moo'ni ;  (truly)  moo'nia'oge. 

Truth.    MoVoi. 

Trundle  (to  roll,  or  bowl  along),    Teca. 

Trunk  (the  body  of  any  thing).    Chi'i 

Try.    A'hi-a'hi. 

Tuberous  (warty;  kaotty)*    Toofeg* 


Toft  (of  hair).    Tot*. 

Tug  (to  pull,  or  drag  with  force).    Tc/ho. 

Tumble.    Taw. 

Tumefy  (to  swell).    Foofbtte;  botibo&h. 

Tumid  (sweUed).    Foola. 

Tumult  (a  riot ;  a  quarrel).    Ghe. 

Turban.    Fow. 

Turmeric.    E'nga. 

Turn.    TafoTri. 

Tu*  (a  tooth).    MHb. 

Twelve.    Oogofoo  too. 

Twenty.    Ooa-fooloo ;  o</a  ongofooloo.    Tide  IWw. 

Twine  (to  twist).    Taeky*  t  fl. 

Twine  (thread,  &c).    Filo. 

Twinge  (to  pinch).    Low. 

Twinkle  (to  wink).   G&no;  (hi  the  twinkling  offtfteyi 

g6mo. 
Twirl  (to  spin  round).    VTlo. 
Twist.    Fi. 

Twitch  (to  snatch).    Hamocxchl. 
Twist  (between).    Gi  16to. 
Twofold    Oo'a. 


V. 


Vacant  (empty).    M£ha;  ma. 

Vacation  (leisure).    Notfbno'*. 

Vagrant  (wandering ;  unsettled).    Twi  a*fo  mow;  fcflod- 

Vale  (a  valley ).  Loo'-o. 

Valetudinarian.    Vy-vy  fmnWgi. 

Valiant  (valorous;  brave).    Ton. 

Vflltttbfe.    Mowgittti;l.e.d1m^tntt#bcdWained. 


Van  (the  front  of  an  army).    Moca  fcpr* 
Vanish.    Mawle. 

Vapour  (fume;  steam).     Cocolioo. 
Variable  (inconstant).    FealooafgL 
Vassal.    TWa. 
Vast.    LaTii  obito ;  foo  lalii. 
Vault  (to  leap).    Hcfbo ;  boo'na. 
Vaunt  (to  boast ;  to  brag).    Foo'ta. 
Veer  (to  turn  about).    Tafold. 

Veil  (to  cover  the  face).  Boolo' ;  (a  veil)  booloo-booloo. 
Vein.  Cala'va ;  i.  e.  a  blood-vessel,  eiiher  artery  or  vein. 
Velocity.    Va've. 

Venal  (mercenary).    Pepine ;  ma'noo  mafaoo* 
Vend.    Fu'ccato'w. 

Venemous  (deleterious).    Fucca  caw'na, 
Venery  (desire  of).    Fi'a  fei'chi. 
Venge  (to  revenge),    Sowi'a. 
Venom.    M£a  fucca  caw'na. 
Vent  (a  bole).    A'va. 

Ventilate  (to  fan).     Alo-alo,  .    (l 

Veracity.     Moo'ni. 
Verge  Cthe  edge).    Ma'tta. 
Verify.    Fu'cca  moo'ni. 
Verily.     Moo'niange. 
Veritable.    Moo'ni. 
Verity.    Moo'ni. 
Verse.    Taanga. 

Vestige  (a  mark  ;  a  sign).    IJouga. 
yestment,    Vala;  t6oo. 

Vex   (to  make  angry).    Fu'cca  ita;  (vexatious;  trouble- 
some) ma/ttaoo/chi. 
Ugly  (offensive  to  the  sight).    Fucca  lia-li'a. 
Ugliness.    Fucca  li'aJi'a. 
Vibrate     Tet6roi ;  this  word  also  means,  to  shiver,  or  shake 


UN.C 

Victory.    No  direct  word  for. 

Victuals.    Mea-ky :  mete,  things,  hf,  to  eat. 

View  (to examine;  to  see).  Mama/ta;  vackay;  (a  prospect) 

mama'ta. 
Vigilant.    Fa  16o. 
Vigorous.     Malcrtii. 
Vigour.    Malolii. 
Vilify  (to  defame).    Fu/cca  c6vi. 
Vindictive  (revengeful).     Fu'cca  fefchi-fachi. 
Virgin  (a  maid).    Tahi'ne. 
Visage  (countenance).    Malta ;  fofiraga. 
Viscerate.    Fu'cca  gna'cow. 
Viscous.    Bi'gi-bi'gi. 

Visible.    H6a  gnofoo/a ;  i.  e.  easy  to  be  teen. 
Vision  (a  dream).    Mfcfai. 
Vizard  (a  mask).    Boolo'. 

U. 

Ulcer.    PaOla. 

Ultimate.    Moo'i  obfto;  moola'nge. 

Unabashed.    Ta'i  ma. 

Unable.    Ta'i  fa. 

Unanimous.    Lo'to  fu'cca  talia. 

UnawecL    Tai  ma'navachi' ;  tai  ma'navahe\ 

Unattended.    Tc'cca  talia  be. 

Unbind.    V6te. 

Uncle.    Too'chhia. 

Unclean  (dirty).     Ta'i  ma. 

Unclose  (to  open).    Taw. 

Unclothe.    Vete. 

Uncommon.    Fy-gflie. 

Unconceived.    Tai  mah&lo. 

Unctuous  (greasy  with  fat).    Gnico. 


UNL 

Uncultivated.    Tii  gnoooefa. 

Undaunted.    Tii  m6n«acbi)  tti  maiumht. 

Under.     Gi  Ulo. 

Underneath.    Gi  lalo. 

i.  ■■..!.-:,. I,, ng  (true,  faithful).    Mooni. 

Undo  (to  take  to  pieces,  to  unfaaten).    Vete. 

Unequal.     Tii  ttttow. 

Unerring.     Tii  hilla. 

Uneven  (not  leral,  rough).     Til  m61le-m6Ue  j  papa**. 

Unexhausted.  Tii  6chi;  i.e.  net  ended;  tirimiha;  it 
an  emptied. 

Unfiuten.    Vete. 

Uniatigued.    Tii  bfla. 

Unfeigned.    Mo6ai. 

Unfold  (to  spread  out,  as  piatoo,  At)  FeOUa ;  (to  el- 
pound)  fucca  mi  oo. 

Unforbidden.     Gnofoo'a. 

Unfortunate.     Malala. 

UnfVequent.     G6he. 

Unfriendly.     A'nga  co'vi. 

Unfurl.     V€te. 

:      ...' :i. ■•■:■■ ;.     Ta'i  toll. 

Ungenerous.     Pep  inc. 

Unhealthy.     Malia'gi. 

Unheard.     Ta'i  o'ngo. 

Uniform  (alike).    Tattow. 

Uninhabited.     Ta'i  caky". 

Unjointed  (dislocated).     Fa'chi. 

Union.    Fucca  talia. 

Unite.     Fucca  talia. 

Unknown.     Ta'i  ilaw. 

Unlike  (dissimilar).     Tal  tattoV. 

Unlooae.    Vete. 

Unlucky.    Mala'ia. 


VOI 

Unmanly-    Ta'i  fu'cca  tanga'ta. 
Unmarried.     TVcca  be. 
Unmeet  (unfit,  unsuitable).     Ta'i  alia 
Unmerciful.     Tat  o'fa. 

I.  ;■..::  ■.     (llMU«).        Trfl  B>O0llgS. 

Unnumbered.     Til  low. 

Unobstructed.     Ta'i  ttlfi. 

Unobtained.    Til  me*. 

Unpminful.     Ta'i  maouVhi. 

Unpropitious.     Ta'i  monoola ;  mala'fa. 

Unravel.    Fu'cca  ma'oo. 

Unrelenting.    Ta'i  ofa. 

Unripe.     Moo'i ;  tal  momo'ho. 

Unroot,     TaSgi. 

Unsafe.     Tal  mow. 

Unseen.     Tal  flaw. 

Unaeparated  (together).     Facta  talia. 

Unskilful.    Ta'i  bo'tn. 

Unspoiled  (not  plundered).    Tai  veta ;  (tot  damaged)  tau 

mo'wmo'w. 
Unliable  (inconstant).     Fealoottgi;  tai  ntow. 
Unsteadfaat  (not  fixed).    Tai  mow. 
Unsuspicious.     Ta'i  mahaln. 
Untangle.    Vete;  facca  ma'oo. 
Unterrificd.     Ta'i  ma'navab£  ;  tai  manavachi'. 
Untie.    V«e. 

Untilted.     Tal  botfo ;  v^ooa. 
Untrue.     Lolti ;  tai  moo'ni. 
Untruth.    Lo-hi. 
Unveritable.   I^/hi ;  tai  rooo'ni. 
Unuseful.     Ta'i  a'oonga. 
Unwaahed.    Ta'i  foofno'loo ;  tal  paloo'too. 
Vociferous.    Longo'a. 
Vaice.     Lea. 


WAN 

Void  (empty;.    Ma'ha. 

Volcano.    Alofi'a. 

Voluntary.    Fy  teliha. 

Vomit    Loo'a. 

Voracious.    Hoo'o  ky. 

Voyage.    Felo'w. 

Up.    Ha'gi. 

Upbraid  (to  chastise,  to  rebuke).    Tow  tea. 

Upon.    Gi  foo'nga. 

Urethra.    Ma'tta  he  oole. 

Urine.    Mi'mi. 

Utility.    A'oonga. 

Useless.    Tai  aoonga. 

Utter  (to  speak).    Lea'. 

Utterly  (wholly).    Colo's  be. 


W. 


Waddle,    A1oo  fucca  tetemt 

Wade :  no  word  for,  except  caccow,  to  swim,  to  wash. 

Waft  (to  beckon).    Ta'loo. 

Wage  (to  lay  a  wager).    Fucca  boota ;  fuccatCw. 

Wager.    Boota. 

Wail.  Ta'ngi :  the  general  word  used  for  weeping  and  la- 
menting. 

Waist.    Chi'no. 

Wait.     Tatali. 

Wake  (to  cease  to  sleep).  A'a;  (to  rouse  from  sleep) 
fucca  a'a. 

Wakeful.    Leo. 

Waken.    Fu'cca  a'a. 

Walk.    Eta. 

'Wan  {pale).    M atta  tea. 


WEL 

Wander.    H& 

Wane  (to  get  less).    Ftrcca  chi. 

Want    Fi'a. 

War.    Tow. 

Warily.    Fu'cca  va'ckywnge. 

Warm.    Mafafana. 

Warmth.    Ma&'nna. 

Wash.    Foofooloo ;  paloo'too ;  cow-cow. 

Waste.    MowmoV. 

Watch  (to  keep  guard).    Leo. 

Watchful.    Faleo. 

Water.    Vy. 

Watery.    Vy. 

Wave  (a  billow).    Gnafloo ;  (to  beckon)  taloo. 

Way  (road).    Halla ;  (manner)  bthe. 

Waylay.    Tatta'oo. 

We.    Gimowtodoo ;  gitowtt/loo.    (See  the  Grammar). 

Weak.  Vy-vy;  (to  weaken)  fucca  vy-ry;  (weakly)  vy- 
▼yatoge. 

Weapon.    Mea  tow. 

Weary.    Bibi'co. 

Weather,  no  word  for :  (a  rainy  day)  a'bo  oo'har'a;  (a. sun- 
shiny hot  day)  alio  lafc ;  (a  windy  day)  alio  matato- 
gi,  Ac. 

Weave.    Lala'nga. 

Wed,  no  direct  word  for. 

Wedding  (the  mere  ceremony).    Twine. 

Weed.    Mohoc'goc£  (to  weed)  6boo ;  hoo'6. 

Weep.    Ta'ngi. 

Weight.  Mama'fa;  (weighty)  mamafk;  (weightily)  mamaf* 
faa'nge. 

Welcome  (interjection)    Malo ! 

Well  (for  water).    L6pa. 

Well  (in  health).    Mooo'i;  (weU  done)  mali'e. 


WIN 

West.    Tocalo'w. 

Wet.    Vi'coo. 

Whale.    Tofoa'. 

What  ?    Coiha  ?  (what  for ;  for  what  purpose)  co  com*. 

Wheedle.    Lalwo. 

Wheel  (a).    T6ka ;  (to  turn  round)  tack/. 

When  (during,  whilst).     Loloto'nga;  (when)?  anifer 

Where.    Gi-fc;  i-fe'. 

Whet  (to  sharpen).    Fu'cca  matta. 

Whetstone.    Foo'anga. 

Whimper.    Ta'ngi. 

Whisk.    Foofe. 

Whisper.    Fafafago. 

Whistle.    MsAo. 

White.    Hi'na-hPna;  *6a;  (to  whiten)  fttcca  Mtaa-lAa; 

(whiteness)  hina. 
Whither.    Gife. 
Whitish.    Hi'naphhiaa'nge. 
Who.    Coha'i. 
Wholely.    Coto'a. 
Whole.    Coto'a-be. 
Why.     Coiha'e. 
Wide.    At*. 
Widen.    Fu'cca  a'ta'. 
Wife.    Oha'na,  also  a  husband. 
Will  (volition).     Fy  teliha. 
Wilful  (stubborn).     C6no  gnatf. 
Wind  (the).    Mattagi;  (to  roll  up)  tacky'. 
Window.    Too'pa. 
Windpipe.    Mofaga. 
Windward.    Matta  he  matangi. 
Windy.    Havfli-vili. 
Wing.    Capaco'w. 
Wink.     G6m*. 


WRY 

Winnow  (to  fan).    A'lo-41o. 
Wipe.    HoMo-hrfo. 
Wish  (to  desire).    Ha;  holi. 
With.    Mo. 
Wither.    Mite. 
Within.    Gilo'to. 
Without  (outside).    Gitooto. 
Woman.    Fafitae. 
Womanish.    Fu'cca  fefrne. 
Wonder  (astnnisjhneut).    Fircce  leUe  mcWL 
Wood.    AcoV. 
Word  (no  direct  word  for). 
Work.    Gnaoo'e;  gno'ooe. 
Workman  (any  artificer).    Toofbo'nga. 
World,    Mama. 
Worldly.    Meamlma. 

Worm  (the  common  earth-worm).    Gele  mosvtoo. 
Worse.    Co*ri4nge. 

Wound  (in battle).   Cafe;  (a  hurt  frem  an  ulcer,  or  aeei* 
dent)  lare'a. 

Wrangle,    (to  quarrel).    Ghe. 

Wrap.    Fa'too-m'too. 

Wrath.    Lili,  ita ;  ( wrathful)  loto  Ma :  (wrathfuuy)  liliatoge, 
i'taa'nge. 

Wrathless.    Tali'ta. 

Wreak  (to  revenge).    Sowa'gi. 

Wreath.    Twfoga. 

Writhe  (to  distort  or  twist  the  body).    Mis/wi. 

Wrestle.    Fungatoob. 

Wrong.    Ha'Ua. 

Wring.    To'wtcw. 

Wrist  (no  direct  word  for). 

Wry.    Bfco. 


YOU 

Yam.    Ocfi. 

Yawn.  This  word  is  forgotten. 

Yawning  (sleepiness).    F?a  nu/he. 

Yean  (to  bring  forth  young).  Fanow. 

Year.    Tow, 

Yell.    Cala'nga;  iolio. 

Yellow.    Mello ;  this  word  also  implies  light  brown. 

yellowish.    Mello-m&lo. 

Yelp  (like  a  dog).    Calo*. 

Yes.    Io. 

Yesterday.    An&fi. 

Yesternight.    Anibo'. 

Yet.    Ge ;  (not  yet)  tegichr'. 

Yonder.    Gi  hena. 

Yore.    Goo'a  io'a. 

You.    Mo;  coy;  aco'y.     (See  the  Grammar). 

Young  (youthful,  not  old).     Moo'i ;  (the  offspring  of  any 

animal)  oohi'gi. 
Your.    Ho. 


TONGA  WORDS  NOT  INSERTED,   OR  NOT 
SUFFICIENTLY  EXPLAINED. 


A  E  N— E  O  O 

Aena.    This  word  also  signifies  he,  she,  it. 

Alo.    This  word  means  also  to  paddle  in  a  canoe. 

Angy-be.    Peculiar  to. 

Ca.    This  word  also  signifies  whilst.    See  cowca. 

Canaify !    To  be  sure !  certainly  S 

Cani.    If;  in  case  that,  (used  only  in  respect  to  time  past). 

Chia»    Good :  this  word  is  mostly  used  ironically  for  bad 

or  indifferent. 
Chiodcfa.     A   term  of  friendly  salutation  derived  from 

* 

chiatooofa;  i.  e.  small  towards  you  (my)  love,  mean- 
ing, by  antiphrasis,  my  love  towards  you  is  great;  or 
from  chi  0CQO  of**  small  my  love.  It  is  also  a  term  of 
pity ;  as,  poor  fellow  i 

Co*    This  word  also  signifies  uncircumcised. 

Coeha'  >    What. 

Coefaa.    This  word  also  signifies,  he,  sie,  it. 

Cow-mya.    Cordage;  tackle  of  a  canoe. 
.  Cow-oofi,    A  parcel  of  yams,  twenty  in  number..— Probably 
a  corruption  of  oofi  4ecow9  a  score  of  yams. 

Cow-tow.    A  body  of  warriors ;  an  army. 

Cow-vaca.    The  crew  of  a  vessel. 

E'ooager.    Wait ;  stop  till— used  only  in  an  imperative  or 
precative  sense,  as ;  tooager  how  ia,  wait  till  he  come. 

VOL.  II.  p 


F  A  E— T  A  N 

Fa'ele.    Parturition ;  childbirth ;  also  the  period  of  coo* 

finement. 
Fa'iva.    Knack ;  dexterity ;  sleight  of  hand. 
Fela.     To  effect ;  to  do ;  corrupted  from^/y,  to  do ;  w,  it. 
Fota.     The  ceremony  of  pressing  a  chiefs  foot  upon  the 
belly  of  a  person  tabooed.     This  word  is  also  applied 
to  their  particular  mode  of  compressing  the  skin  to  re- 
lieve pain. 
Fucca-he*.    To  frighten  away* 
Fucca-ky.     This  word  means  also  the  bet .  or  stake  in  a 

wager. 
Gnaho'a.     A  pair ;  a  couple* 
Gna'le.     Consistent  with  ;  suitable. 
Gena'oo.     Hundreds :  the  plural  of  feovo,  a  hundred. 
Hege/mo.    This  word  also  signi6es,  in  the  twinkling  of  an 

eye,  (literally,  the  eyelash). 
Helala.    Fruit  of  the  tree  so  called,  used  as  necklaces. 
Ho-Egi.     Literally,  your  chiefs,  or  your  chiefship ;  a  title 

of  address  to  a  noble.     See  p.  142. 
Linga.     A  vulgarism  for  the  male  organs  of  generation. 
Loa'ta.     The  large  black  ant. 
Mo-ooa,  and  mo-toloo.     Used  instead  of  gimoooa  and  gimo- 

tohoy  after  the  preposition  ma. 
Mow-ooa,  and  mow-toloo.     Used  instead  of  gmawooa  and 

gimowtoloo,  as  above. 
Nava.     Glans  penis. 

Noa-ai-be.     In  vain ;  un6xed  ;  unsettled ;  to  no  purpose. 
Now-ooa,  and  now-toloo.     Used  instead  of  ginawooa  and 

ginowtoloo,  after  the  preposition  ma. 
Omy',  (from  omi  my').     To  bring  here. 
Seooke'le !     See  seooke. 
Tafanga-fanga.     The  plains  or  open  country. 
Tango.    To  wander  by  night ;  to  lie  in  wait  for. 


T  E  C— T  O  W 

Teca. .  This  word  also  means  the  string  of  a  bow. 
Tenga-taogi.     Sickness :  (this  word  is  only  used  in  respect 

to  cniefs,  bnt  Tooitonga  is  an  exception.    See  boo- 

looki), 
Tocooa.    This  word  is  only  used  in  junction  with  coeka, 

what  ?  as,  coeka  tocoo'a,  what  do  you  say. 
Tooange.    Standing  against. 
Tooboo-ange-co.    To  become  like. 
Tow.    To  wage  war;  in  a  state  of  war:  this  word  also 

means  the  enemy. 


THE  xmd. 


ERRATA. 

Vol.  I.  p.  139, 1.  11.    For  ?'*«*>»  (aunt)  read  (Rnoufs  aunt). 

p.  146, 1.  12.    For  tat  read  Uoo. 

p.  151,1.8.    For  to  it  read  to  ttt  inamvenienccM, 

p.  330, 1.  27.    Before  every  mm  inert  okmtt, 

p.  410, 1.  12.    For  would  read  could. 

p.  459, 1.  1 .    For  or  read  nor. 
Vol.  IL  p.  36,  lines  9  and  12.    For  toogo  read  toogoo. 

p.  87, 1.  J  7.    For  Uattly  read  leatt. 

p.  138,  last  line.    For  only  read  particularly, 

p.  139, 1.  1 .    For  not  read  scarcely  to  thou. 

p.  327, 1.  5.    For  tight  read  eighty. 

p.  247, 1.  17.    Omit  the  colon  after  the  word  respiration. 
Ibid.  1.  29.    for  orro%o  read  stem. 

p.  906,  L  16.    For  tfcem  read  (fey. 

p.  382,124.    Omit  the  semicolon  after  the  word  walking. 

p.  394,  paragraph  1 1.    Wherever  the  word  molo  occurs  omit  the 
comma  after  it 

p.  403, 1.  1 6  of  the  Tonga.     For  gitowloloo  read 
Ibid.    1.  22.     For  ootoo  read  oota, 

p.  406,  last  line.     For  faooa  read/aw. 

THE  VOCABULARY. 
Verb.  A,    After  person*  read  or  placot. 
Verb.  Atoo,  towards.    For  tatrd  read  second. 
Verb.  Cobechi.     For  workes!  read  emftroiderea*. 
Verb.  OoioMgt.    As  another  signification  insert/ermcr. 
Verb.  Tai'jvccarilong*.    For  with  read  without. 


* 


T.  Davison,  Lombard-street, 
Whitefriars,  London. 


i  ■ 


•       » 


•  » 


s  . 


I  . 


•      • 


•■     t 


7 


*  . 


t 


»  I 


MAY  2  6  1950